CS500 O M Manual Rev 0

CONSEP ACACIA CS500 DISSOLUTION &
ELECTROWINNING MODULES
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PREPARED FOR: NICOZ RESOURCES S.A.

SAN ALBINO PROJECT
CONSEP REFERENCE NO: C22600
REVISION 0
CONSEP PTY LTD | ACN: 053 177 898 | sales@Consep.com.au | www.Consep.com.au

PO Box 6625, Wetherill Park, NSW 1851
Sydney | 59 Newton Road, Wetherill Park, NSW 2164 | T: +61 2 9756 5299
Perth | Unit 3, 8 Fisher Street, Belmont, WA 6104 | T: +61 8 9477 6777
Proprietary and Confidentiality Statement
This manual and all later refinements and amendments (collectively, “Manual”) contain intellectual property,
technical know-how, and other highly confidential information that are proprietary to Consep Pty Ltd. This Manual
and related documents is for confidential use only and is the property of Consep Pty Ltd. For that purpose, you
may disclose and distribute this Manual to persons in your organisation and others retained by you to evaluate its
contents. However, no part of this Manual can otherwise be disclosed or distributed to others or quoted, copied
or reproduced in any form for any purpose without Consep’s prior express written permission. All rights reserved.
Possession neither confers nor transfers any rights which may be detrimental to our interests.
Revision Log
Version Date Responsible Description
Rev 0 30th July 2020 Nick To OM Generated
Page 2 of 33
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents ............................................................................................. 3
1. SAFETY ........................................................................................................ 5
CONSEP ACACIA SPECIFIC SAFETY ...................................................................................... 5
GENERAL SAFETY ............................................................................................................... 7
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ........................................................................................................... 8
TEN COMMANDMENTS OF SAFETY ........................................................................................ 8
2. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 9
WHAT IS THE CONSEP ACACIA DISSOLUTION MODULE? ......................................................... 9
WHAT IS THE ELECTROWINNING MODULE? ........................................................................... 9
3. INSTALLATION .......................................................................................... 10
MECHANICAL .................................................................................................................... 10
VALVES ............................................................................................................................ 10
ELECTRICAL ...................................................................................................................... 10
REQUIRED SERVICES ........................................................................................................ 10
4. OPERATION ............................................................................................... 11
REMINDERS & CAUTIONS ................................................................................................... 11
Reagents ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................... 12
Water Supply ................................................................................................................................................ 12
Heaters (if installed) ..................................................................................................................................... 12
Storage ......................................................................................................................................................... 12
PROCESS STAGES ............................................................................................................ 13
Concentrate Transfer to Module ................................................................................................................... 13
Stratification of the Concentrate ................................................................................................................... 13
Desliming of the Concentrate ....................................................................................................................... 13
Mixing of Leach Reagents ............................................................................................................................ 13
Leaching of the Concentrate ........................................................................................................................ 14
Pregnant Solution Recovery......................................................................................................................... 14
Discharging of the Leach Residue................................................................................................................ 15
Pregnant Solution to Electrowinning............................................................................................................. 15
Electrowinning .............................................................................................................................................. 15
TYPICAL SETPOINTS .......................................................................................................... 16
Flow / Time Setpoints ................................................................................................................................... 16
Page 3 of 33
Leach Reagent Amounts .............................................................................................................................. 16
CONCENTRATE VOLUME DETERMINATION ........................................................................... 17
Concentrate Volume Determination with Optional Hopper Weight Transmitter ............................................ 18
CIRCUIT OPTIMISATION ...................................................................................................... 19
Increasing Leaching Rates ........................................................................................................................... 19
5. MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................... 20
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................... 20
Daily ............................................................................................................................................................. 20
Weekly.......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Monthly ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
3 Monthly ...................................................................................................................................................... 21
12 Monthly .................................................................................................................................................... 21
REPAIR & OVERHAUL ........................................................................................................ 22
Procedure For Valve & Pump Servicing. ...................................................................................................... 23
Leach Line & Diffusion Cartridge Flushing Procedure .................................................................................. 23
Electrowinning Line Flushing Procedure ...................................................................................................... 25
Removal of Consep Acacia Diffusion Cartridge. .......................................................................................... 26
Replacing of Consep Acacia Diffusion Cartridge.......................................................................................... 26
Leachaid Feeder Maintenance Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 27
6. GA DRAWINGS .......................................................................................... 28
7. P&ID & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ............................................................. 29
8. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................... 30
9. CONTROL MANUAL ................................................................................... 31
10. SPARE PARTS LIST ................................................................................... 32
11. SUB VENDOR INFORMATION.................................................................... 33
Page 4 of 33
1. SAFETY
CONSEP ACACIA SPECIFIC SAFETY
The operation of the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module

involves the use of concentrated sodium cyanide (NaCN),
caustic soda (NaOH), and sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl)
solutions, and as such extreme caution is required with
operation of the system.
Consult the SDS to assess risks in the workplace.
Report any leaking valves or other fittings as soon as
noticed, all leaks should be fixed immediately. Leaking
leach solution is a significant hazard.
Sodium hypochlorite solution is the main constituent of
commercial bleach and is commonly added to swimming
pools. It is a strong oxidising agent.
Ensure that Sodium Hypochlorite is stored and handled in
accordance with the supplier’s Safety Data Sheet.
Only personnel trained in the safety procedures for the

Consep Acacia Dissolution Module, including cyanide
handling, emergency procedures and cyanide exposure
symptoms should be allowed to work on or around the
Module. Limit access to authorised personnel only.
Adequate ventilation of the Dissolution Module area is

required, as at the concentrations of NaCN & NaOH used,
there will be an equilibrium concentration of HCN formed if
no ventilation is present.
Vessels covered and fitted with an extraction system or
open vessels with forced fume hood type extraction
systems are recommended. Alarms MUST be interlocked to
operation of extraction system, warning of extraction
system failure.
Page 5 of 33
When batching the leach solution it is ABSOLUTELY
ESSENTIAL that the pH of potable water is raised to above
10.5 via the addition of Caustic Soda (Sodium Hydroxide)
prior to adding Sodium Cyanide (NaCN, in concentrated
liquid or solid form). Addition of NaCN directly to water
without prior increasing of pH to a level above 10.5 may
result in the hydrolysing of CN- and the formation of high
levels of HCN gas and an extremely dangerous situation
possibly resulting in death.
It is recommended that a fixed HCN vapour monitor is

installed at a location at the nearest operator exposed
access point, with relays to an audible alarm for HCN levels
above 5 ppm. At an absolute minimum, operators must
wear personal HCN monitors.
All motors must be electrically isolated or ‘locked out’ prior

to any maintenance activities being conducted on, or
around, the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module.
Safety eyewear should be worn at all times in the vicinity of

any and all Consep Acacia equipment or components.
Chemically resistant gloves for the appropriate medium

should be worn at all times in the vicinity of any and all
Consep Acacia equipment or components.
Page 6 of 33
Foot protection should be worn at all times in the vicinity of
any and all Consep Acacia equipment or components
A safety helmet should be worn at all times in the vicinity of

any and all Consep Acacia equipment or components
GENERAL SAFETY
• Read and understand each of the warning, cautions and instructions in the operator's manual and on
signs fixed to the equipment.
• Report all accidents, immediately to your supervisor. Consult a doctor or medical facility as soon as
possible if personal injury is involved.
• Keep a list of emergency telephone numbers close to the telephone and instruct all work area personnel
as to the location of the list,
• Do not operate or work around equipment whilst under the influence of alcohol, medicines, tranquillisers
or other drugs that can make you less alert or affect your judgement.
• Wear safety glasses, whenever there is any danger of flying debris, chips, objects or dust. Be extra
safe - always wear eye protection,
• Keep the general work area clean and free of debris
• Keep safety equipment in a designated place and ensure that all personnel know the location and the
proper use of the safety equipment.
• Do not allow unskilled persons to start or operate any equipment without the proper Supervision of a
skilled operator.
• Do not work on equipment while it is in operation, Perform all required inspection, maintenance,
lubrication or adjustments before starting or operating the equipment, or after the equipment is shut
down. Use extreme caution during inspection, maintenance, lubrication or adjustment procedures.
• Perform all inspection, maintenance, lubrication and adjustments with caution in accordance with
manufacturers recommended procedures.
Page 7 of 33
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
• Permit only licensed electricians to work on electrically live parts or any plant or equipment
• Always assume that an electrical circuit is live until it is proven dead by proper testing procedures
• Lockout and tag electrical / mechanical controls before performing any inspection, maintenance,
lubrication or adjustment procedures.
• Repair or replace electrical wires, cables and connectors that are frayed, cut, broken or damaged in any
way.
• Check that electrical ground wires, motor plugs and power cable connections are properly and securely
connected before starting any equipment.
• Never work on electrical equipment while it is running or while standing in water or on wet surfaces
unless you know that the power is disconnected.
• Be alert when working around or with electricity. Report any electrical hazard immediately to your
supervisor.
TEN COMMANDMENTS OF SAFETY

• Support efforts to make your workplace safe and healthy. Do your part; observe safety regulations and
established work practices.
• Act responsible and with concern for the safety of others, as well as your own.
• Check all tools and protective equipment frequently, to make sure they are in safe working order.
• Educate yourself and others in the hazards associated with your job and the safe ways to perform
familiar tasks.
• Ask others how to perform tasks with which you are unfamiliar. Playing it "by ear" can lead to costly
accidents.
• Think over any potential accident and injury possibilities before starting on any project. Take appropriate
precautions to protect yourself and others.
• Warn others of the possibility of accidents and injuries if you see them working unsafely or creating
potential hazards.
• Stay alert for changes in work conditions made in the work process.
• Report unsafe acts and conditions immediately to your supervisor. Don't assume that someone else will
do it.
• Keep your work area clear. Keep tools and materials picked up and properly stored,
Page 8 of 33
2. INTRODUCTION
WHAT IS THE CONSEP ACACIA DISSOLUTION

MODULE?
The Consep Acacia Dissolution Module is a system in which the Consep Acacia Process (leaching of high gold
grade gravity concentrates, primarily Knelson Concentrator concentrates) takes place. The Module allows this to
be accomplished with very high efficiency with very low operation and maintenance requirements.
The batch process is based around the leach reactor vessel, a fluidised bed that enables the very efficient
dissolution of the gold.
WHAT IS THE ELECTROWINNING MODULE?

The gold bearing solution generated by the Acacia (referred to as pregnant solution) is transferred to the
Electrowinning Module. The Electrowinning Feed Solution Tank collects the pregnant solution which will be
cycled through the electrowinning (EW) cell. In the EW cell, a current is passed from inert anodes, through the
electrolyte containing the metal ions to be “won”, to cathodes. The metal ions (which are predominantly gold) are
reduced at, and deposit on, the cathode surface. The concentration of gold in solution is typically reduced to less
than 10ppm over the course of a day and is then referred to as Barren Solution. The precious metal deposit is
manually removed from the EW Cell, typically after accumulating for a number of cycles.
Page 9 of 33
3. INSTALLATION
MECHANICAL
Consep Acacia Dissolution Module and Electrowinning Module are shipped partially assembled to allow for
transport dimension restrictions. The equipment is to be assembled as per the supplied general arrangement
drawings. The skids/tanks require levelling and grouting.
The Consep Acacia Module must be installed level to 2 mm as measured at the Consep Acacia Cone overflow
lip. Upon locating the Module, the level is to be adjusted with levelling shims before final installation and grouting
of footings.
All flanges (including the lid) on both the horizontal circular and vertical straight sections of the Consep
Acacia Reaction Tank and the lids of the Solution Tanks must have an approved sealing compound (e.g.
Silastic Silicone Sealant) applied prior to assembly of these components, and in addition to any gaskets
provided, to ensure flange sealing.
VALVES
The Consep Acacia Dissolution Module and Electrowinning Module are fitted with Burkert Valves.
All Burkert butterfly valves are fitted with Actuated Spring Return (SR) valve actuation. All pneumatic actuators
on butterfly valves (butterfly valves only – not ball valves) require a “travel stop adjustment” after installation and
prior to operation. This adjustment is not typically carried out during testing as the valve could potentially sit idle
and dry for a prolonged period before installation / commissioning, potentially causing damage to the valve seat
due to the actuator spring pressure.
Please refer to the vendor data section in this manual for the Travel Stop Adjustment procedure.
ELECTRICAL
The electrical controls (if supplied) are to be terminated as per the supplied wiring schematics.
REQUIRED SERVICES
The Acacia reactor requires the following services:
• Potable water: For leach reagent make up
• Raw (or potable) Water: For solids desliming
• Electricity: Operation of drives and heaters
• Sodium Cyanide solution (>4%): Reagent Make up
• Sodium Hydroxide solution: Reagent Make up
• Instrument Air (for automatic units): Operation of automated valves
Page 10 of 33
Quantities of the services are specific to each Acacia Reactor installation and are detailed in the following table.
Service Peak qty / flow Total qty / flow
Potable Water 108 𝑚3 /ℎ𝑟 1000 L
Raw Water 6.5 𝑚3 /ℎ𝑟 8000 L
Dissolution Power 480V, 60Hz, 51 Amps
Electrowinning/Detox/Barrens Power 480V, 60Hz, 41 Amps
NaCN solution (30%) 82 Litres
NaOH solution (1000 g/l) 7 Litres
Instrument Air 600-700kPag
Plant Air 600-700kPag
4. OPERATION
Operation of the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module is relatively simple; however awareness of some
fundamental concepts will ensure safe, efficient operation of the Module.
REMINDERS & CAUTIONS
REAGENTS
The operation of the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module
involves the use of concentrated sodium cyanide (NaCN) and
caustic soda (NaOH) solutions, and extreme care is required
with operation of the system.
Correct batching of reagents is essential. For details of the

procedure to be followed please refer to Leach Reagent
Amounts & Mixing of Leach Reagents
Adequate precautions should be taken at all times while

operating or working on or around the Byproduct Treatment
Module due to the presence of Sodium Cyanide, Sodium
Hydroxide and Sodium Hypochlorite. Maintain ventilation of
the vessels and the surrounding area.
Page 11 of 33
WIRING
To prevent personal injury or damage to the equipment:
o All wiring connections must be properly isolated

o Be sure that voltage and wiring are correct and match
the nameplates on pump motors
o All drives are to be isolated and locked out before
working on the components
o Failure to comply with these warnings could void the
warranty.
WATER SUPPLY
There are two water requirements for the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module:
• Potable grade water is necessary for reagent solution make up, and barren solids washing. This stage
requires good quality water due to interferences in leaching and subsequent electrowinning from ions in
solution with low quality water.
• Normal plant process water is used for the stratification, desliming and barren solids discharge stages. It
is not necessary for water used for this stage to be high quality, however it is not recommended that
water with significant solids loadings be used as plugging & channelling of the diffusion bed may result.
Less than 250mg/L TSS is recommended.
HEATERS (IF INSTALLED)

Adequate solution volume must remain in the heated tanks to completely submerge the solution heaters when
the heaters are operating. Failure to completely submerge the heater during operation will result in rapid heater
failure.
If automatic level control is used, interlocks to low level

should shut off the heater.
During a leach cycle, evaporation may lower the solution level, as necessary make-up water may then be added
during the leach to maintain the level above the heater.
STORAGE
When the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module and Electrowinning Module are shut down and/or stored for
extended periods of time, the tanks and Consep Acacia Reaction tank should be completely drained of liquid,
and any residual solids flushed from the tanks. Pumps should also be flushed & drained. Before re-starting, the
diffusion Cartridge should be inspected for any blockages or other possible causes of channelling.
Page 12 of 33
PROCESS STAGES
The Consep Acacia Dissolution Module and Electrowinning Module are designed to operate as a series of
discrete stages, with each step being easily manually controlled or automated by the necessary controls. Please
refer to the attached functional description for full details of the controls of each stage.
CONCENTRATE TRANSFER TO MODULE

The concentrate to be transferred to the Consep Acacia is first collected in a concentrate hopper which is
generally located directly above the Consep Acacia.
Direct impingement of the incoming concentrate on the diffusion screen will cause premature screen wear and
blockage of the diffusion media. It is therefore necessary that a depth of water of approximately 500 mm is
present in the reactor prior to transfer to break the incoming material velocity.
STRATIFICATION OF THE CONCENTRATE

The purpose of this step is to separate particle sizes within the Consep Acacia to assist in achieving most
efficient fluidisation in the tank. This is achieved with a water flow ~ 20% higher than the desliming flow.
Water is injected to the Fluid bed body and is evenly distributed across the cross-sectional area of the Consep
Acacia by the diffusion Cartridge. Because of the diminishing upward velocity (due to increasing cross-sectional
area at increasing heights), there will be segregation in particle size dependent upon the settling velocity of each
particle.
As the stratification flow is greater than the desliming flow, if the Consep Acacia overflows with this water flow,
flushing of oversize particles will result. It is therefore important that the stratification flow is stopped before the
commencement of reactor overflow.
Please refer to: Flow / Time Setpoints for details of the stratification flow setpoint.
DESLIMING OF THE CONCENTRATE

The purpose of this step is to remove ultra fine slimes from the system that cause downstream problems with
electrowinning as well adversely affecting the draining of the solids in later stages. The desliming flow setpoint is
maintained for a period of time necessary to remove the fines for the subsequent leach.
Please refer to Flow / Time Setpoints for details of the deslime flow setpoint and time.
MIXING OF LEACH REAGENTS

This stage occurs simultaneously to the stratification and desliming steps. Its purpose is to mix the reagents
required for the leach process. This step is a batching process controlled by the volume of reagents added to the
Solution tank.
It is ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL that the correct batching

procedure is followed. Failure to follow the correct procedure
may result in the low pH conditions and the formation of
elevated levels of Cyanide Gas (HCN).
The correct batching procedure is as follows:

1. Necessary volume potable water is added to the Solution tank
2. Required mass of Caustic (NaOH) – in concentrated solution or solid form, followed by mixing to raise
the pH of the solution above 10.5
Page 13 of 33
3. Required Mass of sodium cyanide (NaCN) – recommended as a concentrated solution with >4% w/v
strength. Followed by mixing of the solution.
4. Gradual addition of leach accelerant (LeachAid) in granular form while mixing of solution to ensure
complete dissolving.
Please refer to: Leach Reagent Amounts for details of the typical batch reagent volumes
It is recommended that the total leach solution volume used be such that a nominal final gold concentration of 10
g/l is not exceeded. Concentrations above this level may restrict the dissolution of gold due to saturation of the
solution, especially if elevated leach temperatures are not used.
Once the leach solution is above the minimum heater height (during batch addition), heating of the solution (if
supplied) may commence to raise the leach solution to the operating temperature.
LEACHING OF THE CONCENTRATE

This stage carries out the actual dissolution of the gold into the leach solution. Leach solution is circulated
through the Consep Acacia by feeding to the base of the tank then flowing upwards through the settled
concentrate, the overflow then returns to the Solution tank to complete the recycle.
The leach flowrate is slightly lower (10-20% lower) than the desliming flowrate to avoid the circulation of any
solids, while still fluidising the solids to achieve the necessary solid – liquid mixing to achieve effective leaching
of the gold.
If leach solution fails to flow out of the internal Acacia overflow launder back into the Solution Tank
during the leaching process, then the rise in solution level detected by the Acacia level transmitter
(LIT12) will trigger a high level shutdown alarm.
The Solution tank immersion heater regulates the temperature of the leach to the operating temperature to
achieve increased dissolution rates.
The system is designed for a maximum temperature of 70° C.
This temperature is not to be exceeded
PREGNANT SOLUTION RECOVERY

The purpose of this stage is to transfer the pregnant solution remaining in the Consep Acacia to the Solution tank
and thus ensure that there are no losses of dissolved gold with the barren solids residue.
A volume of potable water is sprayed to the top of the Consep Acacia and the plug flow of water through the
settled solids rinses the solids of pregnant solution.
The volume of water to be added is required to be at least that of the estimated volume of voids in the settled
solids.
A method for determining the minimum wash volume is as follows:
𝑉𝐵 𝜌𝐵
𝑣 = 𝑉𝐵 −
𝜌𝑠
𝑊ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒:
𝑣 = 𝑣𝑜𝑖𝑑 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝜌𝑠 = 𝑆𝑜𝑙𝑖𝑑𝑠 𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 (𝑆𝐺)

𝑉𝐵 = 𝑏𝑢𝑙𝑘 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝜌𝐵 = 𝐵𝑢𝑙𝑘 𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 (𝑆𝐺 )
Page 14 of 33
DISCHARGING OF THE LEACH RESIDUE
This stage returns the solids leach residue to the regrind circuit. As this is the main material handling stage, it is
recommended that even with fully automated strategies, this stage is observed by the operator to ensure the
correct operation.
PREGNANT SOLUTION TO ELECTROWINNING

This stage transfers the Dissolution modules pregnant solution to the Electrowinning module (if supplied) or the
main refinery pregnant solution tank for electrowinning.
ELECTROWINNING
During Electrowinning, pregnant solution is circulated through the Electrowinning Cell at a flow rate that is
manually controlled. The gold in solution is electroplated on to steel wool or stainless steel stocking wrapped on
the Electrowinning Cell’s cathode frames. For more details on the Electrowinning Cell, please refer to the EW
Cell Manual. The barren solution is transferred to the Barren Recycle Tank.
Page 15 of 33
TYPICAL SETPOINTS
FLOW / TIME SETPOINTS

The following guidelines occasionally refer to the key operating parameters of the flow and duration of raw water
(for stratification & Deslime) and leach solution fed to the Consep Acacia Fluid bed. There is a flowmeter
mounted on this line and an automatic control valve for the regulation of this flow. The most efficient flow
setpoints may be fine tuned by experimentation, however typical values are shown in the following table.
Flow Setpoint Units Typical Value
Stratification flow m3/hr 10.8
Desliming flow m3/hr 8.6
Leach flow m3/hr 8.0
Time Setpoint Units Typical Value
Desliming minutes 30
Leach Hrs 16
LEACH REAGENT AMOUNTS

Typical reagent batch volumes are as follows:
Reagent Raw Concentration Batch Amount
Potable Water 0 900 litres
Caustic Solution 1000 g/l NaOH 7 litres
Cyanide Solution 30% NaCN 82 litres
Leachaid 100% 3-10kg per batch
The leach solution once made up would typically have the following concentrations:
Reagent Concentration (w/v)

Typical Range
Caustic (NaOH) 0.75%
Cyanide (NaCN) 2.00% 1% – 3%
Leachaid 0.5g per gram of gold 3-10kg per batch

expected
Page 16 of 33
CONCENTRATE VOLUME DETERMINATION
The Acacia reactor level transmitter provides a measurement of the solids bed level following the completion of
draining of the reactor vessel. The relationship between solids bed level and solids bed volume can be calculated
from the geometry of the Acacia reactor vessel and is displayed in the chart provided below.
The solids mass may also be calculated from the solids level in two steps, using the following equations.
First calculate the Radius of the Solids Bed surface (𝑅𝑠𝑏 ) using the formula below:
𝐿𝑠
𝐶𝑆500 𝑅𝑠𝑏 = 0.28 + 0.25 ×
𝐿𝑤
Where
𝐿𝑠 = Level Transmitter Reading at the solids level surface as a fraction, e.g. 62% = 0.62
𝐿𝑤 = Level Transmitter Reading at the Acacia reactor weir. This is typically established during
commissioning to be in the range of 96 to 97%, but it is able to be recorded (or captured by the PLC) during the
Desliming step.
Next calculate the Solids Mass (𝑀𝑠 ) using the formula below:
𝐿𝑠
𝐶𝑆500 𝑀𝑠 = 𝐵𝑆𝐺𝑠 × 1.37 × (𝑅𝑠𝑏 2 + 0.28 × 𝑅𝑠𝑏 + 0.08) ×
𝐿𝑤
Where
𝐵𝑆𝐺𝑠 = Bulk Specific Gravity of Solids Bed (kg of dry solids per litre)
Bulk SG can be determined by filling a 1 litre measuring cylinder with wet settled concentrate solids (such that
the interface between settled solids and liquid is precisely at the 1,000mL mark) then drying and weighing the
solids. The dry solids mass in kilograms is the Bulk SG.
Page 17 of 33
CONCENTRATE VOLUME DETERMINATION WITH
OPTIONAL HOPPER WEIGHT TRANSMITTER
When optional concentrate storage hopper weight transmitters are installed the concentrate mass produced from
each Knelson cycle is estimated using the weight transmitter. For the solids mass to be calculated, the water
level in the hopper must have stabilized at the Decant Outlet level, such that the total volume of concentrate and
water held in the hopper is known. Note that this volume can be determined by measuring the net mass of the
hopper when there is only water in the hopper and the level has stabilized at the Decant Outlet level, assuming
the water SG is 1.00.
The Concentrate Storage Hopper is automatically decanted after every Knelson purge cycle. This is controlled by
the Concentrate Collection and Decanting (CCAD) sequence. The Decant Valve opens to drain supernatant
water. The system waits for the measured mass to stabilize. Following the decant operation, the water level is
assumed to be stable at the decant outlet level. The net volume at this level is determined during commissioning
and is used in the solids mass calculation.
The solids True Specific Gravity (not to be confused with Bulk SG) is also used in this calculation. True SG can
be determined by partially filling a 1 litre measuring cylinder of known mass with wet concentrate solids and
topping it up with water to precisely the 1,000mL mark. Weigh the full measuring cylinder then subtract the
weight of the concentrate to calculate the slurry mass. Collect and dry all of the solids, then measure the dry
solids weight. Calculate the volume displaced by solids then divide solids mass by solids volume to get the True
SG. An example is provided below.
Solids Mass A 1.45kg

Slurry Volume B 1.00L
Slurry Mass C 2.05kg
Water Mass D = (C – A) 0.60kg
Water SG (known) E 1.00
Water Volume F = (D x E) 0.60L
Solids Volume G = (B – F) 0.40L
True SG H = (A / G) 3.63
The formula used to calculate the dry concentrate mass (𝑀𝑐 ) following a decant operation is as follows:
𝑀𝑐 = (𝑀𝑛𝑒𝑡 − 𝑉𝑑 )⁄(1 − 1⁄𝜌𝑠 )
Where
𝑀𝑐 = Dry concentrate mass, tonnes
𝑀𝑛𝑒𝑡 = Total Concentrate Slurry Mass (hopper net mass output from load cells), tonnes
𝑉𝑑 = Volume of slurry below the decant level (typically determined during commissioning), cubic
metres
𝜌𝑠 = True SG of solids
The SG of water is assumed to be 1.00
Page 18 of 33
CIRCUIT OPTIMISATION
INCREASING LEACHING RATES

The leach solution is circulated for a period of time to achieve the necessary recovery. Typically, gold particles
less than 1mm (in smallest dimension) will be leached within 18 hours with normal operating conditions. Gold
particles larger than this may require increasing leaching rates to completely dissolve. Increased leaching rates
can be achieved by the following:
1 Increased LeachAid dosage – The limiting factor is the concentration of LeachAid in the pregnant
solution fed to electrowinning, Generally if a concentration of LeachAid above 2 g/l is presented to a
standard Electrowinning cell, deposition rates will be affected. Therefore addition rates which result in
final concentrations such as this should be avoided.
2 Increasing cyanide concentration – testwork necessary to determine increased concentration possible.
3 Increasing Leach Temperature – only to be used in conjunction with Leachaid addition. Operation at
elevated temperatures without LeachAid will result in poor operational efficiencies.
The system is designed for a maximum temperature of 70° C.

This temperature is not to be exceeded
Page 19 of 33
5. MAINTENANCE
The Consep Acacia Dissolution Module is designed such that there is minimal maintenance requirement,
achieved through the limiting of moving parts.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Please refer to Section 11 SUB VENDOR INFORMATION for further information on sub-vendor equipment.
DAILY
• Inspect the system for any fluid leaks, including around valves, pumps, heaters, instruments etc.
• Upon completion of the cycle, open the Reactor Inspection hatch and inspect the Diffusion Cartridge for
any damage or plugging.
• Also check for excessive build-up of material on the Screen
• Inspect the system for any air leaks, around valves and instruments.
• Keep area in and around the Consep Acacia module clean and clear.
WEEKLY
• Check for any accumulation of solids inside the reactor feed tank and hose out if necessary.
• Unscrew the Hex Plugs at the back of the Diffusion Cartridge flushing pipe Y-pieces, using a rod, clear
any solids that may have accumulated inside the rubber check valve.
• Inspect the Rubber Check valves on the inside of the Reaction Tank Flushing pipes for wear. Replace if
necessary.
• Inspect the delivery tube of the Leachaid Feeder for product build up which may result in heat build up
(steel delivery tube models only).
• Check if the product from and in the Leachaid Feeder is being ground into fines (indicating a partial
blockage) or remains as a prill product as it should. The unit should deliver approximately 2kg of product
per minute. If fines are found or if delivery is below the required rate, the Leachaid Feeder is to be
cleaned. (refer section Leachaid Feeder Maintenance Cleaning in Section 5 of this manual)
• Check for any abnormal noise from the feeder during operation.
• Inspect the collection hopper of the Leachaid Feeder for blockages and / or clumps of product build up.
These are to be removed.
MONTHLY
• Inspect internals of reactor feed tank and take note of condition of heater elements.
• Inspect internals of Solution tank and take note of condition of heater elements if installed.
• Inspect the condition of the feed tank agitator shaft and impeller.
Page 20 of 33
3 MONTHLY
• The Diffusion cartridge is to be removed and the apertures in the wedge wire are to be cleared of any
blockages. If excessive localised wearing is occurring then the Diffusion cartridge is to be rotated.
• Replace Diffusion Cartridge filter media.
• If excessive wear of the entire screen is evident then the top screen and the bottom screen are to be
swapped around (See section Removal of Consep Acacia Diffusion Cartridge. in Section 5)
• The 5 rubber check valves inside the tank on the fluid cartridge flushing spray outlets are to be
unscrewed and removed to be checked for damage and cleared of any solids that may have made their
way inside the valve.
12 MONTHLY
• Inspect solution pump impeller & seals
• Inspect discharge pump impeller & liners
Page 21 of 33
REPAIR & OVERHAUL
Leach solution containing Sodium Cyanide (NaCN) and

Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) has the potential to be present
in Lines that need to be broken for maintenance
activities.
These chemicals also have the potential to be present in
the Fluid Bed Body and Diffusion Cartridge, as well as in
sediment deposits in the Reaction Tank and Diffusion
Cartridge.
Lines to be broken, the Fluid Bed Body, and the Diffusion

Cartridge should be flushed and drained prior to
conducting maintenance activities to avoid contact being
made with harmful chemicals.
Maintenance activities should be performed in well
ventilated areas.
Appropriate PPE should be worn at all times. Long sleeve

shirt and pants, hard hat, safety glasses, chemically
resistant safety boots, chemically resistant gloves, and a
HCN suitable gas mask are required, as a minimum.
Personal HCN monitors should also be worn at all times.
Work should be conducted in ventilated areas only.
During washing of sediment solids there exists the

potential for HCN gas to be evolved.
Exercise caution and follow the appropriate safety
guidelines, as a minimum.
Page 22 of 33
PROCEDURE FOR VALVE & PUMP SERVICING.
Any valves or pumps to be removed for service must have their respective lines flushed and drained prior to bolts
being loosened. This must be done to ensure maintenance workers do not come into contact with any hazardous
chemicals such as Sodium Cyanide or Sodium Hydroxide which may be present in the Line.
A hose can be connected to a flushing point and a separate drain hose connected to a drain point. The drain
hose must be run to a suitable collection point i.e. a local sump pump or vessel. After flushing, the piping must be
allowed to drain before the hose is disconnected. Flushing point valves should be closed.
Once servicing is completed and the Line is re-assembled, it must be pressurised with water to confirm there are
no leaks in the Line. If all serviced lines are not pressure tested with water prior to resuming operation, there
exists the potential for hazardous chemicals to leak from these lines. This poses significant risks to all personnel
in the vicinity of the equipment.
LEACH LINE & DIFFUSION CARTRIDGE FLUSHING

PROCEDURE
Perform Leach Line and Diffusion Cartridge Flushing Procedures Prior to Removal
of Consep Acacia Diffusion Cartridge
Piping which carries leach solution into the Diffusion Cartridge (Line 50-18-SS-LS), and the Diffusion Cartridge
itself, will contain leach solution with Sodium Cyanide and Sodium Hydroxide present. If the Fluid Bed is to be
removed from the Upper Reactor, valve V34 situated on this line will need to be removed. The line must be
flushed with water and drained to remove hazardous chemicals. The flushing procedure outlined below must be
undertaken prior to removing V34 and the Fluid Bed:
1 Connect a hose with flushing water to valve V65 on the 25NB flushing point.
2 Ensure V31 is closed and isolated to avoid flushing water travelling into the CS500 Solution Tank
3 In Manual Mode on the HMI open valves V34 and V33
4 Set FCV36 to 50% open via the HMI
5 Open valve V65 on the 25NB flushing point with hose connected to flush line
6 Wait until line is adequately flushed.
7 Close valves V33, V34, and FCV36
8 Close valve V65 and remove hose with flushing water from 25NB flushing point. In Manual Mode on the
HMI open valve V39.
9 Open valve V44 to flush solids on top of diffusion screen
10 When adequately flushed (V44 should only be open for a few seconds), close valve V44
11 Keep valve V39 open and allow to drain.
12 Close valve V39
13 Leach Line - Line 50-18-SS-LS is now flushed.
Complete Reactor Drain Line Flushing procedure before Maintaining Diffusion Cartridge. Please
see flushing procedure below.
Page 23 of 33
The flush and drain procedure detailed above does not completely eliminate the presence of hazardous
chemicals. It is recommended that operators wear a personal HCN monitor and that maintenance be conducted
in a well ventilated area.
Page 24 of 33
ELECTROWINNING LINE FLUSHING PROCEDURE
Perform Prior to Maintenance of Electrowinning Solution Pump PP72
Piping which carries Pregnant solution into the electrowinning cell (Line 50-31-MS-LS), will contain leach solution
with Sodium Cyanide and Sodium Hydroxide present. If maintenance is to be completed on the Electrowinning
Solution Pump PP72, the line must be flushed with water and drained to remove hazardous chemicals. The
flushing procedure outlined below must be undertaken prior to performing maintenance on PP72:
1 Connect a hose with flushing water to valve V90 on the 15NB flushing point. (a hose tail fitting would be
required)
2 Ensure V80 is closed and isolated to avoid flushing water travelling into the CS500 Electrowinning
Solution Tank
3 Ensure V81 is closed and isolated to avoid flushing water travelling into the Electrowinning Cell.
4 In Manual Mode on the HMI open valve V82 to drain to the barren solution point
5 Open valve V90
6 Wait until line is adequately flushed.
7 Close valve V82
8 Close valve V90 and remove hose with flushing water from 15NB flushing point.
9 Connect another hose to drain flushing water from V90, long enough to reach the waste collection point.
10 Electrowinning Line 50-31-MS-LS is now flushed and drained.
The flush and drain procedure detailed above does not completely eliminate the presence of hazardous
chemicals. It is recommended that operators wear a personal HCN monitor and that maintenance be conducted
in a well ventilated area.
Page 25 of 33
REMOVAL OF CONSEP ACACIA DIFFUSION CARTRIDGE.
Perform leach line and diffusion cartridge flushing procedure prior to performing
maintenance on the diffusion cartridge
1 Remove 4 equally spaced bolts from the fluid bed body flange and replace with long bolts (~200 mm
long) and finger tighten
2 Place jacking mechanism underneath diffuser, and raise to just take load
3 Remove remaining bolts from flange
4 Loosen 4 long bolts to allow jack to take weight of the fluid bed body
5 Lower jack and withdraw Fluid bed body from underneath the Consep Acacia.
6 Clean any solids residue from top of screen
7 Remove two Silastic plugs from the outside top of the screen ring.
8 Insert two M12 lifting eyes into the tapped holes of the diffusion cartridge Spacer.
9 Remove all the long countersunk bolts from the outer PCD of the screen. (Note: Every second bolt on
this PCD is a short bolt used to keep the diffusion cartridge together) Do not remove these yet.
10 Lift the Diffusion Cartridge from the Fluid bed body.
11 The Diffusion Cartridge may be disassembled as required.
REPLACING OF CONSEP ACACIA DIFFUSION CARTRIDGE

The following procedure details the complete assembly of the diffusion Cartridge, including packing of diffusion
media. If diffusion bed is already assembled, start from step 5
1 Screw the diffusion bed top screen to the tapped holes in the Spacer plate with the screen deck (Not the
load bars) facing out, using 5/M12 x 25Lg S.S. Countersunk Socket head screws inserted in every
second hole on the Screen outer PCD
2 Screw the top clamp plate to the tapped holes in the spacer plate using 1/M12 x 30Lg S.S. Countersunk
Socket head screws
3 Insert two M12 lifting eyes into the tapped holes of the Spacer plate.
4 Using the 2 lifting eyes, lift the partially assembled Diffusion cartridge and flip the arrangement.
5 Temporarily plug the tapped holes in the spacer plate (eg small cloth pieces)
6 Pour in the diffusion media carefully spreading evenly around the full area, avoiding beads entering the
spacer holes. Fill until media is level with the top of the Spacer
7 Remove the 2 lifting eyes.
8 Remove the cloth plugs from the spacer plate.
9 Lift the top screen and carefully place on top of the partially assembled diffusion Cartridge with the
screen deck hard up against the spacer and the load bars facing out.
10 Screw the Diffusion cartridge bottom screen to the tapped holes in the Spacer plate using 5/M12 x 25Lg
S.S. Countersunk Socket head screws inserted in every second hole on the Screen outer PCD.
11 Screw the bottom clamp plate to the tapped holes in the spacer plate using 1/M12 x 30Lg S.S.
Countersunk Socket head screws.
Page 26 of 33
12 Re-insert the 2 lifting eyes and lift the diffusion cartridge into place (if not already in place). Carefully
rotate the diffusion bed cartridge such that the peripheral holes align with tapped holes in the Fluid bed
body
13 Insert the 5/M12 x 70Lg S.S. Countersunk Socket head screws in the remaining holes in the Diffusion
screen outer PCD and tighten to secure cartridge to the fluid bed body
14 Remove the 2 lifting eyes and plug tapped holes with Silastic.
15 Place bead of sealing compound (eg Silastic) around the flange of the Fluid bed body and position
gasket. Place another bead of sealant around top of gasket.
16 Move the assembled Fluid bed body underneath the Consep Acacia and raise with the jacking
mechanism.
17 Insert 4 long bolts at quadrants around the flange to align.
18 Raise base completely and insert all bolts.
19 If necessary remove the 4 long bolts and replace with normal length bolts
20 Tighten all bolts in an alternating “criss-cross” pattern until all bolts are tightened.
21 Wipe any excess silicone that may be present.
LEACHAID FEEDER MAINTENANCE CLEANING

The following procedure details the recommended steps to be taken to clean the Leachaid Screw Feeder.
Please refer to the sub-vendor information section of this manual for reference drawings. Ensure that the
correct Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) including eye protection, are worn during cleaning.
1 The hopper needs to be emptied of reagent as much as possible. This is achieved by running the screw
feeder in manual mode from the HMI.
2 When empty, isolate the electrical supply to the screw feeder drive as described in the Electrical Safety
section of this manual.
3 Visually inspect for any accumulation of solids inside the reagent hopper and hose out. Continue hosing
until the hopper, feeder and delivery nozzle are clean. Low pressure water or even just a bucket of
water (in some cases) should suffice for flushing.
4 Using a low pressure air hose, thoroughly dry the entire hopper, shaft and delivery nozzle assembly.
5 With the Leachaid Screw Feeder now clean, remove the electrical isolation and run the feeder again in
manual mode from the HMI, checking for any noises or abnormalities resulting from a possible bent
screw shaft or any other mis-alignments.
6 If the screw shaft is bent or mis-aligned it is to be removed and repaired / replaced to ensure the screw
runs “true”.
7 It the screw is found to be bent, this may also result in damage to the delivery nozzle. It the delivery
nozzle is found to be damaged or worn, it should be replaced also.
8 Once the damaged or worn parts are repaired / replaced, run the feeder checking that there is no
contact between the moving and fixed components.
9 Refill the Screw Feeder Hopper with the reagent and resume normal operation.
Page 27 of 33
6. GA DRAWINGS
Arrangement Drawings
C22600-500-01-100 Consep Acacia CS500 Dissolution Module

General Arrangement Drawing
C22600-500-02-100 Consep Acacia CS500 Electrowinning Module

General Arrangement Drawing
Footing Plan Drawings

Footing Plan
C22600-500-02-102 Consep Acacia CS500 Electrowinning, Byproduct Treatment & Barren

Recycle Module
Footing Plan
Page 28 of 33
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PARTS LIST
FOR APPROVAL ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER MASS (kg)
THIS DRAWING IS SUBMITTED FOR YOUR APPROVAL
H OF OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND OF OUR 1 1 ACACIA REACTOR ASSEMBLY (TABLE D) 500-12-050-DA-000 770.8 H
INTERPRETATION OF YOUR REQUIREMENTS. ANY
REQUESTED CHANGES MAY HAVE AN EFFECT ON THE
2 1 CON. CONE ASSEMBLY (TABLE D) 500-11-100-DA-000 306.5
DELIVERY PROMISE AND/OR THE SELLING PRICE. 3 1 SOLUTION TANK ASSEMBLY 500-13-100-DA-000 809.2
IMPORTANT: TIME FOR THE PROCESSING OF THIS
ORDER HAS BEEN RESERVED IN OUR ENGINEERING
4 4 1 SKID FRAME (60 Hz) 500-16-100-AC-000 530.5
AND MANUFACTURING DEPARTMENTS BASED ON OUR
RECEIVING THIS DRAWING WITH YOUR FINAL
5 1 REACTION TANK SUPPORT FRAME 500-16-300-AB-000 197.9
APPROVAL BY .......................................................... 6 1 CONCENTRATE CONE SUPPORT FRAME 500-16-600-AB-000 237.5
7 1 STEP LADDER 500-16-500-AA-000 38.7
8 4 LIFTING LUG WELDMENT CS-STD-026-AA-000 4.5
BY: ................... DATE: .................... 9 1 SOLUTION TANK ACCESS STEP 500-13-200-AA-000 40
10 2 1200x800 CONTROL PANEL FRAME 500-16-220-AA-000 38
11 1 HEATER ADAPTOR PLATE CS-STD-054-DA-000 3
PLEASE NOTE 12 1 SCREW FEEDER INLET ASSEMBLY CS-STD-078-DA-000 4.4
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS
THE PROPERTY OF CONSEP PTY. LTD.
AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED OR USED
13 1 REMOVABLE RAIL FRAME 500-16-200-AA-000 17.6
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT FROM THE OWNER. 14 2 GUIDE RAIL 500-16-210-AA-000 5.1
G 2 72 15 1 ADDITIVE INLET ASSEMBLY CS-STD-018-DA-000 8.6 G
16 1 SLURRY DISCHARGE SPOOL 500-15-800-DA-000 7.1
29 17 2 SOLUTION PUMP PACKERS SET 500-16-101-AA-000 0.4
4 18 2 SOLUTION PUMP D112M MOTOR PACKERS SET 500-16-101-AC-000 0.9
66 19 1 SLURRY PUMP FRAME 500-16-400-AA-000 35.1
20 1 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER - RTD TYPE 214004 0.3
25 21 1 FILTER REGULATOR SET 3/8" (AIR IN - RIGHT SIDE) CS-STD-700-AA-000 0.3
22 3 VALVE B/FLY 50NB (MAN) (BURKERT) 154401 0.5
23 1 VALVE, ELECTRIC SOLENOID,10NB BSP + PLUG 154181/154167 0.5
3 24 1 TRANSMITTER BRACKET 500-16-700-AA-000 3.1
25 2 LEVEL SENSOR STANDPIPE CS-STD-017-AA-000 5.6
26 1 SUPPORT PLATE TYPE "AB" CS-STD-240-AB-001 0.9
27 1 IMMERSION HEATER (20kW) (440-480V, 50/60Hz) 753597 10.4
F 28 2 SIEMENS SITRANS LEVEL TRANSMITTER 214106 1 F
29 2 LEVEL TRANSDUCER - MILLTRONICS 214100 1.2
30 1 LEACH AID HOPPER ASSEMBLY(NO MOTOR) CS-STD-043-AF-000 79.4
31 1 FLOWMETER YOKOGAWA 050 24V DC/HART 153019S 2.8
32 1 FLOWMETER YOKOGAWA 025 24V DC/HART 153017S 2.5
3 33 1 MOTOR-TECO-0.75kW-4P-3PH-480V-60Hz (IEC) 150219-C22600 20
34 1 MOTOR-TECO-11kW-4 P-3PH-480V-60Hz (IEC) 150446-C22600 133
4 35 1 MOTOR-TECO-4kW, 2P, 3PH, 480V, 60Hz (IEC) 150337-C22600 50
36 1 SLURRY PUMP- KREBS MILLMAX 2x2-8 (60Hz) (NO MOTOR) 209414 330
37 1 PLC CONTROL PANEL (1200x800x300) 50
4 38 1 MCC CONTROL PANEL (800x1200x300) 50
44 39 1 PUMP 50x32-160(Tbl E) (STARLINE)-COUPLES TO D112M MOTOR 209245-NM 5.3
40 1 NIPPLE HEX 1" BSP 0.1
E 41 3 RUBBER CHECK SPRAY VALVE CS-STD-025 0 E
42 1 SPRAY MANIFOLD 500-15-105-DA-000 17.4
1 43 1 VALVE, 80NB, TBL D, WAFER SLURRY (CLARKSON# KGD) 38
44 1 VALVE, 100NB, TBL D, WAFER SLURRY (CLARKSON# KGD) 42
45 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN25, TABLE "D" 0
46 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN80, DIN PN16 0.1
47 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN50, DIN PN16 0
48 1 NIPPLE, BARREL, 3/8NB BSP x 38 LNG (SS304) 0
43 49 1 REDUCING BUSH 32-15NB BSP (SS304) 0.2
50 1 NIPPLE HEX 1/2" BSP 0
51 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN50, TABLE "D" 0
34
52 1 PLUG, 15NB BSP (SS304) 0.1
53 1 U BOLT, 25NB, M10 c/w NUTS (SS304) 0.1
D 67 54 14 SCREW, CSK SKT HD, MC8 x 45 c/w NUT, 1FL WSR, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0 D
55 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN100, TABLE "D" 0.1
36 56 26 BOLT, HEX HD, MC8 x 25 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0
30 62
57 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12x35 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
58 2 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12 x 35 c/w 1FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
8 71 59 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12x40 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
60 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12 x 55 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
61 8 SCREW, HEX HD, MC16 x 35 c/w, 1FL WSR, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
62 4 SCREW, HEX HD, MC16 x 45 c/w, 1FL WSR, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
20 49 63 8 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 45 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2
11 65 27 55 66 9 BOLT, HEX HD, M16 x 65 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2
C 67 8 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 70 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2 C
33
51 69 70 12 BOLT, HEX HD, MC20 x 50 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.3
71 16 BOLT, HEX HD, MC20 x 60 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR SS304 0.3
4 73 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12 x 60 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
24 56 28 4 31
35
73 39 17 60
56 37 38 56
EQUIPMENT No. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
B B
10 63 CS500 DISSOLUTION MODULE
63 10 28 CLIENT DRAWING No. CLIENT
21 FLSMIDTH
FRONT ISOMETRIC TES-ORO MINING GROUP
SCALE: 1 : 12.5 MASS: 4193 kg
DRN DATE DRAWING NUMBER SHEET CONTRACT No.
AREA: 168342624 mm^2

CHK
GJT
DATE
15/01/2020
C22600-500-01-100 1 of 3
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING DIMENSION TOLERANCES CUSTOMER
FS 15/01/2020
IF IN DOUBT ASK EXCEPT AS NOTED
MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION APPRV DATE TES-ORO MINING GROUP 4
4 FS 17/04/2020 SOLUTION PUMP, MOTOR AND SKID UPDATED TITLE
LINEAR `0.5 ` 1.5mm REV
3 GJT 2/03/2020 P/N.150219-C22600 WAS 150238-C22600
A 2 CD 12/02/2020 SHEETS UPDATED TO HAVE TERMINATIONS INDICATED ON SHEET 3. ANGULAR `0.5~ ` 1.0~ 59 NEWTON RD Phone: 61 2 9756-5299
SCALE
1 : 12.5
CS500 DISSOLUTION MODULE A
1 GJT 22/01/2020 ISSUED FOR APPROVAL THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164 Email: sales@consep.com.au
SIZE
REV REV BY DATE DESCRIPTION
PROPERTY OF CONSEP. IT MUST NOT BE DISCLOSED
OR LENT TO A THIRD PARTY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF CONSEP Pty Ltd
AUSTRALIA Website: www.consep.com.au
DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN MILLIMETRES
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT A1
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
DWG No. DWG TITLE
H C22600-500-01-101-100 P&ID H
C22600-500-01-102-000 HOLD DOWN BOLT PLAN
500-12-400-DA-000 REACTION TANK FLUID BED ASSEMBLY
500-15-100-DA-000 RAW WATER PIPING
500-15-300-DA-000 ACACIA OVERFLOW PIPING
500-15-400-DA-000 FEED & DECANT PIPING
500-15-500-DA-000 SLURRY SPOOL PIPING
500-15-700-DA-000 ACACIA DECANT PIPING
500-15-200-DA-000 MISC. PIPING & INSTRUMENT ARRANGEMENT
500-17-100-AB-000 CABLE TRAY ARRANGEMENT
72
G 6 G
40 FOR VALVE
43 61
F F
58 9
62 16 68
30
32
23 48 46
12
47 67
E E
19 64 67
45 15
5 29
D 14 54 D
25
64 7 13
59 69 26 53 56
42 41
C C
DETAIL 1
70
15 DETAIL 1
( SCALE:1 : 7.5 )
57
SAMPLE POINT
8 71 BACK ISOMETRIC
50 52 SCALE: 1 : 12.5 EQUIPMENT No. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
B B
CS500 DISSOLUTION MODULE
CLIENT DRAWING No. CLIENT
FLSMIDTH
TES-ORO MINING GROUP
MASS: 4193 kg
AREA: 168342624 mm^2
CHK
GJT
DATE
15/01/2020
C22600-500-01-100 2 of 3
FS 15/01/2020
4 FS 17/04/2020 SOLUTION PUMP, MOTOR AND SKID UPDATED IF IN DOUBT ASK EXCEPT AS NOTED
3 GJT 2/03/2020 P/N.150219-C22600 WAS 150238-C22600 TITLE
2 CD
A 1 GJT
12/02/2020
22/01/2020
SHEETS UPDATED TO HAVE TERMINATIONS INDICATED ON SHEET 3.
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
ANGULAR `0.5~ ` 1.0~ 59 NEWTON RD Phone: 61 2 9756-5299
SCALE
1 : 12.5
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164 Email: sales@consep.com.au
SIZE
REV REV BY DATE DESCRIPTION PROPERTY OF CONSEP. IT MUST NOT BE DISCLOSED
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1682 2256 CRS 1308 TERMINATION POINTS
Mk. DESCRIPTION DN (NPS) MAT'L CONNECTION
1135 (T6) 200 605 1242 T1 RAW WATER INLET 50NB (2") S.S. TABLE D
H 455 T2 ACACIA TANK WATER INLET SPRAY 25NB (1") S.S. BSP H
960 (T12) 200
T3 POTABLE WATER INLET 50NB (2") M.S. TABLE D
180
T4 SODIUM HYDROXIDE INLET 25NB (1") S.S. TABLE D
T5 SODIUM CYANIDE INLET 25NB (1") S.S. TABLE D
T2 T4 T5 T3 T15 T10 T6 SLURRY PUMP DISCHARGE 50NB (2") S.S. TABLE D
T7 PREG. SOL'N. TO ELECTROWINNING 50NB (2") S.S. TABLE D
T16
T8 CONCENTRATE INLET - - OPEN TANK
T13 50NB (2")
T9 SLURRY PUMP DRAIN S.S. TABLE D
T10 SPARE (BLANKED) 50NB (2") M.S. TABLE D
T11 ACACIA DRAIN TO FLOOR SUMP 50NB (2") M.S. TABLE D
T12 CONCENTRATE TANK OVERFLOW 80NB (3") HDPE TABLE D
T13 SOLUTION TANK OVERFLOW 50NB (2") M.S. TABLE D
1157 (T12)
T14 SOLUTION TANK DRAIN 50NB (2") M.S. TABLE D
(T4, T5)
355
T15 FUME EXTRACTION (FEED TANK) 80NB (3") M.S. TABLE D
1109
G T16 FUME EXTRACTION (REACTOR) 80NB (3") M.S. TABLE D G
850
T7 T17 GLAND WATER CONNECTION 10NB (3/8") S.S. BSP
448 (T9)
725
2670 O/A
(T6)
552
T18 INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY 10NB (3/8") S.S. BSP
(T3)
405
PAINT SPECIFICATION
500 (T1)
558 (T14)
577 (T7)
EXTERNAL M.S. COMPONENTS
T17 1. ABRASIVE BLAST CLEAN TO CLASS. '2.5' STANDARD

IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.S.1627.4 - CLASS 2.5
2. PRIMER = ONE COAT INTERGARD 251
TO A DRY FILM THICKNESS (75 Min. MICRONS)
3. TOP COAT = ONE COAT INTERPLUS 1180
4. FINAL COLOUR = RAINFOREST GREEN (G15)
TO A TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (250 Min. MICRONS)
F F
INTERNAL M.S. VESSELS
1. ABRASIVE BLAST CLEAN TO CLASS. '2.5' STANDARD

T14 2. INTERLINE 399
T18 T7 TO A DRY FILM THICKNESS (300 Min. MICRONS)
3. FINAL COLOUR = GREY (N35)
1600 HEATER
EXTRACTION
1300 HANDRAIL & LADDER
5828 O/A 1. ABRASIVE BLAST CLEAN TO CLASS. '2.5' STANDARD

2. PRIMER = ONE COAT INTERGARD 251
VIEW ON B-B TO A DRY FILM THICKNESS (75 Min. MICRONS)
3. TOP COAT = ONE COAT INTERPLUS 1180
E 74
DETAIL 2 TO A DRY FILM THICKNESS (175 Min. MICRONS)
4. FINAL COLOUR = GOLDEN YELLOW (Y14) E
1207 74
( SCALE:1:7.5 ) TO A TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (250 Min. MICRONS)
T8
1051 (T1)
249 710 LOAD INFORMATION:-
A DRY MASS (kg) - 4192.920 kg
MANUFACTURING WELD NOTES:- OPERATING MASS (kg) - 7670 kg
1. ALL CARBON STEEL STRUCTURAL WELDING IS TO AS/NZS1554 PART 1, CATEGORY GP. FULLY SANDED (kg) - 8220 kg
2. ALL STAINLESS STEEL STRUCTURAL WELDING IS TO AS/NZS1554 PART 6, CATEGORY GP.
3. ALL PIPE WELDING IS TO AS/NZS4041, CLASS 3. GENERAL NOTES:-
1. ALL MOTORS & CONTROLS TO BE IEC STANDARD.
2. ALL FASTENERS TO BE METRIC.
3. ALL FITTINGS TO BE BSP THREAD.
1427
4. ALL MOVING PARTS TO BE GUARDED.
D B B 5. FOR H.D. BOLT PLAN SEE DRG.C22600-500-01-102.
D
T1
3868 O/A
T12
T6
C C
2966
(TRANSPORT HT)
2441 (T12)
2416 (T2)
2441
2395
2250
T17
1805
T11
1327 (T1)
1284 (T6)
1391
927 (T3)
873 (T10)
740 (T9)
671 (T13)
686 (T7)
797
686
475
TOP OF SLAB
B E.L. 0.00 B
472 T18
246
459 CRS
GROUT
2085 CRS
T9 802 DETAIL 2
840 957 VIEW ON A-A
25
A MASS: 4193 kg
FRONT VIEW AREA: 168342624 mm^2

CHK
GJT
DATE
15/01/2020
C22600-500-01-100 3 of 3
SCALE: 1 : 20 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING DIMENSION TOLERANCES FS 15/01/2020 CUSTOMER

4 FS 17/04/2020 SOLUTION PUMP, MOTOR AND SKID UPDATED TITLE
3 GJT 2/03/2020 P/N.150219-C22600 WAS 150238-C22600
A 2 CD 12/02/2020 SHEETS UPDATED TO HAVE TERMINATIONS INDICATED ON SHEET 3. ANGULAR `0.5~ ` 1.0~ 59 NEWTON RD Phone: 61 2 9756-5299
SCALE
1 : 20
1 GJT 22/01/2020 ISSUED FOR APPROVAL THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164 Email: sales@consep.com.au
SIZE
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PARTS LIST PARTS LIST
MASS MASS
PAINT SPECIFICATION ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
H (kg) (kg) H
EXTERNAL M.S. COMPONENTS 1.16 1 LEVEL TRANSDUCER - MILLTRONICS 214100 1.2 1 1 CS500 1.9m3 EW TANK G.A. (TK71). 500-02-100-DB-000 860
1.17 1 SIEMENS SITRANS LEVEL TRANSMITTER 214106 1 1.1 1 CS500 EW TANK ASSY. 500-18-100-DA-000 678
1. ABRASIVE BLAST CLEAN TO CLASS. '2.5' STANDARD
IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.S.1627.4 - CLASS 2.5 1.18 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN100, TABLE "D" 0.1 1.2 1 EW. TANK PUMP SKID (4kW / 60Hz) 500-19-110-AB-000 31.3
2. PRIMER = ONE COAT INTERGARD 251 1.20 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12 x 50 c/w NUT, 2FL WSR, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1 1.3 1 HEATER ADAPTOR PLATE CS-STD-054-DA-000 3
3. TOP COAT = ONE COAT INTERPLUS 1180 1.21 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 55 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2 1.4 2 LEVEL TRANSMITTER BRACKET CS-STD-041-AA-001 0.3
TO A DRY FILM THICKNESS (175 Min. MICRONS) 1.22 4 BOLT, HEX HD, M16 x 65 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2 1.7 1 PIPING ASSEMBLY 500-20-100-DA-000 19.5
4. FINAL COLOUR = RAINFOREST GREEN (G15)
1.23 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 50 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2 1.7.1 1 VALVE B/FLY 50NB (MAN) (BURKERT) 154401 0.5
1.24 2 PUMP SKID SHIM SET (2mm) 500-19-120-DA-000 0.1 1.7.2 1 VALVE, BALL 15NB 1/2" F-F (MANUAL) 154413 0.1
INTERNAL M.S. VESSELS
1.25 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC6 x 20 c/w FL.O/S WSR(3/16"x3/4"), SP WSR( SS304) BH-304-MC06-020-WFO-WS 0 1.7.3 2 2" ACTUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE 154402 2.5
G 1. ABRASIVE BLAST CLEAN TO CLASS. '2.5' STANDARD 1.19 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12 x 60 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1 1.7.4 1 NIPPLE HEX 1/2" BSP 0 G
2 1 EWC 600x600-10x9 ASSY. (L.H.) (EC-71) CSE-609-DN-100-000 440.5 1.7.5 1 SUCTION & FLUSHING SPOOL 500-20-105-DA-000 3.1
2. INTERLINE 399
TO A DRY FILM THICKNESS (300 Min. MICRONS) 3 1 EWC FEED PIPE ASSY. C18390-500-20-335-DA-000 8.1 1.7.6 1 PUMP DISCHARGE SPOOL 500-20-120-DA-000 6.4
3. FINAL COLOUR = GREY (N35)
3.1 1 FEED PIPE W/M C18390-500-20-336-DA-000 5.9 1.7.7 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN32, TABLE "E" 0
3.2 2 NIPPLE HEX 1/2" BSP 0 1.7.8 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN50, TABLE "E" 0
EW CELL
3.3 1 HOSE BARB 15NB - BSP S.S. 0.1 1.7.9 1 PLUG HEX 1_2 BSP SS316 0
1. CELL BODY AND LID MATERIAL IS SS304 3.4 1 15NB FLEXIBLE HOSE(200 LNG) 6000-20-100-AA-001 0 1.7.10 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC12 x 50 c/w NUT, 2FL WSR, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.1
2. BUSBAR INSULATORS MATERIAL IS PTFE 3.5 1 HOSE CLAMP, T-BOLT, 15NB (SS304) 0 1.7.11 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 60 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2
3. ALL FLANGES ARE "TBL-D" DRILLED OFF-CENTRE
4. FINAL SURFACE TREATMENT - PASSIVATED. 3.6 1 VALVE, BALL 15NB 1/2" F-F (MANUAL) 154413 0.1 1.7.12 12 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 90 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.3
5. RUBBER LINING 3mm THK. 3.7 1 ELBOW F/F 1/2" BSP 0.1 1.8 1 LEVEL SENSOR STANDPIPE CS-STD-017-AA-000 5.6
F F
3.8 1 FLANGE, GASKET, DN80, TABLE "E" 0.1 1.9 1 CABLE TRAY LAYOUT 500-21-100-AA-000 7.7
FOR APPROVAL 3.9 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 90 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.3 1.10 1 PUMP 50x32-160(Tbl E) (STARLINE)-COUPLES TO D112M MOTOR 209245-NM 5.3
THIS DRAWING IS SUBMITTED FOR YOUR APPROVAL
OF OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND OF OUR
INTERPRETATION OF YOUR REQUIREMENTS. ANY
3.10 4 BOLT, HEX HD, MC16 x 50 c/w NUT, 2FL WSRS, 1SP WSR (SS304) 0.2 1.11 1 MOTOR-TECO-4kW, 2P, 3PH, 480V, 60Hz (IEC) 150337-C22600 50
REQUESTED CHANGES MAY HAVE AN EFFECT ON THE
DELIVERY PROMISE AND/OR THE SELLING PRICE. 4 3 VALVE B/FLY 50NB (MAN) (BURKERT) 154401 0.5 1.12 1 IMMERSION HEATER (20kW) (440-480V, 50/60Hz) 753597 10.4
IMPORTANT: TIME FOR THE PROCESSING OF THIS
ORDER HAS BEEN RESERVED IN OUR ENGINEERING 5 1 2" MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE c/w HANDWHEEL 154410 4 1.13 1 1000x600x200 JUNCTION BOX c/w EMERGENCY STOP 40
AND MANUFACTURING DEPARTMENTS BASED ON OUR
RECEIVING THIS DRAWING WITH YOUR FINAL 6 1 VALVE BALL MAN F/F 1/2" BSP 211012 0.5 1.14 1 FILTER REGULATOR SET 3/8" (AIR IN - RIGHT SIDE) CS-STD-700-AA-000 0.3
APPROVAL BY ..........................................................
7 1 EWC RECTIFIER PANEL ASSEMBLY (800amp) C22600-RHE800-02-100-000 118.3 1.15 1 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER - RTD TYPE 214004 0.3
APPROX. TOTAL WEIGHT ( kg )
BY: ................... DATE: ....................
1.16 TOTAL DRY MASS = 1508kg
1432.9 kg
TOTAL OPERATING MASS = 4190kg
E 1.8 E
PLEASE NOTE 1.4 1.17
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS
THE PROPERTY OF CONSEP PTY LTD 1.22 1.1
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT FROM THE OWNER.
1.7.12
1.13
1.13
1.7.3
1.17 1
D 1.7.3 D
1.7.3
1.7.12
1.7.3
1.7.12 1.7.1
1.7 1.7.6
1.7.7
1.7.10
C 1.10 C
1.23
1.10
4
1.11
1.15 1.7.9 1.7.2 1.7.4
1.12 1.18 1.21 1.3 1.2

1.20 1.7.11 1.7.5
B
MANUFACTURING WELD NOTES:- DETAIL 1 EQUIPMENT No. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
B
1. ALL CARBON STEEL STRUCTURAL WELDING IS TO AS/NZS1554 PART 1, CATEGORY GP. CS500 ELECTROWINNING MODULE
1.7.8 1.7.2 1.14 ( SCALE:1 : 7.5 )
2. ALL STAINLESS STEEL STRUCTURAL WELDING IS TO AS/NZS1554 PART 6, CATEGORY GP.
CLIENT DRAWING No. CLIENT
3. ALL PIPE WELDING IS TO AS/NZS4041, CLASS 3.
FLSMIDTH
1.2 1.7.11 ISOMETRIC VIEW-1 TES-ORO MINING GROUP
ITEM-1
SCALE: 1:10 CHK
CD
DATE
18/02/2020
C22600-500-02-100 1 of 3
FS 18/02/2020
RJA,CL,JM,AD 25/02/2020 TITLE
A 2 MH 26/02/2020 ISSUED FOR MANUFACTURE. PUMP AND MOTOR UPDATED ANGULAR `0.5~ ` 1.0~ 59 NEWTON RD
T +61 2 9756 5299 SCALE
1:10
CS500 ELECTROWINNING MODULE A
F +61 2 9756 5102 SIZE
1 CD 18/2/2020 ISSUED FOR APPROVAL THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164
AUSTRALIA sales@consep.com.au
www.consep.com.au DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN MILLIMETRES
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TERMINATION POINTS
470 831 300 250 T32 T38 T30 Mk. DESCRIPTION DN (NPS) MAT'L CONNECTION
GRAVITY ELECTROWINNING TANK - TERMINATION POINTS
H T30 PREGNANT SOLUTION FROM ACACIA DISSOLUTION MODULE 50NB (2") M.S. TBL "D" H
T31 TO FUME EXTRACTION UNIT 80NB (3") M.S. TBL "D"
T32 FROM ELECTROWINNING CELL RETURN 80NB (3") M.S. TBL "D"
T33 TANK OVERFLOW OUTLET 80NB (3") M.S. TBL "D"
T34 TANK DRAIN 50NB (2") M.S. TBL "D"
T35 FEED TO EWC 50NB (2") S.S. TBL "D"
T36 TO BARREN SOLUTION PUMP 50NB (2") S.S. TBL "D"
T37 SPARE 50NB (2") M.S. TBL "D"
T38 EWC DECANT 50NB (2") M.S. TBL "D"
500 T39 EW PUMP FLUSHING POINT 15NB (1/2") S.S. BSP
T45 INSTRUMENT AIR 10NB (3/8") S.S. BSP
650
NOTES :
450
1. ALL INTERNAL FLANGES ARE TBL 'D'
415
G 2. ALL TERMINATION POINT FLANGES ARE TBL 'D G
200
180
3. THREADED TERMINATION POINTS ARE BSP

4. ALL FASTENERS ARE METRIC
5. ALL MOTORS TO BE IEC STANDARD
1841 O/A
335
500
535
600
1500 I/S
T39
F PUMP FLUSHING POINT F

15NB BSP. CONNECTION
INSPECTION HATCH
400 x 300 MESH GUARDED
T33
3°
300 100
138
75
25
T37
1300mm
HEATER REMOVAL AREA

TO BE FREE OF OBSTRUCTION 100
T31
E 300 250 221 E
T34
300 889 428 VIEW 1-2
2670 O/A ( SCALE: 1:10 )
PLAN 217 148 600

200 60
726
DRAWING TO BE READ IN
CONJUNCTION WITH
R450 T34
392
SITE PLAN G.A. T45
D D
T35
T36
1739
1635
1589
217
1313
1313
1161 VIEW 1-2
1134
C C
1079
PUMP FLUSHING POINT
15NB BSP. CONNECTION
506
669
635
350
3°
5°
9°
188
R.L. 0.000 T.O.C
VIEW 1-2
25 GROUT
25 GROUT
50
B 180 B
T34 1390 CTRS

500 510 1390 CTRS 194 FRONT VIEW
( SCALE: 1:10 )
ELEVATION DRN DATE DRAWING NUMBER SHEET CONTRACT No.
CHK
CD
DATE
18/02/2020
C22600-500-02-100 2 of 3
FS 18/02/2020
A 2 MH 26/02/2020 ISSUED FOR MANUFACTURE. PUMP AND MOTOR UPDATED ANGULAR `0.5~ ` 1.0~ 59 NEWTON RD
T +61 2 9756 5299 SCALE
1:10
F +61 2 9756 5102 SIZE
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TERMINATION POINTS
Mk. DESCRIPTION DN (NPS) MAT'L CONNECTION NOTES : 780
EWC609 - TERMINATION POINTS 1. ALL INTERNAL FLANGES ARE TBL 'D' 55
H T40 EWC FEED 50NB (2") S.S. TBL "D" 2. ALL TERMINATION POINT FLANGES ARE TBL 'D TOTAL DRY MASS FOR CELL = 525kg H
T41 EWC DECANT TO ELECTROWINNING TANK FEED 50NB (2") S.S. TBL "D" 3. THREADED TERMINATION POINTS ARE BSP TOTAL OPERATING MASS FOR CELL = 1360kg
T42 TO SLUDGE COLLECTION 50NB (2") S.S. TBL "D" 4. ALL FASTENERS ARE METRIC
T43 EWC TO ELECTROWINNING RETURN 80NB (3") S.S. TBL "D" 5. ALL MOTORS TO BE IEC STANDARD
T44 TO FUME EXTRACTION UNIT 152mm (6") S.S. O.D. TUBE
600
500
670
2617 O/A 2 / HOLES
3.8 n20 870
3.10
G
FOOTING PLAN G
3.1 ( SCALE : 1:15 )
400
1103
800
1259 O/A (LID OPEN)

619 I/S TANK
633 I/S LUGS

7
1200
F F
MILD STEEL
1/2" BSP NI PANEL
5 3.9
1700
4 SAMPLE POINT
4 1742 I/S TANK
3.6 1973 LIFTING LUG CRS

3.2
3.2
3.7
DETAIL 2 3.1
500
( SCALE:1 : 7.5 )
3.3 PLAN
( SCALE: 1 : 15 )
E 3.5 E
25 GROUNTING PAD
25
PANEL END VIEW PANEL FRONT VIEW
1259 LID OPEN
SCALE: 1:15 PANEL MASS.: 220KG
936 LID CLOSED
( SCALE: 1:15 )
5
5°
211
2
3.4
DETAIL 3
D ( SCALE:1 : 5 ) D
2
n1
52
T44
1/2" BSP
SAMPLE POINT 3.1
1845 LID OPEN
6
2
1300 LID CLOSED
1289
C C
1078
3.8 3.10
3
810
690
662
662
3.1
104
392
4°
3.9
237
51 5
25 GROUT
20 SEE NOTE ***

T40 T41 T42 139 T43
545 H/D CTRS 510 1665 160
B B
END VIEW ELECTROWINNING CELL 600x600x9 - ITEM-2 4 4
( SCALE: 1 : 15 ) CONSEP SUPPLY EWC & RECTIFIER LOOSE (SEE SHEET-03) ISO-METRIC
CLIENT TO DETERMINE CELL LOCATION ON SITE ( SCALE: 1 : 15 )
*** EWC TANK UNIT MUST BE INSTALLED ABOVE THE TOP OF ELECTROWINNING TANK (TK71) ***
SCALE: 1 : 15 DRN DATE DRAWING NUMBER SHEET CONTRACT No.
CHK
CD
DATE
18/02/2020
C22600-500-02-100 3 of 3
FS 18/02/2020
A
2 MH 26/02/2020 ISSUED FOR MANUFACTURE. PUMP AND MOTOR UPDATED
ANGULAR `0.5~ ` 1.0~ 59 NEWTON RD
T +61 2 9756 5299 SCALE
1:10
F +61 2 9756 5102 SIZE
REV REV BY DATE DESCRIPTION PROPERTY OF CONSEP. IT MUST NOT BE DISCLOSED
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H NOTES: H
1802
1. ALL LOADS ARE NON-FACTORED
ACTUAL APPLIED LOADS
= 466 = 2. PLINTH CONCRETE DESIGN IS THE
RESPONSIBILITY OF THE END CLIENT
2/M16 CHEMSETS = 316 =
APPROXIMATE MASS
PER RAIL PAD - 200kg
150
G G
159
EL 0.00
450
265
370
F F
1082.5
EL 0.00
REACTOR CENTRE 600

(2844) O/A
448
2165 CRS
= 1635 =
2/M16 CHEMSETS EL 0.00
E E
APPROXIMATE MASS ON
STEP LADDER PAD - 150kg
597
= 1000 =
= 726 =
12/M16 CAST-IN LOADS PER PAD:
ANCHOR BOLTS DRY MASS - 2098kg
OPERATIONAL MASS - 3835kg
SANDED MASS - 4110kg
D D
265
450
275 5 SPACES @ 974 = 4870 (275) 140 175

C C
5420 740
6160 O/A
M16 CS500 HOLD DOWN BOLT PLAN

CHEMICAL ANCHOR TOP OF ACACIA SUPPORT PLINTH
SCALE: 1 : 10
B B
25 NOM. GROUT
100-MIN.
150 TBC
CLIENT
T.O.C.
MIN
100

MASS: 2726 kg
AREA: 42530119 mm^2
CHK
GJT
DATE
17/01/2020
C22600-500-01-102 1 of 1
BOLTING & GROUT DETAIL FS 17/01/2020
SCALE: 1 : 10
TITLE
LINEAR 0.5 1.5mm REV
A ANGULAR 0.5 1.0 59 NEWTON RD Phone: 61 2 9756-5299

SCALE
1 : 10 CS500 DISSOLUTION MODULE SIZE A
1 GJT 21-01-2020 ISSUED FOR APPROVAL FS THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164 Email: sales@consep.com.au
REV REV BY DATE DESCRIPTION CHK BY APPRV
HOLD DOWN BOLT PLAN A1
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H NOTES: H
1. ALL LOADS ARE NON-FACTORED
ACTUAL APPLIED LOADS
2. PLINTH CONCRETE DESIGN IS THE
RESPONSIBILITY OF THE END CLIENT
500 510 1390

G G
310 LOADS PER PAD:
DRY MASS - 180kg
EL -0.075 OPERATIONAL MASS - 630kg
12 "DYNABOLT" PUMP CONC. PAD

62
5
F F
19
66
468
575
375
180
1390
1175
E E
DATUM POINT
APPROXIMATE MASS ON
695
PUMP PAD - 200kg
600
200
D D
16 H/D ANCHORS
TYP. TANK PADS
310 SEE "BOLTING & GROUT DETAIL"
200
300 500
EL 0.000
510
C C
M16-M20 CS500 ELECTROWINNING MODULE HOLDING DOWN BOLT PLAN

CHEMICAL ANCHOR SCALE: 1 : 8
TOP OF ACACIA/EW MODULES SUPPORT PLINTH
25 NOM. GROUT
100-MIN.
T.O.C. 150 TBC
CLIENT
MIN
100
B B
BOLTING & GROUT DETAIL
SCALE: 1 : 10
CHK
CD
DATE
18/02/2020
C22600-500-02-102 1 of 1
FS 18/02/2020
MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION
APPRV DATE TES-ORO MINING GROUP 1
TITLE
LINEAR 0.5 1.5mm REV
A ANGULAR 0.5 1.0 59 NEWTON RD

T +61 2 9756 5299
F +61 2 9756 5102
SCALE
1:10 CS500 ELECTROWINNING TANK SIZE A
1 CD 18/2/2020 ISSUED FOR INFORMATION FS THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164
REV REV BY DATE DESCRIPTION CHK BY APPRV
www.consep.com.au DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN MILLIMETRES HOLD BOLT DOWN PLAN A1
REVISION HISTORY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7. P&ID & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
Process and Instrumentation Diagram
C22600-500-02-101 Consep Acacia CS500 Electrowinning Module

Process and Instrumentation Diagram
C22600E9001 CS500 Control Panel Wiring Legend
C22600E9002 - 9003 CS500 Consep Acacia Dissolution Module

Control Panel Layout
C22600E9004 - 9024 CS500 Consep Acacia Dissolution Module

Control Panel Wiring Diagrams
C22600E9031 CS500 Consep Acacia Electrowinning Module

Control Panel Layout
C22600E9032 - 9036 CS500 Consep Acacia Electrowinning Module

Control Panel Wiring Diagrams
C22600E9037 CS500 Consep Acacia Electrowinning Module

Rectifier Panel Layout
C22600E9038 - 9039 CS500 Consep Acacia Electrowinning Module

Rectifier Panel Wiring Diagrams
C22600E9041 - 9048 CS500 Consep Acacia Dissolution & Electrowinning

Single Line Diagrams
C22600E9051 Knelson Remote HMI

Panel Layout
C22600E9052 Knelson Remote HMI

Panel Wiring Diagram
C22600_PartsList Control Panel Parts List
C22600_CableList Control Panel Cable Schedule
C22600_MultTermSchl Control Panel Multicore Termination Schedule
C22600PLCI/O PLC I/O List
Page 29 of 33
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK
FLS SUPPLY
LEGEND
M27 20-KC-02 20-KC-01 M17
CLIENT 220VAC, 60HZ
M M KNELSON SUPPLY
R R
MINE SITE RUN CONSEP/FLS SUPPLY LINE TAG = A-B-C-D
3 3 LOCAL HMI VALVE SYMBOLS
5.5kW
KNELSON KNELSON 5.5kW PANEL COMMS FROM CONSEP FIT A - LINE SIZE
XD20 XD20 20-OP-12 PLC LCP02 10 BALL VALVE
25-01-SS-CN FIT10
B - LINE NUMBER
CONCENTRATOR CONCENTRATOR 50-150 litres/min at SODIUM CYANIDE V21
20 INCH 20 INCH CONSEP SUPPLY MINE SITE RUN (FROM PLANT) BUTTERFLY VALVE C - LINE MATERIAL
min'm 250 kPag T5
D - PROCESS FLUID
TAILINGS KNELSON KNELSON TAILINGS
I/O DROP I/O DROP
DIAPHRAGM VALVE
PANEL PANEL LINE MATERIAL
25-02-SS-OH MS - MILD STEEL
50-150 litres/min at SODIUM HYDROXIDE V22 KNIFE GATE VALVE
220VAC POWER min'm 250 kPag (FROM PLANT) T4 SS - STAINLESS STEEL
NON RETURN VALVE PE - POLYETHYLENE
H - HOSE
180 litres/min at POTABLE WATER V23 50-03-MS-PW
400 - 600 kPag (MINE SUPPLY) PINCH VALVE NY - NYLON
50x25 T3
VD - VENTILATION DUCT
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR PROCESS FLUID
ROTARY ACTUATOR CN- SODIUM CYANIDE

80-32-VD-F
OH - CAUSTIC SOLUTION
T8
PW - PROCESS WATER
50-06-PE-DS PISTON ACTUATOR
80x50 V25 DECANT LS - LEACH SOLUTION
0.55
80-24-PE-LS
m3 T2 MANUAL ACTUATOR DS - DESLIME SOLIDS

V48 V26
V24 SR - SOLIDS RESIDUE
PIPELINE REDUCER RW - RAW RATER
WATER
25-04-H-PW
V27 LE LIT
INJECTION 12 12 BS - BARREN SOLIDS
T12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
100
T16 F- FUMES
PRESSURE REGULATING
CONSEP/FLS SUPPLY MINE SITE RUN
TO FLOOR SUMP
VALVE
OVERFLOW
80-07-SS-LS
PROXIMITY SENSOR
V30
80-31-VD-F
GENERAL POWER = 480VAC/3PH/60Hz
50x80 TO FUME EXTRACTION
80-08-SS-LS
UNIT FIELD INSTRUMENT POWER = 24VDC
V29
CONSEP LEACHAID MOTOR CONTROL VOLTAGE = 220VAC/1PH/60Hz
ACACIA V28 (BY HAND)
SOLENOID AND CONTROL VOLTAGE = 24VDC
80-23-PE-DS
CS500
ANALOG CONTROL VOLTAGE = 24VDC
M
DISCHARGE
25-12-H-RW PUMP - PP03 0.75kW
3 11 kW NOTE:-
50x25 V50 M
25-13-H-RW V41 80x50
T6 3
V51
V44
50x25 80x50
LEACHAID MINESITE SUPPLY [CLIENT]
25-14-H-RW V53
50x25 V52 T9 EV42 SCREW FEEDER
V34 FIT
V43 V45 09 FE07
T17
50-18-SS-LS
25-15-PE-RW
50-11-SS-RW
50x FCV T7
T25 V61 15 ORIFICE V35
FCV36 36 PLATE LE LIT
FP
V62 13 13
50-19-SS-LS
V39
25-26-PE-RW
V38
TO FLOOR T11 PI
T10 T15 T13
SUMP PUMP PI15
TO FLOOR
19 litres/min at Outlet GLAND WATER O/FLOW SUMP PUMP
Pressure of PP03
plus 70 kPa (MINE SUPPLY)
50x25 IMMERSION
ORIFICE
200 litres/min at PROCESS/RAW WATER
T1 50-10-SS-RW 50x25 50-25-SS-RW
PLATE SOLUTION HEATER 20 kW
400 - 600 kPag (MINE SUPPLY) TANK HE108 PLEASE NOTE
V40 V54 THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS
MINE SITE RUN CONSEP/FLS SUPPLY TK02 TE TT THE PROPERTY OF CONSEP PTY. LTD.
V37 WITHOUT A WRITTEN CONSENT FROM THE OWNER
V33
14 14
50-28-SS-LS
1.6 m3 Pty. Ltd.
PP03 designed for MILL DISCHARGE MANUAL
16m3/h at 28m head HOPPER M 32 x 50 SAMPLE
50-21-SS-LS
50
T14 POINT
TO TO TO 3 50x25 V60
4 kW V31 V32
PP04 designed for PREG. SOL'N TO FE07 LE12 LE13 CONSEP ACACIA FEED V65
CLIENT 480V,60Hz
7.5m3/h at 25m head ELECTROWINNING PUMP - PP04 FP ACACIA MOTOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
Consep ACACIA T26 CONTROL PANEL
T18 10x6 10x6 10x6 10x6 PLC, INSTRUMENT AND FORM 1 HARDWIRED CONNECTION TO
10-33-NY-IA
INSTRUMENT AIR 5-10 SCFM
INSTRUMENT AIR SOLENOID LCP01 ELECTROWINNING MODULE
at 600-700kPag
PANEL
LCP02 HARDWIRED CONNECTION TO
TO CLIENT DCS
ETHERNET CONNECTION TO
TO CLIENT DCS (OPTIONAL)
CLIENT Doc. No. CLIENT:
-- TES-ORO NICOZ - SAN ALBINO PROJECT

DRN. DATE DRAWING No. PART No.
DIMENSION TOLERANCES NT 15.01.20
EXCEPT AS NOTED CHK. DATE C22600-500-01-101 CONTRACT No.
MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION MST 15.01.20 C22600

APRV. DATE TITLE
3 NT 21.05.20 V47 REMOVED LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA DISSOLUTION REV
3
2 NT 16.04.20 UPDATED ACACIA FEED PUMP MOTOR - PP04M, BEFORE 2.2kW - NOW 4kW
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS
SCALE
MODULE, MODEL CS500
1 NT 15.02.20 REVISED PER KNELSON SCOPE UPDATED NTS
0 NT 15.01.20 ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
THE PROPERTY OF CONSEP. IT MUST NOT
BE DISCLOSED OR LENT TO A THIRD PARTY P.O. BOX 6625
Phone +612 9756-5299
Fax +612 9756-5102
GRAVITY CIRCUIT SIZE
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK
REV REV. BY DATE DESCRIPTION
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
CONSEP NSW 2164, AUSTRALIA
E-Mail sales@consep.com.au Website
www.consep.com.au
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES
Process & Instrument Diagram A1
INTERCONNECTION DC CABLES
CLIENT SUPPLY
CONSEP SUPPLY MINE SITE RUN
LEGEND
MAXIMUM THREE PHASE VOLTAGE T44
150-38-SD-VP TO FUME LINE TAG = A-B-C-D
SUPPLIED TO RECTIFIER = 480VAC + 5% VALVE SYMBOLS
EXTRACTION A- LINE SIZE (DN)
80x150 BALL VALVE B- LINE NUMBER
480VAC SUPPLY CONSEP RHE800 ELECTROWINNING CELL S.P.
BUTTERFLY VALVE C- LINE MATERIAL
FROM LCP03 CSE0609 15
V86
D- PROCESS FLUID
ELECTROWINNING T43 DIAPHRAGM VALVE
LINE MATERIAL
V92
RECTIFIER PANEL V84 KNIFE GATE VALVE MS - MILD STEEL
HARDWIRED COMMS 15
S.P. ROTARY ANALOG SS - STAINLESS STEEL
0-8V,800A 80x15
FROM LCP02 CONTROL ACTUATOR H - HOSE
SD - SPIRAL DUCT
LCP04 EC71 600x600x9 ROTARY ACTUATOR
HARDWIRED CONTROL 80x50
NY - NYLON
MANUAL PISTON ACTUATOR PE - POLYETHYLENE
FROM LCP03 HAND V85 PROCESS FLUID
WHEEL T42 MANUAL HAND WHEEL
MINE SITE RUN CONSEP SUPPLY V83 CN - SODIUM CYANIDE
T41 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
T40 50 OH - CAUSTIC SOLUTION
50 PIPELINE REDUCER PW - PROCESS WATER
TO SLUDGE 50-36-PE-LS
PRESSURE REDUCING
LS - LEACH SOLUTION
COLLECTION DS - DESLIME SOLIDS
VALVE
SR - SOLIDS RESIDUE
NON RETURN VALVE RW - RAW RATER
FLEXIBLE CONNECTION BS - BARREN SOLIDS
PIPE COUPLING MF - MULTIPLE FLUIDS
MANUAL CT - CONCENTRATE
GEARED HANDWHEEL VP - VAPOUR
MINE SITE RUN CONSEP SUPPLY T4 CLIENT TERM'N POINT PA - PROCESS AIR
LIT IA - INSTRUMENT AIR
75
GENERAL POWER = 480VAC/3PH/60Hz
PREG. SOL'N FROM MAX 3PH POWER TO RECTIFIER = 480VAC + 5%
LE FIELD INSTRUMENT POWER = 24VDC
DISSOLUTION MODULE 75 T37
T32 MOTOR CONTROL VOLTAGE = 220VAC/1PH/60Hz
Refer Dwg C22600-500-01-101 T30 T38 SPARE SOLENOID AND CONTROL VOLTAGE = 24VDC
T35 50 50 ANALOG CONTROL VOLTAGE = 24VDC
50 T33 80 80 50
TO FLOOR
SUMP PUMP V81 OVERFLOW 80 PLEASE NOTE
CS500EW THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS
THE PROPERTY OF CONSEP PTY. LTD.
ELECTROWINNING WITHOUT A WRITTEN CONSENT FROM THE OWNER

50-32-MS-LS
Pty. Ltd.
IMMERSION CELL SOLUTION
TO BARREN
HEATERS 1x20 kW FEED TANK TE TT
NOTE:-
SOLUTION PUMP HE73 TK71
T36 V82 74 74 MINESITE SUPPLY [CLIENT]
50x32 1.9m3
T39
FLUSHING
POINT
15 V90
M 50x15 V89 CLIENT 480V, 60Hz
3 50-31-MS-LS 50 T34 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
4 kW V80
ELECTROWINNING HARDWIRE INTERFACE
INSTRUMENT AIR 5-10 SCFM
at 600-700kPag
CELL SOLUTION TO ELECTROWINNING MCC/ INSTR. TO CONSEP ACACIA PLC
LE 75
FEED PUMP PP72 MARSHALLING / SOLENOID PANEL HARDWIRE INTERFACE
INSTRUMENT 10-NY-IA 10x6
AIR LCP03 TO EW RECTIFIER

T45
480V, 60Hz SUPPLY
TO EW RECTIFIER
CLIENT Doc. No. CLIENT:
-- TES-ORO NICOZ - SAN ALBINO PROJECT

EXCEPT AS NOTED CHK. DATE C22600-500-02-101 CONTRACT No.
MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION MST 15.02.20 C22600

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
ELECTROWINNING MODULE
1 NT 16.04.20 UPDATED EW FEED PUMP MOTOR - PP72M, BEFORE 2.2kW - NOW 4kW NTS
BE DISCLOSED OR LENT TO A THIRD PARTY P.O. BOX 6625
Phone +612 9756-5299
Fax +612 9756-5102
MODEL CS500EW SIZE
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK
CONSEP NSW 2164, AUSTRALIA
E-Mail sales@consep.com.au Website
www.consep.com.au
Process & Instrument Diagram A1
FLS - TES-ORO NICOZ - SAN ALBINO GOLD PROJECT

CONSEP ACACIA CS500/CS500EW
WIRE COLOUR CODING TERMINAL LEGEND
480/220 VAC
Analog, PLC & 24VDC
1. 480VAC WIRING
Device Terminals
ACTIVE - PHASE COLOUR - Red(Rd), White (We) Blue (Be)
NEUTRAL - Black (Bk) CONDUCTOR SIZING (MINIMUM)
EARTH - Green (Gn/Yw) 6. LAMPS 1. 480VAC POWER - 2.5 SQ. MM
Closed - Red (Rd) 2. 220 VAC CONTROL - 1.0 SQ.MM
2. 220 VAC WIRING Off, Stopped - Red (Rd) 3. 24VDC FIELD - 1.5 SQ. MM
ACTIVE - Orange (Oe) 4. 24VDC PANEL - 1.0 SQ. MM
On, Open, Running - Green (Gn)
SWITCHED - Grey (Gy) 5. 24VDC ANALOG - 1.5 SQ. MM
Alarm, Fault, Trip - Amber (Am)
NEUTRAL - Black (Bk) Healthy, Other - White (We) CABLE TAG SUFFIX
EARTH - Green (Gn/Yw)
Power : -Ex
7. PUSHBUTTONS Instrument: -Nx
3. 24VDC WIRING Emerg. Stop - Red Mushroom (Rd) Control : -Cx
Data : -Dx
POSITIVE - Brown (Bn) Start - Green (Gn) Pneumatic : -Px
SWITCHED - Pink (Pk) Stop - Red (Red)
NEGATIVE - Purple (Pu) Other - Black (Bk) REFERENCE DRAWINGS
1. CONSEP ACACIA P & I D DIAGRAM - C22600-500-01-101
4. MISCELLANEOUS 2. CONSEP ELECTROWINNING P & I D DIAGRAM - C22600-500-02-101
EXTERNAL VOLTAGES - White (We) 3. ACACIA CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT & WIRING SCHEMATICS - C22600E9002 to 9024
(eg. CLIENT SUPPLY TO VOLTS FREE CONTACTS)
4. ELECTROWINNING PANEL LAYOUT & WIRING SCHEMATICS - C22600E9031 to 9036
5. SCREENED DC CABLE 5. ELECTROWINNING RECIFIER LAYOUT & WIRING SCHEMATICS - C22600E9037 to 9039
6. SINGLE LINE DRAWINGS - C22600E9041 to 9048
PAIR - WHITE (+), BLACK (-) 7. LOCAL KNELSON HMI PANEL - C22600E9051 to 9052
TRIAD - WHITE (+), BLACK (-), RED (SENSE) 8. PANEL PARTS LIST - C22600_PartsList.xls
9. CABLE SCHEDULE - C22600_CableList.xls
10. PLC I/O SCHEDULE - C22600_PLCIO.xls
11. MULTICORE TERMINATION SCHEDULE - C22600_MulticoreTermShed.xls
NOTE: A SWITCHED CORE IS A CORE THAT IS SWITCHED BY A CONTROL COMPONENT
SUCH AS A CONTACT, SWITCH,PLC IO, ETC, BUT NOT A CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSE
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY

SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002)
CLIENT:
NICOZ RESOURCES S.A.
DIMENSION TOLERANCES NT 30.01.20 C22600
EXCEPT AS NOTED CHK. DATE C22600E9001 CONTRACT No.

RMH 30.01.20
APRV. DATE TITLE
3 NT 05.05.20 AS BUILT LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
SAN ALBINO PROJECT REV
3
2 NT 07.04.20 SCOPE REVISED AS PER LOCAL KNELSON HMI PANEL ADDED
SCALE
NTS
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
1 NT 12.03.20 REVISED AS PER CLIENT MARK-UPS Phone +612 9756-5299

BE DISCLOSED OR LENT TO A THIRD PARTY
P.O. BOX 6625
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK Fax +612 9756-5102 DISSOLUTION MODULE SIZE
E-Mail sales@consep.com.au
CONSEP
NSW 2164, AUSTRALIA Website www.consep.com.au
Wiring Legend A1
37 37
18
CONSEP ACACIA CS500 CONSEP ACACIA CS500

DISSOLUTION MODULE DISSOLUTION MODULE
15 PLC CONTROL PANEL LCP02 MCC CONTROL PANEL LCP01 2
C
L Isolator ESTOP 37
ON
SW1
OFF
MAIN ISOLATOR
COM CPU PWR
PanelView
C
L HMI
DISSOLUTION POWER
RUN FAULT ON
37 PL02 PL03 PL01
1200.0000
ELECTROWINNING
RUN FAULT
21
PL04 PL05
37
Max'm 1800
37
1480 from FLOOR 21 WHITE
ON RED
WARNING
PCV101 TWO SOURCES OF ISOLATION SW1 and CB1
PLC NOT ISOLATED BY MAIN ISOLATOR
1
36
38 LCP02 GLAND PLATE LCP01 GLAND PLATE
38 1
800.0000
800.0000
400 NOTE:
MCC
1. LABEL DETAILS - MAIN LABEL (Equipment Name - 25 mm, Main Description 12mm) All other 6 mm LETTERING
2. LABEL SHROUDED LIVE COMPONENTS (PANEL ISOLATED) WITH RED LABEL " DANGER 480 VAC" OR "DANGER 220 VAC"
3. PANEL CONSTRUCTION FORM 1, PROTECTION TO IP66 [HMI AND SW1 IP65], PANEL DEPTH IS 300mm
FLOOR LEVEL 4. SHROUDS TO BE FITTED TO ALL LIVE COMPONENTS WHEN MAIN ISOLATOR IS OFF
PLC
5. POWDERCOATED MILD STEEL PANELS (PEBBLE GREY - RAL7032), MILD STEEL GLAND PLATE PANEL
6. LCP01 PANEL SUPPLY 480V, 60 Hz, 52 AMPS THREE PHASE
7. ALL WIRING TO AS3000
ORIENTATION
8. FOR PARTS LIT REFER C22600_PartsList.xls
CLIENT:
MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION RMH 30.01.20

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
2 NT 16.04.20 REVISED AS PER LOAD CHANGED
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
1 NT 12.03.20 REVISED AS PER CLIENT MARK-UPS Phone +612 9756-5299 NTS
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
Control Panel Layout A1
800 800 WHITE ON RED
5 6 8 17
14 7 9 10 2 5 37
37
8W LED LIGHT 8W LED LIGHT
37 ESW PLC
4 POINT ANALOG OUT
16 POINT RELAY OUT
16 POINT RELAY OUT
16 POINT RELAY OUT
16 POINT RELAY OUT

16 POINT ANALOG IN
16 POINT DIGITAL IN
16 POINT DIGITAL IN
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY
CompactLogix CPU
3
ALLEN BRADLEY
PLC Power Supply
END CAP
1769-PB4
CompactLogix
MAIN ISOLATOR
END CAP
CB1 CB2 CB3-CB5 CB6
TRANSFORMER
16
OT100
480V/220V
23
73H
GPO
20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RCB 750VA
37 SW1
GPO IS FOR INSTRUMENT
OR LAPTOP USE ONLY
4
37
TB3
11
1
DCB5 - DCB10
1
22
TB5
PP03 HE08 PP04 FE07
DC PSU DCB1 - DCB4
12 13 31
MCB1 MCB4 MCB2 MCB3
11
ANALOG
25 24VDC,10A
POWER
SUPPLY
DC INPUT
TB3
24
40
28 37
1
PNEUMATIC ZONE - MANIFOLD EXHAUST VENTED OUTSIDE PANEL
V21
V22 PP03 HE08 PP04 FE07
VR AR SR1 to SR4
SOLENOIDS
TB8
37
V23
V24
K1 K4 K2 K3
31
TB7
V25
V26
26 1
DC POWER
15
TB5
V27
V28
34
25
32
70
V29
PNEUMATIC TUBING
V30
38
FINDER FINDER
55 55
SP ESR1
V33
ESR2
20
TB4
VM1
19 27
Earth
29
1
V34
V35
V37 TB1 TB2
37
DC OUTPUT
V38
CLIENT
35 V39
V40
31 1 15 1 30
NEUTRAL BAR
V41 DC CONTROL
EARTH BAR
38 V43
TB6
V44 N
-
E
AC
VM2 30
40
TB4
50
LCP02 LCP01
38 37 33 29 31
1 37 31 33
CLIENT:
NOTE: FOR PARTS LIT REFER C22600_PartsList.xls NICOZ RESOURCES S.A.

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
2 NT 05.05.20 AS BUILT
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
1L1 1L1
1L2 1L2
MAIN ISOLATOR
SW1
80A
480VAC TO /05
1L1 L1 (Rd) L1 480V,60Hz L1
1L2 L2 (We) L2 L2
1L3 L3 (Be) L3 L3
REF. /24
EARTH LINK E (Gn/Yw) E E E
DOOR, CHASSIS
GLANDPLATE
REF. /14,21
REF. /14,21
MCB1 MCB2
14.5-20A
I> I> I> 4-6.3A
I> I> I>
MCC PANEL
L1-2
L2-2
L3-2
L1-1
L2-1
L3-1
1 3 5 1 3 5
K1 REF. /14,21 K2 REF. /14,21
LCP01
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 E 2 4 6
TB1 MCC PANEL 2 4 6
PP03-1
PP03-2
PP03-3
PP04-1
PP04-2
PP04-3
LCP01
FIELD
FIELD
E2 E3
PP03-E1 PP04-E1
V V
U W U W
E1
E E
LCP01-E1
3 PHASE + E
480V, 60Hz, 52 A
3 PP03 3 PP04
CONSEP ACACIA DISCHARGE PUMP CONSEP ACACIA FEED PUMP
FROM CLIENT DISTRIBUTION BOARD
11.0 kW - 16.8 AMPS 4 kW - 6.5 AMPS
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY CLIENT:
SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002) NICOZ RESOURCES S.A.

APRV. DATE TITLE
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
3
2 NT 16.04.20 SCOPE REVISED AS PER ACACIA FEED PUMP CHANGED
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
Control Panel Wiring A1
480/220VAC
480V,60Hz CB1,10A 750VA CB2,10A 220V,60Hz
1L1 (Rd) L1A (Rd) A1 A2 (Oe)
(We) (We) N LINK
220VAC
1L2 L2A AN1 AN (Bk)
TO /06
(Gn/Yw)
L1 480V,60Hz L1 (Rd)
480VAC
TRANSFORMER
FROM /04
L2 L2 (We) CB6 CB3 CB4

10A 4A 4A
L3 L3 (Be) RCD
(Oe) (Bk) (Oe) (Bk)

(Oe) (Bk)
E (Gn/Yw) E
N6
A6
AN
AN
A3
A4
L N E
SERVICE GPO
MCC PANEL
MCB3 MCB4
1-1.6A
I> I> I> 23-32A
I> I> I>
INSTRUMENT
LCP01
REF. /14,21 REF. /14,21
& PC USE ONLY
L1-3
L2-3
L3-3
1/5 1/6 1/7 1/8 1/9 1/10

TB1 TB1
L1-4
L2-4
L3-4
DISSOLUTION
MOTOR CONTROLS
1 3 5 1 3 5 REF /14
K3 REF. /14,21 K4 REF. /14,21
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 2 E
HE08-1
HE08-2
HE08-3
FE07-1
FE07-2
FE07-3
E21
LCP03-E2
FIELD
E4 E5 TB10 10/1 10/2 10/3
FE07-E1 HE08-E1 V
V
U W E
U
ELECTROWINNING
E W
3 HE08 CONTROL
3 FE07 PANEL LCP03
REF. /33
LEACHAID SCREW FEEDER SOLUTION TANK HEATER
0.75 kW - 1.54 AMPS 20.0 kW RESISTIVE - 24 AMPS TO ELECTROWINNING
220VAC MOTOR CONTROLS
Note: Contactor K4 to be sized for min'm 50A RESISTIVE
SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002) CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
NTS
CONSEP ACACIA CS500

P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
CB5,10A DC PSU
A2 DC+ 24VDC DC+ 24VDC
220VAC FROM /05
(Oe) (Oe) A5 L + (Bn)
+
(Bk) (Bk) AN N - CMN (Pu) CMN
24VDC
TO /07
-
E (Gn/Yw)
220VAC/24VDC
24VDC,10A
DCB1 DCB2 DCB3 DCB4

2A 2A 2A 2A
(Bn)
(Bn) (Pu) (Bn) (Pu) (Bn) (Pu)
DC+1
DC+2
DC+3
DC+4
CMN
CMN
CMN
CMN
DS1
(Pk)
MCC PANEL LCP01
MCC PANEL LCP01

DC+1S
DISSOLUTION
DISSOLUTION
8/1 8/2 8/3 8/4 8/5 8/6 8/7 8/8 8/9
LED LIGHT TB8
FIELD
1 2 E
1 2 E 1 2 E
E13
E11 E E12 E
L N L N AIT16-E1
FIT09-E1 FIT10-E1
L N E
FOR ANALOG FOR ANALOG
REFER /08 REFER /08
FOR PULSE FOR PULSE
REFER /24 24VDC,12W REFER /24 24VDC,12W CYANIDE
MONITOR
CONSEP ACACIA REAGENT AIT16
FEED FLOWMETER FLOWMETER
FOR ANALOG
FIT09 FIT10 REFER /09
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY (CLIENT SUPPLY)
SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002) CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
3/1-10
TB3 24VDC
3/11-20 REF /08-12
4/1-5
POWER TB4 24VDC

3/6-10 REF /13
TB2 TB5 DCB9,4A
PL01
DC+ 1 DC+ (Bn) DC+ (Bn) DC+ (Bn) DC+9
2/1 5/60 5/1-5
24VDC FROM /06
TB5 24VDC
2 (Pu) CMN (Pu) CMN
2/2 5/61 5/6-10 REF /21,22,24
2/3 E 5/62 (Gn/Yw)
Part C70
LCP01-C1 DCB10
(Pu) (Pu)
2A DC+
(Bn) (Bn)
(Bn) (Pu)
DC+10
CMN
PLC
DCB7 DCB8
+ - E 2A 2A
SLOT 3 - 1769-OW16
SLOT 1 - 1769-IF16C
SLOT 2 - 1769-OF2
16 RELAY OUTPUT
16 RELAY OUTPUT
16 RELAY OUTPUT
SLOT 4 - 1769-OW16
SLOT 5 - 1769-OW16
SLOT 6 - 1769-OW16
2 ANALOG OUTPUT
Compactlogix CPU
16 RELAY OUTPUT
SLOT 8 - 1769-IQ16
SLOT 7 - 1769-IQ16
(Bn) (Pu)
16 ANALOG INPUT
(Bn) (Pu)
16 24VDC INPUT
16 24VDC INPUT
1769-L33ER
DCB5 DCB6 CHASSIS
2A 6A
ENDCAP
(Bn) (Bn)
CompactLogix
POWER
DC+5
DC+6
CMN
CMN
SUPPLY
1769-PB4
DC+7
DC+8
CMN
CMN
DS1
MCC PANEL LCP01
24VDC,100W
(Pk)
NODE 1
DISSOLUTION
DC+7S
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
ESW 24VDC,3W
8 PORT 10/100, 8Cu HMI
REF. /19,20
REF. /21,22
REF. /23,24
REF. /08-11
REF. /13,14
REF. /15,16
REF. /17,18
ETHERNET UNMANAGED SWITCH + - E
REF. /12
RED LION
ETHERNET
7" CR1000-7 HMI
Cat6
24VDC,6W
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
LED LIGHT
ETHERNET
Cat6
Cat6
Cat6
Cat6
NODE 2
Cat6
Cat6
PLC PANEL Cat6 DOOR MOUNTED
DISSOLUTION
4/45
TB4 4/46 4/47
PLC PANEL LCP02
LCP03-C1 1 2 E
PROGRAMMING INTERFACE
C80 FOR COMPACTLOGIX/HMI (BY OTHERS)
11/1 11/2 11/3
ETHERNET ADDRESSES
FIELD
TB11 D76 LCP02-D1

NODE 1: PLC ADDRESS 10.0.0.1
NODE 2: ACACIA HMI ADDRESS 10.0.0.2 ETHERNET COMMS INTERFACE
ELECTROWINNING FOR CLIENT CONTROL SYSTEM (BY OTHERS)
PANEL LCP03 SUBNET ADDRESS: 255.255.255.0
D77 LCP04-D1
REFER DWG /33
ETHERNET COMMS INTERFACE
FOR ELECTROWINNING RECTIFIER (REF ./39)
SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002) D84 KCP01-D1
FOR KNELSON AND KNELSON HMI (REF ./52)
CLIENT:

RMH 30.01.20
APRV. DATE TITLE
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
3
2 NT 07.04.20 ADDED D84
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
FE YOKOGAWA
AXG- 50mm
FE YOKOGAWA
AXG - 25mm
TRANSMITTER
P103 LE12-P1 AIR PURGE TRANSMITTER
P104 LE13-P1 AIR PURGE
MOUNT FROM LCP02 MOUNT FROM LCP02
FLOW FLOW
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER LE LE
FIT09 FIT10 12 SITRANS LU 13 SITRANS LU
CURRENT CURRENT LEVEL LEVEL

+I -I +I -I TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
LIT12 LIT13
FOR POWER ACTIVE FOR POWER ACTIVE + - + -
REF/06 REF/06
FOR PULSE FOR PULSE LOOP POWERED LOOP POWERED
REF/24 REF/24
(1We) (1Bk) (1We) (1Bk) (We) (We) (Bk)

Part Part (Bk)
N51 N52 N53
FIT09-N1 FIT10-N1 LIT12-N1 N55
LIT13-N1
LIT13+
I:1/03+
FIT09+
FIT10+
I:1/00-
I:1/01-
LIT12+
I:1/02+
PANEL FIELD
LCP02
3/21 3/11 3/22 3/12 3/1 3/23 3/2 3/24 3/25
TB3
PLC
(Pu) (Bn) (Bn)
CMN CMN DC+9 DC+9
I:1/00+
I:1/01+
I:1/02+
I:1/03+
In0+ In1+ In2+ In3+ SLOT: 1-1
01/00 01/01 01/02 01/03
ADDRESS : 01
SOLUTION TANK
ALLEN BRADLEY
CONSEP ACACIA FEED CONSEP ACACIA Reagent CONSEP ACACIA VESSEL
FLOWRATE FLOWRATE LEVEL TRANSMITTER LEVEL TRANSMITTER
1769-IF16C
FIT09 FIT10 LIT12 LIT13
0-30 m3/h 0-18 m3/h 0-100 % 0-1,600 litres 16 ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: INTERNAL / EXTERNAL SCREENED CABLE SHIELD TO BE TERMINATED
AT TB3 TERM. STRIP END ONLY - INSULATE OTHER END WITH HEAT SHRINK

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
RT100
TE (CLIENT SUPPLY)
TEMPERATURE HEAD MOUNTED CYANIDE
TRANSMITTER PUCK TRANSMITTER MONITOR
TT14 AIT16
+ - + -
LOOP POWERED FOR POWER
REF/06
(We) (Bk) (We) (Bk)
N57 N59
TT14-N1 AIT16-N1
I:1/04+
TT14+
I:1/05-
AIT16+
3/3 3/26 3/27 3/13 3/4 3/28 3/5 3/29 3/30

TB3
PANEL
LCP02
(Bn) (Bn) (Bn)
(Pu) CMN
PLC
DC+9 DC+9 DC+9 (Pu) CMN
I:1/04+
I:1/05+
I:1/06+
I:1/07+
24VDC
(Bn) DC+9 FROM /07
In4+ In5+ In6+ In7+ SLOT: 1-2

01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07
ADDRESS : 01
CLIENT --- ---

ALLEN BRADLEY
ACACIA SOLUTION TANK
TEMPERATURE CYANIDE MONITOR SPARE ANALOG SPARE ANALOG
AIT16 INPUT INPUT
1769-IF16C
TT14
0-100 Deg.C 0-50 ppm --- --- 16 ANALOG INPUT

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
TRANSMITTER
MOUNT FROM LCP02
TE LE
75 SITRANS LU
TEMPERATURE
LEVEL
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
TT74 LIT75
+ - + -
LOOP POWERED LOOP POWERED
(We) (Bk) (We) (Bk)

N82 N83
TT74-N1 LIT75-N1
12/5
ELECTROWINNING
LIT75+
I:1/09+
I:1/08+
TT74+
REF./36 CONTROL PANEL

TB12 12/1 12/2 12/3 12/4 LCP03
(1We) (1Bk) (2We) (2Bk)
N81
LCP03-N1
FIELD
TB3 3/31 3/14 3/6 3/32 3/33 3/15 3/34 3/16 3/35
PANEL
LCP02
DC+9 DC+9
PLC
CMN CMN (Pu) CMN
I:1/08+
I:1/09+
I:1/10+
I:1/11+
24VDC
(Bn)
(Bn) DC+9 FROM /07
In8+ In9+ In10+ In11+ SLOT: 1-3

01/08 01/09 01/10 01/11
ADDRESS : 01
ELECTROWINNING SOLUTION ELECTROWINNING SOLUTION --- ---

ALLEN BRADLEY
TANK TEMPERATURE TANK LEVEL SPARE ANALOG SPARE ANALOG
TT74 LIT75 INPUT INPUT
1769-IF16C
0-100 Deg.C 0-1,900 litres --- --- 16 ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY AT TB3 TERM. STRIP END ONLY - INSULATE OTHER END WITH HEAT SHRINK
CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
PANELFIELD
LCP02
TB3
PLC
3/7 3/36 3/37 3/17 3/8 3/38 3/39 3/18 3/40
(Pu) CMN CMN CMN (Pu)

I:1/12+
I:1/13+
I:1/14+
I:1/15+
24VDC
DC+9 DC+9 DC+9 FROM /07
(Bn) (Bn)
In12+ In13+ In14+ In15+ SLOT: 1-4

01/12 01/13 01/14 01/15
ADDRESS : 01
Com
ALLEN BRADLEY
--- --- --- ---
SPARE ANALOG SPARE ANALOG SPARE ANALOG SPARE ANALOG
1769-IF16C
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
--- --- --- ---
16 ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY NOTE: INTERNAL / EXTERNAL SCREENED CABLE SHIELD TO BE TERMINATED
SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002) AT TB2 TERM. STRIP END ONLY - INSULATE OTHER END WITH HEAT SHRINK
CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
ConSep ACACIA FEED --

FLOWRATE CONTROL SPARE SLOT: 2
VALVE POSITION (0 - 100%) ANALOG OUTPUT
FCV36 -- ALLEN BRADLEY
1769-OF2
2/OUT0 2/OUT1 2 ANALOG OUTPUT
IOut0+ ANLG Com IOut1+ ANLG Com
DC+9 (Bn)
O:2/0+
O:2/1+
O:2/0-
O:2/1-
PLC PANEL
CMN
(Pu)
LCP02
3/41 3/42 3/10 3/19 3/45 3/43 3/44
TB3
FIELD
FY36+
O:2/0-
DC+9
CMN
FCV36-N1
N58
2We 2Bk 1We 1Bk

AIR SUPPLY


11+ 12-
P102 + -
FCV36-P1 SIGNAL +24VDC
FY36 I/Z
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC
BURKERT 8792
POSITIONER 24V+
+24V B
GND FY36
0V P
11+
AIR SUPPLY
FCV36 Wh+
12-
A FCV
Bk-
CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
24VDC CONTROLS - EW ESTOP PROTECTED
ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING BARREN ELECTROWINNING SPARE SPARE SPARE SLOT: 3-1
PUMP TANK HEATER FEED ELECTROLYTE RECTIFIER DC DC DC ADDRESS: 03
START/STOP START/STOP VALVE DISCH. VALVE START/STOP OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC1
PP72S HE73S V81 V82 EW70SP --- --- ---
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
03/00 03/01 03/02 03/03 03/04 03/05 03/06 03/07 (RELAY)
OUT0 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 1769-OW16
DC+9-E11
O:3/0
O:3/1
O:3/2
O:3/3
O:3/4
O:3/5
O:3/6
O:3/7
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
4/11 4/12 4/13 4/14 4/15 4/16 4/17 4/18 ESR2 PLC PANEL
REF. /22
LCP02
4/1
3 4 8 9 5 (Bn)
LCP03-C1 DC+9
Part C80 24VDC
11/7 11/8 CMN FROM /07
11/4 11/5 11/6 (Pu)
TB11 TB11
CMN CMN (Pk)
SR11 SR12 Refer /34
11/9 11/10 EW
24VDC (Pu) 24VDC CMN
(Pu) (Pu) 24VDC CMN (Pu)
A32 (Pk) (Pk)
220VAC
(Gy) REF./33
MCB12
Ref. /34
MCB11
11/26
SV81-1
SV82-1
I> I> AS AS I:8/2 AS
O:3/3
O:3/2
FROM /34
FIELD
K11-1
K12-1
EW
(Gy) (Gy) 10x6
(Pk) CMN
ELECTROWINNING
(Pk)
CONTROL PANEL
(Pu)
SV81 SV82 11/27 11/28
SR12
TB11
SR11
LE75-P1
EW
K11-2
K12-2
P141
A2 A2 5 6 LCP03-P2
Ref. /34 Part C90
LCP03
P144
K11 K12
LCP04-C1
A1 A1 REF./34
AN 220VAC (Bk) 220VAC 42/5 42/6 ELECTROWINNING
600 kPa (6 BAR)
RECTIFIER PANEL
V81-P1 V82-P1
P142 V81 P143 V82 Ref. /34 LCP04 P140
LCP03-P1
CLIENT AIR SUPPLY

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
24VDC CONTROL - CA ESTOP PROTECTED
SOLIDS ConSep ACACIA LEACHAID ConSep ACACIA -- -- -- -- SLOT: 3-2

DISCHARGE FEED SCREW SOLUTION TANK SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE ADDRESS : 03
PUMP PUMP FEEDER HEATER DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC2
PP03S PP04S FE07S HE08S -- -- -- --
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
03/08 03/09 03/10 03/11 03/12 03/13 03/14 03/15 (RELAY)
DC+9-E12
PLC PANEL
(Bn)
O:3/10
O:3/11
O:3/12
O:3/13
O:3/14
O:3/15
LCP02
O:3/8
O:3/9
ESR1
REF. /24
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
(Bn) DC+9
24VDC
4/19 4/20 4/21 4/22 4/23 4/24 4/25 4/26
TB4 TB4 FROM /07
CMN
(Pe)
3 4 5 6
Part C70
LCP01-C1
2/4 2/5 2/6 2/7
TB2
SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC CMN
MCC PANEL
TB1
1/8 A4 (Gy)
LCP01
FIELD
220VAC
SR4
SR1
SR2
SR3
FROM CB4, ref. /05

1/9
K4-2
AN
K1-2
K2-2
K3-2
(Gy) (Gy) (Gy) (Gy)

MCB4
MCB1
MCB2
MCB3
(Bk) I> I> I> I>
REF. /05
K4-1
REF. /04 REF. /04 REF. /05

K1-1
K2-1
K3-1
A2 A2 A2 A2
K1 K2 K3 K4
A1 A1 A1 A1
220VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC
(Bk)
AN

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
24VDC CONTROLS - CA ESTOP PROTECTED
CYANIDE CAUSTIC MAKE UP CONSEP ACACIA CONCENTRATE CONCENTRATE CONCENTRATE DESLIME SLOT: 4-1
ADDITION ADDITION WATER SPRAY CONE CONE CONE OVERFLOW ADDRESS: 04
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE OVERFLOW FLUIDISATION DISCHARGE VALVE
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC1
V21 V22 V23 V24 VALVE - V25 VALVE - V26 VALVE - V27 V28
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
04/00 04/01 04/02 04/03 04/04 04/05 04/06 04/07 (RELAY)
DC+9-E1
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
24VDC
FROM ESR1 /16

CMN
O:4/0
O:4/1
O:4/2
O:4/3
O:4/4
O:4/5
O:4/6
O:4/7
(Pu)
CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN
U U U U U U U U
7/1 7/2 7/3 7/4 7/5 7/6 7/7 7/8
TB7 L L L L
TB7 L L L
L
PLC PANEL
LCP02
SV21-1
SV23-1
SV24-1
SV25-1
SV26-1
SV27-1
SV28-1
SV22-1
AS AS AS AS AS AS AS AS AS
O:4/1
O:4/3
O:4/4
O:4/5
O:4/6
O:4/7
O:4/0
O:4/2
SV21 SV22 SV23 SV24 SV25 SV26 SV27 SV28
10x6 10x6 10x6 10x6 FIELD

P101
LCP02-P2
P117
FCV36-P1
FE07-P1
LE12-P1
LE13-P1
V27-P1
V27-P2
P118 600 kPa (6 BAR)
V21-P1 V22-P1 V23-P1 V24-P1 V25-P1 V26-P1
V28-P1
P111 V21 P112 V22 P113 V23 P114 V24 P115 V25 P116 V26 V27 P119 V28 P100
P106
P103
P104
P102
LCP02-P1
CLIENT AIR SUPPLY
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY REF./08 REF./12
CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
LEACH CONSEP ACACIA -- SOLUTION TANK CONSEP ACACIA PREGNANT SOLUTION TANK CONSEP ACACIA SLOT: 4-2
OVERFLOW DECANT SPARE DISCHARGE FEED DISCHARGE JETMIX PREGNANT DRAIN ADDRESS: 04
VALVE VALVE SOLENOID VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC2
V29 V30 -- V33 V34 V35 V37 V38
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
04/08 04/09 04/10 04/11 04/12 04/13 04/14 04/15 (RELAY)
DC+9-E1
(Pk) (Pk) 24VDC
(Pk)
TO /15
O:4/10
O:4/11
O:4/12
O:4/13
O:4/14
O:4/15
O:4/8
O:4/9
ESR1
CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN REF. /24
(Bn) DC+9
U U U U U U U U 24VDC
7/9 7/10 7/11 7/12 7/13 7/14 7/15 7/16 (Pu) CMN FROM /07
TB7 L L L
TB7 L L L L
L
SV33-1
SV29-1
SV34-1
SV35-1
SV37-1
SV38-1
O:4/10
O:4/11
O:4/12
O:4/13
O:4/14
O:4/15
SV30-1
AS AS AS AS AS AS AS AS
O:4/9
O:4/8
SP-1
PLC PANEL
LCP02
SV29 SV30 SPARE SV33 SV34 SV35 SV37 SV38
FIELD
V29-P1 V30-P1 V33-P1 V34-P1 V35-P1 V37-P1 V38-P1
P120 V29 P121 P122 V33 P123 V34 P124 V35 P125 V37 P126 V38
V30

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
24VDC CONTROLS - CA ESTOP PROTECTED
CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA SOLIDS SUCTION CONSEP ACACIA SPARE SPARE SPARE SLOT: 5-1
WASTE DRAIN DESLIME WATER SOLIDS FLUIDISATION FLUSH DC DC DC ADDRESS: 05
VALVE VALVE DISCH. VALVE VALVE VALVE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC1
V39 V40 V41 V43 V44 --- --- ---
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
05/00 05/01 05/02 05/03 05/04 05/05 05/06 05/07 (RELAY)
DC+9-E2
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
ESR1
O:5/0
O:5/1
O:5/2
O:5/3
O:5/4
O:5/5
O:5/6
O:5/7
REF. /24
CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN CMN
U U U U U U U U (Bn) 24VDC
DC+9
7/17 7/18 7/19 7/20 7/21 7/22 7/23 7/24
TB7 L L L
TB7 L L L L
L
FROM /07
(Pu) CMN
PLC PANEL
LCP02
SV43-1
AS
SV41-1
SV39-1
SV40-1
SV44-1
AS AS AS O:5/3 AS
O:5/1
O:5/4
O:5/0
O:5/2
SV39 SV40 SV41 SV43 SV44
FIELD
P129 V41-P2
V41-P1 P130
V39-P1 V43-P1
V40-P1 V44-P1
P127 V39 P128 V41 P131 V43 P132
V40 V44

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
-- -- CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA CONSEP ACACIA SLOT: 5-2
SPARE SPARE DISSOLUTION DISSOLUTION ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING VISUAL AUDIBLE ADDRESS : 05
DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT RUNNING ALARMED RUNNING ALARMED ALARM ALARM
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC2
-- -- DISS-ON DIS-ALM EW-ON EW-ALM SYS-VAL SYS-AAL
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
05/08 05/09 05/10 05/11 05/12 05/13 05/14 05/15 (RELAY)
PLC PANEL
LCP02
O:5/10
O:5/11
O:5/12
O:5/13
O:5/14
O:5/15
O:5/8
O:5/9
(Bn) DC+9
(Pk) (Pk)
CMN 24VDC
(Pu)
FROM /07
4/27 4/28 4/30 4/35 4/31 4/36 4/32 4/33 4/34
4/29
TB4 TB4
10 11
C70
LCP01-C1
2/8 2/9
PL03 PL05 TB2
MCC PANEL
PL02 PL04
O:5/14
O:5/15
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
CMN CMN
LCP01
VR AR
DISSOLUTION DISSOLUTION ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING
RUNNING ALARM RUNNING ALARM
24VDC 24VDC
(Pu) CMN
Part 6 7
C80
LCP03-C1
11/11 11/12 VR AR
TB11 (Bn) (Pk) (Bn)
(Pk)
(Oe) (Pu) (Oe)
DC+9
DC+9
CMN
CMN
(Pk)
VR1
VR2
AR1
AR2
O:5/13
O:5/12
(Pu)
REF. /34
2/10 2/11 2/12 2/13 2/14 2/15 2/16 2/17
TB2
PL32 PL33
FIELD
24VDC LINK LINK
RUNNING CMN ALARM C74 C75
LCP02-C4 LCP02-C5
ELECTROWINNING CLIENT CLIENT
PANEL LCP03 VISUAL AUDIBLE
ALARM ALARM

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
CLIENT CONTROLS NOT ESTOP PROTECTED
DISCHARGING DISCHARGING DISSOLUTION DISSOLUTION ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING KNELSON KNELSON SLOT: 6-1
BARREN BARREN SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM No.1 No.2 ADDRESS: 06
SOLIDS SOLUTION RUNNING FAULT RUNNING FAULT FAULT FAULT
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC1
SYS_DBS SYS_DBL SYS_DRUN SYS_DFLT SYS_ERUN SYS_EFLT SYS_KN1_ALM SYS_KN2_ALM
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
6/00 6/01 6/02 6/03 6/04 6/05 6/06 6/07 (RELAY)
(Pk) (Pk)
CA
(Pk)
O:6/0
O:6/1
O:6/2
O:6/3
O:6/4
O:6/5
O:6/6
O:6/7
PLC PANEL
6/1 6/2 6/4 6/5 6/6 6/7 6/8 6/9
6/3
LCP02
TB6 TB6
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
FIELD
C71
LCP02-C1
A N B C D E F G H H
CLIENT CONTROL SYSTEM

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
CLIENT CONTROLS NOT ESTOP PROTECTED
CLIENT CLIENT --- --- --- --- --- --- SLOT: 6-2
CAUSTIC PUMP CYANIDE PUMP SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE ADDRESS: 06
RUN REQUEST RUN REQUEST OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
ALLEN BRADLEY
VAC/VDC2
SYS_CA_RUN SYS-CYA-RUN --- --- --- --- --- ---
16 DIGITAL OUTPUT
6/08 6/09 6/10 6/11 6/12 6/13 6/14 6/15 (RELAY)
(Pk) (Pk)
O:6/10
O:6/11
O:6/12
O:6/13
O:6/14
O:6/15
O:6/8
O:6/9
4/37 4/38 4/39 4/40 4/41 4/42 4/43 4/44 (Bn) DC+9
TB4 TB8 24VDC
CMN REF. /07
(Pu)
CR1 CR2
PLC PANEL
24VDC 24VDC
(Pu) LCP02
CR1 CR2
(We) (We)
(We) (We)
CR1A
CR1B
CR2A
CR2B
6/11 6/12 6/13 6/14

TB6
Part C87 Part C88

FIELD
CAPMP-C1 CYPMP-C1
CLIENT CLIENT
CAUSTIC CYANIDE
PUMP REQUEST PUMP REQUEST
(Optional) (Optional)

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
SOLIDS
FIELD
DISCHARGE PUMP PP03
GLAND WATER
SOLENOID
C61 DC+9
EV42-C1
MCC PANEL
K1 K2 K3 K4 I>
MCB1 I>
MCB2 I>
MCB3 I>
MCB4
REF. /04 REF. /04 REF. /05 REF. /05 REF. /04 REF. /04 REF. /05 REF. /05
LCP01
I:7/0
CMN
2/18 2/19 2/26

2/20 2/21 2/22 2/23 2/24 2/25
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part C70
LCP01-C1
TB5
PLC PANEL
5/11 5/12 5/13 5/14 5/15 5/16 5/17 5/18 5/19 5/20 5/1
LCP02
CMN
(Pu)
(Bn) DC+9
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
24VDC
CMN
REF. /07
I:7/0
I:7/1
I:7/2
I:7/3
I:7/4
I:7/5
I:7/6
I:7/7
(Pu)
IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 DC COM
7/00 7/01 7/02 7/03 7/04 7/05 7/06 7/07 SLOT: 7-1
ACACIA SOLIDS CONSEP ACACIA LEACHAID CA SOLUTION ACACIA SOLIDS CONSEP ACACIA LEACHAID CA SOLUTION ADDRESS : 07
DISCHARGE PUMP FEED PUMP SCREW FEEDER TANK HEATER DISCHARGE PUMP FEED PUMP SCREW FEEDER TANK HEATER 1769-IQ16
RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ALLEN BRADLEY
PP03R PP04R FE07R HE08R PP03F PP04F FE07F HE08F 16 DIGITAL INPUT (DC)

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
REFER /35 DC+9

(Bn) (Bn) DC+9
ELECTROWINNINMG
CONTROL PANEL
K11 K12 I>

MCB11 I>
MCB12 SW11
FIELD
ESTOP
(Pk)
LCP03
(Pk)
11/13 11/14 11/15 11/16 11/17 11/18 11/19
11 12 13 14 10 15 16
Part C80
LCP03-C1
5/21 5/22 5/23 5/24 5/2 5/25 5/26 5/27 5/28
PLC PANEL
DC+9
LCP02
SWR2
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
ESR2
ESR2
REF./32 REF./13,35 (Bn) DC+9
SW ESR 24VDC
(Pu)
I:7/10
I:7/11
I:7/12
I:7/13
I:7/14
I:7/15
R2 2
I:7/8
I:7/9
24VDC 24VDC CMN REFER /07

CMN CMN
IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 DC COM
7/08 7/09 7/10 7/11 7/12 7/13 7/14 7/15 SLOT: 7-2
ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING --- --- ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING ADDRESS : 07
PUMP SOLN TANK PUMP SOLN TANK SPARE SPARE MODULE E-STOP 1769-IQ16
RUNNING HEATER RUNNING FAULT HEATER FAULT DC INPUT DC INPUT ENABLED ENABLED ALLEN BRADLEY
PP72R HE73R PP72F HE73F --- --- EW_EN EW_ESPB 16 DIGITAL INPUT (DC)

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
ELECTROWINNING
RECTIFIER
PANEL LCP04
RUN FAULT IN REMOTE

CLIENT CONTROL SYSTEM CLIENT VOLTS FREE CONTACTS
50 49 48 47
Part C90 2 3 4
1
LCP04-C1
EW PANEL
11/22 11/23 11/24 11/25 LINK IF INPUT IS NOT AVAILABLE / NECESSARY

TB11
LCP03
DC+9
Ref /35
2 3 4 1
FIELD
Part C80 17 19 18 C72
LCP03-C1 LCP02-C2
5/63 5/64 5/65 6/22 6/23 6/24 6/25 6/26 6/10
TB5 TB6
PLC PANEL
(Bn)
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk) 24VDC
DC+9
REFER /07
LCP02
(Pu) CMN
REFER /24
I:8/0
I:8/1
I:8/2
I:8/3
I:8/4
I:8/5
I:8/6
I:8/7
IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 DC COM 1
8/00 8/01 8/02 8/03 8/04 8/05 8/06 8/07 SLOT: 8-1
ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING DISCHARGE OF LEACH DISCHARGE OF --- --- ADDRESS : 08
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER BARREN LIQUIDS
BARREN SOLIDS REAGANTS ARE
PERMITTED
SPARE SPARE 1769-IQ16
RUNNING FAULT IN REMOTE PERMITTED AVAILABLE (OPTIONAL) DC INPUT DC INPUT ALLEN BRADLEY
EW70R EW70F EW70_REM SYS-DBSP SYS-REA SYS-DBLP --- --- 16 DIGITAL INPUT (DC)

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
SW1 FIELD ESTOP

OR LINK
MCC PANEL
ESTOP
LCP01
FIT09 FIT10
DIG. OUT (DO)
FIT
DIG. OUT (DO) EARTH
C73
FIELD
POWER +24VDC 1 2
LCP02-C3
0 VDC 2/27
+I
ANALOG CURRENT
-i
P- P+ P- P+ +P
DO
PULSE -P
YOKOGAWA DIO
FOR POWER
ESTOP
FOR POWER AXF HEAD
REF /06 REF /06
FIT09+P
FIT10+P
FOR ANALOG FOR ANALOG
REF /8 REF /8
I:9/8
I:9/9
(Pk) (Bn)
N51 N52 5/40 5/39 5/38

FIT09-N1 FIT10-N1
ES
(2We) (2Bk) (2We) (2Bk)
PLC PANEL
LCP02
LINK
5/29 5/3 5/30 5/4 5/31 5/32 5/33 5/34 5/35 5/36 5/37
TB5
SWR1
ESR1
REF.
DC+9
(Bn) DC+9
(Bn) /14,16,17 (Bn)
DC+9
(Pk) (Pk) 24VDC
I:8/10
I:8/11
I:8/12
I:8/13
I:8/14
I:8/15
(Pk) SWR ESR
I:8/8
I:8/9
5/7 CMN
1 1
TO /23 REFER /07
(Pu) CMN (Pe)
(Bn)
IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 DC COM 2
8/08 8/09 8/10 8/11 8/12 8/13 8/14 8/15 SLOT: 8-2
ACACIA FEED REAGENTS -- -- -- DISSOLUTION DISSOLUTION FIELD DC ADDRESS : 08
FLOW PULSE FLOW PULSE SPARE SPARE SPARE MODULE E-STOP POWER 1769-IQ16
1 pulse/ 0.005m^3 1 pulse/ 0.0005m^3 DC INPUT DC INPUT DC INPUT ENABLED ENABLED AVAILABLE ALLEN BRADLEY
FIT09Q FIT10Q -- -- -- CA_EN CA_ESPB DC-ON
16 DIGITAL INPUT (DC)

CLIENT:

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
53
600 59 60 55 56
73 52
54
8W LED LIGHT
CONSEP ACACIA CS500EW 52
ELECTROWINNING
CONTROL PANEL LCP03
73
58
PP72 HE73 LCP04
MCB11 MCB12 MCB13 CB31-32 MAIN ISOLATOR
SW11
L Isolator
C ON
EARTH BAR
0N 0N 0N
ESPB SW11
OFF
OFF OFF OFF
73 E 67
66 MAIN ISOLATOR
68
RUN FAULT POWER ON
64
73
5 1
AC
PP72 HE73
SR11
SR12
EW1
EW2
EW2
PL32 PL33 PL31 K11 K12
TB10
65 57
DCB15
1
1000 K11
65
K12 68
61
TB11
DC
62
Max'm 1800
73
35
WARNING
TWO SOURCES OF ISOLATION
PCV102 SW11 and CB31 WHITE
63
5 1
ON RED
DC
68
TB12
V81 V82
VM11
69
VALVE SOLENOIDS
70
71 72
72 FIELD CONNECTION FROM BOTTOM
LCP03
51 73 73 51
72
NOTE:
580 1. LABEL DETAILS - MAIN LABEL (Equipment Name - 25 mm, Main Description 12mm) All other 6 mm LETTERING
2. LABEL SHROUDED LIVE COMPONENTS (PANEL ISOLATED) WITH RED LABEL " DANGER 480 VAC" OR "DANGER 220 VAC"
3. PANEL CONSTRUCTION FORM 1, PROTECTION TO IP66 [SW11 IP65], PANEL DEPTH IS 200mm
4. SHROUDS TO BE FITTED TO ALL LIVE COMPONENTS WHEN MAIN ISOLATOR IS OFF
5. POWDERCOATED MILD STEEL PANELS (BEIGE - RAL7032), MILD STEEL GLAND PLATE
6. PANEL SUPPLY 480V, 60 Hz, 42 AMPS THREE PHASE
7. ALL WIRING TO AS3000
DWG NO.: CLIENT:
8. FOR PARTS LIT REFER C22600_PartsList.xls NICOZ RESOURCES S.A.

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
3
2 NT 16.04.20 REVISED AS PER LOAD CHANGED
SCALE
N/A
CONSEP ACACIA CS500

P.O. BOX 6625
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK Fax +612 9756-5102 ELECTROWINNING MODULE SIZE
CONSEP
SW11, 63A
MAIN SWITCH 480V,60Hz
L1 L1A L1 (Rd)
L2 L2A L2 (We)
L3 L3A L3 (Be)
REF. /33
EARTH BAR E E (Gn/Yw)
MCB11 MCB12 MCB13

25A
4-6.3A
I> I> I> 23-32A
I> I> I>
REF. /33,35 REF. /33,35
L1-2
L2-2
L3-2
L1-1
L2-1
L3-1
L1
L2
L3
1 3 5 1 3 5
K11 K12
ELECTROWINNING 2 4 6 2 4 6
TB10 10/1 10/2 10/3 10/4 E

CONTROL PANEL
HE73-1
HE73-2
HE73-3
PP72-1
PP72-2
PP72-3
LCP03
E22 E23
1 2 3 E
FIELD
PP72-E1 HE73-E1
E20 E30
LCP03-E1 LCP04-E1
TB41
CLIENT SUPPLY 41/1 41/2 41/3 41/4
3 PHASE+E +
480V, 60Hz, 42A 0-8VDC, 0-800Amps
V V -
U W ER70
E E Ref./ 38
U E31
W
3 PP72 3 HE73 ELECTROWINNING
EC70-E1
RECTIFIER PANEL LCP04 - - + +

ELECTROWINNING PUMP ELECTROWINNING TANK HEATER
4 kW - 6.5 AMPS 20.0 kW RESISTIVE - 24 AMPS ELECTROWINNING
CELL CSE609
Note: Contactor K12 to be sized for min'm 50A RESISTIVE EC70
DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
3
2 NT 16.04.20 SCOPE REVISED AS PER ELECTROWINNING FEED PUMP CHANGED
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
1 NT 12.03.20 REVISED AS PER CLIENT MARK-UPS Phone +612 9756-5299 N/A
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
24VDC FROM DCB6
220VAC FROM CB3 - REF /05 REF /07 DISSOLUTION
1/5 1/6 1/7 4/45 4/46 4/47 PLC PANEL
TB1 TB4 LCP02
1 2 E 1 2 E
E21 Part C80 FIELD
LCP03-E2 LCP03-C1
TB10
10/5 10/6 10/7 ELECTROWINNING
TB11 11/1 11/2 11/3
A3 CONTROL PANEL
LCP03
DC+6
(Oe)
CB31 AN
4A
SW11 220VAC DCB15

(Gy) A31 A31S (Gy) 2A
DC+15
REF. /32 (Oe)
CMN
(Bk) (Oe)
CB32
ESTOP
REF./35
2A
DS3
A32
(Oe)
DC+15S
(Oe)
HSS02A
HSS02B
MCB12
MCB11
ELECTROWINNING
I> I>
L3
K12-1
K11-1
11/20 11/21
PANEL LCP03
(Gy)
PL31 LED LIGHT
SR12
SR11
220VAC SPARE CONTACT FOR E-STOP

POWER ON
K11-2
K12-2
(Gy)
A2 A2
FIELD
K11 K12
A1 A1
AN 220VAC 220VAC
REFER /32,35

DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
REF /13 REF /18 REF /13 DISSOLUTION

4/11 4/12 4/15 4/35 4/36 4/13 4/14
PLC PANEL
TB4 TB4 LCP02
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Part C80 FIELD
LCP03-C1
O:5/12
O:5/13
O:3/2
O:3/3
O:3/0
O:3/1
O:3/4
11/4 11/5 11/6 11/11 11/12 11/7 11/8
TB11 TB11
O:3/13
O:3/14
AS AS
AS
(Pk)
(Pk) (Pk)
10x6
PL32 PL33 SV81 SV82
V81-
V82-
SR11 SR12 EW
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 11/9 11/10
RUNNING ALARM TB11
CMN (Pu) CMN (Pu) CMN
FROM /33
LE75-P1
11/26
I:8/2
FROM /35
ER70
EW
P144
CMN
ELECTROWINNING
(Pk) (Pu) P141
CONTROL PANEL 11/27 11/28
LCP03-P2
TB11 Ref /13
EW
LCP03
600 kPa (6 BAR)

5 6
Part C90
LCP04-C1 V81-P1 V82-P1
FIELD TB42 42/5 42/6
P142 V81 P143 V82 PCV103
P140
RECTIFIER PANEL V81 V82 LCP03-P1
CLIENT INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY
LCP04
REFER /39

SUFFIX INDICATES DWG No. (EG " REF. /02 " REFERS TO DWG C22600E9002) DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
ELECTROWINNING
ESTOP
HE73R
PP72R
Ref ./39
HE73F
PP72F
SW11
RECTIFIER
PANEL LCP04
DC+9 REF. /32 (Bn)
ELECTROWINNING
RUN IN FAULT
CONTROL PANEL
REMOTE
42/2 42/1 42/4 42/3

K11 K12 I> MCB11 I> MCB12 SW11 ESTOP TB42
REF. /22,33 2 1 4 3
(Oe) (Pk) (Pk) (Pk) (Pk) Part C90
LCP03
LCP04-C1
11/17 11/13 11/14 11/15 11/16 11/18 11/19 11/22 11/23 11/26 11/25 11/24
TB11 TB11 I:8/2
DC+9
FIELD
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Part C80
LCP03-C1
DC+9
I:7/10
I:7/11
I:7/14
I:7/15
I:7/8
I:7/9
I:8/0
I:8/2
I:8/1
DISSOLUTION
PLC PANEL
5/2 5/21 5/22 5/23 5/24 5/27 5/28 5/63 5/65 5/64
TB5 TB5
LCP02
REFER /22 REFER /23

DWG NO.: CLIENT:


RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
TRANSMITTER
MOUNT FROM LCP02
LE
TE 75 SISTRAN LU
LEVEL
TRANSMITTER
TEMPERATURE
LIT75
TRANSMITTER
+ -
TT74 LOOP POWERED
+ -
LOOP POWERED
(We) (Bk) (We) (Bk)

N82 N83
TT74-N1 LIT75-N1
ELECTROWINNING
CONTROL PANEL
12/1 12/2 12/3 12/4 12/5
TB12
LCP03
I:1/08+
I:1/09+
LIT75+
TT74+
REF. /10
(1We) (1Bk) (2We) (2Bk)
FIELD
N81
LCP03-N1
DISSOLUTION
3/31 3/14 3/35 3/6 3/32
PLC PANEL
TB3
LCP02
I:1/08+
I:1/09+
(Bn) (Bn)
DC+9 DC+9
REF. /10
DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
2
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
1103
800 94
VENTILLATION
FAN
93
RECTIFIER CONTROL UNIT pe280
STAINLESS STEEL
F1 Uv ON 108
FAN FILTER 291 BY 291

LOCAL - REMOTE FAN RAIN SHIELD
FAN CUTOUT 291 BY 291

F2 Uv OFF
95
F3 Ia
F4 Ia CLR
HS41
96
104
97
INLET OUTLET
480/
220VAC
TX
300VA
98
92 RECTIFIER
1200
CONSEP MODEL RHE800

LCP04 108 400VAC INPUT 99
24VDC
PE3000-5
PSU
3.3A
ELECTROWINNING RECTIFIER
CONTROL PANEL
103
1050
0-8V, 800A OUTPUT
RR LR SR FR DCB44
265 DEEP
480VAC INPUT 105

0-10V, 800A OUTPUT
105
1
TB42
10
106
DC BUSBARS
LOWER +VE
100
FAN FILTER 291 BY 291

UPPER -VE
97 101
CB43, 42, 41
95
102
1
TB41
DC CABING ZONE
106
6
107
INLET FIELD CONNECTION FROM BOTTOM
HRE1500
PANEL DEPTH 400mm 91
NOTE:
108 108 108 91
1. LABEL DETAILS - MAIN LABEL(Main Description -12mm), All other 6 mm LETTERING
500 2. SHROUDS TO BE FITTED TO ALL LIVE COMPONENTS WHEN MAIN ISOLATOR IS OFF
3. PANEL CONSTRUCTION MILD STEEL, PAINTED PEBBLE GREY (RAL7032), PANEL PROTECTION TO IP66 (HMI, FAN & FILTER REDUCE RATING TO IP54)
4. PANEL SUPPLY 480V +5%, 60 Hz, 12 AMPS
8. FOR PARTS LIST REFER C22600_PartsList.xls
DWG NO.: CLIENT:


RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
Rectifier Control Panel Layout A1
CONSEP HIGH EFFICIENCY PANEL

ELECTROWINNING RECTIFIER VENTILLATION FAN
CB41
CONTROL PANEL LCP04 6A L1A 480/220VAC (Rd) A42
220V, 1 PHASE, 175W
(Rd) AT (Rd)
L1 A
L
480VAC 220VAC CB42
(We) L2A N (Bk) 6A N 1
L2 N (Bk) N
E
(Be)
(Rd) (We) (Be)
SHIELD
(Gn/Yw) E E
300VA
Tx
220VAC 24VDC
L1-4
L2-4
L3-4
(Bn)
A43 L DC+ DC+44
+
CB43 DCB44
N DC- 4A TO DWG /39
4A N PSU - (Pu)
L1 L2 L3 E
E
480V +5%, 3 PHASE, 12A
24VDC,3.3A
0-8VDC
HI EFFICIENCY
800A
+ -
RECTIFIER MODULE
PE3000-5
RS485 Comms
DOOR, CHASSIS
1 cables coonected to each end +ve busbar
1 cables coonected to each end -ve busbar
Cat5e
GLANDPLATE
FOR CONTROL, POWER
TERMINATIONS
REFER TO DWG /39
X13
L1-4
L2-4
L3-4

E
F1 Uv ON
2 negative cables
2 positive cables
41/1 41/4 E F2 Uv OFF

41/2 41/3
TB41
F3 Ia
F4 Ia CLR
LCP04-E1 1 2 3 E E31
E30 EC70-E1
+ -
ELECTROWINNING FIELD
3 PHASE + E CELL EC70
480V +5%, 60Hz, 12 A
FED FROM LCP03 - MCB13
REF. /32 NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY
DWG NO.: CLIENT:


RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
Rectifier Control Panel Wiring A1
(Bn) DC+44
24VDC
FROM /38 (Pu) DC-
NOTE:
IN LOCAL MODE LR IS ENERGISED

FOR REMOTE RUN RR IS ENERGISED, LR IS DEENERGISED
FR SR INTERNAL WIRING TO AS3000
FOR POWER REFERENCE DWG. /38 24VDC 24VDC
HI EFFICIENCY
RECTIFIER MODULE
HS41
PE3000-6 IN IN
REMOTE LOCAL
(Pk) 21
LR
RS485 Comms
DC+44
DC+44
DC+44
SR FR
FR
SR
DC-
RR
(Pk)
Cat5e
RR LR
11
(Bn)
24VDC 24VDC
12
(Pk) (Pk) (Pk)
(Pk)
(Pk) (Pu)
X13
1 2 7 9 4 5 6 16 15 14
TO CASE
+ - X11 X10
RE4 CMN
RE2 CMN
F1 Uv ON
X12
DC+9
EW
I:8/0
CMN
EXTERNAL
I:8/1
I:8/2
F2 Uv OFF 24VDC IN
ON
RE4 N/O
RE2 N/O
RE4 N/C
RE2 N/C
F3 Ia TERMINALS
INTERNALLY
F4 Ia CLR
CONNECTED
X14 DOOR MOUNTING
CONSEP HIGH EFFICIENCY 42/2 42/3 42/1 42/4 42/5 42/6

TB42 TB42
ELECTROWINNING RECTIFIER
2 5 6
CONTROL PANEL LCP04 3 1 4
C90
LCP04-C1
D77
LCP04-D1 FIELD
FOR PLC PANEL LCP02
REF /07 11/22 11/24 11/23 11/25 11/27 11/28
TB11
RUNNING FAULT 24VDC IN REMOTE DC CMN
ON=RUN ON=HEALTHY REMOTE ON/OFF
OFF=OFF OFF=FAULT
REF./23, 35 REF./34
NOTE: REFERENCED DWG ASSUME DEFAULT PREFIX C22600E90 AND ANY ELECTROWINNING CONTROL PANEL LCP03
DWG NO.: CLIENT:

MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION RMH 28.02.20 C22600

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
1
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
Rectifier Control Panel Wiring A1
CB1 CB2 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL- MCC SECTION - LCP01 220V,60Hz
CB4 CB3
SW1
MOTOR
K1 K2 K3 K4 CONTROLS
2.5 sq.mm
2C+E
10 sq.mm
3C+E
2.5 sq.mm
2.5 sq.mm
4 sq.mm
4 sq.mm
3C+E
3C+E
3C+E
3C+E
LCP01-E1
CLIENT
LCP03-E1
HE08-E1
PP03-E1
PP04-E1
FE07-E1
E1
CLIENT
CLIENT SUPPLY
480V, 60Hz
E21
E5
50 AMPS
E2
E3
E4
RES
PP03 PP04 FE07 HE08 LCP03
3 11.0 kW 3 2.2 kW 3 3 20 kW
0.75 kW
ELECTROWINNING
SOLIDS DISCHARGE ConSep ACACIA FEED LEACHAID SCREW SOLUTION TANK CONTROL PANEL LCP03
PUMP DRIVE PUMP DRIVE FEEDER DRIVE HEATER MOTOR CONTROLS

FOR CABLING DETAILS REFER C22600_CableList.xls DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
DISSOLUTION & ELECTROWINNING
P.O. BOX 6625
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK Fax +612 9756-5102 MODULES CS500/CS500EW SIZE
CONSEP
Single Line Diagram A1
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL- MCC SECTION - LCP01 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL- PLC SECTION - LCP02
220VAC 24VDC
DCB2 DCB3 DCB4
2.5 sq.mm
2.5 sq.mm
2.5 sq.mm
1.5 sq.mm
1.5 sq.mm
1.5 sq.mm
1.5 sq.mm
2C+E
2C+E
2C+E
6C+E
6C+E
2C+E
2C+E
CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT
CAPMP-C1
CYPMP-C1
AIT16-E1
FIT09-E1
FIT10-E1
KN1-C1
KN2-C1
CONTROL /43
CONTROL /43
CONTROL /43
C85
C86
C87
C88
E11
E12
E13
FIT09 FIT10 AIT16 KN1 ICS KN2 ICS CA PMP CY PMP
ConSep ACACIA FEED REAGANT FEED CLIENT CYANIDE KNELSON No.1 KNELSON No.2 CAUSTIC PUMP CYANIDE PUMP
FLOWMETER FLOWMETER GAS MONITOR CONTROL PANEL CONTROL PANEL CONTROL CONTROL
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
MCC CONTROL PANEL - LCP01
C70 LCP01-C1 25C+E 1.5 sq.mm

ORANGE CIRCULAR
ConSep
PLC CONTROL PANEL - LCP02
FED FROM P201
FED FROM P201
FED FROM P201

OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
REF /44
REF /44
REF /44
ORANGE CIRCULAR
ORANGE CIRCULAR
ORANGE CIRCULAR
ORANGE CIRCULAR
ORANGE CIRCULAR
ORANGE CIRCULAR
ETHERNET COMMS
TBA C+E 1.5 sq.mm
TBA C+E 1.5 sq.mm

25 C+E 1.5 sq.mm
2 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
2 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
1 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
1 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
1 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
2 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
2 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm

2 PAIR 0.5 sq.mm
2C+E 1.5 sq.mm
2C+E 1.5 sq.mm
2C+E 1.5 sq.mm

6 mm OD PNEUMATIC TUBE
CLIENT
Cat6e
CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT
LCP02-C3
LCP02-C4
LCP02-C5
FCV36-N1
FCV36-P1
LIT12-N1
LIT13-N1
AIT16-N1
FIT09-N1
FIT10-N1
TT14-N1
LE12-P1
LE13-P1
LCP03-C1
LCP03-N1
LCP02-C2
LCP02-C1
LCP02-D1
C73
C74
C75
POWER /42
POWER /42
POWER /42
VIS AUD
ESPB
ALM ALM
C80
N81
C72
C71
P102
N53
N55
D76
N51
N52
N57
N59
N58
P103
P104
ELECTROWINNING CLIENT
FIT FIT LIT LE TT FY CONTROL PANEL AIT CONTROL
09 10 12 13 14 36 16
LCP03 SYSTEM
I/P
CLIENT
SUPPLY
(OPTIONAL)
FCV36

FOR CABLING DETAILS REFER C22600_CableList.xls
DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP

10 mm
P101 LCP02-P2
6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 10 mm 6 mm
6 Bar
EXHAUST WITH SILENCER
10x6 10x6 10x6 10x6
ORANGE CIRCULAR
10mm OD PNEUMATIC TUBE

FCV36-P1
2C+E 1.5 sq.mm
LE12-P1
LE13-P1
P103
P104
P102
REF /43
CLIENT
LCP02-P1
P100
CLIENT INSRUMENT AIR SUPPLY
FE07-P1
EV42-C1
V27-P1
V27-P2
V21-P1
V22-P1
V23-P1
V24-P1
V25-P1
V26-P1
V28-P1
V29-P1
V30-P1
P106
P118
P111
P112
P114
P115
P121
P113
P116
P117
P119
P120
C61
FE07
GLAND WATER
TO SOLIDS LEACHAID FEEDER
DISCHARGE PUMP
EV42 V21 V22 V23 V24 V25 V26 V27 V28 V29 V30 HOUSING

DWG NO.: CLIENT:

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP

6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm


V41-P1
V41-P2
V35-P1
V37-P1
V38-P1
V39-P1
V40-P1
V43-P1
V44-P1
V33-P1
V34-P1
P131
P130
P127
P132
P122
P123
P125
P126
P128
P129
P124
V33 V34 V35 V37 V38 V39 V40 V41 V43 V44

RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
LOCAL ELECTROWINNING CONTROL PANEL- LCP03
SW11
MCB13
K11 K12
2.5 sq.mm
2.5 sq.mm
10 sq.mm
4 sq.mm
3C+E
3C+E
3C+E
3C+E
LCP03-E1
E20
HE73-E1
PP72-E1
CLIENT
LCP04-E1
CLIENT
CLIENT SUPPLY
480V, 60Hz
40 AMPS
E23
E22
E30
RES ELECTROWINNING
PP72 HE73 RECTIFIER PANEL
3 3 20 kW LCP04
2.2 kW
ELECTROWINNING ELECTROWINNING
PUMP DRIVE TANK HEATER


RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
CONSEP ELECTROWINNING
ELECTROWINNING CONTROL PANEL- LCP03

PCV103
RECTIFIER PANEL LCP04 10 mm P141 LCP03-P2
0-8V, 0-800A 10 mm 6 Bar

10x6
EXHAUST WITH SILENCER

ORANGE CIRCULAR
6C+E 1.5 sq.mm
CABLE RUN LENGTH 9 METRES
OVERALL SCREENED
OVERALL SCREENED
185 sq.mm
1 PAIR 1.5 sq.mm

1 PAIR 1.5 sq.mm
4 by 1C
LCP04-C1
EC70-E1
CLIENT
LCP03-P1
LE75-P1
CLIENT
C90
P140
CLIENT SUPPLIED
E31
CLIENT INSTALLED
LIT75-N1
P144
CLIENT INSTRUIMENT AIR SUPPLY

TT74-N1
V81-P1
V82-P1
1 * 1C
1 * 1C
1 * 1C
1 * 1C
+VE BUSSBAR
N83
N82
P142
P143
-VE BUSSBAR
CONSEP TT LIT
ELECTROWINNING
CELL 74 75
EC70 V81 V82


RMH 28.02.20 C22600
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
1
SCALE
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP

REFER FLS - KNELSON DOCUMENTATION REFER FLS - KNELSON DOCUMENTATION
REF. FLS DWG 08373-00 to 08373-12 REF. FLS DWG 08373-00 to 08373-12
ETHERNET COMMS Cat6

KNELSON No.1 KNELSON No.2
IO DROP PANEL IO DROP PANEL
NCP001 NCP002
KNELSON FLS SUPPLY FLS SUPPLY
REF. FLS DWG 08373-03 REF. REF. FLS DWG
ETHERNET COMMS Cat6
ETHERNET COMMS Cat6

HMI PANEL 08373-03
KCP01-C1 KCP01
CLIENT
ORANGE CIRCULAR
2C+E 2.5 sq.mm
D84
NCP001-D1
NCP002-D1
CLIENT CLIENT
D85
D86
KCP01-E1
CLIENT
E35
220 V, 60Hz, 6A
CLIENT SUPPLY

DWG NO.: CLIENT:
MACHINED SURFACES FABRICATION RMH 07.04.20 C22600

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
CONSEP ACACIA REV
0
SCALE
Phone +612 9756-5299 N/A
P.O. BOX 6625
CONSEP
500 119 115 114 116
KNELSON CONCENTRATOR
HMI PANEL
KCP01 121 121
TB31 CB31 DC PSU DCB32-33 ESW
117
DC OUT
1 5
24VDC
5A 113
COM CPU PWR
122
AC IN
N L E
500
CL 112
EARTH BAR
118
250
120
1530 from Floor
ELEVATION ELEVATION
FRONT OF PANEL LAYOUT 111 SUBFRAME LAYOUT 111
NOTE:
1. LABEL DETAILS - Main Description 12mm, All other 6 mm LETTERING
2. LABEL SHROUDED LIVE COMPONENTS (PANEL ISOLATED) WITH RED LABEL "DANGER 220 VAC"
3. PANEL CONSTRUCTION FORM 1, PROTECTION TO IP66 [IP65 WITH HMI], PANEL DEPTH IS 210mm
4. PANEL SUPPLY 220V, 60 Hz, 6 AMPS
5. POWDERCOATED MILD STEEL PANELS (PEBBLE GREY - RAL7032)
6. FOR PARTS LIST REFER TO C22600_PartsList.xls
Floor Level 7. FOR OTHER CONTROL PANEL SCHEMATICS INDEX REFER DWG /01

CLIENT:

RMH 07.04.20
APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
0
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
Phone +612 9756-5299 NTS
P.O. BOX 6625
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK Fax +612 9756-5102 KNELSON CONCENTRATORS SIZE
CONSEP
HMI Panel KCP01 Panel Layout A1
SUBFRAME, PANEL, GLANDPLATE

DC PSU
A31 L + (Bn) +24
+
N N
DC PSU - (Pu) CMN
-
E
24VDC,5A
(Bk) (We)
HMI PANEL KCP01

KNELSON LOCAL
DCB32 DCB33
4A 2A
(Bn) (Bn)
A31
DC+32
DC+33
CMN
CMN
CB31 (Gn/Yw)
4A + - E
N
L
RED LION
7" HMI ESW 24VDC,3.2W
G307K2 5 PORT 10/100, 5 Cu
(Bk) ETHERNET ETHERNET UNMANAGED SWITCH
24VDC,6W
DOOR MOUNTED
ETHERNET
NODE 3
Cat6
ETHERNET
31/1 31/2 31/3
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
TB31 ETHERNET
Cat6
Cat6
Cat6
Cat6
Cat6
1 2 E
FIELD
E35 D84 D85 NCP001-D1
KCP01-E1 KCP01-D1 TO KNELSON No.1 IO DROP
FIELD
D86 NCP002-D1
ACACIA ETHERNET SWITCH TO KNELSON No.2 IO DROP
-- -- --
REF. /07
CLIENT DISSOLUTION
DISTRIBUTION PLC PANEL
PANEL LCP02
220VAC, 6A
ETHERNET CAT 6 CABLE

APRV. DATE TITLE
LINEAR
ANGULAR
± 0.5mm
± 0.5°
± 1.5mm
± 1.0°
0
SCALE
CONSEP ACACIA CS500
Phone +612 9756-5299 NTS
P.O. BOX 6625
59 NEWTON ROAD WETHERILL PARK Fax +612 9756-5102 KNELSON CONCENTRATORS SIZE
CONSEP
HMI Panel KCP01 Panel Wiring A1
Control Panel Parts List
Project:- Tes-Oro Nicoz - San Albino Gold Project - CS500 + CS500EW Rev 2 - As built
ConSep Acacia Panel Parts List Job No: C22600
Item Tag Description Quantity Supplier Part No. Rev'n
ConSep Acacia PLC/MCC Panel LCP01, LCP02
Refer Drawing C22600E9002,9003
1 LCP01,LCP02 Mild Steel Control Panel c/w Mild Steel Glandplate 2 B&R NI Series M/S 1200H*800W*300D
2 SW1 3 phase Padlockable Full Load Isolator 80A, Base Mount c/w 2 Aux 1 ABB Stromberg
3 Tx 480/220VAC Transformer 750VA, Earth Schielded 1 Radamata or Equiv.
4 PSU 24VDC, 10A Power Supply, 220VAC input 1 Weidmuller Ecoline Series
5 L1,L2 Panel LED Lights 24VDC, 8W 2 Peirlite,IDEC or Equiv.
6 DS1,DS2 Door Limit Switches 2 Tend
7 CB1,2 2 pole circuit breaker 6 kA - C Curve 10A 2 Terasaki DIN-T6
8 CB3,4 1 pole circuit breaker 6 kA - C Curve 4A 2 Terasaki DIN-T6
9 CB5 1 pole circuit breaker 6 kA - C Curve 10A 1 Terasaki DIN-T6
10 CB6 2 pole residual circuit breaker - 10A 1 Terasaki DIN2-T6
11 DCB1-DCB7,10 1 pole DC circuit breaker 6 kA - 2A 8 Terasaki DIN-T6
12 DCB8 1 pole DC circuit breaker 6 kA - 6A 1 Terasaki DIN-T6
14 PLC PLC and I/O Cards 1 Allen Bradley see below
15 HMI Operator Panel 1 Red Lion see below
16 ESW Ethernet HUB 1 Allen Bradley See below
17 GPO Single Phase GPO 1 Clipsal
18 ESTOP Twist To Reset Pushbutton 1 NHP D7 Series
19 ESR1,ESR2 4 pole control Relay 2 NHP Finder 55 series
VR,AR,CR1,CR2, SR1-
20 SR4,SWR1,SWR2 2 pole control Relay 10 NHP Finder 46 series 2
21 PL01,2,3,4,5 24VDC Indicating Lights 22.5mm - LED 5 NHP D7 Series
22 MCB1 Motor Control Circuit Breaker 14.5-20A 1 Sprecher & Schuh KTA7 Series 1
24 MCB3 Motor Control Circuit Breaker 1-1.6A 1 Sprecher & Schuh KTA7 Series
25 MCB4 Motor Control Circuit Breaker 23-32 A 1 Sprecher & Schuh KTA7 Series
26 K1 AC3 motor contactor - 480VAC,15kW, 220VAC Coil 1 Sprecher & Schuh CA7 Series
27 K2,K3 AC3 motor contactor - 480VAC,4kW, 220VAC Coil 1 Sprecher & Schuh CA7 Series
28 K4 AC3 motor contactor - 480VAC,50A AC2, 220VAC Coil 1 Sprecher & Schuh CA7 Series
29 E Earth Link 2 Clipsal
30 N Neutral Link 1 Clipsal
31 TB1,2,3,4,5,6,8 Terminals Straight Through As Reqd Weidmuller WDU series
32 TB7 Terminals Straight Through - Double Deck As Reqd Weidmuller WDU series
33 Slotted Duct With Lid As Reqd IBOCO
34 VM1 24VDC solenoid Manifold (12 way - 12 solenoid -0 blank) 1 SMC
35 VM2 24VDC solenoid Manifold (10 way - 9 solenoid -1 blank) 1 SMC
36 PCV101 3/8" Air Filter Regulator 0-10Bar c/w Isolator 1 SMC
37 Labels - Black on White (unless noted else) - Self Adhesive 1 Grafoplast or equiv
38 Pnuematic pipe,fittings and bulkheads As Reqd
Page 1 of 3 C22600_PartsList_08May20.xls 14/07/2020 11:10 AM

ConSep Acacia Electrowinning Panel LCP03
Refer Drawing C22600E9031
51 LCP03 Mild Steel Control Panel c/w Mild Steel Glandplate 1 B&R NI Series M/S 1000H*600W*300D
52 SW11 3 phase Padlockable Full Load Isolator 63A Base Mount c/w 2 Aux 1 ABB Stromberg
53 L3 Panel LED Lights 24VDC, 8W 1 Peirlite,IDEC or Equiv.
54 DS3 Door Limit Switches 1 Schneider
59 MCB12 Motor Control Circuit Breaker 23-32A 1 Sprecher & Schuh KTA7 Series
60 MCB13 3 pole circuit breaker 6 kA - C Curve 25A 1 Terasaki DIN3-T6
61 K11 AC3 motor contactor - 480VAC,4kW, 220VAC Coil 1 Sprecher & Schuh CA7 Series
62 K12 AC3 motor contactor - 480VAC,50A AC2, 220VAC Coil 1 Sprecher & Schuh CA7 Series
63 SR11,SR12, EW1-EW3 2 Pole Control Relay 5 NHP Finder 46 Series
64 PL31 220VAC Indicating Lights 22.5mm - LED 1 NHP D7 Series
65 PL32,PL33 24VDC Indicating Lights 22.5mm - LED 2 NHP D7 Series
66 ESTOP Twist To Reset Pushbutton, 60 mm head, 2 pole 1 NHP D7 Series
67 E Earth Link 1 Clipsal
68 TB10,TB11,TB12 Terminals As Reqd Weidmuller WDU series
70 VM11 24VDC solenoid Manifold (4 way - 2 solenoid - 2 blank) 1 SMC SY51 Series
71 PCV102 3/8" Air Filter Regulator 0-10Bar c/w Isolator 1 SMC AW Series
72 Pnuematic pipe,fittings and bulkheads As Reqd
73 Labels - Black on White (unless noted else) - Self Adhesive 1 Grafoplast or equiv
ConSep Electrowinning Rectifier Control Panel LCP04

91 LCP04 Mild Steel Control Panel, Painted Pebble Grey (RAL7032) 1 B&R IP Series M/S 1200H*800W*400D
92 HRE800 Electrowinning Rectifier 0-8V,800A , 480V, 60Hz Supply 1 ConSep 1800HRE
93 HRE800DC Electrowinning Rectifier pe280D Control Panel c/w RS485 Cable 1 ConSep
94 FAN 220VAC Fan, 990m3/h 1 COSMOTEC GHV30P2220 (318*318*163)
95 Filter Fan Filter To Suit 1 COSMOTEC GHV30 (318*3318*42)
96 Fan Cowel Out Fan Outlet Cover - Stainless Steel 1 ConSep
97 Fan Cowel In Fan Outlet Cover - Stainless Steel 1 ConSep
98 Tx 480/220VAC Transformer 1000VA 1 Radamata,Star Delta, Schneider
99 PSU 220VAC,24VDC, 3.3A Power Supply 1 Weidmuller Ecoline or Equiv
103 DCB44 1 pole DC circuit breaker 6 kA - C Curve 4A 1 Terasaki DIN-T6
104 HS41 Local - Off - Remote Selector 1 NHP D7 Series
105 SR,FR, RR,LR 2 pole control Relay,24VDC Coil 4 NHP Finder 46 series
106 Terminals Straight Through As Reqd Weidmuller WDU series
108 Black On White label As Reqd Elite
ConSep Local Knelson HMI Panel KCP01

111 KCP01 Mild Steel Control Panel, Painted Pebble Grey (RAL7032) 1 B&R NI Series M/S 500H*500W*210D 1
112 HMI Operator Panel 1 Red Lion see below 1
113 ESW 5 Port Copper Ethernet Switch 1 Allen Bradley see below 1

114 PSU 24VDC, 5A Power Supply, 220VAC input 1 Weidmuller Ecoline Series 1
115 CB31 1 Pole Circuit Breaker 6kA - C Curve 4A 1 Terasaki DIN-T6 1
116 DCB32 1 Pole DC Circuit Breaker 6kA - 4A 1 Terasaki DIN-T6 1
117 DCB33 1 Pole DC Circuit Breaker 6kA - 2A 1 Terasaki DIN-T6 1
118 E Earth Link 1 Clipsal 1
119 TB31 Push In Terminals Straight Through As Reqd Weidmuller 1
120 Slotted Duct With Lid As Reqd IBOCO 1
121 Labels - Black on White (unless noted else) - Self Adhesive 1 Grafoplast or equiv 1
122 Terminal Protection Cover with Voltage Warning Identification 1 1
ConSep Acacia Control System Components

14.01 CPU CompactLogix L33ER 1 Allen Bradley 1769L33ER
14.02 CompactLogix PSU , 24VDC Supply 1 Allen Bradley 1769PB4
14.03 CompactLogix Right End Cap 1 Allen Bradley 1769ECR
14.04 16 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 1 Allen Bradley 1769IF16C
14.05 4 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE 1 Allen Bradley 1769OF2
14.06 16 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Allen Bradley 1769OW16
14.07 16 DIG INPUT 24VDC 3 Allen Bradley 1769IQ16
15.01 RedLion 7" Kadet HMI 1 RedLion CR1000-7

15.02 Cat6 Ethernet Cable 1 2 Metre
16.01 8 Port Industrial Ethernet Switch, 8 Cu 1 Allen Bradley 1783US8T
16.02 Cat6 Ethernet Cable 1 0.5 Metre
112.01 RedLion 7" Kadet HMI 1 RedLion CR1000-7 1

112.02 Cat6 Ethernet Cable 1 2 Metre 1
113.01 5 Port Industrial Ethernet Switch, 8 Cu 1 Allen Bradley 1783US5T 1
113.02 Cat6 Ethernet Cable 1 0.5 Metre 1
ConSep Acacia Field Mounted Equipment

Refer Equipment List C22600_EquipmentList.xls

CONSEP Acacia - Cable Schedule
Project:- Tes-Oro Nicoz - San Albino Gold Project - CS500 + CS500EW

C22600 Rev 1
CABLE PREFIX:- E - POWER, N - INSTRUMENT, C - CONTROL, P - PNEUMATIC, D - DATA NOTE: CABLE RUN LENGTHS ARE ESTIMATES ONLY /xx = C22600E90xx
CABLE CABLE DEVICE ORIGIN DESTINATION Schematics CABLE C.S.A. CABLE/TUBE INSULATION RUNREV. REMARKS
NO Tag No. Tag No. Dwg No. CORES SQ.MM TYPE (M) (M)
POWER
E1 LCP01-E1 LCP01 Client Distribution Board (480VAC,50A) Local MCC Panel LCP01 /04 4C+E 10 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. 50 Client
E 2 PP03-E1 PP03 Local MCC Panel LCP01 ConSep Acacia Discharge Pump PP03 - 11.kW /04 3C+E 4 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 3 PP04-E1 PP04 Local MCC Panel LCP01 ConSep Acacia Feed Pump PP04 -2.2 kW /04 3C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 4 FE07-E1 FE07 Local MCC Panel LCP01 Leachaid Screw Feeder FE07 - 0.75 kW /05 3C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 5 HE08-E1 HE08 Local MCC Panel LCP01 Solution Tank Heater HE08 - 20kW(On/Off Control) /05 3C+E 4 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 11 FIT09-E1 FIT09 Local MCC Panel LCP01 ConSep Acacia Feed Flowmeter - FIT09 - 24VDC /06 2C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 12 FIT10-E1 FIT10 Local MCC Panel LCP01 Reagent Feed Flowmeter - FIT10 - 24VDC /06 2C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 13 AIT16-E1 AIT16 Local MCC Panel LCP01 Cyanide Monitor - AIT16 - 24VDC [ CLIENT SUPPLY] /06 2C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. Client
E 20 LCP03-E1 LCP03 Client Distribution Board (480VAC,40A) Local Electrowinning MCC Panel LCP03 /32 3C+E 10 XLPE/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. 50 Client
E 21 LCP03-E2 LCP03 Local MCC Panel LCP01 Local Electrowinning Panel LCP03 (220 VAC) /05,33 2C + E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. Client
E 22 PP72-E1 PP72 Local Electrowinning MCC Panel LCP03 Electrowinning Pump PP72 - 2.2 kW /32 3C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 23 HE73-E1 HE73-1 Local Electrowinning MCC Panel LCP03 Electrowinning Tank Heater HE73 - 20kW (On/Off Control) /32 3C+E 4 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
E 30 LCP04-E1 LCP04 Local Electrowinning MCC Panel LCP03 Local Electrowinning Rectifier Panel LCP04 /32,38 3C+E 2.5 XLPE/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. 20 Client
E 31 EC70-E1 EC70 Local Electrowinning Rectifier Panel LCP04 Electrowinning Cell EC70 Busbars (8V,800A) /32,38 4*1C 185 XLPE/PVC 0.6/1 kV Black 9 Client
E 35 KCP01-E1 KCP01 Client Distribution Board (220VAC,6A) Local Knelson HMI Panel KCP01 /52 2C+E 2.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. 1 Client
Page 1 of 3 C22600_CableList_09Apr20.xls 11:09 AM 14/07/2020


C22600 Rev 1
CONTROL
N 51 FIT09-N1 FIT09 Local PLC Panel LCP02 ConSep Acacia Feed Flowrate - FIT09 /08,26 2 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 52 FIT10-N1 FIT10 Local PLC Panel LCP02 ConSep Acacia Cyanide Feed Flowrate - FIT10 /08,26 2 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 53 LIT12-N1 LIT12 Local PLC Panel LCP02 ConSep Acacia Vessel level Transmitter - LIT12 /08 1 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 55 LIT13-N1 LIT13 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Solution Tank Level Transmitter - LIT13 /08 1 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 57 TT14-N1 TT14 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Solution Tank Temperature - TT14 /09 1 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 58 FCV36-N1 FCV36 Local PLC Panel LCP02 ConSep Acacia Feed Flow Control Valve - FCV36 /12 2 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 59 AIT16-N1 TT14 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Cyanide Monitor - AIT16 [CLIENT SUPPLY] /09 1 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 61 EV42-C1 EV42 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Solids Discharge Pump Gland Water Solenoid (24VDC) /21 2 C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
C 70 LCP01-C1 LCP01 Local MCC Panel LCP01 Local PLC Panel LCP02 (24 VDC) /07,14,18,21 25C + E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6/1 kV Orange Circ. CONSEP
C 71 LCP02-C1 PCS Local PLC Panel LCP02 CLIENT Plant Control System ( Hardwired Handshake >Client) /7,19 10C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 72 LCP02-C2 PCS Local PLC Panel LCP02 CLIENT Plant Control System (Hardwired Handshake < Client) /23 10C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 73 LCP02-C3 ESTOP Local PLC Panel LCP02 Emergency Stop Circuit (Optional) /26 2C+E 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 74 LCP02-C4 VIS-ALM Local PLC Panel LCP02 Clients external Visual Alarm (Optional) /18 2C+E 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 75 LCP02-C5 AUD-ALM Local PLC Panel LCP02 Clients external Audible Alarm (Optional) /18 2C+E 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
D 76 LCP02-D1 PCS Local PLC Panel LCP02 CLIENT Process Control System (Optional) /07 comms Ethernet Cat6e Client
D 77 LCP04-D1 PCS Local PLC Panel LCP02 Electrowinning Rectifier Panel LCP04 /07,39 comms Ethernet Cat6e Client
C 80 LCP03-C1 LCP03 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Electrowinning Local Control Panel - LCP03 (DC Control) /07,13,18,22,33,34,35 25C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
N 81 LCP03-N1 LCP03 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Electrowinning Local Control Panel - LCP03 (Analog) /10,36 2 Pair 1 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
N 82 TT74-N1 TT74 Electrowinning Local Control Panel - LCP03 Electrowinning Tank Temperature - TT74 /10,36 1 Pair 0.5 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
N 83 LIT75-N1 LIT75 Electrowinning Local Control Panel - LCP03 Electrowinning Tank Level Transmitter- LIT75 /10,36 1 Pair 0.5 PVC/SCN/PVC 0.6 kV Black CONSEP
D 84 KCP01-D1 Ethernet Local PLC Panel LCP02 Local Knelson HMI Panel KCP01 - comms /07,52 comms Ethernet Cat6e 1 Client
D 85 NCP001-D1 Ethernet Local Knelson HMI Panel KCP01 Knelson No. 1 I/O Drop Panel - comms /52 comms Ethernet Cat6e 1 Client
D 86 NCP002-D1 Ethernet Local Knelson HMI Panel KCP01 Knelson No. 2 I/O Drop Panel - comms /52 comms Ethernet Cat6e 1 Client
C 87 CAPMP-C1 KN1 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Client Caustic Pump Run Request (Optional) /20 2C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 88 CYPMP-C1 KN1 Local PLC Panel LCP02 Client Cyanide Pump Run Request (Optional) /20 2C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client
C 90 LCP04-C1 LCP04 Electrowinning Local Control Panel - LCP03 Electrowinning Rectifier Panel LCP04 /13,23,34,35,39 10C+E 1.5 PVC/PVC 0.6 kV Black Client


C22600 Rev 1
PNEUMATICS
P 100 LCP02-P1 LCP02 CLIENT DRY INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY Local Acacia PLC Panel - (LCP02) Air Regulator /15 1C 10mm BLACK NYLON Client
P 101 LCP02-P2 LCP02 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Air Regulator Local Acacia PLC Panel - (LCP02) /15 1C 10mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 102 FCV36-P1 FCV36 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Solution Flow Control Valve /12,15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 103 LE12-P1 LE12 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Air Regulator Consep Acacia Level Sensor LE12 - Air Purge /08,15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 104 LE13-P1 LE13 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Air Regulator Consep Acacia Level Sensor LE13 - Air Purge /08,15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 106 FE07-P1 FE07 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Air Regulator Leachaid Screw Feeder - FE07 - Housing /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 111 V21-P1 V21 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Cyanide Addition Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 112 V22-P1 V22 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Caustic Addition Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 113 V23-P1 V23 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Water Addition Water Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 114 V24-P1 V24 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 CONSEP Acacia Spray Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 115 V25-P1 V25 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Concentrate Cone Overflow Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 116 V26-P1 V26 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Concentrate Cone Fluidisation Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 117 V27-P1 V27 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Concentrate Cone Discharge Valve - Open /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 118 V27-P2 V27 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Deslime Overflow Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 119 V28-P1 V28 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Leach Overflow Valve /15 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 120 V29-P1 V29 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Decant Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 121 V30-P1 V30 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Spare Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 122 V33-P1 V33 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Solution Tank Discharge Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 123 V34-P1 V34 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Feed Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 124 V35-P1 V35 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Pregnant Discharge Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 125 V37-P1 V37 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Solution Tank Jetmix Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 126 V38-P1 V38 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Pregnant Drain Valve /16 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 127 V39-P1 V39 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Waste Drain Valve /17 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 128 V40-P1 V40 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Deslime Water Valve /17 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 129 V41-P1 V41 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Solids Discharge Valve - Open /17 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 130 V41-P2 V41 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Solids Discharge Valve - Close /17 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 131 V43-P1 V43 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 Solids Suction Fluidisation Valve /17 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 132 V44-P1 V44 Local Acacia PLC Panel - LCP02 ConSep Acacia Flush Valve /17 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
P 140 LCP03-P1 LCP03 CLIENT DRY INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY Local Electrowinning Panel [ LCP03] - Air Regulator /13,34 1C 10mm BLACK POLY Client
P 141 LCP03-P2 LCP03 Local Electrowinning Panel LCP03 - Air Regulator Local Electrowinning Panel LCP03 /13,34 1C 10mm BLACK POLY CONSEP
P 142 V81-P1 V81 Local Electrowinning Panel LCP03 Electrowinning Feed Valve /13,34 1C 6mm BLACK POLY CONSEP
P 143 V82-P1 V82 Local Electrowinning Panel LCP03 Electrowinning Barren Electrolyte Discharge Valve /13,34 1C 6mm BLACK POLY CONSEP
P 144 LE75-P1 LE75 Electrowinning Panel LCP03 Air Regulator Electrowinning Tank Level Sensor /10,13,34,36 1C 6mm BLACK NYLON CONSEP
Notes:

Multicore Termination Schedule
Tes-Oro Nicoz- San Albino Project - CS500 DM & CS500 EWM C22600 Revision 0
Cable Core ORIGIN Terminal Cable DESTINATION Terminal EQUIPMENT Dwg
No. No. Block No. Core No. Block No. DESCRIPTION Ref Rev
LCP01-C1 1 ConSep Acacia TB5 60 DC+ ConSep Acacia TB2 1 DC Supply to LCP02 /7
C70 2 PLC Panel LCP02 TB5 61 CMN MCC Panel LCP01 TB2 2 DC Common to LCP02 /7
3 TB4 19 O:3/8 TB2 4 Solids Discharge Pump PP03 - Start/Stop [SR1] /14
4 TB4 20 O:3/9 TB2 5 Acacia Feed Pump PP04 - Start/Stop [SR2] /14
5 TB4 21 O:3/10 TB2 6 LeachAid Screw Feeder FE07 - Start/Stop [SR3] /14
6 TB4 22 O:3/11 TB2 7 Solution Tank Heater HE08 - Start/Stop [SR4] /14
7 Spare
8 Spare
9 Spare
10 TB4 33 O:5/14 TB2 8 Visual Alarm Relay VR /18
11 TB4 34 O:5/15 TB2 9 Audible Alarm Relay AR /18
12 TB5 13 I:7/0 TB2 18 Solids Discharge Pump PP03 - Running /21
13 TB5 14 I:7/1 TB2 19 Acacia Feed Pump PP04 - Running /21
14 TB5 15 I:7/2 TB2 20 LeachAid Screw Feeder FE07 - Running /21
15 TB5 16 I:7/3 TB2 21 Solution Tank Heater HE08 - Running /21
16 TB5 17 I:7/4 TB2 22 Solids Discharge Pump PP03 - Fault /21
17 TB5 18 I:7/5 TB2 23 Acacia Feed Pump PP04 - Fault /21
18 TB5 19 I:7/6 TB2 24 LeachAid Screw Feeder FE07 - Fault /21
19 TB5 20 I:7/7 TB2 25 Solution Tank Heater HE08 - Fault /21
20 TB5 1 DC+9 TB2 26 Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP02 - Active /21
21 Spare
22 Spare
23 Spare
24 Spare
25 Spare
E Earth TB5 62 CMN TB2 3 Earth /7
Page 1 of 6 C70 - LCP01-C1 3/10/2020 C22600_MulticoreTermSched

LCP02-C1 1 ConSep Acacia TB6 9 CA Inputs to Client Supplied Power to Volts Free Contacts in LCP02 /19
C71 2 PLC Panel LCP02 TB6 1 O:6/0 Client Control Discharging of Barren Solids from Acacia /19
3 TB6 2 O:6/1 System Discharging of Barren Solution from Electrowinning /19
4 TB6 3 O:6/2 Dissolution Running /19
5 TB6 4 O:6/3 Dissolution Fault /19
6 TB6 5 O:6/4 Electrowinning Running /19
7 TB6 6 O:6/5 Electrowinning Fault /19
8 TB6 7 O:6/6 Knelson 1 Alarmed /19
9 TB6 8 O:6/7 Knelson 2 Alarmed /19
10 Spare
E Earth Earth
This Cable is Client Install
Page 2 of 6 C71 -LCP02-C1 3/10/2020 C22600_MulticoreTermSched

LCP02-C2 1 ConSep Acacia TB6 10 DC+9 Outputs from DC Power to Volts Free Contacts in Client Control System /23
C72 2 PLC Panel LCP02 TB6 22 I:8/3 Client Control Discharging of Barren Solids Permitted /23
3 TB6 23 I:8/4 System Leach Reagants Available /23
4 TB6 24 I:8/5 Discharging of Barren Liquids Permitted /23
5
6
7
8
9
10
E Earth TB6 15 CMN TB13 3 Earth

LCP03-C1 1 ConSep Acacia TB4 45 DC+ ConSep Electrowinning TB11 1 Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP02 DCB8- Active /33
C80 2 PLC Panel LCP02 TB4 46 CMN Control Panel LCP03 TB11 2 Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP02- Common /33
3 TB4 11 O:3/0 TB11 4 Electrowinning Pump PP72 - Start/Stop /34,13
4 TB4 12 O:3/1 TB11 5 Electrowinning Tank Heater HE73 - Start/Stop /34,13
5 TB4 15 O:3/4 TB11 6 Electrowinning Rectifier EW70 - Start/Stop /34,13
6 TB4 35 O:5/12 TB11 11 Electrowinning Running Lamp PL32 /34,13
7 TB4 36 O:5/13 TB11 12 Electrowinning Alarm Lamp PL33 /34,13
8 TB4 13 O:3/2 TB11 7 Electrowinning Feed Valve V81 /34,13
9 TB4 14 O:3/3 TB11 8 Electrowinning Barren Electrolyte Discharge Valve V82 /34,13
10 TB5 2 DC+9 TB11 17 Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP02 DCB9 - Active /35,22
11 TB5 21 I:7/8 TB11 13 Electrowinning Pump PP72 - Running /35,22
12 TB5 22 I:7/9 TB11 14 Electrowinning Tank Heater - Running /35,22
13 TB5 23 I:7/10 TB11 15 Electrowinning Pump PP72 - Fault /35,22
14 TB5 24 I:7/11 TB11 16 Electrowinning Tank Heater - Fault /35,22
15 TB5 27 I:7/14 TB11 18 Electrowinning Module - Enabled /35,22
16 TB5 28 I:7/15 TB11 19 Electrowinning E-Stop - Enabled /35,22
17 TB5 63 I:8/0 TB11 22 Electrowinning Rectifier LCP04 - Running /35,23
18 TB5 65 I:8/2 TB11 25 Electrowinning Rectifier LCP04 - Fault /35,23
19 TB5 64 I:8/1 TB11 24 Electrowinning Rectifier LCP04 - In Remote /35,23
20 Spare
21 Spare
22 Spare
23 Spare
24 Spare
25 Spare
E Earth TB4 47 CMN TB2 3 /33
Page 4 of 6 C80 - LCP03-C1 3/10/2020 C22600_MulticoreTermSched

LCP03-N1 1We ConSep Acacia TB3 31 TT74+ ConSep Electrowinning TB12 1 Electrowinning Tank Temperature - TT74 /10,36
N81 1Bk PLC Panel LCP02 TB3 14 I:1/08+ Control Panel LCP03 TB12 2 Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP02- Common /10,36
2We TB3 6 LIT75+ TB12 3 Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP02 DCB9 - Active /10,36
2Bk TB3 32 I:1/09+ TB12 4 Electrowinning Tank Level - LIT75 /10,36
3We Spare
3Bk Spare
4We Spare
4Bk Spare
5We Spare
5Bk Spare
6We Spare
6Bk Spare
Page 5 of 6 N81 -LCP03-N1 3/10/2020 C22600_MulticoreTermSched

LCP04-C1 1 ConSep Electrowinning TB11 23 DC+9 Electrowinning Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP03- Active /39
C90 2 Control Panel LCP03 TB11 22 I:8/0 Rectifier Control Electrowinning Rectifier - Running /39
3 TB11 24 I:8/1 Panel LCP04 Electrowinning Rectifier - Fault /39
4 TB11 25 I:8/2 Electrowinning in Remote - EW70_REM /39
5 TB11 27 EW Electrowinning Rectifier Start/Stop - EW70SP /39
6 TB11 28 CMN Panel 24VDC Feed ex LCP03- Common /39
7
8
9
10
E Earth E E Earth

Acacia PLC I/O
ConSep Pty Ltd Rev.1

C22600 Tes-Oro Nicoz - San Albino Gold Project - CS500 + CS500EW
I/O No. ConSep Tag Client Tag DESCRIPTION Comment Rev
Redlion Acacia HMI CR1000-7
Knelson IO Drops Double Knelson IO Drops 1734 Point IO
ESW 5 Port Cu Unmanaged Ethernet Switch 1783US5T
SLOT 0 CPU CPU CompactLogix Dual Ethernet 1769L33ER
SLOT 1 16 ANALOG INPUT 1769-IF16C
AI 1/ 0 FIT09 ConSep Acacia Feed Flowrate Range: 0-500 l/m 4-20mA
AI 1/ 1 FIT10 ConSep Acacia Reagent Flowrate Range: 0-200 l/m 4-20mA
AI 1/ 2 LIT12 ConSep Acacia Vessel U/S Level Range: 0-100% 4-20mA
AI 1/ 3 LIT13 CA Solution Tank U/S Level Range: 0-1,500 litres 4-20mA
AI 1/ 4 TT14 CA Solution Tank Temperature Range: 0-100 Deg.C 4-20mA
AI 1/ 5 AIT16 Optional: Cyanide Monitor Input Range: 0-50ppm 4-20mA
AI 1/ 6 Spare 4-20mA
AI 1/ 8 TT74 Electrowinning Solution Tank Temperature Range: 0-100 Deg.C 4-20mA
AI 1/ 9 LIT75 Electrowinning Solution Tank Level Range: 0-2,000 litres 4-20mA
SLOT 2 2 ANALOG OUTPUT - DC 1769-OF4
AO 2/ 0 FCV36 ConSep Acacia Feed Flow Control Valve 0-100% 4-20mA
AO 2/ 1 Spare 4-20mA
SLOT 3 8 DIGITAL OUTPUT - Isolated Relay 1769-OW16I
O 3/ 0 PP72S Electrowinning Pump Start/Stop Relay -24VDC
O 3/ 1 HE73S Electrowinning Heater Tank Start Stop Relay -24VDC
O 3/ 2 V81 Electrowinning Feed Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 3/ 3 V82 Barren Electrolyte Discharge Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 3/ 4 EW70S EW Rectifier - Start / Stop Relay -24VDC
O 3/ 5 Spare
O 3/ 6 Spare
O 3/ 7 Spare
O 3/ 8 PP03S Solids Discharge Pump (11 kW) Start/Stop - 24VDC
O 3/ 9 PP04S Consep Acacia Feed Pump (2.2 kW) Start/Stop - 24VDC
O 3/ 10 FE07S LeachAid Screw Feeder (0.75 kW) Start/Stop - 24VDC
O 3/ 11 HE08S Consep Acacia Solution Tank Heater (20 kW) Open/Close -24VDC
O 3/ 12 Spare
O 3/ 13 Spare
O 3/ 14 Spare
O 3/ 15 Spare
PSU 1769PB4
Page 1 C22600_PLCIO_15Apr20.xlsx 16/04/2020

Acacia PLC I/O

SLOT 4 16 DIGITAL OUTPUT - Relay 1769-OW16
O 4/ 0 V21 Cyanide Addition Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 1 V22 Caustic Addition Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 2 V23 Water Addition Water Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 3 V24 CONSEP Acacia Spray Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 4 V25 Concentrate Cone Overflow Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 5 V26 Concentrate Cone Fluidisation Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 6 V27 Concentrate Cone Discharge Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 7 V28 Deslime Overflow Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 8 V29 Leach Overflow Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 9 V30 Decant Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 10 SP Spare Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 11 V33 ConSep Acacia Solution Tank Discharge Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 12 V34 ConSep Acacia Feed Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 13 V35 Pregnant Discharge Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 14 V37 ConSep Acacia Solution Tank Jetmix Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 4/ 15 V38 ConSep Acacia Pregnant Drain Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 5/ 0 V39 ConSep Acacia Waste Drain Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 5/ 1 V40 ConSep Acacia Deslime Water Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 5/ 2 V41 ConSep Acacia Solids Discharge Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 5/ 3 V43 Solids Suction Fluidisation Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 5/ 4 V44 ConSep Acacia Flush Valve Open/Close -24VDC
O 5/ 5 Spare
O 5/ 6 Spare
O 5/ 7 Spare
O 5/ 8 Spare
O 5/ 9 Spare
O 5/ 10 DIS_RUN Dissolution Running 24VDC Lamp 1
O 5/ 11 DIS_ALM Dissolution Alarm 24VDC Lamp
O 5/ 12 EW_RUN Electrowinning Running 24VDC Lamp
O 5/ 13 EW_ALM Electrowinning Alarm 24VDC Lamp
O 5/ 14 SYS_VAL System Visual Alarm 24VDC Valm Relay
O 5/ 15 SYS_AAL System Audible Alarm 24VDC Aalm Relay

Acacia PLC I/O

O 6/ 0 SYS_DBS Discharging of Barren Solids from Acacia (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 1 SYS_DBL Discharging Barren Solution from Electrowinning (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 2 SYS_DRUN Dissolution Running (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 3 SYS_DFLT Dissolution Fault (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 4 SYS_ERUN Electrowinning Running (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 5 SYS_EFLT Electrowinning Fault (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 6 SYS_KN1_ALM Knelson 1 Alarmed (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 7 SYS_KN2_ALM Knelson 2 Alarmed (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 8 SYS_CAU_RUN Request Caustic Pump Run (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 9 SYS_CYA_RUN Request Cyanide Pump Run (Optional) To Client Controls
O 6/ 10 Spare
O 6/ 11 Spare
O 6/ 12 Spare
O 6/ 13 Spare
O 6/ 14 Spare
O 6/ 15 Spare
SLOT 7 16 DIGITAL INPUT - 24VDC 1769-IQ16
DI 7/ 0 PP03R Solids Discharge Pump Run Signal
DI 7/ 1 PP04R ConSep Acacia Feed Pump Run Signal
DI 7/ 2 FE07R LeachAid Screw Feeder Run Signal
DI 7/ 3 HE08-R Solution Tank Heater Run Signal
DI 7/ 4 PP03F Solids Discharge Pump Fault Signal
DI 7/ 5 PP04F ConSep Acacia Feed Pump Fault Signal
DI 7/ 6 FE07F LeachAid Screw Feeder Fault Signal
DI 7/ 7 HE08-F Solution Tank Heater Heater Fault (MCB Trip)
DI 7/ 8 PP72R Electrowinning Pump Run Signal
DI 7/ 9 HE73R Electrowinning Tank Heater Run Signal
DI 7/ 10 PP72F Electrowinning Pump Current Trip
DI 7/ 11 HE73F Electrowinning Tank Heater Heater Fault (MCB Trip)
DI 7/ 12 Spare
DI 7/ 13 Spare
DI 7/ 14 EW_EN Electrowinning Enabled Switch SW11
DI 7/ 15 EW_ESPB Electrowinning Module- Emergency Stop Input (HSS02) ESR2

Acacia PLC I/O

SLOT 8 16 DIGITAL INPUT - 24VDC 1769-IQ16
DI 8/ 0 EW70R Electrowinning Rectifier Run Signal
DI 8/ 1 EW70F Electrowinning Rectifier Alarm Signal
DI 8/ 2 EW70_REM Electrowinning Rectifier In Remote
DI 8/ 3 SYS_DBSP Discharge of Barren Solids permitted From Client Controls
DI 8/ 4 SYS_REA Reagants Available From Client Controls
DI 8/ 5 SYS_DBLP Discharge of Barren Liquids permitted (Optional) From Client Controls
DI 8/ 6 Spare
DI 8/ 7 Spare
DI 8/ 8 FIT09Q ConSep Acacia Feed Flowrate - Output 1 pulse / 5 litre 24VDC pulse 0.1sec
DI 8/ 9 FIT10Q Reagant Dosing Flowmeter Pulse- Output 2 pulses / litre 24VDC pulse 0.1sec
DI 8/ 10 Spare
DI 8/ 11 Spare
DI 8/ 12 Spare
DI 8/ 13 Spare
DI 8/ 14 CA_ESPB Dissolution Module - Emergency Stop Input (HSS01) ESR1
DI 8/ 15 DC_ON 24VDC Power Available
CompactLogix End Cap - Right 1769-ECR
Internal INPUTS
CC_EWR Electrowinning Circuit Ready From EW Controls
SYS_KN1_CTIP Gravity Concentrate 1 Transfer In Progress From Knelson Controls
SYS_KN2_CTIP Gravity Concentrate 2 Transfer In Progress From Knelson Controls
CC_EWHL Electrowinning Solution Tank High Level From EW Controls
SYS_CTC Gravity Concentrate Transferred to Con. Cone From Knelson Controls
Internal OUTPUTS
SYS_IKP Inhibit Con. Cone - Knelson Purge
SYS_TPS Transferring Pregnant Solution
Spare

Acacia PLC I/O

Knelson IO Drop 1 Knelson No 1 - FLS I/O Drop Panel KCP01 1734 Point IO
SLOT 1/0 Point I/O Ethernet/IP Coupler 1734-AENT
SLOT 1/1 2 ANALOG INPUT - DC 1734-IE2C
AI 1/1/ 0 FIT113 FIT01 Knelson No. 1 Fluidisation Water Flow Range: 0-20m3/h 4-20mA
AI 1/1/ 1 ST116 SE01 Knelson No. 1 Bowl Speed Range: 0-1000 rpm 4-20mA 1
AI 1/2/ 0 PIT115 PT01 Knelson No. 1 Bowl Pressure Range: -100 to +900kPa 4-20mA
AI 1/2/ 1 Spare 4-20mA
SLOT 1/3 2 ANALOG OUTPUT - DC 1734-OE2C
AO 1/3/ 0 FCV114 FCV01 Knelson No. 1 Fluidisation Water Flow Control Valve Range: 0-100 % 4-20mA
AO 1/3/ 1 Spare 4-20mA
PSU 1734-EP24DC
SLOT 1/4 8 DIGITAL INPUT - 24VDC 1734-IB8
DI 1/4/ 0 M117R STR01R Knelson No. 1 Bowl Drive Running Run Signal
DI 1/4/ 1 M117F STR01F Knelson No. 1 Bowl Drive Faulted Fault Signal
DI 1/4/ 2 CR1 CR1 (Optional) Auto Lube Low Grease Notification Volts Free
DI 1/4/ 3 CR2 CR2 (Optional) Auto Lube Pressure Alarm Volts Free
DI 1/4/ 4 Spare
DI 1/4/ 5 Spare
DI 1/4/ 6 Spare
DI 1/4/ 7 KN1_ESTOP KN1_ESTOP Knelson No. 1 Emergency Stop
SLOT 1/5 4 DIGITAL OUTPUT - RELAY 1734-OW4
DO 1/5/ 0 V119 FV01 Knelson No. 1 - Slurry Feed valve Open/Close Open/Close
DO 1/5/ 1 V118 FVxx Knelson No. 1 - (Optional) valve Open/Close Open/Close 1
DO 1/5/ 2 Spare
DO 1/5/ 3 Spare
DO 1/6/ 0 KN1_ALM KN1_ALM Knelson No. 1 Alarm On/Off
DO 1/6/ 1 YA01 YA01 Knelson No. 1 Visual Indicator On/Off - Alarm
DO 1/6/ 2 YY01 YY01 Knelson No. 1 Visual Indicator On/Off - Run
DO 1/6/ 3 YB01 YB01 Knelson No. 1 Start-up Audible Indicator
DO 1/7/ 0 Spare
DO 1/7/ 1 Spare
DO 1/7/ 2 M117 STR01 Knelson No. 1 Motor On/Off - Run
DO 1/7/ 3 AL01 AL01 (Optional) Auto Lube Notification - Run 4-20mA

Acacia PLC I/O

Knelson IO Drop 2 Knelson No 2 - FLS I/O Drop Panel KCB02 1734 Point IO
SLOT 2/0 Point I/O Ethernet/IP Coupler 1734-AENT
AI 2/1/ 0 FIT213 FIT11 Knelson No. 2 Fluidisation Water Flow Range: 0-20m3/h 4-20mA
AI 2/1/ 1 ST216 SE11 Knelson No. 2 Bowl Speed Range: 0-1000 rpm 4-20mA 1
AI 2/2/ 0 PIT215 PT11 Knelson No. 2 Bowl Pressure Range: -100 to +900kPa 4-20mA
AI 2/2/ 1 Spare 4-20mA
SLOT 2/3 2 ANALOG OUTPUT - DC 1734-OE2C
AO 2/3/ 0 FCV214 FCV11 Knelson No. 2 Fluidisation Water Flow Control Valve Range: 0-100 % 4-20mA
AO 2/3/ 1 Spare 4-20mA
PSU 1734-EP24DC
SLOT 2/4 8 DIGITAL INPUT - 24VDC 1734-IB8
DI 2/4/ 0 M217R STR11R Knelson No. 2 Bowl Drive Running Run Signal
DI 2/4/ 1 M217F STR11F Knelson No. 2 Bowl Drive Faulted Fault Signal
DI 2/4/ 2 CR11 CR11 (Optional) Auto Lube Low Grease Notification Volts Free
DI 2/4/ 3 CR12 CR12 (Optional) Auto Lube Pressure Alarm Volts Free
DI 2/4/ 4 Spare
DI 2/4/ 5 Spare
DI 2/4/ 6 Spare
DI 2/4/ 7 KN2_ESTOP KN2_ESTOP Knelson No. 2 Emergency Stop
DO 2/5/ 0 V219 FV11 Knelson No. 2 - Slurry Feed valve Open/Close Open/Close
DO 2/5/ 1 V218 FVxx Knelson No. 2 - (Optional) valve Open/Close Open/Close 1
DO 2/5/ 2 Spare
DO 2/5/ 3 Spare
DO 2/6/ 0 KN2_ALM KN2_ALM Knelson No. 2 Alarm On/Off
DO 2/6/ 1 YA11 YA11 Knelson No. 2 Visual Indicator On/Off - Alarm
DO 2/6/ 2 YY11 YY11 Knelson No. 2 Visual Indicator On/Off - Run
DO 2/6/ 3 YB11 YB11 Knelson No. 2 Start-up Audible Indicator
DO 2/7/ 0 Spare
DO 2/7/ 1 Spare
DO 2/7/ 2 M217 STR11 Knelson No. 2 Motor On/Off - Run
DO 2/7/ 3 AL11 AL11 (Optional) Auto Lube Notification - Run 4-20mA

8. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
C22600-CS500-FD Consep Acacia CS500 Functional Description
Page 30 of 33
Functional Description
Consep Acacia CS500
Consep Ref No: C22600
Revision No: 1
Client: Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project
Client Equipment Tag: TBA

Consep Equipment Tag: CS500-C22600
Equipment title: CONSEP ACACIA MODEL CS500
Equipment description: Consep Acacia System, comprising;

- Dissolution Module
- Electrowinning Module
- Electrowinning Cell
- Electrowinning Rectifier
Client Document No.: TBA
CONSEP PTY LTD | ACN: 053 177 898 | sales@consep.com.au | www.consep.com.au

Perth | Level 15, 111 St Georges Terrace, Perth, WA 6000 | T: +61 8 9477 6777
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT
This document and all later refinements and amendments contain intellectual property, technical know-how and
other confidential information that are proprietary to Consep Pty Ltd. This document and related documents may
only be disclosed or distributed to persons within the recipient’s organization and others retained by the recipient
to evaluate its contents. No part of this document may be otherwise be disclosed or distributed to others, nor
quoted, copied or reproduced in any form for any purpose without Consep’s prior express written permission.
REVISION LOG
Version Date Responsible Description
Rev 0 8th April 2020 Juan Carrillo Functional Description
Rev 1 30th July 2021 Nick To Updated per Workshop Commissioning
Page 2 of 35
CONTENTS
Proprietary and Confidentiality Statement .......................................................................................................... 2
Revision Log ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Equipment Reference Table ............................................................................................................................... 4
Section 1: System Overview ............................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Process Equipment Scope .................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 5
1.4 Process Overview.................................................................................................................................. 9
Section 2: Logic Description ............................................................................................................................ 11
2.1 Operational Modes .............................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Operation States.................................................................................................................................. 11
2.3 Sequence Logic ................................................................................................................................... 12
2.3.1 - Concentrate Collection and Decanting [CCAD] ................................................................................. 12
2.3.2 - Primary Concentrate Transfer [PCT] ................................................................................................. 13
2.3.3 - Stratification and Desliming of Concentrate [SADC] ......................................................................... 15
2.3.4 - Mixing of Leach Reagents and Leaching of Concentrate [MLRLC]................................................... 17
2.3.5 - Pregnant Solution Recovery & Washing of Residue [PSRWR] ......................................................... 20
2.3.6 - Tailings Upflow Wash [TUW]............................................................................................................. 22
2.3.7 - Pregnant Solution Transfer to Electrowinning [PSTE] ....................................................................... 24
2.3.8 - Discharging of Leach Residue [DOL] ................................................................................................ 26
2.3.9 - Electrowinning [EW] .......................................................................................................................... 28
2.4 Alarms ................................................................................................................................................. 30
2.5 Operator interface (HMI)...................................................................................................................... 33
Section 3: Operator Setpoints ......................................................................................................................... 34
Page 3 of 35
EQUIPMENT REFERENCE TABLE
The equipment included in the Acacia System and the specific project tags are tabulated below.
CONSEP TAGS CLIENT PROJECT TAGS

PP03 -
PP04
FE07
HE108
FIT09
FIT10
LIT12
LIT13
TT14
FCV36
LIT75
TT74
HE73
Page 4 of 35
SECTION 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This document forms the Functional Description (FD) for the automated equipment in the Equipment Scope defined
below. The purpose of this document is to specify the programming requirements for the control system. It details
all control functionality and operations for the equipment from a Control System perspective.
Other documents, that may prove to be useful references when reading this document include:
- Consep Acacia System Control Manual
- Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
C22600-500-01-101 & C22600-500-02-101
- Electrical Drawings
1.2 PROCESS EQUIPMENT SCOPE

The equipment to be operated is one automated Consep Acacia Expanded System which comprises:
- One (1) Dissolution Module CS500
- One (1) Electrowinning Module CS500
The Consep supplied Control System includes a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) that is to be programmed
according to this Functional Description.
For further details on the process equipment scope, piping and instrumentation please refer to the project specific
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.
1.3 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Instrumentation included with the process equipment is listed below.
FIELD INSTRUMENT INPUT TAG LIST
Analog Inputs
Description Tag Range

Consep Acacia Feed Flow Transmitter FIT09 0 to 30 m3/hr
Solution Tank Reagents Flow Transmitter FIT10 0 to 18 m3/hr
Acacia Reactor Vessel Level LIT12 0 to 100%
Solution Tank Level LIT13 0 to 1600 Litres
Solution Tank Temperature Transmitter TT14 0 to 100 deg.C
EW Solution Tank Level LIT75 0 to 1900 Litres
EW Solution Tank Temperature Transmitter TT74 0 to 100 deg.C
EW Rectifier Current IT70 0 to 800 A
EW Rectifier Voltage VT70 0 to 8V
Page 5 of 35
Analog Outputs
Description Tag Range Note

PID single loop
Fluidising Water Flow Control Valve FCV036 0 to 100% control in auto
EW Rectifier Voltage Control VIC70 0 to 100%
Digital Inputs
Description Tag
Acacia Feed Flow Transmitter Pulse FIT09Q
Reagent Flow Transmitter Pulse FIT10Q
Digital Inputs
Description Tag
Discharge Slurry Pump Running PP03R
Acacia Feed Pump Running PP04R
LeachAid Screw Feeder Running FE07R
Solution Tank Heater 1 Running HE108R
Acacia Drives Isolated CA_ISOL
Discharge Slurry Pump Fault PP03F
Acacia Feed Pump Fault PP04F
LeachAid Screw Feeder Fault FE07F
Solution Tank Heater 1 Fault HE108F
Field Power On DC_ON
Emergency Stop Input CA_ESPB
Electrowinning Pump Running PP72R
Electrowinning Pump Fault PP72F
Electrowinning Heater 1 Running HE73R
Electrowinning Heater 1 Fault HE73F
Electrowinning Rectifier Running EW70R
Electrowinning Rectifier Fault EW70F
Electrowinning E-Stop EW_ESPB
Digital Inputs from Client Controls
Description Tag Action

Discharge from slurry pump permitted SYS_DBSP Signal = 1
Reagents available SYS_REA Signal = 1
Discharge of barren solution permitted SYS_DBLP Signal = 1
Page 6 of 35
Digital Outputs

Solids Discharge Pump Run PP03S Motor to start
Acacia Feed Pump Run PP04S Motor to start
LeachAid Screw Feeder Run FE07S Motor to start
Solution Tank Heater Run HE108S Heater on
Acacia Dissolution Module Running DIS_RUN Signal active
Acacia Dissolution Alarm DIS_ALM Signal active
Visual Alarm SYS_V_ALM Signal active
Audible Alarm SYS_A_ALM Signal active
Cyanide Addition Valve V21 Valve to open
Caustic Addition Valve V22 Valve to open
Potable Water Addition Valve V23 Valve to open
Acacia Rinse Spray Valve V24 Valve to open
Concentrate Cone Decant Valve V25 Valve to open
Concentrate Cone Fluidisation Valve V26 Valve to open
Concentrate Cone Discharge Valve V27 Valve to open
Deslime Overflow Valve V28 Valve to open
Leach Overflow Valve V29 Valve to open
Water Decant Valve V30 Valve to open
Acacia Solution Pump Discharge Valve V33 Valve to open
Acacia Feed Valve V34 Valve to open
Pregnant Solution Discharge Valve V35 Valve to open
Acacia Jet Mix Valve V37 Valve to open
Acacia Drain To Solution Tank Valve V38 Valve to open
Acacia Drain Valve V39 Valve to open
Acacia Deslime Water Valve V40 Valve to open
Acacia Solids Discharge Valve V41 Valve to open
PP03 Suction Flushing Valve V43 Valve to open
Acacia Flush Water Valve V44 Valve to open
Slurry Pump Gland Water EV42 Valve to open
Electrowinning Pump Run PP72S Motor to start
Electrowinning Tank Heater Run HS73S Heater on
Electrowinning Running EW_ON Signal active
Electrowinning Alarm EW_ALM Signal active
EW Rectifier Start EW70ST Signal active
EW Rectifier Stop EW70SP Signal active
EW Rectifier Remote EW70_REM Signal active
EW Feed Valve V81 Valve to open
EW Barren Solution Discharge Valve V82 Valve to open
Page 7 of 35
Digital Outputs to Client Controls

Discharging Residue Slurry SYS_DBS Signal active
Discharging Barren Solution SYS_DBL Signal active
Acacia Dissolution Module Running SYS_DRUN Signal active
Acacia Dissolution Module Fault SYS_DFLT Signal active
Acacia Electrowinning Module Running SYS_ERUN Signal active
Acacia Electrowinning Module Fault SYS_EFLT Signal active
Client Caustic Pump Run SYS_PPOH_RUN Signal active
Client Cyanide Pump Run SYS_PPCN_RUN Signal active
Inhibit Knelson No1 Purge SYS_IK1P Signal active
Inhibit Knelson No2 Purge SYS_IK2P Signal active
ADDITIONAL NOTES
Solids Discharge PP03 Run
A run request signal by the Acacia PLC to the Solids Discharge Run (PP03S) will immediately open the Slurry
Discharge Gland Water Valve EV42.
Page 8 of 35
1.4 PROCESS OVERVIEW
Consep Acacia Principles of Operation
The Consep Acacia is a system designed for very efficient intensive leaching of gravity gold concentrate, typically
with a sodium cyanide solution and on a daily batch basis. It is designed primarily around a fluidised bed leach
reactor and ancillary process equipment required for the process to be carried out.
The truncated conical leach reactor vessel has a diffusion screen at the base which supports the bed of concentrate
solids. This is designed to disperse the inflow of water or leach solution such that the bed of solids is fully fluidised.
This fluidisation, when combined with the solution chemistry, promotes high rates of gold dissolution. The reactor
and its accompanying solution tank, pumps, valves, instruments and piping facilitate the highly efficient Consep
Acacia process.
The gold bearing solution generated by the Consep Acacia (referred to as Pregnant Solution) is transferred to an
electrowinning feed solution tank from which it is cycled through the electrowinning (EW) cell. Precious metals are
electroplated on the EW cell cathodes which are periodically harvested. The remaining low grade solution (referred
to as Barren Solution) is transferred to CIL/CIP leaching plant.
Consep Acacia Sequence Overview
The Consep Acacia is a batch system, which can be fully automated to produce a continuous process. The Consep
Acacia process involves a number a batch operations each controlled by a control system sequence listed below
and commonly referred to by the acronyms shown in square brackets.
1. Concentrate Collection and Decanting [CCAD]

This system has been designed for the collection of concentrate discharged from one or more Gravity
Concentrators on a batch basis. This sequence controls the process of collecting gravity concentrate slurry in
the Concentrate Storage Cone, settling of solids for a timed period and subsequently decanting of supernatant
water from the Cone for a timed period.
Decanting provides room for the following gravity concentrate slurry transfer. Each Gravity Concentrator purge
will be held within the Concentrate Storage Cone without overflowing the tank. This almost completely
eliminates the loss of fine concentrate during concentrate collection.
The Consep Acacia controls initiate the CCAD cycle following each gravity concentrator purge cycle. While
the CCAD cycle is underway, the Gravity Concentrators will be prevented from purging concentrate and
generally, only one Gravity Concentrator at a time will be allowed to purge concentrate.
If the Settling Timer or Decant Timer setpoints are excessive the concentrators cycling process could be
unnecessarily delayed. Decant Time should be only as long as is required to drain the water above the decant
outlet of the Concentrate Storage Cone.
2. Primary Concentrate Transfer [PCT]

This sequence controls the transfer of primary gravity concentrate from the Concentrate Storage Cone into
the Consep Acacia reactor vessel at the start of an Acacia operation cycle. The whole content of the
Concentrate Storage Cone is usually transferred. It is recommended that the level of settled solids in the
Acacia reactor vessel does not exceed 60% and important that it does not exceed the level of the reactor cone
decant valves.
Page 9 of 35
3. Stratification and Desliming of Concentrate [SADC]
This sequence controls the stratification of the concentrate solids in the Consep Acacia to assist with even
leach solution flow and filtration of pregnant solution during draining.
Desliming follows stratification. It is the process of elutriating slimes that would otherwise be detrimental to the
process by contaminating the leach solution and inhibiting solid/liquid separation following the leach stage.
4. Mixing of Leach Reagents and Leaching Concentrate [MLRLC]

This sequence controls the batching of reagents and preparation of the leach solution in the Consep Acacia
Solution Tank ready for the leach operation. This is followed by the circulation of the solution from the Consep
Acacia Solution Tank upward through the Consep Acacia reactor to fluidise the concentrate and leach the
precious metals. The reactor vessel overflow, which is directed back to the solution tank during the leach
stage, is free of solids.
5. Pregnant Solution Recovery and Washing of Residue [PSRWR]

This sequence controls the removal of the pregnant solution from the Consep Acacia into the Solution Tank
and the rinsing of any residual solution from the barren solids in the Consep Acacia.
6. Tails Upflow Washing [TUW]

This optional sequence controls the washing of the residue solids with a fluidising upflow of water. The wash
water is then drained to CIL feed.
7. Pregnant Solution Transfer to Electrowinning [PSTE]

This sequence controls the transfer of the pregnant solution from the Consep Acacia Solution Tank to the
Electrowinning Solution Tank for electrowinning.
8. Discharging of the leach residue [DOL]

This sequence controls the transfer of the barren solids (leach residue) from the Consep Acacia typically to
the Client’s mill discharge sump.
9. Electrowinning [EW]
This sequence controls the circulation of pregnant solution through the Electrowinning Cell. The gold in
solution is electroplated on to the steel wool or stainless steel stocking on the Electrowinning Cell’s cathode
frames.
Page 10 of 35
SECTION 2: LOGIC DESCRIPTION
2.1 OPERATIONAL MODES
Digital Output Operation Modes
The devices included in the system which are controlled by digital outputs may be operated in Automatic or Manual
Mode. These include pumps, other drives, heaters and valves other than the flow control valve FCV36. Control of
these devices may be switched simultaneously between Auto and Manual Mode via the HMI. The PLC control
sequence must be stopped, either waiting for a start signal or alarmed to switch from Auto Mode to Manual Mode.
While in Manual Mode, the devices may only be operated by selecting applicable buttons on the HMI and they will
not function automatically. Software interlocks will be overridden. The PLC control sequence will not operate while
Manual Mode is selected.
While in Auto Mode, the devices may only be controlled by the PLC control sequence logic under the restriction of
software interlocks.
Flow Control Valve Operation Modes
The Acacia Feed Flow Control Valve (FCV36) has a PID controller. This controller may be operated in Automatic
or Manual Mode. Control of FCV36 may be switched between Auto and Manual Mode via the HMI at any time.
While in Auto Mode, FCV36 may only be controlled by the PLC control sequence logic. While in Manual Mode,
FCV36 controls may be set to a flow setpoint in units of litres per minute. Alternatively, the PID controller output,
also known as the control variable (CV), may be overridden with a set value in units of percent, with 0% being fully
closed and 100% being fully open. The PLC control sequence will operate while the FCV36 PID controller is in
Manual Mode, however it is not recommended practice.
2.2 OPERATION STATES

The Consep Acacia PLC controls may exist in one of three states, Ready, Running and Fault.
While in Ready state the Consep Acacia is idle. No alarms are active. The control sequence remains in this state
until an operator initiated start or restart occurs.
When the Consep Acacia has been started, the controls are in the Running state. The controls will remain in this
state and the process will continue according to the sequence logic until such time as an operator stop, shutdown
alarm or fatal alarm occurs.
When an operator stop, shutdown alarm or fatal alarm occurs, the controls will be in Fault state until all shutdown
alarm conditions are false, and the alarms are accepted by the operator via the HMI Alarm Screen. When all alarms
are successfully accepted the controls state will change from Fault to Ready state.
Page 11 of 35
2.3 SEQUENCE LOGIC
2.3.1 - CONCENTRATE COLLECTION AND DECANTING [CCAD]

Step 0 - Idle Step.
The “OK to Purge” status is set. The sequence is Ready to start when:
- The system is in Auto Mode
- No CCAD or PCT sequence alarms are active
- The PCT sequence is not in steps 2 to 6.
The sequence proceeds to Step 1 when Ready and any Concentrate Transfer in Progress input
(SYS_KN1_CTIP or SYS_KN2_CTIP), indicating a concentrator is purging, changes state from true to
false.
Step 1 – Concentrate Settling

The “OK to Purge” status is cleared and the “Purge Inhibit” status is set. The system waits for the CCAD
“Settling Time”, which is an operator setpoint, typically 300 seconds. This delay allows time for the
concentrate solids to settle in the Concentrate Storage Cone following a Knelson purge cycle.
Step 2 – Decanting in Progress

On expiry of the Settling Time, the Concentrate Decant Valve (V25) is opened and the system waits for
the CCAD “Decant Time”, which is an operator setpoint, typically 300 seconds.
Step 3 – Decanting Complete

On the completion of the Decant Time the Decant Valve (V25) will shut and the “Decanting” status is
cleared. At this stage the water level should be at the decant outlet of the Concentrate Storage Cone. The
“OK to Purge” status is set.
The sequence is Complete and returns to Step 0.
Step 10 – Hold After Alarm Step

A shutdown alarm or operator stop has occurred. The sequence will remain in this step until all alarms
active during the CCAD sequence are Accepted, then goes to Step 0.
Alarms are only active in steps 1 to 2.
Page 12 of 35
2.3.2 - PRIMARY CONCENTRATE TRANSFER [PCT]
Step 0 – Idle Step
The system waits until the following conditions are met, indicating that the PCT sequence is ready to start:
- The PCT sequence is not complete (i.e. it has been reset following completion of all other
sequences)
- The system is in Auto mode
- No PCT alarms are active
While the PCT sequence is ready to start, the system waits for a further set of conditions before
proceeding to Step 1.
- The CCAD sequence must be idle (in Step 0) or the Cone Full button on Control 2 screen
must be selected to indicate that the operator cannot wait for a current CCAD sequence to
be completed.
Step 1 – Waiting for “Start PCT” initiation

The system waits for operator initiation of the sequence by pressing the “Start PCT” button on the HMI.
The PCT message on the Control 2 Screen displays “Waiting for Operator Start”. If a PCT alarm becomes
active the sequence returns to Step 0.
Step 2 – Knelson Purge is Inhibited

In this step the last Cycle’s Batch parameters, counters and totalisers are reset.
The “OK to Purge” status (also used in CCAD sequence) is cleared and the “Purge Inhibited” status set
to prevent a Concentrator from purging during this stage.
If a concentrator is forced to enter a purge cycle due to an emergency stop, operator stop or shutdown
alarm the PCT sequence will continue as it is not likely to result in any harm other than a possible minor
loss of fines.
Step 3 – Waiting for PCT Level – Upflow Diffusion Screen

Water is added to the Consep Acacia. The operator setpoint “Stratification Flow” is loaded from the HMI.
Valves V40 and V34 open, introducing raw water into the distributor, whereby flowmeter FIT09 measures
the water flow and control valve FCV36 regulates the flow to the “Stratification Flow” rate.
The system waits for the water level according to LIT12 to achieve the “PCT Level”, which is an operator
setpoint, typically 25%. This layer of water over the diffusion screen stops heavy impact onto the screen
by the incoming concentrate slurry.
Step 4 – Fluidising Concentrate Cone

On the PCT Level being achieved flow control valve FCV36 setpoint is set to 0 and valves V40 and V34
closes. The concentrate cone fluidisation valve, V26, is opened to fluidise the contents of the concentrate
cone. A “Fluidisation Delay” (typically 10 seconds) is commenced.
Page 13 of 35
Step 5 – Concentrate Transfer
Upon completion of the Fluidisation Delay the concentrate cone outlet valve, V27, is opened. V26 remains
open. A Concentrate Transfer Timer (nominally 3 minutes) is commenced.
To prepare the system for a potential overflow, V28 and V43 are opened and PP03 is started to transfer
any overflow.
The system waits until:
- The Concentrate Transfer Timer expires or
- The operator pushes the “Cone Empty” button on the HMI
then proceeds to Step 6.
Step 6 – Close V26 and V27

Valves V26 and V27 are closed.
Step 7 – PCT Complete

V28 and V43 are closed and PP03 is stopped.
The “OK to Purge” status is released for control by the CCAD sequence and the “PCT Complete” status
is set.
MLRLC is started.
PCT returns back to step 0, when DOL and PSTE are complete.

Hold Step after a shutdown alarm or a STOP command and awaits a Restart.
Page 14 of 35
2.3.3 - STRATIFICATION AND DESLIMING OF CONCENTRATE [SADC]
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting for PCT Complete
The system waits until the following conditions are met, indicating that the SADC sequence is ready to
start:
- The SADC sequence has been reset following completion of all other sequences
- No SADC alarms are active
- PCT sequence is complete
Step 1 – Solids Settling

The system waits for the Solids Settling Time (operator setpoint, typically 300 seconds) then proceeds to
Step 2.
Step 2 – Decanting Excess Water

V28, V30 and V43 open and PP03 starts. The system waits until LIT12 is not detecting a change (+/-1%)
in level for 60 seconds, or the Acacia reactor level (LIT12) is less than the Decant Level.
Step 3 – Stratification in Progress

The operator setpoints “Stratification Flow” and “Stratification Time” are loaded from the HMI. V30 and
V43 Close. Valves V40 and V34 open, introducing raw water into the distributor, whereby flowmeter FIT09
measures the water flow and control valve FCV36 regulates the flow to the “Stratification Flow” rate. The
system waits for the Stratification Time, which is tuned during process commissioning to allow the reactor
vessel to fill to approximately 90%.
Step 4 – Spare Step

Spare step
Step 5 – Stratification Complete

The Stratification Complete status is set, and the sequence continues immediately to Desliming.
Step 6 – Desliming in Progress

Upon moving to Desliming, the FCV36 setpoint changes to the “Deslime Flow”, which is an operator
setpoint. The system waits for the completion of the Deslime Timer, which is based on the operator
setpoint “Deslime Time”.
Step 7 – Desliming Complete

The Deslime Complete status is set, flow control valve FCV36 setpoint is set to 0 and valve V40 closes.
V43 opens to maintain a water flow through PP03 during step 9.
Page 15 of 35
Valve V34 closes. The system waits for the Solids Settling Time (operator setpoint) to expire before
proceeding to Step 9.
Step 9 – Valve V30 opens

Valve V30 opens to decant water from the solids.
Step 10 – Decanting Excess Water

The system waits until LIT12 not detecting a change (+/-1%) in level for 180 seconds (indicating the solids
surface has been exposed) or for LIT12 to indicate that the level is less than the decant level (operator
setpoint).
Step 11 – Draining Deslime Water

PP03 stops and valves V28, V30 and V43 close. Valve V39 opens to drain the water from the reactor.
The system waits for the “Deslime Drain Time” (operator setpoint), which allows the residual water to
drain.
Step 12 – Logging Solids Level

The ultrasonic level transmitter LIT12 logs the current solids level and stores this level as the “Solids
Level” for operator information. This is displayed on the Overview Screen.
Step 13 – Solids Rinsing in Progress

V24 is opened for a SADC rinse time (operator setpoint) to rinse fresh water through the solids bed.
Step 14 – Draining Rinse Water

V24 is closed. The system waits for the SADC rinse drain time (operator setpoint).
Step 15 – SADC Complete

Valves V39 closes. The Stratification and Desliming of Concentrate (SADC) Sequence is complete.
SADC moves back to step 0, when PSTE and DOL are complete.

Page 16 of 35
2.3.4 - MIXING OF LEACH REAGENTS AND LEACHING OF CONCENTRATE [MLRLC]
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting for PCT Complete
The system waits until the following conditions are met, indicating that the MLRLC sequence is ready to
start:
- The MLRLC sequence has been reset following completion of all other sequences
- No MLRLC alarms are active
While the above conditions are true the system waits until the Primary Concentrate Transfer (PCT)
sequence is complete.
Step 1 – Waiting for “Reagents Available” Signal

The system waits for “Reagents Available” (SYS_REA) input after a PCT start. The “Potable Water Batch
Size” is loaded from the HMI. Previous batch counters are reset.

Spare Step.

Spare Step.
Step 4 – Batching Potable Water in Progress

V23 opens, adding potable water to the Solution Tank and the system waits until the operator setpoint
“Potable Water Batch Size” (based on LIT13 level in litres) is achieved.
Step 5 – Batching Potable Water Complete

V23 Closes
The “Caustic Batch Size” is loaded from the HMI.
Step 6 – Batching Caustic in Progress

V37 and V22 opens.
Caustic pump run signal, SYS_PPOH_RUN, is output to start the client supplied caustic pump (optional).
The client output, SYS_PPOH, indicates that the caustic pump is running. The client output, SYS_PPOH,
indicates that the caustic pump is running. If this is not received within 2 seconds of setting the
SYS_PPOH_RUN output active then the Caustic Pump Fault alarm is raised (optional).
The system waits until the “Caustic Batch Size” has been added to the tank as totalised by FIT10.
For the duration of this step a caustic batching monitor is enabled to raise the “Caustic Dosing Alarm” if
the system does not detect a pulse output from flowmeter FIT10 for 30 seconds or more.
Pump PP04 is started.
Page 17 of 35
Step 7 – Batching Caustic Complete
V22 is closed.
SYS_PPOH_RUN output is off (if SYS_PPOH_RUN used).
Step 8 – Mixing in Progress

The “Cyanide Batch Size” is loaded from the HMI.
Step 9 – Batching Cyanide in Progress

V21 is opened to allow cyanide solution to flow into the Solution Tank.
Cyanide pump run signal, SYS_PPCN_RUN, is output to start the client supplied cyanide pump (optional).
The client output, SYS_PPCN, indicates that the cyanide pump is running. If this is not received within 2
seconds of setting the SYS_PPCN_RUN output active then the Cyanide Pump Fault alarm is raised
(optional).
The system waits until the “Cyanide Batch Size” has been added to the tank as totalised by FIT10. For
the duration of this step a cyanide batching monitor is enabled to raise the “Cyanide Dosing Alarm” if the
system does not detect a pulse output from flowmeter FIT10 for 30 seconds or more.
Step 10 – Batching Cyanide Complete

V21 is closed.
SYS_PPCN_RUN output is off (if SYS_PPCN_RUN used).
The “LeachAid Dosing Time” is loaded from the HMI.
Step 11 – Check Leachaid Available

Warning to check leachaid available. Load leachaid setpoint.
Step 12 – LeachAid Dosing in Progress

The LeachAid feeder FE07 is started, adding LeachAid to the agitated tank.
The “Reagent Mixing Time” is loaded from the HMI
The system waits for the “LeachAid Dosing Time” which is an operator setpoint. LeachAid is dosed into
the Solution Tank on a time basis.
Step 13 – LeachAid Dosing Complete

FE07 stops. The circulation remains for mixing for the Reagent Mixing Time to ensure the leach solution
is fully mixed.

Spare step.
Page 18 of 35
Spare step.
Step 16 – Mixing of Reagents Complete. Waiting SADC Complete.

PP04 stops and V37 closes. The Mixing of Reagents Complete status is set. The system waits until SADC
is complete. Heater is enabled and temperature is controlled to the HE108 temperature operator
setpoints. Heater will operate when solution tank level is above the heater interlock level and temperature
transmitter analog signal is not out of bounds.
Step 17 – Leaching Pathway Opening

Valves V29, V33 and V34 are opened.
Step 18 – Leaching in Progress

Flow control valve (FCV36) setpoint is set to the Leaching Flow (operator setpoint). Pump PP04 is started.
The “Leach Timer” (operator setpoint, typically 1080 minutes) commences.
Leach solution flows into the Consep Acacia distributor and passes upwards through the bed of
concentrate until it overflows from the Consep Acacia and returns into the Solution Tank. This continues
under steady state recycle conditions for the duration of the Leach Timer.
Step 19 – Leaching Complete

At the completion of the Leach Timer, pump PP04 is stopped, the flow control valve, FCV36, setpoint is
set to 0. The system waits for a 2 second delay.
Step 20 – Leaching Pathway Closing

Valves V29 and V34 are closed. Heater HE108 is disabled.
Step 21 – MLRLC Complete

The Mixing and Leaching (MLRLC) sequence is Complete. V33 closes.
MLRLC moves back to step 0, when PSTE and DOL are complete.

Page 19 of 35
2.3.5 - PREGNANT SOLUTION RECOVERY & WASHING OF RESIDUE [PSRWR]
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting MLRLC Complete
The sequence remains idle waiting for MLRLC Complete and will proceed to Step 1 provided that the
sequence has been reset following completion of the last cycle, no PSRWR alarms are active and the
system is in auto.

Spare step.
Step 2 – Flushing Leaching Line

V29, V38 open
V34 and V40 open. Flow control valve, FCV36, setpoint is set to the “Leaching Flow” to allow the supply
of raw water for a Solution Line Flushing Time (operator setpoint, typically 3 seconds), flushing the Consep
Acacia feed line of residual pregnant solution. If the process water is highly saline this step should be
skipped by setting timer value to zero.
Step 3 – Flushing Leaching Line Complete

Valve V40 is closed and FCV36 setpoint set to zero.

V34 is closed and the “Solids Settling time” (operator setpoint) commences to allow settling of the solids
in the reactor following leaching.
Step 5 – Decanting Pregnant Solution

V30 open, decanting supernatant pregnant solution above the decant outlet into the Consep Acacia
Solution Tank, thus speeding up the transfer of pregnant solution. The system waits until LIT12 is not
detecting a change (+/-1%) in level for 60 seconds, or the Acacia reactor level (LIT12) is less than the
decant level (operator setpoint).
Step 6 – Pregnant Solution Draining in Progress

The system waits until the level transmitter indicates the “Solids Level” set during SADC plus 2% to allow
for some variation.
A watchdog timer, “Pregnant Drain Watchdog Time” which is based on the operator setpoint runs during
this step. If the Pregnant Drain Watchdog Timer expires before the level has fallen below the “Solids
Level” plus a 2% deadband (meaning the alarm is active between PSRWR steps 5 to in PSRWR step 6)
it triggers the Pregnant Drain Failed alarm alerting the operator to slow draining. When the Pregnant Drain
Failed alarm is triggered the sequence goes to step 14.
Step 7 – Final Pregnant Solution Drain

The system waits for the Pregnant Solution Final Drain Timer (operator setpoint).
Page 20 of 35
Step 8 – Draining Complete
V38 and V30 are closed.
Step 9 – Rinsing of Solids Residue

V24 is opened, spraying rinse water into the top of the Consep Acacia to rinse the solids residue of
pregnant solution.
The “PSRWR Rinse Counter” is incremented.
The system waits for the “Pregnant Rinse Time” which is an operator setpoint, following which a layer of
water should cover the solids residue.
Step 10 – Draining Rinse Solution

V24 is closed. V38 open. The rinse solution is then drawn through the bed of solids and transferred to the
Solution Tank.
The system waits for the “Pregnant Rinse Drain Time” which is an operator setpoint.
Step 11 – Counting Number of Rinses

If “Rinse Counter” is less than the “No of Pregnant Rinses” setpoint the sequence returns to step 9 to
repeat the rinse and drain. Otherwise, sequence proceeds to step 12.
Step 12 – Draining Complete

V38 and V29 close.
Step 13 – PSRWR Complete

The sequence (PSRWR) is Complete.
PSRWR moves back to step 0, when DOL and PSTE are complete.
Step 14 – Drain Failure Alarm Restart or Continue

After a Drain Failure Alarm the system waits for operator to select either Restart (back to step 5 or
Continue (to step 8). The draining process continues during this Step.

Page 21 of 35
2.3.6 - TAILINGS UPFLOW WASH [TUW]
TUW is an optional function, typically utilised when the solids discharge location may be highly sensitive to the
presence of cyanide such as a mill circuit with flash flotation.
This sequence (TUW) starts automatically at the completion of the PSRWR stage. If enabled its purpose is to wash
the rinsed residue solids to remove any remaining cyanide solution and transfer the washings to the clients
preferred discharge location.
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting PSRWR Complete

The sequence remains idle in this step until the PSRWR sequence is complete, TUW sequence has been
selected for operation (via button on HMI Control screen), no TUW alarms are active and the system is
in auto. When these conditions are true the TUW Rinse Counter is reset and the sequence goes to step
1.
If TUW is not selected for operation, the sequence moves to step 7.
Step 1 – Tails Upflow Wash in Progress

Valves V34 and V40 are opened. The flow control valve (FCV36) flow setpoint is set to the Tails Upflow
Wash Flowrate operator setpoint. The system waits for the rising water level in the Acacia reactor to reach
the Tails Upflow Wash Level, which is an operator setpoint, typically 90%.

Valve V40 is closed and FCV36 setpoint is set to zero. The TUW Rinse Counter is incremented and the
system waits for the Solids Settling Time, which is based on the operator setpoint.
Step 3 – Priming Solids Discharge Pump

Valve V34 is closed. Valve V28 and V30 are open. Valve V43 is opened to prime PP03. The sequence
proceeds to Step 4 after a 10 second delay.
Step 4 – Decanting in Progress

PP03 starts and the water above the decant outlet is drained. The system waits until LIT12 is not detecting
a change (+/-1%) in level for 60 seconds, or the Acacia reactor level (LIT12) is less than the Decant Level.
Step 5 – Counting Number of Rinses

V43 is closed and PP03 stops. If the TUW Rinse Counter value is greater than or equal to the operator
setpoint “No of TUW Rinses Required” the sequence goes to Step 6. Otherwise the sequence returns to
Step 1.
Step 6 – TUW Complete

Valve V28 and V30 are closed.
TUW sequence complete.
TUW moves back to step 0, when DOL and PSTE are complete.
Page 22 of 35
Step 7 – TUW Bypassed
TUW sequence has been bypassed.
TUW moves back to step 0, when DOL and PSTE are complete.

Page 23 of 35
2.3.7 - PREGNANT SOLUTION TRANSFER TO ELECTROWINNING [PSTE]
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting TUW Complete
The sequence remains idle in this step until the PSRWR is complete and TUW sequence is complete or
not selected, the sequence has been reset following completion of the last cycle, no PSTE alarms are
active and the system is in auto and DOL not running (DOL not running means DOL step 0 to 1 or
complete).
Step 1 – Mixing Pregnant Solution

V37 is opened and PP04 starts to mix the pregnant solution held in the solution tank
The previous batch volume transferred to electrowinning is reset. The EW Not ready to accept pregnant
solution alarm will be activated in this step, if the EW system is not ready to accept pregnant solution. The
operator may need to complete the current Electrowinning cycle and discharge the barren solution before
proceeding. The system waits for a nominal 90 seconds. If DOL is running, then move back to step 0.
Step 2 – Mixing Complete

V37 is closed and PP04 stops. If DOL is running, then move back to step 0.
Step 3 – Waiting for “Start PSTE”

The Operator is required to initiate the Pregnant Solution transfer by selecting the Start PSTE button on
the HMI. The sequence will then proceed to Step 4. If DOL is running, then move back to step 0.
The operator should record the volume of solution contained in the Consep Acacia Solution Tank and
collect a sample from V45 manual valve. The pregnant solution volume is displayed on the Overview
page of the HMI. A record of the volume is required for metallurgical accounting.
Step 4 – Transfer Pathway Opening

Valves V33 and V35 open. The system waits for 2 seconds.
The “Pregnant Solution Transferred” flow totaliser is enabled to record the volume transferred. Pulse
output from FIT09 (5 litres per pulse) indicates the volume of pregnant solution transferred to
electrowinning. This value “Preg Soln Trans” is displayed on the Control 4 screen of the HMI.
If the EW sequence is not either idle or complete, the EW not ready to accept pregnant solution alarm will
be triggered in PSTE step 4.
The EW not ready to accept pregnant solution will trip the PSTE sequence instantly. This reminds the
operator to complete the EW sequence and protects the pregnant solution from being transferred into an
EW system that is not ready for the pregnant solution transfer.
Step 5 – Transferring Pregnant Solution in Progress

Consep Acacia Feed Pump PP04 starts. The pregnant solution is pumped from the Consep Acacia
Solution Tank into the Electrowinning Cell Solution Feed Tank.
The volume of pregnant solution transferred as measured by FIT09 is totalised between steps 5 to 7 as
“Preg Soln Trans”.
Page 24 of 35
Step 6 – Waiting for Solution Tank Reach Low Level
The system waits for the solution to reach “Acacia Solution Tank Low Level” operator setpoint (typically
300L.
Step 7 – Waiting for Low Flow

The system waits for the FIT09 flow rate to fall below the PSTE Low Flow setpoint (operator setpoint),
protecting the pump from running dry.
Step 8 – Flushing Solution Tank

V23 opens adding fresh water to the solution tank which flushes the last of the pregnant solution from the
pipe lines. The system waits for a flushing volume (operator setpoint).
Step 9 – Waiting for Low Flow

V23 closes. The system waits for the FIT09 flow rate to fall below the PSTE Low Flow setpoint (operator
setpoint), protecting the pump from running dry.
Step 10 – Transfer Complete

PP04 is stopped.
Step 11 - Transfer Pathway Closing

Valves V33 and V35 closes.
Step 12 – PSTE Complete

The Pregnant Solution Transfer (PSTE) is complete.
PSTE moves back to step 0, when PCT step 2 next occurs.

Page 25 of 35
2.3.8 - DISCHARGING OF LEACH RESIDUE [DOL]
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting PSTE or PSRWR Complete
The sequence remains idle in this step until the PSTE and PSRWR sequences are complete, no DOL
alarms are active and the system is in auto and PSTE not running (PSTE not running means PSTE step
0 to 3 or complete). When these conditions are true the sequence goes to step 1. If TUW is selected for
operation, the system waits for TUW complete.
Step 1 – Waiting for “Start DOL”

The sequence waits for an operator to select Start DOL from the HMI to start the process. If PSTE is
started, move back to 0.
The sequence requires the Barren Solids Discharge Permitted SYS_DBSP permissive to proceed.
If the Barren Solids Discharge Permitted permissive is not available (fail safe) the Barren solids discharge
not permitted alarm will trip the DOL sequence.

Spare Step
Step 3– Spare Step

Spare Step
Step 4 – V34 Opening

V28 and V34 are opened.
Step 5 – Solids Discharge Flow 1

V40 is opened supplying water to the Consep Acacia distributor and flow control valve, FCV36 is set to
the “Solids Discharge Flow 1” (operator setpoint), thus fluidising the Consep Acacia solids.
V43 open and PP03 starts in preparation to pump away the solids.
The system waits for the Solids Discharge 1 Delay time (operator setpoint tuned to raise the water level
of the reactor cone to approximately 80% providing a positive head in the reactor cone before the solids
discharge valve is opened).
Step 6 – Starting Residue Discharge

V41 is opened to allow the residue solids slurry to flow into PP03. The system waits for 10 seconds.
Step 7 – Solids Discharge Flow 2

The flow control valve, FCV36, is set to the “Solids Discharge Flow 2” (operator setpoint).
Step 8 – Waiting to Reach DOL Level 1

The system waits for the Acacia level LIT12 to fall below the DOL Level 1 operator setpoint for 5 seconds.
Page 26 of 35
Step 9 – DOL 1st Flush
V44 is opened, flushing the Consep Acacia distributor surface for a time equal to the operator setpoint
“DOL 1st Flush Time”. The three manual ball valves downstream of V44 should be adjusted to provide
just enough turbulence in the base of the Acacia to stir up the remaining coarse solids.
Step 10 – Waiting to Reach DOL Level 2

At the completion of DOL 1st Flush Timer, V44 and V40 close and FCV36 setpoint is set to zero.
PP03 continues pumping and the system waits until the Acacia level LIT12 to fall below the DOL level 2
operator setpoint.
Step 11 – DOL 2nd Flush

Upon reaching the required level, V34 closes and V44 is opened, flushing the Consep Acacia distributor
surface for the duration of the DOL 2nd Flush Timer operator setpoint.
Step 12 – Discharging Remaining Solids – Upflow Diffusion Screen

V44 closes. The system waits for 30 seconds while the remaining water and suspended solids are
pumped away.
The operator setpoint “Stratification Flow” is loaded from the HMI. Valves V40 and V34 open, introducing
raw water into the distributor, whereby flowmeter FIT09 measures the water flow and control valve FCV36
regulates the flow to the “Stratification Flow” rate.
Step 13 – Draining in Progress

Flow control valve FCV36 setpoint is set to 0 and valves V34, V40 and V41 close. V39 opens. The system
waits for 60 seconds.
Step 14 – Fresh Water Fill

PP03 stops. V24 opens and the system waits for the DOL fresh water fill time (operator setpoint). The
diffusion screen is left under a layer of fresh water to minimise scaling, cementing and oxidation of the
diffusion screen and diffusion media.
Step 15 – DOL Complete

V24 and V43 are closed. V28 and V39 are closed.
Discharge of Leach Residue is Complete.
DOL moves back to step 0, when PCT step 2 next occurs.
Step 16 – Flushing Discharge Line

On a Stop or shutdown alarm, during DOL, the system goes immediately to this step during which V43
remains open for a Discharge Line Flushing time (operator setpoint) before proceeding to step 17.

Page 27 of 35
2.3.9 - ELECTROWINNING [EW]
Step 0 – Idle Step, Waiting PSTE Complete and LIT75 above Low Level
At the completion of Sequence 8, PSTE, the Electrowinning Solution Feed Tank contains the volume of
pregnant solution. If both PSTE Complete is set and LIT75 exceeds the Low Level setpoint, the system
is in auto and no Electrowinning alarms are active, then Electrowinning is ready to start and the sequence
proceeds to Step 1.
Step 1 – Waiting for “Start Electrowinning”

The system waits until operator selects “Start Electrowinning”. If at any time in this step, any conditions
of Step 0 are not true, the sequence returns to Step 0.
Step 2 – EW Pathway Opening

Valve V81 opens.
Step 3 – Filling EW Cell

The Electrowinning Cell Solution Feed Pump PP72 starts.
The system waits for 3 minutes (180s) to allow the EW Cell to fill with solution.
The solution heater HE73 is enabled and temperature is controlled to the HE73 operator setpoint. The
heater remains on until the solution temperature is greater than the temperature setpoint value plus 2
degrees C, then it remains off until the temperature is 2 degrees less than the setpoint temperature.
If the LIT75 level is below the heater interlock setpoint (500L) then the heater will turn off. It will then
remain off until the level exceed the heater interlock setpoint by 100L.
Step 4 – Rectifier Energised. EW in Progress

The output to the electrowinning cell rectifier is energised, starting electrowinning. The system waits for
the “EW Time” (operator setpoint, nominally 1200 minutes) to expire or manual override by operator
selection of “Electrowinning Complete” on the HMI before proceeding to Step 5.
The electrowinning rectifier output voltage or current is controlled by the rectifier and adjusted using the
potentiometers on the rectifier panel mounted controller.
Step 5 – EW Time Complete

The Heater HE73 and Pump PP72 are de-energised.
Step 6 – EW Pathway Closing

Valve V81 closes.
Page 28 of 35
Step 7 – Take Sample. “Restart EW” or “Continue Discharge Barren”?
The sequence is paused, and an audible alarm is raised to require the operator to log the volume of
solution contained in the EW feed tank and to collect a sample of solution.
The Operator is required to acknowledge this action by selecting either “Continue” to proceed with barren
solution discharge from step 8 or “Restart” to continue the Electrowinning Process from Step 2.
Step 8 – Discharging Barren Pathway Opening

If “Continue” is selected and the client input SYS_DBP is on, then Valve V82 opens.
Step 9 – Discharging Barren Solution and Waiting Solution Tank Low Level
PP72 starts and the barren solution is pumped to the client’s preferred process. LIT75 monitors the level
in the Electrowinning Cell Solution Feed Tank as it drops.
The system waits for the level (LIT75) in the EW Cell Solution Feed Tank to reach the operator setpoint
EW Tank Low Level, nominally 100L.
Step 10 – Final Drain in Progress

A final drain timer (nominally 20 seconds) starts.
Step 11 – Discharge Pump Stopping

At the completion of the final drain timer, PP72 stops.
Step 12 – EW Complete
Valve V82 closes.
The Electrowinning sequence (EW) is complete.

Page 29 of 35
2.4 ALARMS
The system has the following alarms in the following categories for the Acacia, EW, Detoxification, Barren and
Reagents Modules.
Warning Alarms
Warning Alarms are raised to warn the operator of a condition which requires attention, but does not warrant an
immediate plant stoppage.
Warning alarms include:

Dissolution Module:
• LeachAid Feeder (FE07) Fault
• Solution Tank Heater (HE108) Fault
• Solution Tank Low Level Warning
• Solution Tank High Level Warning
• Consep Acacia High Level Alarm
• Consep Acacia Low Solids Level Warning
• Temperature Transmitter (TT14) Signal out of Bounds – The 4-20mA signal from the instrument is outside
the permissible limits
Electrowinning Module:
• EW Tank Low Level Warning
• EW Tank High Level Warning
• EW Tank Heater (HE73) Fault
• EW Tank Heater Low Level Warning
• EW Rectifier Not in Remote Fault
• Temperature Transmitter (TT74) Signal out of Bounds – The 4-20mA signal from the instrument is outside
the permissible limits
Shutdown Alarms
Shutdown Alarms are raised when a condition that requires the immediate shutdown of the system occurs. A
shutdown alarm will engage the shutdown sequence on the system.
Shutdown Alarms include:

Dissolution Module:
• Dissolution Operator Stop
• Solids Discharge Pump (PP03) Fault
• Acacia Feed Pump (PP04) Fault
• Solution Tank Low Low Level Alarm
• Solution Tank High High Level Alarm
• Potable Water Batching Alarm
• Caustic Dosing Alarm
• Cyanide Dosing Alarm
• PSRWR Pregnant Solution Drain Alarm
• Reagent Unauthorised Flow Alarm
• Caustic Low Flow Alarm
• Cyanide Low Flow Alarm
• Acacia Feed Low Flow Alarm
• Acacia Feed High Flow Alarm
• Drives / Valves not enabled
o Warning in all steps except PSTE
• Pregnant Solution Transfer Low Flow Alarm
Page 30 of 35
• Acacia Feed Unauthorised Flow Alarm
• Solids Discharge Pump Not Permitted Alarm
• Reagents Not Available Alarm
• EW Not Ready to Accept Pregnant Solution Alarm
• Flow Transmitter (FIT09) Signal out of Bounds – The 4-20mA signal from the instrument is outside the
permissible limits
o Shutdown in specific Steps
o Warning Alarm in all other cases
• Flow Transmitter (FIT10) Signal out of Bounds – The 4-20mA signal from the instrument is outside the
permissible limits
o Shutdown in specific MLRLC Steps
• Level Transmitter (LIT12) Signal out of Bounds – The 4-20mA signal from the instrument is outside the
permissible limits
o Shutdown in specific SADC Steps
permissible limits
o Shutdown in specific MLRLC Steps
Electrowinning Module:
• EW Operator Stop
• EW Pump (PP72) Fault
• EW Tank High High Level Alarm
• EW Tank Low Low Level Alarm
• EW Rectifier (EW70) Alarm
• EW Drives / Valves not enabled
• Barren Solution Discharge Not Permitted
permissible limits
o Shutdown in specific PSTE Steps
Fatal Alarms
Alarms which are raised when a fatal condition occurs on the system. A fatal alarm will immediately stop the system
and place it in idle. All drives will be turned off and all valves to the system will be closed.
Fatal Alarms include:

Dissolution:
• Dissolution Emergency Stop
Electrowinning:
• EW Emergency Stop
Common:
• Field Power Fault
• DC Power Absent
The following table shows where each alarm above is active.
Page 31 of 35
Page 32 of 35
2.5 OPERATOR INTERFACE (HMI)
The system is supplied with an LCD touchscreen Human Machine Interface (HMI) panel. It provides operational
variable values, operational status of the equipment, provision for adjustment of process setpoints and operational
settings and ability to start, stop, reset after alarms and manually control the equipment. Access to adjustment of
setpoints and settings is password protected.
Details of the HMI configuration are provided in the Control Manual.
The HMI is designed for utilization by three levels of user type, each with varying levels of authority to change
settings. These are referred to as Engineer, Supervisor and Operator. Provision is made for members of each user
type to log on to the system’s HMI using a common numerical access code, typically comprised of 3 digits with a
4 digit password.
A “Login” and “Logout” Button gives different access levels that allow access to different screens and functions.
There are three security levels enabled: -

• Operator – This level gives access to all operational screens, but not to setpoints, and auto/manual or
tuning screens/functions.
• Supervisor – To all operator functions plus setpoints and auto-manuals but not tuning, Also access to
RESET ALL on Reset Screen.
• Engineer – Access to all screens and functions. The Engineer’s access code should be kept secure.
Access codes are fixed and can only edited offline by the Engineer using the HMI development software.
The user may log on or off the system’s HMI via the Modify or Information screens. The system will automatically
log off the user after 10 minutes of inactivity on the HMI.
Page 33 of 35
SECTION 3: OPERATOR SETPOINTS
The following setpoints may be adjusted via the HMI by authorised personnel as required.
HMI Screen Unit Setpoint
FLOW SETPOINTS
STRATIFICATION FLOW m3/h 11
DESLIME FLOW m /h
3 10
LEACHING FLOW m /h
3 7
SOLID DISCHARGE FLOW 1 m /h
3 10
SOLID DISCHARGE FLOW 2 m3/h 8
TUW UPFLOW m /h
3 11
PSTE LOW FLOW m /h
3 6
CCAD TIMER SETPOINTS

SETTLING TIME s 120
DECANT TIME s 120
CONCENTRATE TRANSFER TIME s 300
SADC TIMER SETPOINTS

SOLIDS SETTLING TIME s 180
STRATIFICATION TIME s 60
DESLIME TIME s 1800
DESLIME DRAIN TIME s 900
SADC RINSE TIME s 0
SADC RINSE DRAIN TIME s 0
MLRLC TIMER SETPOINTS

LEACH TIME min 1080
LINE FLUSH TIME s 15
PREGNANT DRAIN WATCHDOG s 4800
PREGNANT FINAL DRAIN TIME s 600
PREGNANT RINSE TIME s 30
PREGNANT RINSE DRAIN TIME s 600
DOL TIMER SETPOINTS

DOL DELAY 1 TIME s 30
DOL FLUSH 1 TIME s 90
DOL FLUSH 2 TIME s 15
DOL FRESH WATER FILL TIME s 30
DOL LINE FLUSH TIME s 15
BATCH SETPOINTS
TOTAL WATER BATCH SIZE L 1100
CAUSTIC BATCH SIZE L 12
CYANIDE BATCH SIZE L 60
LEACHAID DOSING TIME s 60
Page 34 of 35
REAGENT MIX TIME s 180
SOLUTION TANK HEATER 1 Deg C 50
MISC SETPOINTS
PSRWR No PREGNANT RINSES # 1
TUW No RINSES # 1
PSTE FLUSH VOLUME L 75
LEVEL SETPOINTS
PCT LEVEL % 25
TUW LEVEL % 80
SOLUTION TANK LOW LEVEL L 300
DOL LEVEL 1 % 30
DOL LEVEL 2 % 40
ACACIA DECANT LEVEL % 65
ALARM LEVEL SETPOINTS

SOLUTION TANK LOW WARNING L 500
SOLUTION TANK LOW ALARM L 250
SOLUTION TANK HIGH WARNING L 1500
SOLUTION TANK HIGH ALARM L 1550
REACTOR FLOWRATE TUNE PID Loop

Kc - 1.2
Ti - 0.07
Td - 0.00
Db - 5
ALARM Db - 30
EW SETPOINTS
EW TEMPERATURE Deg C 60
EW CYCLE TIME h 20
EW TANK LOW LEVEL L 300
EW RECTIFIER SETPOINTS
VOLTAGE V 3.50
AMPERAGE Amp 800
EW ALARM LEVEL SETPOINTS

EW SOLUTION TANK LOW WARNING L 500
EW SOLUTION TANK LOW ALARM L 250
EW SOLUTION TANK HIGH WARNING L 1800
EW SOLUTION TANK HIGH ALARM L 1850
Above setpoints are typical only and may change during commissioning depending on site specific process
conditions.
Page 35 of 35
9. CONTROL MANUAL
C22600-CS500-CM Consep Acacia CS500 Control Manual
Page 31 of 33
Control Panel Installation
and Operation Manual
CS500 CONSEP Acacia and CS500EW Electrowinning
with handshake with two KCXD20 Knelson Concentrators
Consep Ref No: C22600
Revision No: 0 Date: 14th July 2020
Client: Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project
Equipment title: CONSEP ACACIA with ELECTROWINNING
Equipment description: CONSEP Acacia Model CS500 System, comprising of;

- Dissolution Module with Integrated Concentrate Cone
- Electrowinning Module with Electrowinning Cell and Rectifier
- Handshake with two (2) fKnelson Concentrators
The supplied software and electrical design and any modified version thereof is licensed for
use on this plant only and may not be used on or in conjunction with another machine,
duplicated, copied or passed to a third party without the written consent of CONSEP Pty Ltd
(C) Copyright 1994-2020 CONSEP Pty Ltd
CONSEP PTY LTD | ACN: 053 177 898 | sales@consep.com.au | www.consep.com.au

Perth | Unit 3, 8 Fisher Street, Belmont, WA 6104 | T: +61 8 9477 6777
Model CS500/CS500EW CONSEP Acacia
Installation and Operations Manual
Job No. C22600 – San Albino Project - Rev 0 – 16th July, 2020
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................................................................... 2
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 3
Principle of Operation .......................................................................................................... 3
Automation Control Equipment ........................................................................................... 3
Operator Interface ................................................................................................................ 5
Installation ................................................................................................................................ 6
Instrumentation and Power ................................................................................................... 6
Power Supply and Signal Conventions ................................................................................ 8
Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 9
Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................ 10
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 10
Operator Screens ................................................................................................................ 11
The RedLion HMI CR1000-7 – Standard Features ................................................................................... 13
The CONSEP Contact Information Screen ............................................................................................... 14
Login Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 15
The Menu Screen. ..................................................................................................................................... 16
The Acacia Mimic Screen. ........................................................................................................................ 17
The Sequence Summary Screen. ............................................................................................................... 19
The CONSEP Acacia Status Screen.......................................................................................................... 20
CONSEP Acacia Automatic Control Screen 1. ......................................................................................... 21
CONSEP Acacia Automatic Control Screen 2.......................................................................................... 22
Stop/Restart Screen. .................................................................................................................................. 26
Reset All Screen. ....................................................................................................................................... 27
Electrowinning Automatic Control & Status Screen. ................................................................................ 28
Electrowinning Stop/Restart Screen. ......................................................................................................... 30
Electrowinning Reset Screen. ................................................................................................................... 31
Acacia Flow Controller Screen. ................................................................................................................ 32
The Analog and Sequence Trend Screens. ................................................................................................ 36
The Modify Screen .................................................................................................................................... 37
Secured Access - The Flow Setpoint Screen. ............................................................. 38
Secured Access - Batching Setpoint Screen. .............................................................. 39
Secured Access - Level Setpoint Screen. ................................................................... 41
Secured Access – Level Alarm Setpoint Screen. ....................................................... 42
Secured Access – CCAD & PCT Time Setpoints Screen. ......................................... 43
Secured Access – SADC Time Setpoints Screen. ...................................................... 44
Secured Access – MLRLC & PSRWR Time Setpoints Screen. ................................ 45
Secured Access – DOL Time Setpoints Screen. ........................................................ 47
Secured Access – Miscellaneous Setpoint Screen. .................................................... 49
Secured Access – Electrowinning Setpoint Screen .................................................... 50
Secured Access – Electrowinning Level Alarm Setpoint Screen. ............................. 51
Electrowinning Voltage & Current Setpoint Screen .................................................. 52
Secured Access to Manual – ..................................................................................................................... 54
Acacia Manual Control Screen 1& 2. ....................................................................................................... 54
Electrowinning Manual Control Screen. ................................................................................................... 56
Alarm Viewer Screen. ............................................................................................................................... 57
Alarm Log Screen. .................................................................................................................................... 59
Alarms ................................................................................................................................ 60
Drawing Schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 63
Appendix A - Commissioning Data ....................................................................................... 64
Appendix B – Security ........................................................................................................... 66
Page 2
Introduction
Principle of Operation
The Client’s gravity concentrators produce a gravity concentrate that is deposited in the
concentrate cone of the CONSEP Acacia Dissolution module. Once sufficient concentrate is
accumulated the CS500 CONSEP Acacia Dissolution Module, (which is a fluidised batch
system for the extraction of gold from a high-grade concentrate with the aid of leach
reagents), then the CONSEP Acacia Dissolution module processes the concentrate to
produce a pregnant solution suitable for Electrowinning.
On the Dissolution module completing its batch cycle it transfers the pregnant solution to
the Consep Electrowinning modules solution tank for final processing.
Automation Control Equipment
A local Allen Bradley CompactLogix Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) controls the
CONSEP Acacia with the Operator interface via a colour RedLion Touch Screen (HMI).
For the Dissolution Module (Refer PID C22600-500-01-101)
➢ A twin main control cabinet. One cabinet (LCP02) houses the PLC controls and
the HMI controls and the other cabinet (LCP01) houses the motor and heater
controls.
Provision exists in the control system for automated control of the CONSEP
Acacia as well as a manual maintenance mode.
➢ The automated field valves are controlled by digital outputs from the PLC
control via panel mounted pneumatic solenoid valves.
➢ Each motor is controlled via a digital output and is monitored for its’ running and
fault status.
➢ The solution tank heaters (HE08) is controlled via a digital output based on a 4-
20mA analog temperature signal (TT14) and is monitored for its running and
fault status.
➢ An ultrasonic level transmitter (LIT13) giving an analog reading of the contents

of the main CONSEP Acacia vessel and outputs a 4-20mA signal to the PLC that
is scaled 0-100%. The level sensor also gives an alarm output to the PLC on
either failure of the unit or loss of signal.
➢ An ultrasonic level transmitter (LIT12) giving an analog reading of the contents

of the CONSEP Acacia feed tank and outputs a 4-20mA signal to the PLC that is
scaled 0-1,600 litres. The level sensor also gives an alarm output to the PLC on
either failure of the unit or loss of signal.
➢ A magnetic flowmeter (FIT09) measures the flow rate into the CONSEP Acacia
and outputs a 4-20mA signal to the PLC that is scaled 0-30 m3/hr. It also outputs
Page 3
a pulse for monitoring of pregnant solution volume transferred to the client’s

electrowinning process. This pulse is scaled to output 1 pulse per 5 litres.
➢ A Flow Control Valve (FCV36) allows control of the CONSEP Acacia feed
flowrate from the PLC based flow controller.
➢ A magnetic flowmeter (FIT10) measures the flow rate of reagent into the
CONSEP Acacia and outputs a 4-20mA signal to the PLC that is scaled 0-18
m3/hr. A pulse from flowmeter to meter the addition of the reagents, sodium
cyanide (Cyanide) and sodium hydroxide (Caustic), into the CONSEP Acacia
feed tank. This pulse is scaled to output 2 pulses per litre.
➢ A local running and visual alarm indication on the front of the panel. The visual
alarm remains on whenever an alarm is present on the system.
➢ A volts free General alarm Output for use by the Client (If Required)
➢ An Emergency Shutdown Pushbutton on the Main Control Panel plus provision

to interlock to an external volts free emergency stop contact.
The Emergency Shutdown Pushbutton causes abnormal shutdown of the CONSEP

Acacia and should only be used for Emergency conditions, for normal shutdowns use
the Control Screen Functions
For the Electrowinning Module (Refer PID C22600-500-02-101)
➢ An Electrowinning control cabinet (LCP03) houses the instrument interface

terminals and the motor and heater controls. The Electrowinning module is
controlled from the CONSEP Acacia PLC control system which provides both
automated control of the Electrowinning module as well as a manual maintenance
mode.
➢ The automated field valves (V81, V82) are controlled by digital outputs from the
PLC control via panel mounted pneumatic solenoid valves.
➢ The Electrowinning Feed Pump (PP72) is controlled via a digital output and is
monitored for its’ running and fault status.
➢ The solution tank heaters (HE73) are controlled via digital outputs based on a 4-
20mA analog temperature signal (TT74) and is monitored for its running and fault
status.
➢ An ultrasonic level transmitter (LIT75) giving an analog reading of the contents of

the CONSEP Acacia feed tank and outputs a 4-20mA signal to the PLC that is scaled
0-1,900 litres. The level sensor also gives an alarm output to the PLC on either
failure of the unit or loss of signal.
➢ A CONSEP HRE800 Electrowinning Rectifier Control Panel (LCP04) contains the

Electrowinning Rectifier for the CONSEP CSE609 Electrowinning. The CONSEP
Page 4
control system allows for one stop/start output plus a running and fault feedback
from this panel)
Operator Interface
The operator interface, which is a RedLion 7” Colour CR1000-7”, comprises a colour

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with Touch Operation. This Operator interface incorporates
the control and monitoring screens, which allow the operator to monitor and control various
aspects of the CONSEP Acacia’s operation. (Refer later)
Page 5
Installation
Instrumentation and Power
The Control System is supplied attached to the CONSEP Acacia Feed tank and all internal
and field wiring between the main control panel and the motor controls and field instruments
is supplied.
All panels, instruments and inter-wiring are installed to meet an Environmental rating of
IP65.
The client is required to supply and connect the following Electrical, Instrument and Fluid
services in accordance with local regulations: -
 Three Phase 480V 60Hz (52 Amperes) power supply to the main isolator in the motor
control panel (LCP01).
 Three Phase 480V 60Hz (42 Amperes) power supply to the main isolator in the
Electrowinning Control panel (LCP03).
 Three Phase 480V 60Hz (12 Amperes) power supply from the Electrowinning
Control panel (LCP03) to the Electrowinning Rectifier Control panel (LCP04).
NOTE: When connecting Three Phase mains power confirm rotation of all drives is in
the correct direction. If an individual drives’ direction is incorrect then reverse any
two of the drives’ three phase leads, however if all the drive directions are incorrect
then reverse any two of the three incoming powers phase leads and all the drives'
directions will be reversed
 Single Phase 220V 60Hz power supply to the CONSEP Acacia PLC Control Panel
(LCP02).
Should the mains power be subject to moderate to high levels of electrical noise or the
possibility of spikes from external sources such as lighting, then power conditioning is
recommended for the incoming power.
 Reconnection of electrical and pneumatic fittings disconnected for shipment
 Multicore control and instrument cables from the CONSEP Acacia Dissolution PLC
control panel (LCP02) to the Electrowinning Control panel (LCP03).
 Multicore control and instrument cables from the CONSEP Electrowinning Control
panel (LCP03) to the Electrowinning Rectifier Control panel (LCP04).
 Two (2) Knelson ICS Control Panels will be controlled from the CONSEP Acacia
Dissolution PLC control panel (LCP02) via I/O Drop Panels.
 Instrument Quality Air (600 kPag) to the Regulator supplying the solenoid valves
and the Flow Control Valve (FCV36) in the PLC control panel (LCP02)
Page 6
 Remote alarm (if required)
 Remote Emergency stop inputs (if required)
 Hardwire connection to Clients control system (If Required) If hardware link not
installed and no DCS communications ensure links are in place (refer Dwg
C22600E9019, C22600E9023)
 Ethernet connection to Clients control system (If Required) (refer Dwg

C22600E9007)
 Process and reagent services for water, Sodium hydroxide, Sodium cyanide batching
as well as concentrate delivery, barren solids removal and pregnant solution transfer
to Electrowinning and barren liquids removal from Electrowinning.
It is important that all connections be checked to ensure they have remained tight during
transport to site. This is particularly important on the low voltage motor and heater
wiring to prevent the occurrence of thermal problems and possible equipment damage.
Page 7
Power Supply and Signal Conventions
The control system is based on the following voltages: -
▪ Main Motor Control Panel Power: 3 phase 480V, 60Hz

▪ Motor Control and GPO: 1 phase 220V, 60Hz
▪ Main PLC Control Panel Contactor Voltage: 1 phase 220V, 60Hz
▪ Remote HMI Panel Voltage: 1 phase 220V, 60Hz
▪ Field Instrument Voltages: 24VDC
▪ Internal Control Voltages: 24VDC
▪ Automatic Valve Control: 24VDC
▪ Analog signals: 4 to 20 mA DC
▪ Current to Pressure Transducers: 4 - 20 mA DC to 20 - 100 kPag
▪ Flowmeter passive Pulse signals: 24VDC.
Page 8
Calibration
For detailed Calibration data refer the appropriate Equipment's Instruction and Maintenance
Manual.
Whilst all instruments have been calibrated prior to shipment the following need to be
rechecked prior to operation
LIT12 – CONSEP Acacia Vessel Level transmitter
Whilst this instrument has been calibrated prior to shipment it may require fine tuning in
actual process conditions prior to commencement of operation
LIT13 – CONSEP Acacia Feed Tank Level transmitter
Whilst this instrument has been calibrated prior to shipment it will require fine tuning in
FIC09 – CONSEP Acacia Feed flowrate controller (PLC)
The Flow Control algorithm (in the PLC) must be tuned on actual process conditions to
ensure optimum flow control.
FE07 – The LeachAid Feeder
This screw feeder needs to be tested on LeachAid to determine the addition rate to enable
the LeachAid dosing timer to be correctly set.
LIT75 – CONSEP Electrowinning solution tank Level transmitter
Whilst this instrument has been calibrated prior to shipment it may require fine tuning in
Motor Overloads – Before the plant is placed in operation all motor overload settings
should be set to the motor nameplate current settings to ensure protection of the drives.
All other instruments have been pre-calibrated in CONSEP’s factory and should normally
require no recalibration on site prior to commencement of operation.
Page 9
Operating Instructions
Overview
This section covers the control of the Model CS500 CONSEP Acacia Dissolution and
Electrowinning Modules
The Acacia PLC also handshakes with the client’s two (2) KCXD20 Knelson which are
controlled via I/O Drop Panels.
It is possible to operate this system in either manual (maintenance only) or automatic mode.
The manual mode is intended only as an aid to maintenance and service of the unit and
when in this mode all process alarms are disabled and the operator has on/off control (via
the PLC) of drive motors, automated valves, water flow and CONSEP Acacia feed tank
heating from the manual and PID screens on the HMI.
The water flow controller (in the PLC) can be operated in either automatic PID mode or in
manual where the operator controls the output directly.
In automatic mode the control is achieved from the Control and PID screens with status,
flow, temperature and pressure setpoints, timers and alarm information provided on other
screens.
The automatic operation of the Model CS500 Acacia comprises the control of the various
operations that are outlined in detail in the Acacia functional description. In brief these
operations are as follows.
1. CCAD – Concentrate Collection and Decant – This sequence controls the

collection of concentrate in the concentrate cone and the decanting of excess liquid at
the end of every collection cycle.
2. PCT – Primary Concentrate Transfer – The process involves the transfer of the
primary concentrate from the client’ Concentrate hopper into the CONSEP Acacia
Vessel.
3. SADC – Stratification and Deslime of Concentrate – This involves the sequential

operation of two processes. Firstly, on completion of the PCT the “Stratification of
the Concentrate” starts and this stratifies the different particle sizes to improve
fluidisation of the concentrate in the CONSEP Acacia. On completion of
stratification the second process “Desliming of Concentrate” begins to remove
ultra-fine slimes from the concentrate to improve downstream processing.
4. MLRLC – Mixing of Leach Reagents and Leaching of Concentrate – This

involves the sequential operation of two processes. Firstly the “Mixing of Leach
Reagents” starts at the same time as PCT and automatically prepares the Leaching
solution in the CONSEP Acacia Feed tank by the programmed addition of water and
selected leach Reagents and starts heating this solution to the desired leach
temperature. The second process in this sequence “Leaching of Concentrate” starts
when the Mixing of Leach reagents is finished, and the SADC sequence is complete.
Page 10
5. PSRWR – Pregnant Solution Recovery and Washing of Residue – The

“Pregnant Solution Recovery” starts at the completion of the Leaching and
controls the transfer of the pregnant solution from the CONSEP Acacia Vessel back
to the CONSEP Acacia Feed Tank. The “Washing of Residue” does not occur until
the pregnant solution transfer to Electrowinning [PSTE] is complete.
6. TUW - Tailings Upflow Wash. This stage is operator enabled using the HMI.
This stage is included to provide site with an option in addition to the PSRWR stage,
for further reducing residual cyanide ion in the tailings discharge and preventing
cyanide ion from affecting the flotation circuit.
7. DOL – Discharging of Leach Residue – At the completion of PSRWR this process

starts and controls the discharging of the Residual solids in the CONSEP Acacia
back into the Clients Circuit.
8. PSTE – Pregnant Solution Transfer to Electrowinning – At the completion of

PSRWR this process starts and controls the transfer of the pregnant solution to the
client’s electrowinning process.
9. Electrowinning [EW]. Refer PID Dwg No. C22600-500-02-101.

This stage controls the circulation of pregnant solution through the Electrowinning
Cell to facilitate electrolytic plating of gold or other precious metals on to the
Electrowinning Cell cathodes.
Operator Screens
The Operator interface is through the RedLion CR1000-7” HMI and the control is
implemented on a number of screens.
These screens are: -
1. The Information Screen
2. The Menu Screen.
3. Acacia Mimic Screen for the concentrate cone, Dissolution Module and
Electrowinning Module
4. Mimic Legend Screen
5. The Overview Screen.
6. The Sequence Summary.
7. The Status Screen.
8. The analog trend and Sequence trend Screens
9. Automatic Control Screen 1.

Page 11
a. Access to the Stop/Restart Screen.

b. Access to the Reset-All Screen.



13. Electrowinning Control & Status Screen

a. Access to the Electrowinning Stop/Restart
b. Access to the Electrowinning Reset Screen.
14. Flow Controller Screen.

a. Secured access – FIC09 Tuning screen.
15. The Modify Screen

a. Secured Access – Acacia Flow Setpoint Screen.
b. Secured Access - The Batching Setpoint Screen.
c. Secured Access – Acacia Level Setpoint Screen.
d. Secured Access – The Acacia Level Alarm Setpoint Screen
e. Secured Access – CCAD and PCT Time Setpoint Screen
f. Secured Access - SADC Time Setpoint Screen.
g. Secured Access – MLRLC and PSRWR Time Setpoint Screen
h. Secured Access – PSTE and DOL Time Setpoint Screen
i. Secured Access – The Level Setpoint Screen
j. Secured Access - The Misc. Setpoint Screen.
k. Secured Access – Electrowinning Setpoints
l. Secured Access – Electrowinning Level Alarm Setpoints
m. Secured Access –
i. Access to Manual Control Screen.
ii. Access to Manual Control Screen 2.
iii. Access to Electrowinning Manual Screen
16. Alarm Screen [ALARMLIST].
17. Alarm History Screen [EVENTLIST].
18. Alarm Accept Popup.
Page 12
The RedLion HMI CR1000-7 – Standard Features
Colour LCD Screen Alarm Banner Time & date
Screen Selection Buttons Auto/Manual Status Current User
The RedLion 7” Colour LED Operator interface utilises touch screen control.
- An alarm banner pops up along the top of the current screen should an alarm be
active. Note: if this banner is active touching it takes the operator straight to the
Alarm page
- A time & date display is shown in top right corner of most screens
- A CONSEP Acacia auto/manual status which shows “CA AUTO” when Acacia
is in PLC Control and “CA MANUAL” when Acacia is in HMI manual control
- A CONSEP Electrowinning auto/manual status which shows “EW AUTO”
when Electrowinning is in PLC Control and “EW MANUAL” when
Electrowinning is in HMI manual control
- A current user display showing current access level “OPERATOR” (default),
“SUPERVISOR” or “ENGINEER”
- Data entry, screen navigation and setpoint selection is accessed via touching the
buttons that appear on screen.
Page 13
The CONSEP Contact Information Screen
The Information Screen [INFO] provides the following information: -
- Contact details for CONSEP Pty Ltd

- The software version detail
- A current time display in the top right hand corner
- Access to the LOGIN Screen
- A Lamp Test Button to test the front of panel Lamps
- A CONSEP Acacia auto/manual status which shows “CA AUTO” when Acacia is
in PLC Control and “CA MANUAL” when Acacia is in HMI manual control
- A CONSEP Electrowinning auto/manual status which shows “EW AUTO” when
Electrowinning is in PLC Control and “EW MANUAL” when Electrowinning is in
HMI manual control
- Screen select buttons as described in enclosed text
This screen is initialised every time the HMI Power is cycled or during operation it can be
accessed from the “MENU” screen.
Page 14
Login Procedure
On selecting “LOGIN” a Popup Login screen appears

and “LOGIN” is again selected on this screen
Three login levels are configured
OPERATOR – this is the default
SUPERVISOR – this allows access to the setpoint

and manual control screens
ENGINEER – this allows access to all functions.
On pressing the Login button the password entry popup will appear and the user name and
password are then entered.
On successful password entry the USER indicator at the top will change to the relevant
USER.
TO clear the USER login press the “LOGOUT” button
Page 15
The Menu Screen.
This screen is the Main Menu screen and displays
- The LOGO of CONSEP Pty Ltd.
- The current date and time
- The Auto/Manual status of each process
- A status for the Flow Controller to Show if Setpoint or CV is in Manual or from

PLC

Page 16
The Acacia Mimic Screen.
This screen is the dissolution module mimic screen and displays a graphical representation
of the operation of the Acacia. The Colours used are shown on the Mimic Legend Popup as
shown below
Page 17
The Overview Screen.
This screen is the Overview screen and displays
- A bar graph and digital readout of the Level [LIT12] in percent [%] in the CONSEP
Acacia Vessel.
- A bar graph and digital readout of the CONSEP Acacia Feed Flowrate [FIT09] in
cubic metre per hour [0-30 m3/hr] with a current setpoint bar to the right.
- A digital display of the batched quantities of water and leach reagent for the current
batch in litres.
- A bar graph and digital readout of the CONSEP Acacia Reagent Flowrate [FIT10] in
cubic metre per hour [0-18 m3/hr].
- A bar graph and digital readout of the Level [LIT13] in litres [0-1600 l] in the
CONSEP Acacia Solution tank.
- A bar graph and digital readout of the Temperature [TT14] in degrees Celsius
[0-100ºC] in the CONSEP Acacia Feed tank with a current setpoint bar to the right.
Page 18
The Sequence Summary Screen.
This screen gives and overview of the status of each sequence and is accessed from either
Acacia control screens 1 to 4, EW control or the main menu screen. Screen select buttons as
described in enclosed text
Page 19
The CONSEP Acacia Status Screen.
This screen is the Status screen and displays
- A visual indication of the status of each drive. The rectangle is red if the drive is off
and green if the drive is on.
- A visual indication of the status of each automated on/off valve. The rectangle is red
if the valve is off and green if the valve is on.
- A digital display of the setpoint and the batched quantities of water and leach reagent
for the current batch in litres.
- A digital display of the last volume of pregnant solution transferred to

Electrowinning
- A digital display of the last vessel volumes and feed flowrate
Page 20
CONSEP Acacia Automatic Control Screen 1.
This screen is first of four control display screens and allows control and monitoring of the
CCAD process and the two Knelsons.
- A visual sequence status display showing of the current step number CCAD and its
corresponding alphanumeric step description for each process sequence plus a digital
indication to the right of each sequence status display of the time remaining for the
current step in each sequence and its time units (min/sec).
- A visual indication of “Knelson 1 (2) Purge Permitted” and “Knelson 1 (2) Alarm
Active”
- Digital displays of the number of current Purges in the Acacia Concentrate Cone.
These Totals are reset to zero on running the PCT sequence to empty the concentrate
cone into the Acacia.
- Touch buttons “Reset Knelson 1(2) Purge Count” to allow the operator to reset the
Purge Count for KN1 or KN2 Knelson Purges. Note: These buttons are only visible
when logged in as the Supervisor or Engineer.
- A touch button “START DECANT” is active to allow the operator start the
Concentrate Cone Decant sequence when the sequence is in step 0 and the step
description display is “Idle Waiting next Purge”. This button is not active in any
other step.
- A touch button “STOP SCREEN” is active at all times and allows the operator to
select the “START/STOP” screen. Note the selection of “START/STOP” acts to stop
all active sequences. This screen also allows the “Restart” of all active sequences
after a “STOP” or “Alarm” and Reset-All.
Page 21
This screen is the second of five control screens and allows control and monitoring of the
PCT processes displays
- A visual sequence status display showing of the current step number for PCT and its
corresponding alphanumeric step description for each process sequence plus a
digital indication to the right of each sequence status display of the time remaining
for the current step in each sequence and its time units (min/sec).A digital indication
to the right of each sequence status display of the time remaining for the current step
in each sequence and its time units (min/sec).
- A visual indication of “Knelson Purge Permitted”, “Knelson Circuit Purging” and

“Concentrate Received”
- The Number of Knelson purges currently in the Concentrate cone (Reset after each
PCT sequence)
- A touch button “Start PCT” is active to start the Primary Concentrate Transfer
sequence when the sequence is in step 1 and the step description display is flashing
“Waiting for START”. This button is not active in any other step.
- A touch button “Conc. Avail?” is active to can be used to start the Primary
Concentrate Transfer sequence (in the absence of a concentrate available signal
from the client) when the sequence is in step 0 and the step description display is
“Idle Waiting for Conc.”. This button is not active in any other step.
- A touch button “Cone Empty?” is active to end the Primary Concentrate Transfer
Page 22
“Waiting for “Conc. EMPTY” ”. This button is not active in any other step.
- A touch button “STOP SCREEN” is active at all times and allows the operator to
select the “START/STOP” screen. Note the selection of “START/STOP” acts to
stop all active sequences. This screen also allows the “Restart” of all active
sequences after a “STOP” or “Alarm” and Reset-All.
This screen is the third of four control screens and allows control and monitoring of the
SADC, MLRLC, PSRWR & TUW control sequences
- A visual sequence status display showing of the current step number for SADC,
MLRLC, PSRWR and TUW and its corresponding alphanumeric step description for
each process sequence plus a digital indication to the right of each sequence status
display of the time remaining for the current step in each sequence and its time units
(min/sec).
- Touch buttons “RESTART PSRWR” and “CONTINUE PSRWR” are active/visible

only after a “Drain Failure alarm” in the Pregnant Solution Recovery and Washing of
Residue Sequence.
Following this alarm only the PSRWR sequence is halted. If the operator selects
Touch button “RESTART PSRWR” the sequence will restart at Step 4 and repeat
the drain, however if the operator elects to Select “CONTINUE PSRWR” the
sequence will not repeat but restart the sequence at step 8 and continue. It would be
normally expected to repeat the process at least once following this alarm.
Page 23
- Touch button “TUW” is used to Toggle between TUW active and TUW Bypass if
the system has TUW active. If TUW is not active then the TUW button and the
TUW step display will not be visible.
- A visual indication of the status of the external signals required by the MLRLC
sequence - “MLRLC Reagent OK” – This signal is required before MLRLC can
proceed and when ON indicates that the Reagents are ready for Batching of the
Leach Reagents. The signal is present when the rectangular indicator to the right
changes from the white “OFF” to the yellow “ON”.
- Touch Button “STOP SCREEN” is active at all times and allows the operator to
- Screen navigation buttons as described in enclosed text
This screen is the fourth of four control screens and allows control and of the PSTE & DOL
processes displays
- A visual sequence status display showing of the current step number and its
corresponding alphanumeric step description for each process sequence.
- A digital indication to the right of each sequence status display of the time remaining
for the current step in each sequence and its time units (min/sec).
- A visual indication of the status of the external signals required by the respective
sequences
Page 24
- “Ready for Barrens Solids Discharge” – This signal is required before DOL can
proceed and when ON indicates that the external system is ready for Barren
discharge.
- “EW Ready for Pregnant Sol’n Transfer” – This signal is required before PSTE can
proceed and when ON indicates that the EW tank has sufficient capacity for the
pregnant solution to be transferred to Electrowinning.
The signal is present when the rectangular indicator to the right changes from the
grey “OFF” to the yellow “ON”.
- Touch Button “START PSTE” is active to allow Operator acknowledgement of

having taken a sample during the Pregnant Return sequence [PSTE] when the
sequence is in step 3 and the step description display is flashing “TAKE SAMPLE”.
This button is not active in any other step.
- Touch Button “START DOL” is active to start the Discharge of Leach Residue
“Waiting for START”. This button is not active in any other step.
- A digital display of the Transferred Pregnant Solution Volume.
Page 25
Stop/Restart Screen.
This screen can be called from either of the of two control screens by pressing Touch button
“STOP SCREEN”. This screen controls the stopping of the Acacia process(s) or the restart
of the process(s) in the event of a shutdown Alarm or “STOP PROCESS”
- A visual display warning of the consequences of the “STOP PROCESS” action.
- Touch button “STOP PROCESS” is active when any sequence is running and by
selecting this any active process will be stopped and forced to the “RESTART” step.
The “STOP PROCESS” function acts on ALL active sequences.
- Touch button “RESTART PROCESS” is active only after a “STOP PROCESS”

action or an Alarm shutdown and allows the operator to restart the previously active
sequences. Note the selection of “RESTART PROCESS” acts to restart all
previously active sequences. Each sequence will restart at a step defined by that
sequences relevant recovery from alarm/stop condition.
- Touch button “RESET ALL” directs the operator to the RESET ALL screen which
allows the operator to reset the Acacia system. THIS FUNCTION SHOULD BE
USED WITH EXTREME CAUTION as all sequences are reset to the starting state
and the system may require manual removal of material from the system prior to
restarting of the system.
Page 26
Reset All Screen.
This screen can be called from the stop/Restart screen by pressing the touch button “RESET
ALL”. This screen controls the resetting of all process(s) and is a secured access screen.
- Touch button “PRESS TO RESET ALL DISSOL’N SEQUENCES” - when this

Touch button is selected selecting then ALL active process(s) will be stopped and
forced to the “IDLE” step.
The “RESET ALL SEQUENCES” function acts on ALL

ACACIA sequences. USE WITH CAUTION
- Screen navigation buttons as described in enclosed text.
Page 27
Electrowinning Automatic Control & Status Screen.
This electrowinning screen is the last of five control screens and allows control and of the
Electrowinning process and displays the status of the automated equipment
- A visual sequence status display showing of the current step number and its
corresponding alphanumeric step description for the electrowinning process
sequence.
- A digital indication to the right of each sequence status display of the time remaining
for the current step in each sequence and its time units (Hour/min/sec).
- Touch Button “START EW” is active to start the Electrowinning sequence when
the sequence is in step 1 and the step description display is flashing “Waiting for
START”. This button is not active in any other step.
- Touch Button “DISCHARGE BARRENS?” and “RESTART EW?” are active to
Progress the Electrowinning sequence after the sample has been taken when the
sequence is in step 8 and the step description display is flashing “Take Sample”.
“DISCHARGE BARRENS?” is the normal option and lets the sequence continue
whilst “RESTART EW?” will cause the sequence to restart should this be
necessary. These buttons are not active in any other step.
- Touch Button “COMPLETE EW” is active during steps 5 during the
Electrowinning Timer and allows the operator to prematurely end the Electrowinning
timer. This button is not active in any other step.
the electrowinning sequence only. This screen also allows the “Restart” of the
electrowinning sequence after an “EW STOP” or “Alarm”.
Page 28
- Touch Button “STOP EW70” allows the operator to turn off the rectifier off
following completion of electrowinning. Rectifier will remain on until this button is
pressed.
Page 29
Electrowinning Stop/Restart Screen.
This screen can be called from the Electrowinning control screen by pressing Button “EW
STOP SCREEN”. This screen controls the stopping of the process(s) or the restart of the
electrowinning process in the event of a shutdown Alarm or “STOP”
- A visual display warning of the consequences of the “STOP” action.
- Touch Button “STOP EWINN” is active when any sequence is running and by
selecting this any active process will be stopped and forced to the “RESTART” step.
- Touch Button “RESTART EWINN” is active only after a “STOP EWINN” action
or an Alarm shutdown and allows the operator to restart the previously active
sequences. Note the selection of “RESTART EWINN” acts to restart the previously
active electrowinning sequence. Each sequence will restart at a step defined by that
sequences relevant recovery from alarm/stop condition.
- Touch button “RESET EWINN” directs the operator to the RESET

ELECTROWINNING screen which allows the operator to reset the Acacia system.
Page 30
Electrowinning Reset Screen.
This screen can be called from the Stop/Restart screen by pressing button “RESET
EWINN”. This screen controls the resetting of the electrowinning process and is a secured
access screen.
- Touch Button “TO RESET ELECTROWINNING SEQUENCE PRESS HERE”

when this key is pressed then the electrowinning process will be stopped and forced
to the “IDLE” step.
Page 31
Acacia Flow Controller Screen.
This Screen is a secured screen and allows monitoring and control of the CONSEP Acacia
Feed Flow Controller and allows for access and control of the CONSEP Acacia Feed
Flowrate. The following functions are available on this screen
- A bar graph and digital readout of the CONSEP Acacia Feed Flow Control Valve
Output (0-100%)
- Touch button “SETPOINT IS FROM PLC / SETPOINT IS MANUAL” -

Pressing this Touch button switches the PID Controller (in the PLC) between the
PLC and Manual Setpoint Modes. When in SETPOINT IS MANUAL the setpoint
(SP) entered on this screen becomes the active setpoint and when in SETPOINT IS
FROM PLC the Setpoint is that automatically supplied by the Software program.
This is totally independent of the Auto / Manual Mode of the CONSEP Acacia used
for pump / valve control.
The Touch button indicator (above the function key) changes state to indicate the
mode that will be selected when the button is pressed. A text indicator above the
actual setpoint (top right of screen) changes to show the actual mode the SP is in.
This touch button is not visible at the operator user level
It is Important that for normal operation that the PID Controller is left in the
SETPOINT IS FROM PLC state unless a specific reason exists to run it in from
this screen.
If left in SETPOINT IS MANUAL and the system is run in Automatic then the flow
setpoint will be present in ALL STEPS at the Manual setpoint entered on this
screen (0-30 m3/hr).
Page 32
- Touch button CV IS SET BY PLC / CV IS MANUAL Pushbutton - Pressing this

Touch button switches the PID Controller (in the PLC) between the Automatic and
Manual Modes. When in automatic, CV IS SET BY PLC, the setpoint (SP) and
controller output is active and when in manual, CV IS MANUAL, the Manual
output (CV) is active.
This is totally independent of the Auto / Manual Mode of the CONSEP Acacia used
for pump / valve control.
The Touch button indicator (above the function key) changes state to indicate the
mode that will be selected when the button is pressed. A text indicator above the
actual CV (centre right of screen) changes to show the actual mode the CV is in.
This touch button is not visible at the operator user level
It is important that for normal operation (either Auto or Manual) the PID
Controller is left in the CV IS SET BY PLC state unless a specific reason exists to
run it in Manual.
If left in CV IS MANUAL and the system is run in Automatic then the flow will be
present in ALL STEPS at the manual CV setting that was entered (0-100%).
Control Valve Manual Setpoint (CV IS MANUAL) and Manual PID Controller
Setpoint (SETPOINT IS MANUAL) - The value is entered into the setpoint fields by
first pressing the right arrows on the keypad to select the required entry field (shows as a
double bar on left hand edge of rectangular data display) and then pressing the ENTER
key on the keypad, at which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and you can
enter the New Value.
- Touch button “TUNE” allows secured (Password protected) access to the Tuning
Screen for the Flow controller PID.
This touch button is not visible at the operator or supervisor user level
- A bar graph and digital readout of the CONSEP Acacia Feed Flowrate (0-30 m3/hr)
- A bar graph and digital readout of the Flowrate Setpoint (0-30 m3/hr)
Note: The Setpoint and control valve controls are only available if logged in as the
Supervisor or Engineer. The Tune Function is only available if logged in as the Engineer.
Page 33
Secured access – Acacia Flow Controller Tuning screen.
THIS POPUP SCREEN IS USED FOR CALIBRATION AND TUNING OF THE

CONSEP Acacia FEED FLOW CONTROLLER AND SHOULD NOT BE CHANGED
[EXCEPT BY AUTHORISED PERSONNEL] AS INCORRECT TUNING CAN
ADVERSELY EFFECT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONSEP Acacia
This Popup Screen allows for the Tuning of the CONSEP Acacia Feed Flow PID Controller
and is a secured access screen accessible only from the CONSEP Acacia Feed Flow
controller screen.
The following functions are available on this screen
This screen is the Flowrate PID Controller Tuning Screen and allows for access and control
of the fluidisation water Flowrate PID parameters. The parameters Kc, Ti, Td, & DB are
used to tune the controller and should only be adjusted by personnel familiar with the
operation and tuning of three term controllers. The commissioned values of these will be
entered into these at the time of commissioning. The following functions are available on
this screen
- Touch button “Kc” - Controller Gain - This allows the operator to change the
Gain value of the controller. (The actual gain used by the controller is the value
entered on the HMI divided by 10)
Page 34
- Touch button “Ti” - Controller Integral Time (Reset) - This allows the operator
to change the Integral value of the controller. (The actual reset used by the
controller is the value entered on the HMI divided by 10 and is in minutes/repeat)
- Touch button “Td” - Controller Derivative Time (Rate) - This allows the
operator to change the Derivative value of the controller (The actual gain used by
the controller is the value entered on the HMI divided by 100 and is in minutes)
- Touch button “DB” - Controller Deadband - This allows the operator to set the
controller sensitivity or Deadband. This is normally set to 1 or 2.
- Touch button “Alarm DB” - This allows the operator to set the allowable flow
deadband for the alarm deviation above or below the flow setpoint
- Touch button “CLOSE” will close the Popup
Changes of the Tuning Parameters whilst in automatic PID control will cause disturbances
in the control of the CONSEP Acacia feed flow control valve. To check if a change has
improved performance the controller should be placed, after the flow has become stable, in
Manual setpoint mode and a setpoint change initiated on the controller to evaluate the
response to the new tuning parameters.
The values of Kc, Ti, and Td & DB are entered into their respective fields by first pressing
the appropriate Touch button to select the required entry field and then using the popup
keypad to enter the new value. Once the required value is entered pressing the ENTER Key
on the keypad to accept the new value.
Page 35
The Analog and Sequence Trend Screens.
Acacia Analog Trend
Page 36
The Modify Screen
This screen allows AUTHORISED ACCESS to the Manual control and setpoint screens
- A “LOGIN” access button which will bring up the Login/Logout Popup to allow
authorised access to modification screens. The three levels of access are operator,
supervisor and engineer.
- A Status display showing if the level of the current User access. This will be one
of “OPERATOR”, “SUPERVISOR” or “ENGINEER”.
- A current time display in the top right hand corner
- A Status display showing if the Acacia is “IN AUTO” or “IN MANUAL”.

Note: this does not include indication of status of Flow PID
Page 37
Secured Access - The Flow Setpoint Screen.
These Screens can only be accessed via secured password protection through the Modify
screen
This screen is used to set the various process setpoints for the flow control loop and values
are entered into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch Button, which displays
the current value of the setpoint, at which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and
you can enter the new value.
- Touch button “Stratification Flow” Setpoint - The Stratification Setpoint is the

flowrate required into the CONSEP Acacia for the stratification phase of the SADC
sequence. The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into
Appendix A.
- Touch button “Deslime Flow” Setpoint - The Deslime Setpoint is the flowrate
required into the CONSEP Acacia for the deslime phase of the SADC sequence. The
value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Leaching Flow” Setpoint - The Leaching Setpoint is the flowrate
required into the CONSEP Acacia for the Leaching phase of the MLRLC sequence.
The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Solids Discharge Flow 1” Setpoint - The Solids Discharge Setpoint
is the flowrate required into the CONSEP Acacia for fluidisation prior to the
discharge phase of the DOL sequence. The value of this will be determined at
commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
Page 38
- Touch button “Solids Discharge Flow 2” Setpoint - The Solids Discharge Setpoint
is the flowrate required into the CONSEP Acacia for the transfer stage of the
discharge phase of the DOL sequence. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “TUW Upflow Wash” Setpoint - The TUW Wash Setpoint is the
flowrate required into the CONSEP Acacia for the wash stage of the TUW sequence.
The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “PSTE Low Flow” Setpoint - The PSTE Low Flow Setpoint is the
low flowrate used to indicate the transfer of all pregnant solution has been achieved
in the PSTE sequence. The value of this will be determined at commissioning and
entered into Appendix A.
Secured Access - Batching Setpoint Screen.
This Screen can only be accessed via secured password protection through the Modify
screen
This screen are used to set the various process batch setpoints for the Concentrate Cone
weight calculation and the mixing of leach reagents are entered into the setpoint fields by
pressing the associated Touch Button, which displays the current value of the setpoint, at
which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and you can enter the new value.
- Touch button Raw Water Batch Size” – The Total water batch size is the total
volume in litres of water required to be in the CONSEP Acacia feed tank prior to
Page 39
the addition of other leach reagents for the MLRLC sequence. This setpoint
includes the quantity of barren solution and must be equal to or greater than the
Barren water batch size. The value of this will be determined at commissioning
and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Caustic Batch Size” - The Sodium Hydroxide (Caustic) batch
size is the volume in litres of caustic solution to be added to the CONSEP Acacia
feed tank prior to the addition of sodium cyanide for the MLRLC sequence. The
It is essential that adequate caustic is added to the batch to ensure a

safe pH is established in the feed tank prior to the addition of
sodium cyanide.
FAILURE TO DO THIS WILL POSE A SERIOUS AND
POTENTIALLY FATAL HEALTH RISK TO OPERATORS
- Touch button “Cyanide Batch Size” - The Sodium Cyanide (Cyanide) batch size
is the volume in litres of sodium cyanide to be added to the CONSEP Acacia
feed tank after the addition of caustic and prior to the addition of LeachAid for
the MLRLC sequence. The value of this will be determined at commissioning
- Touch button “LeachAid Dosing Time” - The LeachAid dosing time is the time
the leachaid screw feeder is run to add LeachAid to the CONSEP Acacia Feed
tank for the MLRLC sequence. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “Reagent Mix Time” - The Reagent mix time is the time required
after the addition of all leach reagents for the mix tank to reach a homogenous
mixture prior to the Leaching phase of the MLRLC sequence. The value of this
will be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Tank Temp. SP” Setpoint – This Temperature Setpoint is the
operation Temperature for Heater required in the CONSEP Acacia’s feed tank
for the leaching phase of the MLRLC sequence. The temperature is controlled
on/off around this temperature with a small deadband set on commissioning. The
value of this setpoint and deadband will be determined at commissioning and
entered into Appendix A.
Page 40
Secured Access - Level Setpoint Screen.
screen
This screen are used to set the various process timer setpoints for the process and values are
entered into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch Button, which displays the
current value of the setpoint,, at which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and
you can enter the new value.
- Touch button “PCT Level” Setpoint - The PCT level setpoint is the water bed
level in % required prior to transferring solids from the concentrate cone into the
Acacia vessel in the PCT sequence. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “TUW Level” Setpoint - The tailings upflow wash level Setpoint
is the level in % he TUW sequence will fill the acacia to during each wash. The
Note: This setpoint is only displayed if the TUW option is active.
- Touch button “Acacia Solution Tank Low Level” Setpoint – The solution tank
low level setpoint in litres and is the level which initiates the final drain time
during the PSTE sequence. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “DOL Level 1” Setpoint - The DOL level 1 setpoint is the level in
% which initiates the first distributor flush during the DOL sequence. The value
Page 41
of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “DOL Level 2” Setpoint - The DOL level 2 setpoint is the level in
% which initiates the second distributor flush during the DOL sequence. The
- Touch button “Acacia Decant Level” Setpoint - This level setpoint is the decant
level in % and is used in sequences that require operational changes when the
bed reaches the decant level. The value of this will be determined at
Secured Access – Level Alarm Setpoint Screen.
screen
This screen are used to set the various Alarm setpoints for the process and values are entered
into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch Button, which displays the current
value of the setpoint, at which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and you can
enter the new value.
- Touch button “Solution Tank Level Low Warning” – This setpoint is the level
below which the solution tank low warning is activated. The value of this will be
determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Solution Tank Level Low Alarm” – This setpoint is the level
below which the solution tank low alarm is activated. The value of this will be
Page 42
- Touch button “Solution Tank Level High Warning” – This setpoint is the level
above which the solution tank high warning is activated. The value of this will be
- Touch button “Solution Tank Level High Alarm” – This setpoint is the level
above which the solution tank high alarm is activated. The value of this will be
Secured Access – CCAD & PCT Time Setpoints Screen.
screen
This screen are used to set the various process time setpoints for the Concentration
collection and Decant Sequence (CCAD) and Primary Concentrate Transfer (PCT) and
values are entered into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch Button, which
displays the current value of the setpoint, at which time a data entry field comes up on the
screen and you can enter the new value.
- Touch button “Settling Time” (CCAD) - The time in seconds allowed for the
concentrate to settle after a purge before a decant is initiated. The value of this
- Touch button “Decant Time (CCAD) - The time in seconds allowed for the
concentrate to decant after the settling time has expired before a decant is
Page 43
initiated. The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into
Appendix A.
- Touch button “Concentrate Transfer Time” (PCT) - The Concentrate Transfer

Time Setpoint is the time setting to allow all solids to empty from the
Concentrate Cone during PCT. The value of this will be determined at
Secured Access – SADC Time Setpoints Screen.
screen
This screen are used to set the various process time setpoints for the Stratification and
Deslime of Concentrate Sequence (SADC) and values are entered into the setpoint fields by
pressing the associated Touch Button, which displays the current value of the setpoint, at
which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and you can enter the new value.
- Touch button “Solids Settling Time” - The time in seconds allowed for the
concentrate to initially settle before stratification is initiated. The value of this
- Touch button “SADC Stratification Time - The time in seconds allowed for the
concentrate to stratify. The value of this will be determined at commissioning
Page 44
- Touch button “Deslime Time” - This is the time set for the deslime step for the
SADC sequence and is set in seconds. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “Deslime Drain Time” - This is the time set for the deslime drain
step for the SADC sequence and is set in seconds. The value of this will be
- Touch button “SADC Rinse Time” - This is the time set for the rinse step for the
SADC sequence and is set in seconds. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “SADC Rinse Drain Time” - This is the time set for the rinse
drain step for the SADC sequence and is set in seconds. The value of this will be
Secured Access – MLRLC & PSRWR Time Setpoints Screen.
screen
This screen are used to set the various process timer setpoints for the MLRLC & PSRWR
process and values are entered into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch
Button, which displays the current value of the setpoint, at which time a data entry field
comes up on the screen and you can enter the new value.
- Touch button “Leach Time” – This is the time set for the main leach step for the
MLRLC sequence and is set in minutes. The value of this will be determined at
Page 45
- Touch button “Line Flush Time” – This is the time set for the line flush time for
the PSRWR sequence and is set in seconds. The value of this will be determined
at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Pregnant Drain Watchdog Time- This watchdog time is used to
provide an alarm if the drain time is excessive in the PSRWR sequence and is set
in seconds. The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered
into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Pregnant Final Drain Time” - This time is the time after the
CONSEP Acacia has reached the solids level in the PSRWR sequence and is set
in seconds. The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered
into Appendix A.
- Touch button “Pregnant Rinse Time” - This time is the water rinse time after
the CONSEP Acacia has drained in the PSRWR sequence and is set in seconds.
The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into
Appendix A.
- Touch button “Pregnant Rinse Drain Time” - This time is the final drain time
after the CONSEP Acacia has been rinsed in the PSRWR sequence and is set in
seconds. The value of this will be determined at commissioning and entered into
Appendix A.
Page 46
Secured Access – DOL Time Setpoints Screen.
screen
This screen are used to set the various process timer setpoints for the PSTE process and
values are entered into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch Button, which
displays the current value of the setpoint, at which time a data entry field comes up on the
- Touch button “DOL Delay 1 Time - This time is the time the high flow
fluidisation is present at start of DOL and is set in seconds. The value of this will
be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “DOL Delay 2 Time - This time during which the Solids
Discharge Flow Setpoint 2 in DOL is active and is set in seconds. The value of
this will be determined at commissioning and entered into Appendix A.
- Touch button “DOL 1st Flush Time - This time is the time the first Distributor
flush is present during DOL and is set in seconds. The value of this will be
-
- Touch button “DOL 2nd Flush Time - This time is the time the second
Distributor flush is present during DOL and is set in seconds. The value of this
Page 47
- Touch button “DOL Fresh Water Flush Time - This time is the rinse time
during DOL and is set in seconds. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “DOL Fresh Water Fill Time - This is the time set for the final
tank rinse step for the DOL sequence that creates a clean water bed on the
diffusion screen and is set in seconds. The value of this will be determined at
- Touch button “DOL Line Flush Time - This is the time set for the line flush for
the DOL sequence to remove any solids from the discharge line to help prevent
blockages and is set in seconds. The value of this will be determined at
Page 48
Secured Access – Miscellaneous Setpoint Screen.
screen
This screen is used to set the process setpoints for the temperature controls and values are
entered into the setpoint fields by pressing the associated Touch Button, which displays the
current value of the setpoint, at which time a data entry field comes up on the screen and you
can enter the new value.
- Touch button “PSRWR – No of Pregnant Rinses” - The PSRWR sequence

does a number of rinses at the completion of the pregnant transfer and the
number of rinses is set using this setpoint.
- Touch button “PSTE Flush Volume” – This setpoint is the volume (in litres)
required to flush the pregnant solution from the transfer line at the end of the
PSTE sequence. The value of this setpoint will be determined at commissioning
- Touch button “No of Tailings Upflow Rinses” - The TUW sequence does a
number of rinses at the completion of PSRWR and the number of rinses is set
using this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is only displayed if the TUW option is active.
- Touch Button “PSTE STEP 7 TIMER” – This engineering setpoint is time step
time for the PSTE step Waiting for Low Flow.
This setpoint is only visible for an Engineer level user
- Touch Button “PSTE STEP 9 TIMER” – This engineering setpoint is time step
time for the PSTE step Waiting for Low Flow flowing flushing.
Page 49
- Touch Button “EW READY LEVEL” – This engineering setpoint is the

minimum level required to commence the electrowinning sequence.
Secured Access – Electrowinning Setpoint Screen
screen
This screen is used to set the setpoints for the Electrowinning module. Values are entered
into the setpoint fields by pressing the value box at which time a data entry field (popup)
comes up on the screen and you can enter the new value.
- Touch button Electrowinning Time Setpoint - The Electrowinning Cycle Time

Setpoint is the Time required for the electrowinning process. The value of this
setpoint is set in hours.
- Touch button Electrowinning Temperature Setpoint - The Electrowinning

Temperature Setpoint is the Temperature required in the Electrowinning tank for
the Electrowinning operation of the EW sequence. The temperature is controlled
on/off around this temperature with a small deadband set on commissioning. The
value of this setpoint and deadband will be determined at commissioning and
entered into Appendix A. SP1 switches off HE73-1 once its setpoint is reached.
Page 50
- Touch button Electrowinning Solution Tank Low Level Setpoint - The

Electrowinning Solution Tank Low Level Setpoint is the level required for the
electrowinning process to progress to the final drain time during the draining of
the solution tank. The value of this setpoint is set litres.
- Touch button Electrowinning Cell Fill Time Setpoint - The Electrowinning Cell
Fill Time Setpoint is the Time required for the electrowinning cell to fill and
circulation of the pregnant solution to begin during the electrowinning process.
- Touch button Electrowinning Rectifier Process Current Setpoint - The

Electrowinning Rectifier Process Current Setpoint is the Current required for the
processing of the pregnant solution through the electrowinning cell during the
electrowinning process.
- Touch button Electrowinning Rectifier Standby Current Setpoint - The

Electrowinning Rectifier Process Current Setpoint is the current required for the
process to stop the solution from reabsorbing gold after electrowinning has
completed and before the cell is manually drained of the pregnant solution.
- Screen navigation buttons as shown.
Secured Access – Electrowinning Level Alarm Setpoint Screen.
screen
Page 51
This screen is used to set the various alarm setpoints which are entered into the setpoint
fields by pressing the value box at which time a data entry field (popup) comes up on the
- Touch button EW Solution Tank Level Low Warning – This setpoint is the
level below which the solution tank low warning is activated. The value of this
- Touch button EW Solution Tank Low Low Level Alarm – This setpoint is the
level below which the solution tank low alarm is activated. The value of this will
- Touch button EW Solution Tank High Level Warning – This setpoint is the
level above which the solution tank high warning is activated. The value of this
- Touch button EW Solution Tank High High Level Alarm – This setpoint is the
level above which the solution tank high alarm is activated. The value of this will
Electrowinning Voltage & Current Setpoint Screen
This secured screen allows the operator to set the DC Voltage and Current output for the
control of the Electrowinning Rectifier (350-RE-03). This is only active if the rectifier is
Page 52
controlled via Ethernet. For Hardwired control Only the control of voltage and current is
from the pe280 HMI on the rectifier panel (350-RE-03).
- The DC Voltage Output of the Rectifier (0.00 to 8.00 Volts) can be set via the top
row of three digital inputs, the left most being the unit volts, the centre being the
tenths of volts, and the right hand being the hundredths of volts.
Each of these digits needs to be entered separately.
- The DC Current Voltage of the selected Rectifier (000 to 800 Amps) can be set via
the bottom row of four digital inputs, the left most being the unit t by 100 amps, the
second from right being the unit by 10 amps, and the right hand being the unit by 1
amps.
- The Rectifier Standby DC voltage output is common to both rectifiers and allows
setting the standby voltage for the rectifiers after electrowinning when the rectifiers
are still on.
Page 53
Secured Access to Manual –
THE MANUAL CONTROL SCREENS ARE INTENDED AS A MAINTENANCE

TOOL AND SHOULD BE USED WITH CAUTION.
WHEN IN MANUAL MODE NO PROCESS ALARMS OR TIMERS ARE ACTIVE.
BEFORE RETURNING FROM THE MANUAL SCREENS

RETURN TO MANUAL CONTROL SCREEN 1 AND PLACE
THE CONTROLS BACK IN AUTO – THIS WILL
STOP/CLOSE ALL ITEMS CURRENTLY IN MANUAL AND
RETURN THEM ALL TO AUTOMATIC CONTROL.
Acacia Manual Control Screen 1& 2.
Page 54
screen
- Auto Select Pushbutton – This touch button switches the system to the
Automatic mode controlled from the Automatic Control Screens. When in
Automatic mode the Auto indicator on the screen will be flashing and green.
- Manual Select Pushbutton - This pushbutton switches the system to the Manual
mode and control is from the manual Control Screens. When in Manual mode the
Manual indicator on the screen will be flashing and green.
When the system is in MANUAL the device controls are via the touch sensitive
pushbuttons on the screen
When Red and displaying the “device name” the Device is de-energised.
To energise the device press the touch sensitive screen pushbutton.
On the device activating the display turns Green and displays the “device name” plus
ON.
To de-energise the device press the touch sensitive screen pushbutton.
SWITCHING FROM MANUAL TO AUTO WILL RESET ALL MANUAL

CONTROLLED ITEMS TO DE_ENERGISED (EXCEPT THE CONTROL VALVE)
Page 55
Electrowinning Manual Control Screen.
screen via the Acacia Manual Screen 1
- Auto Select Pushbutton – This touch button switches the system to the
Automatic mode controlled from the Automatic Control Screens. When in
Automatic mode the Auto indicator on the screen will be flashing and green.
- Manual Select Pushbutton - This pushbutton switches the system to the Manual
mode and control is from the manual Control Screens. When in Manual mode the
Manual indicator on the screen will be flashing and green.
When the system is in MANUAL the device controls are via the touch sensitive
pushbuttons on the screen
When Red and displaying the “device name” the Device is de-energised.
To energise the device press the touch sensitive screen pushbutton.
On the device activating the display turns Green and displays the “device name” plus
ON.
To de-energise the device press the touch sensitive screen pushbutton.
SWITCHING FROM MANUAL TO AUTO WILL RESET ALL MANUAL

CONTROLLED ITEMS TO DE_ENERGISED (EXCEPT THE CONTROL VALVE)
Page 56
Alarm Viewer Screen.

Most recent alarm
This screen is an alarm screen that “pops up” over the top section of the currently
selected screen when a new alarm occurs on the system
The most recent alarm is the alarm shown above the rectangular alarm list box.
The rectangular alarm list box shows the alarm history.
Select any alarm in list and press Touch button “Accept All” to acknowledge all alarms
on the HMI
Touch button “ALARM ACCEPT” will clear the alarm on the HMI and the alarm
popup screen will disappear if all alarms are clear
NOTE:
UNTIL ACCEPTED AND THE ALARM CONDITION IS CLEARED THE
ALARM WILL REMAIN ACTIVE
Page 57
Alarm Accept Popup
This screen is an alarm accept screen that “pops up” over the top section of the currently
- Touch button “KNELSON KN1 ALARM ACCEPT” will clear any Knelson 1
alarms on the HMI (The Alarm Siren Icon below the Accept Button is only
visible if an active alarm is present)
- Touch button “KNELSON KN2 ALARM ACCEPT” will clear any Knelson 2
alarms on the HMI (The Alarm Siren Icon below the Accept Button is only
visible if an active alarm is present)
- Touch button “ACACIA & EW ALARM ACCEPT” will clear any Acacia
Dissolution or Electrowinning alarms on the HMI (The Alarm Siren Icon below
the Accept Button is only visible if an active alarm is present)
- Touch button “CLOSE” will close the Popup
Touch button “ALARM MUTE” will mute the audible alarm output and the alarm
popup screen will disappear until a new alarm is triggered.
Page 58
Alarm Log Screen.
Most recent Alarm
This screen is an alarm screen that “pops up” over the top section of the currently
The most recent alarm is the alarm shown above the rectangular alarm list box.
The rectangular alarm list box shows the alarm history.
Touch button “ALARM ACCEPT” will clear the alarm on the HMI and the alarm
popup screen will disappear.
Touch button “ALARM MUTE” will mute the audible alarm output and the alarm
popup screen will disappear until a new alarm is triggered.
Touch button “Clear” - When pressed this will clear the alarm History.
Warning:
USE CLEAR BUTTON WITH CARE AS THE ALARM HISTORY WILL BE
ERASED.
Page 59
Alarms
The possible Alarm Messages are in four categories: -
Refer to Functional Description for specific interactions as not all shutdown alarms effect
all or part of all sequences.
No Alarms - There are no current alarms
Non-Shutdown Alarms - These alarms do not cause shutdown of the CONSEP Acacia but
simply provide a warning to the Operator.
Acacia
➢ Acacia Vessel High Level Warning – The Acacia Solution tank is above a normal
high level {Alm11}
➢ Acacia Solution Tank High Level Warning – The Acacia Solution tank is above a
normal high level {Alm21}
➢ Acacia Solution Tank Low Level Warning – The Acacia Solution tank is below a
normal high level {Alm19}
➢ Caustic Low Flow Warning – The caustic Batching Flow is Low {Alm24}
➢ Cyanide Low Flow Warning – The cyanide Batching Flow is Low {Alm25}
➢ Solution Tank Heater Fault - A solution Tank heater is faulty {Alm08}
➢ Solution Tank Heater Low Level Alarm – The Solution tank level is below the heater
enable level and the heaters are inhibited. {Alm40}
Electrowinning
➢ Electrowinning Rectifier Current Deviating From setpoint {Alm53}

➢ Electrowinning Solution Tank High Level Warning – The electrowinning Solution
tank is above a normal high level {Alm54}
➢ Electrowinning Solution Tank Low Level Warning – The electrowinning Solution
tank is below a normal high level {Alm55}
➢ Electrowinning Solution Tank Heater Fault - The electrowinning solution tank heater
is faulty {Alm58}
Shutdown Alarms - These alarms will cause selective shutdown of certain sequences of the
CONSEP Acacia. For interactions refer Functional Description.
Common
➢ PLC Card Fault - A PLC card is faulted or not communicating {Alm00}
Acacia
➢ Solids Pump Discharge Not Permitted Alarm – Solids discharge is not Permitted
but PP03 is trying to run {Alm03}
Page 60
➢ Solids discharge pump Fault – Pump is tripped or not in its correct state.
{Alm04}
➢ CONSEP Acacia feed pump Fault – Pump is tripped or not in its correct state.
{Alm05}
➢ LeachAid screw feeder Fault – Feeder is tripped or not in its correct state
{Alm07}
➢ Solution Tank High High Level – The solution tank has exceeded its maximum
safe operating Level. {Alm10}
➢ Solution Tank Low Low Level – The solution tank has gone low low level
{Alm20}
➢ Pregnant Solution Drain Failure – The Pregnant solution drain time has been
exceeded. {Alm22}
➢ MLRLC Potable Water, Caustic And Cyanide addition Alarms – The Reagents
are taking too long to dose {Alm13,14,15}
➢ Low Solids CONSEP Acacia Level – Low Solids Level in the MLRLC sequence
{Alm12}
➢ Dissolution Operator Stop – Operator has initiated a STOP {Alm18}
➢ Reagent UnAuthorised Flow – The Reagents Flowmeter is detecting Flow When
none is expected {Alm23}
➢ Acacia Feed UnAuthorised Flow – The Acacia Feed Flowmeter is detecting Flow
When none is expected {Alm29}
➢ Pregnant Transfer Low Flow – The pregnant transfer flow rate during PSTE is
too low {Alm28}
➢ Cyanide Monitor Hi Hi Alarm – The Client’s Cyanide monitor has detected
cyanide at a level above the high high Alarm setpoint {Alm47}
➢ Pregnant Solution Discharge Not Permitted – Pregnant Solution is Not Permitted
but PSTE is running {Alm37}
➢ Acacia Feed Dev. Low – The Acacia Flowrate has deviated outside the lower
deviation band {Alm26}
➢ Acacia Feed Dev. High – The Acacia Flowrate has deviated outside the upper
deviation band {Alm27}
➢ Reagents Not Available – Reagents are not available during MLRLC batching
steps {Alm35}
➢ Acacia Drives/Valves Not Enabled – A drive or valve has tried to run when the
Dissolution is isolated {Alm32}
Electrowinning
➢ Electrowinning Operator Stop – Operator has initiated a STOP {Alm63}

➢ Electrowinning Tank High Level – The Electrowinning solution tank is High
High level during PSTE transfer. {Alm55}
➢ Electrowinning Solution Tank High High Level – The solution tank has exceeded
its maximum safe operating Level. {Alm56}
➢ Electrowinning Solution Tank Low Low Level – The solution tank has gone low
low level {Alm60}
➢ Electrowinning Pump Fault – Pump is tripped or not in its correct state. {Alm57}
➢ Electrowinning Rectifier Fault – Rectifier is tripped or not in its correct state.
{Alm59}
➢ Electrowinning Barren Liquids Transfer not Permitted – The Barren Liquid
Permitted to Transfer Interlock is not present {Alm62}
Page 61
➢ Electrowinning Drives/Valves Not Enabled – A drive or valve has tried to run

when the Electrowinning is isolated {Alm52}
Fatal Alarms - These alarms cause all the sequences of the CONSEP Acacia to stop
immediately when the alarm occurs.
Common
➢ DC power Failure – The DC power supply is absent. This means the levels;
temperature and batch meters will not be operational. {Alm02}
Acacia
➢ Dissolution Module Emergency Stop Activated – The front of panel emergency
stop or the Client’s field Emergency stop interlock is activated. {Alm01}
Electrowinning
➢ Electrowinning Module Emergency Stop Activated – The front of panel

emergency stop is activated.
Page 62
Drawing Schedule
Consep Acacia Dissolution & Electrowinning Module
C22600-500-01-101 - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

- Model CONSEP Acacia CS500
- Process and Instrument Diagram - (1 Sheet)
C22600-500-02-101 - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

- Model CONSEP Electrowinning CS500EW
- Process and Instrument Diagram - (1 Sheet)
C22600E9001 to 24 - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

- Dissolution and Electrowinning
- Acacia Control Panel Layout & Wiring - (24 Sheets)

- Electrowinning Control Panel Layout & Wiring - (6 Sheets)

- Electrowinning Rectifier Panel Layout & Wiring - (3 Sheets)

- Single Line Diagrams - (8 Sheets)

- Remote HMI Panel Layout & Wiring - (2 Sheets)
C22600PartsList.xls - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

- Control Panel Parts List
C22600CableList.xls - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

- Cable Schedule
C22600Multicore - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

TermSched.xls - Dissolution and Electrowinning
- Cable Schedule
C22600PLCIO.xls - Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

- PLC I/O Schedule
Page 63
Appendix A - Commissioning Data
The following values were set at commissioning: - Date: __/__/__
Flow Setpoints
Stratification Flow Setpoint: ______ m3/hr
Deslime Flow Setpoint: ______ m3/hr
Leaching Flow Setpoint: ______ m3/hr
Solids Discharge Flow Setpoint 1: ______ m3/hr
Solids Discharge Flow Setpoint 2: ______ m3/hr
Temperature Setpoints
Leach Temperature Setpoint: ______ º C
Batch Volumes
Raw Water Batch Size: ______ litres
Caustic (Sodium Hydroxide) Batch Size: ______ litres
Cyanide (Sodium Cyanide) Batch Size: ______ litres
Batch Times
Leachaid Dosing Time: ______ seconds
Reagent Mix Time: ______ seconds
Miscellaneous Setpoints
PSRWR No of Rinses Setpoint: ______ (typically 2)
Process Timers
Deslime Drain Time: ______ seconds
Main Leach Time: ______ minutes
Pregnant Drain Time: ______ seconds
Pregnant Rinse Time: ______ seconds
Pregnant Rinse Drain Time: ______ seconds
Page 64
Distributor 1st Flush Time: ______ seconds
Distributor 2nd Flush Time: ______ seconds
Concentrate Cone Times
Decant Settle Time: ______ seconds
Decant Time: ______ seconds
Flow Control Loop FIC09 Tuning
PID Gain (Kc): ______ (/10)
PID Integral (Ti): ______ (/10 minutes/repeat)
PID Derivative (Td): ______ (/100 minutes)
PID Deadband (DB): ______
Electrowinning Setpoints
Electrowinning Solution Tank Temperature Heater 2 Setpoint: ______ º C
Electrowinning Time: ______ hrs
Electrowinning Solution Tank Low Level: ______ litres
Electrowinning Cell Fill Time: ______ seconds
Electrowinning Rectifier Process Setpoint: ________ Amperes
Electrowinning Rectifier Standby Setpoint: ________ Amperes
Electrowinning Alarm Setpoints
Electrowinning Solution Tank Level Low Warning: ______ litres
Electrowinning Solution Tank Level Low Low Alarm: ______ litres
Electrowinning Solution Tank Level High Warning: ______ litres
Electrowinning Solution Tank Level High High Alarm: ______ litres
Date: __________ Signed: ______________________ Position: ___________________
Page 65
Appendix B – Security
Operational access to the certain PanelView Control Screen is available on via the entry of
an operator password.
Three Security Levels have been defined to control access to the secured screens
Operator Level – this is the normal operator access level and permits access to the Timer
screen only
Supervisor Level – this is the Authorised supervisor access level and permits access to all
secured screens
Engineer Level – this is the Authorised engineering access level and permits access to all
secured screens
Operator Name: oper

Operator Password: 1234
Supervisor Name: super

Supervisor Password: 3142
Engineer Name: eng

Engineer Password: 5353
Page 66
10. SPARE PARTS LIST
Page 32 of 33
Consep Pty. Limited
PO Box 6625, 59 Newton Road
WETHERILL PARK, NSW 2164
AUSTRALIA
Ph: (02) 9756 5299
Fax: (02) 9756 5102
Email: sales@consep.com.au
ACN: 053 177 898
JOB REF: C22600

CLIENT: FLS
MINE SITE: Tes-Oro San Albino Project
DATE CREATED: 17/03/2020
Qty per Unit Price Ext Price Lead Time
Consep Part Number Description Class Unit
Assy (AUD) (AUD) (weeks)
CS500 Consep Acacia Dissolution Module
753020 Diffusion Cartridge Assembly Critical each 1 $ 14,520.00 $ 14,520.00 5-6 weeks
753022 - Diffusion Cartridge Screen Operational each 2 $ 5,390.00 $ 10,780.00 5-6 weeks
753024 - Diffusion Cartridge Clamp Plate Operational each 2 $ 970.00 $ 1,940.00 2-3 weeks
214006 Diffusion Media Critical bag 1 $ 650.00 $ 650.00 1-2 weeks
770019 Rubber Check Valve Critical each 5 $ 460.00 $ 2,300.00 1-2 weeks
753597 20kw Heater Element Critical each 1 $ 1,250.00 $ 1,250.00 2-3 weeks
1 week EXW
167081-15KG Leachaid UL 15kg pail Consumable Pail 27 $ 405.00 $ 10,935.00
Kalgoorlie
154417 2"Butterfly Control Valve Operational each 1 $ 2,660.00 $ 2,660.00 3-4 weeks
154400 1"Actuated Ball Valve-BSP Operational each 5 $ 480.00 $ 2,400.00 3-4 weeks
154402 2"Air Actuated Butterfly Valve Operational each 11 $ 550.00 $ 6,050.00 3-4 weeks
154413 1/2"BSP SS Manual Ball Valve Operational each 4 $ 190.00 $ 760.00 3-4 weeks
154412 1"BSP S/S Manual Ball Valve Operational each 5 $ 150.00 $ 750.00 3-4 weeks
154401 2"Manual Butterfly Valve Operational each 3 $ 160.00 $ 480.00 3-4 weeks
154181 Solenoid Valve Operational each 1 $ 450.00 $ 450.00 3-4 weeks
211036 50NB spring return check valve Operational each 1 $ 420.00 $ 420.00 3-4 weeks
211079 80NB actuated knifegate valve Operational each 1 $ 5,250.00 $ 5,250.00 3-4 weeks
211049 100NB actuated knifegate valve Operational each 1 $ 5,570.00 $ 5,570.00 2-3 weeks
214103 Hand Programmer Operational each 1 $ 320.00 $ 320.00 2-3 weeks
214004 Thermocouple RTD Operational each 1 $ 620.00 $ 620.00 3-4 weeks
214209 Level Detector Operational each 2 $ 2,320.00 $ 4,640.00 3-4 weeks
153017S Flowmetre-25NB Operational each 1 $ 4,930.00 $ 4,930.00 5-6 weeks
153019S Flowmetre-50NB Operational each 1 $ 5,410.00 $ 5,410.00 5-6 weeks
209414 Pump Slurry 2x2-8MMAA-60Hz Operational each 1 $ 15,660.00 $ 15,660.00 5-6 weeks
209202-NM Pump 50x32-160 Operational each 1 $ 6,500.00 $ 6,500.00 5-6 weeks
150232-C22600 Motor-3PH-SQRL-FLNG-D100L Operational each 1 $ 480.00 $ 480.00 5-6 weeks
150446-C22600 Motor-3PH-SQRL-FT-D160M-11Kw Operational each 1 $ 1,450.00 $ 1,450.00 5-6 weeks
756251-NM Acacia Powder Screw Feeder-No Motor Operational each 1 $ 6,870.00 $ 6,870.00 3-4 weeks
150219-C22600 Motor-Teco-3PH-SQRL-FLNG-D80D-0.75Kw Operational each 1 $ 440.00 $ 440.00 3-4 weeks
CS500 Consep Acacia Electrowinning Module
753597 20kw Heater Element Critical each 1 $ 1,250.00 $ 1,250.00 2-3 weeks
209202-NM Pump 50x32-160 Operational each 1 $ 6,500.00 $ 6,500.00 5-6 weeks
150232-C22600 Motor-3PH-SQRL-FLNG-D100L Operational each 1 $ 480.00 $ 480.00 5-6 weeks
214209 Level Detector Operational each 1 $ 2,325.00 $ 2,325.00 3-4 weeks
154167 Solenoid Plug Operational each 1 $ 25.00 $ 25.00 3-4 weeks
154410 2"Manual Butterfly Valve c/w Handwheel Operational each 1 $ 250.00 $ 250.00 2-3 weeks
154413 1/2"BSP Manual Ball Valve Operational each 4 $ 100.00 $ 400.00 2-3 weeks
214103 Hand Programmer Operational each 1 $ 290.00 $ 290.00 2-3 weeks
214104 Level Transmitter Operational each 1 $ 3,615.00 $ 3,615.00 2-3 weeks
214004 Thermocouple RTD Operational each 1 $ 620.00 $ 620.00 2-3 weeks
NOTES: - Prices are valid for 30 days from the date printed at the top of the page
- Typical lead time only, confirmed at time of order
- Part numbers provided may be subject change
- Goods are supplied as ex works Sydney, NSW unless stated otherwise
11. SUB VENDOR INFORMATION
11.1 Solids Discharge Pump
11.2 Southern Cross Solution Pump
11.3 Yokogawa AXG Series Magnetic Flowmeter
11.4 Siemens Probe Lu Level Detector
11.5 Effects Screw Feeder
11.6 Burkert Actuated Valves
11.7 Burkert Gland Water Valve
11.8 Emerson Knifegate Valves
11.9 SMC Filter Regulator
11.10 Rectifier Operating Manual
11.11 Electrowinning Cell Manual
11.12 HMI
11.13 Motor
11.1 Solids Discharge Pump

FLSmidth Krebs Australia – a business unit of FLSmidth Pty Ltd
67 Randle Road, Pinkenba, QLD 4008
Tel +61 7 5519 5700 – Fax +61 7 5519 5707
www.flsmidthkrebs.com - ABN: 85 000 221 590
INSTALLATION, OPERATION &

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
KREBS slurryMAX
CLIENT: Consep Pty Ltd

CONTRACT: 86423
SUPPLIER: FLSmidth Krebs Australia
EQUIPMENT: slurryMAX 2x2-8 Pump w/ Water Flush
Seal, DIN Flanges on a MMAA Frame
SERIAL: KAM14011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................2
1.1 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................2
1.2 SPECIAL WARNINGS ...................................................................................2
2 CONTACT INFORMATION ..................................................................................2
2.1 CORPORATE OFFICE ..................................................................................2
2.2 REGIONAL REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE .....................................................2
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................................3
4 ON-SITE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................3
4.1 FOUNDATIONS .............................................................................................3
4.2 LEVELING THE BASEPLATE .......................................................................4
4.3 ANCHORING THE BASEPLATE ...................................................................4
4.4 ALIGNING THE PUMP WITH THE DRIVE ARRANGEMENT .......................5
4.5 BELT-DRIVEN ARRANGEMENT ..................................................................5
4.6 CONNECTING THE PIPING .........................................................................5
5 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................5
5.1 AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS ........................................................................5
5.2 MOTOR ROTATION CHECK ........................................................................5
5.3 LUBRICATION...............................................................................................6
5.4 SHAFT SEAL CHECK - WATER FLUSH SEAL ............................................7
6 START-UP ............................................................................................................7
7 SHUT-DOWN........................................................................................................8
8 PUMP STORAGE .................................................................................................8
8.1 HANDLING OF RUBBER COMPONENTS ...................................................8
8.2 HANDLING OF MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ...........................................9
9 POWER FRAME ASSEMBLY ..............................................................................9
9.1 MMAA-MMD FRAMES BEARING ASSEMBLY ............................................9
9.2 BEARING ASSEMBLY TO PEDESTAL ......................................................11
10 WET-END ASSEMBLY ......................................................................................11
10.1 GLAND SIDE CASING AND SHAFT PREP ................................................12
10.2 GLAND ARRANGEMENT - WATER FLUSH SEAL ....................................12
10.3 GLAND SIDE CASING LINER .....................................................................13
10.4 IMPELLER ...................................................................................................14
10.5 SUCTION SIDE CASING ASSEMBLY ........................................................14
10.6 ASSEMBLY OF SUCTION SIDE CASING TO GLAND SIDE CASING.......15
10.7 IMPELLER ADJUSTMENT ..........................................................................16
11 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................16
11.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .........................................................................16
11.2 WEAR RING ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................16
11.3 SHAFT SEAL ADJUSTMENT - WATER FLUSH SEAL ..............................17
11.4 BEARING LUBRICATION ...........................................................................17
12 PARTS REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................18
12.1 IMPELLER .....................................................................................................18
13 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................19
13.1 DURING ASSEMBLY ..................................................................................19
13.2 ON INITIAL START-UP ...............................................................................20
13.3 DURING OPERATION ................................................................................20
14 DRAWING, PARTS LISTS & PERFORMANCE DATA .....................................22
15 TAPERLOCK INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS & BELT TENSIONING
DETAILS .................................................................................................................... 27
16 WEG MOTOR IOM MANUAL .............................................................................32

Copyright FLSMIDTH KREBS millMAX™ FEBRUARY (2016) 1
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains important information for installation, oper ation,

and maintenance of the slurryMAX™ pum p. Instructions contained in
this manual must be reviewed and followed to ensure safety and
extended reliability from your slurryMAX™ pump.
1.2 SPECIAL WARNINGS
FLSmidth Krebs millMAX™ will not be liable nor assume responsibility

for any damages, or down-time caused by a f ailure to follow
procedures, warnings, or cautions outlined in this manual. FLSmidth
Krebs millMAX™ retains the right to update and modify this manual at
any time seen fit, and will not be held li able for any omissions or errors,
and will not accept any claim for consequential damages.
This slurryMAX™ pump must not be operated beyond the rated

conditions for which it was sold.
2 CONTACT INFORMATION
2.1 CORPORATE OFFICE
FLSMIDTH KREBS INC

5505 West Gillette Road
Tucson, AZ 85743
Contact: Ricky McGahee
Phone (520) 744-8200 Fax: (520) 744-8300
Ricky.mcgahee@flsmidth.com
2.2 REGIONAL REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
FLSMIDTH KREBS AUSTRALIA

67 Randle Road,
Pinkenba, QLD 4008
Contact: Andrew Burgess
Phone +61 5519 5700 Fax: +61 7 5519 5707
Andrew.Burgess@flsmidth.com

3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
All slurryMAX™ pumps are des igned for s afe and long-term rel iable
operation. A pump is a pressure-cont aining device t hat has rotating
parts, which may pos sess many possible hazards. It is recommended
that the sl urryMAX™ pump only be serviced by qualified personnel
such as Operators and Maintenanc e personnel who recogniz e the
possible hazards that can be enc ountered while performing service on
a pump.
Damage or destruction to pump components, and Personal

Injuries including possible loss of limb or life, may be a result of
not following the precautions outlined below.
 Caution must be made that the mo tor rotation is correct for pump
rotation. Starting of the motor wit h incorrect rotatio n may cause the
impeller to unthread from the pump s haft and rupture the casing, which
may cause personal injury. With the pump disconnected from the
motor, verify that the motor rotation is correct as per section 5.2.
 Never operate a pump without the drive guard or safety devices

properly installed.
 Always perform a lockout / tag-out of the power when drive guar ds are
removed, or disassembly maintenance is being performed.
 Never operate the slurryMAX™ pum p with the suction or disc harge
valves closed.
 Never apply heat to the impeller for disassembly from the pump shaft,
as there is risk of the impeller exploding from trapped liquid, which
could cause serious injury.
 Never lift from a single point. Lifting lugs, and tapped hole s (for
eyebolts) are intended for lifting only in dividual parts and must not be
used to lift the entire pump assembly.
 Do not thermal shock the slurryM AX™ pump by feeding with v ery hot
or cold liquids. Thermal shock will cause damage to internal
components, and may rupture the pump impeller.
4 ON-SITE INSTALLATION
4.1 FOUNDATIONS
Prior to the installation of a pump it is necessary that a proper

foundation be in plac e. The foundat ion is necessary to support and
anchor the pump from all pumpi ng and motor loads and to absorb
vibration during start-up and while running.

Before mounting the pump base it is important to ensure that the
foundation adheres to the following:
 The mass of the foundation is at least 3 times greater than the mass of
the pump/drive assembly.
 The concrete slab conforms to local building codes, contractor’s

requirements, and is within dimensional tolerances.
 The foundation has been given adequate time to set and dry.
 Anchor bolts have been located properly.
The top surface of the foundation should be clean and wet-down f or 24

hours prior to mounting. It may also be desirable to remove the top
cement-rich layer of the foundation. Thes e steps promote a strong
bond between the concrete and the grout.
4.2 LEVELING THE BASEPLATE
Rest the baseplate on shims with ¾” to 1 ½” clearance abov e the

foundation. These s hims need to be placed at ev ery anchor bolt
location and not to exceed 2 ½ f eet (0.75 meters) apart. A dd or
remove shims as needed so that the machined surfaces of the
baseplate are level.
4.3 ANCHORING THE BASEPLATE
Before grouting perform the following:
 Snug the anchor bolt s enough t o cease movement, but do not over-
tighten.
 Build a dam to contain the grout where needed.
 Avoid stress concentrations by softening sharp edges.
Grout the base to the foundation usi ng a non-shrink, free-flow grout for
heavy-duty machinery. To avoid ai r pockets always pour the grout
from one side rather than “meeting in the middle”. Fill the anchor bolt
holes completely, and make sure there are no gaps underneath or
around the base. Completely fill t he inner area of th e base as well,
however it is ok to use standard conc rete in this area. Vibrating the
baseplate during grouting can aid in removing trapped air, but do not
vibrate so violently that the base changes position or loses level.
Once poured allow the grout to dry for the length of time prescribed by
the grout manufacturer. Do not completely tighten the anchor bolts
until the grout has finished curing.

4.4 ALIGNING THE PUMP WITH THE DRIVE ARRANGEMENT
It is important that the pump shaft be properly aligned with the motor.
As misaligned v-belt drives will cause excessive belt wear, and
misaligned direct-coupled drives will cause unnecessary vibrations.
4.5 BELT-DRIVEN ARRANGEMENT
The motor sheave and the pump s heave must be adequately aligned
and the belts properly tensi oned. Consult the v-belt drive insert in this
manual for details.
4.6 CONNECTING THE PIPING
It is important that the piping is the correct size, properly fitted, and
supported, so no strain or reaction forces are imposed onto the pump.
Also, it is r ecommended that a remov able section of pipe of sufficient

length be placed onto the suction side of the pump. This will facilitate
easier removal of the pump casing when replacing worn parts.
5 COMMISSIONING
Before starting your slurryMAX™ pump fo r the first time, make sure that the
following steps are taken:
5.1 AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS
 Make sure the motor is properly c onnected to the appropriate electrical

power supply, and that connections conform to local regulations.
 Make sure that the auxiliary power connections are connected,

functioning, and in the off position.
5.2 MOTOR ROTATION CHECK
It is important to verify that t he motor rotation is correct, and this

verification is performed with t he motor disconnected from the pump.
Incorrect motor rotation can be a result of improper wire connections.
CAUTION: Ensure that the motor rotation is correct for pump
rotation. Starting the motor with incorrect rotation may cause the
impeller to unthread from the pump shaft, which may cause
personal injury. With the pump disconnected from the motor,
verify that the motor rotation is correct.
 With the electrical controls in the off, locked-out, and tagged-out

position, make sure the motor and pump rotate freely by hand.
 Remove all of the v-belts or disconnect the shaft coupling if direct drive.

 Remove the electrical locks and tags . Sta rt the motor to ve rify the
motor rotation is correct. If no t correct reconnect the wiring as
necessary.
 Reinstall the electrical locks and t ags. Reinstall the v-belts or shaft
coupling, and reaffirm shaft alignment.
5.3 LUBRICATION
Bearing assemblies lubricated with grease are pre-l ubricated at the

factory. A dditional grease at st art-up should not be necessary. The
grease nipples on the bearing housing end covers lubricate the seal
and flinger area to provide a grease barrier that prevents contamination
of slurry and/or gland water to the bearings. These should be greased
frequently so that clean gr ease exudes from the rim of the flinger. It is
not possible to overgrease this area. Use an N.L.G.I. Grade 2 greas e
with extreme pressure additiv es, oil viscosity of ISO 150-220, and a
minimum dropping point of 177°C (350°F). Suggested brands are:
Castrol EPL2 Lubriplate 730-2
Chevron Dura-Lith EP2 Lubriplate 1200-2
Conoco Phillips Dynalife L-EP2 Mobil Mobilux EP2
Conoco Phillips Super-STA 2 Shell Alvania EP2
LPS Thermaplex Multi-Purpose

5.4 SHAFT SEAL CHECK - WATER FLUSH SEAL
Gland water supply needs to be connecte d to the s eal water port on the
stuffing box. (NOTE: Some stuf fing boxes will have t wo pipe-thread ports.
The port closer to the driv e side of the box is for us e in low-flow situations,
while the port closer to the pump side of the bo x is for use in full-flow
situations. Whichever port will not be used must be plugged.)
 Gland water must be clean, free from sand, rust, etc…as t hese
abrasive particles will greatly reduce the wear life of the shaft sleeve.
The gland water should be available at a pressure of 10psi. (maximum)
above the discharge pressure of the pump.
 Recommended gland water requirements are:
pH 6.5 – 8.0
1000 ppm maximum dissolved solids
100 ppm maximum suspended solids
100% of +250 mesh (60 m) particles removed
Maximum Individual Dissolved Ions:

Hardness (Ca+, Mg+) 200 ppm (mg/L) as CaCO3
Calcium Carbonate (CaCO3) 10 ppm (mg/L)
Sulphate (So4-) 50 ppm (mg/L)
 Maximum recommended flow rate should be as follows:
Power Frame High Low

MAA / CMC 8 gpm 1 gpm
MMA / CMD 15 gpm 2 gpm
MMB / CME 20 gpm 3 gpm
MMC / CMF 25 gpm 4 gpm
MMD / CMG 30 gpm 5 gpm
 The gland water should be pressure controlled, not flow controlled.

The amount of gland water flow s hould be adjusted to the minimum
required to provide c ooling. This w ill often result in flow rates much
lower than the ones listed above. The gland follower should be
adjusted enough to allow a small flow of gl and water along the shaft
while the pump is running.
6 START-UP
 Whenever possible the pump should be started up on water before

slurry or solids are introduced into the feed.
 Fully open the inlet valve and ensur e that water is available at the
pump inlet.
 On water flush sealed pumps c heck that the gland water system is
operating and that gland water is available at the correct pressure and
flow rate.

 When the pump is running check the gland water leakage. If leakage is
excessive the gland s crews should be tightened to reduce the flow to
the required level. If the gland shows signs of heating the gland screws
should be loosened s lightly. If the gl and continues to heat up to the
extent that steam and/or smoke is emitted, the pump must be stopped
and the gland allowed to cool before re-starting.
 Adjust the casing wear ring. The wear ring (25) must be adjusted on
initial start-up, as this critical clearance can onl y be set while the pump
is operating. CAUTION: Over adjustment will give increased
grinding and wear on mating faces of impeller and wear ring with
a corresponding reduction in life.
 The wear ring screws (31) shoul d be tightened clockwise two flats
each, until contact / rubbing resistance is felt at all of the wea r ring
screws. (NOTE: This will occur when the wear ring contact s the
impeller, and the wear ring screws are evenly adjusted).
 Loosen each wear ring screw by one flat each (or just enough that no
rubbing is felt). This will set the optimum clearance.
 If pressure gauges are available check the suction and disc harge
pressures. (NOTE: changes in t hese pressures can be used as a
guideline or indicator for routine adjustment of the wear ring).
7 SHUT-DOWN
 Before shutting down the pump it s hould be allowed to run for a short
period of time on clean water to re move the solids from the pump and
clear the system.
 If a drain valve is fitted in the suct ion line this should be left open while
the pump is out of use.
 If the pump is to be taken out of service for some time, check section 8
for correct storage procedure.
8 PUMP STORAGE
8.1 HANDLING OF RUBBER COMPONENTS
 Avoid storage conditions in temperatures above 38°C (100°F). Moist air

in absence of sunlight is most desirable.
 Do not store products where tem perature change is faster than 6°C
(10°F).
 Do not allow covered products to bump other items when temperatures

are below 0°C (32°F). If below fr eezing conditions ar e involved, care

should be taken when handling rubber components as they become
brittle at very low temperatures.
 Do not allow rubber covered item s to come in contact with oils,

solvents, gasoline, lubr icating oils, napthas, lacquer products, tol uol,
benzene, coal tars, etc.
 Do not store in direct sunlight. In emergencies, cov er products with

tarpaulins.
 Do not store near electrical equipment, operating motors, transformers

and power centers. Ozone deteriorates rubber very rapidly.
 Do not attach slings or any lifti ng device directly against any r ubber
covered surfaces. Cushion or pad lifting devices with burlap or wood.
 Do not permit covered products to be bumped or struck by sharp items,

which will bruise or pierce rubber , allowing corrosive solutions to
penetrate.
 Do not stack covered products wit hout proper support for each item.
Permanent deformation will result.
8.2 HANDLING OF MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
 It is recommended that a pump be st ored indoors, and protected from

extreme temperatures.
 Rotate the shaft several turns once a month.
 Once every 6 months purge the bear ing seals with grease to prevent
the bearing from being contaminated with dirt and moisture.
 Protect all external machined surfaces with a removable rust

preventative coating.
 Cover the suction and disc harge connections, unless connect ed to

piping.
 For outdoor storage, cover the pump with a weatherproof tarpaulin that
will allow air circulation.
 Prior to start-up ensure the pump and its components are in a

satisfactory condition.
9 POWER FRAME ASSEMBLY
9.1 MMAA-MMD FRAMES BEARING ASSEMBLY

 Stand the shaft on end, impeller end up. Heat the bearing cone to
roughly 104° C (220° F) using an i nduction heater and drop it into
position on the shaft with small diam eter towards the shaft shoulder.
Make sure it seats up against t he shoulder and tap into position as
necessary.
 Fit a suitable spacer over the sha ft to retain the bearing cone agains t
the shaft shoulder using a nut on the shaft threads to tension.
 Turn the shaft over and stand it on the impeller end.
 Fit a bearing cup in each end of the bearing hous ing using Loctite®
“Retaining Compound” (No. 635) to keep the cups from dropping out
when the bearing housing is inv erted. It may be necessary to tap the
cups down with a soft metal drift.
 Place two lifting eyes at one end of the housing (in opposing end cover
bolt holes) and lower it over the sha ft until all weight is taken on the
bearing cone.
 Heat the next bearin g cone to 104° C ( 220° F) using an induction

heater and drop it onto the shaft with s mall diameter towards the
bearing cup, then tap it down into position against the cup.
 Mount a dial indic ator on the end of the housi ng with the actuating pin
against the end of the shaft. Rotate the housing by hand a minimum
10 times for the bearings to align co rrectly. (NOTE: make sure the end
of the shaft is free of dirt and burrs before setting up the indicator).
 Take the weight on the two lifting eyes and check the endplay . To
reduce the clearance, take the weig ht with the shaft on the floor and
tap the bearing down the shaft. For more clearance, take the weight on
the housing and knock the shaft down through the bearing. Endplay
(cold) should be as follows:
MMAA .03mm - .05mm (.001” - .002”)

MMA .05mm - .1mm (.002” - .004”)
MMB .08mm - .13mm (.003” - .005”)
MMC .1mm - .15mm (.004” - .006”)
MMD .15mm - .2mm (.006” - .008”)
 When the required clearance ha s been s et use a g rease gun with a

narrow nozzle to fully pack both bearings with greas e between each
roller. See section 5.3 for spec ifications and suggested brands. After
this, pump grease through both grease nipples in the bearing housing
until the grease that was pack ed between the rollers begins to be
pushed out.
 Lay the unit on its side, (prefer ably in the pedestal) and remove the
retaining nut from the shaft thread, followed by the spacer.

 Fit a Waveseal, lip facing outward, into the recess of each housing end.
Apply a coat of silicone to the ends of the housing, followed by th e end
cover. Once the end cover is seat ed properly fasten it with the c orrect
hardware.
 Slide the flinger, small O.D. end firs t, onto the impeller end of the shaft,
up to the bearing. Grease the OD of the flinger that fits through the
seal before installation.
 Fit a dowel pin in the hole on the fa ce of the second flinger and slide
into position, small O.D. end first, over the locknut thread and up to the
bearing on the other end of the housing.
 Locate a locknut on the locknut thr ead with the flat face toward the
flinger. Engage the flinger dowel pin in one of the locknut slots and
tighten against the bearing.
 Fit bearing lock washer flat end firs t on drive end of shaft, aligning the
inner tab with the keyway and against installed lock nut.
 Locate the second locknut on the lock nut thread with the flat face
outwards and tighten securely in posit ion. Bend one of the angled
tangs of the lock washer into a slot on the second lock nut.
9.2 BEARING ASSEMBLY TO PEDESTAL
 Lubricate all bolts as necessary.
 Fit the adjusting screw through the hol e at rear of base and tighten into
position with a nut and was her. Two additional nut s, with was hers
between them, should then be spaced wide apart on the screw.
 Lower the bearing housing centr ally into the saddle with the impeller
end of the shaft towards the front. Ensure that the housing adjusting
lug locates correctly over the adj usting screw between the adjusting
nuts and washers.
 Fit two housing clamps in position over the housing. Draw the housing
clamp bolts up from the bottom of the pedestal and hold in position with
nuts and washers. Tight en them equally on either side to ensure
correct alignment of the shaft for subsequent alignment of the gland.
10 WET-END ASSEMBLY
GENERAL NOTE: Exercise care in the use of lubricants such as grease and
anti-seize compound when joining metal components together. Avoid getting
them on the rubber components.

10.1 GLAND SIDE CASING AND SHAFT PREP
 Locate the gland side casing (1) and install three base studs (38) in
tapped holes. The location of t he base studs depends on the
discharge position of pump. Po sition the casing onto the three
pedestal mounting posts by fitting the base studs through the holes.
Ensure that it fits flush to the face of the posts then bolt it securely in
place using the base stud washers (40), and nuts (39).
 For a 6x4 slurryMAX going on a MMB power frame only, it is necessary

to bolt an adapter (1A) to the gland side casing (1) with (4) socket head
bolts (1B). Then, the three base st uds (38) are fitted into the tapped
holes of the adapter (1A) as in t he previous step. See the sketch on
the next page to clarify.
ASSEMBLED
1
1B 1A
 Fit a shaft seal O-ring, sleev e spacer O-ring or a gasket (23)

(whichever one is applicable to the pump being assembled) onto the
shaft up against the flinger. If a sleeve spacer (22) is required, fit it
onto the shaft followed by a shaft seal O-ring or a second sleev e
spacer gasket (23).
10.2 GLAND ARRANGEMENT - WATER FLUSH SEAL
The assembly of the gland ar rangement should be carried out with the
expeller ring (centrifugal seal) or stuffing box (wate r-flush seal) resting on a
flat surface with the tapped holes facing upward.

Some stuffing boxes will have two pipe-thread ports. The port closer to the
drive side of the box is for use in low-flow situations, while the port closer to
the pump side of the box is for use in full-flow situations. Whichever port will
not be used must be plugged. Some mo dels require a close nipple and 45°
elbow installed on the sealing water port to allow connection of the water
supply line. Refer to the assembly drawing to determine.
 Position the shaft sleeve (27) vertica lly in the bore of the stuffing box
(24) with the impeller end (smaller I.D.) down.
 For high flow gland water, fit the following parts over the shaft sleeve
and into the stuffing box bore in this order:
1. Lantern Bush (21).
2. Packing Rings (26) with end gaps staggered on opp osite sides of
bore.
3. Gland Follower (16).
 For low flow gland water, fit the following parts over the shaft sl eeve
and into the stuffing box bore in this order:
1. Neck Ring (21)
2. One ring of packing (26)
3. Lantern Ring (34)
4. Remaining rings of packing (26) with end gaps staggered on
opposite sides of bore.
5. Gland Follower (16)
 Thread the gland scr ews (18) with wa shers (17) into the stuffing box
(24), and tighten evenly until the gland screws contact the gland
follower, but only finger tight. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Some pumps
use studs instead of screws and the gl and follower is installed in the
same manner as the centrifugal seal in 10.2.A.
 Offer up the gland arrangement so that the shaft sleeve (27) slides over
impeller shaft. Ensure that the stuffing box O.D. locates correctly in the
gland side casing and the gland scr ews, and the water flush port is
positioned for easy access.
 Fit O-ring or gaskets (20) to the end of the sleeve.
10.3 GLAND SIDE CASING LINER
 Fit gland s ide casing liner (2) insi de gland s ide casing (1) by aligning
the studs of the gland side c asing liner with the drill ed holes of the
gland side casing. Push the studs through the holes and ensure the
outer dovetail flange of t he gland side casing liner fits flat in the cast
recess of the gland side casing. En sure that discharge flange of gland
side casing liner fits flat in m achined recess of gland side c asing.
Install washers (3) and nuts (9) on studs and tighten evenly to fully seat
the gland side casing liner in the gland s ide casing. Before tightening
nuts ensure that the gland screws and grease nipple or water-flush port
is positioned correctly by rotating the gland assembly on the shaft.

 If the gland side cas ing liner f ouls the expeller, adj ust the bearing
assembly away from the impeller end and retighten the clamp bolts for
correct alignment of the gland be fore tightening the gland side c asing
liner nuts.
10.4 IMPELLER
 Suspend the impeller (19) vertically and align it with the shaft thread.
 Rotate the shaft by means of the pulley or a spanner wrench in a

clockwise direction. If resistance is felt raise or lower the imp eller
slightly. Rotate until tight.
 If the impeller fouls the gland s ide casing liner (2) before contacting the
shaft sleeve (27), loosen the bearing assembly clam p bolts, adjust the
shaft forward and re-tighten the clamp bolts.
 It is important that the impeller is installed tightly. Otherwise th e initial

torque at start-up may further screw on the impeller, f ouling the gland
side casing liner backliner in the process, causing seizure or damage to
the gland side cas ing liner. Ensure that the sleeve spacer (22) and
shaft sleeve (27) rotate with the pump shaft after tightening the
impeller. The impeller can be fully tightened by two methods:
1. Lock the shaft and tighten the impeller with some form of leverage.
2. Lock the impeller and tighten the shaft with some form of leverage.
 Adjust the impeller (19) close to the gland side casing liner (2) to
ensure that the suction liner wear ri ng (25) does not foul the front face
of the impeller during installation of the suction side casing assembly.
 Loosen the housing clamp bolts on the bearing assembly.
 Use the adjusting screw to move t he impeller axially towards the gland
side casing liner.
 Adjust until the impeller is in contact with the gland side casing liner
and reverse adjusting screw to move impeller 1.5mm (.06”) away from
gland side casing liner. Tighten t he clamp bolts and spin the impeller
by hand to ensure ease of rotation.
10.5 SUCTION SIDE CASING ASSEMBLY
 Locate suction side c asing (6) and se t on flat surface with s uction
flange side down. Shim the suction side casing so there will be at least
a 6mm (1/4”) gap between the suction fl ange face and flat surface.
This will allow the s uction liner to stick through the suction flange
properly.

 Fit suction side casing liner (4) in side suction side casing (6) by
aligning the studs of the suction si de casing liner with the drille d holes
of the suction side c asing. Push the studs through the holes and
ensure the outer dovetail fl ange of the suction side casing liner fits flat
in the cast recess of the suction si de casing. Ensure that discharge
flange of suction side casing liner fits flat in machined recess of suction
side casing. Install washers (3) and nut s (9) on studs and tighten
evenly to fully s eat the suction si de casing liner in the suction side
casing.
 Locate suction liner (5) and set on flat surface with studs facing up.
 Lubricate threads of wear ring scr ews (31) with anti-seize compound.
Install wear ring screws ( 31) in tapped holes of su ction liner until they
are flush with the undersi de of the metal insert in the suction liner.
Turn suction liner over to see this.
 With studs and screws in s uction liner facing down, install wear ring
(25) in molded ribbed groove of suction liner. Push wear ring in suction
liner until fully seated and flat surfac e of wear ring is flush with raised
ring of suction liner.
 Lubricate tapered OD of suction li ner and tapered ID of suction side

casing liner (4) with glycerin, s oap, or an approved ru bber lubricant.
Install suction liner wit h wear ring in suction side casing liner by fitt ing
tapered OD of suction liner with tapered ID of sucti on side casing liner.
Rotate suction liner until studs align with smaller drilled holes in suction
side casing (6) and wear ring screws ( 31) align with larger drilled holes
in suction side casing. Push suction liner into suction side casing liner
by hand. Fit washer s (3) with nuts (9) on suction liner studs through
suction side casing and tighten evenly to fully seat the suction liner in
the suction side casing liner. The su ction liner should be flus h or
slightly recessed with the suction side casing liner at their mating
surfaces after tightening the nuts.
10.6 ASSEMBLY OF SUCTION SIDE CASING TO GLAND SIDE CASING
 Hoist suction side casing and install two casing roll pins (37) in drille d
holes of ribbed side of suction si de casing (6) and drive through until
they stick through the machined side about 13mm (1/2”).
 Assemble suction side casing to gl and side casing (1) by aligning the
roll pins on the suction side casing with the corresponding drilled holes
on the gland side casing. Driv e roll pins part way into holes in gland
side casing and install casing bolts (8 ) with washers (7) in suction side
casing. Install washer s (7) and nuts (13) on bo lts (8) at gland side
casing and tighten ev enly to bring su ction side cas ing metal to metal
with the gland side c asing. Drive the ro lls pins in until they are flush
with the cast surface of the suction side casing.

10.7 IMPELLER ADJUSTMENT
 Loosen the housing clamp bolts on the bearing assembly.
 Use the adjusting screw to move t he impeller axially towards the wear
ring.
 Adjust until the impeller is in contact with the wear ring and rev erse
adjusting screw to move impeller 1.5 mm (.06”) away from wear ring.
Tighten the clamp bolts and spin the impeller by hand to ensure ease
of rotation.
 Torque values for bearing assembly hold down clamp fasteners:
Bearing Assembly Size Maximum Torque (Ft Lb/ Nm)

MMAA 60/80
MMA 100/135
MMB 170/231
MMC 250/340
MMD 500/675
11 MAINTENANCE
11.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
 Routine maintenance is carried out to prolong the life of the pump parts
and to maintain pump performance to sustain the efficiency of the plant
operation. Critical ma intenance is adjustment of impeller running
clearances.
11.2 WEAR RING ADJUSTMENT
 The Wear Ring (25) must be adjust ed on initial start up (see Section 7
for Start-Up instructions) and adjustm ent of this critical clearance
should be carried out a minimum of six times in the life of the pump.
Typically every four weeks, but may vary depending on the pumping
application.
 The adjustment should be carri ed out when the pump is operating.

CAUTION: Over adjustment will give increased grinding and wear
on mating faces of Impeller and Wear Ring, with a corresponding
reduction in life. The Wear Ring Screws (31) sh ould be tightened
clockwise two flats each, until c ontact / rubbing resistance is felt at all
of the Wear Ring Screws. This will occur when the Wear Ring contacts
the Impeller, and the Wear Ring Screws ar e evenly adjusted. Then
loosen each Wear Ring Screw by one half turn (or ju st enough that no
rubbing is felt). This will set the optimum clearance.
 The Wear Ring will typically outlast the life of the Suction Liner and it is
not commonly replaced.

11.3 SHAFT SEAL ADJUSTMENT - WATER FLUSH SEAL
 Gland packing should be adjusted, such that a small flow of gland

water along the shaft is obtained while the pump is running.
(For additional information refer to Section 5.4)
11.4 BEARING LUBRICATION
 FLSmidth Krebs millMAX™ pump bearings are designed to provide

years of service before failure. The most common reason bearings do
not reach their design service life is because of contamination, not from
the loads they experience. One of the features designed into FLSmidth
Krebs millMAX™ beari ng assemblies is the ability to grease the
bearings without danger of over greasing. T he bearings are oriented
on the shaft in such a way as to allow the grease applied to pass
through the bearing toward s the end cov ers and eventually to the
outside of the bearing assembly. The seals in the end covers are
oriented to allow the grease to pa ss through and retard the entrance of
contaminants.
 Because of the many variations of speeds and environments bearings

are exposed to, it is difficult to pr ovide a “cut and dried” lubrication
schedule. The table bel ow will provide a suggestion as to the amount
and frequency of bearing lubr ication. Please note that the use of this
table does not warrant neglecting the bearings co mpletely. Judgment
and experience gained by observing the bearings frequently at the
outset of operation, taking c areful note of conditions regarding
temperature and cleanliness should be the final determining fact ors in
establishing routine lubrication procedures.
BEARING
SIZE GREASE RPM
GRAM/(OZ) 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1500 2000 2500 2900
MMAA 18/(0.6) 336 336 336 168 168 168 84
MMA 23/(0.8) 336 336 168 168 168 84
MMB 43/(1.5) 336 336 168 168 168 84
MMC 56/(2.0) 336 336 168 168 84
MMD 100/(3.5) 336 336 168 168 84
This chart is based on bearing operating temperatures of 70°C (160°F). The lubrication intervals should
be minimum weekly for operating temperatures greater than 70°C (160°F). Consult FLSmidth Krebs for
speeds greater than those listed in the chart above for synthetic grease lubricants.
 There is no substitute for establishing bas e line readings after startup

like vibration and temper ature and then monitori ng them routinely for
changes in these readings to indic ate a need for attention to the
bearings.
 The grease nipples located on the bearing housing are for lubrication of
the bearings.

 The grease nipples f itted to the bearing housing end covers are for
lubrication of the lip seal and flinger area and pr ovide a grease barrier
to prevent ingress of slurry and/or gland water to the bearings. T hese
should be greased daily so that cl ean grease exudes from the rim of
the flinger. It is not possible to over grease this area.
 For dirty environments that are commonly found in coal applications, or

in the event of an excess ively leaking gland seal, the frequenc y of
lubrication should be halved no ma tter what the bearing operating
temperature. The impeller end lip seal should be greased twice a day.
The thought should always be “more is better than less”.
 Please see Section 5.3 for greas e specifications and suggested

brands.
 New bearing assemblies are pre-lubricated at the factory. Additional

grease at start-up should not be necessary.
12 PARTS REPLACEMENT
In general, most millMAX parts replacement procedures ar e straight fo rward and a

reverse of t he installation. Please review assembly proc edures before beginning
work.
12.1 IMPELLER
 Removal of the old impeller can be done by reversing the instructions

for impeller installation, as found in the section on wet-end assembly.
 To allow the impeller to be unscrewed easily, the release collar must be

removed before the impeller is unscr ewed. Releas e collars are only
available on MMB, MMC, and MMD power frames. Follow the
following steps.
Remove sealant in heads of socket head cap screws. Be sure to

achieve full engagement of the Allen wrench into the socket head.
Remove the three bolts holding the release collar together.
Using a metal bar, strike the flat ledges on the release collar
segments to drive them out from between the sleeve spacer (22)
and flinger. Tapped holes the same size as the socket head cap
screws are provided to aid in pushing the segments out if needed.
To replace release collar, use new grade 5 socket head cap screws.
DO NOT REUSE OLD SCREWS. The following is a list of socket
head cap screw sizes:
MMB 3/8”-16 x 1-3/4” long
MMC 3/8”-16 X 1-3/4” long
MMD ½”-13 x 2-1/4” long

There are punch marks on the flat face of two of the three segments
of the release collar. It is important to reassemble the release collar
segments with the punch marks together as shown below. This will
ensure the segments fit properly.
Torque the socket head cap screws to 36Nm (26 ft lbs) for MMB and
MMC, 89Nm (65 ft lbs) for MMD. Apply Loctite 222 or equivalent to
screw threads prior to assembly. It may be necessary to install
release collar on shaft with screws loose before final torque is
applied.
Fill the recess of the socket head cap screws with silicone sealant to
prevent moisture from contacting these fasteners and fouling the
threads. Fill the holes in the OD with silicone, too.
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
13.1 DURING ASSEMBLY
Expeller ring/stuffing box jamming on shaft sleeve:

 Weight causing it to sag on shaft. Shim OD in gland side casing if
necessary to ensure air gap between shaft sleeve OD and ID of
expeller ring or lantern bush.
Gland side casing liner will not pull up tight to gland side casing:
 Fouling on expeller. Adjust beari ng assembly away from gland side
casing.
Impeller jams before locking up to expeller/shaft sleeve:

 Fouling on gland side casing liner. Adjust bearing assembly towards
suction piping.

Impeller does not have equal gap, top and bottom, to gland side casing liner:
 Bearing assembly is out of alignm ent. Ensure bearing housing is fully
seated in pedestal saddles.
Suction side casing will not bolt up flush with gland side casing:
 Wear ring fouling on impeller. Ad just bearing assembly toward gland
side casing.
13.2 ON INITIAL START-UP
Drive belts slip/scream before pump gets up to speed:

 Belt tension incorrect.
 Insufficient power rating for the pump duty.
 Pump discharging into an empty system.
Pump locks solid on initial start up:

 Impeller was not tightened enough on assembly and has locked
against the gland side casing liner.
 Incorrect rotation has unscrewed impeller against wear ring.
Noise and/or sparks from gland follower:

 Gland follower tightened unevenly.
Excessive heat and/or smoke from gland:

 Gland follower too tight.
Belts turn over, or run off sheaves completely:

 Pulleys misaligned
Pump vibration:
 Partially blocked impeller.
 Loose hold down bolts.
13.3 DURING OPERATION
Insufficient or fluctuating discharge flow/pressure:

 Wear ring needs adjustment.
 Pump speed too slow.
 System head higher than design.
 Partial blockage in pipework.
 Air pocket in suction line caus ed by eccentric reducer the wrong way
up.
 Entrained air in slurry.
 Slurry viscosity higher than design.
 Sucking air through gland.
 Impeller badly worn.
 Impeller partially blocked.
Excessive discharge flow/pressure:

 Speed too high.
 System head lower than design.

High Power Consumption:
 Speed too high.
 System head lower than design.
 Slurry density higher than design.
 Incorrect wear ring adjustment.
 Incorrect impeller adjustment.
Excessive Gland Water Leakage:

 Too high gland water pressure.
 Gland Follower too loose.
 Packing needs to be replaced.
 Shaft sleeve badly worn.
Slurry Leakage From Expeller Ring:

 Suction head higher than design.
 Pump speed too low for effective expeller operation.
 Impeller too far from gland side casing liner.
 Expeller badly worn.
 Entrained air causing pressure fluctuations.
Slurry Leakage From Stuffing Box:

 Insufficient gland water pressure.
 Gland Follower too loose.
 Impeller too far from gland side casing liner.
 Worn gland parts.

14 DRAWING, PARTS LISTS & PERFORMANCE DATA
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FINAL CERTIFIED
CERTIFIED BY
FLSmidth Krebs Australia

A Business Unit of FLSmidth Pty Ltd
67 RANDLE ROAD PINKENBA,
QLD, AUSTRALIA 4008
PHONE: (07) 5519 5700
15 TAPERLOCK INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS & BELT
TENSIONING DETAILS


Copyright FLSMIDTHKREBS millMAX™ SEPTEMBER (2014) 37



16 WEG MOTOR IOM MANUAL

Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Manual Geral de Instalação, Operação e

Manutenção de Motores Elétricos
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual of Electric Motors
Manual General de Instalación, Operación y
Mantenimiento de Motores Eléctricos
Installations-, Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
für Elektrische Motoren
Manual de Instalare, Exploatare şi Întreţinere a
Motoarelor Electrice
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 167
Română 223
ENGLISH
Manual of Electric Motors 57

www.weg.net
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
J Smoke Extraction Motors;
J Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
J Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

J NBR 17094-1: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: trifásicos.
J NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: monofásicos.
J IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance.
J NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators.
J CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators.
J UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - General Requirements.
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. TERMINOLOGY 61
2. INITIAL RECOMMENDATIONS 62
2.1. WARNING SYMBOL ......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. RECEIVING INSPECTION ................................................................................................................ 62
2.3. NAMEPLATES .................................................................................................................................. 63
3. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 66
4. HANDLING AND TRANSPORT 67

4.1. LIFTING.............................................................................................................................................. 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt ..................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts ..................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical motors ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position .............................................. 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position .............................................. 70
4.2. Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position............................ 71
5. STORAGE 73
5.1. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES ................................................................................................. 73
ENGLISH
5.2. STORAGE.......................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 BEARINGS ......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings ........................................................................................................... 74
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings .................................................................................................. 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing ......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE ............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement .................................................................................... 75
6. INSTALLATION 78
6.1. FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING ........................................................................................................................ 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors ............................................................................................................ 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors ........................................................................................................ 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors ............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. BALANCING...................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. COUPLINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling ....................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling ................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling ........................................................................................................ 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors ...................................................................................... 83
6.5. LEVELING ......................................................................................................................................... 84

www.weg.net
6.6. ALIGNMENT...................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. CONNECTION OF OIL LUBRICATED OR OIL MIST LUBRICATED MOTORS ............................. 85
6.8. CONNECTION OF THE COOLING WATER SYSTEM ..................................................................... 85
6.9. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION ........................................................................................................... 85
6.10. CONNECTION OF THE THERMAL PROTECTION DEVICES ...................................................... 88
6.11. RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (PT-100) ................................................................ 89
6.12. CONNECTION OF THE SPACE HEATERS .................................................................................... 91
6.13. STARTING METHODS .................................................................................................................... 92
6.14. MOTORS DRIVEN BY FREQUENCY INVERTER .......................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter .................................................................................................................. 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire ..................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils ............................................................................................... 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation ................................................................................................................ 94
6.14.3. Switching frequency ............................................................................................................ 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation ............................................................................................... 94
7. COMMISSIONING 95
7.1. INITIAL START-UP ........................................................................................................................... 95
7.2. OPERATING CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration ................................................................................................................... 98
8. MAINTENANCE 99
8.1. GENERAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. LUBRICATION .................................................................................................................................. 99
ENGLISH
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings..................................................................................... 100

8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting ............................................................................................ 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting.................................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases ............................ 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings ........................................................................................................ 103
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings ............................................................................................... 103
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings .................................................................................................................... 103
8.3. MOTOR ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................... 104
8.3.1. Terminal box .......................................................................................................................... 105
8.4. DRYING THE STATOR WINDING INSULATION ........................................................................... 105
8.5. SPARE PARTS ................................................................................................................................ 106
9. ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION 107

9.1. PACKAGING .................................................................................................................................... 107
9.2. PRODUCT ....................................................................................................................................... 107
10. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART X SOLUTIONS 108
11. WARRANTY TERM 109
12. EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 110

www.weg.net
1. TERMINOLOGY
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

J Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
J Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. INITIAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
ENGLISH
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. WARNING SYMBOL
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. RECEIVING INSPECTION

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
J Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
J Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely;
J Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. NAMEPLATES
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. HANDLING AND TRANSPORT

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc..
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. LIFTING
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
ENGLISH
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

For horizontal motors fitted with only one eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-inclination during the lifting
process should not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
30° Max.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt
www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
J For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface;
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts
J For HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis;
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 - Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF motors
J For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 - Use of a spreader bar for lifting

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader bar is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 - Lifting of vertical mounted motors
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF motors
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, ng, using the top mounted eyebolt
eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
e 4.9 - Removing the motor from the pack

Figure packaging

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 - Installation of the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 - End result: motor placed in vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position

HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. The HGF motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an HGF motor in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 - Lifting HGF motor with two hoists

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13;
Figure 4.13 - Placing HGF motor in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14;
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 - HGF motor in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 - Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 - Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully;
Figure 4.18 - Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 - Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. STORAGE
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. STORAGE
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 - Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging;
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2);
Figure 5.1 - Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 - Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4);
Figure 5.3 - Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 - Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 - Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 BEARINGS
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to Item 8.2
before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be
replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according to
Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors that are transported in horizontal position is removed to prevent oils
leaks during the transport. These motors must be stored in vertical position after receiving and the bearing
must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 - Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing size Amount of oil (ml) Bearing size Amount of oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to the Item
8.2 before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE
We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 - Correction factor for the insulation resistance corrected to 40 °C

ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. INSTALLATION
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor;
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry;
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10;
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. Check the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load;
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors;
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
6.1. FOUNDATIONS
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) The features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
ENGLISH
the driven load.
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

J Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
J Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

ENGLISH
J Shoulders and/or recesses;
J Anchor bolts with loose plates;
J Bolts cast in the concrete;
J Leveling screws;
J Positioning screws;
J Steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 - Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 - Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
ENGLISH
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 - Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. BALANCING
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report.
6.4. COUPLINGS
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
J Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings;
J Whenever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
machine operation;
J The maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
be exceeded;
J Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial clearance
Figure 6.9 - Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 - Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. LEVELING
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. ALIGNMENT
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 - Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc.. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
Dial gauge
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
Figure 6.11 - Alignment with dial gauge

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically.
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. CONNECTION OF OIL LUBRICATED OR OIL MIST LUBRICATED MOTORS

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. CONNECTION OF THE COOLING WATER SYSTEM

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.
Type of
Configuration Quantity of leads Connection diagram
connection
1 2 3
3 -
L1 L2 L3
6 4 5 6 4 5
6 '-Y 1 2 3 1 2 3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
YY - Y 1 2 3 1 2 3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
9
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
Single speed ''-' 1 2 3 1 2 3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10
5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4
8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9 7
'' - YY - ' - Y 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1
12 PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA
START RUN START RUN
' - PWS 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11
Part-winding start 7 8 9 7 8 9 6 4 5 6 4 5
6 4 5 6 4 5 7 8 9 7 8 9
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
4 5 6 4 5 6
YY - Y 1 2 3 1 2 3
ENGLISH
Variable Torque L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED
4 5 6 4 5 6
' - YY 1 2 3 1 2 3
6
Constant Torque L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Double speed
Dahlander 4 5 6 4 5 6
YY - ' 1 2 3 1 2 3
Constant Output L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
9 ' - Y - YY
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
ONLY FOR
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED STARTING
1 2 3 6 4 5
Double speed
6 - L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Double winding
Equivalent table for lead identification

Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Figure 6.13 - Clearance distance representation

Table 6.3 - Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.

www.weg.net
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.10. CONNECTION OF THE THERMAL PROTECTION DEVICES

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic
thermal protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as
specified on the accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product
warranty and cause serious material damages.
ENGLISH
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.14 - Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
Figure 6.15 - Thermistor connection

www.weg.net
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
6.11. RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (PT-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.16 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204

-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net
Resistance (Ohm)
Temperatura (ºC)
Figure 6.16 - Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. CONNECTION OF THE SPACE HEATERS

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
ENGLISH
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 - Dual voltage space heater connection
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. STARTING METHODS

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-starter
Series/Parallel
Part winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part winding
Autotransformer
Soft-starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage starting parallel switch starting Soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. MOTORS DRIVEN BY FREQUENCY INVERTER
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

J That the motor must be operated at constant output;
J That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
J Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
J max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
J mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/μs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/μs
≥ 0,1 μs ≥ 6 μs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/μs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/μs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/μs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/μs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/μs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/μs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/μs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/μs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/μs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/μs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing.
If motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 - Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355
NEMA 445/7, 447/9, L447/9, 504/5, 5006/7/8, 5009/10/11, 586/7, J Insulated bearing/end shield
5807/8/9, 5810/11/12 and 588/9 J Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger J Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger J Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2.5 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 - Maximum motor speed (in rpm)

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 3600
6315 3600
6316 3200
6319 3000
6220 3600
225-630 364/5-9610
6320 2200
6322 1900
6324 1800
6328 1800
6330 1800
Note:
To select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. COMMISSIONING
7.1. INITIAL START-UP
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
J If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements;

J If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly;
J If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
in Table 6.10;
J Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4;
J Check the motor rotation direction;
J Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate;
J Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9;
J Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
forced cooling system, etc.);

J Check bearing operating conditions. If signs of oxidation are detected, replace the bearings. If no sign of
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor;
J When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:
J Correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 6.8);
J That the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
J That if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
before starting the motor.
ENGLISH
J Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics;
J Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value;
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
ENGLISH
500 8006/10 171 6.73

560 8806/10 185 7.28
630 9606/10 200 7.87
J Ensure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2;
J Ensure that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
J Start the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions;
J Ensure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again;
J If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1;
J Start the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate;
J Continue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels;
J Record the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
J Two successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
the second start immediately after the motor stops;

J One start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions.
www.weg.net
7.2. OPERATING CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20 °C to +40 °C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second)
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
J ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
variation in voltage and frequency:

J Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency;
J Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
J IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
J Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency;
J Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
J NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
J ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
J ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
J A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water

IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
the failure of the oil pumping system.
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3 - The values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc..

www.weg.net
8. MAINTENANCE
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. GENERAL INSPECTION
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
J Visually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required;
J Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4;
J Clean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient;
J Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor;
Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required;
ENGLISH
J
J Drain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6);
J Check the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3;
J Check if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.7;
J Check the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required;
J Check the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time;
J Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. LUBRICATION
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country.
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings

Lubrication intervals (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2
4
90 143/5 6205 4 - - 20000 20000 25000 25000
6
8
2
4
100 - 6206 5 - - 20000 20000 25000 25000
6
8
2
4 6207/
112 182/4 9 - - 20000 20000 25000 25000
6 6307
8
ENGLISH
2 20000 18400 25000 23200

4
132 213/5 6308 11 - -
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18100 15700 22000 20000
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 13700 11500 17000 14000
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 11900 9800 15000 12000
4
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
8 19700 17300 24000 20000
364/5
*Upon *Upon *Upon
404/5 2 14000 3500 4000
request request request
444/5
225 445/7 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
250 447/9 6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
280 L447/9 8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon
355 5008 2 9600 2400 3000
request request request
5010/11 4 9000 7000 11000 8000
6319 45
586/7
6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
588/9
8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting

ENGLISH
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
J Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
J Lift grease inlet protection;
J Remove the grease outlet plug;
J Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
1 (one) minute at rated speed;

J Switch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
J Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:

J Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
J Pump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;
J Lower again the grease inlet protection.
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases

The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil thus being compatible with greases
that contain:
J Lithium based thickener, lithium-based complex thickener, polyurea thickener and refined mineral oil;
J The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
www.weg.net
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
J Switch-off the motor;
J Remove threaded oil drain plug;
J Open the valve and drain the oil;
J Close the drain vale again;
J Reinstall the threaded oil drain plug;
J Fill-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
J Check oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
glass;
J Reinstall oil inlet plug;
J Check for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - high axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e ISO VG150
ENGLISH
4-8 29320 26
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 SHC 629 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown
in Figure 6.12.
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.6. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
J NDE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
J Drain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.1);
J Close the oil drain hole;
J Remove the oil inlet plug;
J Fill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
J Check the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
J Install the oil inlet plug;
J Check for oil leaks.

Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.1 - Sleeve bearing Manual of Electric Motors 103

www.weg.net
Table 8.6 - Oil properties for sleeve bearings
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) specification
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T ISO VG32
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin
2 9-80 2.8 8000 antifoam and
DTA 10
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T additives
450 7006/10
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
9-90
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
2.8 ISO VG46
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
9-100 mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T
4-8 8000 Renolin DTA 15 antifoam and
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and
11-110 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
4.7 additives
450 7006/10
11-125
500 8006/10
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. MOTOR ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc..
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
J Ensure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
inside the terminal box;

J If the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt;
J If motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
specified in Table 8.7;

J Ensure that the cables do not contact sharp edges;
J Ensure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country;
J Ensure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection;
J Ensure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.7.
Table 8.7 - Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 4 to 7 7 to 12 16 to 30 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 230 to 360
(without seal)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - -
(without seal)
(with seal with metallic - - - 13 to 20 25 to 37 40 to 55 50 to 65 -
stop/cord)
Combined slotted screw
(with flat seal 'and/or - 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - -
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
8.4. DRYING THE STATOR WINDING INSULATION

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. SPARE PARTS

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position without
placing other components onto them.
Terminal box cover
Terminal box support
Terminal box
Fan cover
Nameplate
Eyebolt
ENGLISH
DE shield
Bearing
DE bearing cap
Shaft W-ring
Fan
NDE shield
Rotor Key
NDE bearing cap
Frame Wound stator
Figure 8.2 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
9.1. PACKAGING
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. PRODUCT
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART X SOLUTIONS

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted
power supply cables
Blown fuses Replace blown fuses
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection
connection diagram
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor
freely
Load toque is too high during start-up Do not start the motor on load
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine and the alignment
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal/excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
ENGLISH
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design

Damaged bearings Replace the bearings
Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease/oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease/oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease/oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease/oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

www.weg.net
11. WARRANTY TERM

WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motors Unit (“WEG”), offers warranty against defects in workmanship and
materials for its products for a period of 18 months from the invoice date issued by the factory or distributor/
dealer, limited to 24 months from the date of manufacture.
Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the invoice date issued by the factory or
distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraphs above contain the legal warranty periods.
If a warranty period is defined in a different way in the commercial/technical proposal of a particular sale, that
will supersede the time limits set out above.
The warranty periods above are independent of the product installation date and the startup.
If any defect or abnormal occurrence is detected during machine operation, the customer must immediately
notify WEG in writing about the occurred defect, and make the product available for WEG or its Authorized
Service Center for the period required to identify the cause of the defect, check the warranty coverage, and
perform the proper repairs.
In order for the warranty to be valid, the customer must be sure to follow the requirements of WEG’s technical
documents, especially those set out in the product Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual, as well as
the applicable standards and regulations in force in each country.
Defects arising from the inappropriate or negligent use, operation, and/or installation of the equipment,
non-execution of regular preventive maintenance, as well as defects resulting from external factors or
equipment and components not supplied by WEG, will not be covered by the warranty.
The warranty will not apply if the customer at its own discretion makes repairs and/or modifications to the
equipment without prior written consent from WEG.
The warranty will not cover equipment, components, parts and materials whose lifetime is usually shorter than
the warranty period. It will not cover defects and/or problems resulting from force majeure or other causes not
imputable to WEG, such as, but not limited to: incorrect or incomplete specifications or data supplied by the
customer; transportation, storage, handling, installation, operation and maintenance not complying with the
ENGLISH
provided instructions; accidents; defects in the construction works; use in applications and/or environments for
which the machine was not designed; equipment and/or components not included in the scope of WEG
supply. The warranty does not include disassembly services at the buyer’s premises, product transportation
costs and travel, lodging and meal expenses for the technical staff of the Service Centers, when requested by
the customer.
The services under warranty will be provided exclusively at WEG authorized Service Centers or at one of its
manufacturing plants. Under no circumstances will the warranty services extend the equipment warranty
period.
WEG’s Civil Liability is limited to the supplied product; WEG will not be liable for indirect or consequential
damages, such as losses of profit and revenue losses and alike which may arise from the contract signed
between the parties.

11.2 Southern Cross Solution Pump

INSTALLATION
AND
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
SOUTHERN CROSS
MOTORPUMPS
Location Starting
Select a site as near as possible to the source of the liquid to NOTE: Do not run the pump dry as the shaft seal will be
be pumped, involving the smallest suction lift and the shortest severely damaged.
length of suction pipe. Reference should be made to the pump 1. Ensure the discharge gate valve is closed. Do not run the
performance pump curve to determine the maximum permissible pump for very long with the discharge valve closed.
suction lift of the pump. 2. Prime the pump. The pump casing and suction line must
be filled with the liquid to be pumped, either by direct filling
Direction of Rotation or evacuation of air (diaphragm pump). The pump shaft
should be turned slowly to expel air trapped in the impeller.
The pump is designed to run in an anti-clockwise direction, It should not be necessary to re-prime the pump before
when viewed from the suction end of the pump. Before subsequent starts if the footvalve has remained sealed.
installing, check rotation of the driving machine to ensure that 3. Ensure the drive shaft rotation conforms to the direction
the pump will be driven in the correct direction. arrow on the pump.
4. The unit may now be started. When the pump reaches full
speed, open the gatevalve on the discharge pipe gradually
Foundation until the desired quantity of liquid is being delivered. If no
liquid is being delivered, shut down the unit immediately.
Set the pump unit base plate on a firm foundation. The 5. Check for exceptional noise or operating temperature and
foundations should be sufficiently substantial to support the check pump mechanical seal for leaks.
pump unit (eg. concrete), depending upon whether the pump
is electric or diesel engine driven. Troubles and Their Causes
Shaft Seal Failure to deliver water/
Operating below rated capacity
Southern Cross ISO pumps are supplied with a mechanical 1. Long suction and short delivery. A minimum discharge
shaft seal unless specified otherwise. Pumps should not be head of approximately 1.5m will help to eliminate this trouble.
run dry. 2. Obstruction in suction/discharge line:
a. Valve closed.
Installation b. Suction strainer clogged.
c. Suction footvalve stuck in closed position or partially
NOTE: All pipe work should be correctly aligned with the closed.
pump and firmly supported so that no external loads are d. Footvalve too small.
imposed on the pump body. The pump shaft must be free e. Suction and/or discharge pipes of insufficient diameter
to turn after the pump has been bolted in position and pipe causing excessive friction loss.
work connected. 3. Slight air leaks in suction piping or joints or a badly worn
or damaged shaft seal.
Suction Piping 4. Pump not properly primed.
Suction piping must be free from air leaks. Suction piping should 5. Speed too low.
be the same size or larger than that of the pump flange. Tapered 6. Discharge head beyond pump's rating. Check both suction
eccentric reducers should be used. A straight length of pipe and discharge heads with gauges.
should be fitted to the pump inlet. Suction piping should have 7. Excessive suction lift.
a continual fall from pump to the liquid source. Avoid sharp 8. Incorrect direction of rotation.
turns, by using long radius bends and not elbows. Ensure that 9. Impeller partially or fully clogged.
the end of the suction line is sufficiently below the low level of 10. Air or gases in liquid handled.
the liquid to prevent the formation of whirlpools, and the
consequent entry of air into the suction pipe. Where there is
a suction lift, a good type of footvalve, with a water opening of Power Consumption too High
at least equal to that of the pipe, is essential. 1. Total head is lower than estimated causing too much water
to be pumped. Throttle capacity by means of gate valve
on delivery side or turndown impeller.
2. Larger impeller diameter than required.
3. Density of liquid greater than water.
4. Bent shaft.
5. Foreign body jammed in pump.
Excessive Vibration
Discharge Piping 1. Foundation not sufficiently rigid.
Discharge piping should be selected of a size suitable to carry 2. Impeller partially clogged, causing imbalance.
the required capacity, such that the friction head created is not 3. Worn or faulty bearings.
excessive.
Gate Valve
Priming Plug Excessive Internal Wear of Pump
1. Cavitation from air gases in liquid.
2. Abrasion caused by solid particles.
90o Bend 3. Corrosive action of liquid pumped.
Noisy Operation
1. Foreign body jammed in impeller or body.
2. Impeller binding in body.
Non-return Valve 3. Worn or faulty motor bearings.
4. Pump not properly primed.
Concentric Taper 5. Cavitation noise.
To avoid the formation of air pockets in the discharge piping (ie.

at the high points), vent cocks must be placed to expel any
accumulation of air which may affect the discharge capacity of
the pump.
Dismantling Procedure Re-Assembly Procedure
1. Remove the backplate to casing bolts. Jacking screw Re-assemble the motorpump by reversing the dismantling
holes are provided in the backplate, to facilitate removal procedure, paying particular attention to the following:
of the motor and impeller element.
1. Ensure gasket surfaces are clean.
2. Mechanical seal: It is advisable to fit a new mechanical seal
whenever the seal in the pump has been dismantled during
an overhaul. If a used seal is refitted, leakage from the seal
may occur. When fitting the mechanical seal, the following
points should be observed:-
NOTE: The mechanical seal seat and carbon rotating face

must be handled with care, ensuring the rubbing faces are
kept clean and free from scratches, otherwise they are unfit
for use.
(a) Fit 'O'-ring to groove in mechanical seal seat and oil

outside of 'O'-ring and recess in backplate. Push seat
completely into recess, using a soft, clean cloth. After
fitting backplate to bell housing, check to see seal seat
is seated in recess.
(b) Smear a small quantity of waterproof grease on to the
shaft where the moving section of the seal operates.
(c) Place the running face (carbon) on to the shaft.
2. Unscrew the impeller nut about two turns and drive a pair (d) Oil 'O'-ring and push into position in the mechanical
of wooden or metal wedges gently between the impeller seal, using the mechanical seal washer and spring.
and backplate, being careful not to distort the impeller. (e) Fit spring cap.
Give the impeller nut a sharp blow, using a hammer and (f) Fit impeller key and impeller to shaft.
piece of hardwood, to spring the impeller from the taper.
Remove the impeller nut and sealing washer and lift off Spanner Sizes and Recommended Torques
impeller. Lift out impeller key and slide the moving section
of the mechanical seal from the shaft. 16, 18, 21 and 36mm AF spanners (for disassembly of the pump
component only)
19, 24, 30 and 36mm AF socket for impeller nut
Motorpumps fitted with 19mm AF impeller nut -
70 Nm (50 ft/lb):
50 x 32 - 160, 65 x 50 - 160, 80 x 65 - 160, 50 x 32 - 200,
65 x 40 - 200, 80 x 50 - 200
90 Nm (65 ft/lb):
100 x 80 - 160, 100 x 65 - 200, 125x80-200, 125 x 100 - 200,
65 x 40 - 250, 80 x 50 - 250, 100 x 65 - 250, 125x80-250, 65
x 40 - 315, 80 x 50 - 315
150Nm (110 ft/lb):
125x100 - 250, 150x125 - 250, 100x 65 - 315, 125x80-315,
125x100 - 315,150x125 - 315, 125x80 - 400, 125x100 - 400,
150x125 - 400
3. Remove the bell housing to backplate bolts and remove Motorpumps fitted with 36mm AF impeller nut -
the backplate. 340Nm (250 ft/lb):
NOTE: Some pumps do not have separate bell housing to 200x 150 - 315, 250x200 - 315, 125x100 - 500, 200x150 - 400,
backplate bolts and these would have been removed in 150x125 - 500, 200x150 - 500
step (1).
LUBRICATION
4. Remove stationary face of mechanical seal by tapping Refer to the motor manufacturer's recommendations for
out gently with a piece of wood. lubrication of the motor bearings.
IMPORTANT
Shaft Extension: If the electric motor is being replaced or the
shaft extension and clamp are removed from the motor shaft,
special refitting instructions apply. For a copy of detailed
instructions for fitting motor shaft extension and clamp (Form
2411A), contact your nearest Southern Cross Dealer.
A pump which has become worn in the body or impeller may

be repaired by fitting bronze wear rings. These rings, with
full instructions for machining the pump parts and fitting rings
are obtainable from the nearest Southern Cross Dealer.
Sectional Arrangement
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
No.
2 Volute Casing With Feet
2 Volute Casing Without Feet
3 Impeller
4 Backplate
7 Impeller Washer
9 Wear Ring - Impeller Rear
10 Sealing Ring - Backplate
11 Sealing Ring - Volute Casing
12 Wear Ring - Impeller Front
13 Bell Housing
14 Motor Shaft Clamp
15 Extension Shaft
21 Mechanical Seal
46 Impeller Nut
A Impeller Key
B Volute Casing Plug
C Discharge Casing Plug
D Casing 'O' Ring
Construction Code
This code defines construction material of various components in the pump. eg:- CZ5CMW
C Z 5 C M W
Casing/Backplate Impeller Material Shaft Material Seal Type Bearing Type Wear Rings
C - Cast Iron C - Cast Iron 2 - 420 Stainless C - Nitrile Mech. Seal G - Grease Lubed W - Wear Rings fitted
S - 316 Stainless S - 316 Stainless 3 - 316 Stainless V - Viton Mech Seal M - Motor Pump (Left blank if none fitted)
Z - Zinc Free Bronze Z - Zinc Free Bronze 4 - 431 Stainless E - Empty Pack Gland O - Oil Lubed
N - Ni Resist N- Ni Resist 5 - 316 Cast Stainless P - Packed Gland P - Prepacked
A - ADI A - ADI 6 - SAF2205 H - Hard Faced Seal
M - SGI (Malleable) M - SGI (Malleable) X - Exotic Material S - Single Cartridge Seal
P - Alum Bronze P - Alum Bronze D - Double Cartridge Seal
R - 2RK65 R - 2RK65 X - Special
X - Exotic Material X - Exotic Material
ORDERING PARTS WARRANTY

13K2013A13
100 x 80 - 160 Quote the serial no., model and construction Refer to the separate document for Pentair
150 code from the pump nameplate, followed by Southern Cross warranty policy detailing
the part description. The impeller diameter terms and conditions of warranty. Every
box will be blank, if the pump was a Southern Cross pump is backed by an
MED11C - F CZ5CM supplied with a full diameter impeller. If Australia wide and overseas network of
ordering a replacement impeller specify full service agents. Refer to Southern Cross for
diameter if the box is blank or specify the long term storage instructions.
turndown diameter stamped in the box.
As Southern Cross Policy is one of constant improvement, we reserve the right to make specification changes without notice and without incurring liability.
Distributed by… Form 2176251
Ph: 131 786

e-mail: pacifictpssales@pentair.com
web: www.southerncross.pentair.com
A division of Pentair Flow Control Pacific Pty Ltd
A.B.N. 83 000 922 690
11.3 Yokogawa AXG Series Magnetic Flowmeter

User’s
Manual ADMAG TI Series
AXG Magnetic Flowmeter
HART Communication Type
IM 01E22A02-02EN
IM 01E22A02-02EN
2nd Edition
1
ADMAG TI Series
IM 01E22A02-02EN 2nd Edition
Contents
1. Introduction....................................................................................................5
1.1 For Safe Use of Product....................................................................................... 7
1.2 Warranty................................................................................................................. 8
2. Basic Operating Procedures........................................................................9
2.1 Operation by Display unit.................................................................................... 9
2.2 Display and Basic Configuration........................................................................ 9
2.2.1 Display................................................................................................... 9
2.2.2 Basic Configuration for Display............................................................ 10
2.3 Display Mode and Setting Mode........................................................................ 12
2.4 Parameter Setting from Display Panel............................................................. 13
2.4.1 Setting example of Select type
Data: Flow rate unit.............................................................................. 13
2.4.2 Setting example of Numeric type
Data: Flow rate span............................................................................ 13
2.4.3 Setting Example of Alphanumeric type
Data: Tag No........................................................................................ 14
2.5 microSD Card Insertion/Removal..................................................................... 14
3. Operation with HART Configuration Tool................................................ 15
3.1 Connecting the HART Configuration Tool....................................................... 15
3.2 HART Configuration Tool and Device Revision.............................................. 15
3.2.1 Device Description (DD) and Device Revision.................................... 15
3.2.2 Device Type Manager (DTM) and Device Revision............................ 16
3.3 Basic Setup.......................................................................................................... 16
3.4 Parameters Configuration................................................................................. 16
3.5 Data Renewing and Upload / Download Function.......................................... 17
3.6 Specific Functions of HART Configuration Tool............................................. 19
3.6.1 Burst Mode........................................................................................... 19
3.6.2 Event Notification................................................................................. 21
3.6.3 Multidrop Mode.................................................................................... 22
4. Functions.................................................................................................... 23
4.1 Basic Settings..................................................................................................... 24
4.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 24
4.1.2 PV Mapping of Process Value............................................................. 25
4.1.3 Display of the Process Value............................................................... 25
2nd Edition: Oct. 2017 (KP) IM 01E22A02-02EN

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2
4.1.4 Engineering Unit Setting...................................................................... 25
4.1.5 Span Setting........................................................................................ 26
4.1.6 Damping Time Constant Setting.......................................................... 27
4.1.7 Low-cut Function Setting..................................................................... 28
4.1.8 Sensor’s Nominal Size Setting............................................................ 29
4.1.9 Density Setting..................................................................................... 29
4.1.10 Temperature Setting............................................................................ 30
4.1.11 Zero Adjustment................................................................................... 30
4.2 Totalization Function.......................................................................................... 31
4.2.1 Totalized Value and Unit Setting.......................................................... 31
4.2.2 Totalized-Value Display and Totalizer Function................................... 32
4.2.3 Totalization Switch Function................................................................ 32
4.2.4 Totalizer Operation at Alarm Occurrence............................................. 33
4.2.5 Totalization Function Start/Stop Setting............................................... 33
4.2.6 Totalization Direction Setting............................................................... 34
4.2.7 Totalized Value Reset/Preset Function................................................ 34
4.3 Pulse Output, Frequency Output, and Status Output..................................... 35
4.3.1 Outputs of I/O2, I/O3, and I/O4 Terminals........................................... 35
4.3.2 Pulse Output / Frequency Output Mapping......................................... 35
4.3.3 Pulse Width Setting.............................................................................. 36
4.3.4 Active Direction Setting........................................................................ 36
4.3.5 Pulse Rate Setting............................................................................... 37
4.3.6 Frequency Output Range Setting........................................................ 38
4.3.7 Status Output Function Setting............................................................ 38
4.4 Status Input......................................................................................................... 39
4.4.1 Active Direction Setting for Status Input.............................................. 39
4.4.2 Status Input Function Setting............................................................... 40
4.5 Current Input and Current Output..................................................................... 40
4.5.1 Current Output High/Low Limit Function............................................. 40
4.5.2 Absolute Range Function.................................................................... 41
4.5.3 Alarm Output Function......................................................................... 41
4.5.4 Current Output Priority......................................................................... 42
4.5.5 Current Value Adjustment Function..................................................... 42
4.5.6 Current Input Function Setting............................................................. 43
4.5.7 Current Input Range Setting................................................................ 43
4.5.8 Current Input High/Low Limit Function................................................ 43
4.6 Multi Range Function......................................................................................... 44
4.6.1 Multi Range Types............................................................................... 44
4.6.2 Multi Range Setting.............................................................................. 44
4.6.3 Multi Range Operation......................................................................... 44
4.6.4 Forward/Reverse Range..................................................................... 45
4.6.5 Combination of Multi Range and Forward/Reverse Range................ 46
IM 01E22A02-02EN
3
4.6.6 External Contact Range....................................................................... 47
4.7 Auxiliary Calculation Function.......................................................................... 47
4.7.1 Fluid Flow Direction Setting................................................................. 47
4.7.2 Rate Limit Function Setting.................................................................. 47
4.7.3 Pulsing Flow Support Function Setting ............................................... 49
4.7.4 Power Frequency Synchronization Setting......................................... 49
4.7.5 Density Correction Calculation............................................................ 50
4.7.6 Calorie Calculation............................................................................... 51
4.8 Alarm.................................................................................................................... 52
4.8.1 Errors and Countermeasures.............................................................. 52
4.8.2 Alarm Display Setting........................................................................... 58
4.8.3 Alarm History Function........................................................................ 58
4.8.4 Alarm Mask Function........................................................................... 59
4.9 Display.................................................................................................................. 63
4.9.1 Language Setting................................................................................. 63
4.9.2 Display Item Setting............................................................................. 63
4.9.3 Decimal-Point Position Setting............................................................ 64
4.9.4 Display Line Count and Scroll Settings................................................ 64
4.9.5 Trend Graph Setting............................................................................ 65
4.9.6 Other Setting........................................................................................ 66
4.9.7 microSD Card Setting.......................................................................... 68
4.10 Device Information.............................................................................................. 68
4.10.1 Order Information................................................................................. 68
4.10.2 Device Revision................................................................................... 69
4.10.3 Memo Function.................................................................................... 69
4.11 Self-diagnostic Function.................................................................................... 70
4.11.1 Types of Diagnosis Functions.............................................................. 70
4.11.2 Alarm High/Low Limit Function............................................................ 70
4.11.3 Electrode Adhesion Detection............................................................. 71
4.11.4 Sensor Empty Check........................................................................... 72
4.11.5 Wiring Connection Diagnosis.............................................................. 72
4.11.6 Verification (Device Health Diagnosis) Function................................. 73
4.11.7 Electrode Insulation Deterioration Diagnosis...................................... 75
4.11.8 Flow Noise Diagnosis.......................................................................... 76
4.11.9 Low Conductivity Diagnosis................................................................. 76
4.12 Test Mode............................................................................................................. 77
4.12.1 Test Mode Setting................................................................................ 77
4.12.2 Test Terminal and Value Setting........................................................... 78
4.12.3 Test Mode Auto Reset.......................................................................... 78
4.13 Event Management Function............................................................................. 79
4.13.1 Backup Function.................................................................................. 79
4.13.2 Restore / Duplicate Function............................................................... 81
IM 01E22A02-02EN
4
4.13.3 Backup and Restore Parameters........................................................ 83
4.13.4 Data Logging Function......................................................................... 93
4.14 Software Write Protection Function................................................................. 94
5. Parameters of Magnetic Flowmeter......................................................... 96
5.1 Parameter Lists for Display and HART Communication................................ 97
5.2 Menu Tree of Display........................................................................................ 138
5.3 Menu Tree of HART Communication.............................................................. 144
Revision Information
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 5
1. Introduction
This manual provides the basic guidelines for basic  Precautions Related to the Protection,
operation of ADMAG TI (Total Insight) Series AXG Safety, and Alteration of the Instrument
magnetic flowmeters with HART protocol. The following safety symbol marks are used in this
For the items which are not covered in this manual and instrument.
manual, read the applicable user’s manuals and
general specifications as listed in Table 1.1. These
documents can be downloaded from the website WARNING
of YOKOGAWA. To ensure correct use of the
A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls
instrument, read these manuals thoroughly and fully
attention to procedure, practice, condition or the
understand how to operate the instrument before
like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered
operating it. For method of checking the model and
to, could result in injury or death of personnel.
specifications, read general specifications as listed
in Table 1.1.
Website address: http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/doc/
These manuals can be downloaded from the CAUTION
website of YOKOGAWA or purchased from the
YOKOGAWA representatives. A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls
attention to procedure, practice, condition or the
Table 1.1 Manual and General Specifications List like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered
Model Document Title Document No. to, could result in damage to or destruction of
ADMAG TI Series part or all of the product.
AXG/AXW Magnetic Flowmeter IM 01E21A21-01Z1
Read Me First
ADMAG TI Series
AXG/AXW Magnetic Flowmeter
Safety Manual
IM 01E21A21-02EN IMPORTANT
ADMAG TI Series
AXG Magnetic Flowmeter IM 01E22A01-01EN An IMPORTANT sign denotes that attention is
Installation Manual required to avoid damage to the instrument or
AXG ADMAG TI Series system failure.
AXG4A AXG Magnetic Flowmeter IM 01E22A01-02EN
AX01C Maintenance Manual
ADMAG TI Series
BRAIN Communication Type
IM 01E22A02-01EN
NOTE
ADMAG TI Series
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(this manual)
A NOTE sign denotes information necessary
for essential understanding of operation and
ADMAG TI Series
AXG Magnetic Flowmeter GS 01E22A01-01EN features.
General Specifications
AXF Series
Magnetic Flowmeter IM 01E20A21-01Z1
Read Me First
AXFA11G Remote Converter
AXFA11G
[Hardware Edition/Software IM 01E20C01-01E
Edition]
AXFA11G Remote Converter
GS 01E20C01-01E
General Specifications
NOTE
When describing the model name like AXG
in this manual, “” means any of the
following.
002, 005, 010, 015, 025, 032, 040, 050, 065,
080, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 6
The following symbols are used in the Instrument  Regarding This User’s Manual
and the manual to indicate the accompanying
safety precautions: • This manual should be provided to the end
user.
Protective grounding terminal
• The contents of this manual are subject to
Functional grounding terminal (This terminal should change without prior notice.
not be used as a protective grounding terminal.)
Alternating current
• All rights reserved. No part of this manual
Direct current may be reproduced in any form without
Caution YOKOGAWA’s written permission.
This symbol indicates that the operator must refer to • YOKOGAWA makes no warranty of any kind
an explanation in the user’s manual in order to avoid
the risk of injury or death of personnel or damage to with regard to this manual, including, but not
the instrument. limited to, implied warranty of merchantability
For the protection and safe use of the instrument and fitness for a particular purpose.
and the system in which this instrument is • If any question arises or errors are found, or if
incorporated, be sure to follow the instructions any information is missing from this manual,
and precautions on safety that is stated in user’s inform the nearest YOKOGAWA sales office.
manual as listed in Table 1.1 whenever you handle • The specifications covered by this manual are
the instrument. Take special note that if you handle limited to those for the standard type under the
the instrument in a manner that violated these specified model number break-down and do not
instructions, the protection functionality of the cover custom-made instruments.
instrument may be damaged or impaired. In such • Note that changes in the specifications,
cases, YOKOGAWA does not guarantee the quality, construction, or component parts of the
performance, function, and safety of instrument. instrument may not immediately be reflected
in this manual at the time of change, provided
that postponement of revisions will not cause
difficulty to the user from a functional or
performance standpoint.
• This manual is intended for the following
personnel;
Engineers responsible for installation and wiring
of the instrument.
Personnel responsible for normal daily
operation of the instrument.
• To ensure correct use, read this manual and
the applicable manuals as listed in Table 1.1
thoroughly before starting operation. Read the
general specifications as listed in Table 1.1 for
its specification.
 Trademarks:
• All the brands or names of Yokogawa Electric’s
products used in this manual are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• All other company and product names
mentioned in this manual are trade names,
trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
• In this manual, trademarks or registered
trademarks are not marked with ™ or ®.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 7
1.1 For Safe Use of Product (3) Maintenance
For the protection and safe use of the instrument
and the system in which this instrument is
WARNING
incorporated, be sure to follow the instructions • If dirt, dust or other substances surfaces on
and precautions on safety that is stated in user’s the glass of display cover, wipe them clean
manual as listed in Table 1.1 whenever you handle with a soft dry cloth.
the instrument. Take special note that if you handle • Maintenance of this flowmeter should be
the instrument in a manner that violated these implemented in a maintenance service shop
instructions, the protection functionality of the where the necessity tools and environment
instrument may be damaged or impaired. In such condition are provided.
cases, YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any The necessity of this environmental condition
indirect or consequential loss incurred by either is that ambient temperature is 5 to 40°C (the
using or not being able to use the Instrument. maximum relative humidity is 80 % for tem-
(1) General perature 5 to 31°C, and decreasing linearly to
50 % relative humidity at 40°C).
WARNING
• Do not open the cover in wet weather or (4) microSD Card
humid environment. When the cover is open,
IMPORTANT
stated enclosure protection is not applicable.
• When opening the cover, wait for more than • Do not store or use the microSD card in places
20 minutes after turning off the power. Only with static electricity, near electrically charged
expert engineer or skilled personnel are per- objects, or where electrical noise is present.
mitted to open the cover. Doing so can result in shock or damage.
• Do not disassemble or modify the microSD
card.
(2) Operation
• Do not physically shock, bend, or pinch the
microSD card.
WARNING • During reading/writing of data, do not turn off the
power, apply vibration or shock, or pull out the
Be sure to enable the write protect function
card. Data can corrupt or be permanently lost.
to prevent the overwriting of parameters after
• Use only micro SD cards sold by YOKOGA-
finishing parameter setting.
WA. Operation cannot be guaranteed when
In rare cases, the IR switches may respond
other cards are used.
unexpectedly to water drops or extraneous
• When inserting the microSD card into the
substances sticking on the surface of display
instrument, make sure to orient the microSD
panel, due to the operating principal. The
card correctly (face up or down) and insert it
possibility of malfunction arises after rain or
securely. If not inserted correctly, the microSD
cleaning operation near the place where the
card will not be recognized by the instrument.
flowmeter is installed. Turning on and off the
• Do not touch the microSD card with wet
flashlight etc. towards the IR switch may also be
hands.
a cause of malfunction.
• Do not use the microSD card if it is dusty or
Read the installation manual as listed in Table
dirty.
1.1 for the hardware write protect function,
• The microSD card comes formatted. If you
and Section 4.14 for the software write protect
want to format the microSD card, use the
function.
instrument’s Format function.
• YOKOGAWA provides no warranty for dam-
age to, or loss of data recorded on the mi-
croSD card, regardless of the cause of such
damage or loss.
We recommend making backup copies of your
data.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 8
1.2 Warranty
• The warranty shall cover the period noted on
the quotation presented to the purchaser at the
time of purchase. Problems occurred during the
warranty period shall basically be repaired free
of charge.
• In case of problems, the customer should
contact the YOKOGAWA representative from
which the instrument was purchased, or the
nearest YOKOGAWA office.
• If a problem arises with this instrument,
please inform us of the nature of the problem
and the circumstances under which it
developed, including the model specification
and serial number. Any diagrams, data and
other information you can include in your
communication will also be helpful.
• Responsible party for repair cost for the
problems shall be determined by YOKOGAWA
based on our investigation.
• The Purchaser shall bear the responsibility for
repair costs, even during the warranty period, if
the malfunction is due to:
- Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by
the purchaser.
- Failure or damage due to improper handling,
use or storage which is out of design
conditions.
- Use of the product in question in a location
not conforming to the standards specified
by YOKOGAWA, or due to improper
maintenance of the installation location.
- Failure or damage due to modification or
repair by any party except YOKOGAWA or
an approved representative of YOKOGAWA.
- Malfunction or damage from improper
relocation of the product in question after
delivery.
- Reason of force majeure such as fires,
earthquakes, storms/floods, thunder/
lightening, or other natural disasters, or
disturbances, riots, warfare, or radioactive
contamination.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<2. Basic Operating Procedures> 9
2. Basic Operating Procedures

2.1 Operation by Display unit
NOTE
The parameter settings from display unit can be
carried out using the three IR (infra-red) switches - • Always keep the cover closed and operate the
namely, the [SET] [SHIFT] and [▼] switches. The IR setting switches from the outside of the glass
switches enable the user to set parameters from the window.
outside of the glass of the display cover. • If dirt, dust or other substances surfaces on
This section provides descriptions of basic the glass of display cover, wipe them clean
parameter configuration and operation procesures with a soft dry cloth.
of IR switches. This instrument can be also • The operation with dirty gloves may cause a
operated using the dedicated handheld terminal switch response error.
or the FieldMate (Versatile Device Management
Wizard). For operation in details, read Chapter 4 or
the hardware/software edition (for AXFA11) as listed NOTE
in Table 1.1.
The language on the display is set to “English”
as default at the factory shipment. Select the
WARNING adequate language referring to Subsection 2.2.2
and Subsection 4.9.1. The menu pass of the
Be sure to enable the write protect function display on this manual is selected to “English”.
to prevent the overwriting of parameters after
finishing parameter setting.
In rare cases, the IR switches may respond
unexpectedly to water drops or extraneous
2.2 Display and Basic
substances sticking on the surface of display Configuration
panel, due to the operating principal. The The display unit of AXG Integral Flowmeter and
possibility of malfunction arises after rain or AXG4A Remote transmitter has various functions
cleaning operation near the place where the below.
flowmeter is installed. Turning on and off the
flashlight etc. towards the IR switch may also be a 2.2.1 Display
cause of malfunction.
microSD card
Read the installation manual as listed in Table (Optional code: /MC)
1.1 for the hardware write protect function,
and Section 4.14 for the software write protect 00 : 00 Status icon and time
function. 0.00000m/s VEL

Data display
0.0% FLP
(Abbreviation: see Table 2.2.1)
22.000mA A01
SET SFT INC Switch On/Off status
(On: inverted)
IMPORTANT IR switches
Operate the display unit under the condition F0201.ai
where direct sunlight, etc... do not shine to the

IR switches directly when the parameter setting
operation is carried out.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(1) Basic operation of IR switches (3) Data indication part
The operation from display panel is done by using The process values are available to select 8 items
the three IR switches; [SET], [SHIFT] and [▼]. The maximum on the display. It is possible to indicate
combination of the two switches provides a different 4 items maximum on the display at the same time,
function, and the function is indicated on the display. and the rest 4 items are able to show by scrolling.
Indicate
IR switch
of switch Function Table 2.2.1 Abbreviation table of process values to be
(Note 1) indicated on the display.
(Note 2)
▪ Apply parameter (Note 3) Abbreviation Contents
[SET►] SET ▪ Enter data (Note 3)
FLP(*1) Flow rate %
▪ Move to next menu
PRV(*1) Process value
▪ Move cursor right
[SHIFT] SFT VEL(*1) Flow velocity
(Numeric type parameter)
▪ Move cursor down VFL(*1) Volumetric flow
(Select type parameter) MFL(*1) Mass flow
▪ Increment value FLB Flow rate in % bar graph
[▼] INC
(Numeric type parameter) CAL(*1) Calorie
▪ Change position of decimal point
TL1(*1) Totalization value 1
(Numeric type parameter)
TL2(*1) Totalization value 2
▪ Move cursor up
[SHIFT] + [▼] (Select type parameter) TL3(*1) Totalization value 3
DEC TAG Tag No.
(=[▲]) ▪ Decrement value
(Numeric type parameter) LTG Long Tag
SHIFT + SET► ▪ Cancel COM Communication protocol
ESC
(=[ESC◄]) ▪ Back to previous menu ADH Adhesion diagnostic Level (Alarm at Level 4)
Note 1: [A] + [B] (=[C]): The function is changed to switch [C] AO1(*1) Analog output value 1
when switch [B] is pushed while pushing switch [A]. AO2(*1) Analog output value 2
Note 2: [SET], [SFT], [INC], [DEC] and [ESC] indicate the FNL Flow Noise Level (Alarm at Level 4)
assigned function in accordance with display mode at
that time. *1: Available to display the online trend graph.
Note 3: “Apply” and “Enter” are executed by pushing [SET]
twice. If the execution does not work properly, release
the finger from the display glass completely after the first 2.2.2 Basic Configuration for Display
push of [SET], and then make the second push.
For paramter setting from display panel,
(2) Status icons
configurable parameters differ by the three
Icon Contents Icon Contents operational levels specfied in Table 2.2.2, and a
Write protect Invalid Write protect Valid passcode is needed to enter into Setting mode.
Device Busy Device Fault No passcode requires for “Operator”, and a
Ready for microSD Accessing microSD passcode corresponding to each level requires for
card card “Maintenance” or “Specialist”.
Disable to access
microSD card
Uploading parameters For parameter in details, read Section 4.9.
Downloading
Trend graph executing Table 2.2.2 Parameter setting from display panel and
parameters
operation level
System alarm occurs HART communication
Operation Reading
Writing parameters
Level parameters
Process alarm occurs Setting alarm occurs
Operator All parameters Parameters related with basic display
settings including display language.
Warning occurs Information occurs
Maintenance All parameters Parameters allowed for Operator level.
Operation level: Parameters related with Zero adjustment.
Display Damping Valid
Operator Specialist All parameters All Parameters
Operation level: Operation level:
Maintenance Specialist
The following parameters are available to
“Operator” level without passcode.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(1) Display Language Setting Table 2.2.3 Display line setting and display example
Lines of
Display Menu Path: Example 1 Example 2
display
Device setup ► Language
00 : 00 00 : 00
The language on the display is set to “English” as VEL FNL
default at the factory shipment. Select the adequate

1 line(big)
0.50000
language. SET SFT INC
F0202.ai
SET SFT INC
F0207.ai
The selectable display language is different by * ‌Flow noise status is displayed.

(Status label is not displayed.)
the model and suffix code (display code) specified 00 : 00 00 : 00
0.50000
VEL FNL
when ordering.
Position of the display code: 1 line m/s Normal
SET SFT INC SET SFT INC
Integral type: F0203.ai F0208.ai
AXG-- * ‌Flow noise status and status

label are displayed.
 00 : 00 00 : 00
Remote transmitter: 0.5000m/s VEL

Normal
FNL
50.0% Long tag 1234567

FLP LTG
AXG4A- 2 line 89ABCDEFGabcdefg

SET SFT INC SET SFT INC
Display code Selectable display language F0204.ai F0209.ai
1 English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, * Indicate 32 characters of the
Portuguese, Japanese, or Russian Long Tag.
00 : 00 00 : 00
2 English or Chinese
0.50000 m/s VEL
Normal
FNL
50.0% FLP
AO1
Long tag 1234567... LTG
TAG
12.00SFT TAG12345
(2) Display Contrast Setting (shading) SET
mA
INC SET SFT INC
F0205.ai F0210.ai
3 line
Display Menu Path: * Indicate 32 characters of the
Device setup►Detailed setup►Display set►Optional config►Contrast Long Tag in the first line.
* Indicate 16 characters in the
Available to change the contrast of the display. first half of 32 characters of the
Long Tag in the second and
third lines.
Setting item Contents
0.50000m/s 00 : 00
Normal
00 : 00
-5 to +5 Set the contrast of the display VEL FNL

50.0% FLP
Long tag 1234567...
LTG
(The value is small: Low, and the value is big: High)
12.000mA
AO1 TAG
FNL TAG12345
Normal
4 line SET SFT INC SET SFT INC
F0206.ai F0211.ai
(3) Display Line Setting * Indicate 16 characters in the
first half of 32 characters of the
Display Menu Path: Long Tag only
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ►
Line mode
Available to select the number of lines of process (4) Date Display Formant Setting
value to be indicated on the display. Display Menu Path:
Up to four lines can be displayed at the same time. Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ►
Format date
The character size changes depending on the
The date display format can be specified below.
number of line.
Setting item Contents MM/DD/YYYY Displays the date in "month/day/year".
1 line(big) Number of displayable process value : One (without DD/MM/YYYY Displays the date in "day/month/year".
unit) YYYY/MM/DD Displays the date in "year/month/day".
1 line Number of displayable process value : One (with unit)
2 line Number of displayable process values : Two The date needs to be set every time when the
3 line Number of displayable process values : Three power is turned on.
4 line Number of displayable process values : Four
In case the date is not set:
• HART communication: Date counting starts
from 1900/01/01 00:00:00, according to HART
specification.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(5) Inverse Display Setting [Passcode Confirmation and Change]
Display Menu Path:
The confirmation and change of the passcode are
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► allowed only by parameter setting from the display
Inversion
unit.
Available to change from normal diplay to white/ Display Menu Path:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Access cfg ► Chg mainte
black reverse display.
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Access cfg ► Chg special
Normal Characters in the display is Black. (1) Passcode for “Maintenance” operation level
Inverse Outline characters To change the passcode (Maintenance code),
“Maintenance” or “Specialist” as the operational
level is required.
2.3 Display Mode and Setting
(2) Passcode for “Specialist” operation level
Mode To change the passcode (Specialist code),
The device runs in the Display Mode when the “Maintenance” or “Specialist” as the operational
power is turned on. For check or change of level is required.
parameters, the Setting Mode must be activated.
The following procesure explains how to change to
the Setting Mode. For the function of IR switches,
IMPORTANT
read Subsection 2.2.1. Display Menu Path:
Device setup ► Wizard
[Procedure] When parameters are changed in the Wizard of
1) Turn on the power and wait for several seconds Easy setup, “Setting download” in the menu of
to move to display mode. each parameter must be executed after parameter
00 : 00
is changed. Without the execution, any parameter
0.00000l/min
PRV
0.00000m/s VEL
changed is not stored into the device.
FLB
SET SFT INC
F0212.ai
2) K
eep touching [SET] switch for two seconds. NOTE
The screen moves to the menu of Operation
Level. If 10 minutes past without operation in the Setting
Operation level
00 : 00
Mode, the screen goes back to the Display Mode.
▲Maintenance
Specialist
▼Exit
SET SFT INC
F0213.ai
Parameter form
3) Select an appropreate operation level by There are three types of parameter form below.
moving the cursor with [INC] or [DEC] switch. Type
Select type
Example of display
00 : 00
Contents
Select the adequate data
Passcode is not necessary for “Operator”. For Unit
from among alternatives
m3
“Maintenance” and “Specialist”, passcode is ▲l(liter) which are detemined in
cm3 advance.
necessary for each.
▼
SET SFT INC

F0215.ai
For passcode setting, [SFT] is for position Numeric type 00 : 00 Specify the data with a
Span
change, and [INC] is for number, then twice +7200.00
combination of number and a
[SET] is for entry completion. +2200.00 decimal point into each digit.
+0.00001 +999999
The default passcode at the factory shipment is SET SFT INC
F0216.ai
set to “0000”. Alphanumeric 00 : 00 Configure the data with a
Tag No
00 : 00 type combination of alphanumeric
Pass code FT-1234
**** FT-1234 characters. (Tag No., Special
0000 SET SFT INC
unit, etc…)
0000 9999 F0217.ai
SET SFT INC
F0214.ai
4) W
hen the Operation Level is determined, the The alphanumeric type indicates alphanumeric
screen moves to “Device setup” as the Setting characters in the following order.
Mode where parameters can be configured. 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstu
vwxyz!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~"space"
5) After completing parameter setting, push [ESC]
switch. The screen returns to the Display Mode.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
2.4 Parameter Setting from
NOTE
Display Panel
Be sure to set the Flow rate unit in the beginning
This section explains how to specify the parameters
when the Flow rate unit and Flow span value are
from display panel. Select “Specialist” at the
changed at the same time.
Operation Level referring to Section 2.3. And select
When the unit is changed, the value of flow rate
the parameters to be specified in the Setting Mode.
span is converted to related values automatically
according to the unit change.
NOTE
For the device with the ordering information 2.4.2 Setting example of Numeric type
specified at ordering, the specified parameters Data: Flow rate span
(flow span and unit, tag number, etc.) are stored The following is the procedure of changing the Flow
in the device at the factory shipment. Without the rate span as Numeric type parameter.
ordering information specified, parameter setting Display Menu Path:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Volume ► Span
needs to be done by user.
2.4.1 Setting example of Select type NOTE

Data: Flow rate unit
Be sure to set the Flow rate unit in the beginning
The following is the procedure of changing the flow when the Flow rate unit and Flow span value are
rate unit as Select type parameter. changed at the same time.
The flow rate unit needs to be specified with When the unit is changed, the value of flow rate
“Physical unit” and “Time unit” individually. When span is converted to related values automatically
the flow rate unit needs to be set “l/min”, select “l according to the unit change.
(litter)” at the Physical unit and “/min” at the Time
unit.
00 : 00 Specify the Flow rate span unit.
Display Menu Path: Volume Move cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Volume ► Unit ▲Time unit /h
Span +7200.00 to the menu path above, and select the
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Volume ► Time Unit
▼Setting download “Span” then push [SET].
SET SFT INC
00 : 00 Specify the Physical unit for volumetric flow. F0223.ai
Volume Move cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according
▲Damp pls/ttl 00 : 00 The switch's functionality of setting the Flow
Unit to the menu path above, and select the “unit” Span rate span is as below:
Time unit then push [SET]. +7200.00
▼
SET SFT INC +2200.00 Plus/minus and mumeric change: [INC]

F0218.ai +0.00001 +999999 Movement on digits: [SFT]
SET SFT INC
Determination of parameter: [SET]
00 : 00 Move cursor with [INC] and [DEC], and F0224.ai
Unit L : Minimum value
select the “l(liter)” then push [SET]. As the
m3 U : Maximum value
l(liter) selected unit is blinking, push [SET] to
▲
Push [SET] to decide while the value of Flow
cm3 determin. The screen returns to the setting
rate span is blinking. The screen returns to
▼
SET SFT INC

page.
F0219.ai the setting page after the setting.
00 : 00 Specify the Time unit for volumetric flow.
Volume Move cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according
▲Unit
Time unit to the menu path above, and select the “Time
▼Span unit” then push [SET].
SET SFT INC
F0220.ai
00 : 00 Move cursor with [INC] and [DEC], and

Time unit select the “/min” then push [SET]. As the
▲
/s
/min selected unit is blinking, push [SET] to
▼ /h determin. The screen returns to the setting
SET SFT INC
page after the setting.
F0221.ai
00 : 00 After completing the parameter setting, push
0.00000l/min
PRV
[ESC] then the screen returns to the Display
0.00000m/s VEL
Mode.
FLB
SET SFT INC
F0222.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
2.4.3 Setting Example of Alphanumeric type 2.5 microSD Card Insertion/
Data: Tag No.
Removal
The following is the procedure of changing the Tag
For the device with optional code MC, by setting the
No. as Alphanumeric type parameter.
Display Menu Path:
dedicated microSD card into the slot on the display
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Order info ► Tag No. unit, the parameter setting can be stored into it. The
00 : 00 Specify the Tag No.. stored data can be restored to the device. For the
Device info
▲Date/Time ►
Move cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according detailed function, read Chapter 4.
Order info ►
to the menu path above, and select the
▼Ver/Num info ► “Order info” then push [SET].
SET SFT INC
WARNING
F0225.ai
00 : 00 For Tag No., up to 8 characters can be

Tag No entered from display panel.
FT-1234
FT-1234 The switch's functionality of setting the Flow Use only micro SD cards sold by YOKOGAWA.
rate span is as below:
SET SFT INC
Plus/minus and mumeric change: [INC]
Operation cannot be guaranteed when other
F0226.ai
Movement on digits: [SFT] cards are used.
Determination of parameter: [SET]
Available characters: ASCII characters
Push [SET] to decide while the value of Tag
No. is blinking. The screen returns to the (1) microSD Card Insertion
setting page after the setting. Carefully insert the dedicated microSD card into the
slot on the display unit until the slot holds the card.
(see Figure 2.5).
microSD card
00 : 00
0.00000m/s VEL
0.0% FLP
22.000mA AO1
SET SFT INC
F0227.ai
Figure 2.5 microSD Card Insertion
(2) microSD Card Removal

The microSD is removed from the slot by pushing it.
To prevent from losing the microSD card, be careful
to handle the card.
IMPORTANT
If the microSD card is removed without execution
of “Unmount” on parameter setting, it may result in
the corruption of stored data and the abnormal
operation of device.
Display Menu Path:

Device setup►microSD►Unmount
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<3. Operation with HART Configuration Tool> 15
3. Operation with HART Configuration

Tool
This chapter describes the connection of this
instrument and HART configuration tool (FieldMate IMPORTANT
(Versatile Device Management Wizard)), and the
Communication signal is superimposed on analog
operation using HART configuration tool.
output signal. It is recommended to set a low-pass
Read the user’s manual of FieldMate (IM
filter (approximately 0.1s) to the receiver in order
01R01A01-01E) for details about the FieldMate.
to reduce the output effect from communication
NOTE signal. Before online-communication, confirm that
communication signal does not give effect on the
• For more details regarding the operations of upper system.
the HART configuration tool, read the manual
of HART configuration tool.
• When using FieldMate, be sure that the
revision is R3.02.00 or later.
3.2 HART Configuration Tool
and Device Revision
NOTE IMPORTANT
Perameters on HART configuration tool are Protocol revision supported by HART
displayed in English only. Even if any language configuration tool must be the same protocol
other than English is selected as “display revision or later than that of the device. If it is not,
language” from display panel, parameters are communication error occurs.
displayed in English on HART configuration tool.
3.2.1 Device Description (DD) and Device
Revision
3.1 Connecting the HART Before using the HART configuration tool, confirm
Configuration Tool that the DD (Device Description) of this device is
installed in the configuration tool.
The HART configuration tool can interface with
If correct DD is not installed to the configuration
this device from the control room, this device site,
tool, install a correct DD from the HART official site,
or any other wiring termination point in the loop,
otherwise, contact the respective vendors of the
provided there is a minimum load resistance of
configuration tool for its upgrade information.
230 Ω between the connection and the receiving
The device revision is as follows.
instrument. To communicate, it must be connected
DD Revision 1 or later
in parallel with this device, and the connections Device Type AXG4A (0x371A)
must be non-polarized. Device Revision 1
See Figure 3.1.
Control Room
Relaying
4 to 20 mA DC
Signal • Confirmation of DD revision
Terminal
Transmission Line Distributor
Iout+
Terminals Board (a) Turn on the power of the configuration tool
Iout-
under the standalone condition.
Magnetic Flowmeter (b) Confirm the device revision from the installed
Terminal Box Load
USB Resistance DD file name according to the procedure
FieldMate 230 to 600 Ω
Modem provided for the configuration tool.
USB
DD file name is four digits, upper two digits are
device revision and lower two digits are DD
PC/FieldMate
F0301.ai revision.
Figure 3.1 Connecting the HART Configuration Tool
NOTE
Device revision of DD file is given in hexadecimal.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
• Confirmation of Device revision • Change of the tag number and device
Connect the configurator to this device and confirm information
the revision by the following parameter. Enter the information within the following limit
HART Communication Menu Path: number of characters.
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Device information ► HART setup ► Fld dev rev Item Limit number of characters
Tag Up to 8 characters or numbers*1
Long Tag Up to 32 characters or numbers*2
3.2.2 Device Type Manager (DTM) and Descriptor Up to 16 characters or numbers*1
Device Revision Message Up to 32 characters or numbers*1
mm/dd/yyyy (DD)
When configure the parameters using FieldMate, yyyy/mm/dd (DTM)
Date - mm: month (2 digits)
use the DTM (Device Type Manager) reading the - dd: days (2 digits)
following table. - yyyy: years (4 digits)
DTM Name AXG HART 7 DTM
*1: Symbols, characters and numbers enclosed by a thick line
DTM Revision 5.6.4.0 or later * in the following table are available.
Device Type AXG4A (0x371A) *2: All symbols, characters and numbers in the following table
Device Revision 1 are available.
* : The DTM is included in Yokogawa DTM Library HART 6.5

SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
or later.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
NOTE @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
The DTM revision can be confirmed by “DTM ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
setup”. Device Files is a Media included in p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
FieldMate. The user registration site provides
*: "SP" means a space.
Device Files with the latest update programs.
(URL: https://voc.yokogawa.co.jp/PMK/)
In case update, following operation by “DTM 3.4 Parameters Configuration
setup” is required. The parameter structure of the HART configuration
• Update DTM catalog tool is hierarchical.
• Assign corresponding DTM to the device. For menu tree and parameter in details, read
For details, read the user’s manual of FieldMate. Chapter 4 and Chapter 5.
Note that some display parameters are different
from those of HART configuration tools.
3.3 Basic Setup
CAUTION
If the dedicated parameters are specified at the
time of ordering, this instrument is shipped with the Note that parameter setting by the display unit is
tag number or device information configured. not available in the middle of communicating with
The tag number and device information can be HART configuration tool.
checked as follows.
• Menu path of the tag number and device

information
Item HART Communication Menu Path
Device root menu
►Detailed setup
Tag,
►Device information
Long tag
►Order information
►Tag, Long tag
Device root menu
Descriptor, ►Detailed setup
Message, ►Device information
Date ►HART setup
►Descriptor, Message, Date
IM 01E22A02-02EN
3.5 Data Renewing and Upload /
Download Function
(1) Data Renewing
The data is automatically updated at 0.5 to 2
second cycles.
(2) Upload / Download Function

The upload function is used for copying the
parameters of the instrument to a HART
configuration tool. The download function is used
for setting the copied parameters in the HART
configuration tool into other instrument. The
applicable parameters are the followings included in
"Upload variables".
HART Communication Menu Path:

Upload variables►(see below)
Tag Total2 fail opts Basic model code Watchdog reset executed
Long tag Total2 options Suffix config 1 Voltage conditions out of range
Environmental conditions out
Descriptor Total2 Start/Stop Suffix config 2
of range
Message Total2 preset value Option 1 Electronic failure
Date Total2 set point Option 2 Device Configuration Locked
Final asmbly num Total3 unit Option 3 Status Simulation Active
Discrete Variables Simulation
Distributor Total3 conv factor Option 4
Active
Remote sensor basic model
Model Total3 low cut Event Notification Overflow
code
Secondary Analog Channel
Dev id Total3 fail opts Remote sensor suffix config 1
Saturated
Tertiary Analog Channel
Poll addr Total3 options Remote sensor suffix config 2
Saturated
Quaternary Analog Channel
PV is Total3 Start/Stop Remote sensor option 1
Saturated
Quinary Analog Channel
SV is Total3 preset value Remote sensor option 2
Saturated
TV is Total3 set point Remote sensor option 3 Subdevice list changed
QV is Pulse1 output mode Remote sensor option 4 Duplicate master detected
Field device has malfunctioned
Secondary Analog Channel
Alarm record mask 1 Frequency1 at 100% due to a hardware error or
Fixed
failure
Alarm record mask 2 Status output1 function 10:Main board CPU failure Tertiary Analog Channel Fixed
Quaternary Analog Channel
Alarm record mask 3 Loop current mode 11:Reverse calculation failure
Fixed
Alarm out mask 1 AO1 low cut*1 12:Main board EEPROM failure Quinary Analog Channel Fixed
13:Main board EEPROM 67:Pulse output 1 configuration
Alarm out mask 2 AO1 high limit
default error
68:Pulse output 2 configuration
Alarm out mask 3 AO1 low limit 14:Sensor board failure
error
69:Nominal size configuration
Alarm out mask 4 AO1 alarm out 15:Sensor communication error
error
Low alarm*1 AO1 range mode 16:A/D1 failure[Signal] 70:Adhesion configuration error
71:Flow noise configuration
Low low alarm*1 Forward span 2*1 17:A/D2 failure[Exciter]
error
*1: This parameter cannot be displayed with FDT2.0 DTM. Possible with HART built-in DTM.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Upload variables►(see below)
High alarm*1 Reverse_span 1*1 18:Coil open 80:Analog output 1 saturated
High high alarm*1 Auto range hyst 19:Coil short 81:Analog output 2 saturated
Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis Bi direction hyst 20:Exciter failure 82:Pulse output 1 saturated
PV flow select Flow direction 21:PWM1 stop 83:Pulse output 2 saturated
Velocity check Display select1 22:PWM2 stop 84:Analog input saturated
Velocity unit Display select2 23:Option board mismatch 85:Cable misconnect
24:Option board EEPROM
Velocity span Display select3 86:Coil insulation warning
failure
Velocity damping AO/frequency Display select4 25:Option board A/D failure 131:Transmitter type mismatch
Velocity damping pulse/total Display select5 26:Option board SPI failure 87:Adhesion over level 3
27:Parameter restore
Time unit Display select6 88:Low conductivity warning
incomplete
Volume flow unit Display select7 28:Indicator board failure 89:Insulation detection
29:Indicator board EEPROM
Volume flow span Display select8 90:Flow noise over level 3
failure
Volume flow damping AO/
Trend select 1 30:LCD driver failure 91:Flow noise over level 4
frequency
Volume flow damping pulse/
Trend select 2 31:Indicator board mismatch 92:Autozero warning
total
32:Indicator communication
Mass flow unit Trend select 3 93:Verification warning
error
Mass flow span Trend select 4 33:microSD failure 94:Factory noise warning
Mass flow damping AO/
Display format PV 50:Signal overflow 95:Simulation active
frequency
Mass flow damping pulse/total Display format total 1 51:Empty pipe detection 96:Analog output 1 fixed
Density unit Display format total 2 52:H/L or HH/LL alarm 97:Analog output 2 fixed
Density fixed value Display format total 3 53:Adhesion over level 4 98:Pulse output 1 fixed
Nominal size unit Display contrast 60:Span configuration error 99:Pulse output 2 fixed
62:Analog output 1 4-20 mA
Nominal size Display line 100:Analog input fixed
limit error
63:Analog output 2 4-20 mA
User span select AO1 Display period 101:Parameter restore running
limit error
64:Analog output 1 multi range
User unit AO1 Display NE107 102:Display over warning
error
65:H/L HH/LL configuration
User span AO1 Display alarm 103:microSD size warning
error
104:Parameter backup
Total1 unit Display scroll 66:Density configuration error
incomplete
Total1 conv factor Display damping Maintenance required 105:microSD card mismatch
106:microSD card removal
Total1 low cut*1 Display formate date Device variable alert
procedure error
Total1 fail opts Display inversion Critical Power Failure 120:Watchdog
Total1 options Language Failure 121:Power off
Total1 Start/Stop Display measure mode Out of Specification 122:Instant power failure
Total1 preset value Display installation Function Check 123:Parameter backup running
Total1 set point Diagnostic output Simulation Active 124:Data logging running
Total2 unit VF mode Non-Volatile Memory failure 130:Device ID not entered
Total2 conv factor VF No Volatile Memory error
Total2 low cut Electrode size 72:Data logging not started
*1: This parameter cannot be displayed with FDT2.0 DTM. Possible with HART built-in DTM.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
3.6 Specific Functions of HART
Configuration Tool
3.6.1 Burst Mode
(1) Applicable Parameter of Burst Mode
When the Burst Mode is enabled, the instrument
continuously sends up to three data via HART
communication. Also it is possible to send alarm
signal continuously when change in parameter
setting or self diagnosis is detected.
NOTE
When changing the setting of Burst Mode, set
“Off” to the Burst mode. Default setting is “Off”.
Burst Message Trigger

Command Parameter Burst Command Burst Trigger Source Burst Trigger Units
Mode
Continuous --- ---
Window
PV Cmd1: PV Rising Depend on the assigned
PV
Falling variable to PV
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window
Loop Current and Percent
Cmd2: % range/current Rising
Range % range %
Falling
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window
PV, SV, TV, QV Cmd3: Dyn vars/current Rising Depend on the assigned
PV
Falling variable to PV
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window
Device Variable with Cmd9: Device vars w/ Process variable assigned Depend on the assigned
Rising
status status to the top of Burst Device variable to Burst Device
Falling Variables Variables
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window
Device Variable Cmd33: Device variables Rising Process variable assigned Depend on the assigned
to the top of Burst Device variable to Burst Device
Falling Variables Variables
On-change
Cmd48: Read Additional Continuous --- ---
Additional Device Status
Device Status On-change All status ---
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(2) Burst Mode Setting (3) Burst Command Setting
The Burst Mode can be specified in the Easy Burst Select the transmission data from the Burst
Mode or the Detailed Burst Mode. Command.
Burst Command Command Parameter
• Setting of Easy Burst Mode Cmd1:PV PV
The Easy Burst Mode can send one Burst Cmd2:% range/
Loop Current and Percent Range
current
Command continuously. The Easy Burst Mode can
Cmd3:Dyn vars/
be configured with the following parameter. PV, SV, TV, QV
current
Cmd9: Device vars
Device Variable with status
HART Communication Menu Path: w/ status
Cmd33:Device
Device root menu►Detailed setup► Variables
Device Variable
Device information►HART setup► Cmd48:Read
Burst setup►Easy burst setup►(see below) Additional Device Additional Device Status
Status
set Easy Burst Specify Easy Burst Mode.
(BM0: Burst Message 0)
(4) Burst Device Variables Setting
When "Cmd9: Device vars w/ status" or
NOTE "Cmd33:Device Variables" is selected as Burst
Command, it is required to specify the Burst Device
When the Easy Burst Mode is used, the Event Variables which up to eight values can be specified
Notification can not be used. for.
Dev Var Burst Device Dev Var Burst Device
Code Variables Code Variables
• Setting of Detailed Burst Mode 0 Velocity 4 Totalizer 2
The Detailed Burst Mode can send up to three Burst 1 Volume flow 5 Totalizer 3
Commands continuously under various conditions. 2 Mass flow 6 Flow noise
The Detailed Burst Mode can be configured with the 3 Totalizer1 7 Calorific value
following parameter.
(5) Update Period/Max Update Period
HART Communication Menu Path: Setting
Device root menu►Detailed setup► Specify the Update Period/Max Update Period
Device information►HART setup► which is the update period of Burst Message
Burst setup►Detailed burst setup►(see below) Trigger Mode.
BM1 Setting► Specify Detailed Burst Mode. The Burst Trigger Source is checked with a period
set Detailed Burst (BM1: Burst Message 1) of Update Period, and if it fulfills the condition of
BM2 Setting► Specify Detailed Burst Mode. Burst Message Trigger Mode, the data is updated.
set Detailed Burst (BM2: Burst Message 2)
When it does not fulfill the condition of the Trigger
BM3 Setting► Specify Detailed Burst Mode.
set Detailed Burst (BM3: Burst Message 3)
Mode with a period of Update Period and reaches
the Max Update Period, the data is updated forcibly.
In accordance with the method, specify the The Update Period/Max Update Period needs to be
followings. selected from the followings.
Update Period/Max Update Period
• Burst Command
0.5 s 8s
• Update Period/Max Update Period
1s 16 s
• Burst Message Trigger Mode 2s 32 s
4s 60 s to 3600 s (any value)
NOTE
To the Update Period, specify a value smaller than
the Max Update Period.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(6) Burst Message Trigger Mode Setting (2) Event Acknowledgment
Specify Burst Message Trigger Mode. When If a Event is occurring, it is required to acknowledge
"Window", "Rising" or "Falling" is selected, it is it.
needed to specify the Burst Trigger Level. Acknowledgment of Event can be configured with
Burst Message
Description
the following parameter.
Trigger Mode
Continuous Burst Message is transmitted continuously.
The trigger value must be a positive number
Window and is the symmetric window around the Device root menu►Detailed setup►
last communicated value. Device information►HART setup►
The Burst Message must be transmitted Event setup►(see below)
Rising when the source value exceeds the
threshold established by the trigger value. acknowledge Event Specify acknowledgment of Event.
The Burst Message must be transmitted
Falling when the source value fall below the
threshold established by the trigger value.
The Burst Message must be transmitted NOTE
On-change when the source value on change
established by the trigger value. Acknowledgment can be done only to the Event
which occurs firstly. When multiple Events occur, it
3.6.2 Event Notification is required to acknowledge all of them.
It is possible to send alarm signal continuously

(3) Event Notification Flow
when change in configuration or self diagnosis is
When the Event Notification is enabled, a status
detected as Event. Up to five Event occurred can be
change caused by the self-diagnosis of the
stored as History. When Event Notification is used,
instrument will alarm Event1. Event1 is continuously
it is needed to specify Detailed Burst Message and
transmitted at the Retry Time interval until Event1 is
to enable Burst Message.
acknowledged.
NOTE If the other status change occurred before
Event1 acknowledgment, Event2 is kept internal
Nate that the Event which is stored as History is and Event1 is continuously transmitted until
deleted when the power is turned off. Event1 acknowledgment. When Event1 was
acknowledged, Event1 disappears and Event2 is
(1) Event Notification Setting continuously transmitted until the acknowledgment.
The Event Notification can be configured with the When Event2 was acknowledged, all Events
following parameter. were acknowledged and Event is continuously
transmitted at a interval of the Max Update Time.
Device root menu►Detailed setup►
Device information►HART setup►
Event setup►(see below)
set Event Specify Event Notification.*1
stop Event Specify stopping Event Notification.
*1: From the table below, select configuration of the Event

Notification.
Event Mask Specify device status to detect Event.
(Event Mask)
(Cmd48: Read Additional Device Status)
Event Notification Retry Specify period of Event Notification when
Time Event is occurring.
Max Update Time Specify period of Event Notification when
Event does not be occurring.
Event Debounce Specify minimum time that Event is
Interval continuing.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
3.6.3 Multidrop Mode (3) Enabling Multidrop Mode
Configure the settings of polling for a receiving
When the multidrop mode possible to connect
instrument referring to the user’s manual of each
multiple devices is used, this instrument
HART configuration tool.
can connect up to 63 devices on a single
communication transmission line. To activate the
(4) Communication in Multidrop Mode
multidrop mode, a number from 1 to 63 must be
• When a device and a HART configuration tool
assigned to the polling address. When the multidrop
start the connection, the tool searches for the
mode is activated, it is also needed to change
device set in the multidrop mode, the polling
a setting of the 4 to 20 mA analog output signal
address and the tag will be displayed.
because all the data is transmitted in digital one.
• After the desired device is selected, normal
The multidrop mode can be configured by the
communication with the selected device is
following procedures.
possible. However the communication speed
will be slow.
(1) Polling Address Setting
Assign a number from 1 to 63 to the polling
(5) Release of Multidrop Mode
address.
To release the multidrop mode, the parameter
needs to be configured as below.
• Specify the poling address of (1) to “0”.
• Specify the analog output of (2) to "Enabled".
Device information►HART setup►(see below)
Poll addr Specify polling address.
NOTE
When the same polling address is set for
two or more devices in the multidrop mode,
communication with these devices is disabled.
(2) Analog Output Setting

Usually, fix an analog output signal of multidrop
mode to 4 mA. In this case, however, it is
impossible to use a burnout output.
In the case of the application which receives and
operates an analog output signal, one variable
analog output signal can be used for one loop.
The analog output of multidrop mode can be
configured with the following parameter.

Device information►HART setup►(see below)
Loop current mode Specify analog output.*1
*1: From the table below, select an analog output of multidrop

mode.
Disabled Specify analog output to 4mA (fixed).
Enabled Specify analog output to 4 to 20 mA (variable).
NOTE
The analog output signal which is fixed by
multidrop mode is applied only to the output of I/
O1 terminal.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 23
4. Functions
This chapter describes each function of the • Current output and current input
instrument. The followings present an overview of Up to two current outputs are available. These are
each function. the high/low limit function, forward/reverse flow rate
• Basic settings function (reverse flow rate: 4 to 12 mA, forward flow
This instrument can measure the process values rate: 12 to 20 mA), alarm output function, low cut
of the flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass function, and other functions.
flow rate, calorie, and flow noise simultaneously. The current input is useful for inputting the fluid
In addition, the damping time constant for each temperature via external temperature transmitters.
process value can be specified. For details about the current output and current
For details about how to check the measurement input setting procedures, read Section 4.5.
result and the setting procedure, read Section 4.1. • Multi range function
• Totalization function This function performs to make measurements
This instrument has three totalizers for the process while switching multiple ranges. It is possible to
values. In addition to the display with the totalized switch the range depending on the flow rate, flow
value, the totalizer function is provided to scale the rate direction, or status input.
totalized value with the conversion factor and count For details about the multi range function, read
a specific flow rate. Also, it has a totalization switch Section 4.6.
function that compares the specified target value • Auxiliary calculation function
with the totalized value to output the result with the This function performs to calculate the temperature
status output, and a totalization preset function that correction for the density or the calorie by inputting
specifies the preset value. the temperature from an external instrument with
For details about the totalization function and the current input. The accuracy for mass flow
setting procedure, read Section 4.2. measurement goes up by setting the temperature
• Pulse output, frequency output, and correction for density.
status output For details about the auxiliary calculation function,
The measurement result can be output with one of read Section 4.7.
the pulse output, frequency output, or status output. • Alarm
When the pulse output is used, the pulse width or A detected error can be notified as an alarm or
pulse rate can be selected. When the frequency warning. This function shows its status based on
output is used, an output at 0% or 100% for the NAMUR NE107 to suit parameter settings. It is
span of the process value can be specified. When also to record the previously detected alarms as a
the status output is used, the device status can be history and mask unnecessary alarms to disappear
output with the status output. Both pulse output them from the display.
and frequency output can be set their low cut value For details about the alarm contents and the setting
each. procedure, read Section 4.8.
For details about each output and the setting
procedure, read Section 4.3. • Display
This display supports multiple languages to select
• Status input
the language to be used on the display. Also, this
The status input terminal is provided to use the function shows a time change of the selected
totalizer preset function or the zero-adjustment parameter as a trend graph on the display.
function depending on an external status input. For details about the display settings, read Section
For details about the setting procedure, read 4.9.
Section 4.4.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 24
4.1 Basic Settings
NOTE
4.1.1 Overview
The default setting of the language is English
upon shipment from the manufacturing plant. This instrument can simultaneously measure the
Change the language by referring to Subsection flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate,
2.2.2 or Subsection 4.9.1 if necessary. calorie, and flow noise. The measurement result
This user’s manual shows English at the menu can be output as the current output, frequency
pass of the display. output, pulse output, and/or status output.
The table below shows the communication / input-
output codes, connection terminals, and input and
• Device information output for each terminal.
This function is to check the parameters specified at Communication
Connection Terminal
and I/O code
the time of ordering, model code, and suffix code of HART I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
this instrument on the display. JA - -
P/Sout2 Iout2
For details about how to check device information, JB
Passive Active
Sin Iout2
read Section 4.10. JC
No-voltage Active
Sout P/Sout2
• Diagnostic function JD
Passive Passive
Sin P/Sout2
There are many kinds of diagnostic functions, and JE
No-voltage Passive
P/Sout2
it is possible to diagnose failure of the instrument or JF
Iout1 P/Sout1 Sin
Active
Active Passive No-voltage
process status. For example, this function is useful (With resistor)
P/Sout2
to diagnose the health of the instrument using JG
Sin
Active
No-voltage
the electrode adhesion detecting function, sensor (Without resistor)
Iout2 Iin
JH
empty check function, or the verification function. Passive Active
P/Sout2 Iin
For details about various diagnostic functions, read JJ
Passive Active
Section 4.11. JK
Sin Iin
No-voltage Active
• Test mode Iout1: Current output with HART communication
Iout2: Current output
This mode is arbitrarily to specify the process value
Iin: Current input
or the value to be output from a connection terminal P/Sout1: Pulse output or status output
and test a response from the device. P/Sout2: Pulse output or status output
For details about the test mode, read Section 4.12. Sin: Status input
Sout: Status output
• Backup, restore, and duplicate The position of Communication and I/O code:
Integral Type:
functions AXG--
The backup function can be store the setting Remote Transmitter:
parameters into the built-in memory in the display. AXG4A-
If the optional code MC is selected, the setting

parameters are stored in the microSD card supplied NOTE
with this instrument in addition to the built-in
memory in the display. The available functions vary depending on the
The backup data can be used to restore settings connection terminal type selected at the time
in the instrument in which they were backed up, or of ordering. Need to read above table carefully
duplicate settings to another instrument. before use which terminal is applicable to
For details about the backup, restore, and duplicate allocate each function.
functions, read Section 4.13.
• Software write protection function
The software write protection function for disabling
a parameter change is provided separately from the
hardware write protection.
For details about the software write protection
function, read Chapter 4.14.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 25
4.1.2 PV Mapping of Process Value HART communication:
Process variables root menu ►
This function can allows you to map the flow Dynamic variables ► (see below)
velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, and PV Displays the process value set to the
flow noise as the primary variable (PV). The PV- Primary Value.
PV % rnge Displays the range rate for the process
mapped process value is output from the I/O1
value set to the Primary Value.
terminal.
This setting can be configured with the following Process variables root menu ►
parameters. Device variables► (see below)
Velocity Displays the flow velocity.
Volume flow Displays the volumetric flow rate.
Display menu path: Mass flow Displays the mass flow rate.
Totalizer1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Totalizer2 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 2.
PV flow select ► (see below) Totalizer3 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 3.
Calorific value Displays the calorie.
Velocity Sets the flow velocity to the Primary
Flow noise Displays the flow noise.
Value.
Volume Sets the volumetric flow rate to the
Primary Value. 4.1.4 Engineering Unit Setting
Mass Sets the mass flow rate to the Primary
Value. The unit can be specified for the flow velocity,
Diag Sets the flow noise to the Primary Value.
volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, and calorie.
HART communication: Each parameter can be specified using the physical
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► unit and time unit.
Process variables ► PV flow select► (see below) For example, when setting "m3/h" as the volumetric
Velocity Sets the flow velocity to the Primary flow rate, specify "m3" (physical quantity) and "h"
Value. (time unit) individually.
Volume Sets the volumetric flow rate to the
Primary Value. However, the time unit is commonly set regardless
Mass Sets the mass flow rate to the Primary of the kinds of fluid.
Value. The time unit of the flow velocity is fixed to "/s", and
Diag Sets the flow noise to the Primary Value.
the unit of the flow noise to "cm/s", which do not
require settings to be made by the user.
The setting can be configured with the following
4.1.3 Display of the Process Value parameters.
The flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow
rate, totalized value, calorie, and flow noise can be Display menu path:
viewed with the following parameters. Physical unit
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
Display menu path: (see below)
Device setup ► Process variables ► (see below) Velocity ► Unit Specify the physical unit of the flow
Flow rate(%) Displays the range rate for the process velocity.
value set to the Primary Value. Volume ► Unit Specify the physical unit of the volumetric
Flow rate Displays the process value set to the flow rate.
Primary Value. Mass ► Unit Specify the physical unit of the mass flow
Velocity Displays the flow velocity. rate.
Volume Displays the volumetric flow rate. Calorie ► Unit Specify the physical unit of the calorie.
Mass Displays the mass flow rate.
Totalizer ► Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1. Time unit
Totalizer 1 Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
Totalizer ► Displays the totalized value of totalizer 2.
Totalizer 2 (see below)
Totalizer ► Displays the totalized value of totalizer 3. Volume ► Time unit Specify the time unit of the volumetric
Totalizer 3 Mass ► Time unit flow rate, mass flow rate, or calorie.
Calorie Displays the calorie. Calorie ► Time unit
Display of flow noise

Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ►
Flow noise► Result ► Value
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 26
HART communication: Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis► (see below)
Physical unit Flow noise ► Specify the span of the flow noise.
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Flow noise span
Process variables► (see below)
Velocity ► Specify the physical unit of the flow
Velocity unit velocity. NOTE
Volume flow ► Specify the physical unit of the volumetric
Volume flow unit flow rate. Be sure to note the following points when
Mass flow ► Specify the physical unit of the mass flow
Mass flow unit rate. specifying the flow rate span.
Calorie ► Specify the physical unit of the calorie. • For a line with a significant flow change, set
Calorific unit
the flow rate span to the maximum flow rate.
If the flow rate exceeds the flow rate span, the
Time unit
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► flow rate error as its percentage increases.
Process variables► (see below) • For a line with the stable flow rate, set the flow
Volume flow ► Specify the time unit of the volumetric rate span to approximately 1.5 to 2.0 times
Time unit flow rate, mass flow rate, or calorie. toward the normal flow rate.
Mass flow ►
Time unit
• Specify the flow rate for which the flow
Calorie ► Time unit velocity is included within the range from 0.3
to 10 m/s. The flow velocity can be checked
4.1.5 Span Setting using the sizing data described in the general
specifications as listed in Table 1.1. If the flow
The span can be specified for the flow velocity, velocity is checked using the parameter, it
volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, calorie, and displays the value obtained by converting the
flow noise. specified flow rate span to the flow velocity.
However, the span unit conforms to that specified
in Subsection 4.1.4. If the unit is changed, the
span value is changed to the corresponding value
NOTE
synchronously with the changed unit.
This setting can be configured with the following Be sure to set the flow rate unit in the beginning
parameters. when the span value and its flow rate unit are
changed at the same time.
Display menu path:
(see below)
Velocity ► Span Specify the span of the flow velocity.
Volume ► Span Specify the span of the volumetric flow
rate.
Mass ► Span Specify the span of the mass flow rate.
Calorie ► Span Specify the span of the calorie.

(see below)
Flow noise ► Span Specify the span of the flow noise.
HART communication:
Process variables► (see below)
Velocity ► Specify the span of the flow velocity.
Velocity span
Volume flow ► Specify the span of the volumetric flow
Volume flow span rate.
Mass flow ► Specify the span of the mass flow rate.
Mass flow span
Calorie ► Specify the span of the calorie.
Calorific flow span
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 27
4.1.6 Damping Time Constant Setting HART communication:
Current output / Frequency output
The damping time constant (63.2% response) can
be specified for the flow velocity, volumetric flow Process variables► (see below)
rate, mass flow rate, calorie, and flow noise. When Velocity ► Specify the damping
reducing an output fluctuation or changing the Velocity damping AO/frequency time constant of the flow
response speed, change the damping time constant velocity.
Volume flow ► Specify the damping time
(default value as 3.0 seconds). Volume flow damping AO/frequency constant of the volumetric
It is possible to measure the pulsing flow up to 1 Hz flow rate.
Mass flow ► Specify the damping time
with the value of 0.1 second on this function in case
Mass flow damping AO/frequency constant of the mass flow
of a piston pump, etc... rate.
This function is applicable to specify each output Calorie ► Specify the damping time
Calorific value damping AO/frequency constant of the calorie.
of the process value (current output or frequency
output, and pulse output or totalized value).
Pulse output / Totalization
However, the setting value for flow noise is Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
commonly used the same value from their outputs. Process variables► (see below)
This setting can be configured with the following Velocity ► Specify the damping
parameters. Velocity damping pulse/total time constant of the flow
velocity.
Volume flow ► Specify the damping time
Display menu path: Volume flow damping pulse/total constant of the volumetric
Current output / Frequency output flow rate.
Mass flow ► Specify the damping time
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Mass flow damping pulse/total constant of the mass flow
(see below) rate.
Velocity ► Specify the damping time constant Calorie ► Specify the damping time
Damp AO/F toward flow velocity. Calorific value damping pulse/total constant of the calorie.
Volume ► Specify the damping time constant of the
Damp AO/F volumetric flow rate. Flow noise
Mass ► Damp AO/F Specify the damping time constant of the
Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis► (see below)
mass flow rate.
Calorie ► Specify the damping time constant of the Flow noise ► Specify the damping time constant of the
Damp AO/F calorie. Flow noise damping flow noise.
Pulse output / Totalization

Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► NOTE
(see below)
The output fluctuation increases when the
Velocity ► Specify the damping time constant of the
Damp pls/ttl flow velocity. damping time constant is set to lower value.
Volume ► Specify the damping time constant of the Set the damping time constant to 5 seconds or
Damp pls/ttl volumetric flow rate. longer for control processing application.
Mass ► Damp pls/ttl Specify the damping time constant of the
mass flow rate.
Calorie ► Specify the damping time constant of the
Damp pls/ttl calorie.
• Flow noise
(see below)
Flow noise ► Damp Specify the damping time constant of the
flow noise.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 28
4.1.7 Low-cut Function Setting Totalization
The low-cut value can be specified for the current Totalizer► (see below)
output, frequency output, pulse output, and totalizer. Totalizer1 ► Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 1.
The fluctuation output at the flow rate “0” can be Total1 low cut
Totalizer2 ► Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 2.
reduced when this function is used, because the
Total2 low cut
output of the set value or less becomes “0” forcibly. Totalizer3 ► Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 3.
However, the unit of low-cut value conforms to that Total3 low cut
specified in Subsection 4.1.4. If the unit is changed,
the low-cut value is changed to the corresponding The hysteresis is set in each case in which the
value synchronously with the changed unit. output is changed to "0" through the specified low-
Set "0" to the low-cut value if it is unnecessary to cut value and a case in which the output returns
use this function. to measuring value through the specified low-cut
This setting can be configured with the following value. The hysteresis in each case is obtained as
parameters. shown below.
For details about the multi range function, read
Display menu path: Section 4.6.
Current output (1) A value with the output changed to "0" through
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► the specified low-cut value
(see below) = Low-cut value - (Minimum span specified in
AO1 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of current multi range x 0.5%)
output 1. (2) A value with the output returned through the
AO2 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of current specified low-cut value
output 2.
= Low-cut value + (Minimum span specified in
Frequency output / Pulse output multi range x 0.5%)
Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
Pulse/Status out ► (see below) Example:
PO1/SO1 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of frequency
Span of volumetric flow rate = 10.0 m3/h,
output 1 or pulse output 1. Low-cut value = 1.0 m3/h
PO2/SO2 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of frequency In this case, each value is obtained as shown
output 2 or pulse output 2.
below.
(1) The value with output changed to "0" through
Totalization
the specified low-cut value
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►
= 1.0 [m3/h] – (10.0 [m3/h] × 0.5 [%])
(see below)
= 0.95 [m3/h]
Totalizer 1 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 1.
Totalizer 2 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 2. (2) The value with output returned through the
Totalizer 3 ► Low cut Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 3. specified low-cut value
= 1.0 [m3/h] + (10.0 [m3/h] × 0.5 [%])
HART communication: = 1.05 [m3/h]
Current output Output [m3/h]
(1)
Analog output/input► (see below)
Analog output 1► Specify the low-cut value of current
Hysteresis (2)
AO1 low cut output 1. 1%
Analog output 2► Specify the low-cut value of current
AO2 low cut output 2.
1
Frequency output / Pulse output
Pulse/Status► (see below)
Pulse/Status output 1► Specify the low-cut value of
Pulse1 low cut frequency output 1 or pulse output 1.
Pulse/Status output 2► Specify the low-cut value of 0
Pulse2 low cut frequency output 2 or pulse output 2. 0.95 1 1.05 Input [m3/h] F0401.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 29
4.1.9 Density Setting
NOTE
The density setting is required to measure the mass
Note that, if the low-cut value is lower, the flow rate. The density can be selected from the
totalization might be counted due to an influence fixed density or the density corrected depending on
of output fluctuation near the output 0%. the temperature.
In particular, if the flow rate span, damping time For details about how to measure the mass flow
constant, or conductivity is small or low, the rate or correct the density depending on the
totalization is easily counted when the flow rate is temperature, read Subsection 4.7.5.
"0". In such a case, increase the flow rate span, It will result in a setting error that “0” is set to the
damping time constant, or low-cut value. density in the situation of mapping the mass flow to
PV.
This setting can be configured with the following
NOTE parameters.
When the output process value is changed, Display menu path:

specify the low-cut value again. Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
Density ► (see below)
Value select Select the use of the temperature-base
4.1.8 Sensor’s Nominal Size Setting density correction function.*1
Unit Specify the unit of the density.
To combine the remote transmitter with other Fixed density Specify the fixed density value.
remote sensor, the nominal size of the remote Std density Specify the reference standard density
sensor must be specified. value to use the temperature-base
density correction function.
This setting can be configured with the following Correct density Displays the corrected density.
parameters.
HART communication:
Display menu path: Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Sensor ► Process variables ► Density► (see below)
(see below) Density value select Select the use of the temperature-base
density correction function.*1
Nominal size unit Specify the unit of the nominal size. Density unit Specify the unit of the density.
Nominal size Specify the nominal size. Density fixed value Specify the fixed density value.
Standard density Specify the reference standard density
HART communication: value to use the temperature-base
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Correct density Displays the corrected density.
Sensor► (see below)
Nominal size unit Specify the unit of the nominal size. *1: From the table below, select the use of the temperature-
Nominal size Specify the nominal size. base density correction function.
Fixed value Uses the fixed density (the density is not
corrected depending on the temperature).
Correction value Uses the corrected density.
NOTE
For the integral type, the nominal size and its unit
have been set at the factory shipment. Do not
change the these parameters.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 30
4.1.10 Temperature Setting 4.1.11 Zero Adjustment
The temperature setting is required to calculate Zero adjustment is carried out to ensure that
the calorie depending on its difference from the the output for zero flow is 0% (i.e., 4 mA).
temperature that is input via the current input Although adjustment to zero is performed at
process. the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, this
For details about the calorie measurement, read procedure must be carried out once again following
Subsection 4.7.6. the installation of piping in order to match the
This setting can be configured with the following magnetic flowmeter to its operating conditions.
parameters. This subsection describes the zero adjustment
procedure using the display unit. For AXFA11, read
Display menu path: the applicable user’s manual as listed in Table 1.1.
Temperature ► (see below)
IMPORTANT
Std temperature Specify the reference standard
temperature to use the temperature-base
• Zero adjustment should be carried out before
density correction function. actual operation. Note that setting and
Meas temperature Displays the temperature that is input update functions cannot be carried out during
from current input.
this procedure (i.e., for approximately 30
Fixed temperature Specify the reference temperature
to use for the calorie caluculation seconds).
by temperature difference from • Zero adjustment should only be carried
the temperature which is input out when the sensor has been filled with
from current input.
measurement fluid and the fluid velocity is
HART communication: completely zero by closing the valve.
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► • Each time that the fluid being measured
Process variables ► Temperature► (see below) is changed, it will be necessary for zero
Standard Specify the reference standard adjustment to be carried out for the new fluid.
temperature temperature to use the temperature-base
Measured Displays the temperature that is input A procedure of executing zero adjustment is as
temperature from current input. follows;
Calorific fix temp Specify the reference temperature to
use for the calorie calculation when the Display Menu Path:
current input is temperature signal. Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Autozero ► Execute
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Autozero ► Result ► Zero value
Enter the Setting Mode. (Read Section 2.3)
• Execution of zero adjustment
00 : 00 Select “Diag/Service” accoriding to the
Device setup menu path above.
▲Process variables ►
Diag/Service ►
▼Easy setup wizard ►
SET SFT INC
F0402.ai
00 : 00 Select “Autozero”.
Diag/Service
▲Verification ►
Autozero ►
▼AO/AI trim ►
SET SFT INC
F0403.ai
00 : 00 Select “Execute”.
Autozero
▲ Execute
▼ Result ►
SET SFT INC
F0404.ai
00 : 00 Select “Execute”.
Execute
Not execute
▲Execute
▼Not execute
SET SFT INC
F0405.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 31
Execute
00 : 00 When “Execute” blinks, touch [SET] to 4.2 Totalization Function
execute.
Execute
4.2.1 Totalized Value and Unit Setting
SET SFT INC
F0406.ai
This function can totalize the volumetric flow
00 : 00 Autozero starts, and the progress is rate, mass flow rate, and calorie. This instrument
Autozero function desplayed with a remaining time and a
executing... provides three totalizers, which can simultaneously
bar graph. Wait for the completion.
00 : 08 The time remaining operate them for process values.
until the end.
Totalizer 1 is for the process value PV-mapped
SET SFT INC
F0407.ai
described in Subsection 4.1.2. Totalizers 2 and 3

00 : 00 After Autozero finished, the display
Autozero returns to “Autozero” menu. are for the process value in the selected unit.
▲ Execute This setting can be displayed and configured with
Result
the following parameters.
▼ ►
SET SFT INC
F0408.ai
Display menu path:

• Confirmation of zero adjustment result Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►
For the result of Autozero, select “Result”
Result
00 : 00
and then “Zero value”.

(see below)
Totalizer 1 ► Unit Displays the unit of totalizer 1.
▲
Zero value
Totalizer 2 ► Unit Specify the unit of totalizer 2.
▼
SET SFT INC

F0409.ai
Totalizer 3 ► Unit Specify the unit of totalizer 3.
Zero value
00 : 00 Result of Autozero is indicated as on HART communication:
the left.
– 00.018cm/s Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
– 00.018cm/s
– 99.999 + 99.999 Totalizer► (see below)
SET SFT INC
F0410.ai
Totalizer1 ► Displays the unit of totalizer 1.
Total1 unit
Totalizer2 ► Specify the unit of totalizer 2.
Total2 unit
Totalizer3 ► Specify the unit of totalizer 3.
NOTE Total3 unit
When the zero adjustment result exceeds defined

value, the warning [092: AZ wam] is indicated. NOTE
Zero adjustment can be executed with the following The flow velocity cannot be totalized. If the
parameter. flow velocity is selected as the Primary Value,
HART Communication Menu Path: totalizer 1 obtains the volumetric flow rate and
Device root menu ► Basic setup ► Autozero ► Autozero Exe unit based on "m3".
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 32
4.2.2 Totalized-Value Display and Totalizer HART communication:
Function Display of totalized value
Process variables root menu ►
The totalization result can be checked with the Device variables► (see below)
totalized value or its value which is scaled with Totalizer1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
the conversion factor. When the totalized value is Totalizer2 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 2.
Totalizer3 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 3.
scaled with the conversion factor, the specified flow
rate is totalized in 1-count increments, which can be Setting of the conversion factor for scaling
used as a totalizer. Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
The totalized value can be displayed and specified Totalizer► (see below)
with the following parameters. Totalizer1 ► Specify the conversion factor of
Total1 conv factor totalizer 1.
Totalizer2 ► Specify the conversion factor of
Display menu path: Total2 conv factor totalizer 2.
Display of totalized value Totalizer3 ► Specify the conversion factor of
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► Total3 conv factor totalizer 3.
(see below)
Display of the totalized value that is scaled with the
Totalizer 1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
Totalizer 2 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 2. conversion factor
Totalizer 3 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 3. Process variables root menu ►
Totalizer count► (see below)
Setting of the conversion factor for scaling Totalizer1 count Displays the scaled totalized-value of
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► totalizer 1.
Totalizer2 count Displays the scaled totalized-value of
(see below) totalizer 2.
Totalizer 1 ► Specify the conversion factor of totalizer Totalizer3 count Displays the scaled totalized-value of
Conv factor 1. totalizer 3.
Totalizer 2 ► Specify the conversion factor of totalizer
Conv factor 2. Example:
Totalizer 3 ► Specify the conversion factor of totalizer
Conv factor 3. Set the unit of totalizer 2 to "m3" and the conversion
factor to "2".
Display of the totalized value that is scaled with the →If the totalized value of totalizer 2 is set to "10.123
conversion factor m3", the totalized value is scaled to "10.123÷2 =
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► 5".
(see below)
Totalizer 1 count Displays the scaled totalized-value of
totalizer 1.
4.2.3 Totalization Switch Function
Totalizer 2 count Displays the scaled totalized-value of The totalization switch function is available
totalizer 2.
Totalizer 3 count Displays the scaled totalized-value of when the target value (set point) to be totalized
totalizer 3. is specified using the totalization function. The
totalization switch function compares the specified
target value with the totalized value to output the
result with the status output.
The status output is active while the totalized value
is out of the specified target value.
For details about the output, active direction, and
status output function setting for each terminal, read
Section 4.3.
parameters.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 33
Display menu path: HART communication:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
(see below) Totalizer► (see below)
Totalizer 1 ► Specify the target value of totalizer 1. Totalizer1 ► Specify the totalizer 1 operation to
Set point Total1 fail opts be performed when an alarm has
Totalizer 2 ► Specify the target value of totalizer 2. occurred.*1
Totalizer2 ► Specify the totalizer 2 operation to
Set point
Totalizer 3 ► Specify the target value of totalizer 3. Total2 fail opts be performed when an alarm has
Set point occurred.*1
Totalizer3 ► Specify the totalizer 3 operation to
Total3 fail opts be performed when an alarm has
HART communication: occurred.*1
Totalizer► (see below) *1: From the table below, select the operation of the
totalization function.
Totalizer1 ► Specify the target value of totalizer 1.
Run Continues the totalization function after an
Total1 set point
alarm has occurred.
Totalizer2 ► Specify the target value of totalizer 2.
Hold Stops the totalization function after an alarm
Total2 set point has occurred.
Totalizer3 ► Specify the target value of totalizer 3. Last valid Continues the totalization function with the last
Total3 set point valid value before an alarm occurs.
Example: Setting procedure to use the

4.2.5 Totalization Function Start/Stop
totalization switch function with the
Setting
I/O2 terminal
Follow the steps below to set the status output of The totalization function can be set to Start/Stop
the I/O2 terminal to "On active" when the totalized mode.
value of totalizer 1 reaches the target value. This setting can be configured with the following
(1) Set the output of the I/O2 terminal to "Status parameters.
out", referring to Subsection 4.3.1.
(2) Set the active direction of the I/O2 terminal to Display menu path:
"On active", referring to Subsection 4.3.4. Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►
(3) Set the status output function to "Total limit 1", (see below)
referring to Subsection 4.3.7. Totalizer 1 ► Sets Start/Stop to the totalization function
Start/Stop of totalizer 1.
(4) Specify the target value of totalizer 1, referring Totalizer 2 ► Sets Start/Stop to the totalization function
to this subsection. Start/Stop of totalizer 2.
Totalizer 3 ► Sets Start/Stop to the totalization function
Start/Stop of totalizer 3.
4.2.4 Totalizer Operation at Alarm
Occurrence HART communication:
The totalizer operation can be specified to deal with
Totalizer► (see below)
an alarm that affects the totalization function. Totalizer1► Sets Start/Stop to the totalization function
This setting can be configured with the following Total1 Start/Stop of totalizer 1.
parameters. Totalizer2► Sets Start/Stop to the totalization function
Total2 Start/Stop of totalizer 2.
Totalizer3► Sets Start/Stop to the totalization function
Display menu path: Total3 Start/Stop of totalizer 3.
(see below)
Totalizer 1 ► Specify the totalizer 1 operation to NOTE
Failure opts be performed when an alarm has
occurred.*1
Totalizer 2 ► Specify the totalizer 2 operation to
The totalization function is set to "Stop" upon
Failure opts be performed when an alarm has shipment from the manufacturing plant. To
occurred.*1 start the totalization function, be sure to set it to
Totalizer 3 ► Specify the totalizer 3 operation to
Failure opts be performed when an alarm has
"Start".
occurred.*1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 34
4.2.6 Totalization Direction Setting Preset value setting
The totalization direction can be specified to use the
(see below)
totalization function.
Totalizer 1 ► Specify the preset value of totalizer 1.
This setting can be configured with the following Preset value
parameters. Totalizer 2 ► Specify the preset value of totalizer 2.
Preset value
Totalizer 3 ► Specify the preset value of totalizer 3.
Display menu path: Preset value
(see below) HART communication:
Totalizer 1 ► Options Specify the totalization direction of Use of the reset/preset function
totalizer 1.*1 Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Totalizer 2 ► Options Specify the totalization direction of
totalizer 2.*1
Totalizer 3 ► Options Specify the totalization direction of Totalizer1► Uses the reset/preset function of
totalizer 3.*1 Total1 Reset/Preset totalizer 1.*1
Totalizer2► Uses the reset/preset function of
Total2 Reset/Preset totalizer 2.*1
HART communication: Totalizer3► Uses the reset/preset function of
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Total3 Reset/Preset totalizer 3.*1
Totalizer1► Specify the totalization direction of Preset value setting
Total1 options totalizer 1.*1 Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Totalizer2► Specify the totalization direction of
Total2 options totalizer 2.*1
Totalizer3► Specify the totalization direction of Totalizer1 ► Specify the preset value of totalizer 1.
Total3 options totalizer 3.*1 Total1 preset value
Totalizer2 ► Specify the preset value of totalizer 2.
*1: From the table below, select the totalization direction. Total2 preset value
Totalizer3 ► Specify the preset value of totalizer 3.
Balanced Totalizes the differential flow rate between the
Total3 preset value
forward and reverse directions.
Absolute Totalizes the absolute value of the flow rate.
Only positive Totalizes only the flow rate in the forward *1: From the table below, select the reset/preset function.
direction. Not execute Does not use the totalization value reset/preset
Only negative Totalizes only the flow rate in the reverse function.
direction. Reset Uses the totalization value reset function.
Hold Stops totalization processing (holds the current Preset Uses the totalization value preset function.
totalized-value).
4.2.7 Totalized Value Reset/Preset NOTE

Function
The parameter returns to "Not execute" after the
The reset/preset function can be specified for the totalization value reset/preset function has been
totalized value. Using the reset function resets the completed.
totalized value to "0". Using the preset function
sets the totalized value in advance to the preset
value. The preset function is available when starting
counting of totalization with the specified value.
parameters.
Display menu path:

Use of the reset/preset function
(see below)
Totalizer 1 ► Uses the reset/preset function of
Reset/Preset totalizer 1.*1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 35
4.3 Pulse Output, Frequency 4.3.2 Pulse Output / Frequency Output
Mapping
Output, and Status Output
The process value to be output can be selected to
4.3.1 Outputs of I/O2, I/O3, and I/O4 use the pulse output or frequency output.
Terminals When the I/O2 terminal is used for output, the
process value PV-mapped in Subsection 4.1.2 is
The I/O2, I/O3, and I/O4 terminals can be used
output.
as the pulse output, frequency output, and status
When the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal is used for output,
output.
the process value to be output can be selected from
the flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow
parameters.
rate, calorie, and flow noise.
Display menu path:
parameters.
Pulse/Status out ► (see below)
Display menu path:
PO1/SO1 ► Output mode Specify the output of the I/O2
terminal.*1 Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
PO2/SO2 ► Output mode Specify the output of the I/O3 or Pulse/Status out ► (see below)
I/O4 terminal.*1 PO2/SO2 ► Pulse select Specify the output of the I/O3 or
I/O4 terminal.*1
HART communication:
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► HART communication:
Pulse/Status► (see below) Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the output of the I/O2 Pulse/Status► (see below)
Pulse1 output mode terminal.*1 Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the output of the I/O3 or
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the output of the I/O3 or Pulse2 select I/O4 terminal.*1
Pulse2 output mode I/O4 terminal.*1
*1: From the table below, select the output of the I/O terminal.
*1: From the table below, select the output of each terminal.
Non-Connect No output
No function Does not use the terminal. Velocity Sets the flow velocity to the output.
Fixed pulse output Sets the output to the fixed pulse output. Volume flow Sets the volumetric flow rate to the output.
Frequency output Sets the output to the frequency output Mass flow Sets the mass flow rate to the output.
(Duty 50%). Calorie Sets the calorie to the output.
Status output Sets the output to the status output. Diag Sets the flow noise to the output.
For details about the status output, read
Subsection 4.3.7.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 36
4.3.3 Pulse Width Setting 4.3.4 Active Direction Setting
The pulse width can be selected to use the pulse Whether the pulse signal is set on or off to enable
output. the active mode can be specified when the pulse
This setting can be configured with the following output or status output is used.
parameters. This setting can be configured with the following
parameters.
Display menu path:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display menu path:
Pulse/Status out ► (see below) Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
PO1/SO1 ► Fix width Specify the pulse width of the I/O2 Pulse/Status out ► (see below)
terminal.*1 PO1/SO1 ► Active mode Specify the active direction for the
PO2/SO2 ► Fix width Specify the pulse width of the I/O3 pulse signal of the I/O2 terminal.*1
or I/O4 terminal.*1 PO2/SO2 ► Active mode Specify the active direction for the
pulse signal of the I/O3 or I/O4
HART communication: terminal.*1
Pulse/Status► (see below) HART communication:
Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the pulse width of the I/O2 Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Pulse1 fix width terminal.*1 Pulse/Status► (see below)
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the pulse width of the I/O3 Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the active direction for the
Pulse2 fix width or I/O4 terminal.*1 Pulse1 active mode pulse signal of the I/O2 terminal.*1
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the active direction for the
*1: From the table below, select the pulse width. Pulse2 active mode pulse signal of the I/O3 or I/O4
Pulse rate Pulse rate terminal.*1
Pulse width Pulse width
Max. Max.
[ms] [ms]
[pps] [pps] *1: From the table below, specify the active direction of the pulse
0.05 10000 100 5 signal.
0.1 5000 200 2.5
0.5 1000 330 1.5 Active: ON/On active Sets to Active when the pulse signal is set on.
1 500 500 1.0 Active: OFF/Off active Sets to Active when the pulse signal is set off.
20 25 1000 0.5
33 15 2000 0.25 Example:
50 10
If the fixed pulse output is specified and the pulse
width is set to "1 ms", Active is set as shown below.
Active：ON
Active：OFF
1 ms F0411.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 37
4.3.5 Pulse Rate Setting Note: From the table below, select the pulse rate scaling.
n Unit/P 10-9 × Unit per pulse
The pulse rate per pulse and the pulse rate scaling u Unit/P 10-6 × Unit per pulse
m Unit/P 10-3 × Unit per pulse
can be specified to use the pulse output when this Unit/P 1 unit per pulse
function is used. k Unit/P 103 × Unit per pulse
M Unit/P 106 × Unit per pulse
When the I/O2 terminal is used for output, the unit n P/Unit 10-9 × Unit per pulse
of the pulse rate is set to that of the process value u P/Unit 10-6 × Unit per pulse
m P/Unit 10-3 × Unit per pulse
PV-mapped in Subsection 4.1.2.
P/Unit 1 pulse per unit
In case of using the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for output, k P/Unit 103 × Pulse per unit
the unit of the pulse rate is set to that of the process M P/Unit 106 × Pulse per unit
value mapped in Subsection 4.3.2. * Unit: Indicates the unit of the process value to be output as the
pulse output.
parameters. If the pulse rate scaling is changed, the NOTE
pulse rate value is also changed synchronously with
the changed unit. The maximum pulse rate and pulse width must
be specified so that the following conditions are
Display menu path: satisfied.
Pulse rate value Maximum pulse rate value [pps]
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► = Flow rate span (Unit/s] x Pulse rate [P/Unit]
Pulse/Status out ► (see below) ≤ 10 [k pps]
PO1/SO1 ► Rate value Specify the pulse rate value of the ≤ 1 / (Pulse width × 2)
I/O2 terminal.
PO2/SO2 ► Rate value Specify the pulse rate value of the
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal. Example:
When the pulse width is set to "0.1 ms", the
Pulse rate scaling maximum pulse rate value is set to "1 / (0.0001 ×
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► 2) = 5000 [pps]". If the specified pulse rate exceeds
Pulse/Status out ► (see below) this value, it causes a setting error, and an alarm is
PO1/SO1 ► Rate unit Specify the pulse rate scaling of the displayed.
I/O2 terminal.
PO2/SO2 ► Rate unit Specify the pulse rate scaling of the
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
HART communication:
Pulse rate value
Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the pulse rate value of the
Pulse1 rate value I/O2 terminal.
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the pulse rate value of the
Pulse2 rate value I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Pulse rate scaling

Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the pulse rate scaling of the
Pulse1 rate unit I/O2 terminal.
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the pulse rate scaling of the
Pulse2 rate unit I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 38
4.3.6 Frequency Output Range Setting 4.3.7 Status Output Function Setting
When the frequency output is used, the frequency The instrument status can be set as the contact
at 0% and 100% can be specified for the span of output to use the status output.
the process value. The frequency output range can This setting can be configured with the following
be set by specifying the frequency. parameters.
When the I/O2 terminal is used for output, specify
the output frequency for the span of the process Display menu path:
value PV-mapped described in Subsection 4.1.2. Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
When the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal is used for output, Pulse/Status out ► (see below)
specify the output frequency for the span of the PO1/SO1 ► SO1 function Specify the status output 1 function
process value mapped described in Subsection of the I/O2 terminal.*1
PO2/SO2 ► SO2 function Specify the status output 2 function
4.3.2. of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.*1
This setting can be configured with the following PO3/SO3 ► SO3 function Specify the status output 3 function
parameters. of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.*1
HART communication:
Display menu path:
Pulse/Status out ► (see below) Pulse/Status output 1 ► Specify the status output 1 function
PO1/SO1 ► Specify the frequency when 0% is Status output1 function of the I/O2 terminal.*1
Frequency at 0% set to the process value that is to Pulse/Status output 2 ► Specify the status output 2 function
be output with the frequency output Status output2 function of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.*1
through the I/O2 terminal. Status output 3 ► Specify the status output 3 function
PO1/SO1 ► Specify the frequency when 100% Status output3 function of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.*1
Frequency at 100% is set to the process value that is to
be output with the frequency output
through the I/O2 terminal.
PO2/SO2 ► Specify the frequency when 0% is
Frequency at 0% set to the process value that is to
through the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
PO2/SO2 ► Specify the frequency when 100%
Frequency at 100% is set to the process value that is to
HART communication:
Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the frequency when 0% is
Frequency1 at 0% set to the process value that is to
Pulse/Status output1 ► Specify the frequency when 100%
Frequency1 at 100% is set to the process value that is to
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the frequency when 0% is
Frequency2 at 0% set to the process value that is to
Pulse/Status output2 ► Specify the frequency when 100%
Frequency2 at 100% is set to the process value that is to
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 39
*1: From the table below, select the status output function.
No function The status output is not available because the
4.4 Status Input
status output function is not enabled.
Alarm output The status output becomes active when an 4.4.1 Active Direction Setting for Status
Warning output
alarm occurs.
The status output becomes active when a
Input
warning occurs.
Total limit 1 The status output is active while the totalized
Whether the status input is set on or off to enable
value of totalizer 1 is out of the specified target the active mode can be specified when the I/O3
value. For details about the totalization switch
terminal is used for the status input.
function, read Subsection 4.2.3.
Total limit 2 The status output is active while the totalized This setting can be configured with the following
value of totalizer 2 is out of the specified target parameters.
value. For details about the totalization switch
function, read Subsection 4.2.3.
Total limit 3 The status output is active while the totalized Display menu path:
value of totalizer 3 is out of the specified target
value. For details about the totalization switch Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Status in ►
function, read Subsection 4.2.3. (see below)
H/L alarm The status output is active while the PV-
SI3 ► Active mode Specify the active direction of the
mapped process value is out of the specified
low limit value (L) or high limit value (H). status input.*1
For details about the PV mapping for the
process value and alarm information, read HART communication:
Subsection 4.1.2, Section 4.8, and Subsection
4.11.2.
HH/LL alarm The status output is active while the PV- Pulse/Status► (see below)
mapped process value is out of the specified Status input 3 ► Specify the active direction of the
low-low limit value (LL) or high-high limit value Status input3 active mode status input.*1
(HH).
For details about the PV mapping for the
*1: From the table below, select the active direction of the status
process value and alarm information, read
input.
Subsection 4.1.2, Section 4.8, and Subsection
4.11.2. Active: ON/Short(On) act Sets to Active when the status input is short-
Fwd/Rev range The status output is active while the fluid is circuited.
flowing in the reverse direction. Used in the Active: OFF/Open(Off) act Sets to Active when the status input is opened.
forward/reverse range.
For details about the forward/reverse range,
read Subsection 4.6.4.
Auto2 range The status output is active while operation is
being performed in range 2. Used in the multi
range.
Subsection 4.6.3.
Ext2 answer Sets the status input function to the external
contact range. The status output becomes
active depending on the in-use range. Used
for answer-back (range check) of an external
contact range.
For details about the status output function and
the external contact range, read Subsection
4.4.2 and 4.6.6.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 40
4.4.2 Status Input Function Setting 4.5 Current Input and Current
The status input function is available when the I/O3 Output
terminal is used for the status input.
This setting can be configured with the following 4.5.1 Current Output High/Low Limit
parameters. Function
The high/low limit function is available to use the
Display menu path:
current output. Using the high/low limit function
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Status in ►
restricts the high limit of 4 to 20 mA current output
(see below)
and the low limit of the 4 to 20 mA current output.
SI3 ► Function Specify the status input function of the
I/O3 terminal.*1
parameters.
HART communication:
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display menu path:
Pulse/Status► (see below) Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ►
Pulse/Status input3 ► Specify the status input function of the (see below)
Status input3 function I/O3 terminal.*1
AO1 ► High limit Specify the high limit value to use the
I/O1 terminal for the current output.
*1: From the table below, select the status input function.
AO1 ► Low limit Specify the low limit value to use the I/O1
No function The status input is not available because the terminal for the current output.
status input function is not enabled.
AO2 ► High limit Specify the high limit value to use the
0% Signal Lock When the status input becomes active, the
current output1 of the I/O1 terminal is fixed to
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current
4 mA. output.
Ext auto zero When the status input becomes active, the zero AO2 ► Low limit Specify the low limit value to use the I/O3
adjustment function is performed automatically. or I/O4 terminal for the current output.
Note that the zero adjustment cannot be
stopped even if the status input is changed
while the zero adjustment function is running.
HART communication:
Total preset 1 When the status input becomes active, the Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
preset value specified in Subsection 4.2.7 is Analog output/input► (see below)
set to totalizer 1, and totalization starts with the
Analog output1 ► Specify the high limit value to use the
value.
Total preset 2 When the status input becomes active, the
AO1 high limit I/O1 terminal for the current output.
preset value specified in Subsection 4.2.7 is Analog output1 ► Specify the low limit value to use the I/O1
set to totalizer 2, and totalization starts with the AO1 low limit terminal for the current output.
value. Analog output2 ► Specify the high limit value to use the
Total preset 3 When the status input becomes active, the AO2 high limit I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current
preset value specified in Subsection 4.2.7 is output.
set to totalizer 3, and totalization starts with the Analog output2 ► Specify the low limit value to use the I/O3
value. AO2 low limit or I/O4 terminal for the current output.
Ext2 ranges While the status input is active, the range of
current output 1 is switched from range 1 to
range 2. Used in the external contact range. Example:
For details about the external contact range,
read Subsection 4.6.6.
If the high limit value is set to 16 mA and the low
limit value to 8 mA while the I/O1 terminal is used
for the current output, the result is as shown below.
Current [mA]
Current output before
20 limit function applied. High limit
16
12
4 Low limit
0 Time [sec]
F0412.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 41
4.5.2 Absolute Range Function (2) Absolute range with low-cut
Current [mA]
The current output function is available to use the
current output. The current signal can be output
20
both forward flow and reverse flow simultaneously
toward the span when this function is used. The 16
current output can be performed by setting the flow Low cut
12
rate of 0% to 12 mA, the reverse flow rate to 4 to 12
mA, and the forward flow rate to 12 to 20 mA. 8
However, this function is available only when the
I/O1 terminal is used for the current output. The 4
absolute range function and low cut function can
Flow rate [%]
be used simultaneously. For low cut function, read -100 0 100 F0414.ai
Subsection 4.1.7.
This setting can be configured with the following NOTE
parameters.
The absolute range function and multi range
Display menu path: function cannot be used simultaneously.
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ►
(see below)
AO1 ► Range mode Specifies the use of the absolute range
4.5.3 Alarm Output Function
function to use the I/O1 terminal for the The alarm output function is available to use the
current output.*1
current output. The current signal can be output for
HART communication: an occurrence of alarm when this function is used.
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► This setting can be configured with the following
Analog output/input► (see below) parameters.
Analog output1 ► Specifies the use of the absolute range
AO1 range mode function to use the I/O1 terminal for the Display menu path:
current output.*1
*1: From the table below, select the use of the absolute range
function. (see below)
Normal range Does not use the absolute range function. AO1 ► Alarm out Specify the alarm output function to use
Abs range Uses the absolute range function. the I/O1 terminal for the current output.*1
AO2 ► Alarm out Specify the alarm output function to use
the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current
Example:
output.*1
(1) Absolute range without low-cut
Current [mA] HART communication:
20 Analog output/input► (see below)
Analog output1 ► Specify the alarm output function to use
16 AO1 alarm out the I/O1 terminal for the current output.*1
Analog output2 ► Specify the alarm output function to use
12 AO2 alarm out the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current
output.*1
8
*1: From the table below, select the use of the alarm output
4 function.
<2.4 mA Outputs the lower current than 2.4 mA.
Flow rate [%] 3.8 mA Outputs the 3.8 mA current.
-100 0 100 F0413.ai 4 mA Outputs the 4 mA current.
20.5 mA Outputs the 20.5 mA current.
>21.6 mA Outputs the higher current than 21.6 mA.
Measured value Outputs the measured current (the current
value is undefined due to an error).
Hold Outputs the current that is applied when an
alarm has occurred.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 42
4.5.4 Current Output Priority HART communication:
Current input
The priority of the current output functions varies
Maintenance root menu ► AO/AI trim ►
depending on the setting of this instrument. AI trim ► (see below)
The current output is operated based on the AI trim Specify the adjustment value to use the
following priority level. I/O4 terminal for the current input.
Priority Output mode Clear AI trim Clears the adjustment value to use the
level I/O4 terminal for the current input.
HART multidrop mode, 4 mA fixed current output
High (For details, read Subsection 3.6.3.) Current output
Test mode Maintenance root menu ► AO/AI trim ►
(For details, read Section 4.12.)
AO trim ► (see below)
Status input function
0% signal lock output AO1 trim Specify the adjustment value to use the
(For details, read Subsection 4.4.2.) I/O1 terminal for the current output.
Clear D/A trim 1 Clears the adjustment value to use the
Alarm output function
(For details, read Subsection 4.5.3.) AO2 trim Specify the adjustment value to use
Verification function, Output during offline diagnosis
the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current
Low (For details, read Subsection 4.11.6.)
output.
Normal output Clear D/A trim 2 Clears the adjustment value to use the
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current output.
4.5.5 Current Value Adjustment Function

The current value adjustment function is available IMPORTANT
to use the current input or current output. The
current input value is adjustable when 4.0 mA for If the input or output does not match the
the 0% current value is not indicated, or 20.0 mA for specified current value when the current value
the 100% current value is not indicated. In addition, adjustment function is used, readjust the current
the current output is adjustable when 4.0 mA for the value.
0% current value is not indicated, or 20.0 mA for the
100% current value is not indicated.
parameters.
Display menu path:

Current input
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► AO/AI trim ►
(see below)
AI trim ► Trim 4 mA Specify the adjustment value to use the
I/O4 terminal for the 4 mA current input.
AI trim ► Trim 20 mA Specify the adjustment value to use the
I/O4 terminal for the 20 mA current input.
AI trim ► Trim clear Clears the adjustment value to use the
I/O4 terminal for the current input.
Current output
(see below)
AO1 trim 4 mA Specify the adjustment value to use the
I/O1 terminal for the 4 mA current output.
AO1 trim 20 mA Specify the adjustment value to use
the I/O1 terminal for the 20 mA current
output.
AO1 trim clear Clears the adjustment value to use the
AO2 trim 4 mA Specify the adjustment value to use the
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the 4 mA current
output.
AO2 trim 20 mA Specify the adjustment value to use
the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the 20 mA
current output.
AO2 trim clear Clears the adjustment value to use the
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal for the current output.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 43
4.5.6 Current Input Function Setting 4.5.7 Current Input Range Setting
The output from other instrument can be set as the The input value can be specified with the 4 mA or
current input when the I/O4 terminal is used for the 20 mA current value when the I/O4 terminal is used
current input. for the current input. The current input range can be
The current input, which can be used as the set by specifying its input value.
temperature input, is available for temperature- This setting can be configured with the following
base density correction calculation and calorie parameters.
calculation.
For details about the temperature-input density Display menu path:
correction calculation and calorie calculation, read Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ►
Subsection 4.7.5 and 4.7.6. (see below)
This setting can be configured with the following AI ► URV Specify the value that is available when
parameters. 20 mA is set to the process value that is
input with the current input through the
I/O4 terminal.
Display menu path: AI ► LRV Specify the value that is available when
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► 4 mA is set to the process value that is
input with the current input through the
(see below) I/O4 terminal.
AI ► Function Specify the current input function of the
I/O4 terminal.*1
HART communication:
HART communication:
Analog output/input ► Analog input► (see below)
AI URV Specify the value that is available when
Analog output/input► (see below) 20 mA is set to the process value that is
Analog input ► Specify the current input function of the input with the current input through the
AI function I/O4 terminal.*1 I/O4 terminal.
AI LRV Specify the value that is available when
*1: From the table below, select the current input function. 4 mA is set to the process value that is
No function The current input is not available because the input with the current input through the
current input function is not enabled. I/O4 terminal.
Monitoring Monitoring of the current input is available.
However, this function does not give any
influences for neither the density correction
calculation nor the calorie calculation.
4.5.8 Current Input High/Low Limit
Diff temperature Uses the current input as a temperature Function
difference.
The calorie calculation is available. The high/low limit function is available to use the
Ext temperature Uses the current input as the absolute
temperature.
current input. Using the high/low limit function
The density correction calculation and calorie restricts the high limit of 4 to 20 mA current input
calculation are available.
and the low limit of the 4 to 20 mA current input.
parameters.
Display menu path:

(see below)
AI ► High limit Specify the high limit value to use the
AI ► Low limit Specify the low limit value to use the I/O4
terminal for the current input.
HART communication:
Analog output/input ► Analog input►(see below)
AI high limit Specify the high limit value to use the
AI low limit Specify the low limit value to use the I/O4
terminal for the current input.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 44
4.6 Multi Range Function 4.6.3 Multi Range Operation
The multi range function performs to make
4.6.1 Multi Range Types measurements while automatically switching two
The multi range function is available when the ranges depending on the flow rate. If the measured
current output is performed through the I/O1 flow rate is higher than the low-level range, it is
terminal using the status input and status output. automatically switched to the high-level range. If
This function can be performed to measure the flow the measured flow rate is lower than the high-level
rate by switching the span of the process value PV- range, it is automatically switched to the low-level
mapped in Subsection 4.1.2 in multiple ranges. range.
The multi range function can be selected from the The in-use range can be output as the status
multi range, forward/reverse range, and external output. The relationship between the ranges and
contact range. status output is as follows.
Each range has the following feature. Low-level range The status output is not active.
Multi range Makes measurements while switching High-level range The status output is active.
multiple ranges depending on the flow
rate, and outputs the range status as the When the range is switched from the high-level
status output. range to the low-level range, the hysteresis is set.
Forward/reverse Makes measurements while switching
range multiple ranges depending on the flow
The hysteresis specifies the ratio for the low-level
direction of the flow rate, and outputs the range.
range status as the status output. The multi range switching hysteresis can be
External contact Makes measurements while switching
range multiple ranges depending on the status
specified with the following parameters.
input.
Display menu path:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ►
NOTE (see below)
Auto range hyst Specify the multi range switching
• The multi range function cannot be used hysteresis.
simultaneously with the absolute range
function. HART communication:
• The multi range function is not available when Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal is used for the current Multi range► (see below)
Auto range hyst Specify the multi range switching
output. hysteresis.
The multi range can be configured by the following

4.6.2 Multi Range Setting
procedure.
The setting for each range is required to use the (1) Specify the process value of the Primary Value,
multi range function. For information about the unit referring to Subsection 4.1.2.
setting, read Subsection 4.1.4. (2) Specify the span (forward range 1), referring to
This setting can be configured with the following Subsection 4.1.4 and 4.1.5.
parameters. For details about how to specify the (3) Specify the multi range switching hysteresis.
span (forward range 1) without using the multi (4) Set the terminal output to "Status out", referring
range function, read Subsection 4.1.5. to Subsection 4.3.1.
(5) Set the status output function to multi range,
Display menu path: referring to Subsection 4.3.7.
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► (6) Specify forward range 2, referring to Subsection
(see below) 4.6.2.
Forward span 2 Specify forward range 2. Note that the forward range 2 must be set which
Reverse span 1 Specify reverse range 1.
is larger value than the forward range 1.
HART communication:
Multi range ► (see below)
Forward span 2 Specify forward range 2.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 45
Example: 4.6.4 Forward/Reverse Range
Primary Value = Volumetric flow rate,
The forward/reverse range function can be
Flow rate span (range 1) = 50 m3/h,
performed to make measurements while
Range 2 = 100 m3/h,
automatically switching the forward and reverse
Hysteresis = 10%
ranges depending on the flow direction of the flow
In this case, the hysteresis value is obtained as
rate. The forward or reverse range can be specified
shown below.
for the range.
50 [m3/h] × 10 [%] = 5 [m3/h]
The in-use range can be output as the status
(1) When the range is switched from low-level
output. The relationship between the ranges and
range 1 to high-level range 2, the result is
status output is as follows.
obtained as shown below.
Output [%]
Forward range The status output is not active.
Reverse range The status output is active.
Forward range 1
Forward range 2
100
When the range is switched between the forward
and reverse ranges, the hysteresis is set. The
hysteresis specifies the ratio for the forward or
reverse range, whichever is lower.
parameters.
0 50 100 Flow rate
[m3/h]
Status output Display menu path:
F0415.ai
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ►
(2) When the range is switched from high- (see below)
level range 2 to low-level range 1, the result Bi direction hyst Specify the forward/reverse range
is obtained as shown below (with the switching hysteresis.
hysteresis).
Output [%] HART communication:
Forward range 1
Forward range 2
100 Multi range► (see below)
Bi direction hyst Specify the forward/reverse range
switching hysteresis.
The forward/reverse range can be specified by the

following procedure.
(1) Specify the process value of the Primary Value,
0 45 50 100 Flow rate
referring to Subsection 4.1.2.
[m3/h]
Status output
F0416.ai
(2) Specify the span (forward range 1), referring to
Subsection 4.1.4 and 4.1.5.
(3) Specify the forward/reverse range switching
NOTE hysteresis.
(4) Set the terminal output to "Status out", referring
Reconfigure the multi range setting when the to Subsection 4.3.1.
process value of the Primary Value specified in (5) Set the status output function to the forward/
Subsection 4.1.2 is changed. reverse range, referring to Subsection 4.3.7.
(6) Specify reverse range 1, referring to Subsection
4.6.2.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 46
Example: 4.6.5 Combination of Multi Range and
Primary Value = Volumetric flow rate, Forward/Reverse Range
Flow rate span (forward range 1) = 50 m3/h,
The multi range function can be combined with the
Reverse range 1 = 100 m3/h,
forward/reverse range function when the status
Hysteresis = 5%
output 1 function of the I/O2 terminal and the status
In this case, the forward range is smaller than the
output 2 function of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal are
reverse range; therefore,
set to the multi range function and forward/reverse
the hysteresis value is obtained as shown below.
range function respectively. Two forward ranges
50 [m3/h] × 5 [%] = 2.5 [m3/h]
and two reverse ranges, which are four ranges
totally, can be assigned to each range.
(1) When the range is switched from the
The in-use range can be output as the status
reverse range to the forward range, the
output. The relationship between the ranges and
result is obtained as shown below (with the
status output is as follows.
hysteresis). ○: The status output is active.
Output [%] ×: The status output is not active.
Forward
Reverse range 1 range 1 Multi range Forward/reverse
100 range
Forward range 1 × ×
Forward range 2 ○ ×
Reverse range 1 × ○
Reverse range 2 ○ ○
The multi range and forward/reverse range have

-100 0 50
Flow rate the hysteresis respectively. For details about the
2.5 [m3/h]
hysteresis of the multi range and forward/reverse
Status output range, read Subsection 4.6.3 and 4.6.4.
F0417.ai
(2) When the range is switched from the The following steps are to combine the multi range
forward range to the reverse range, the with the forward/reverse range.
result is obtained as shown below (with the (1) Specify the process value of the Primary Value,
hysteresis). referring to Subsection 4.1.2.
Output [%] (2) Specify the span (forward range 1), referring to
Forward
Reverse range 1 range 1 Subsection 4.1.4 and 4.1.5.
100
(3) Specify the hysteresis for the multi range and
forward/reverse range, referring to Subsection
4.6.3 and 4.6.4.
(4) Set each terminal output to "Status out",
(5) Set the status output function to multi range or
-100 0 50
Flow rate forward/reverse range, referring to Subsection
[m3/h]
-2.5 4.3.7.
Status output (6) Specify the forward and reverse ranges,
F0418.ai
NOTE
Reconfigure the forward/reverse range setting
when the process value of the Primary Value
specified in Subsection 4.1.2 is changed.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 47
4.6.6 External Contact Range 4.7 Auxiliary Calculation
This instrument enables a use of an external Function
contact range. This function can be measured while
automatically switching two ranges depending on 4.7.1 Fluid Flow Direction Setting
the status input.
The arrow shown on the surface of the sensor
The relationship between the ranges and status
indicates the fluid flow direction. Upon shipment
input is as follows.
from the manufacturing plant, the flow rate is
The status input is Low-level range
not active.
measured, assuming that the arrow direction is
The status input is High-level range forward.
active. This instrument can be changed the parameter
setting and measure the flow rate, assuming that
The external contact range can be specified by the the opposite direction of the arrow direction is
following procedure. forward.
(1) Specify the process value of the Primary Value, This setting can be configured with the following
referring to Subsection 4.1.2. parameters.
(2) Specify the span (forward range 1), referring to
Subsection 4.1.4 and 4.1.5. Display menu path:
(3) Set the status input function to the external Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
contact range, referring to Subsection 4.4.2. AUX calculation ► (see below)
(4) Set the status output function to the external Flow direct Specify the fluid flow direction.*1
contact range, referring to Subsection 4.3.7.
(5) Specify forward range 2, referring to Subsection HART communication:
4.6.2. Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
AUX calculation► (see below)
Example: Flow direction Specify the fluid flow direction.*1
Primary Value = Volumetric flow rate, *1: From the table below, select the fluid flow direction.
Flow rate span (forward range 1) = 50 m3/h, Forward The arrow direction of the sensor is forward.
Forward range 2 = 100 m3/h Reverse The opposite direction of the arrow direction of
the sensor is forward.
In this case, the result is obtained as shown below.
Output [%]
Forward range 1
100
Forward range 2
4.7.2 Rate Limit Function Setting
The rate limit function can perform to reduce noises
that cannot be all cleared by only lengthening the
damping time constant. When a step signal or a
sudden signal due to a slurry fluid is input, this
function judges whether the signal is a flow rate
signal or a noise signal. This judgment is made
based on the high/low limit value (rate limit value)
0 50 100
Flow rate and the rate limit function continuation time (dead
[m3/h]
Status input time), causing the noise signal over the rate limit
F0419.ai
value to be cut off.
The rate limit value is specified with the percentage
(%) for the span of the process value PV-mapped
in Subsection 4.1.2. Set "0" to the dead time if this
function is unnecessary to use.
parameters.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 48
Display menu path: Signal processing for rate limit function
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► The instrument calculates to set the specific rate
AUX calculation ► (see below) limit value to the primary delay response value of
Rate limit Specify the rate limit value. the previously sampled flow rate value. If the flow
Dead time Specify the dead time. rate value sampled at this time exceeds the rate
Noise filter Specify the noise filter (rate limit value
and dead time).*1 limit value above, its high or low limit value is set
to the flow rate value at this time. Furthermore, if
HART communication: the sampling count occurs within the dead time
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► while the signal over the high/low limit value is in
AUX calculation► (see below) the same direction, this signal is judged to be a flow
Rate limit Specify the rate limit value. rate signal.
Dead time Specify the dead time.
Noise filter Specify the noise filter (rate limit value
and dead time).*1 Example:
(1) Input = 0 to 10%, Damping time constant = 5
*1: From the table below, select the noise filter (rate limit value
and dead time). seconds, Dead time = 3 seconds, Rate limit
Rate limit value Dead time value = 1% In this case, the output for the
Manual Optional Optional step input is obtained as shown below.
Level 1 0.5% 0.5s
Input: 0 to 10%
Level 2 1.0% 1.0s Damping time constant: 5 s
Level 3 5.0% 3.0s Dead time: 3 s
Step signal Rate limit value: 1%
NOTE 10%
If either the rate limit value or the dead time is Flow rate value 63.2%
after rate limit
specified, the noise filter is set to "Manual". processing
(c)
(b) (d) Flow rate value
(a)
1% after damping
NOTE 100 225 Number of signal samples
Deat time: 3 s F0421.ai
Determining the rate limit value and dead time • In the condition above (a), the signal exceeds
The Rage limit value: The Dead time (T0): the rate limit value as compared with the
Determine the level which Determine the value
should be cut the output depending on the width of the previous value; therefore, the response is set to
fluctuation. For example, if its output fluctuation. Choose the 1%.
level is 2%, the noise of 2% larger value when the noise
or larger would be cut as which is over the dead time as The actual output, which is damped, is
shown in the following figure. shown in the following figure. processed as indicated by the solid line.
T0 • Then, the flow rate value in the dead time is
set to the "flow rate after damping calculation +
2%
2% signal of rate limit value (1%)".
• The input signal does not return to the rate limit
T0
F0420.ai value or less within the dead time; therefore, it
is judged to be a flow rate signal at the time of
(c).
• The output signal starts following the step signal
NOTE
along the damping curve.
For the rate limit function, the dead time is set to
"0" upon shipment from the manufacturing plant.
Be sure to set the dead time when the rate limit
function is used.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 49
The figure below shows an output example when a 4.7.4 Power Frequency Synchronization
slurry noise has occurred. Setting
(2) Input = 0 to 10%, Damping time constant
This function can be specified whether the
= 1 second, Dead time = 1 seconds, Rate
excitation frequency (internal signal processing
limit value = 1% In this case, the output for a
frequency) and power frequency are synchronous
slurry noise is obtained as shown below.
or asynchronous.
Input: 0 to 10%
Damping time constant: 1 s When making the excitation frequency and power
Slurry noise
Dead time: 1 s frequency asynchronous, the excitation frequency
Rate limit value: 1%
Flow rate value is determined by the set value of the power
after rate limit
+1% processing
frequency.
In the figure on the left, The power frequency synchronous/asynchronous
-1% it is determined that the
slurries noise signal is mode and the power frequency can be configured
Flow rate value after damping not a flow rate signal. with the following parameters.
Time F0422.ai
Dead time: 1 s
Display menu path:

4.7.3 Pulsing Flow Support Function AUX calculation ► (see below)
Setting Power sync on/off Makes the excitation frequency and
power frequency synchronous.*1
Using a pump, etc. may cause an error in the Set power freq Sets the power frequency when
average of the flow rate due to the pulsing flow. If the excitation frequency and power
the pulsing flow support function is used, an error frequency are asynchronous.
due to a pulsing flow can be reduced by following
a flow change while controlling the flow rate HART communication:
calculation.
This setting can be configured with the following Power synchronize Makes the excitation frequency and
parameters. power frequency synchronous.*1
Set power frequency Sets the power frequency when
Display menu path: the excitation frequency and power
frequency are asynchronous.
AUX calculation ► (see below) *1: From the table below, select the power frequency
synchronous/asynchronous mode.
Pulsing flow Specify the use of the pulsing flow
support function.*1 No Makes the excitation frequency and power
frequency asynchronous.
Yes Makes the excitation frequency and power
HART communication: frequency synchronous.
Pulsing flow Specify the use of the pulsing flow IMPORTANT
support function.*1
When using the DC power as the transmitter
*1: Select the use of the pulsing flow support function from the
table below. power, set the commercially available power
No Do not use the pulsing flow support function. frequency of the place where to use the
Yes Use the pulsing flow support function.
transmitter.
Set "Power sync on/off" to Off and specify "Set
power freq".
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 50
The excitation frequency and power frequency can The standard temperature and the compensating
be checked with the following parameters. rates can be configured with the following
parameters.
Display menu path:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display menu path:
AUX calculation ► (see below) Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
Iex power frequency Displays the power frequency Temperature ► (see below)
(synchronous with the excitation Coef A1 Specify the primary compensating rate.
frequency). Coef A2 Specify the secondary compensating
Meas power freq Displays the measured power frequency. rate.
HART communication: HART communication:

Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
AUX calculation► (see below) Process variables ► Temperature► (see below)
Iex power frequency Displays the power frequency Temp coef A1 Specify the primary compensating rate.
(synchronous with the excitation Temp coef A2 Specify the secondary compensating
frequency). rate.
Measured power Displays the measured power frequency.
frequency
The density correction calculation can be set in the
following steps.
4.7.5 Density Correction Calculation (1) Set to the use of the density corrected
When the temperature from another instrument depending on the temperature, referring to
(temperature transmitter, etc.) is used as the Subsection 4.1.9.
current input, the density correction calculation (2) Set the current input of the I/O4 terminal to the
can be performed depending on the temperature. temperature, referring to Subsection 4.5.6.
Using this function leads to enhancement of the (3) Specify the range of the current input, referring
measurement accuracy for the mass flow rate. to Subsection 4.5.7.
Transmitter (4) Specify the standard temperature and standard
density, referring to Subsection 4.1.9 and
24 V Iin+
4.1.10.
Temperature (5) Specify the primary compensating rate
transmitter, etc.
and secondary compensating rate of the
compensation formula.
0V Iin-
F0423.ai
NOTE
The density correction calculation is performed
The mass flow rate is obtained in the following only when items (1) and (2) above are specified.
expression. If they are not specified, the density is assigned
Vm=Vf×ρ to the fixed value that is specified in Subsection
Vm: Mass flow rate [kg/s] 4.1.9.
Vf: Volumetric flow rate [m3/s]
ρ: Density [kg/m3]
When the density correction calculation is

performed depending on the temperature, the
density is obtained in the following expression.
The density compensating rates must be specified
depending on applications that use this instrument.
ρr=ρn×{1+a1×(Tr-Tn)×10-2+a2×(Tr-Tn)2×10-6}
ρr: Density corrected based on the measured
temperature [kg/m3]
ρn: Standard density [kg/m3]
Tr: Measured temperature [°C]
Tn: Standard temperature [°C]
a1: Primary compensating rate
a2: Secondary compensating rate
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 51
Example: This setting can be configured with the following
If the water density is corrected based on the parameters.
temperature in the following conditions, the result is
obtained as shown below. Display menu path:
Current input range = 0.0 to 100.0°C, Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
Standard density = 1000 kg/m3, Calorie ► (see below)
Standard temperature = 20°C, Specific heat Specify the specific heat.
Primary compensating rate = -0.02,
Secondary compensating rate = -3.9 HART communication:
Device root menu ► Basic setup ►
1000
Calorie► (see below)
990 Specific heat Specify the specific heat.
Density [kg/m3]
980
The calorie calculation can be configured by the
970 following procedure.
960 • When the absolute temperature is selected as
the current input:
950
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (1) Set the current input of the I/O4 terminal to the
Temperature [°C] F0424.ai absolute temperature, referring to Subsection
4.5.6.
(2) Specify the range of the current input, referring
4.7.6 Calorie Calculation to Subsection 4.5.7.
(3) Specify the reference temperature, referring to
When the absolute temperature or the temperature
Subsection 4.1.10.
difference from other instrument (temperature
(4) Specify the specific heat.
transmitter, etc.) is used as the current input, the
calorie calculation is executable.
• When the temperature difference is selected
as the current input:
The calorie is obtained in the following expression.
(1) Set the current input of the I/O4 terminal to the
Q = c×Vm×∆t
temperature difference, referring to Subsection
Q: Calorie [J/s]
4.5.6.
C: Specific heat [J/kg•K]
(2) Specify the range of the current input, referring
Vm: Mass flow rate [kg/s]
to Subsection 4.5.7.
∆T: Temperature difference [K]
(3) Specify the specific heat.
The temperature difference of Δt varies depending
on the current input function specified in Subsection
4.5.6. If the temperature difference is selected,
specify the temperature used as the current input.
If the absolute temperature is selected, specify
a difference between the temperature used as
the current input and the reference temperature
specified in Subsection 4.1.10.
[“The temperature of being current input” – “The
reference temperature of being set”]
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Alarm Item Description
System Alarm Device breaks down and causes abnormal measurement. Device replacement is needed.
Process Alarm The device works normally and some issue of process causes abnormal measurement. Maintenance work is needed.

Setting Alarm The device works normally but parameter setting error occurs. Parameter setting is needed.
Warning The device works normally and measurement is also normal but warning occurs.
4.8 Alarm
Information The device works normally and measurement is also normal. Just reference information.
NE107 Status Status of the Device
F Failure Device malfunction, Parts malfunction
C Function Check The output signal is temporarily invalid for the local operation or manual operation.
S Out of Specification The device works in out of specification. The output signal is uncertain for the process or the ambience.
M Maintenance Required The maintenance is required in the near future.
N No Effect Other issue

4.8.1 Errors and Countermeasures
Countermeasure Operation at the time of error

Error Message
Alarm NE107 Message Output
Error Description Countermeasure Process
Item Status Total Display
Pulse / Value
Display HART Display Alarm Warning Current
Status
010: Main Main board CPU (Main board) failure was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Not
F 10 Active Burnout Stop Stop Stop
CPU FAIL CPU failure detected. service center. center. Active defined
Reverse
011: Rev calc Failure of reverse calculation was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
F 11 calculation Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
FAIL detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
failure
Turn on the power again

Main board within the temperature range.
012: Main Failure of EEPROM (Main board) Contact Yokogawa Non- Based on Normal
F 12 EEPROM If the problem does not Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
EEP FAIL was detected. service center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
failure improve, contact Yokogawa
service center.
System Main board

013: Main EEPROM (Main board) was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
Alarm F 13 EEPROM Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
EEP dflt reseted to default values. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
default
014: Snsr bd Sensor board Failure of sensor board was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Hold prior
F 14 Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
FAIL failure detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" setting
<4. Functions>
Sensor
015: Snsr Communication error of sensor Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Hold prior
F 15 communication Active Burnout Alarm Out Alarm
comm ERR was detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" setting
error
016: AD 1 A/D1 Failure of A/D transumitter 1 [flow Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Hold prior
FAIL[Sig] failure[Signal] velocity signal] was detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" setting
017: AD 2 A/D2 Failure of A/D transmitter 2 Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Hold prior
The error messages are following table. For AXFA11, read the applicable user’s manual as listed in Table 1.1.
FAIL[Excit] failure[Exciter] [Exciting current] was detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" setting
IM 01E22A02-02EN
52
Error Message
Pulse /

Display HART Display Alarm Warning Current Value

Status
Cut the power and Turn of the power, check

018: Coil Non- Based on Hold prior
F 18 Coil open Coil of sensor was disconnected. check coil & EX coil of sensor and excitation Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
open Active "FailOpts" setting
cable. cable.
019: Coil Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Hold prior
F 19 Coil short Coil of sensor was shorted. Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
short service center. center. Active "FailOpts" setting
020: Exciter Failure of excitation circuit was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
F 20 Exciter failure Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
FAIL detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
021: PWM 1 Error of pulse width modulation 1 Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
F 21 PWM1 stop Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
stop was detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
022: PWM 2 Error of pulse width modulation 2 Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
F 22 PWM2 stop Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
stop was detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
023: Opt bd Option board Mismatch of option board was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
mismatch mismatch detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
Option board
024: Opt bd Failure of EEPROM (option Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
F 24 EEPROM Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
EEP FAIL board) was detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
failure
025: Opt bd Option board A/ Failure of A/D (option board) was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
A/D FAIL D failure detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
026: Opt bd Option board Failure of SPI (option board) was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
SPI FAIL SPI failure detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
System Parameter
Alarm F 027: Restore Retry parameter Non- Based on Normal
27 restore Restore of parameters was failed. Retry parameter restoration. Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
FAIL restoration. Active "FailOpts" Operation
incomplete
Check the ambient
temperature of display
028: Ind bd Indicator board Failure of indicator board was Contact Yokogawa is within the range. If the Non- Based on Normal
FAIL failure detected. service center. problem does not improve, Active "FailOpts" Operation
contact Yokogawa service
center.
Turn on the power again
Indicator board within the temperature range.
029: Ind bd Failure of EEPROM (indicator Contact Yokogawa Non- Based on Normal
F 29 EEPROM If the problem does not Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
EEP FAIL board) was detected. service center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
failure improve, contact Yokogawa
service center.
030: LCD drv LCD driver Failure of LCD driver was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
FAIL failure detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
<4. Functions>
031: Ind bd Indicator board Mismatch of Indicator board was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Based on Normal
mismatch mismatch detected. service center. center. Active "FailOpts" Operation
Indicator Check connection
032: Ind Communication error of indicator Check connection of Indicator Non- Based on Normal
F 32 communication of Indicator & main Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
comm ERR board was detected. & main board. Active "FailOpts" Operation
error board.
033: microSD microSD Failure of microSD card was Change microSD Non- Based on Normal
F 33 Change microSD card. Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
FAIL failure detected. card. Active "FailOpts" Operation
IM 01E22A02-02EN
53
Error Message
Pulse /


Status
050: Signal Failure of input signal was Check signal cable Check signal cable and Non- Based on Hold prior
S 50 Signal overflow Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
overflow detected. and grounding. grounding. Active "FailOpts" setting
051: Empty Empty pipe Empty inside of sensor was Fill flow tube with Non- Based on Hold prior
S 51 Fill flow tube with fluid. Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
detect detection detected. (Empty pipe detection) fluid. Active "FailOpts" setting
Process 052: H/L HH/ H/L or HH/LL Flow rate exceeded upper limit or Check flow rate Check flow rate and setting Non- Normal
Alarm N 52 Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
LL alm alarm lower limit. and setting value. value. Active Operation
The resistance value of the

053: Adh Adhesion over electrodes exceeded Level 4. Non- Based on Normal
S 53 Clean electrodes. Clean electrodes. Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
over lv 4 level 4 (Adhesion detection of insulation Active "FailOpts" Operation
to electrode)
Span Setting error of flow span was

060: Span Change span Check or change span Non- Based on Normal
S 60 configuration detected. Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
cfg ERR parameter setting. parameter setting. Active "FailOpts" Operation
error (fulfill "0.05 m/s < Span < 16 m/s")
Analog output Change Analog

062: AO 1 Setting error of Current output 1 Check or change Analog Non- Normal
S 62 1 4-20 mA limit output 1 Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
4-20 lmt was detected. (fulfill "LRV < HRV") output 1 parameter setting. Active Operation
error parameter setting.
Analog output Change Analog

063: AO 2 Setting error of Current output 2 Check or change Analog Non- Normal
S 63 2 4-20 mA limit output 2 Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
4-20 lmt was detected. (fulfill "LRV < HRV") output 2 parameter setting. Active Operation
Setting error of Multi range

Analog output function was detected. Change multi
064: AO 1 mlt Check or change multi range Non- Based on Normal
S 64 1 multi range (fulfill "1st range <= 2nd range" range parameter Active Alarm Out Normal Alarm
rng parameter setting. Active "FailOpts" Operation
error and select "either multi range or setting.
Setting absolute range".)
Alarm Setting error of ararm high/low
H/L HH/LL limit function was detected. Change H/L, HH/
065: H/L cfg Check and change H/L, HH/ Non- Based on Normal
N 65 configuration (fulfill "Hi Alarm - Lo Alarm > H/L LL parameter Active Alarm Out Normal Alarm
ERR LL parameter setting. Active "FailOpts" Operation
error Hys" and "HH Alarm - LL Alarm > setting.
HH/LL Hys")
Density Setting error of density value was

066: Density Change Density Check and change Density Non- Based on Normal
S 66 configuration detected when PV was set to Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
cfg ERR parameter setting. parameter setting. Active "FailOpts" Operation
error mass flow rate.
Pulse output 1 Change Pulse

067: Pls 1 cfg Setting error of Pulse output 1 was Change Pulse output 1 Non- Normal
S 67 configuration output 1 Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Continue Alarm
ERR detected. parameter setting. Active Operation
<4. Functions>
Pulse output 2 Change Pulse

068: Pls 2 cfg Setting error of Pulse output 2 Check and change Pulse Non- Normal
S 68 configuration output 2 Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Continue Alarm
ERR was detected. output 2 parameter setting. Active Operation
IM 01E22A02-02EN
54
Error Message
Pulse /


Status
Configuration error of nominal

Nominal size size was detected.
069: Nomi Change nominal Check and change nominal Non- Based on Normal
C 69 configuration (fulfill "0.99 mm < nominal size < Active Alarm Out Alarm Out Alarm
size cfg paramter setting. paramter setting. Active "FailOpts" Operation
error 3000.10 mm (0.01 inch < nominal
size < 120.10 inch)")
Setting error of electrode

Adhesion adhesion detection function was
070: Adh cfg Change adhesion Check and change adhesion Non- Normal
Setting C 70 configuration detected. Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
ERR parameter setting. parameter setting. Active Operation
Alarm error (fulfill "Level1 < Level2 < Level3 <
Level4")
Setting error of flow noise

Flow noise
071: FLN cfg verification function was detected. Change flow noise Change flow noise paramter Non- Normal
C 71 configuration Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
ERR (fulfill "Level1 < Level2 < Level3 < paramter setting. setting. Active Operation
error
Level4")
072: Log not Data logging Insert microSD Non- Normal

C 72 Data logging failed to start. Insert microSD card. Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
start not started card. Active Operation
Check process value and

080: AO 1 Analog output Saturation of Analog output 1 was Check process or Non- Normal
S 80 current output 1 parameter Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
saturate 1 saturated detected. parameter setting. Active Operation
setting.

081: AO 2 Analog output Saturation of Analog output 2 was Check process or Non- Normal
S 81 current output 2 parameter Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
saturate 2 saturated detected. parameter setting. Active Operation
setting.

082: Pls 1 Pulse output 1 Saturation of Pulse output 1 was Check process or Non- Normal
S 82 pulse output 1 parameter Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
saturate saturated detected. parameter setting. Active Operation
setting.

083: Pls 2 Pulse output 2 Saturation of Pulse output 2 was Check process or Non- Normal
S 83 pulse output 2 parameter Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
setting.
Warning
Check current input value
084: AI Analog input Saturation of Analog input was Check process or Non- Normal
S 84 and current input parameter Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
setting..
Check the signal/

085: Cable Cable Misconnection of cable was Check the signal cable and Non- Normal
C 85 EX Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
miscon misconnect detected. excitation cable connection. Active Operation
cable connection.
086: Coil Coil insulation Insulation deterioration of coil was Coil insulation is Contact Yokogawa service Non- Normal
C 86 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
<4. Functions>
insulation warning detected. detected. center. Active Operation
The resistance value of electrode

087: Adhesion Adhesion over exceeded Level 3. Recommend Recommend cleaning Non- Normal
M 87 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
lv 3 level 3 (Adhesion detection of insulation cleaning electrode electrode. Active Operation
to electrode)
IM 01E22A02-02EN
55
Error Message
Pulse /


Status
Low
Decrease of conductivity was Fluid conductivity Non- Normal
N 088: LC warn 88 conductivity Check fluid conductivity. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
detected. is too low. Active Operation
warning
Electrode
089: Insu Insulation Insulation deterioration of Contact Yokogawa service Non- Normal
M 89 corrosion Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
detect detection electrode was detected. center. Active Operation
detection warning.
090: FLN Flow noise over Flow noise exceeded Level 3. Check fluid conductivity or Non- Normal
N 90 Check the fluid. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
over lv 3 level 3 (Detection of flow noise) bubble. Active Operation
091: FLN Flow noise over Flow noise exceeded Level 4. Check fluid conductivity or Non- Normal
N 91 Check the fluid. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
over lv 4 level 4 (Detection of flow noise) bubble. Active Operation
Result of Autozero adjustment Check fluid is stopped

Autozero Check Non- Normal
C 092: AZ warn 92 |Mag Flow Zero| exceeded 10 cm/ when executing auto-zero Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
warning environment. Active Operation
s. adjustment.
093: Verif Verification Interruption of verification function Last Verification Non- Normal
C 93 Execute Verification again. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
warn warning was detected. was interrupted. Active Operation
094: Fact Factory noise Non- Normal

C 94 fluctuation of flow became larger. Check the fluid. Check the fluid. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
noise warn warning Active Operation
Test mode was executed for any

095: of Flow velocity, Volumetric flow
Simulation Simulation Release simulation or test Non- Normal
Warning C Simulate 95 rate, Mass flow rate, Calorie, Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
active running. mode. Active Operation
active Current output, Pulse output,
Status input, Status output.
Analog output It was detected that fixied value is Please cancel Check current output 1 is test Non- Normal
S 096: AO 1 fix 96 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
1 fixed set to Current output 1. the fixed output. mode or not. Active Operation
Analog output It was detected that fixied value is Please cancel Check current output 2 is test Non- Normal
S 097: AO 2 fix 97 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
2 fixed set to Current output 2. the fixed output. mode or not. Active Operation
Pulse output 1 It was detected that fixied value is Please cancel Check pulse output 1 is test Non- Normal
S 098: Pls 1 fix 98 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
fixed set to Pulse output 1. the fixed output. mode or not. Active Operation
Pulse output 2 It was detected that fixied value is Please cancel Check pulse output 2 is test Non- Normal
S 099: Pls 2 fix 99 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
fixed set to Pulse output 2. the fixed output. mode or not. Active Operation
Analog input It was detected that fixied value is Please cancel Check current input is test Non- Normal
S 100: AI fix 100 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
fixed set to Current input. the fixed input. mode or not. Active Operation
101: Param Parameter Restore function of parameter is Non- Normal

<4. Functions>
C 101 ― ― Active Normal Normal Continue Execute

restore run restore running running. Active Operation
Display over Number of digits available for Check Display Check Display format Non- Normal
N 102: Disp over 102 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
warning display exceeded the limit. format parameter. parameter. Active Operation
microSD card may

103: SD size microSD card Free space of microSD card microSD card may run out of Non- Normal
N 103 run out of memory Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
warn size warning decreased to less than 10%. memory space. Active Operation
space.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
56
Error Message
Pulse /


Status
Parameter
104: Bkup Retry parameter Non- Normal
M 104 backup Parameter backup failed. Retry parameter backup. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
incmplt backup. Active Operation
incomplete
105: SD microSD card Mismatch of microSD card was Change microSD Non- Normal
S 105 Change microSD card. Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
mismatch mismatch detected. card. Active Operation
Warning
microSD Remove microSD
106: SD Remove microSD in Non- Normal
M 106 card removal Removal of microSD card failed. in appropriate Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
removal ERR appropriate rocedure. Active Operation
procedure error procedure.
131: Trans Transmitter Mismatch of sensor and Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Normal
N 131 Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
mismatch type mismatch transmitter was detected. service center. center. Active Operation
120: Error of Watchdoc timer was Contact Yokogawa service Non- Normal
N 120 Watchdog ― Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
Watchdog detected. center. Active Operation
121: Power Non- Normal

N 121 Power off Power-off was detected. ― ― Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
off Active Operation
122: Inst Instant power Instantaneous power failure was Non- Normal
N 122 ― ― Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
power FAIL failure detected. Active Operation
Information
123: Param Parameter Non- Normal
N 123 Parameter backup is running. ― ― Active Normal Normal Continue Execute
bkup run backup running Active Operation
124: Data log Data logging Non- Normal

N 124 Data log is running. ― ― Active Normal Normal Continue Icon
run running Active Operation
130: DevID Device ID not No data entry of Device ID was Contact Yokogawa Contact Yokogawa service Non- Normal
N 130 Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
not enter entered detected. service center. center. Active Operation
<4. Functions>
IM 01E22A02-02EN
57
<4. Functions> 58
4.8.2 Alarm Display Setting (2) Alarm display based on NAMUR NE107
A prefix can be assigned to the alarm name based
(1) Alarm display
on NAMUR NE107.
If an error occurs on this instrument, an alarm
appears on the display. The alarm display modes
parameters.
are classified into two types: mode to display the
process value and alarm name, and mode to
Display menu path:
display the alarm name and action.
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ►
If multiple errors occur on this instrument, the
Optional config ► (see below)
corresponding alarms are displayed in sequence on
NE107 display Sets the alarm display based on NAMUR
the display. NE107.*1
parameters. HART communication:
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ►
Display menu path: Display operation configuration► (see below)
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Display NE107 Sets the alarm display based on NAMUR
NE107.*1
Alarm display Sets the alarm display.*1 *1: From the table below, select alarm display.
Normal Sets to the normal alarm display.
HART communication: NE107 Sets the alarm display based on NAMUR
NE107.
Display operation configuration► (see below)
Display alarm Sets the alarm display.*1 4.8.3 Alarm History Function
*1: From the table below, select the alarm display. The alarm history function records the previously
Normal Displays the process value and alarm name. detected alarms as a history.
01 : 00 This setting can be configured with the following
0.00000 m/s VEL
parameters.
0.0 % FLP
4.000 mA AO1
018: Coil open Display menu path:
SET SFT INC Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Sts/Self test ►
F0425.ai
Detail Displays the alarm name and action.

Alarm ► Alarm record ► (see below)
01 : 00 Record alarm 1 Displays the name of new alarm 1.
System Alarm Record time 1 Displays the operating time at which new
018: Coil open alarm 1 has occurred.
Record alarm 2 Displays the name of new alarm 2.
Cut the power and
Record time 2 Displays the operating time at which new
check coil & EX cable.
alarm 2 has occurred.
SET SFT INC
F0426.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 59
HART communication: Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Sts/Self test ►
Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm record mask ► (see below)
Alarm ► Alarm record► (see below) Mask 1-1 Specifies the mask function for alarm
Alarm record 1 Displays the name of new alarm 1. history 1-1.
Alarm record time 1 Displays the operating time at which new Mask 1-2 Specifies the mask function for alarm
alarm 1 has occurred. history 1-2.
Alarm record 2 Displays the name of new alarm 2. Mask 2-1 Specifies the mask function for alarm
Alarm record time 2 Displays the operating time at which new history 2-1.
alarm 2 has occurred. Mask 2-2 Specifies the mask function for alarm
Alarm record 3 Displays the name of new alarm 3. history 2-2.
Alarm record time 3 Displays the operating time at which new Mask 3-1 Specifies the mask function for alarm
alarm 3 has occurred. history 3-1.
Alarm record 4 Displays the name of new alarm 4.
Alarm record time 4 Displays the operating time at which new HART communication:
Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ►
Alarm ► Alarm out mask► (see below)
The operating time at alarm occurrence is displayed
Alarm out mask 1 Specifies the mask function for alarm
in format, “dddddD hh:mm”. “dddddD” indicates the notification 1.
day, “hh” indicates the hour, and “mm” indicates the Alarm out mask 2 Specifies the mask function for alarm
notification 2.
minute. Alarm out mask 3 Specifies the mask function for alarm
notification 3.
Example: Alarm out mask 4 Specifies the mask function for alarm
notification 4.
“00031D 12:34” is displayed.
This example shows that an alarm has occurred Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ►
when the instrument has operated for 31 days, 12 Alarm ► Alarm record mask► (see below)
hours, and 34 minutes. Alarm record mask 1 Specifies the mask function for alarm
history 1.
Alarm record mask 2 Specifies the mask function for alarm
4.8.4 Alarm Mask Function history 2.
Alarm record mask 3 Specifies the mask function for alarm
The alarm mask function can mask the specified history 3.
alarm, hide an alarm notification, and record no
alarm history. This function can be set for each of
the alarm notification and alarm history.
NOTE
This setting can be configured with the following Note that the alarm masked by the alarm
parameters. notification mask function is not recorded in the
alarm history.
Display menu path:
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Sts/Self test ►
Alarm ► Alarm out mask ► (see below)
Mask 1-1 Specifies the mask function for alarm
notification 1-1.
notification 1-2.
notification 2-1.
notification 2-2.
notification 3-1.
notification 3-2.
notification 4-1.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 60
The alarm mask function setting is as follows.
Parameter name Indicates the name of the mask setting parameter.
Alarm name Indicates the alarm name.
Default value Indicates the default value (upon shipment from the manufacturing plant). (○: Masked, -: Not masked)
Attribute Indicates whether the mask setting is enabled or disabled. (○: Enabled, -: Disabled)
(1) Alarm notification mask function

Display HART
Parameter Default Default
Alarm name Attribute Parameter name Alarm name Attribute
name value value
― 010: Main CPU FAIL ― ― ― 10 Main board CPU failure ― ―
― 011: Rev calc FAIL ― ― ― 11 Reverse calculation failure ― ―
― 012: Main EEP FAIL ― ― ― 12 Main board EEPROM failure ― ―
Mask 1-1 013: Main EEP dflt ―  Alarm out mask 1 13 Main board EEPROM default ― 
― 014: Snsr bd FAIL ― ― ― 14 Sensor board failure ― ―
― 015: Snsr comm ERR ― ― ― 15 Sensor communication error ― ―
― 016: AD 1 FAIL[Sig] ― ― ― 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] ― ―
― 017: AD 2 FAIL[Excit] ― ― ― 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] ― ―
― 018: Coil open ― ― ― 18 Coil open ― ―
― 019: Coil short ― ― ― 19 Coil short ― ―
― 020: Exciter FAIL ― ― ― 20 Exciter failure ― ―
Mask 1-2 021: PWM 1 stop ―  Alarm out mask 1 21 PWM1 stop ― 
Mask 1-2 022: PWM 2 stop ―  Alarm out mask 1 22 PWM2 stop ― 
Mask 1-2 023: Opt bd mismatch ―  Alarm out mask 1 23 Option board mismatch ― 
Mask 1-2 024: Opt bd EEP FAIL ―  Alarm out mask 1 24 Option board EEPROM failure ― 
Mask 1-2 025: Opt bd A/D FAIL ―  Alarm out mask 1 25 Option board A/D failure ― 
Mask 1-2 026: Opt bd SPI FAIL ―  Alarm out mask 1 26 Option board SPI failure ― 
― 027: Restore FAIL ― ― ― 27 Parameter restore incomplete ― ―
Mask 1-2 028: Ind bd FAIL   Alarm out mask 1 28 Indicator board failure  
Mask 1-2 029: Ind bd EEP FAIL ―  Alarm out mask 1 29 Indicator board EEPROM failure ― 
Mask 1-2 030: LCD drv FAIL ―  Alarm out mask 1 30 LCD driver failure ― 
Mask 1-2 031: Ind bd mismatch ―  Alarm out mask 1 31 Indicator board mismatch ― 
Mask 1-2 032: Ind comm ERR ―  Alarm out mask 1 32 Indicator communication error ― 
Mask 1-2 033: microSD FAIL ―  Alarm out mask 1 33 microSD failure ― 
Mask 2-1 050: Signal overflow ―  Alarm out mask 2 50 Signal overflow ― 
Mask 2-1 051: Empty detect ―  Alarm out mask 2 51 Empty pipe detection ― 
Mask 2-1 052: H/L HH/LL alm   Alarm out mask 2 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm  
Mask 2-1 053: Adh over lv 4   Alarm out mask 2 53 Adhesion over level 4  
Mask 2-1 060: Span cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 60 Span configuration error ― 
Mask 2-1 062: AO 1 4-20 lmt ―  Alarm out mask 2 62 Analog output 1 4-20 mA limit error ― 
Mask 2-1 063: AO 2 4-20 lmt ―  Alarm out mask 2 63 Analog output 2 4-20 mA limit error ― 
Mask 2-1 064: AO 1 mlt rng ―  Alarm out mask 2 64 Analog output 1 multi range error ― 
Mask 2-1 065: H/L cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 65 H/L HH/LL configuration error ― 
Mask 2-1 066: Density cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 66 Density configuration error ― 
Mask 2-2 067: Pls 1 cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 67 Pulse output 1 configuration error ― 
Mask 2-2 068: Pls 2 cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 68 Pulse output 2 configuration error ― 
Mask 2-2 069: Nomi size cfg ―  Alarm out mask 2 69 Nominal size configuration error ― 
Mask 2-2 070: Adh cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 70 Adhesion configuration error ― 
Mask 2-2 071: FLN cfg ERR ―  Alarm out mask 2 71 Flow noise configuration error ― 
Mask 2-2 072: Log not start ―  Alarm out mask 2 72 Data logging not started ― 
Mask 2-2 080: AO 1 saturate   Alarm out mask 2 80 Analog output 1 saturated  
Mask 2-2 081: AO 2 saturate   Alarm out mask 2 81 Analog output 2 saturated  
Mask 2-2 082: Pls 1 saturate   Alarm out mask 2 82 Pulse output 1 saturated  
Mask 2-2 083: Pls 2 saturate   Alarm out mask 2 83 Pulse output 2 saturated  
Mask 2-2 084: AI saturate   Alarm out mask 2 84 Analog input saturated  
Mask 2-2 085: Cable miscon ―  Alarm out mask 2 85 Cable misconnect ― 
Mask 2-2 086: Coil insulation   Alarm out mask 2 86 Coil insulation warning  
Mask 2-2 131: Trans mismatch ―  Alarm out mask 2 131 Transmitter type mismatch ― 
Mask 3-1 087: Adhesion lv 3   Alarm out mask 3 87 Adhesion over level 3  
Mask 3-1 088: LC warn   Alarm out mask 3 88 Low conductivity warning  
Mask 3-1 089: Insu detect   Alarm out mask 3 89 Insulation detection  
Mask 3-1 090: FLN over lv 3   Alarm out mask 3 90 Flow noise over level 3  
Mask 3-1 091: FLN over lv 4   Alarm out mask 3 91 Flow noise over level 4  
Mask 3-1 092: AZ warn   Alarm out mask 3 92 Autozero warning  
Mask 3-1 093: Verif warn   Alarm out mask 3 93 Verification warning  
Mask 3-1 094: Fact noise warn   Alarm out mask 3 94 Factory noise warning  
Mask 3-1 095: Simulate active ―  Alarm out mask 3 95 Simulation active ― 
Mask 3-1 096: AO 1 fix ―  Alarm out mask 3 96 Analog output 1 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 097: AO 2 fix ―  Alarm out mask 3 97 Analog output 2 fixed ― 
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 61
Display HART
name value value
Mask 3-1 098: Pls 1 fix ―  Alarm out mask 3 98 Pulse output 1 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 099: Pls 2 fix ―  Alarm out mask 3 99 Pulse output 2 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 100: AI fix ―  Alarm out mask 3 100 Analog input fixed ― 
Mask 3-2 101: Param restore run   Alarm out mask 3 101 Parameter restore running  
Mask 3-2 102: Disp over   Alarm out mask 3 102 Display over warning  
Mask 3-2 103: SD size warn   Alarm out mask 3 103 microSD card size warning  
Mask 3-2 104: Bkup incmplt   Alarm out mask 3 104 Parameter backup incomplete  
Mask 3-2 105: SD mismatch   Alarm out mask 3 105 microSD card mismatch  
Mask 3-2 106: SD removal ERR   Alarm out mask 3 106 microSD card removal procedure error  
Mask 3-2 120: Watchdog*1   Alarm out mask 3 120 Watchdog*1  
Mask 3-2 121: Power off*1   Alarm out mask 3 121 Power off*1  
Mask 3-2 122: Inst power FAIL*1   Alarm out mask 3 122 Instant power failure*1  
Mask 3-2 123: Param bkup run   Alarm out mask 3 123 Parameter backup running  
Mask 3-2 124: Data log run   Alarm out mask 3 124 Data logging running  
Mask 4-1 130:DevID not enter   Alarm out mask 4 130 Device ID not entered  
*1: Recorded in the alarm history regardless of the setting of the alarm notification mask function.
(2) Alarm history mask function

Display HART
name value value
― 010: Main CPU FAIL ― ― ― 10 Main board CPU failure ― ―
― 011: Rev calc FAIL ― ― ― 11 Reverse calculation failure ― ―
― 012: Main EEP FAIL ― ― ― 12 Main board EEPROM failure ― ―
Mask 1-1 013: Main EEP dflt ―  Alarm record mask 1 13 Main board EEPROM default ― 
― 014: Snsr bd FAIL ― ― ― 14 Sensor board failure ― ―
― 015: Snsr comm ERR ― ― ― 15 Sensor communication error ― ―
― 016: AD 1 FAIL[Sig] ― ― ― 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] ― ―
― 017: AD 2 FAIL[Excit] ― ― ― 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] ― ―
― 018: Coil open ― ― ― 18 Coil open ― ―
― 019: Coil short ― ― ― 19 Coil short ― ―
Mask 1-1 020: Exciter FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 20 Exciter failure ― 
Mask 1-2 021: PWM 1 stop ―  Alarm record mask 1 21 PWM1 stop ― 
Mask 1-2 022: PWM 2 stop ―  Alarm record mask 1 22 PWM2 stop ― 
Mask 1-2 023: Opt bd mismatch ―  Alarm record mask 1 23 Option board mismatch ― 
Mask 1-2 024: Opt bd EEP FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 24 Option board EEPROM failure ― 
Mask 1-2 025: Opt bd A/D FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 25 Option board A/D failure ― 
Mask 1-2 026: Opt bd SPI FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 26 Option board SPI failure ― 
― 027: Restore FAIL ― ― ― 27 Parameter restore incomplete ― ―
Mask 1-2 028: Ind bd FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 28 Indicator board failure ― 
Mask 1-2 029: Ind bd EEP FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 29 Indicator board EEPROM failure ― 
Mask 1-2 030: LCD drv FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 30 LCD driver failure ― 
Mask 1-2 031: Ind bd mismatch ―  Alarm record mask 1 31 Indicator board mismatch ― 
Mask 1-2 032: Ind comm ERR ―  Alarm record mask 1 32 Indicator communication error ― 
Mask 1-2 033: microSD FAIL ―  Alarm record mask 1 33 microSD failure ― 
Mask 2-1 050: Signal overflow ―  Alarm record mask 2 50 Signal overflow ― 
Mask 2-1 051: Empty detect ―  Alarm record mask 2 51 Empty pipe detection ― 
Mask 2-1 052: H/L HH/LL alm ―  Alarm record mask 2 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm ― 
Mask 2-1 053: Adh over lv 4 ―  Alarm record mask 2 53 Adhesion over level 4 ― 
― 060: Span cfg ERR  ― ― 60 Span configuration error  ―
― 062: AO 1 4-20 lmt  ― ― 62 Analog output 1 4-20 mA limit error  ―
― 063: AO 2 4-20 lmt  ― ― 63 Analog output 2 4-20 mA limit error  ―
― 064: AO 1 mlt rng  ― ― 64 Analog output 1 multi range error  ―
― 065: H/L cfg ERR  ― ― 65 H/L HH/LL configuration error  ―
― 066: Density cfg ERR  ― ― 66 Density configuration error  ―
― 067: Pls 1 cfg ERR  ― ― 67 Pulse output 1 configuration error  ―
― 068: Pls 2 cfg ERR  ― ― 68 Pulse output 2 configuration error  ―
― 069: Nomi size cfg  ― ― 69 Nominal size configuration error  ―
― 070: Adh cfg ERR  ― ― 70 Adhesion configuration error  ―
― 071: FLN cfg ERR  ― ― 71 Flow noise configuration error  ―
― 072: Log not start  ― ― 72 Data logging not started  ―
― 080: AO 1 saturate  ― ― 80 Analog output 1 saturated  ―
― 081: AO 2 saturate  ― ― 81 Analog output 2 saturated  ―
― 082: Pls 1 saturate  ― ― 82 Pulse output 1 saturated  ―
― 083: Pls 2 saturate  ― ― 83 Pulse output 2 saturated  ―
― 084: AI saturate  ― ― 84 Analog input saturated  ―
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 62
Display HART
name value value
Mask 2-2 085: Cable miscon ―  Alarm record mask 2 85 Cable misconnect ― 
― 086: Coil insulation  ― ― 86 Coil insulation warning  ―
― 131: Trans mismatch  ― ― 131 Transmitter type mismatch  ―
― 087: Adhesion lv 3  ― ― 87 Adhesion over level 3  ―
― 088: LC warn  ― ― 88 Low conductivity warning  ―
― 089: Insu detect  ― ― 89 Insulation detection  ―
― 090: FLN over lv 3  ― ― 90 Flow noise over level 3  ―
― 091: FLN over lv 4  ― ― 91 Flow noise over level 4  ―
― 092: AZ warn  ― ― 92 Autozero warning  ―
― 093: Verif warn  ― ― 93 Verification warning  ―
― 094: Fact noise warn  ― ― 94 Factory noise warning  ―
― 095: Simulate active  ― ― 95 Simulation active  ―
― 096: AO 1 fix  ― ― 96 Analog output 1 fixed  ―
― 097: AO 2 fix  ― ― 97 Analog output 2 fixed  ―
― 098: Pls 1 fix  ― ― 98 Pulse output 1 fixed  ―
― 099: Pls 2 fix  ― ― 99 Pulse output 2 fixed  ―
― 100: AI fix  ― ― 100 Analog input fixed  ―
― 101: Param restore run  ― ― 101 Parameter restore running  ―
― 102: Disp over  ― ― 102 Display over warning  ―
― 103: SD size warn  ― ― 103 microSD card size warning  ―
― 104: Bkup incmplt  ― ― 104 Parameter backup incomplete  ―
― 105: SD mismatch  ― ― 105 microSD card mismatch  ―
― 106: SD removal ERR  ― ― 106 microSD card removal procedure error  ―
― 120: Watchdog*1 ― ― ― 120 Watchdog*1 ― ―
― 121: Power off*1 ― ― ― 121 Power off*1 ― ―
― 122: Inst power FAIL*1 ― ― ― 122 Instant power failure*1 ― ―
― 123: Param bkup run  ― ― 123 Parameter backup running  ―
― 124: Data log run  ― ― 124 Data logging running  ―
Mask 3-1 130:DevID not enter   Alarm record mask 3 130 Device ID not entered  
*1: Recorded in the alarm history regardless of the setting of the alarm notification mask function.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 63
4.9 Display 4.9.2 Display Item Setting
This instrument can be shown up to eight items
4.9.1 Language Setting on the display while scrolling the screen. Specify a
The language to be used on the display can be display item in each of eight display lines.
selected from nine types. This setting can be configured with the following
Select the desired display language from the parameters.
languages that are included in the language
package specified at the time of ordering. Display menu path:
This setting can be configured with the following Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ►
parameters. Line select ► (see below)
Line 1 Specify item 1 to be shown on the display.*1
Line 2 Specify item 2 to be shown on the display. *1
Display menu path:
Language selection: Line 4 Specify item 4 to be shown on the display. *1
Device setup ► (see below) Line 5 Specify item 5 to be shown on the display. *1
Language Specify the language to be used on the
display.*1
Display of language package:

HART communication:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ►
Optional config ► (see below) Line select► (see below)
Language package Indicates the language package for the Display select1 Specify item 1 to be shown on the display. *1
display. Display select2 Specify item 2 to be shown on the display. *1
Display select3 Specify item 3 to be shown on the display. *1
HART communication: Display select4 Specify item 4 to be shown on the display. *1
Display operation configuration► (see below) Display select7 Specify item 7 to be shown on the display. *1
Language Specify the language to be used on the Display select8 Specify item 8 to be shown on the display. *1
display.*1
Language package Indicates the language package for the *1: From the table below, select the items to be shown on the
display. display.
None Does not display items (item 1 is not
The following languages are included in the selectable).
Flow rate(%) Displays the flow rate for the span of the
language package. process value that is PV-mapped in Subsection
Package 1 Japanese, English, French, German, 4.1.2.
Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and PV Displays the process value that is PV-mapped
in Subsection 4.1.2.
Russian
Velocity Displays the flow velocity.
Package 2 English and Chinese
Volume flow Displays the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow Displays the mass flow rate.
*1: From the table below, select the language to be used on the Flow rate(%Bar) Displays the flow rate for the span of the
display. process value that is PV-mapped in Subsection
English Displays parameters in English. 4.1.2, using a bar graph.
French Displays parameters in French. Calorie Displays the calorie.
German Displays parameters in German. Totalizer 1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
Italian Displays parameters in Italian. Totalizer 2 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 2.
Spanish Displays parameters in Spanish. Totalizer 3 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 3.
Portuguese Displays parameters in Portuguese. Tag number Displays the tag number.
Russian Displays parameters in Russian. Long tag Displays the long tag.
Chinese Displays parameters in Chinese. Commun protocol Displays the communication protocol.
Japanese Displays parameters in Japanese. Adhesion Displays the adhesion level of the electrode
adhesion detecting function.
Analog out 1 Specify the current value of current output 1 for
the I/O1 terminal.
Analog out 2 Specify the current value of current output 2 for
the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Flow noise Displays the noise level of the flow noise
diagnosis function.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 64
4.9.3 Decimal-Point Position Setting 4.9.4 Display Line Count and Scroll
Settings
The number of decimal places can be set to the
automatic adjustment or fix mode for the totalized This instrument can be shown up to four lines on
value or process value PV-mapped in Subsection the display while scrolling up to eight items. The
4.1.2. scroll method can be selected from the automatic
This setting can be configured with the following display switching and the display switching using
parameters. the IR switch.
These settings can be configured with the following
Display menu path: parameters.
Disp format ► (see below) Display menu path:
Format PV Specify the decimal-point position for Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ►
the process value that is PV-mapped in Optional config ► (see below)
Subsection 4.1.2.*1
Format total 1 Specify the decimal-point position for the Line mode Specify the number of lines to be shown
totalized value of totalizer 1.*1 on the display.*1
Format total 2 Specify the decimal-point position for the Scroll mode Specify the display scroll method.*2
totalized value of totalizer 2.*1
Format total 3 Specify the decimal-point position for the HART communication:
totalized value of totalizer 3.*1 Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ►
HART communication: Display line Specify the number of lines to be shown
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► on the display.*1
Display format► (see below) Display scroll Specify the display scroll method.*2
Display format PV Specify the decimal-point position for
the process value that is PV-mapped in
Subsection 4.1.2.*1
Display format total 1 Specify the decimal-point position for the
*1: From the table below, select the position of the decimal point.
Process value
Auto Automatically adjusts the number of decimal places.
0 digit Fixes the number of decimal places to "0".
Totalized value
Auto Automatically adjusts the number of decimal places.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 65
*1: From the table below, select the number of display lines from 4.9.5 Trend Graph Setting
the table below.
The font size is automatically adjusted depending on the The trend graph display function displays a time
number of display lines.
change of the selected item as a trend graph. Up to
1 Line(Big) (1-line display without unit. The numeric value is
displayed largely.) four items can be shown in a trend graph. A trend
graph is scaled automatically, and the time axis
01 : 00
TL1 flows from the left to the right.
12345.678
01 : 00
PRV Process value
01/01
01:00 Display start time
SET SFT INC
01/01
F0427.ai
01:01 Display end time
SET SFT INC
1 Line (1-line display with an unit) F0432.ai
01 : 00
PRV
(1) Trend graph display setting
12345.6 kg/h
The table below shows the process values, low limit
values, and high limit values that can be shown in a
SET SFT INC trend graph.
F0428.ai
Process Low limit
Display High limit value
2 Line (2-line display with units) value value
Flow rate FLP 0% 100%
01 : 00 (%)
12.3456 m /h
VFL PV PRV 0 Span value specified in
3
Flow velocity VEL Subsection 4.1.5
Volumetric VFL
1.23456 m/s
VEL
flow rate
SET SFT INC Mass flow MFL
F0429.ai rate
Calorie CAL
3 Line (3-line display with units) Current AO1 4 mA 20 mA
output 1
01 : 00
Current AO2
12345.6 kg/h
PRV
output 2
Totalization 1 TL1 Preset value Target value of the
12345.678 kg TL1 Totalization 2 TL2 specified in totalizer specified in
12.345678 m3 TL2 Totalization 3 TL3 Subsection Subsection 4.2.3
SET SFT INC 4.2.7
F0430.ai
4 Line (4-line display with units) This setting can be configured with the following
01 : 00 parameters.
12345.6 kg/h MFL
12345.6 MJ/h CAL
Display menu path:
12345.6 kg/h PRV
12345.678 kg TL1
SET SFT INC Optional config ► (see below)
F0431.ai Display mode Specifies the display of a trend graph.*1
*2: From the table below, select the scroll method. HART communication:
Off Does not scroll. Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ►
Manual Sets to the scroll using the IR switch.
Auto(2 s) Sets to the automatic scroll at 2-second intervals.
Auto(4 s) Sets to the automatic scroll at 4-second intervals. Display measure Specifies the display of a trend graph.*1
Auto(8 s) Sets to the automatic scroll at 8-second intervals. mode
*1: From the table below, select the trend graph display.
Normal Does not display a trend graph (normal display).
Trend Displays a trend graph.
NOTE
The trend graph display function is not
synchronized with the multi range and forward/
reverse range functions.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 66
(2) Trend graph display item setting *1: From the table below, select the trend graph update period.
This setting can be configured with the following 0.2s Sets the update period to 0.2 sec.
0.4s Sets the update period to 0.4 sec.
parameters. 1.0s Sets the update period to 1 sec.
2.0s Sets the update period to 2 sec.
4.0s Sets the update period to 4 sec.
Display menu path: 8.0s Sets the update period to 8 sec.
Trend select ► (see below)
4.9.6 Other Setting
Trend 1 Specify item 1 to be shown in a trend
graph.*1 (1) Display contrast setting
The display can be adjusted the contrast in 11
graph. *1
Trend 3 Specify item 3 to be shown in a trend levels (+5 to -5). This setting can be configured with
graph. *1 the following parameters.
graph. *1
Display menu path:
HART communication: Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ►
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Optional config ► (see below)
Trend select► (see below) Contrast Specify the contrast of the display.
Trend select 1 Specify item 1 to be shown in a trend
graph. *1 HART communication:
Trend select 2 Specify item 2 to be shown in a trend Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ►
graph. *1 Display operation configuration► (see below)
Display contrast Specify the contrast of the display.
graph. *1
graph. *1
+5 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
High Low
*1: From the table below, select the display item of trend graph.
None Does not set any items (item 1 is not
selectable). (2) Display damping time constant setting
Flow rate (%) Specify the flow rate for the span of the process This function enables to specify the damping time
value that is PV-mapped in Subsection 4.1.2.
PV Specify the process value that is PV-mapped in constant for the display independently of that
Subsection 4.1.2. specified in Subsection 4.1.6.
Velocity Specify the flow velocity.
Volume flow Specify the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow Specify the mass flow rate. parameters.
Calorie Specify the calorie.
Analog out1 Specify the current value of current output 1 for
the I/O1 terminal. Display menu path:
Analog out2 Specify the current value of current output 1 for Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ►
the I/O3 terminal.
Totalizer1 Specify the totalized value of totalizer 1. Optional config ► (see below)
Totalizer2 Specify the totalized value of totalizer 2. Damp Specify the damping time constant of the
Totalizer3 Specify the totalized value of totalizer 3.
display.
(3) Update period setting HART communication:

This setting can be configured with the following Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ►
parameters. Display operation configuration► (see below)
Display damping Specify the damping time constant of the
Display menu path: display.
Period Specify the trend graph update period on
NOTE
the display.*1
The damping time constant of the display is
HART communication: available only for the display. To specify the
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► damping time constant for the output of the
Display operation configuration► (see below) physical quantity, read Subsection 4.1.6.
Display period Specify the trend graph update period on
the display.*1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 67
(3) Date display format setting (5) Display squawk setting
The date display format can be specified. The backlight of the display can be squawked at
This setting can be configured with the following 4-second intervals to identify the communicating
parameters. instrument where are installed a number of same
models.
Display menu path: This setting can be configured with the following
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► parameters.
Format date Specify the date display format.*1 Display menu path:
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Disp indicator ►
HART communication: (see below)
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Squawk Squawks the display.*1
Display format date Specify the date display format.*1 HART communication:
*1: From the table below, specify the date display format.
Maintenance root menu ► Display indication►
MM/DD/YYYY Displays the date in "month/day/year". (see below)
DD/MM/YYYY Displays the date in "day/month/year". Squawk Squawks the display.*1
YYYY/MM/DD Displays the date in "year/month/day".
*1: From the table below, select whether to squawk the display.
(4) Display black/white inverse setting Off Does not squawk the display.
The black/white inverse function is available for the On Squawks the display (continuous).
Squawk Once Squawks the display (once only).
display.
parameters.
Display menu path:

Inversion Specify the display black/white inverse
mode.*1
HART communication:
Display inversion Specify the display black/white inverse
mode.*1
*1: From the table below, select the display black/white inverse
mode.
Normal Does not set the display to the black/white
inverse mode.
(Character color: Black, Background color:
White)
Invert Sets the display to the black/white inverse
mode.
(Character color: White, Background color:
Black)
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 68
4.9.7 microSD Card Setting 4.10 Device Information
The dedicated microSD card performs to use the
backup parameters and logging data by inserting
4.10.1 Order Information
into the display if the optional code MC is selected. Order information can be specified for this
For details about backing up parameters and instrument. If the dedicated parameters are
logging data, read Section 4.13. specified at the time of ordering, this instrument
is shipped with the parameters configured.
(1) Removing the microSD card Parameters unspecified at the time of ordering must
be configured by the user.
IMPORTANT The model and suffix code are indicated in the
If the microSD card is removed without executing following format.
“Unmount” on software, it may cause the stored
data to be erased or the device to operate Sensor:
abnormally. AXG -  -  /
(1) (2) (3)
The microSD card can be removed with the
Transmitter:
following parameters.
AXGA -  /
(1) (2) (3)
Display menu path:
Device setup ► microSD ► (see below)
(1) Model code, (2) Suffix code, (3) Optional code
Unmount Specifies the removal of the microSD
card.*1
*1: From the table below, select whether to remove the microSD parameters.
card.
Cancel Cancels the removal of the microSD card.
Execute Applicable to remove the microSD card in Display menu path:
safety.
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ►
Order info ► (see below)
(2) microSD card format
Tag No Specify the tag number.
IMPORTANT HART communication: Max. 8
characters.
Long tag Specify the long tag.
If the format function of this instrument is not HART communication: Max. 32
used to format the microSD card, it may cause a characters.
MS code►Model Specify the model code of the integral
device operation failure.
code flowmeter or remote transmitter.
MS code►Suffix Specify the suffix code of the integral
Formatting is possible with the following config 1 flowmeter or remote transmitter.
MS code►Suffix
parameters. config 2
MS code ► Option 1 Specify the optional code of the integral
Display menu path: MS code ► Option 2 flowmeter or remote transmitter.
MS code ► Option 3
Device setup ► microSD ► (see below) MS code ► Option 4
Format Specify the format of the microSD card.*1 RS MS code►Model Specify the model code of the remote
code sensor.
*1: From the table below, select whether to format the microSD RS MS code►Suffix Specify the suffix code of the remote
card. config 1 sensor.
Cancel Cancels formatting. RS MS code►Suffix
Execute Executes formatting. config 2
RS MS Specify the optional code of the remote
code►Option 1 sensor.
RS MS
code►Option 2
RS MS
code►Option 3
RS MS
code►Option 4
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 69
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► 4.10.2 Device Revision
Ver/Num info ► (see below)
The device revision such as software which is used
Trans serial No Displays the serial number (instrument
number) of the transmitter. for this instrument can be checked.
Sensor serial No Displays the serial number (instrument This information can be viewed with the following
number) of the sensor. parameters.
HART communication:
Display menu path:
Device information ► Order information►
(see below) Ver/Num info ► (see below)
Tag Specify the tag number. Transmitter type Displays the type of the transmitter.
HART communication: Max. 8 Option board ID Displays the type of the option board.
characters. Main soft rev Displays the software revision of the main
Long tag Specify the long tag. board.
HART communication: Max. 32 Snsr soft rev Displays the software revision of the
characters. sensor board.
Basic model code Specify the model code of the integral Ind soft rev Displays the software revision of the
flowmeter or remote transmitter. display board.
Suffix config 1 Specify the suffix code of the integral Hardware rev Displays the hardware revision of the
Suffix config 2 flowmeter or remote transmitter. instrument.
Option 1 Specify the optional code of the integral Dev id Displays the ID of the instrument.
Option 2 flowmeter or remote transmitter.
Option 3
Option 4
HART communication:
Remote sensor Specify the model code of the remote Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
basic model code sensor. Device information ►
Remote sensor Specify the suffix code of the remote Version/Number information► (see below)
suffix config 1 sensor.
Remote sensor Transmitter type Displays the type of the transmitter.
Option board ID Displays the type of the option board.
suffix config 2
Remote sensor Main board revision Displays the software revision of the main
Specify the optional code of the remote
option 1 sensor. board.
Remote sensor Sensor board Displays the software revision of the
option 2 revision sensor board.
Remote sensor Indicator board Displays the software revision of the
option 3 revision display board.
Remote sensor Hardware rev Displays the hardware revision of the
option 4 instrument.
Dev id Displays the ID of the instrument.
Device information ► 4.10.3 Memo Function
Version/Number information► (see below)
Transmitter serial No Displays the serial number (instrument Three parameters can be used as a memo
number) of the transmitter. function. The memo function can be set to up to 16
Sensor serial No Displays the serial number (instrument
number) of the sensor.
characters.
parameters.
NOTE
Display menu path:
Be careful of changing any parameters related Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ►
to order information defined upon shipment from Memo ►
the manufacturing plant because it cannot be Memo 1 Specifies memo 1.
referred. Memo 2 Specifies memo 2.
Memo 3 Specifies memo 3.
Recommended to make a backup referring to
Section 4.13 for storing the order information
HART communication:
defined upon shipment from the manufacturing Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
plant. Device information ► Memo ► (see below)
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 70
4.11 Self-diagnostic Function Display menu path:
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► H/L alarm cfg ►
4.11.1 Types of Diagnosis Functions (see below)
High alarm Specify the high limit value to judge an
This instrument has the self-diagnostic functions to alarm.
diagnose a device failure or process status. Low alarm Specify the low limit value to judge an
Followings are its diagnosis functions. alarm.
HH alarm Specify the high-high limit value to judge
Alarm high/low limit Displays an alarm when the specified an alarm.
function value is exceeded, and outputs it as the LL alarm Specify the low-low limit value to judge
status output. an alarm.
Electrode adhesion Diagnoses an electrode adhesion from
detection the resistance value of the electrode,
and displays a warning or alarm if an HART communication:
adhesion is detected. Maintenance root menu ►
Sensor empty check Checks whether the sensor is in the High/Low alarm configuration► (see below)
empty pipe state, and displays an alarm if High alarm Specify the high limit value to judge an
the empty pipe state is detected. alarm.
Misconnection Checks whether the transmitter signal Low alarm Specify the low limit value to judge an
detection line and the excitation line are correctly alarm.
connected, and displays a warning if a High high alarm Specify the high-high limit value to judge
misconnection is detected. an alarm.
Verification (device Diagnoses the health of the instrument, Low low alarm Specify the low-low limit value to judge
health diagnosis) and displays its result. an alarm.
function
Electrode insulation Diagnoses a deterioration of insulation
deterioration from the resistance value of the When the high and low limit value alarms are
diagnosis electrode, and displays a warning if it is reset, the hysteresis is set for each alarm. Specify
detected. the hysteresis width with the percentage (%) for
Flow noise diagnosis Measures a flow noise detected in the
sensor, and displays a warning if the the span of the physical quantity PV-mapped in
measured value exceeds the specified Subsection 4.1.2. When using the multi range
value. function, specify the hysteresis width with the
Low conductivity Obtains the conductivity from the
diagnosis resistance value and size of the
percentage (%) for the maximum range specified in
electrode, and displays a warning if the the multi range parameter. The hysteresis in each
conductivity falls below the specified case can be specified by the following procedure.
value.
Section 4.6.
4.11.2 Alarm High/Low Limit Function
The alarm high/low limit function displays an Display menu path:
alarm when the physical quantity PV-mapped in Device setup ► Diag/Service ► H/L alarm cfg ►
Subsection 4.1.2 exceeds the specified value. This (see below)
H/L alarm hyst Specify the hysteresis width for the alarm
function also outputs an alarm occurrence as the
occurrence and resetting.
status output.
For details about the status output, read Subsection HART communication:
4.3.7. Maintenance root menu ►
The alarm judgment value can be specified using High/Low alarm configuration► (see below)
4 types of values: high limit value, high-high limit Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis Specify the hysteresis width for the
value, low-limit value, and low-low limit value. alarm occurrence and resetting.
(1) Hysteresis value
parameters.
= Span or max. range x Hysteresis width [%]
(2) Value that causes a high limit or high-high limit
alarm to be reset
= Specified high limit or high-high limit value -
Hysteresis value
(3) Value that causes a low limit or low-low limit
alarm to be reset
= Specified low limit or low-low limit value +
Hysteresis value
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 71
Example: 4.11.3 Electrode Adhesion Detection
Span of volumetric flow rate = 300 m3/h,
The electrode adhesion detecting function
High limit value = 250 m3/h, Low limit value = 50 m3/h,
diagnoses an electrode adhesion from the
High-high limit value = 300 m3/h, Low-low limit value
resistance value of the electrode, and displays a
= 25 m3/h,
warning or alarm if an adhesion is detected.
Hysteresis width = 5 %
The electrode adhesion detection is displayed on
In this case, each value is obtained as shown
the display in four levels: level 1 to level 4. Each
below.
level judgment value can be specified individually.
If the level 3 value is exceeded, a warning is
(1) Hysteresis value = 300 [m3/h] × 5 [%]
displayed. If the level 4 value is exceeded, an alarm
= 15 [m3/h]
is displayed.
(2-1) Value that causes a high-high limit alarm to
For details about alarms and warnings, read
be reset
Subsection 4.8.1.
= 300 [m3/h] – 15 [m3/h] Alarm
= 285 [m3/h] Warning
(2-2) Value that causes a high limit alarm to be
reset
= 250 [m3/h] – 15 [m3/h] Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
= 235 [m3/h] F0434.ai
(3-1) Value that causes a low limit alarm to be

reset This setting can be configured with the following
= 50 [m3/h] + 15 [m3/h] parameters.
= 65 [m3/h]
(3-2) Value that causes a low-low limit alarm to be Display menu path:
reset Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ►
= 25 [m3/h] + 15 [m3/h] Adhesion ► (see below)
= 40 [m3/h] Function Specifies the use of the electrode
Flow rate[m3/h] adhesion detecting function.*1
Hysteresis Threshold level 1 Specify the value to judge level 1.
Threshold level 2 Specify the value to judge level 2.
High-High 300
Limit 285 Threshold level 3 Specify the value to judge level 3.
High Limit 250 Threshold level 4 Specify the value to judge level 4.
235 Result►Value Displays the resistance value of the
electrode.
Result►Status Displays the electrode adhesion
detection level.
Check cycle Specify the data update cycle for
electrode adhesion detection.
65
Low Limit 50
40
Low-Low
Limit
25 HART communication:
Time
Diagnostic rootmenu ► Diagnosis ►
Adhesion► (see below)
Status Output
(High/Low limit)
Adhesion function Specifies the use of the electrode
Status Output adhesion detecting function.*1
(High-High/ Adhesion level 1 Specify the value to judge level 1.
Low-Low limit) F0433.ai Adhesion level 2 Specify the value to judge level 2.
Adhesion level 3 Specify the value to judge level 3.
NOTE Adhesion level 4
Result ► Adhesion
Specify the value to judge level 4.
Displays the resistance value of the
value electrode.
When the physical quantity to be output is Result ► Displays the electrode adhesion
changed, respecify the alarm judgment value. Adhesion status detection level.
Adhesion check Specify the data update cycle for
cycle electrode adhesion detection.
*1: From the table below, select the use of the electrode adhesion
detection function.
Disable Does not use the electrode adhesion detecting
function.
Enable Uses the electrode adhesion detecting function.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 72
4.11.4 Sensor Empty Check
NOTE
The sensor empty check function checks whether
If the electrode adhesion detecting function is not the sensor is in the empty pipe state, and displays
used, the electrode resistance value and level an alarm if the empty pipe state is detected.
are cleared. For details about alarms and warnings, read
Subsection 4.8.1.
This information can be viewed with the following
NOTE parameters.
Before using the electrode adhesion detecting Display menu path:

function, always make sure that the sensor is in Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ►
the full pipe state. If the sensor is in the empty (see below)
pipe state, this function may not run normally. Empty status Displays the result of the sensor empty
check function.*1
HART communication:
NOTE Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► Empty ►
Result► (see below)
The electrode adhesion detecting function
Empty status Displays the result of the sensor empty
has the fluid conductivity restricted. The check function.*1
recommended conductivity is as follows.
Meter size Conductivity *1: From the table below, check the result of the sensor empty
2.5 to 10 mm (0.1 to 0.4 in.) 30 uS/cm or larger check function.
15 to 400 mm (0.5 to 16 in.) 10 uS/cm or larger Full Indicates that the sensor is in the empty pipe
500 mm (20 in.) 20 uS/cm or larger state.
Empty Indicates that the sensor is in the full pipe state.
NOTE 4.11.5 Wiring Connection Diagnosis

The wiring connection diagnostic function performs
As the data update cycle for adhesion detection
to diagnose whether the signal line and the
is shorter, an error of the electrode resistance
excitation line between remote type sensor and
value increases. Do not change the default value
transmitter are correctly connected, and displays a
unless especially specified.
warning if a misconnection is detected.
For example, if there are 2 sets of remote type
sensors and transmitters, this function performs
to check whether the signal line of a transmitter
A is misconnected to the signal terminal of a
sensor B, or the excitation line of a transmitter A is
misconnected to the excitation terminal of a sensor
B.
It takes approximately 10 seconds to finish this
function.
Subsection 4.8.1.
parameters.
Display menu path:

(see below)
Diagnostic execute Specifies the use of the wiring connection
diagnostic function.*1
Diagnostic output Specifies the output to use the wiring
connection diagnostic function.*2
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 73
HART communication: 4.11.6 Verification (Device Health
Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis► (see below) Diagnosis) Function
Diagnostic Exe Specifies the use of the wiring connection
diagnostic function.*1 The verification function diagnoses the health
Diagnostic output Specifies the output to use the wiring of the instrument, and displays the diagnosis
connection diagnostic function.*2 result. It takes approximately 15 minutes for the
*1: From the table below, select the use of the wiring connection verification function to complete. The progress of
diagnostic function. the verification function can be monitored via the
Connect check exe Starts the wiring connection diagnostic bar graph and the remaining time on the display.
function.
01 : 00
*2: From the table below, select the output required to execute
Verification execution
the wiring connection diagnostic function. Excitation circuit...
Current Frequency
Totalization Pulse output 10:00
output output
Input 0 SET SFT INC
Zero 0% output 0 pps 0% output F0435.ai
(Output fixed)
Output of Totalization of Output of Output of
Measured This function can perform to inspect each condition
calculated value calculated value calculated value calculated value
value of the circuit, and acts the device health diagnosis
(Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)
Fixes the last Totalizes the Fixes the last Fixes the last of the instrument by detecting its internal alarms
valid value last valid value valid value valid value
Hold
before the before the before the before the history along with its wiring misconnection. And this
diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. function evaluates their diagnosis result depending
on the condition of the instrument by showing
“Passed” as no problem or “Failed” as problems on
IMPORTANT the display.
• Before using the wiring connection diagnostic The executing results are shown below.
function, be sure to disconnect this instrument • “Passed” with no problem (as an example)
from the control loop. VF check results Passed
• While this function is used, the current output VF Operation time 00001D 10:01
and pulse output are invalid. Magnetic circuit result Passed
Exciting circuit result Passed
Calculation circuit result Passed
Device status result Passed
NOTE Connection status result Passed
When using the wiring connection diagnostic • “Failed” with problems (as an example)
function, the following conditions must be VF check results Failed
satisfied. VF Operation time 00001D 10:01
If the conditions are not satisfied, the magnetic Magnetic circuit result Passed
flowmeter may not correctly diagnose the wiring Exciting circuit result Passed
connection status. Calculation circuit result Failed
• The sensor is in the full pipe state. Device status result Passed
• No influence of noise. Connection status result Passed
• The magnetic flowmeter transmitter and
AM012 (calibrator) are not connected.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 74
Contact Yokogawa service center when the “Failed” *1: From the table below, select the output to execute the
verification function.
massage appears from “Magnetic circuit result” to
Current Totalization Pulse output Frequency
“Device status result” . output output
Confirm the wiring misconnection between sensor Zero 0% output
Input 0
0 pps 0% output
(Output fixed)
and transmitter (read Subsection 4.11.5 for detail), Output of Totalization of Output of Output of
Measured
or whether its signal cable and excitation cable value
have no damage when the “Failed” massage Fixes the last Totalizes the Fixes the last Fixes the last
appears at “Connection status result”. Hold
valid value last valid value valid value valid value
before the before the before the before the
The verification function can be selected depending diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts.
on whether or not the fluid is flowing.
Two diagnosis results (this time and the previous *2: From the table below, select the fluid status required to
execute the verification function.
time) can be stored on the device memory together
No flow Executes the verification function with the fluid
with the data defined upon shipment from the not flowing.
manufacturing plant, and it is able to check all of Flow Executes the verification function with the fluid
flowing.
them as the result.
The following results will be displayed after the *3: From the table below, select whether to execute the
verification function.
verification function is used.
Not execute Does not execute the verification function.
Total judgment result Calculation circuit diagnosis result Execute Executes the verification function.
Operating time of Device alarm diagnosis result
verification function *4: From the table below, select the execution result of the
Magnetic circuit Wiring connection diagnosis result verification function.
diagnosis result
Factory Displays the result obtained upon shipment
Excitation circuit from the manufacturing plant.
diagnosis result Previous Displays the previous result.
Present Displays the result at this time.
*5: The diagnosis result is displayed as shown below.
parameters. Display menu path:
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Result ► (see below)
Display menu path: Failed/Passed Execution result
VF operate time Operating time of verification function when
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► started
(see below) Magnetic circuit Magnetic circuit diagnosis result
Excite circuit Excitation circuit diagnosis result
Diagnostic output Specifies the output to execute the Calc circuit Calculation circuit diagnosis result
verification function.*1 Device status Device alarm diagnosis result
Connect status Wiring misconnection check result
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Verification ►
HART communication:
(see below)
Maintenace root menu ► Verification► (see below)
Mode Specifies the fluid status to execute the VF check result Execution result
verification function.*2 VF operation time Operating time of verification function when
Execute Specifies the execution of the verification started
function. *3 Magnetic circuit result Magnetic circuit diagnosis result
VF No Specify the diagnosis result display Excitation circuit result Excitation circuit diagnosis result
time.*4 Calculation circuit result Calculation circuit diagnosis result
Result Displays the diagnosis result.*5 VF device status result Device alarm diagnosis result
Connection status result Wiring misconnection check result
HART communication: The diagnosis result is judged as shown below.

Maintenace root menu ► Verification► (see below) Passed There are no problems concerning the
Diagnostic output Specifies the output to use the diagnosis result.
verification function.*1 Failed There is a problem concerning the diagnosis
VF mode Specifies the fluid status to use the result.
Canceled Cancels the diagnosis.
verification function.*2
No Data No diagnosis result data
Verification Exe Specifies the use of the verification (The verification function is not used.)
function.*3 Unknown Cannot perform a diagnosis.
VF No Specify the diagnosis result display
time.*4
Result Displays the diagnosis result.*5
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 75
*1: The electrode insulation deterioration diagnosis can be
IMPORTANT configured with the following parameters.
Display:
Electrode insul exe Starts the electrode insulation deterioration
• Before using the verification function, be sure diagnosis function.
to disconnect this instrument from the control
loop. HART communication:
• While this function is used, the current output Electrode insulation Starts the electrode insulation deterioration
execute diagnosis function.
and pulse output are invalid.
• Note that parameters cannot be changed *2: From the table below, select the output required to execute
the diagnosis function.
when the verification function is executed.
Current Totalization Pulse output Frequency
output output
Input 0
Zero 0% output 0 pps 0% output
(Output fixed)
NOTE Measured
Output of Totalization of Output of Output of
value
• Before using the verification function, always
Fixes the last Totalizes the Fixes the last Fixes the last
make sure that the sensor is in the full pipe valid value last valid value valid value valid value
Hold
state. If the sensor is in the empty pipe state, before the before the before the before the
diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts.
this function may not run normally.
• When using the verification function, correctly
specify the fluid status with the parameter. IMPORTANT
• If there is a problem with the verification result,
read the maintenance manual as listed in • Before using the electrode insulation
Table 1.1. deterioration diagnosis function, be sure to
disconnect this instrument from the control
loop.
4.11.7 Electrode Insulation Deterioration • While this function is used, the current output
Diagnosis and pulse output are invalid.
The electrode insulation deterioration diagnosis
function diagnoses a deterioration of insulation from
the resistance value of the electrode, and displays NOTE
a warning if it is detected. It takes approximately 5
minutes to complete this diagnosis. Before using the electrode insulation
For details about alarms and warnings, read deterioration diagnosis function, always make
Subsection 4.8.1. sure that the sensor is in the full pipe state. If the
This setting can be configured with the following sensor is in the empty pipe state, this function
parameters. may not run normally.
Display menu path:

(see below)
Diagnostic execute Specifies the execution of the electrode
insulation deterioration diagnosis
function.*1
Diagnostic output Specifies the output to execute the
electrode insulation deterioration
diagnosis function.*2
HART communication:
Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis► (see below)
Diagnostic Exe Specifies the execution of the electrode
insulation deterioration diagnosis
function.*1
Diagnostic output Specifies the output to execute the
electrode insulation deterioration
diagnosis function.*2
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 76
4.11.8 Flow Noise Diagnosis 4.11.9 Low Conductivity Diagnosis
This function measures a flow noise detected in The low conductivity diagnosis function obtains
the sensor, and displays a warning if it exceeds the the conductivity from the resistance value and
specified value. size of the electrode, and displays a warning if the
The flow noise diagnosis is shown on the display in conductivity falls below the specified value.
four levels: level 1 to level 4. Each level judgment For details about alarms and warnings, read
value can be specified individually. If the level 3 or Subsection 4.8.1.
level 4 value is exceeded, a warning message is This setting can be configured with the following
appeared. parameters.
Subsection 4.8.1. Display menu path:
For details about the flow noise span and damping Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ►
time constant, read Subsection 4.1.5 and 4.1.6. Conductivity ► (see below)
Warning Function Specifies the use of the low conductivity
Warning diagnosis function.*1
Result ► Value Displays the calculated conductivity.
Low limit Specify the value used to judge the low
conductivity.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
F0436.ai
Order info ► (see below)
This setting can be configured with the following Electrode size Displays the electrode size.
parameters.
HART communication:
Display menu path: Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ►
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Conductivity► (see below)
Low conductivity Specifies the use of the low conductivity
Flow noise ► (see below)
function diagnosis function.*1
Function Specifies the use of the flow noise Result ► Displays the calculated conductivity.
diagnosis function.*1 Conductivity value
Threshold level 1 Specify the value to judge level 1. Conductivity low limit Specify the value used to judge the low
Threshold level 2 Specify the value to judge level 2. conductivity.
Result►Value Displays the flow noise value. Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Result►Status Displays the flow noise level. Device information ► Order information►
(see below)
HART communication: Electrode size Displays the electrode size.
Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ►
*1: From the table below, select the use of the low conductivity
Flow noise► (see below) diagnosis function.
Flow noise function Specifies the use of the flow noise Disable Does not use the low conductivity diagnosis
diagnosis function.*1 function.
Flow noise level 1 Specify the value to judge level 1. Enable Uses the low conductivity diagnosis function.
Flow noise level 2 Specify the value to judge level 2.
Result ► Flow noise Displays the flow noise value. NOTE
Result ► Displays the flow noise level.
Flow noise status The electrode size is specified upon shipment
*1: From the table below, select the use of the flow noise function.
from the manufacturing plant.
Disable Does not use the flow noise diagnosis function. Be careful of changing any parameters related
Enable Uses the flow noise diagnosis function. to order information defined upon shipment from
the manufacturing plant because it cannot be
referred.
NOTE Recommended to make a backup referring to
Section 4.13 for storing the order information
If the flow noise diagnosis function is set to
defined upon shipment from the manufacturing
“Disable”, the flow noise value and level are
plant.
cleared.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 77
4.12 Test Mode
NOTE
4.12.1 Test Mode Setting
Before using the low conductivity diagnosis
function, always make sure that the sensor is in The test mode can be executed to arbitrarily specify
the full pipe state. If the sensor is in the empty the process value or the value to be output from a
pipe state or the transmitter is connected with connection terminal and test a response from the
magnetic flowmeter calibrator, this function may device.
not run normally. However, a warning is displayed to indicate that the
test mode is in use while this test mode is used.
The use of the test mode can be specified with the
NOTE following parameters.
• If this function is set to “Disable”, the low Display menu path:

conductivity value is cleared. Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ►
(see below)
Input test► Specifies the use of the test mode
Test mode (input).*1
Output test► Specifies the use of the test mode
Test mode (output).*1
HART communication:
Maintenance root menu ► Test► (see below)
Test mode Specifies the use of the test mode (input/
output).*1
*1: From the table below, select the test terminal and process
value.
Display:
Velocity Starts testing the flow velocity.
Volume Starts testing the volumetric flow rate.
Mass Starts testing the mass flow rate.
Calorie Starts testing the calorie.
AI Starts testing the current input of the I/O4 terminal.
SI3 Starts testing the current input of the I/O3 terminal.
AO1 Starts testing current output 1 of the I/O1 terminal.
AO2 Starts testing current output 2 of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
PO1 Starts testing pulse output or frequency output 1 of the
I/O2 terminal.
PO2 Starts testing pulse output or frequency output 2 of the
I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
SO1 Starts testing status output 1 of the I/O2 terminal.
SO2 Starts testing current output 2 of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
SO3 Starts testing status output 3 of the I/O3 terminal.
HART communication:
Velocity test on Starts testing the flow velocity.
Volume flow test on Starts testing the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow test on Starts testing the mass flow rate.
Calorific value test on Starts testing the calorie.
AI test on Starts testing the current input of the I/O4
terminal.
SI3 test on Starts testing the current input of the I/O3
terminal.
AO1 test on Starts testing current output 1 of the I/O1
terminal.
AO2 test on Starts testing current output 2 of the I/O3 or
I/O4 terminal.
Pulse1 test on Starts testing pulse output or frequency output
1 of the I/O2 terminal.
Pulse2 test on Starts testing pulse output or frequency output
2 of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
SO1 test on Starts testing status output 1 of the I/O2
terminal.
SO2 test on Starts testing current output 2 of the I/O3 or
I/O4 terminal.
SO3 test on Starts testing status output 3 of the I/O3
terminal.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 78
The value on the test mode is executed by turns HART communication:
of Flow velocity, Volumetric flow rate, Mass flow Maintenance root menu ► Test► (see below)
rate, and Calorie. For example, the test values of Input test ► Velocity Specify the flow velocity.
Input test ► Specify the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow rate and Calorie are decided based on
Volume flow
the test value of the volumetric flow rate, when the Input test ► Mass Specify the mass flow rate.
volumetric flow rate is set as the test value. In this flow
Input test ► Specify the calorie.
case, the test value of flow velocity is executed with Calorific value
the normal measurement value. Input test ► AI Specify the current value of the current
input for the I/O4 terminal.
NOTE Input test ► SI3 Specify the status of the status input for
the I/O3 terminal.
Output test ► AO1 Specify the current value of current
To specify each terminal output, read Subsection output 1 for the I/O1 terminal.
4.3.1. If the specified output is different from the Output test ► AO2 Specify the current value of current
test starting output, the test mode cannot be output 2 for the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Output test ► Pulse1 Specify the frequency of pulse output or
used.
frequency output 1 for the I/O2 terminal.
For example, if the I/O2 terminal is assigned to Output test ► Pulse2 Specify the frequency of pulse output or
the frequency output to start the status output frequency output 2 for the I/O3 or I/O4
terminal.
test, the test cannot be started. Output test ► SO1 Specify the status of status output 1 for
the I/O2 terminal.
Output test ► SO2 Specify the status of status output 2 of
4.12.2 Test Terminal and Value Setting the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Output test ► SO3 Specify the status of status output 3 for
Specify the test input value for the terminal and the I/O3 terminal.
process value to be tested.
4.12.3 Test Mode Auto Reset
parameters.
However, the unit of the process value to be tested If the specified time lapses with no parameters
conforms to that specified in Subsection 4.1.4. If the changed while the test mode is enabled, the test
unit is changed, the process value to be tested is mode is reset automatically. When any test mode
also changed synchronously with the changed unit. parameter is changed, the test mode reset time is
extended.
Display menu path: This setting can be configured with the following
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► parameters.
(see below)
Input test ► Velocity Specify the flow velocity. Display menu path:
Input test ► Volume Specify the volumetric flow rate. Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ►
Input test ► Mass Specify the mass flow rate.
Input test ► Calorie Specify the calorie.
(see below)
Input test ► AI Specify the current value of the current Release time Specify the time to automatically reset
input for the I/O4 terminal. the test mode.*1
Input test ► SI3 Specify the status of the status input for
the I/O3 terminal. HART communication:
Output test ► AO1 Specify the current value of current
output 1 for the I/O1 terminal.
Maintenance root menu ► Test► (see below)
Output test ► AO2 Specify the current value of current Release time Specify the time to automatically reset
output 2 for the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal. the test mode.*1
Output test ► PO1 Specify the frequency of pulse output or
frequency output 1 for the I/O2 terminal. *1: From the table below, select the test mode auto reset time.
Output test ► PO2 Specify the frequency of pulse output or 10 min Sets the reset time to 10 min.
frequency output 2 for the I/O3 or I/O4 30 min Sets the reset time to 30 min.
terminal. 1h Sets the reset time to 1 hour.
3h Sets the reset time to 3 hours.
12 h Sets the reset time to 12 hours.
the I/O2 terminal.
Output test ► SO2 Specify the status of status output 2 of
the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
the I/O3 terminal.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 79
4.13 Event Management Function HART communication:
Maintenance root menu ►
4.13.1 Backup Function Param bkup/restore► (see below)
Factory backup Displays the backup name defined upon
The backup function enables to back up parameter name shipment from the manufacturing plant.
settings in the display built-in memory or microSD Factory backup date Displays the backup date upon shipment
from the manufacturing plant.
card (with the optional code MC selected). SD backup name Specify the name of the file to be backed
Restorating backup data can be used to duplicate up to the microSD card.
parameter settings to another device. The display Backup name 1 Specify backup name 1.
Up to 16 characters
built-in memory can store backup data for three Backup date 1 Specify date 1.
times and the microSD depends on available free Backup name 2 Specify backup name 2.
space. There are three backup methods available: Up to 16 characters
Backup date 2 Specify date 2.
backup from the main board of this instrument to Backup name 3 Specify backup name 3.
the memory on the display board, backup from Up to 16 characters
the main board of the instrument to the microSD Backup date 3 Specify date 3.
Backup Exe Specifies the use of the backup
card, and backup from the memory on the display function.*1
board to the microSD card. The file name, backup
name, and date can be specified to use the backup *1: From the table below, select how the backup function is to be
used.
function.
Not Execute Does not execute the backup function.
The data backed up in the microSD card is stored in Store Main to 1 Backs up parameter settings from the main
the “YOKOGAWA” folder as a “.PAR” file. board to memory 1 in the display built-in
memory.
Store Main to 2 Backs up parameter settings from the main
The backup function can be configured with the board to memory 2 in the display built-in
memory.
following parameters. Store Main to 3 Backs up parameter settings from the main
For details about the backup parameters, read board to memory 3 in the display built-in
memory.
Subsection 4.13.3. Store Main to SD Backs up parameter settings from the main
board to the microSD card.
Store EEP1 to SD Backs up parameter settings from memory 1
Display menu path:
in the display built-in memory to the microSD
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► card.
Param bkup/restore ► (see below) Store EEP2 to SD Backs up parameter settings from memory 2
in the display built-in memory to the microSD
F backup name Displays the backup name defined upon card.
shipment from the manufacturing plant. Store EEP3 to SD Backs up parameter settings from memory 3
F backup date Displays the backup date upon shipment in the display built-in memory to the microSD
from the manufacturing plant. card.
SD backup name Specify the name of the file to be backed
up to the microSD card. There are some parameters which are not able to
Backup name 1 Specify backup name 1.
Up to 16 characters back up depending on the occurrence of the alarm.
Backup date 1 Specify date 1. The table below shows the parameters that can be
Backup name 2 Specify backup name 2. backed up when an alarm occurs.
Up to 16 characters : Executable when alarm occurs.
Backup date 2 Specify date 2. ―: Not executable when alarm occurs.
Backup name 3 Specify backup name 3.
Up to 16 characters Alarm name
Backup date 3 Specify date 3. HART Backup
Display
communication
Backup execute Specifies the use of the backup
010:Main CPU FAIL 10 Main board CPU failure ―
function.*1
011:Rev calc FAIL 11 Reverse calculation failure ―
012:Main EEP FAIL 12 Main board EEPROM failure ―
Main board EEPROM
013:Main EEP dflt 13 ―
default
014:Snsr bd FAIL 14 Sensor board failure 
015:Snsr comm ERR 15 Sensor communication error 
016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] 
017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] 
018:Coil open 18 Coil open 
019:Coil short 19 Coil short 
020:Exciter FAIL 20 Exciter failure 
021:PWM 1 stop 21 PWM1 stop ―
023:Opt bd mismatch 23 Option board mismatch ―
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 80
Alarm name Alarm name
HART Backup HART Backup
Display Display
communication communication
Option board EEPROM 122:Inst power FAIL 122 Instant power failure 
024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 24 ―
failure 123:Param bkup run 123 Parameter backup running ―
025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 25 Option board A/D failure ― 124:Data log run 124 Data logging running 
026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 26 Option board SPI failure ― 130:DevID not enter 130 Device ID not entered 
Parameter restore
027:Restore FAIL 27 
incomplete
028:Ind bd FAIL 28 Indicator board failure ―
029:Ind bd EEP FAIL 29
Indicator board EEPROM
―
IMPORTANT
failure
030:LCD drv FAIL 30 LCD driver failure ―
031:Ind bd mismatch 31 Indicator board mismatch ―
• Note that parameters cannot be changed
32
Indicator communication
―
when the backup function is executed. It
032:Ind comm ERR error takes approximately 20 seconds to complete
033:microSD FAIL 33 microSD failure ―
050:Signal overflow 50 Signal overflow  backup processing.
051:Empty detect 51 Empty pipe detection  • Take care not to duplicate the file name when
052:H/L HH/LL alm 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm 
backing up data to the microSD card.
053:Adh over lv 4 53 Adhesion over level 4 
060:Span cfg ERR 60 Span configuration error ― • Note that, if the microSD card runs out of free
Analog output 1 4-20 mA space, the subsequent data will not be stored.
062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 62 ―
limit error
Analog output 2 4-20 mA
063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 63 ―
limit error
Analog output 1 multi range
064:AO 1 mlt rng 64
error
― NOTE
H/L HH/LL configuration
065:H/L cfg ERR 65 ―
error
66 Density configuration error ―
The backup name and date do not affect the
066:Density cfg ERR
Pulse output 1 configuration backup function. Use this as the memo column
067:Pls 1 cfg ERR 67 ―
error when performing the backup function.
Pulse output 2 configuration
error
Nominal size configuration
069:Nomi size cfg 69 ―
error
070:Adh cfg ERR 70 Adhesion configuration error ―
Flow noise configuration
071:FLN cfg ERR 71 ―
error
072:Log not start 72 Data logging not started ―
080:AO 1 saturate 80 Analog output 1 saturated 
082:Pls 1 saturate 82 Pulse output 1 saturated 
084:AI saturate 84 Analog input saturated 
085:Cable miscon 85 Cable misconnect 
086:Coil insulation 86 Coil insulation warning 
087:Adhesion lv 3 87 Adhesion over level 3 
088:LC warn 88 Low conductivity warning 
089:Insu detect 89 Insulation detection 
090:FLN over lv 3 90 Flow noise over level 3 
091:FLN over lv 4 91 Flow noise over level 4 
092:AZ warn 92 Autozero warning 
093:Verif warn 93 Verification warning 
094:Fact noise warn 94 Factory noise warning 
095:Simulate active 95 Simulation active 
096:AO 1 fix 96 Analog output 1 fixed 
097:AO 2 fix 97 Analog output 2 fixed 
098:Pls 1 fix 98 Pulse output 1 fixed 
099:Pls 2 fix 99 Pulse output 2 fixed 
100:AI fix 100 Analog input fixed 
101:Param restore run 101 Parameter restore running ―
102:Disp over 102 Display over warning ―
103:SD size warn 103 microSD card size warning ―
Parameter backup
104:Bkup incmplt 104 
incomplete
105:SD mismatch 105 microSD card mismatch ―
microSD card removal
106:SD removal ERR 106 ―
procedure error
131:Trans mismatch 131 Transmitter type mismatch ―
120:Watchdog 120 Watchdog 
121:Power off 121 Power off 
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 81
4.13.2 Restore / Duplicate Function The restore function can be configured with the
following parameters.
The restore function can be restore parameter
For details about the restorable parameters, read
settings, which are backed up in the display built-
Subsection 4.13.3.
in memory or microSD card (with the optional
code MC selected), to the instrument. In addition,
Display menu path:
this function enables to return parameters to the
Device setup ► Diag/Service ►
default values defined upon shipment from the
Param bkup/restore ► (see below)
manufacturing plant. Also, it is possible to duplicate
Restore execute Specifies the execution of the restore
the backed-up parameters to other device based on function.*1
the same specifications. Restore result Displays the restore result.*2
HART communication:
IMPORTANT Maintenance root menu ►
Param bkup/restore► (see below)
For the remote type, It is necessary to set the Restore Exe Specifies the execution of the restore
device information of remote sensor into the function.*1
parameters of remote transmitter. Displays the restore result after execution
of the restore function.*2
The restore method can be selected from the *1: From the table below, select the execution of the restore
function.
following four types.
Not execute Does not restore data.
Duplicate Data Restores the target parameter (excluding the Duplicate Data1 Restores the parameter (Duplicate Data)
service parameters related to the transmitter setting from memory 1 on the display board to
adjustment) from the instrument in which the the main board of the instrument.
parameter is backed up. Duplicate Data2 Restores the parameter (Duplicate Data)
Restore is also executable for other setting from memory 2 on the display board to
instrument. the main board of the instrument.
Restore Data Restores the target parameter (including the Duplicate Data3 Restores the parameter (Duplicate Data)
setting from memory 3 on the display board to
service parameters related to the transmitter
the main board of the instrument.
adjustment) from the instrument in which the Duplicate SD Restores the parameter (Duplicate Data)
parameter is backed up. setting from the microSD card to the main
Restore is not executable for other instrument. board of the instrument.
Compulsion Data Restores the target parameter (specified Restore Data1 Restores the parameter (Restore Data) setting
upon shipment from the manufacturing plant) from memory 1 on the display board to the
from the instrument in which the parameter is main board of the instrument.
backed up. Restore Data2 Restores the parameter (Restore Data) setting
Restore is also executable for other from memory 2 on the display board to the
main board of the instrument.
instrument.
Restore Data3 Restores the parameter (Restore Data) setting
Restore Factory Restores all the parameters (specified upon from memory 3 on the display board to the
shipment from the manufacturing plant). main board of the instrument.
Restore SD Restores the parameter (Restore Data) setting
When using the restore function, always make sure from the microSD card to the main board of the
instrument.
that the backed-up device information matches the Compulsion Data1 Restores the parameter (Compulsion Data)
device information to be restored. setting from memory 1 on the display board to
The table below shows the consistency of device Compulsion Data2 Restores the parameter (Compulsion Data)
information. setting from memory 2 on the display board to
M:Items to be Matched. Compulsion Data3 Restores the parameter (Compulsion Data)
Duplicate Restore Compulsion setting from memory 3 on the display board to
Device Information
Data Data Data the main board of the instrument.
Option Board ID M M Compulsion SD Restores the parameter (Compulsion Data)
Transmitter Serial No M setting from the microSD card to the main
Sensor Serial No M board of the instrument.
Main Board Software Restore Factory Restores to the status that is set upon shipment
M M from the manufacturing plant.
Rev.
Sensor Board Software
M M *2: The result of the restore function is displayed as shown below.
Rev.
Display Board Software Unexecuted Does not restore data.
M M
Rev. Success Succeeded in restoration.
Model (Note) M M Failure Failed in restoration.
Communication and I/O Running Parameter restore running
M M
Code
Note: Only between AXG type and AXG type can be duplicated
or restored the data.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 82
There are some parameters which are not able to Alarm name
back up depending on the occurrence of the alarm. HART Restore
Display
communication
The table below shows the parameters that can be 089:Insu detect 89 Insulation detection 
backed up when an alarm occurs. 090:FLN over lv 3 90 Flow noise over level 3 
: Executable when alarm occurs. 091:FLN over lv 4 91 Flow noise over level 4 
―: Not executable when alarm occurs. 092:AZ warn 92 Autozero warning 
Alarm name 093:Verif warn 93 Verification warning 
HART Restore 094:Fact noise warn 94 Factory noise warning 
Display 095:Simulate active 95 Simulation active 
communication
010:Main CPU FAIL 10 Main board CPU failure ― 096:AO 1 fix 96 Analog output 1 fixed 
011:Rev calc FAIL 11 Reverse calculation failure ― 097:AO 2 fix 97 Analog output 2 fixed 
012:Main EEP FAIL 12 Main board EEPROM failure ― 098:Pls 1 fix 98 Pulse output 1 fixed 
Main board EEPROM 099:Pls 2 fix 99 Pulse output 2 fixed 
013:Main EEP dflt 13 ― 100:AI fix 100 Analog input fixed
default 
014:Snsr bd FAIL 14 Sensor board failure  101:Param restore run 101 Parameter restore running ―
015:Snsr comm ERR 15 Sensor communication error  102:Disp over 102 Display over warning ―
016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 16 A/D1 failure[Signal]  103:SD size warn 103 microSD card size warning ―
017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter]  Parameter backup
104:Bkup incmplt 104 
018:Coil open 18 Coil open  incomplete
019:Coil short 19 Coil short  105:SD mismatch 105 microSD card mismatch ―
020:Exciter FAIL 20 Exciter failure microSD card removal
 106:SD removal ERR 106 ―
21 PWM1 stop ― procedure error
021:PWM 1 stop
131:Trans mismatch 131 Transmitter type mismatch ―
120:Watchdog 120 Watchdog 
023:Opt bd mismatch 23 Option board mismatch ―
Option board EEPROM 121:Power off 121 Power off 
024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 24 ― 122:Inst power FAIL 122 Instant power failure 
failure
025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 25 Option board A/D failure ― 123:Param bkup run 123 Parameter backup running ―
026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 26 Option board SPI failure ― 124:Data log run 124 Data logging running 
Parameter restore 130:DevID not enter 130 Device ID not entered 
027:Restore FAIL 27 
incomplete
028:Ind bd FAIL 28 Indicator board failure ―
029:Ind bd EEP FAIL 29
Indicator board EEPROM
failure
― IMPORTANT
030:LCD drv FAIL 30 LCD driver failure ―
031:Ind bd mismatch 31 Indicator board mismatch ― When using the restore function, be sure to
Indicator communication
032:Ind comm ERR 32
error
― prepare the backup file in memory or a microSD
033:microSD FAIL 33 microSD failure ― card. Note that the restore function is not
050:Signal overflow 50 Signal overflow  executable if the backup file is not provided.
051:Empty detect 51 Empty pipe detection 
052:H/L HH/LL alm 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm 
053:Adh over lv 4 53 Adhesion over level 4 
060:Span cfg ERR 60 Span configuration error ―
062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 62 ―
limit error
063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 63 ―
limit error
Analog output 1 multi range
064:AO 1 mlt rng 64 ―
error
H/L HH/LL configuration
065:H/L cfg ERR 65 ―
error
066:Density cfg ERR 66 Density configuration error ―
error
error
Nominal size configuration
069:Nomi size cfg 69 ―
error
070:Adh cfg ERR 70 Adhesion configuration error ―
Flow noise configuration
071:FLN cfg ERR 71 ―
error
072:Log not start 72 Data logging not started ―
084:AI saturate 84 Analog input saturated 
085:Cable miscon 85 Cable misconnect 
086:Coil insulation 86 Coil insulation warning 
087:Adhesion lv 3 87 Adhesion over level 3 
088:LC warn 88 Low conductivity warning 
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 83
4.13.3 Backup and Restore Parameters
The list below shows the parameters that can be backed up or restored.
Alarm name Restore
Backup Duplicate Restore Compulsion Restore
HART communication Display
Data Data Data Factory
Device root menu ►
Detailed setup ► Process variables ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
   ― 
Velocity ► Velocity ► Damp AO/F
Velocity damping AO/frequency
Detailed setup ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ►
   ― 
Process variables ► Velocity ► Velocity ► Damp pls/ttl
Velocity damping pulse/total
Detailed setup ►
Process variables ►    ― 
Volume ► Damp AO/F
Volume flow ►
Volume flow damping AO/frequency
Detailed setup ►
Volume ► Damp pls/ttl
Volume flow ►
Volume flow damping pulse/total
Detailed setup ►
Mass ► Damp AO/F
Mass flow ►
Mass flow damping AO/frequency
Detailed setup ►
Mass ► Damp pls/ttl
Mass flow ►
Mass flow damping pulse/total
Detailed setup ►
Calorie ► Damp AO/F
Calorie ►
Calorific value damping AO/frequency
Detailed setup ►
Calorie ► Damp pls/ttl
Calorie ►
Calorific value damping pulse/total
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Sensor ►
Detailed setup ► Sensor ►     
Low MF
Low MF
High MF
High MF
Detailed setup ► Sensor ►    ― 
Flow sensor sel
Flow sensor select
Nominal size unit
Nominal size unit
Nominal size
Nominal size
    
Process variables ► PV flow select
PV flow select
 ― ―  
Process variables ► Velocity ► Unit
Velocity ► Velocity unit
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 84
Alarm name Restore
 ― ―  
Process variables ► Volume ► Unit
Volume flow ► Volume flow unit
 ― ―  
Process variables ► Mass ► Unit
Mass flow ► Mass flow unit
Detailed setup ►
Process variables ►
Volume flow ► Time unit
Volume ► Time unit
or
or
Detailed setup ►  ― ―  
Mass ► Time unit
Process variables ►
or
Mass flow ► Time unit
or
Calorie ► Time unit
Process variables ► Calorie ►
Time unit
    
Process variables ► Velocity ► Span
Velocity ► Velocity span
    
Process variables ► Volume ► Span
Volume flow ► Volume flow span
    
Process variables ► Mass ► Span
Mass flow ► Mass flow span
    
Process variables ► Calorie ► Span
Calorie ► Calorific flow span
Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Autozero ►
   ― 
Autozero ► Result ► Zero value Result ► Zero value
Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►  ― ―  
Totalizer 1 ► Conv factor
Totalizer1 ► Total1 conv factor
Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►    ― 
Totalizer 1 ► Low cut
Totalizer1 ► Total1 low cut
Totalizer 1 ► Failure opts
Totalizer1 ► Total1 fail opts
Totalizer 1 ► Options
Totalizer1 ► Total1 options
Totalizer 1 ► Start/Stop
Totalizer1 ► Total1 Start/Stop
Totalizer 1 ► Reset/Preset
Totalizer1 ► Total1 Reset/Preset
Totalizer 1 ► Preset value
Totalizer1 ► Total1 preset value
Totalizer 1 ► Set point
Totalizer1 ► Total1 set point
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 85
Alarm name Restore
Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
    
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Output mode
Pulse1 output mode
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Active mode
Pulse1 active mode
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Fix width
Pulse1 fix width
 ― ―  
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Rate unit
Pulse1 rate unit
    
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Rate value
Pulse1 rate value
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Low cut
Pulse1 low cut
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► Alarm out
Pulse1 alarm out
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 86
Alarm name Restore
Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ►
Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ►     
Pulse/Status output 1 ►
Frequency at 0%
Frequency1 at 0%
Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ►     
Frequency at 100%
Frequency1 at 100%
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO1/SO1 ► SO1 function
Status output1 function
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Active pulse
Pulse2 active pulse
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Output mode
Pulse2 output mode
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Pulse select
Pulse2 select
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Active mode
Pulse2 active mode
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Fix width
Pulse2 fix width
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Rate value
Pulse2 rate value
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Low cut
Pulse2 low cut
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Alarm out
Pulse2 alarm out
Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ►    ― 
Frequency at 0%
Frequency2 at 0%
Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ►    ― 
Frequency at 100%
Frequency2 at 100%
   ― 
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► SO2 function
   ― 
Status output 3 ► Pulse/Status out ► SO3 ► Active mode
Status output3 active mode
   ― 
Status output 3 ► Pulse/Status out ► SO3 ► Function
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 87
Alarm name Restore
Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Status in ►
   ― 
Status input 3 ► SI3 ► Active mode
Status input3 active mode
Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Status in ►
   ― 
Status input 3 ► SI3 ► Function
Status input3 function
Detailed setup ► Multi range ►    ― 
Multi range ► Forward span 2
Forward span 2
Multi range ► Reverse span 1
Reverse span 1
Multi range ► Reverse span 2
Reverse span 2
Multi range ► Auto range hyst
Auto range hyst
Multi range ► Bi direction hyst
Bi direction hyst
Detailed setup ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO1 ► Low cut
Analog output 1 ► AO1 low cut
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO1 ► High limit
Analog output 1 ► AO1 high limit
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO1 ► Low limit
Analog output 1 ► AO1 low limit
    
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO1 ► Alarm out
Analog output 1 ► AO1 alarm out
Detailed setup ►
Analog output/input ►    ― 
Analog out/in ► AO1 ► Range mode
Analog output 1 ►
AO1 range mode
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO2 ► AO2 select
Analog output 2 ► AO2 select
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO2 ► Low cut
Analog output 2 ► AO2 low cut
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO2 ► High limit
Analog output 2 ► AO2 high limit
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO2 ► Low limit
Analog output 2 ► AO2 low limit
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AO2 ► Alarm out
Analog output 2 ► AO2 alarm out
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AI ► Function
Analog input ► AI function
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 88
Alarm name Restore
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AI ► URV
Analog input ► AI URV
   ― 
Analog output/input ► Analog out/in ► AI ► LRV
Analog input ► AI LRV
Maintenance root menu ►    ― 
AO trim ► AO1 trim 4 mA
AO/AI trim ► AO trim ►
AO1 Trim    ― 
Maintenance root menu ►    ― 
AO/AI trim ► AO trim ►
AO2 Trim    ― 
   ― 
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Flow direct
Flow direction
   ― 
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Rate limit
Rate limit
   ― 
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Dead time
Dead time
   ― 
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Noise filter
Noise filter
   ― 
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Pulsing flow
Pulsing flow
    
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Power sync on/off
Power synchronize
    
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Set power freq
Set power frequency
   ― 
Process variables ► Density ► Value select
Density ► Density value select
    
Process variables ► Density ► Fixed density
Density ► Density fixed value
   ― 
Process variables ► Density ► Std density
Density ► Standard density
Detailed setup ►
Temperature ► Std temperature
Temperature ►
Standard temperature
   ― 
Process variables ► Temperature ► Coef A1
Temperature ► Temp coef A1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 89
Alarm name Restore
   ― 
Process variables ► Temperature ► Coef A2
Temperature ► Temp coef A2
   ― 
Process variables ► Calorie ► Specific heat
Calorie ► Specific heat
   ― 
Process variables ► Temperature ► Fixed temperature
Temperature ► Calorific fix temp
High/Low alarm configuration ►    ― 
H/L alarm cfg ► High alarm
High alarm
H/L alarm cfg ► Low alarm
Low alarm
H/L alarm cfg ► HH alarm
High high alarm
H/L alarm cfg ► LL alarm
Low low alarm
H/L alarm cfg ► H/L alarm hyst
Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis
Detailed setup ► Display ►  ― ―  
Display set ► Line select ► Line 1
Line select ► Display select1
Detailed setup ► Display ► Device setup ► Detailed setup ►
 ― ―  
Display format ► Display set ► Disp format ► Format PV
Display format PV
 ― ―  
Display operation configuration ► Display set ► Optional config ► Line mode
Display line
 ― ―  
Display operation configuration ► Device info ► Order info ► Disp install
Display installation
 ― ―  
Device information ► Device info ► Order info ► Tag No
Order information ► Tag
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 90
Alarm name Restore
 ― ―  
Device information ► Device info ► Order info ► Long tag
Order information ► Long tag
Detailed setup ►
Device information ►    ― 
Device info ► Order info ► Electrode size
Order information ►
Electrode size
Device information ► Device info ► Order info ► MS code ►    ― 
Order information ► Model code
Basic model code
Order information ► Suffix config 1
Suffix config 1
Suffix config 2
Detailed setup ►
Device info ► Order info ► MS code ►    ― 
Device information ►
Option 1
Order information ► Option 1
Detailed setup ►
Option 2
Detailed setup ►
Option 3
Detailed setup ►
Option 4
Device information ► Device info ► Order info ► RS MS code ►    ― 
Order information ► Model code
Remote sensor basic model code
Remote sensor suffix config 1
Remote sensor option 1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 91
Alarm name Restore
Detailed setup ►
Device info ► Ver/Num info ► Trans serial No
Version/Number information ►
Transmitter serial No
Detailed setup ►
Device info ► Ver/Num info ► Sensor serial No
Version/Number information ►
Sensor serial No
Diagnostic root menu ►
Diagnosis ►     
Adhesion ► Function
Adhesion ► Adhesion function
Diagnosis ►    ― 
Adhesion ► Threshold level 1
Adhesion ► Adhesion level 1
Diagnosis ► Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ►
   ― 
Adhesion ► Adhesion ► Check cycle
Adhesion check cycle
Flow noise ► Function
Flow noise ► Flow noise function
Flow noise ► Threshold level 1
Flow noise ► Flow noise level 1
   ― 
Flow noise ► Flow noise ► Damp
Flow noise damping
Diagnosis ►     
Flow noise ► Span
Flow noise ► Flow noise span
   ― 
Conductivity ► Conductivity ► Function
Low conductivity function
Diagnosis ► Conductivity ►    ― 
Conductivity ► Low limit
Conductivity low limit
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 92
Alarm name Restore
Coil insul threshold
Coil insulation threshold
IEX compare
IEX compare
Diagnostic output
Diagnostic output
Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Verification ►
   ― 
Verification ► VF mode Mode
Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Verification ►
   ― 
Verification ► VF No VF No
Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ►
   ― 
Test ► Release time Release time
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 93
4.13.4 Data Logging Function *2: From the table below, select the data logging function ending
time.
The data logging function can be stored up to 10 min Sets the ending time to 10 minutes later.
30 min Sets the ending time to 30 minutes later.
four process values to the microSD card when 1h Sets the ending time to 1 hour later.
the optional code MC (microSD card) is selected. 3h Sets the ending time to 3 hours later.
12 h Sets the ending time to 12 hours later.
When using this function, it is possible to specify the 24 h Sets the ending time to 24 hours (1 day) later.
file name, data storage interval, and data logging 72 h Sets the ending time to 72 hours (3 days) later.
240 h Sets the ending time to 240 hours (10 days)
function ending time.
later.
The stored data is saved in the “YOKOGAWA”
folder as a “.TRD” file. *3: From the table below, select the process value to be stored.
The data logging function can be configured with PV Stores the process value that is PV-mapped in
Subsection 4.1.2.
the following parameters. Velocity Stores the flow velocity.
Volume flow Stores the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow Stores the mass flow rate.
Display menu path: Calorie Stores the calorie.
Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Data log ► Adhesion Stores the resistance value of the electrode
adhesion detection.
(see below) Flow noise Stores the flow noise value.
File name Specify the name of the file to be stored. Electrode A Stores the voltage of electrode A.
Interval time Specify the data storage interval.*1 Electrode B Stores the voltage of electrode B.
Start date Displays the date to start the data logging V peak Stores the peak value of the flow rate signal.
function.
Start time Displays the time to start the data logging *4: From the table below, select the use of the data logging
function. function.
End time Specify the time to end the data logging Not Execute Does not execute the data logging function.
function.*2 Execute Executes the data logging function.
Log 1 Specify process value 1 to be stored.*3
Log 2 Specify process value 2 to be stored.*3 Data is stored in the microSD card at the specified
storage interval during the period from the start of
Execute Specifies the execution of the data the data logging function to the end. The file stored
logging function.*4 by the data logging function can be opened as a
text file.
HART communication: Example: If the storage interval is set to “1 min”,
Maintenance root menu ► Data logging► data is stored as shown below.
(see below) …………
File name Specify the name of the file to be stored. 2017/01/0112:00:00 +9.9863E-01 +2.8235E+01 +1.4117E+04 +4.5600E-01
Interval time 2017/01/0112:01:00 +9.9909E-01 +2.8248E+01 +1.4124E+04 +3.9717E-01
Specify the data storage interval.*1 2017/01/0112:02:00 +9.9906E-01 +2.8248E+01 +1.4124E+04 +3.1753E-01
Start date Displays the date to start the data logging 2017/01/0112:03:00 +9.9859E-01 +2.8234E+01 +1.4117E+04 +4.0430E-01
function. 2017/01/0112:04:00 +9.9870E-01 +2.8237E+01 +1.4118E+04 +3.6609E-01
Start time Displays the time to start the data logging 2017/01/0112:05:00 +9.9829E-01 +2.8226E+01 +1.4113E+04 +4.1892E-01
…………
function.
End time Specify the time to end the data logging
Date and time Process Process Process Process
function.*2 value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4
Log1 select Specify process value 1 to be stored.*3 F0437.ai
Log2 select Specify process value 2 to be stored.*3
Log3 select Specify process value 3 to be stored.*3 The access ongoing to the microSD card can be
Log4 select Specify process value 4 to be stored.*3
Logging Exe
confirmed by the icon on the display. For example,
Specifies the execution of the data
logging function.*4 the icons of “microSD card ready” and “Access to
microSD card” are displayed alternately repeatedly
*1: From the table below, select the data storage interval. while the instrument accesses to the microSD card
1s Sets the storage interval to 1 sec.
10 s Sets the storage interval to 10 sec.
periodically during its data logging.
30 s Sets the storage interval to 30 sec. The icon of “Error accessing microSD card” is
1 min Sets the storage interval to 1 min.
5 min Sets the storage interval to 5 min.
displayed when the micorSD card cannot be
30 min Sets the storage interval to 30 min. accessed in such a case of removing it.
1h Sets the storage interval to 1 hour.
Insert the microSD card again when it is necessary
to use this function again. And an alarm of “microSD
failure” occurs when the microSD card has any
problems.
Ready for microSD Accessing microSD
card card
Disable to access
microSD card
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 94
HART communication:
IMPORTANT Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Protection► (see below)
• When using the data logging function, be sure Write protect Indicates the use of the write protection
to specify the date and time information. function.*1
• Before using the data logging function, make Enable write 10 min Cancels the write protection function only
for 10 minutes.
sure that the microSD card is prepared. New password Specify a new password for the write
Approximately 1 minute is required until the protection function.
insturment is ready to store data after it has
*1: Display of the use status of the write protection function
been turned on.
No The write protection function is disabled.
• Note that the date and time information are (Parameters can be changed.)
reset if this instrument is turned off. Yes The write protection function is enabled.
(Parameters cannot be changed.)
• Note that, if the microSD card runs out of free
space, the subsequent data will not be stored.
NOTE
4.14 Software Write Protection The use status of the write protection function
can be viewed using the parameters or the icons
Function shown on the display.
The write protection can be changed by the The following icons are displayed.
hardware write protection switch or the parameter Icon Contents
Write protect Invalid
setting of the software write protection. When the (Parameter change is possible)
write protection is enabled by any of them, data Write protect Valid
writing is forbidden. For details about the hardware (Parameter change is impossible)
write protection, see the Installation Manual as
listed in Table 1.1.
To enable the software write protection function, NOTE
specify “New password” (eight alphanumeric
characters without lowercase letter) as a password When the write protection switch on the amplifier
to disable the write protection function. By entering board is turned on, any parameter cannot be
the password in the menu of “Enable write”, it is changed.
possible to disable the write protection and change To change a parameter, cancel the write
the parameters only for 10 minutes. The write protection function using the pre-specified
protection is completely disabled if eight spaces password, and specify a new password.
are entered to “New password” in the state that the
protection is disabled temporarily. If the password had been forgotten, it is possible to
The write protection function can be configured by use the Joker password to temporarily disable the
the following procedure. software write protection function.
When the write protection function is disabled
Display menu path: using the Joker password, “Break” is displayed as
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Protection ► the parameter. Re-set a new password to use this
(see below) function. When this function is disabled using a new
Write protect sts Indicates the use of the write protection password, the parameter returns to “Keep”.
function.*1
The use of the Joker password seal can be
Enable write Cancels the write protection function only
for 10 minutes. checked by the following procedure.
New password Specify a new password for the write
protection function. Display menu path:
Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Protection ►
(see below)
Soft seal status Check the use of the Joker password.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 95
HART communication:
Protection► (see below)
Software seal Check the use of the Joker password.
Check the use of the Joker password depending on

the following parameters.
Keep Normal
Break Disable the write protection function
using the Joker password.
NOTE
If it is necessary to use the Joker password,
contact Yokogawa sales office or representative.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
<5. Parameters of Magnetic Flowmeter> 96
5. Parameters of Magnetic Flowmeter

This chapter describes the display parameters,
HART communication parameters. NOTE
To obtain the correct flow rate signal, specify the
The dedicated parameters are configured as
nominal size of the sensor, flow rate span, and
specified at the time of ordering. Other parameters
meter factor. This instrument has the nominal
are set to default values; therefore, when changing
size of the sensor and the meter factor specified
any one of them, always read this chapter.
upon shipment from the manufacturing plant,
IMPORTANT which does not require user’s settings.
The dedicated parameters are configured
If the instrument is turned off within 30 seconds before shipment only when they are specified
after parameter settings have been completed, at the time of ordering. Parameters that are
the settings are reset. After settings, be sure to not specified at the time of ordering must be
keep the power on for 30 seconds or more. configured by the user.
NOTE
The available functions and the displayed
parameters vary depending on the connection
terminal type selected at the time of ordering.
: Parameter displayed
Communication and I/O code
Terminal function Description
JA JB JC JD JE JF JG JH JJ JK
Current output1 Parameters related to the Current output1 are displayed
         
regardless of the code selection.
Current output2 Parameters related to the Current output2 may not be
displayed depending on the code selection.   
No.7-6 to 7-10, 7-21 to 7-23, and 13-9
Pulse/Status output1 Parameters related to the Pulse/Status output1 are
         
displayed regardless of the code selection.
Pulse/Status output2 Parameters related to the Pulse/Status output2 may not be
displayed depending on the code selection.      
No.5-11 to 22, and 13-10 to 13-11
Status output3 Parameters related to the Status output3 may not be
displayed depending on the code selection. 
No.6-1 to 6-2, and 13-13
Status input Parameters related to the Status input may not be displayed
depending on the code selection.     
No.6-3 to 6-5, and 13-14
Current input Parameters related to the Current input may not be
displayed depending on the code selection.
  
No.7-11 to 7-17, 7-24 to 7-26, 8-13 to 8-21, 13-5, and
13-12
IM 01E22A02-02EN
5.1 Parameter Lists for Display
and HART Communication
Each parameter list consists of the following items.
No. Indicates the parameter number.
Name Indicates the parameter name.
Indicates the parameter that can be displayed and/
or specified.
R: Displayed only. RW: Displayed and specified.
However, when changing a parameter on the
display, note that the specifiable parameters vary
depending on the operation level.
Setting Operator: Can only specify the language to be
displayed on the display and the configuration
parameters.
Maintenance: Can only specify the “Operator”
operation level and the zero-adjustment
parameters.
Specialist: Can specify all the parameters.
For selection-type data, the range indicates
options.
For numeric-type data, the range indicates the
Range
setting range and the number of decimal places.
For alphanumeric-type data, the range indicates
the limited number of characters.
Indicates the default value upon shipment from the
manufacturing plant.
Default
Symbol (*) indicates a parameter with the model
value
and suffix code specified, or a parameter specified
at the time of ordering.
Unit Indicates the unit of the data range.
Description Describes the contents of the parameter.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(1) Display parameters
This list shows the display parameters such as the flow rate and totalized value.
Name Range
Default
No. Setting HART Unit Description
HART communication Display Display value
communication
1-1 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -99999.9 to -99999.9 to - % Indicates the range rate for the process value that is
Dynamic variables► Process variables► +99999.9 +99999.9 PV-mapped in No. 3-14.
PV % rnge Flow rate % Number Number
of decimal of decimal
places: 3 places: 1
1-2 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -999999 to -999999 to - Flow velocity: Indicates the process value that is PV-mapped in No.
Dynamic variables► PV Process variables► +999999 +999999 Specified in 3-14.
Flow rate Number Number No. 3-15.
of decimal of decimal Volumetric flow
places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 rate: Specified
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
1-3 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R 0.000 to 0.000 to - mA Used for I/O1 terminal.
View outputs► Process variables► +99.999 +99.999 Indicates the current value of the current output.
AO1 current Analog out 1 Number Number
places: 3 places: 3
1-4 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -999999 to -999999 to - Specified in Indicates the totalized value of totalizer 1.
Device variables► Totalizer1 Process variables► +999999 +999999 No. 4-1.
Totalizer► Totalizer 1 Number Number
places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5
1-7 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -INF(**) to -999999 to - - Indicates the totalized value (totalizer value) scaled by
Totalizer count► Process variables► +INF(**) +999999 totalizer 1.
Totalizer1 count Totalizer► Totalizer 1 count Number Number
places: 0 places: 0
1-8 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -INF(**) to -999999 to - - Indicates the totalized value (totalizer value) scaled by
places: 0 places: 0
1-9 Process variables root menu► Device setup► ► R -INF(**) to -999999 to - - Indicates the totalized value (totalizer value) scaled by
places: 0 places: 0
1-10 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -999999 to -999999 to - Specified in Indicates the flow velocity.
Device variables► Velocity Process variables► +999999 +999999 No. 3-15.
Velocity Number Number
1-11 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -999999 to -999999 to - Specified in Indicates the volumetric flow rate.
Device variables► Process variables► +999999 +999999 No. 3-16 and
Volume flow Volume Number Number No. 3-19.
1-12 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -999999 to -999999 to - Specified in Indicates the mass flow rate.
Device variables► Mass flow Process variables► Mass +999999 +999999 No. 3-17 and
Number Number No. 3-19.
1-13 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R 0.000 to 0.000 to - mA Used for I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
View outputs► AO2 current Process variables► +99.999 +99.999 Indicates the current value of the current output.
Analog out 2 Number Number
places: 3 places: 3
(*) indicates a parameter which has already specified by ordering information and information of a sensor to be combined.
(**) is the range of single precision floating point (IEEE 754).
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(2) Easy configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters for the frequently-used general functions.
Name Range
Default
communication
2-1 Device root menu► Device setup► RW English English English - Specify the language to be used on the display.
Detailed setup► Display► Language French French Synchronized with No. 10-21.
Display operation configuration► German German
Language Italian Italian
Spanish Spanish
Portuguese Portuguese
Russian Russian
Chinese Chinese
Japanese Japanese
2-2 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.1 to +200.0 +0.1 to +200.0 3.0 s Used for current output or frequency output.
Basic setup► Volume flow► Easy setup wizard► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the volumetric
Volume flow damping AO/frequency Volume► Damp AO/F of decimal of decimal flow rate.
places: 1 places: 1 Synchronized with No. 3-12.
2-3 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.1 to +200.0 +0.1 to +200.0 3.0 s Used for pulse output or totalization.
Basic setup► Volume flow► Easy setup wizard► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the volumetric
Volume flow damping pulse/total Volume► Damp pls/ttl of decimal of decimal flow rate.
places: 1 places: 1 Synchronized with No. 3-13.
2-4 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ML Ml(Megaliter) m3 (*) - Specify the unit of the volumetric flow rate.
Basic setup► Easy setup wizard► m3 m3 Synchronized with No. 3-16.
Volume flow► Volume► Unit kL kl(kiloliter)
Volume flow unit l(liter) l(liter)
cm3 cm3
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
kbbl(US Oil) kbbl(US Oil)
bbl(US Oil) bbl(US Oil)
mbbl(US Oil) mbbl(US Oil)
ubbl(US Oil) ubbl(US Oil)
kbbl(US Beer) kbbl(US Beer)
bbl(US Beer) bbl(US Beer)
mbbl(US Beer) mbbl(US Beer)
ubbl(US Beer) ubbl(US Beer)
2-5 Device root menu► Device setup► RW /s /s /h (*) - Specify the time unit of the volumetric flow rate, mass
Basic setup► Easy setup wizard► /min /min flow rate, and calorie.
Volume flow► Time unit Volume► Time unit /h /h Synchronized with No. 3-19.
/d /d
2-6 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 1.00 (*) Specified in Specify the span of the volumetric flow rate.
Basic setup► Easy setup wizard► +INF(**) +999999 No. 3-16 and Synchronized with No. 3-21.
Volume flow► Volume► Span Number Number No. 3-19.
Volume flow span of decimal of decimal
2-7 Device root menu► Device setup► RW n unit/P n unit/P Unit/P (*) - Used for pulse output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► u unit/P u unit/P Specify the pulse rate scaling.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► m unit/P m unit/P Synchronized with No. 5-4.
Pulse/Status output 1► P1 unit Unit/P Unit/P
Pulse1 rate unit k unit/P k unit/P
M unit/P M unit/P
n P/unit n P/unit
u P/unit u P/unit
m P/unit m P/unit
P/unit P/unit
k P/unit k P/unit
M P/unit M P/unit
2-8 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 Specified in Used for pulse output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► +INF(**) +999999 No.5-4 Specify the pulse rate value.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Number Number Synchronized with No. 5-5.
Pulse/Status output 1► P1 val of decimal of decimal
Pulse1 rate value places: 1 to 5 places: 0 to 5
2-9 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 0 Hz Used for frequency output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► Number Number Specify the frequency that is available when 0% is set
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► of decimal of decimal to the process value PV-mapped in No. 3-14.
Pulse/Status output 1► F1 at 0% places: 0 places: 0 Synchronized with No. 5-8.
Frequency1 at 0%
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► Number Number Specify the frequency that is available when 100% is
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► of decimal of decimal set to the process value PV-mapped in No. 3-14.
Pulse/Status output 1► F1 at 100% places: 0 places: 0 Synchronized with No. 5-9.
Frequency1 at 100%
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
2-11 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%) PV - Specify item 1 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► PV PV Synchronized with No. 10-1.
Display► Line select► Display set► Line 1 Velocity Velocity
Display select1 Volume flow Volume flow
Mass flow Mass flow
Flow Flow
rate(%Bar) rate(%Bar)
Calorie Calorie
Totalizer1 Totalizer1
Tag number Tag number
Long tag Long tag
Commun Commun
Protocol Protocol
Adhesion Adhesion
Analog out1 Analog out1
Flow noise Flow noise
level
2-12 Device root menu► Device setup► RW None None Flow - Specify item 2 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%) rate(%) Synchronized with No. 10-2.
Display► Line select► Display set► Line 2 PV PV
Display select2 Velocity Velocity
Volume flow Volume flow
Mass flow Mass flow
Flow Flow
Calorie Calorie
2-13 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Totalizer2 Totalizer2 Analog - Specify item 3 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup► Easy setup wizard► Totalizer3 Totalizer3 out1 Synchronized with No. 10-3.
Display► Line select► Display set► Line 3 Tag number Tag number
Display select3 Long tag Long tag
Commun Commun
Protocol Protocol
Adhesion Adhesion
level
2-14 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not - Specify whether to execute the zero adjustment
Basic setup► Easy setup wizard► Execute Execute execute function.
Autozero► Autozero exe Synchronized with No. 3-31.
Autozero Exe
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(3) Basic configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the basic settings for the sensor and other devices.
Name Range
Default
communication
3-1 Device root menu► Detailed setup► Device setup► RW +0.1 to +200.0 +0.1 to +200.0 3.0 s Used for current output or frequency output.
Process variables► Velocity► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the flow velocity.
Velocity damping AO/frequency Pro var► Velocity► of decimal of decimal
Damp AO/F places: 1 places: 1
3-2 Device root menu► Detailed setup► Device setup► RW +0.1 to +200.0 +0.1 to +200.0 3.0 s Used for pulse output or totalization.
Process variables► Velocity► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the flow velocity.
Velocity damping pulse/total Pro var► Velocity► of decimal of decimal
Damp pls/ttl places: 1 places: 1
Process variables► Volume flow► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the volumetric
Volume flow damping AO/frequency Pro var► Volume► of decimal of decimal flow rate.
Damp AO/F places: 1 places: 1 Synchronized with No. 2-2.
Process variables► Volume flow► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the volumetric
Volume flow damping pulse/total Pro var► Volume► of decimal of decimal flow rate.
Damp pls/ttl places: 1 places: 1 Synchronized with No. 2-3.
Process variables► Mass flow► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the mass flow
Mass flow damping AO/frequency Pro var► Mass► of decimal of decimal rate.
Process variables► Mass flow► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the mass flow
Mass flow damping pulse/total Pro var► Mass► of decimal of decimal rate.
Process variables► Calorie► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the calorie.
Calorific value damping AO/frequency Pro var► Calorie► of decimal of decimal
Process variables► Calorie► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the damping time constant of the calorie.
Calorific value damping pulse/total Pro var► Calorie► of decimal of decimal
3-9 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.0100 to +0.0100 to 1.0000 (*) - Specify the low side frequency meter factor.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +3.0000 +3.0000
Sensor► Low MF Sensor► Low MF Number Number
places: 4 places: 4
3-10 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.0100 to +0.0100 to 1.0000 (*) - Specify the high side frequency meter factor.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +3.0000 +3.0000
Sensor► High MF Sensor► High MF Number Number
places: 4 places: 4
3-11 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ADMAG AXG ADMAG AXG ADMAG - Specify the sensor type.
Detailed setup► Sensor► Detailed setup► ADMAG AXW ADMAG AXW AXG (*)
Flow sensor select Sensor► Flow sensor sel ADMAG AXF ADMAG AXF
ADMAG AE ADMAG AE
Calibrator Calibrator
Other1 Other1
Other2 Other2
Other3 Other3
3-12 Device root menu► Device setup► RW mm mm mm - Specify the unit of the nominal size for the sensor.
Detailed setup► Sensor► Detailed setup► Sensor► inch inch
Nominal size unit Nominal size unit
3-13 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.01000 to +0.01000 to 100 (*) Specified in Specify the nominal size of the sensor.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +3000.0 +3000.0 No. 3-12.
Sensor► Nominal size Sensor► Nominal size Number Number
3-14 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Velocity Velocity Volume - Specify the process value to be PV-mapped.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Volume Volume (*) Velocity: Flow velocity
Process variables► Pro var► PV flow select Mass Mass Volume: Volumetric flow rate
PV flow select Diag Diag Mass: Mass flow rate
Diag: Flow noise
3-15 Device root menu► Device setup► RW m/s m/s m/s (*) - Specify the unit of the flow velocity.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► ft/s ft/s
Process variables► Pro var► Velocity► Unit
Velocity► Velocity unit
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
3-16 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ML Ml(Megaliter) m3 (*) - Specify the unit of the volumetric flow rate.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► m3 m3 Synchronized with No. 2-4.
Process variables► Pro var► Volume► Unit kL kl(kiloliter)
Volume flow► l(liter) l(liter)
Volume flow unit cm3 cm3
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
3-17 Device root menu► Device setup► RW t t kg (*) - Specify the unit of the mass flow rate.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► kg kg
Process variables► Pro var► Mass► Unit g g
Mass flow► klb klb
Mass flow unit lb lb
3-18 Device root menu► Device setup► RW MJ MJ J - Specify the unit of the calorie.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► kJ kJ
Process variables► Pro var► Calorie► Unit J J
Calorie► Calorific unit kcal kcal
cal cal
BTU BTU
3-19 Device root menu► Device setup► RW /s /s /h (*) - Specify the time unit of the volumetric flow rate, mass
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► /min /min flow rate, and calorie.
Process variables► Pro var► Volume► /h /h Synchronized with No. 2-5.
Volume flow► Time unit Time unit /d /d
or or
Device root menu► Device setup►
Detailed setup► Detailed setup►
Process variables► Pro var► Mass►
Mass flow► Time unit Time unit
or or
Device root menu► Device setup►
Detailed setup► Detailed setup►
Process variables► Pro var► Calorie►
Calorie► Time unit Time unit
3-20 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 1.00000 Specified in Specify the span of the flow velocity.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 (*) No. 3-15.
Process variables► Pro var► Velocity► Span Number Number
Velocity► Velocity span of decimal of decimal
3-21 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 1.00000 Specified in Specify the span of the volumetric flow rate.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 (*) No. 3-16 and Synchronized with No. 2-6.
Process variables► Pro var► Volume► Span Number Number No. 3-19. Specify the value equivalent to 1 m/s in case of no
Volume flow► of decimal of decimal ordering information by user.
Volume flow span places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5
3-22 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 1.00000 Specified in Specify the span of the mass flow rate.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 (*) No. 3-17 and
Process variables► Pro var► Mass► Span Number Number No. 3-19.
Mass flow► of decimal of decimal [kg/h]
Mass flow span places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5
3-23 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 1.00000 Specified in Specify the span of the calorie.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 3-18 and
Process variables► Pro var► Calorie► Span Number Number No. 3-19.
Calorie►Calorificflowspan of decimal of decimal [J/h]
3-24 Device root menu► Device setup► R -99.999 to -99.999 to - m/s Converts the process value PV-mapped in No. 3-14
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +99.999 +99.999 to the span of the flow velocity, and displays the
Process variables► Pro var► Velocity check Number Number converted value.
Velocity check of decimal of decimal
places: 3 places: 3
3-25 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No No No - Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailedsetup►Userspan► Detailedsetup►UserSpan► Yes Yes Specify whether the special unit can be set to the
User span select AO1 User span AO1► Select process value.
3-26 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ASCII 8 ASCII 8 All Space - Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailedsetup►UserSpan► characters characters Specify the special unit for the process value.
User span► User unitAO1 User span AO1► Unit
3-27 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 100.000 - Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailedsetup►UserSpan► +INF(**) +999999 Specify the special unit span for the process value.
Userspan►UserspanAO1 User span AO1► Span Number Number
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
3-28 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No No No - Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailedsetup►Userspan► Detailedsetup►UserSpan► Yes Yes Specify whether the special unit can be set to the
User span select AO2 User span AO2► Select process value.
3-29 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ASCII 8 ASCII 8 All Space - Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailedsetup►UserSpan► characters characters Specify the special unit for the process value.
User span► User unitAO2 User span AO2► Unit
3-30 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +0.00001 to +0.00001 to 100.000 - Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailedsetup►UserSpan► +INF(**) +999999 Specify the special unit span for the process value.
Userspan►UserspanAO2 User span AO2► Span Number Number
3-31 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not - Specify whether to execute the zero adjustment
Basic setup► Diag/Service► Autozero► Execute Execute execute function.
Autozero► Autozero Exe Execute Synchronized with No. 2-14.
3-32 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW -99.999 to -99.999 to 0.000 cm/s Indicates the result of executing the zero adjustment
Autozero► Result► Diag/Service► Autozero► +99.999 +99.999 function.
Zero value Result► Zero value Number Number Manual input is possible.
places: 3 places: 3
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(4) Totalization configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the totalization function.
Name Range
Default
communication
4-1 Device root menu► Device setup► R ML Ml(Megaliter) - - Indicates the unit of totalizer 1 (process value PV-
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► m3 m3 mapped in No. 3-14).
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► kL kl(kiloliter)
Total1 unit Unit l(liter) l(liter)
cm3 cm3
t t
kg kg
g g
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
klb(US) klb(US)
lb(US) lb(US)
4-2 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 1.00000 Synchronized Specify the conversion factor for scaling totalizer 1.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 (*) with No. 4-1.
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Number Number
Total1 conv factor Conv factor of decimal of decimal
4-3 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.00000 Volumetric flow Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 1.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 rate: Specified
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Number Number in No. 3-16 and
Total1 low cut Low cut of decimal of decimal No. 3-19.
places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Calorie:
Specified in
No. 3-18 and
No. 3-19.
4-4 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Run Run Run - Specify the totalizer 1 operation to be performed when
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Hold Hold an alarm has activated.
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Last valid Last valid Run: Continues the totalization function after an alarm
Total1 fail opts Failure opts has activated.
Hold: Stops the totalization function after an alarm has
activated.
Last valid: Continues the totalization function with the
last valid value before an alarm activates.
4-5 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Balanced Balanced Only - Specify the totalization direction of totalizer 1.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Absolute Absolute positive Balanced: Totalizes the differential flow rate between
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Only positive Only positive the forward and reverse directions.
Total1 options Options Only negative Only negative Absolute: Totalizes the absolute value of the flow rate.
Hold Hold Only positive: Totalizes only the flow rate in the forward
direction.
Only negative: Totalizes only the flow rate in the
reverse direction.
Hold: Stops totalization processing (holds the current
totalized-value).
4-6 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Stop Stop Stop - Specify whether to execute the totalization function of
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Start Start totalizer 1.
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1►
Total1 Start/Stop Start/Stop
4-7 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not - Specify whether to execute the reset or preset function
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Reset Reset execute of totalizer 1.
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Preset Preset
Total1 Reset/Preset Reset/Preset
4-8 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.00000 Volumetric flow Specify the preset value of totalizer 1.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 rate: Specified
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Number Number in No. 3-16.
Total1 preset value Preset value of decimal of decimal Mass flow rate:
places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 Specified in
No. 3-17.
Calorie:
Specified in
No. 3-18.
(***) indicates a parameter, only if the current input is enabled.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
4-9 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.00000 Volumetric flow Specify the target value at which the status output of
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 rate: Specified totalizer 1 becomes active.
Totalizer► Totalizer1► Totalizer► Totalizer 1► Number Number in No. 3-16.
Total1 set point Set point of decimal of decimal Mass flow rate:
places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 Specified in
No. 3-17.
Calorie:
Specified in
No. 3-18.
4-10 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ML Ml(Megaliter) m3 - Specify the unit of totalizer 2.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► m3 m3
cm3 cm3
t t
kg kg
g g
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
klb(US) klb(US)
lb(US) lb(US)
MJ (***) MJ (***)
kJ (***) kJ (***)
J (***) J (***)
kcal (***) kcal (***)
cal (***) cal (***)
BTU (***) BTU (***)
4-11 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 1.00000 Specified in Specify the conversion factor for scaling totalizer 2.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 4-10.
4-12 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.00000 Specified in Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 2.
Totalizer► Totalizer2► Totalizer► Totalizer 2► Number Number No.3-19.
Total2 low cut Low cut of decimal of decimal
activated.
4-14 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Balanced Balanced Only - Specify the totalization direction of totalizer 2.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Absolute Absolute negative Balanced: Totalizes the differential flow rate between
direction.
reverse direction.
totalized-value).
4-17 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.00000 Specified in Specify the preset value of totalizer 2.
Total2 preset value Preset value of decimal of decimal
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
4-18 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.00000 Specified in Specify the target value at which the status output of
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 4-10. totalizer 2 becomes active.
Total2 set point Set point of decimal of decimal
4-19 Device root menu► Device setup► RW ML Ml(Megaliter) m3 - Specify the unit of totalizer 3.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► m3 m3
cm3 cm3
t t
kg kg
g g
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
klb(US) klb(US)
lb(US) lb(US)
MJ (***) MJ (***)
kJ (***) kJ (***)
J (***) J (***)
kcal (***) kcal (***)
cal (***) cal (***)
BTU (***) BTU (***)
4-20 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 1.00000 Specified in Specify the conversion factor for scaling totalizer 3.
4-21 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.00000 Specified in Specify the low-cut value of totalizer 3.
Totalizer► Totalizer3► Totalizer► Totalizer 3► Number Number No.3-19.
Total3 low cut Low cut of decimal of decimal
activated.
4-23 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Balanced Balanced Balanced - Specify the totalization direction of totalizer 3.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Absolute Absolute Balanced: Totalizes the differential flow rate between
direction.
reverse direction.
totalized-value).
4-26 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.00000 Specified in Specify the preset value of totalizer 3.
Total3 preset value Preset value of decimal of decimal
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
4-27 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.00000 Specified in Specify the target value at which the status output of
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 4-19. totalizer 3 becomes active.
Total3 set point Set point of decimal of decimal
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(5) Pulse output configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the frequency output or pulse output of the I/O2 terminal, I/O3
terminal, and I/O4 terminal, and the status output of the I/O3 terminal.
Name Range
Default
communication
5-1 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function Fixed - Specify the output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Fixed pulse Fixed pulse pulse No function: No output
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Frequency output Fixed pulse: Fixed pulse output
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Output mode output Frequency Frequency output: Frequency output (Duty 50%)
Pulse1 output mode Status output output Status output: Status output
Status output
5-2 Device root menu► Device setup► RW On active On active On active - Used for pulse output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Off active Off active Specify the active direction of the pulse signal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out►
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Active mode
Pulse1 active mode
5-3 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 0.05 ms - Used for pulse output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 0.1 ms 0.1 ms Specify the pulse width.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Fix width 1 ms 1 ms
Pulse1 fix width 20 ms 20 ms
33 ms 33 ms
50 ms 50 ms
100 ms 100 ms
200 ms 200 ms
330 ms 330 ms
500 ms 500 ms
1000 ms 1000 ms
2000 ms 2000 ms
5-4 Device root menu► Device setup► RW n unit/P n unit/P Unit/P (*) - Used for pulse output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► u unit/P u unit/P Specify the pulse rate scaling.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► m unit/P m unit/P Synchronized with No. 2-7.
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Rate unit Unit/P Unit/P
M unit/P M unit/P
n P/unit n P/unit
u P/unit u P/unit
m P/unit m P/unit
P/unit P/unit
k P/unit k P/unit
M P/unit M P/unit
5-5 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 (*) Specified in Used for pulse output of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 5-4. Specify the pulse rate value.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Number Number Synchronized with No. 2-8.
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Rate value of decimal of decimal
5-6 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 Flow velocity: Used for frequency output or pulse output of the I/O2
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 Specified in terminal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Number Number No. 3-15. Specify the low-cut value.
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Low cut of decimal of decimal Volumetric flow
Pulse1 low cut places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 rate: Specified
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
5-7 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps - Used for frequency output or pulse output of the I/O2
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Measured Measured terminal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► value value Specify the output operation to be performed when an
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Alarm out Hold Hold alarm has activated.
Pulse1 alarm out Max pps Max pps 0 pps: No output
Measured value: Outputs the frequency or pulse with
the measured value.
Hold: Outputs the frequency or pulse with the last valid
value before an alarm activates.
Max pps: Outputs the frequency or pulse at 12500 pps.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the frequency that is available when 0% is set
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► of decimal of decimal to the process value PV-mapped in No. 3-14.
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► Frequency at 0% places: 0 places: 0 Synchronized with No. 2-9.
Frequency1 at 0%
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the frequency that is available when 100% is
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Statusout►PO1/SO1► of decimal of decimal set to the process value PV-mapped in No. 3-14.
Pulse/Status output 1► Frequency at 100% places: 0 places: 0 Synchronized with No. 2-10.
Frequency1 at 100%
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
5-10 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function No - Specify the status output function of the I/O2 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Alarm output Alarm output function No function: No output
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Warning output Warning output Alarm output: The status output becomes active when
Pulse/Status output 1► PO1/SO1► SO1 function Total limit 1 Total limit 1 an alarm activates.
Status output1 function Total limit 2 Total limit 2 Warning output: The status output becomes active
Total limit 3 Total limit 3 when a warning occurs.
H/L alarm H/L alarm Total limit 1: The status output is active while the
HH/LL alarm HH/LL alarm totalized value of totalizer 1 is exceeding the target
Fwd/Rev range Fwd/Rev range value.
Auto2 range Auto2 range Total limit 2: The status output is active while the
Ext2 answer Ext2 answer totalized value of totalizer 2 is exceeding the target
value.
Total limit 3: The status output is active while the
totalized value of totalizer 3 is exceeding the target
value.
H/L alarm: The status output is active while the process
value PV-mapped in No. 3-14 is out of the low limit
value or high limit value.
HH/LL alarm: The status output is active while the
process value PV-mapped in No. 3-14 is out of the low-
low limit value or high-high limit value.
Fwd/Rev range: The status output is active while the
fluid is flowing in the reverse direction.
Auto2 range: The status output is active while operation
is being performed in range 2.
Ext2 answer: The status output becomes active
depending on the range used for the status input.
5-11 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Normal Normal Normal - Used for pulse output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Magnetic For magnetic Specify whether to enable or disable the output for the
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► counter counter magnetic counter.
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Active pulse Normal: Normal output
Pulse2 active pulse Magnetic counter: Output for magnetic counter
5-12 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function No - Specify the output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Fixed pulse Fixed pulse function No function: No output
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Frequency output Fixed pulse: Fixed pulse output
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Output mode output Frequency Frequency output: Frequency output (Duty 50%)
Pulse2 output mode Status output output Status output: Status output
Status output
5-13 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Non-Connect Non-Connect Non- - Specify the process value to be output through the I/O3
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Velocity Velocity Connect terminal or I/O4 terminal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Volume flow Volume flow Non-Connect: No output
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Pulse select Mass flow Mass flow Velocity: Sets the flow velocity to the output.
Pulse2 select Calorie Calorie Volume flow: Sets the volumetric flow rate to the output.
Diag Diag Mass flow: Sets the mass flow rate to the output.
Calorie: Sets the calorie to the output.
Diag: Sets the flow noise to the output.
5-14 Device root menu► Device setup► RW On active On active On active - Used for pulse output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Off active Off active Specify the active direction of the pulse signal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out►
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Active mode
Pulse2 active mode
5-15 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 0.05 ms - Used for pulse output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 0.1 ms 0.1 ms Specify the pulse width.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Fix width 1 ms 1 ms
Pulse2 fix width 20 ms 20 ms
33 ms 33 ms
50 ms 50 ms
100 ms 100 ms
200 ms 200 ms
330 ms 330 ms
500 ms 500 ms
1000 ms 1000 ms
2000 ms 2000 ms
5-16 Device root menu► Device setup► RW n unit/P n unit/P Unit/P - Used for pulse output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► u unit/P u unit/P Specify the pulse rate scaling.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► m unit/P m unit/P
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Rate unit Unit/P Unit/P
M unit/P M unit/P
n P/unit n P/unit
u P/unit u P/unit
m P/unit m P/unit
P/unit P/unit
k P/unit k P/unit
M P/unit M P/unit
5-17 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 Specified in Used for pulse output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 5-16. Specify the pulse rate value.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Number Number
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Rate value of decimal of decimal
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
5-18 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 Flow velocity: Used for frequency output and pulse output of the I/O3
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 Specified in or I/O4 terminal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Number Number No. 3-15. Specify the low-cut value.
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Low cut of decimal of decimal Volumetric flow
Pulse2 low cut places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 rate: Specified
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
5-19 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps - Used for frequency output and pulse output of the I/O3
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Measured Measured or I/O4 terminal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► value value Specify the output operation to be performed when an
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Alarm out Hold Hold alarm has activated.
Pulse2 alarm out Max pps Max pps 0 pps: No output
Measured value: Outputs the frequency or pulse with
the measured value.
Hold: Outputs the frequency or pulse with the last valid
value before an alarm activates.
Max pps: Outputs the frequency or pulse at 12500 pps.
5-20 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 0 Hz Used for frequency output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the frequency that is available when 0% is set
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► of decimal of decimal to the process value mapped in No. 5-13.
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► Frequency at 0% places: 0 places: 0
Frequency2 at 0%
5-21 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 0 Hz Used for frequency output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the frequency that is available when 100% is
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Statusout►PO2/SO2► of decimal of decimal set to the process value mapped in No. 5-13.
Pulse/Status output 2► Frequency at 100% places: 0 places: 0
Frequency2 at 100%
5-22 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function No - Specify the status output function of the I/O3 or I/O4
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Alarm output Alarm output function terminal.
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► Warning output Warning output No function: No output
Pulse/Status output 2► PO2/SO2► SO2 function Total limit 1 Total limit 1 Alarm output: The status output becomes active when
Status output2 function Total limit 2 Total limit 2 an alarm activates.
Total limit 3 Total limit 3 Warning output: The status output becomes active
H/L alarm H/L alarm when a warning occurs.
HH/LL alarm HH/LL alarm Total limit 1: The status output is active while the
Fwd/Rev range Fwd/Rev range totalized value of totalizer 1 is exceeding the target
Auto2 range Auto2 range value.
Ext2 answer Ext2 answer Total limit 2: The status output is active while the
value.
value.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(6) Status input-output configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the status input-output of the I/O3 terminal, and multi range.
Name Range
Default
communication
6-1 Device root menu► Device setup► RW On active On active On active - Used for status output of the I/O3 terminal.
Detailedsetup►Pulse/Status► Detailed setup► Off active Off active Specify the active direction of the target signal.
Status output 3► Pulse/Status out► SO3►
Status output3 active mode Active mode
6-2 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function No - Specify the status output function of the I/O3 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Alarm output Alarm output function No function: No output
Pulse/Status► Pulse/Status out► SO3► Warning output Warning output Alarm output: The status output becomes active when
Status output 3► Function Total limit 1 Total limit 1 an alarm activates.
Status output3 function Total limit 2 Total limit 2 Warning output: The status output becomes active
Total limit 3 Total limit 3 when a warning occurs.
H/L alarm H/L alarm Total limit 1: The status output is active while the
HH/LL alarm HH/LL alarm totalized value of totalizer 1 is exceeding the target
Fwd/Rev range Fwd/Rev range value.
Auto 2 range Auto 2 range Total limit 2: The status output is active while the
Ext 2 answer Ext 2 answer totalized value of totalizer 2 is exceeding the target
value.
value.
6-3 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Short(On) act Short(On) act Short (On) - Used for status input of the I/O3 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Open(Off) act Open(Off) act act Specify the active direction of the target signal.
Pulse/Status►Statusinput3► Status in► SI3► Short(On) act: Active when short-circuited.
Status input3 active mode Active mode Open(Off) act: Active when opened.
6-4 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function No - Select the status input function of the I/O3 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 0% Signal 0% Signal function No function: No input
Pulse/Status► Status in► SI3► Function Lock Lock 0% Signal Lock: When the status input becomes
Status input 3► Ext auto zero Ext auto zero active, the current output of the I/O1 terminal is fixed
Status input3 function Total preset 1 Total preset 1 to 4 mA.
Total preset 2 Total preset 2 Ext auto zero: When the status input becomes active,
Total preset 3 Total preset 3 the zero-adjustment function is performed.
Ext2 ranges Ext2 ranges Total preset 1: When the status input becomes active,
the preset value is set to totalizer 1, and totalization
starts based on the value.
Total preset 2: When the status input becomes active,
Total preset 3: When the status input becomes active,
Ext2 ranges: When the status input becomes active,
the current output range is switched from range 1 to
range 2.
6-5 Device root menu► Device setup► R Open Open - - Used for status input of the I/O3 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Short Short Indicates the terminal status.
Pulse/Status► Status in► SI3► Status
Status input 3►
Status input3 state
6-6 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00001 to 0.00001 to 1.0 Flow velocity: Used for multi range.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 Specified in Specify the value of forward range 2.
Multirange►Forwardspan2 Multi range► Forward span 2 Number Number No. 3-15.
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
No. SettingHART Unit Description
communication
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 Specified in Specify the value of reverse range 1.
Multirange►Reversespan1 Multi range► Reverse span 1 Number Number No. 3-15.
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 Specified in Specify the value of reverse range 2.
Multirange►Reversespan2 Multi range► Reverse span 2 Number Number No. 3-15.
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
6-9 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 to 15 0 to 15 10 % Used for multi range.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the range switching hysteresis.
Multirange►Autorangehyst Multi range►Auto range hyst of decimal of decimal
places: 0 places: 0
6-10 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0 to 8 0 to 8 2 % Used for forward and reverse ranges.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number Specify the range switching hysteresis.
Multirange►Bidirectionhyst Multi range► Bi direction hyst of decimal of decimal
places: 0 places: 0
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(7) Display parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the current output of the I/O1 terminal, I/O3 terminal, and I/O4
terminal, and the current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Name Range
Default
communication
7-1 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 Flow velocity: Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 Specified in Specify the low-cut value.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO1► Number Number No. 3-15.
Analog output 1► Low cut of decimal of decimal Volumetric flow
AO1 low cut places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5 rate: Specified
in No. 3-16 and
No. 3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise:
cm/s
7-2 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +4.0 to +21.6 +4.000 to 20.500 mA Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number +21.600 Specify the high limit value of the current.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO1► of decimal Number
Analog output 1► High limit places: 3 of decimal
AO1 high limit places: 3
7-3 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +2.4 to +20.0 +2.400 to 3.800 mA Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number +20.000 Specify the low limit value of the current.
Analog output 1► Low limit places: 3 of decimal
AO1 low limit places: 3
7-4 Device root menu► Device setup► RW < 2.4 mA < 2.4 mA > 21.6 - Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 3.8 mA 3.8 mA mA Specify the current output that is available when an
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO1► 4 mA 4 mA alarm has activated.
Analog output 1► Alarm out 20.5 mA 20.5 mA < 2.4 mA: Outputs the lower current than 2.4 mA.
AO1 alarm out > 21.6 mA > 21.6 mA 3.8 mA: Outputs the current of 3.8 mA.
Measured Measured 4 mA: Outputs the current of 4 mA.
value value 20.5 mA: Outputs the current of 20.5 mA.
Hold Hold > 21.6 mA: Outputs the higher current than 21.6 mA.
Measured value: Outputs the measured current value
(indefinite).
Hold: Outputs the current that is applied when an alarm
has activated.
7-5 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Normal range Normal range Normal - Specify whether to execute the absolute range
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Abs range Abs range range function.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO1► Normal range: Normal range
Analog output 1► Range mode Abs range: Absolute range
AO1 range mode
7-6 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Non-Connect Non-Connect Non- - Specify the process value used to output the current
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Velocity Velocity Connect through the I/O3 terminal or I/O4 terminal.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO2► Volume flow Volume flow Non-Connect: No output
Analog output 2► AO2 select Mass flow Mass flow Velocity: Sets the flow velocity to the output.
AO2 select Calorie Calorie Volume flow: Sets the volumetric flow rate to the output.
Diag Diag Mass flow: Sets the mass flow rate to the output.
Calorie: Sets the calorie to the output.
Diag: Sets the flow noise to the output.
7-7 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0.0 Synchronized Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 with No. 7-6. Specify the low-cut value.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO2► Number Number
Analog output 2► Low cut of decimal of decimal
AO2 low cut places: 0 to 5 places: 0 to 5
7-8 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +4.0 to +21.6 +4.000 to 20.500 mA Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Analog output 2► High limit places: 3 of decimal
AO2 high limit places: 3
7-9 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +2.4 to +20.0 +2.400 to 3.800 mA Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Analog output 2► Low limit places: 3 of decimal
AO2 low limit places: 3
7-10 Device root menu► Device setup► RW < 2.4 mA < 2.4 mA > 21.6 - Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 3.8 mA 3.8 mA mA Specify the current output that is available when an
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AO2► 4 mA 4 mA alarm has activated.
Analog output 2► Alarm out 20.5 mA 20.5 mA < 2.4 mA: Outputs the lower current than 2.4 mA.
AO2 alarm out > 21.6 mA > 21.6 mA 3.8 mA: Outputs the current of 3.8 mA.
Measured Measured 4 mA: Outputs the current of 4 mA.
value value 20.5 mA: Outputs the current of 20.5 mA.
Hold Hold > 21.6 mA: Outputs the higher current than 21.6 mA.
Measured value: Outputs the measured current value
(indefinite).
Hold: Outputs the current that is applied when an alarm
has activated.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
7-11 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No function No function No - Specify the current input function of the I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Monitoring Monitoring function No function: No current input
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► Diff Diff Monitoring: Sets the temperature to the input (to check
Analog input► Function temperature temperature temperature information).
AI function Ext Ext Diff temperature: Sets the temperature difference to
temperature temperature the input.
Ext temperature: Sets the absolute temperature to
the input.
7-12 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +4.0 to +21.6 +4.000 to 20.500 mA Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► of decimal Number
Analog input► High limit places: 3 of decimal
AI High limit places: 3
7-13 Device root menu► Device setup► RW +2.4 to +20.0 +2.400 to 3.800 mA Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► of decimal Number
Analog input► Low limit places: 3 of decimal
AI Low limit places: 3
7-14 Device root menu► Device setup► R 0.000 to 0.000 to 0.000 mA Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +22.730 +22.730 Indicates the current value.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► Value Number Number
Analog input► of decimal of decimal
AI Current places: 3 places: 3
7-15 Device root menu► Device setup► RW deg C deg C deg C - Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► deg F deg F Specify the unit of the temperature.
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► Unit K K
Analog input► AI unit
7-16 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -999.9 to -999.9 to 120.0 Specified in Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +999.9 +999.9 No. 7-15. Specify the high limit value (20 mA) of the process
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► URV Number Number value used to input the current.
Analog input► AI URV of decimal of decimal
places: 1 places: 1
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +999.9 +999.9 No. 7-15. Specify the low limit value (4 mA) of the process value
Analog output/input► Analog out/in► AI► LRV Number Number used to input the current.
Analog input► AI LRV of decimal of decimal
places: 1 places: 1
7-18 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not - Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
AO/AI trim► AO trim► Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► Execute Execute execute Clears the adjustment value to output the current.
Clear D/A trim 1 AO trim► AO1 trim clear
7-19 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW 3.200 to 5.600 3.200 to 5.600 4.000 mA Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
AO/AI trim► AO trim► Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► Number Number Specify the adjustment value to output the current with
AO1 Trim AO trim► AO1 trim 4 mA of decimal of decimal 4 mA.
places: 3 places: 3
7-20 Device setup► RW 18.400 to 18.400 to 20.000 mA Used for current output of the I/O1 terminal.
Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► 21.600 21.600 Specify the adjustment value to output the current with
AO trim► AO1 trim 20 mA Number Number 20 mA.
places: 3 places: 3
7-21 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not - Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
AO/AI trim► AO trim► Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► Execute Execute execute Clears the adjustment value to output the current.
Clear D/A trim 2 AO trim► AO2 trim clear
7-22 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW 3.200 to 5.600 3.200 to 5.600 4.000 mA Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
AO/AI trim► AO trim► Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► Number Number Specify the adjustment value to output the current with
AO2 Trim AO trim► AO2 trim 4 mA of decimal of decimal 4 mA.
places: 3 places: 3
7-23 Device setup► RW 18.400 to 18.400 to 20.000 mA Used for current output of the I/O3 or I/O4 terminal.
AO trim► AO2 trim 20 mA Number Number 20 mA.
places: 3 places: 3
7-24 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not - Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
AO/AI trim► AI trim► Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► Execute Execute execute Clears the adjustment value to output the current.
Clear AI trim AI trim► Trim clear
7-25 Maintenance root menu► Device setup► RW 3.200 to 5.600 3.200 to 5.600 4.000 mA Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
AO/AI trim► AI trim► Diag/Service► AO/AI trim► Number Number Specify the adjustment value to output the current with
AI Trim AI trim► Trim 4 mA of decimal of decimal 4 mA.
places: 3 places: 3
7-26 Device setup► RW 18.400 to 18.400 to 20.000 mA Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
AI trim► Trim 20 mA Number Number 20 mA.
places: 3 places: 3
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(8) Auxiliary function configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the flow rate direction, rate limit, low-cut value, temperature correction
for the density, and calorie calculation.
Name Range
Default
communication
8-1 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Forward Forward Forward - Specify the fluid flow direction.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Reverse Reverse
AUX calculation► AUX calculation►
Flow direction Flow direct
8-2 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 to 10.0 5.0 % Specify the rate limit value.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number
AUX calculation► AUX calculation► of decimal of decimal
Rate limit Rate limit places: 1 places: 1
8-3 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.0 to 15.0 0.0 to 15.0 0.0 s Specify the dead time.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number
Dead time Dead time places: 1 places: 1
8-4 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Manual Manual Manual - Specify the noise filter (rate limit value and dead time).
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Level1 Level1
AUX calculation► AUX calculation► Level2 Level2
Noise filter Noise filter Level3 Level3
8-5 Device root menu► Device setup► RW No No No - Specify whether to execute the pulsing flow support
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Yes Yes function.
Pulsing flow Pulsing flow
8-6 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Off Off Off - Specify whether the excitation frequency and power
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► On On frequency are synchronous or asynchronous.
Power synchronize Power sync on/off
8-7 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 47.00 to 63.00 47.00 to 63.00 50.00 Hz When the excitation frequency and power frequency
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number are asynchronous, specify the power frequency that
AUX calculation► AUX calculation► of decimal of decimal synchronizes with the excitation frequency.
Set power frequency Set power freq places: 2 places: 2 (The default value is set as 49.00 for 500 mm (16 in.)
or larger sizes.)
8-8 Device root menu► Device setup► R 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99 - Hz Indicates the power frequency that synchronizes with
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number the excitation frequency.
IEX power frequency Iex power frequency places: 2 places: 2
8-9 Device root menu► Device setup► R 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99 - Hz Indicates the measured value of the power frequency.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number Number For the DC power, this parameter indicates “0.00 Hz”.
Mes power frequency Meas power freq places: 2 places: 2
8-10 Device root menu► Device setup► RW Fixed value Fixed value Fixed - Specify whether to execute the temperature correction
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Correct value Correction value function for the density.
Process variables► Pro var► Density► value Fixed value: Uses the density specified in No. 8-12.
Density►Densityvalueselect Value select Correct value: Uses the density with the temperature
corrected.
8-11 Device root menu► Device setup► RW kg/m3 kg/m3 kg/m3 - Specify the unit of the density.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► lb/gal lb/gal
Process variables► Pro var► Density► Unit lb/cf lb/cf
Density► Density unit
8-12 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0 (*) Specified in Specify the density value.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 999999 999999 No. 8-11.
Process variables► Pro var► Density► Number Number
Density►Densityfixedvalue Fixed density of decimal of decimal
8-13 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.00000 to 0.00000 to 0 Specified in Specify the reference density value to correct the
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +999999 +999999 No. 8-11. temperature for the density.
Process variables► Pro var► Density► Number Number
Density► Standard density Std density of decimal of decimal
8-14 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -999.9 to -999.99 to 20.00 Specified in Specify the reference temperature value to correct the
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +999.9 +999.99 No. 7-15. temperature for the density.
Process variables► Pro var► Temperature► Number Number
Temperature► Std temperature of decimal of decimal
Standard temperature places: 2 places: 2
8-15 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 - Specify the primary compensating rate to correct the
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 temperature for the density.
Temperature► Coef A1 of decimal of decimal
Temp coef A1 places: 0 places: 0 to 5
-32000.0 to
+32000.0
8-16 Device root menu► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 - Specify the secondary compensating rate to correct the
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 temperature for the density.
Temperature► Coef A2 of decimal of decimal
Temp coef A2 places: 0 places: 0 to 5
-32000.0 to
+32000.0
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
8-17 Device root menu► Device setup► R -999.9 to -999.99 to - Specified in Used for current input of the I/O4 terminal.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +999.9 +999.99 No. 7-15. Indicates the temperature with the current input.
Temperature► Meas temperature of decimal of decimal
Measured temperature places: 2 places: 2
8-18 Device root menu► Device setup► R 0.00000 to 0.0 to 999999 - Specified in Indicates the density with the temperature corrected.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► 999999 Number No. 8-11.
Process variables► Pro var► Density► Number of decimal
Density► Correct density Correct density of decimal places: 0 to 5
places: 0 to 5
8-19 Device root menu► Device setup► RW 0.0 to +999999 0.0 to 4184.0 J/kg*K Specify the specific heat of the fluid.
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► Number +99999.9
Process variables► Pro var► Calorie► of decimal Number
Calorie► Specific heat Specific heat places: 1 of decimal
places: 1
Detailed setup► Detailed setup► +999.99 +999.99 No. 7-15. Specify the reference temperature value to obtain the
Process variables► Pro var► Temperature► Number Number calorie when the current input is set to the absolute
Temperature► Fixed temperature of decimal of decimal temperature.
Calorific fix temp places: 2 places: 2
8-21 Process variables root menu► Device setup► R -INF(**) to -999999 to - Specified in Indicates the calorie.
Device variables► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999 No. 3-18 and
Calorific value Pro var► Calorie► Value Number Number No. 3-19.
8-22 Device root menu► Device setup► Detailed RW No No No - Specify the current output for Safety Instrumented
Detailed setup► setup► AUX calculation► Yes Yes System application.
AUX calculation► Set SIL Synchronized with No. 7-4.
Set SIL
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(9) Alarm configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to alarm output, burnout, and history.
Name Range
No. Setting Default value Unit Description
HART communication Display HART communication Display
9-1 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to +INF(**) -999999 to +999999 300.000 Flow velocity: Specify the high
High/Low alarm configuration ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 1 to 5 Number of decimal Specified in limit value to
High alarm H/L alarm cfg ► places: 1 to 5 No. 3-15. judge an alarm.
High alarm Volumetric flow
rate: Specified in
No. 3-16 and No.
3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise: cm/s
9-2 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to +INF(**) -999999 to +999999 -300.000 Flow velocity: Specify the high
Low alarm H/L alarm cfg ► places: 1 to 5 No. 3-15. judge an alarm.
Low alarm Volumetric flow
rate: Specified in
No. 3-16 and No.
3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise: cm/s
9-3 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to +INF(**) -999999 to +999999 300.000 Flow velocity: Specify the high
High high alarm H/L alarm cfg ► places: 1 to 5 No. 3-15. judge an alarm.
HH alarm Volumetric flow
rate: Specified in
No. 3-16 and No.
3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise: cm/s
9-4 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to +INF(**) -999999 to +999999 -300.000 Flow velocity: Specify the high
Low low alarm H/L alarm cfg ► places: 1 to 5 No. 3-15. judge an alarm.
LL alarm Volumetric flow
rate: Specified in
No. 3-16 and No.
3-19.
Mass flow rate:
Specified in
No. 3-17 and
No. 3-19.
Flow noise: cm/s
9-5 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 0 to 10 0 to 10 5 % Specify the
High/Low alarm configuration ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 0 Number of decimal hysteresis
Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis H/L alarm cfg ► places: 0 width between
H/L alarm hyst the alarm
occurrence and
resetting.
9-6 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► R High High - - Indicates the
Status/Self test ► Alarm ► Diag/Service ► Low Low current output
Burn out H/L alarm cfg ► direction when
4-20 burnout burnout occurs.
9-7 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 13: Main board EEPROM default on 013:EEPROM dflt All Off - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 21: PWM1 stop on mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► 22: PWM2 stop on for alarm
Alarm out mask ► Alarm ► 23: Option board mismatch on notification 1-1.
Alarm out mask 1 Alarm out mask ► 24: Option EEPROM failure on
Mask 1-1 25: Option board A/D failure on
Device setup ► RW 26: Option board SPI failure on 021:PWM1 stop 028: Ind bd - Indicates the
Diag/Service ► 28: Indicator board failure on 022:PWM2 stop FAIL masked alarm
Sts/Self test ► 29: Ind EEP FAIL on 023:Opt bd mismatch for alarm
Alarm ► 30: LCD driver failure on 024: Opt bd EEP FAIL notification 1-2.
Alarm out mask ► 31: Indicator board mismatch on 025: Opt bd A/D FAIL
Mask 1-2 32: Indicator communication error on 026: Opt bd SPI FAIL
33: microSD failure on 028: Ind bd FAIL
029: Ind bd EEP FAIL
030: LCD drv FAIL
031: Ind bd mismatch
032: Ind comm ERR
033: microSD FAIL
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
9-7 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 50: Signal overflow on 050: Signal overflow 052: H/L HH/LL - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 51: Empty pipe detection on 051: Empty detect alm mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► 52: H/L HH/LL alarm on 052: H/L HH/LL alm 053: Adh over for alarm
Alarm out mask ► Alarm ► 53: Adhesion over level 4 on 053: Adh over lv 4 lv 4 notification 2-1.
Alarm out mask 2 Alarm out mask ► 60: Span configuration error on 060: Span cfg ERR
Mask 2-1 62: Analog output 1 4-20 mA limit error on 062: AO 1 4-20 lmt
63: Analog output 2 4-20 mA limit error on 063: AO 2 4-20 lmt
64: Analog output 1 multi range error on 064: AO 1 mlt rng
65: H/L HH/LL configuration error on 065: H/L cfg ERR
66: Density configuration error on 066: Density cfg ERR
Device setup ► RW 67: Pulse output 1 configuration error on 067: Pls 1 cfg ERR 080: AO 1 - Specify the
Diag/Service ► 68: Pulse output 2 configuration error on 068: Pls 2 cfg ERR saturate mask function
Sts/Self test ► 69: Nominal size configuration error on 069: Nomi size cfg 081: AO 2 for alarm
Alarm ► 70: Adhesion configuration error on 070: Adh cfg ERR saturate notification 2-2.
Alarm out mask ► 71: Flow noise config error on 071: FLN cfg ERR 082: Pls 1
Mask 2-2 72: Data logging not started on 072: Log not start saturate
80: Analog output 1 saturated on 080: AO 1 saturate 083: Pls 2
81: Analog output 2 saturated on 081: AO 2 saturate saturate
82: Pulse output 1 saturated on 082: Pls 1 saturate 084: AI
83: Pulse output 2 saturated on 083: Pls 2 saturate saturate
84: Analog input saturated on 084: AI saturate 086: Coil
85: Cable misconnect on 085: Cable miscon insulation
86: Coil insulation warning on 086: Coil insulation
131: Transmitter type mismatch on 131: Trans mismatch
Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 87: Adhesion over level 3 on 087: Adhesion lv 3 087: Adhesion - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 88: Low conductivity warning on 088: LC warn lv 3 mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► 89: Insulation detection on 089: Insu detect 088: LC warn for alarm
Alarm out mask ► Alarm ► 90: Flow noise over level 3 on 090: FLN over lv 3 089: Insu notification 3-1.
Alarm out mask 3 Alarm out mask ► 91: Flow noise over level 4 on 091: FLN over lv 4 detect
Mask 3-1 92: Autozero warning on 092: AZ warn 090: FLN over
93: Verification warning on 093: Verif warn lv 3
94: Factory noise warning on 094: Fact noise warn 091: FLN over
95: Simulation active on 095: Simulate active lv 4
96: Analog output 1 fixed on 096: AO 1 fix 093: Verif warn
97: Analog output 2 fixed on 097: AO 2 fix 094: Fact noise
98: Pulse output 1 fixed on 098: Pls 1 fix warn
99: Pulse output 2 fixed on 099: Pls 2 fix
100: Analog input fixed on 100: AI fix
Device setup ► RW 101: Parameter restore running on 101: Param restore 101: Param - Specify the
Diag/Service ► 102: Display over warning on run restore run mask function
Sts/Self test ► 103: microSD card size warning on 102: Disp over 102: Disp over for alarm
Alarm ► 104: Parameter backup incomplete on 103: SD size warn 103:SD size notification 3-2.
Alarm out mask ► 105: microSD card mismatch on 104: Bkup incmplt warn
Mask 3-2 106: microSD card removal error on 105: SD mismatch 104: Bkup
120: Watchdog on 106: SD removal incmplt
121: Power off on ERR 105: SD
122: Instant power failure on 120:Watchdog mismatch
123: Parameter backup running on 121:Power off 106:SD removal
124: Data logging running on 122:Inst power FAIL ERR
123: Param bkup run 120:Watchdog
124: Data log run 121:Power off
122:Inst power
FAIL
123: Param bkup
run
124: Data log run
Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 130: Device ID not entered on 130: DevID not enter All Space - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► for alarm
Alarm out mask ► Alarm ► notification 4-1.
Alarm out mask 4 Alarm out mask ►
Mask 4-1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
9-8 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 13:Main board EEPROM default on 013:EEPROM dflt All Space - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 20:Exciter failure on 020: Exciter FAIL mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► 21:PWM1 stop on for alarm history
Alarm record mask ► Alarm ► 22:PWM1 stop on 1-1.
Alarm record mask 1 Alarm record mask ► 23:Option board mismatch on
Mask 1-1 24:Option EEPROM failure on
Device setup ► RW 25:Option board A/D failure on 021:PWM1 stop All Space - Specify the
Diag/Service ► 26:Option board SPI failure on 022:PWM2 stop mask function
Sts/Self test ► 28:Indicator board failure on 023:Opt bd mismatch for alarm history
Alarm ► 29:Ind EEP FAIL on 024: Opt bd EEP FAIL 1-2.
Alarm record mask ► 30:LCD driver failure on 025: Opt bd A/D FAIL
Mask 1-2 31:Indicator board mismatch on 026: Opt bd SPI FAIL
32:Indicator communication error on 028: Ind bd FAIL
33:microSD failure on 029: Ind bd EEP FAIL
030: LCD drv FAIL
031: Ind bd mismatch
032: Ind comm ERR
033: microSD FAIL
Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 50: Signal overflow on 050: Signal overflow All Space - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 51: Empty pipe detection on 051: Empty detect mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► 52: H/L HH/LL alarm on 052: H/L HH/LL alm for alarm history
Alarm record mask ► Alarm ► 53: Adhesion over level 4 on 053: Adh over lv 4 2-1.
Alarm record mask 2 Alarm record mask ► 85: Cable misconnect on
Mask 2-1
Device setup ► RW 085: Cable miscon All Space - Specify the
Diag/Service ► mask function
Sts/Self test ► for alarm history
Alarm ► 2-2.
Alarm record mask ►
Mask 2-2
Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► RW 130: Device ID not entered on 130: DevID not enter 130: DevID not - Specify the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► enter mask function
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► for alarm history
Alarm record mask ► Alarm ► 3-1.
Alarm record mask 3 Alarm record mask ►
Mask 3-1
9-9 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► R All Space All Space All Space - Indicates the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 10: Main board CPU failure 010: Main CPU FAIL name of new
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► 11: Reverse calculation failure 011: Rev calc FAIL alarm 1.
Alarm record ► Alarm ► 12: Main board EEPROM failure 012: Main EEP FAIL
Alarm record 1 Alarm record ► 13: Main board EEPROM default 013:EEPROM dflt
Record alarm 1 14: Sensor board failure 014: Snsr bd FAIL
15: Sensor communication error 015: Snsr comm ERR
16: A/D1 failure[Signal] 016: AD 1 FAIL[Sig]
17: A/D2 failure[Exciter] 017: AD 2 FAIL[Excit]
18: Coil open 018: Coil open
19: Coil short 019: Coil short
20: Exciter failure 020: Exciter FAIL
21: PWM1 stop 021:PWM1 stop
23: Option board mismatch 023:Opt bd mismatch
24: Option board EEPROM failure 024: Opt bd EEP FAIL
25: Option board A/D failure 025: Opt bd A/D FAIL
26: Option board SPI failure 026: Opt bd SPI FAIL
27: Parameter restore incomplete 027: Restore FAIL
28: Indicator board failure 028: Ind bd FAIL
29: Indicator board EEPROM failure 029: Ind bd EEP FAIL
30: LCD driver failure 030: LCD drv FAIL
31: Indicator board mismatch 031: Ind bd mismatch
32: Indicator communication error 032: Ind comm ERR
33: microSD failure 033: microSD FAIL
50: Signal overflow 050: Signal overflow
51: Empty pipe detection 051: Empty detect
52: H/L or HH/LL alarm 052: H/L HH/LL alm
53: Adhesion over level 4 053: Adh over lv 4
85: Cable misconnect 085: Cable miscon
130:Device ID not entered 130: DevID not enter
9-10 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup ► R 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D 23: 59 00000D 00: 00 to 00000D 00: 00 - Indicates the
Status/Self test ► Diag/Service ► 99999D 23: 59 operating time
Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► at which new
Alarm record ► Alarm ► alarm 1 has
Alarm record time 1 Alarm record ► occurred.
Record time 1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Record time 2
Record time 3
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Record time 4
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(10) Display configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to display settings.
Name Range
No. Setting HART Default value Unit Description
HART communication Display Display
communication
10-1 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%) PV - Specify item 1 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► PV PV Synchronized with No. 2-11.
Display ► Display set► Line select► Velocity Velocity
Line select ► Line 1 Volume flow Volume flow
Display select1 Mass flow Mass flow
Flow Flow
Calorie Calorie
Tag number Tag number
Long tag Long tag
Commun Commun
protocol protocol
Adhesion Adhesion
level level
10-2 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW None None Flow rate(%) - Specify item 2 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%) Synchronized with No. 2-12.
Display ► Display set► Line select► PV PV
Line select ► Line 2 Velocity Velocity
Display select2 Volume flow Volume flow
10-3 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Mass flow Mass flow Analog out1 - Specify item 3 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Flow Flow Synchronized with No. 2-13.
Display ► Display set► Line select► rate(%Bar) rate(%Bar)
Line select ► Line 3 Calorie Calorie
Display select3 Totalizer1 Totalizer1
10-4 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Totalizer2 Totalizer2 None - Specify item 4 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Totalizer3 Totalizer3
Display ► Display set► Line select► Tag number Tag number
Line select ► Line 4 Long tag Long tag
Display select4 Commun Commun
10-5 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW protocol protocol None - Specify item 5 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Adhesion Adhesion
Display ► Display set► Line select► Analog out1 Analog out1
Line select ► Line 5 Analog out2 Analog out2
Display select5 Flow noise Flow noise
10-6 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW level level None - Specify item 6 to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup►
Display ► Display set► Line select►
Line select ► Line 6
Display select6
10-7 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW None - Specify item 7 to be shown on the display.
Display select7
10-8 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW None - Specify item 8 to be shown on the display.
Display select8
10-9 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Auto Auto Auto - Specify the number of decimal places.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► 0 digit 0 digit Auto: Automatically adjusts the number of decimal
Display ► Display set► Disp format► 1 digit 1 digit places.
Display format ► Format PV 2 digit 2 digit 0 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “0”.
Display format PV 3 digit 3 digit 1 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “1”.
4 digit 4 digit 2 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “2”.
4 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “4”.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
No. HART
Setting Default value Unit Description
communication
10-10 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Auto Auto Auto - Specify the decimal-point position of the totalized value
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► 0 digit 0 digit for Totalizer 1.
Display ► Display set► Disp format► 1 digit 1 digit Auto: Automatically adjusts the number of decimal
Display format ► Format total 1 2 digit 2 digit places.
Display format total 1 3 digit 3 digit 0 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “0”.
10-11 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Specify the decimal-point position of the totalized value
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► for Totalizer 2.
Display ► Display set► Disp format► Auto: Automatically adjusts the number of decimal
Display format ► Format total 2 places.
Display format total 2 0 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “0”.
10-12 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Specify the decimal-point position of the totalized value
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► for Totalizer 3.
Display ► Display set► Disp format► Auto: Automatically adjusts the number of decimal
Display format ► Format total 3 places.
Display format total 3 0 digit: Fixes the number of decimal places to “0”.
10-13 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW -5 -5 0 - Specify the contrast of the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailedsetup►Displayset► -4 -4 -: Light, +: Dark
Display ► Optional config► Contrast -3 -3
Display operation configuration ► -2 -2
Display contrast -1 -1
0 0
+1 1
+2 2
+3 3
+4 4
+5 5
10-14 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW 1 Line(Big) 1 Line(Big) 3 Line - Specify the number of lines to be shown on the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailedsetup►Displayset► 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line(Big): 1-line display without unit. The numeric
Display ► Optional config► Line mode 2 Line 2 Line value is displayed in large text.
Display operation configuration ► 3 Line 3 Line 1 Line: 1-line display with unit
Display line 4 Line 4 Line 2 Line: 2-line display with unit
3 Line: 3-line display with unit
4 Line: 4-line display with unit
10-15 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.2 s 0.2 s 0.4 s - Specify the process value update period for the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailedsetup►Displayset► 0.4 s 0.4 s
Display ► Optional config► Period 1.0 s 1.0 s
Display operation configuration ► 2.0 s 2.0 s
Display period 4.0 s 4.0 s
8.0 s 8.0 s
10-16 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Normal Normal Normal - Specify whether to show or hide an alarm based on
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► NE107 NE107 NAMUR NE107.
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► Normal: Normal alarm display
Display operation configuration ► NE107 display NE107: Alarm display based on NAMUR NE107
Display NE107
10-17 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Normal Normal Normal - Specify the alarm display format.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Detail Detail Normal: Normal alarm display (Process value and
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► alarm name)
Display operation configuration ► Alarm display Detail: Detailed alarm display (Alarm name and action)
Display alarm
10-18 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Off Off Manual - Specify the display scroll method.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Manual Manual Off: Does not scroll.
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► Auto(2 s) Auto(2 s) Manual: Scroll by infrared switch
Display operation configuration ► Scroll mode Auto(4 s) Auto(4 s) Auto(2 s): Automatic scroll (2-second cycle)
Display scroll Auto(8 s) Auto(8 s) Auto(4 s): Automatic scroll (4-second cycle)
Auto(8 s): Automatic scroll (8-second cycle)
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
communication
10-19 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 s Specify the damping time constant of the display.
Detailed setup ► Detailedsetup►Displayset► Number of Number of
Display ► Optional config► Damp decimal decimal
Display operation configuration ► places: 1 places: 1
Display damping
10-20 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY - Specify the date display format.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► DD/MM/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Day
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► YYYY/MM/DD YYYY/MM/DD
Display operation configuration ► Format date
Display format date
10-21 Device root menu ► Device setup► Language RW English English English - Specify the language to be used on the display.
Detailed setup ► French French Synchronized with No. 2-1.
Display ► German German
Display operation configuration ► Italian Italian
Language Spanish Spanish
Portuguese Portuguese
Russian Russian
Chinese Chinese
Japanese Japanese
10-22 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Normal Normal Normal - Specify whether to execute the trend graph display
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Trend Trend function.
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► Normal: Normal display (Displays no trend graph.)
Display operation configuration ► Display mode Trend: Displays a trend graph
Display measure mode
10-23 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 - Specify the low limit value to display a trend graph.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► Number of Number of
Display operation configuration ► Trend offln LRV decimal places: decimal places:
Trend offline lrv 1 to 5 1 to 5
10-24 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 10.0 - Specify the high limit value to display a trend graph.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► +INF(**) +999999
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig► Number of Number of
Display operation configuration ► Trend offln URV decimal places: decimal places:
Trend offline urv 1 to 5 1 to 5
10-25 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%) PV - Specify item 1 to be shown in a trend graph.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► PV PV
Display ► Display set► Trend select► Velocity Velocity
Trend select ► Trend 1 Volume flow Volume flow
Trend select 1 Mass flow Mass flow
Calorie Calorie
10-26 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW None None None - Specify item 2 to be shown in a trend graph.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%)
Display ► Display set► Trend select► PV PV
Trend select ► Trend 2 Velocity Velocity
Trend select 2 Volume flow Volume flow
10-27 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Mass flow Mass flow None - Specify item 3 to be shown in a trend graph.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Calorie Calorie
Display ► Display set► Trend select► Analog out1 Analog out1
Trend select ► Trend 3 Analog out2 Analog out2
Trend select 3 Totalizer1 Totalizer1
10-28 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Totalizer2 Totalizer2 None - Specify item 4 to be shown in a trend graph.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Totalizer3 Totalizer3
Display ► Display set► Trend select►
Trend select ► Trend 4
Trend select 4
10-29 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW Normal Normal Normal - Specify whether to execute the black/white inverse
Detailed setup ► Detailedsetup►Displayset► Invert Invert function of the display.
Display ► Optional config► Inversion Normal: Normal display (Character color: Black,
Display operation configuration ► Background color: White)
Display inversion Invert: Black/white inverse display (Character color:
White, Background color: Black)
10-30 Maintenance root menu ► Devicesetup►Diag/Service► RW Not execute Not execute Not execute - Specify the test display function of the display.
Display indication ► Disp indicator► LCD test Execute Execute Not execute: No test display
LCD test Show Pattern1 Show Pattern1 Execute: Test display
Show Pattern2 Show Pattern2 (All LED ON -> All LED OFF -> Hound’s tooth check ->
Show Pattern3 Show Pattern3 Hound’s tooth check (inversion)
Show Pattern4 Show Pattern4 Show Pattern1: Test display (All LED ON)
Show Pattern2: Test display (All LED OFF)
Show Pattern3: Test display (Hound’s tooth check)
Show Pattern4: Test display (Hound’s tooth check
(inversion))
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
No. HART Setting Default value Unit Description
communication
10-31 Maintenance root menu ► Devicesetup►Diag/Service► RW Off Off Off - Specify whether to execute the display squawk function
Display indication ► Disp indicator► Squawk On On (backlight squawk on the display).
Squawk Squawk Once Squawk Once Off: Disables the squawk display.
On: Enables the squawk display (Continuous)
Squawk Once: Enables the squawk display (once only).
10-32 Device root menu ► Device setup► R Package 1 Package 1 - (*) - Indicates the language package.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Package 2 Package 2
Display ► Displayset►Optionalconfig►
Display operation configuration ► Language package
Language package
10-33 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW No disp No disp With disp (*) - Specify whether the display is provided or not.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► With disp With disp
Display ► Device info► Order info►
Display operation configuration ► Disp install
Display installation
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(11) Device information configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to device information settings.
Name Range
Default
communication
11-1 Device root menu ► Device setup ► RW ASCII 8 ASCII 8 All Space (*) - Specify the tag number.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► characters characters
Device information ► Device info ►
Order information ► Order info ► Tag No
Tag
Device root menu ► Device setup ► RW ASCII 32 ASCII 32 All Space (*) - Specify the long tag.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► characters characters
Device information ► Device info ►
Order information ► Order info ► Long tag
Long tag
11-2 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► R 00000D 00: 00 00000D 00: 00 00000D - Indicates the operating time of the device.
Time stamp ► Detailed setup ► to 99999D 23: to 99999D 23: 00: 00
Operation time Device info ► 59 59
Date/Time ►
Operation time
11-3 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► R 1900/01/01 to 1900/01/01 to 1900/01/01 - Indicates the current date (month, day, and
Time stamp ► Detailed setup ► 2155/12/31 2155/12/31 year).
Current Date Device info ►
Date/Time ►
Current date
11-4 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► R 00: 00: 00 to 00: 00: 00 to 00: 00: 00 - Indicates the current time (hour, minute, and
Time stamp ► Detailed setup ► 23: 59: 59 23: 59: 59 second).
Current Time Device info ►
Date/Time ►
Current time
11-5 - Device setup ► RW 01/01/1900 to 01/01/1900 to 01/01/1900 - Specify the current date (month, day, and year).
Detailed setup ► 12/31/2155 12/31/2155
Device info ►
Date/Time ► Set date
- Device setup ► RW 00: 00: 00 to 00: 00: 00 to 00: 00: 00 - Specify the current time (hour, minute, and
Detailed setup ► 23: 59: 59 23: 59: 59 second).
Device info ►
Date/Time ► Set time
Maintenance root menu ► - RW 01/01/1900 01/01/1900 01/01/1900 - Specify the current date (month, day, and year)
Time stamp ► 00: 00: 00 00: 00: 00 00: 00: 00 and the current time (hour, minute, and
Set Date/Time to to second).
12/31/2155 23: 12/31/2155 23:
59: 59 59: 59
11-6 Device root menu ► Device setup► R Non Non - - Indicates the types of transmitters to be
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► 4A Type 4A Type combined.
Device information ► Device info► Ver/Num info►
Version/Number information ► Transmitter type
Transmitter type
11-7 Device root menu ► Device setup► R Non Non - - Indicates the type of the option board.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Multi Multi
Version/Number information ► Option board ID
Option board ID
11-8 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW 1 mm 1 mm 3 mm - Specify the electrode size.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► 3 mm 3 mm
Device information ► Device info► Order info► 8 mm 8 mm
Order information ► Electrode size 10 mm 10 mm
Electrode size
11-9 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space (*) - Specify the model name.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► characters characters
Device information ► Device info► Order info►
Order information ► MS code► Model code
Basic model code
11-10 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space (*) - Specify suffix code 1.
Order information ► MS code► Suffix config 1
Suffix config 1
Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space (*) - Specify suffix code 2.
Order information ► MS code► Suffix config 2
Suffix config 2
(***) is set to the parameter at factory shipping.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
11-11 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space (*) - Specify optional code 1.
Order information ► MS code► Option 1
Option 1
Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space (*) - Specify optional code 2.
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
11-12 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space (*) - Specify the model name.
Order information ► RS MS code► Model code
Order information ► RS MS code► Suffix config 1
Order information ► RS MS code► Suffix config 2
Order information ► RS MS code► Option 1
11-15 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space - Specify the transmitter’s serial number.
Version/Number information ► Trans serial No
11-16 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space - Specify the sensor’s serial number.
Version/Number information ► Sensor serial No
Sensor serial No
11-17 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space - Specify memo 1.
Device information ► Device info► Memo►
Memo ► Memo 1 Memo 1
Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space - Specify memo 2.
Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 ASCII 16 All Space - Specify memo 3.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
11-18 Device root menu ► Device setup► R R1.01.01(***) R1.01.01(***) - - Indicates the firmware revision of the main
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► board.
Version/Number information ► Main soft rev
Main board revision
11-19 Device root menu ► Device setup► R R1.01.01(***) R1.01.01(***) - - Indicates the firmware revision of the sensor
Version/Number information ► Snsr soft rev
Sensor board revision
11-20 Device root menu ► Device setup► R R1.01.01(***) R1.01.01(***) - - Indicates the firmware revision of the display
Version/Number information ► Ind soft rev
Indicator board revision
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(12) Diagnosis function configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the electrode adhesion detection, flow noise diagnosis, and
verification function settings.
Name Range
No. HART
communication
12-1 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW Disable Disable Enable - Specify whether to enable or disable the electrode
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Enable Enable adhesion detecting function.
Adhesion ► Adhesion► Function
Adhesion function
12-2 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.10 M ohm Specify the level 1 value used to judge the
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► +100.00 +100.00 electrode adhesion detection.
Adhesion ► Adhesion► Number of Number of
Adhesion level 1 Threshold level 1 decimal decimal
places: 2 places: 2
places: 2 places: 2
places: 2 places: 2
places: 2 places: 2
12-6 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R 0.00000 to 0.00000 to - M ohm Indicates the resistance value used to judge the
Adhesion ► Adhesion► Result► Number of Number of
Result ► Value decimal places: decimal places:
Adhesion value 0 to 5 0 to 5
12-7 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R Level0 Level0 - - Indicates the electrode adhesion detection level.
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Level1 Level1
Adhesion ► Adhesion► Result► Level2 Level2
Result ► Status Level3 Level3
Adhesion status Level4 Level4
12-8 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.5 min 0.5 min 2 min - Specify the update cycle for electrode adhesion
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► 1 min 1 min detection.
Adhesion ► Adhesion► Check cycle 2 min 2 min
Adhesion check cycle 10 min 10 min
12-9 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW Disable Disable Disable - Specify whether to enable or disable the flow noise
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Enable Enable diagnosis function.
Flow noise ► Flow noise► Function
Flow noise function
12-10 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.0 to +999.9 0.0 to +999.9 5.0 cm/s Specify the level 1 value used to judge the flow
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of noise.
Flow noise ► Flow noise► decimal places: decimal places:
Flow noise level 1 Threshold level 1 1 1
12-14 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R 0.00000 to 0.00000 to - cm/s Indicates the flow noise diagnosis result.
Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► +100.00 +100.00
Result ► Flow noise Flow noise► Result► Number of Number of
Value decimal places: decimal places:
0 to 5 0 to 5
12-15 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R Level0 Level0 - - Indicates the level of the flow noise diagnosis
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Level1 Level1 result.
Flow noise ► Result ► Flow noise► Result► Level2 Level2
Flow noise status Status Level3 Level3
Level4 Level4
12-16 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.1 to 500.0 0.1 to 500.0 3.0 s Specify the damping time constant of the flow
Flow noise ► Flow noise► Damp decimal places: decimal places:
Flow noise damping 1 1
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
No. HART
communication
12-17 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.1 to 999.9 0.1 to 999.9 150.0 cm/s Specify the span of the flow noise.
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of
Flow noise ► Flow noise► Span decimal places: decimal places:
Flow noise span 1 1
12-18 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW Disable Disable Disable - Specify whether to enable or disable the low
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Enable Enable conductivity diagnosis function.
Conductivity ► Conductivity► Function
Low conductivity function
12-19 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R
0.00000 to 0.00000 to - mS/cm Indicates the conductivity.
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► +INF(**) 999999
Conductivity ► Conductivity► Result► Number of Number of
Result ► Value decimal places: decimal places:
Conductivity value 0 to 5 0 to 5
12-20 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.0000 to 0.0000 to 0.0010 mS/cm Specify the value used to judge the low
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► 99.9999 99.9999 conductivity.
Conductivity ► Conductivity► Low limit Number of Number of
Conductivity low limit decimal places: decimal places:
4 4
12-21 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not execute - Specify whether to execute the electrode
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Elec ins exe Elec ins exe insulation deterioration diagnosis function and the
Diagnostic Exe Diagnostic execute Conn chk exe Conn chk exe misconnection detecting function.
Not execute: Does not execute the functions.
Elec ins exe: Executes the electrode insulation
deterioration diagnosis function.
Conn chk exe: Executes the misconnection
detecting function.
12-22 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► RW 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 25.0 % Specify the value used to judge the deterioration of
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of coil insulation.
Coil insulation threshold Coil insul threshold decimal places: decimal places:
1 1
12-23 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 260.0 mA Indicates the reference excitation current value
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of used to judge the deterioration of coil insulation.
IEX compare IEX compare decimal places: decimal places:
1 1
12-24 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R 0.000 to 3.000 0.000 to 3.000 - V Indicates the maximum amplitude of the excitation
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of signal.
V peak hold value V peak hold decimal places: decimal places:
3 3
12-25 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R 0 to +9999.9 0 to +9999.9 - ohm Indicates the coil resistance value when the
Diagnosis ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of excitation current is applied.
IEX coil resistance IEX resistance decimal places: decimal places:
1 1
12-26 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R -3.00 to 3.00 -3.00 to 3.00 - V Indicates the voltage between electrode A and
Diagnosis ► Empty ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of electrode C.
Electrode voltage A Empty check► decimal decimal
Electrode voltage A places: 2 places: 2
12-27 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R -3.00 to +3.00 -3.00 to +3.00 - V Indicates the voltage between electrode B and
Diagnosis ► Empty ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Number of Number of electrode C.
Electrode voltage B Empty check► decimal decimal
Electrode voltage B places: 2 places: 2
12-28 Diagnostic root menu ► Device setup► R Full Full - - Indicates the result of the sensor empty pipe state
Diagnosis ► Empty ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Empty Empty function.
Result ► Empty status Empty check►
Empty status
12-29 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Zero Zero Zero - Specify the output to use the verification function.
Verification ► Diag/Service► Diagnosis► Measured Measured
Diagnostic output Diagnostic output value value
Hold Hold
12-30 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW No flow No flow No flow - Specify the fluid status to which the verification
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Flow Flow function is to be applied.
VF mode Mode No flow: No fluid flows.
Flow: Fluid flows.
12-31 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not execute - Specify whether to execute the verification
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Execute Execute function.
Verification Exe Execute
12-32 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Factory Factory Factory - Specify the timing to display the diagnosis result of
Verification ► VF No Diag/Service► Verification► Previous Previous the verification function.
VF No Present Present
12-33 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► R Passed Passed No Data - Indicates the result of executing the verification
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Failed Failed function.
Result ► Result► Failed/Passed Canceled Canceled
VF check result No Data No Data
Unknown Unknown
12-34 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► R 00000D 00: 00 00000D 00: 00 00000D 00: 00 - Indicates the operating time of the verification
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► to 99999D 23: to 99999D 23: function.
Result ► Result► VF operate time 59 59
VF operation time
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
communication
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Failed Failed function (the diagnosis result of the magnetic
Result ► Result► Magnetic circuit Canceled Canceled circuit).
Magnetic circuit result No Data No Data
Unknown Unknown
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Failed Failed function (the diagnosis result of the excitation
Result ► Result► Excite circuit Canceled Canceled circuit).
Excitation circuit result No Data No Data
Unknown Unknown
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Failed Failed function (the diagnosis result of the calculation
Result ► Result► Calc circuit Canceled Canceled circuit).
Calculation circuit result No Data No Data
Unknown Unknown
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Failed Failed function (the diagnosis result of the device alarm).
Result ► Result► Device status Canceled Canceled
VF device status result No Data No Data
Unknown Unknown
Verification ► Diag/Service► Verification► Failed Failed function (wiring misconnection check result).
Result ► Result► Connect status Canceled Canceled
Connection status result No Data No Data
Unknown Unknown
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(13) Test mode configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the test mode setting.
Name Range
Default
communication
13-1 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 10 min 10 min 10 min - Specify the time to automatically reset the test
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► 30 min 30 min mode.
Release time Release time 1h 1h
3h 3h
12 h 12 h
13-2 Maintenance root menu ► - RW Velocity test on Velocity test on All Space - Specify whether to set the test mode on or off.
Test ► Volume flow Volume flow
Test mode test on test on
Mass flow test Mass flow test
on on
Calorific value Calorific value
test on test on
AO1 test on AO1 test on
Pulse1 test on Pulse1 test on
SO1 test on SO1 test on
AO2 test on AO2 test on
Pulse2 test on Pulse2 test on
AI test on AI test on
SI3 test on SI3 test on
- Device setup ► RW Velocity test Velocity test - - Specify whether to set the test mode (input) on off.
Diag/Service ► Test ► Volume test Volume test
Input test ► Test mode Mass test Mass test
Calorie test Calorie test
AI test AI test
SI3 test SI3 test
- Device setup ► RW AO1 test AO1 test - - Specify whether to set the test mode (output) on or
Diag/Service ► Test ► PO1 test PO1 test off.
Output test ► Test mode SO1 test SO1 test
AO2 test AO2 test
PO2 test PO2 test
SO2 test SO2 test
SO3 test SO3 test
13-3 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 Specified in Specify the test value of the flow velocity.
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► +INF(**) +999999 No.3-15
Input test ► Velocity Input test ► Velocity Number of Number of
decimal places: decimal places:
0 to 5 0 to 5
13-3 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 Specified in Specify the test value of the volumetric flow rate.
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► +INF(**) +999999 No.3-16/No.3-19
Input test ► Input test ► Volume Number of Number of
Volume flow decimal places: decimal places:
0 to 5 0 to 5
13-4 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 Specified in Specify the test value of the mass flow rate.
Input test ► Mass flow Input test ► Mass Number of Number of
decimal places: decimal places:
0 to 5 0 to 5
13-5 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW -INF(**) to -999999 to 0.0 Specified in Specify the test value of the calorie.
Input test ► Input test ► Calorie Number of Number of
Calorific value decimal places: decimal places:
0 to 5 0 to 5
13-6 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 2.400 to 21.600 2.400 to 21.600 4.000 mA Specify the test value of the current output for the
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Number of Number of I/O1 terminal.
Output test ► AO1 Output test ► AO1 decimal places: decimal places:
3 3
13-7 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 0.0 pps (pulse/s) Specify the test value of the pulse output for the I/O2
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Number of Number of terminal.
Output test ► Pulse1 Output test ► PO1 decimal places: decimal places:
0 0
13-8 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW Open Open Open - Specify the test value of the status output for the I/
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Close Close O2 terminal.
Output test ► SO1 Output test ► SO1
13-9 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 2.400 to 21.600 2.400 to 21.600 4.000 mA Specify the test value of the current output for the I/
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Number of Number of O3 or I/O4 terminal.
Output test ► AO2 Output test ► AO2 decimal places: decimal places:
3 3
13-10 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 0 pps (pulse/s) Specify the test value of the pulse output for the I/O3
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Number of Number of or I/O4 terminal.
Output test ► Pulse2 Output test ► PO2 decimal places: decimal places:
0 0
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Close Close O3 or I/O4 terminal.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
Default
communication
13-12 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW 0.000 to 21.600 0.000 to 21.600 0.000 mA Specify the test value of the current input for the I/
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Number of Number of O4 terminal.
Input test ► AI Input test ► AI decimal places: decimal places:
3 3
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Close Close O3 or I/O4 terminal.
13-14 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup ► RW Open Open Open - Specify the test value of the status input for the I/O3
Test ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Short Close terminal.
Input test ► SI3 Input test ► SI3
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(14) Backup, restore, and data log configuration parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the parameter backup function, restore function, and data logging
function.
Name Range
communication
14-1 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► R ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters Factory - Indicates the name of the file that is backed up
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► Delivery (for factory).
Factory backup name Param bkup/restore►
F backup name
14-2 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► R ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters 06/30/2017(***) - Indicates the date when backup has been
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► made (for factory).
Factory backup date Param bkup/restore►
F backup date
14-3 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 8 characters ASCII 8 characters SD_FILE - Specify the name of the file to be backed
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► up onto a microSD card or restored from a
SD backup name Param bkup/restore► microSD card.
SD backup name
14-4 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters Backup 1 - Specify the name of the file to be backed up (1
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► for user).
Backup name 1 Param bkup/restore►
Backup name 1
14-5 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters 01/01/2016 - Specify the date when backup has been made
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► (1 for user).
Backup date 1 Param bkup/restore►
Backup date 1
Backup name 2
Backup date 2
Backup name 3
Backup date 3
14-10 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not execute - Specify whether to execute the backup function
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► Store Main to 1 Store Main to 1 as well as the backup location.
Backup Exe Param bkup/restore► Store Main to 2 Store Main to 2 Not execute: No backup Store main to 1: Makes
Backup execute Store Main to 3 Store Main to 3 a backup from the main board of the instrument
Store Main to SD Store Main to SD to memory 1 on the display board.
Store EEP1 to SD Store EEP1 to SD Store main to 2: Makes a backup from the main
Store EEP2 to SD Store EEP2 to SD board of the instrument to memory 2 on the
Store EEP3 to SD Store EEP3 to SD display board.
Store main to 3: Makes a backup from the main
board of the insturment to memory 3 on the
display board.
Store main to SD: Makes a backup from the
main board of the instrument to a microSD card.
Store EEP1 to SD: Makes a backup from
memory 1 on the display board onto a microSD
card.
card.
card.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
communication
14-11 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not execute - Specify whether to execute the restore function,
Param bkup/restore ► Diag/Service► Duplicate Data 1 Duplicate Data 1 the restoration location, and data to be restored.
Restore Exe Param bkup/restore► Duplicate Data 2 Duplicate Data 2 Not execute: Does not restore data.
Restore execute Duplicate Data 3 Duplicate Data 3 Duplicate Data1: Restores Duplicate Data from
Duplicate SD Duplicate SD memory 1 on the indicator board to the main
Restore Data 1 Restore Data 1 board of the instrument.
Restore Data 2 Restore Data 2 Duplicate Data2: Restores Duplicate Data from
Restore Data 3 Restore Data 3 memory 2 on the display board to the main
Restore SD Restore SD board of the instrument.
Compulsion Data 1 Compulsion Data 1 Duplicate Data3: Restores Duplicate Data from
Compulsion Data 2 Compulsion Data 2 memory 3 on the display board to the main
Compulsion Data 3 Compulsion Data 3 board of the instrument.
Compulsion SD Compulsion SD Duplicate SD: Restores Duplicate Data from
Restore Factory Restore Factory a microSD card to the main board of the
instrument.
Restore Data1: Restores Restore Data from
memory 1 on the display board to the main
board of the instrument.
board of the insturment.
Restore SD: Restores Restore Data from
a microSD card to the main board of the
insturment.
Compulsion Data1: Restores Compulsion Data
from memory 1 on the display board to the main
Compulsion SD: Restores Compulsion Data
from a microSD card to the main board of the
insturment.
Restore Factory: Restores to the status that
is set upon shipment from the manufacturing
plant.
14-12 Device setup► R Unexecuted Unexecuted Unexecuted - Indicates the result of executing the restore
Diag/Service► Success Success function.
Param bkup/restore► Failure Failure Unexecuted: Does not restore data.
Restore result Running Running Success: Succeeded in restoration.
Failure: Failed in restoration.
Running: Parameter restore running
14-13 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 8 characters ASCII 8 characters LOG_FILE - Specify the name of the file to be stored by data
Data logging ► File name Diag/Service► log.
Data log► File name
14-14 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW 1 s 1s 1 min - Specify the data log storage interval.
Data logging ► Interval time Diag/Service► 10 s 10 s
Data log► Interval time 30 s 30 s
1 min 1 min
5 min 5 min
30 min 30 min
1h 1h
14-15 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► R 2016/01/01 to 2016/01/01 to - - Indicates the date to start the data logging
Data logging ► Start date Diag/Service► 2155/12/31 2155/12/31 function.
Data log► Start date
14-16 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► R 00: 00: 00 to 00: 00: 00 to 23: 59: - - Indicates the time to start the data logging
Data logging ► Start time Diag/Service► 23: 59: 59 59 function.
Data log► Start time
14-17 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW 10 min 10 min 12 h - Specify the time to end the data logging
Data logging ► End time Diag/Service► 30 min 30 min function.
Data log► End time 1h 1h
3h 3h
12 h 12 h
24 h 24 h
72 h 72 h
240 h 240 h
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Name Range
communication
14-18 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Velocity Velocity PV - Specify process value 1 to be stored by data
Data logging ► Log1 select Diag/Service► Volume flow Volume flow log.
Data log► Log 1 Mass flow Mass flow
14-19 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Calorie Calorie Velocity - Specify process value 2 to be stored by data
Data logging ► Log2 select Diag/Service► PV PV log.
Data log► Log 2 Flow noise Flow noise
14-20 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Adhesion Adhesion Volume flow - Specify process value 3 to be stored by data
Data logging ► Log3 select Diag/Service► Electrode A Electrode A log.
Data log► Log 3 Electrode B Electrode B
14-21 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW V peak V peak Mass flow - Specify process value 4 to be stored by data
Data logging ► Log4 select Diag/Service► log.
Data log► Log 4
14-22 Maintenance root menu ► Device setup► RW Not execute Not execute Not execute - Specify whether to execute the data logging
Data logging ► Logging Exe Diag/Service► Execute Execute function.
Data log► Execute
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(15) Parameter protection parameters
This list shows the parameters related to the write protection function.
Name Range
Default
communication
15-1 - Device setup► RW 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 - Display-limited parameter (for service)
Detailed setup► Number of Number of
Protection► Key code decimal places: decimal places:
0 0
15-2 Device root menu ► Device setup► R No No No - Indicates whether to use the write protection function.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Yes Yes
Protection ► Protection► Write protect sts
Write protect
15-3 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 8 ASCII 8 All Space - Enter the password to cancel the write protection
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► characters characters function for 10 minutes.
Protection ► Protection► Enable write
Enable write 10 min
15-4 Device root menu ► Device setup► RW ASCII 8 ASCII 8 All Space - Specify a new password to use the write protection
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► characters characters function.
Protection ► Protection► New password
New password
15-5 Device root menu ► Device setup► R Keep Keep Keep - Indicates whether to use the Joker password.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup► Break Break
Protection ► Protection► Soft seal status
Software seal
IM 01E22A02-02EN
5.2 Menu Tree of Display
Operation level
Exit
Operator
Maintenance
Specialist
Device setup Current alarm
Device setup Current alarm Setting upload
Language Status 0
Status 1
Status 2
Status 3
Status 4
Status 5
Status 14
Status 15
Status 16
Status 17
Status 18
Status 19
Status 20
Setting download
Process variables
Process variables Flow rate(%)
Flow rate
Velocity
Volume
Mass
Calorie
Analog out 1
Analog out 2 Totalizer
Totalizer Totalizer 1
Totalizer 2
Totalizer 3
Totalizer 1 count
Totalizer 2 count
Totalizer 3 count
Diag/Service Sts/Self test Current alarm

Diag/Service Sts/Self test Current alarm Status 0
Status 1
Status 2
Status 3
Status 4
Status 5
Status 14
Status 15
Status 16
Status 17
Status 18
Status 19
Status 20
Alarm Alarm record mask
Alarm Alarm record mask Mask 1-1
Mask 1-2
Mask 2-1
Mask 2-2
Mask 3-1
Alarm record
Alarm record Record alarm 1
Record time 1
Record alarm 2
Record time 2
Record alarm 3
Record time 3
Record alarm 4
Record time 4
Alarm out mask

Alarm out mask Mask 1-1
Mask 1-2
Time stamp Mask 2-1
Time stamp Date Mask
M 2-2
Time Mask 3-1
Op time Mask 3-2
Mask 4-1
F0501.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Operation level
Exit
Operator
Maintenance
Specialist
Device setup Diag/Service
Device setup (Continued) (Continued)
Diagnosis Adhesion
Diagnosis Adhesion Function
Threshold level 1
Threshold level 2
Threshold level 3
Threshold level 4 Result
Result Value
Check cycle Status
Flow noise
Flow noise Function
Threshold level 1
Threshold level 2
Threshold level 3
Threshold level 4 Result
Result Value
Damp Status
Span
Conductivity
Conductivity Function
Low limit Result
Result Value
Diagnostic execute
Coil insul threshold
IEX compare
Diagnostic output
V peak hold
IEX resistance Empty check
Empty check Electrode voltage A
Electrode voltage B
Verification
Empty status
Verification Mode
Execute
VF No Result
Result Failed/Passed
VF operate time
Magnetic circuit
Excite circuit
Calc circuit
Device status
Connect status
Autozero
Autozero Execute Result
Result Zero value
AO/AI trim AO trim

AO/AI trim AO trim AO1 trim clear
AO1 trim 4mA
AO1 trim 20mA
AO2 trim clear
AO2 trim 4mA
AO2 trim 20mA
AI trim
AI trim Trim clear
Trim 4mA
H/L alarm cfg
Trim 20mA
H/L alarm cfg High alarm
Low alarm
HH alarm
LL alarm
H/L alarm hyst
4-20 burnout
Test
Test Release time Input test

Input test Test mode
Velocity
Volume
Mass
Calorie
AI
SI3
Output test
Output test Test mode
AO1
PO1
SO1
AO2
PO2
SO2
SO3 F0502.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Operation level
Exit
Operator
Maintenance
Specialist
Device setup Diag/Service
Param bkup/restore
Param bkup/restore F backup name
F backup date
SD backup name
Backup execute
Restore execute
Restore result
Backup name 1
Backup date 1
Backup name 2
Backup date 2
Backup name 3
Backup date 3
Data log
Data log File name
Interval time
Start date
Start time
End time
Execute
Log 1
Log 2
Log 3
Log 4
Disp indicator
Disp indicator LCD test
Squawk
Easy setup wizard Volume

Easy setup wizard Volume Setting upload
Damp AO/F
Damp pls/ttl
Unit
Time unit
Span
Setting download
Pulse/Status out
Pulse/Status out Setting upload

P1 unit
P1 val
F1 at 0%
F1 at 100%
Setting download
Display set
Display set Setting upload
Autozero exe Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Setting download
Detailed setup Pro var

Detailed setup Pro var PV flow select Velocity
Velocity Damp AO/F
Damp pls/ttl
Unit
Span
Volume
Volume Damp AO/F
Damp pls/ttl
Unit
Time unit
Span
Mass
Mass Damp AO/F
Damp pls/ttl
Unit
Time unit
Span
Calorie
Calorie
Damp AO/F
Damp pls/ttl
Unit
Time unit
Span
Specific heat
Density
Density Value select
Unit
Fixed density
Std density
Correct density
F0503.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Operation level
Exit
Operator
Maintenance
Specialist
Device setup Detailed setup
Pro var
(Continued)
Temperature
Temperature Std temperature
Velocity check Meas temperature
Fixed temperature
Sensor Coef A1
Sensor Low MF Coef A2
High MF
Flow sensor sel
Nominal size unit
Nominal size
User Span User span AO1

User Span User span AO1 Select
Span
Unit
User span AO2

User span AO2 Select
Span
Unit
Totalizer Totalizer 1
Totalizer Totalizer 1 Unit
Conv factor
Low cut
Failure opts
Options
Start/Stop
Reset/Preset
Preset value
Set point
Totalizer 2
Totalizer 2 Unit
Conv factor
Low cut
Failure opts
Options
Start/Stop
Reset/Preset
Preset value
Set point
Totalizer 3
Totalizer 3 Unit
Conv factor
Low cut
Failure opts
Options
Start/Stop
Reset/Preset
Preset value
Set point
Pulse/Status out PO1/SO1

Pulse/Status out PO1/SO1 Output mode
Active mode
Fix width
Rate unit
Rate value
Low cut
Alarm out
Frequency at 0%
Frequency at 100%
SO1 function
PO2/SO2
PO2/SO2 Active pulse
Output mode
Pulse select
Active mode
Fix width
Rate unit
Rate value
Low cut
Alarm out
Frequency at 0%
Frequency at 100%
SO2 function
SO3
SO3 Active mode
Function
F0504.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Operation level
Exit
Operator
Maintenance
Specialist
Device setup Detailed setup
Status in SI3
Status in SI3 Active mode
Function
State
Analog out/in AO1

Analog out/in AO1 Low cut
High limit
Low limit
Alarm out
Range mode
AO2
AO2 AO2 Select
Low cut
High limit
Low limit
Alarm out
AI
AI Function
High limit
Multi range Low limit
Multi range Forward span 2 Value
Reverse span 1 Unit
Reverse span 2 URV
Auto range hyst LRV
Bi direction hyst
AUX calculation
AUX calculation Flow direct
Rate limit
Dead time
Noise filter
Pulsing flow
Power sync on/off
Set power freq
Iex power frequency
Meas power freq
Set SIL
Display set Line select

Display set Line select Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Trend select
Trend select Trend 1
Trend 2
Trend 3
Trend 4
Disp format
Disp format Format PV
Format total 1
Format total 2
Format total 3
Optional config
Optional config Contrast
Line mode
Access cfg Period
Access cfg User role NE107 display
Chg mainte Alarm display
Chg special Scroll mode
Damp
Format date
Inversion
Language package
Display mode
Trend offln LRV
Trend offln URV
Device info Date/Time

Device info Date/Time Current date
Current time
Operation time
Set date
Set time
F0505.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Operation level
Exit
Operator
Maintenance
Specialist
Device setup Detailed setup Device info
Device setup (Continued) (Continued) (Continued)
Order info
Order info Tag No
Long tag
Electrode size MS code
MS code Model code
Suffix config 1
Suffix config 2
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
RS MS code
RS MS code Model code
Disp install Suffix config 1
Suffix config 2
Ver/Num info Option 1
Ver/Num info Transmitter type Option 2
Option board ID Option 3
Trans serial No Option 4
Sensor serial No
Main soft rev
Snsr soft rev
Ind soft rev
Hard rev
Dev id
Memo
Memo Memo 1
Memo 2
Memo 3
HART info
HART info Poll addr
Loop curr mode
Num req preams
Protection Num resp preams
Protection Key code
Write protect sts
Enable write
microSD (microSD) New password
microSD (microSD) Contents Soft seal status
Unmount
Format Property
Property Total space
Available space
File system F0506.ai
Status 0 Status 1 Status 2 Status 3

010:Main CPU FAIL 014:Snsr bd FAIL 021:PWM 1 stop 027:Restore FAIL
011:Rev calc FAIL 015:Snsr comm ERR 022:PWM 2 stop 028:Ind bd FAIL
012:Main EEP FAIL 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 023:Opt bd mismatch 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL
013:Main EEP dflt 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 030:LCD drv FAIL
018:Coil open 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 031:Ind bd mismatch
019:Coil short 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 032:Ind comm ERR
020:Exciter FAIL 033:microSD FAIL

050:Signal overflow 060:Span cfg ERR 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR 080:AO 1 saturate
051:Empty detect 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR 081:AO 2 saturate
052:H/L HH/LL alm 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 069:Nomi size cfg 082:Pls 1 saturate
053:Adh over lv 4 064:AO 1 mlt rng 070:Adh cfg ERR 083:Pls 2 saturate
065:H/L cfg ERR 071:FLN cfg ERR 084:AI saturate
066:Density cfg ERR 072:Log not start 085:Cable miscon
086:Coil insulation
131:Trans mismatch

087:Adhesion lv 3 095:Simulate active 101:Param restore run 120:Watchdog
088:LC warn 096:AO 1 fix 102:Disp over 121:Power off
089:Insu detect 097:AO 2 fix 103:SD size warn 122:Inst power FAIL
090:FLN over lv 3 098:Pls 1 fix 104:Bkup incmplt 123:Param bkup run
091:FLN over lv 4 099:Pls 2 fix 105:SD mismatch 124:Data log run
092:AZ warn 100:AI fix 106:SD removal ERR
093:Verif warn
094:Fact noise warn
Status 20
130:DevID not enter
IM 01E22A02-02EN
5.3 Menu Tree of HART Communication
The structure of DTM menu tree is as blow.
(1) Process variables root menu
Dynamic variables
Device variables
Device variables status
Totalizer count
View outputs
View inputs
(2) Diagnostic root menu
Status/Self test
Diagnosis
(3) Maintenance root menu
Time stamp
Test
Autozero
AO/AI trim
High/Low alarm configuration
Verification
Param bkup/restore
Data logging
Display indication
(4) Device root menu
Easy setup wizard
Basic setup
Detailed setup
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(1) Process variables root menu
Menu(Online) Process variables root menu Dynamic variables
Process variables root menu Dynamic variables [PV]
[PV] data quality
[PV] limit status
PV % rnge
Range information
[SV]
[SV] data quality
[SV] limit status
[TV]
[TV] data quality
[TV] limit status
[QV]
[QV] data quality
[QV] limit status
PV is
SV is
TV is
QV is
Change PV map
Change SV map
Change TV map
Change QV map
Device variables
Device variables Velocity
Volume flow
Mass flow
Totalizer1
Totalizer2
Totalizer3
Flow noise
Calorific value
Device variables status

Device variables status Velocity data quality
Velocity limit status
Volume flow data quality
Volume flow limit status
Mass flow data quality
Mass flow limit status
Totalizer1 data quality
Totalizer1 limit status
Flow noise data quality
Flow noise limit status
Calorific value data quality
Calorific value limit status
Totalizer count
Totalizer count Totalizer1 count
Totalizer2 count
Totalizer3 count
View outputs
View outputs AO1 current
Range information
AO2 current
View inputs
View inputs AI current F0507.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(2) Diagnostic root menu
Menu(Online) Diagnostic root menu Status/Self test Alarm/Event device status
Diagnostic root menu Status/Self test Alarm/Event device status Device status
Status group 0
Status group 1
Status group 2
Status group 3
Status group 4
Status group 5
Ext dev status
Device Diagnostic Status 0
AO saturated
I/O and Subdevice Status
WirelessHART Status
AO fixed
Status group 14
Status group 15
Status group 16
Status group 17
Status group 18
Status group 19
Status group 20
Alarm Alarm record mask

Alarm Alarm record mask Alarm record mask 1
Alarm record mask 2
Alarm record mask 3
Alarm record
Alarm record Alarm record 1
Alarm record time 1
Alarm record 2
Alarm record time 2
Alarm record 3
Alarm record time 3
Alarm record 4
Alarm record time 4
Alarm out mask

Alarm out mask Alarm out mask 1
Burn out Alarm out mask 2
Alarm out mask 3
Condensed status map
Alarm out mask 4
Condensed status map Device status
Device reset Status group 0
Reset cfg chng flag Status group 1
Self test Status group 2
Status group 3
Status group 4
Status group 5
Ext dev status
AO saturated
I/O and Subdevice Status
WirelessHART Status
AO fixed
Status group 14
Status group 15
Status group 16
Status group 17
Status group 18
Status group 19
Status group 20
Reset condensed status map
Diagnosis
Diagnosis Diagnostic output
Diagnostic Exe Adhesion
Adhesion Adhesion function
Adhesion level 1
Adhesion level 2
Adhesion level 3
Adhesion level 4 Result
Result Adhesion value
Adhesion check cycle Adhesion status
Flow noise
Flow noise Flow noise function
Flow noise level 1
Flow noise level 2
Flow noise level 3
Flow noise level 4 Result
Result Flow noise
Flow noise damping Flow noise status
Flow noise span
Conductivity
Conductivity Low cunctivity function
Conductivity low limit Result
Result Conductivity value
Empty
Empty Electrode voltage A
Coil insulation threshold Electrode voltage B Result
IEX compare Result Empty status
V peak hold value
F0508.ai
IEX coil resistance
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(3) Maintenance root menu
Menu(Online) Maintenance root menu Time stamp
Maintenance root menu Time stamp Current Date
Current Time
Operation time
Set Date/Time
Test
Test Release time
Test mode Input test
Input test Velocity
Volume flow
Mass flow
Calorific value
AI
SI3
Output test
Output test Loop test
Device variable simulation AO1
Device status bit simulation Pulse1
SO1
AO2
Pulse2
SO2
SO3
Autozero
Autozero Autozero Exe Result
Result Zero value
AO/AI trim AO trim

AO/AI trim AO trim AO1 trim
AO2 trim
Clear D/A trim 1
Clear D/A trim 2
AI trim
AI trim AI trim
Clear AI trim
High/Low alarm configuration

High/Low alarm configuration Low alarm
Low low alarm
High alarm
High high alarm
Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis
Verification
Verification Diagnostic output
VF mode
Verification Exe
VF No Result
Result VF check result
VF operation time
Param bkup/restore
Magnetic circuit result
Param bkup/restore Factory backup name
Excitation circuit result
Factory backup date
Calculation circuit result
SD backup name
VF device status result
Backup Exe
Connection status result
Restore Exe
Backup name 1
Backup date 1
Backup name 2
Backup date 2
Backup name 3
Backup date 3
Data logging
Data logging File name
Interval time
Start date
Start time
End time
Logging Exe
Log1 select
Log2 select
Log3 select
Log4 select
Display indication
Display indication LCD test
Squawk F0509.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
(4) Device root menu
Menu(Online) Device root menu Easy setup wizard Volume flow
Device root menu Easy setup wizard Volume flow Volume flow damping AO/frequency
Volume flow unit
Time unit
Volume flow span
Pulse/Status out 1
Pulse/Status out 1 Rate unit
Rate value
Frequency at 0%
Frequency at 100%
Display setting
Display setting Display select1
Autozero Exe Display select2
Display select3
Basic setup
Basic setup PV flow select
Velocity check Velocity
Velocity Velocity unit
Velocity span
Volume flow
Volume flow Volume flow unit
Time unit
Volume flow span
Mass flow
Mass flow Mass flow unit
Time unit
Mass flow span
Calorie
Calorie Calorific unit
Time unit
Calorific flow span
Specific heat
Sensor
Sensor Low MF
High MF
Flow sensor select
Nominal size unit
Nominal size
User span
User span User span select AO1
User unit AO1
User span AO1
User span select AO2
User unit AO2
User span AO2
Autozero
Autozero Autozero Exe
Zero value
Detailed setup Process variables

Detailed setup Process variables PV flow select
Velocity check Velocity
Velocity Velocity unit
Velocity span
Volume flow
Volume flow Volume flow unit
Time unit
Volume flow span
Mass flow
Mass flow Mass flow unit
Time unit
Mass flow span
Calorie
Calorie Calorific unit
Time unit
Calorific flow span
Specific heat
F0510.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Detailed setup Process variables
(Continued) (Continued)
Density
Density Density value select
Density unit
Density fixed value
Standard density
Correct density
Temperature
Temperature Standard temperature
Measured temperature
Calorific fix temp
Temp coef A1
Temp coef A2
Sensor
Sensor Low MF
High MF
Flow sensor select
Nominal size unit
Nominal size
User span
User span User span select AO1
User unit AO1
User span AO1
User span select AO2
User unit AO2
User span AO2
Totalizer Totalizer1
Totalizer Totalizer1 Total1 unit
Total1 conv factor
Total1 low cut
Total1 fail opts
Total1 options
Total1 Start/Stop
Total1 Reset/Preset
Total1 preset value
Total1 set point
Totalizer2
Totalizer2 Total2 unit
Total2 conv factor
Total2 low cut
Total2 fail opts
Total2 options
Total2 Start/Stop
Total2 Reset/Preset
Total2 preset value
Total2 set point
Totalizer3
Totalizer3 Total3 unit
Total3 conv factor
Total3 low cut
Total3 fail opts
Total3 options
Total3 Start/Stop
Total3 Reset/Preset
Total3 preset value
Total3 set point
Pulse/Status Pulse/Status output 1

Pulse/Status Pulse/Status output 1 Pulse1 output mode
Pulse1 active mode
Pulse1 fix width
Pulse1 rate unit
Pulse1 rate value
Pulse1 low cut
Pulse1 alarm out
Frequency1 at 0%
Frequency1 at 100%
Pulse/Status output 2
Pulse/Status output 2 Pulse2 active pulse
Pulse2 output mode
Pulse2 select
Pulse2 active mode
Pulse2 fix width
Pulse2 rate unit
Pulse2 rate value
Pulse2 low cut
Pulse2 alarm out
Frequency2 at 0%
Frequency2 at 100%
Status output 3
Status output 3 Status output3 active mode
Status input 3
Status input 3 Status input3 active mode
Status input3 function
Status input3 state
F0511.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Detailed setup
(Continued)
Analog output/input Analog output 1

Analog output/input Analog output 1 AO1 low cut
AO1 high limit
AO1 low limit
AO1 alarm out
AO1 range mode
Analog output 2
Analog output 2 AO2 select
AO2 low cut
AO2 high limit
AO2 low limit
AO2 alarm out
Analog input
Analog input AI function
Multi range AI high limit
AI low limit
Forward span 2
Multi range AI current
Reverse span 1
AI unit
Reverse span 2
AI URV
Auto range hyst
AI LRV
Bi direction hyst
AUX calculation
AUX calculation Flow direction
Rate limit
Dead time
Noise filter
Pulsing flow
Power synchronize
Set power frequency
IEX power frequency
Mes power frequency
Set SIL
Display Line select
Line select Display select1
Display
Display select2
Display select3
Display select4
Display select5
Display select6
Display select7
Display select8
Trend select
Trend select 1
Trend select
Trend select 2
Trend select 3
Trend select 4
Display format
Display format PV
Display format Display format total 1
Display format total 2
Display format total 3
Display operation configuration
Display contrast
Display operation configuration Display line
Display period
Display NE107
Display alarm
Display scroll
Display damping
Display format date
Display inversion
Language
Language package
Display measure mode
Trend offline lrv
Trend offline urv
Display installation F0512.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Detailed setup
(Continued)
Device information Order information

Device information Order information Tag
Long tag
Electrode size
Basic model code
Suffix config 1
Suffix config 2
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Version/Number information
Version/Number information Transmitter type
Option board ID
Sensor serial No
Main board revision
Sensor board revision
Indicator board revision
Hardware rev
Dev id
Memo
Memo Memo 1
Memo 2
Memo 3
HART setup
HART setup Poll addr
Protection Loop current mode
Num req preams
Protection Write protect
Num resp preams
Enable write 10min
Manufacturer
New password
Model
Software seal
Date
Descriptor
Message
Distributor
Final asmbly num
Max dev vars
Device profile
Universal rev
Fld dev rev
Software rev
Hardware rev Burst setup
Burst setup Stop burst Easy burst setup
Easy burst setup set Easy Burst
stop Easy Burst
Burst mode
Burst Command
slot0
slot1
slot2
slot3
Detailed burst setup
Detailed burst setup set Detailed Burst
stop Detailed Burst
Event setup BM1 Setting
Event setup set Event BM2 Setting
stop Event BM3 Setting
acknowledge Event Event Setting
Event Setting Event Notification Control
Event Notification Retry Time
Max Update Time
Event Debounce Interval
Event Status
Time First unack Event Triggered
Device Status Mask
Ext dev status Mask
Device Diagnostic Status 0 Mask
AO fixed Mask
AO saturated Mask
Device Specific Status 0 Mask
F0513.ai
IM 01E22A02-02EN
Device status Status group 0 Status group 1 Status group 2
Process applied to the primary variable 10:Main board CPU failure 14:Sensor board failure 21:PWM1 stop
is outside the operating limits of the field 11:Reverse calculation failure 15:Sensor communication error 22:PWM2 stop
device 12:Main board EEPROM failure 16:A/D1 failure[Signal] 23:Option board mismatch
Process applied to the non-primary 13:Main board EEPROM default 17:A/D2 failure[Exciter] 24:Option board EEPROM failure
variable is outside the operating limits of
18:Coil open 25:Option board A/D failure
the field device
19:Coil short 26:Option board SPI failure
PV Analog Channel Saturated
20:Exciter failure
PV Analog Channel Fixed
Field device has more status available
A reset or self test of the field device has
occurred, or power has been removed
and reapplied
A modification has been made to the
configuration of the field device
Field device has malfunctioned due to a
hardware error or failure
Status group 3 Status group 4 Status group 5 Ext dev status

27:Parameter restore incomplete 50:Signal overflow 60:Span configuration error Maintenance required
28:Indicator board failure 51:Empty pipe detection 62:Analog output 1 4-20mA limit error Device variable alert
29:Indicator board EEPROM failure 52:H/L or HH/LL alarm 63:Analog output 2 4-20mA limit error Critical Power Failure
30:LCD driver failure 53:Adhesion over level 4 64:Analog output 1 multi range error Failure
31:Indicator board mismatch 65: H/L HH/LL configuration error Out of Specification
32:Indicator communication error 66:Density configuration error Function Check
33:microSD failure
Device Diagnostic Status 0 Device Diagnostic Status 1 AO saturated I/O and Subdevice Status
Simulation Active Status Simulation Active Secondary Analog Channel Saturated Subdevice list changed
Non-Volatile Memory failure Discrete Variables Simulation Active Tertiary Analog Channel Saturated Duplicate master detected
Volatile Memory error Event Notification Overflow Quaternary Analog Channel Saturated Subdevice Mismatch
Watchdog reset executed Quinary Analog Channel Saturated Subdevice with Duplicate IDs Found
Voltage conditions out of range Stale Data Notice
Environmental conditions out of range
Electronic failure
Device Configuration Locked
WirelessHART Status AO fixed Status group 14 Status group 15

Capacity Denied Secondary Analog Channel Fixed 67:Pulse output 1 configuration error 80:Analog output 1 saturated
Bandwidth Allocation Pending Tertiary Analog Channel Fixed 68:Pulse output 2 configuration error 81:Analog output 2 saturated
Block Transfer Pending Quaternary Analog Channel Fixed 69:Nominal size configuration error 82:Pulse output 1 saturated
Radio Failure Quinary Analog Channel Fixed 70:Adhesion configuration error 83:Pulse output 2 saturated
71:Flow noise configuration error 84:Analog input saturated
72:Data logging not started 85:Cable misconnect
86:Coil insulation warning
131:Transmitter type mismatch
Status group 16 Status group 17 Status group 18 Status group 19

87:Adhesion over level 3 95:Simulation active 101:Parameter restore running 120:Watchdog
88:Low conductivity warning 96:Analog output 1 fixed 102:Display over warning 121:Power off
89:Insulation detection 97:Analog output 2 fixed 103:microSD size warning 122:Instant power failure
90:Flow noise over level 3 98:Pulse output 1 fixed 104:Parameter backup incomplete 123:Parameter backup running
91:Flow noise over level 4 99:Pulse output 2 fixed 105:microSD card mismatch 124:Data logging running
92:Autozero warning 100:Analog input fixed 106:microSD card removal procedure error
93:Verification warning
94:Factory noise warning
Status group 20
130:Device ID not entered
IM 01E22A02-02EN
153
Revision Information
 Title : ADMAG TI Series AXG Magnetic Flowmeter HART Communication Type
 Manual No. : IM 01E22A02-02EN
Edition Data Page Revised Item

1st June 2017 — New publication
2nd Oct. 2017 28 4.1.7 Change the units in the example.
36 4.3.4 Delete NOTE about pulse output.
73 4.11.5 Change NOTE about wiring connection diagnostic function.
75 4.11.6 Add NOTE about verification function.
81 4.13.2 Add the description about display of the restore result.
100 5.1 (2) Change the default value of No.2-11.
122 5.1 (10) Change the default value of No.10-1.
135 5.1 (14) Change the HART communication menu path of No.14-12.
IM 01E22A02-02EN
11.4 Siemens Probe Lu Level Detector

Ultrasonic Transmitters
SITRANS Probe LU (HART)
Edition 08/2017
Safety Guidelines: Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of
others, and to protect the product and the connected equipment. These warning notices are
accompanied by a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
Qualified Personnel: This device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this
manual. Qualified personnel are only authorized to install and operate this equipment in accordance with
established safety practices and standards.
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability:
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s
agent.
• All new components are to be provided by Siemens.
• Restrict repair to faulty components only.
• Do not reuse faulty components.
Warning: Cardboard shipping package provides limited humidity and moisture protection. This product
can only function properly and safely if it is correctly transported, stored, installed, set up, operated, and
maintained.
This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
Note: Always use product in accordance with specifications.
Copyright Siemens AG 2017. All Disclaimer of Liability

Rights Reserved
This document is available in bound version and in While we have verified the contents of this
electronic version. We encourage users to purchase manual for agreement with the
authorized bound manuals, or to view electronic instrumentation described, variations remain
versions as designed and authored by Siemens. possible. Thus we cannot guarantee full
Siemens will not be responsible for the contents of agreement. The contents of this manual are
partial or whole reproductions of either bound or regularly reviewed and corrections are
electronic versions. included in subsequent editions. We welcome
all suggestions for improvement.
Technical data subject to change.
European Authorized Representative
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
76181 Karlsruhe
Deutschland
• For a selection of Siemens level measurement manuals, go to:

www. siemens.com/processautomation. Select Products & Systems, then under Process
Instrumentation, select Level Measurement. Manual archives can be found on the Support page by
product family.
• For a selection of Siemens weighing manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/processautomation. Under Products & Systems, select Weighing and
Batching Systems. Manual archives can be found on the Support page by product family.
© Siemens AG 2017
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................i
Safety Notes ..................................................................................................................1
Safety marking symbols ..............................................................................................................1
The Manual ...............................................................................................................................................1
Application Examples ...................................................................................................................2
Abbreviations and Identifications .............................................................................................2
SITRANS Probe LU (Ultrasonic) ....................................................................................... 4
Applications ....................................................................................................................................4
Level, volume or flow ................................................................................................................. 4
SITRANS Probe LU System Implementation ..........................................................................5
Programming ..................................................................................................................................5
SITRANS Probe LU Approvals and Certificates ....................................................................5
Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 7
SITRANS Probe LU ............................................................................................................................... 7
Power............................................................................................................................................. 7
Performance................................................................................................................................. 7
Interface ........................................................................................................................................ 8
Programmer (infrared keypad) ................................................................................................ 8
Mechanical................................................................................................................................... 8
Environmental .............................................................................................................................. 9
Process.......................................................................................................................................... 9
Approvals (verify against device nameplate)..................................................................... 10
Installation ......................................................................................................................... 11
Mounting Instructions ..........................................................................................................................12
SITRANS Probe LU Dimensions ..............................................................................................13
Flange Adaptor (optional) ..........................................................................................................13
Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 15
Power .............................................................................................................................................15
Connecting the SITRANS Probe LU ......................................................................................15
Operating the SITRANS Probe LU .................................................................................. 17
RUN Mode ..............................................................................................................................................17
Display ......................................................................................................................................... 17
PROGRAM Mode ..................................................................................................................................18
Programming ................................................................................................................................18
Display ......................................................................................................................................... 18
i
Low temperature effects on RUN/PROGRAM modes .......................................................19
Security ..........................................................................................................................................20
Starting PROGRAM mode .........................................................................................................20
Table of Contents
Handheld programmer ...............................................................................................................20

Activating SITRANS Probe LU ...........................................................................................................20
Accessing a parameter ..............................................................................................................21
Changing a Parameter Value ....................................................................................................21
Master Reset (P999) ...................................................................................................................22
Using Units or Percent (%) ........................................................................................................22
Setup Steps (outline) ............................................................................................................................22
Setup Instructions .......................................................................................................................23
Additional Settings ................................................................................................................................28
Parameter Reference ......................................................................................................29
Helpful Hints ............................................................................................................................... 29
To access a parameter and change a value (primary index): ....................................... 29
To access a secondary index and change a value: ......................................................... 30
Quick Start (P001 to P010)................................................................................................................. 31
Volume (or Flow) P050 to P055 ........................................................................................................ 34
Lock (P069)............................................................................................................................................ 42
Failsafe (P070 to P073) ....................................................................................................................... 42
mA Output (P201 to P215).................................................................................................................. 43
Installation Records (P300 to P346) ................................................................................................ 46
Range Calibration (P650 to P654) .................................................................................................... 48
Temperature Compensation (P660 to P664) ................................................................................. 51
Rate (P700 and P701).......................................................................................................................... 52
Measurement Verification (P709 to P713)..................................................................................... 53
P752 HART address............................................................................................................................ 55
Communications (P799) ..................................................................................................................... 56
Echo Processing (P800 to P825) ...................................................................................................... 56
Algorithm (P820) .................................................................................................................................. 59
TVT (Time Varying Threshold) Adjustment Parameters (P830 to P839) ................................ 60
Diagnostic Tests (P900 to P924) ...................................................................................................... 63
Measurement ...................................................................................................................................... 64
Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter List ....................................................................67
Appendix B: Programming Chart ...................................................................................71
Appendix C: HART Communications .............................................................................75
HART Electronic Device Description (EDD) ...................................................................................75
HART Communicator 275/375: ..................................................................................................76
SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM): ....................................................................................79
Maintenance settings (accessible via PDM only) ..............................................................79
HART Version .........................................................................................................................................80
Burst mode ....................................................................................................................................80
Multidrop Configuration ............................................................................................................80
Appendix D: Troubleshooting .........................................................................................81
ii
Communication Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................81
Generally: .......................................................................................................................................81
Specifically: ...................................................................................................................................81
Table of Contents
General Fault Code ...............................................................................................................................82
Operation Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................85
Appendix E: Maintenance ...............................................................................................87
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability ....................................................................................................87
Appendix F: Technical References ................................................................................89
Principles of operation .........................................................................................................................89
Blanking Distance .................................................................................................................................89
TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves ..............................................................................................89
Auto False-Echo Suppression ..................................................................................................89
Open Channel Monitoring (OCM) ......................................................................................................91
Failsafe .....................................................................................................................................................91
Chemical compatibility .........................................................................................................................92
Startup Behavior ...................................................................................................................................92
Appendix G: Hazardous area installations ..................................................................93
Wiring Details .........................................................................................................................................93
Intrinsically Safe Model .............................................................................................................93
FM/CSA ..........................................................................................................................................94
EU Equivalency .......................................................................................................................... 94
Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance ...................................................................................95
IS Safety Barrier Selection .......................................................................................................95
How to select a passive barrier for SITRANS Probe LU ................................................. 95
PLC Input Modules.................................................................................................................... 96
Passive Shunt Diode Barriers ............................................................................................... 96
Active barriers (repeating barriers)...................................................................................... 96
FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing .......................................................................................99
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing ................................................................................. 100
................................................................................................................................................................. 100
FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing ..........................................................................................101
Appendix H: Firmware Revision History .................................................................... 103
Glossary ............................................................................................................................ 105
Index .................................................................................................................................. 109
iii
Table of Contents
iv
Safety Notes1
Special attention must be paid to warnings and notes highlighted from the rest of the text
by grey boxes.
WARNING: relates to a caution symbol on the product, and means

that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result in death,
serious injury, and/or considerable material damage.
WARNING1: means that failure to observe the necessary
precautions can result in death, serious injury, and/or considerable
material damage
Note: means important information about the product or that part of the operating
SITRANS Probe LU
manual.
Safety marking symbols

In manual: On product: Description
(Label on product: yellow background.) WARNING: refer
to accompanying documents (manual) for details.
The Manual
Notes:
• Please follow the installation and operating procedures for a quick, trouble-free
installation and to ensure the maximum accuracy and reliability of your
SITRANS Probe LU.
• This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
• This manual applies to the SITRANS Probe LU (HART) only.
This manual will help you set up your SITRANS Probe LU for optimum performance. We
always welcome suggestions and comments about manual content, design, and
accessibility. Please direct your comments to techpubs.smpi@siemens.com.
For other Siemens level measurement manuals, go to:
www.siemens.com/level and look under Level Measurement..
1.
This warning symbol is used when there is no corresponding caution symbol on the
product.
A5E32337695 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 1

Application Examples
The application examples used in this manual illustrate typical installations using
SITRANS Probe LU. Because there is often a range of ways to approach an application,
other configurations may also apply.
In all examples, substitute your own application details. If the examples do not apply to
your application, check the applicable parameter reference for the available options.
If you require more information, please contact your Siemens representative. For a complete list
of Siemens representatives, please go to:
www.siemens.com/processautomation.
Abbreviations and Identifications

SITRANS Probe LU
Short
Long Form Description Units
form
Conformitè Europèene /
CE / FM /
Factory Mutual / Canadian safety approval
CSA
Standards Association
Ci Internal capacitance
D/A Digital to analog
ETFE Ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene
Highway Addressable
HART
Remote Transducer
Ii Input current mA
Io Output current mA
IS Intrinsically Safe safety approval
Li Internal inductance mH
LRV Lower Range Value value for process empty level 4 mA1
below which no PV is
LSL Lower Sensor Limit
anticipated
μs microsecond 10-6 Second
PBT Polybutylene Terephthalate
Pressure Equipment
PED safety approval
Directive
PVDF Polyvinylidene fluoride
Page 2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337695

Short
Long Form Description Units
form
ppm parts per million
PV Primary Variable measured value
SELV Safety extra low voltage
SV Secondary Variable equivalent value
TVT Time Varying Threshold sensitivity threshold
Ui Input voltage V
Uo Output voltage V
20 mA1
SITRANS Probe LU
URV Upper Range Value value for process full level
above which no PV is
USL Upper Sensor Limit
anticipated
1. 100% is most commonly set to 20 mA, and 0% to 4 mA: however, the settings
can be reversed.

SITRANS Probe LU (Ultrasonic)
SITRANS Probe LU is a 2-wire loop-powered ultrasonic transmitter for level, volume, and
flow monitoring of liquids in storage vessels and simple process vessels, as well as in
open channels.
The transducer is available as ETFE (ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene) or PVDF
(polyvinylidene fluoride) to suit the chemical conditions of your application. For
applications with varying material and process temperatures, the Probe LU incorporates
an internal temperature sensor to compensate for temperature changes.
SITRANS Probe LU uses field-proven Sonic Intelligence ® signal processing.
SITRANS Probe LU
Applications
Level, volume or flow
SITRANS Probe LU is designed to measure levels of liquids in a variety of applications:
• storage type vessels
• simple process vessels with some surface agitation
• liquids
• slurries
• open channels
Volume
By using the volume parameters (P050 to P055) you can obtain the measurement as
volume instead of level.
Flow
If you have an open channel system (a Parshall flume, v-notch weir or other open channel
device), you can obtain flow values instead of level. By using the universal linear function
of parameter P051, and entering values for Head and Flow in the breakpoint parameters
P054 and 055, you can use SITRANS Probe LU to convert head levels into flow rates.

SITRANS Probe LU System Implementation
SITRANS Probe LU supports the HART communications protocol and SIMATIC® PDM
software.1 2
Typical PLC/mA configuration with HART
active PLC
SITRANS Probe LU
power supply1 R2 = 250 Ω
handheld programmer
HART modem
SITRANS
Probe LU HART
communicator
Programming
SITRANS Probe LU carries out its level measurement function according to the set of
built-in parameters. Parameter changes can be made via the handheld programmer, via a
PC using SIMATIC PDM, or via a HART Handheld Communicator.
SITRANS Probe LU Approvals and Certificates

Note: Please see Approvals on page 10 for an approvals listing.
1.
Depending on the system design, the power supply may be separate from the PLC, or
integral to it.
2. A 250 Ohm resistor may be required if the loop resistance is less than 250 Ohms.

Notes
SITRANS Probe LU

Specifications
Note: Siemens makes every attempt to ensure the accuracy of these specifications
but reserves the right to change them at any time.
SITRANS Probe LU
Power
Nominal 24 V DC at For other configurations, see the chart Loop Voltage
max. 550 Ohm. versus Loop Resistance on page 95.
• Maximum 30 V DC
• 4 to 20 mA
• Max startup current see Startup Behavior on page 92
Performance1
Reference operating conditions according to IEC 60770-1
• ambient temperature +15 to +25 oC
• humidity 45 to 75% relative humidity
Specifications
• ambient pressure 860 to 1060 mbar
Measurement Accuracy (measured in accordance with IEC 60770-1)

• non-linearity (accuracy) greater of 6 mm (.24”) or 0.15% of span (including
hysteresis and non-repeatability)2
• non-repeatability 3 mm (0.19”) [included in non-linearity specification]
• deadband (resolution) 3 mm (0.19”) [included in non-linearity specification]
• hysteresis error 0 mm
Analog Output Accuracy (measured in accordance with IEC 60770-1)

• non-linearity (accuracy) 0.125% of span (including hysteresis and repeatability)
• non-repeatability 0.025% of span (included in non-linearity specification)
• deadband (resolution) 0.0375% of span [included in non-linearity
specification]
• hysteresis error 0%
Frequency 54 KHz
Measurement range3 6 m (20 ft) model: 0.25 m to 6 m (10" to 20 ft) liquid
12 m (40 ft) model: 0.25 m to 12 m (10" to 40 ft) liquid
1. Reference conditions.
2. Non-linearity (accuracy) for marine approved products under severe radiated EMI
conditions is the greater of 12 mm or 0.15% of span (including hysteresis and non-
repeatability).
3. Reference point for measurement is the transducer face.

Blanking distance3 0.25 m (0.82 ft)
Update time at 4mA ≤5s
Beam angle 10o at –3 dB boundary
Temperature compensation built in to compensate over temperature range
Memory non-volatile EEPROM,
no battery required
Interface
• HART standard, integral to analog output
• configuration Siemens SIMATIC PDM (PC), or HART handheld
communicator, or Siemens infrared handheld
programmer
• analog output 4–20 mA ± 0.02 mA accuracy
• display (local) multi-segment alphanumeric liquid crystal with Bar
graph (representing level)
Programmer (infrared keypad)

Siemens Infrared IS (Intrinsically Safe) Handheld Programmer: for all locations, including
hazardous.
• approval ATEX II 1GD, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex iaD 20 T135 °C,

SIRA 01ATEX2147
Specifications
IECEx SIR 09.0073 Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex iaD 20 T135 °C

FM/CSA Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
INMETRO DNV 12.0075
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Ex ia IIIC T135 °C Da
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008 e IEC 61241-11:2005
• ambient temperature −20 to +50 °C (−5 to +122 °F)
• interface proprietary infrared pulse signal
• power 3V lithium battery (non-replaceable)
• weight 150 g (0.3 lb)
• color black
Mechanical
Process Connections
• threaded connection 2” NPT, BSP, or G (EN ISO 228-1) / PF2 (JIS B 0202)
• flange connections 3" (80 mm) universal flange
• other connections FMS 200 mounting bracket, or customer-supplied
mount
Transducer (2 options)
• ETFE (ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene), or
• PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride)

Enclosure
• body construction PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
• lid construction hard-coated PEI (polyether imide)
• cable inlet 2 x M20x1.5 conduit gland, or 2 x 1/2" NPT thread
• ingress protection Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 (see
note below)
Notes:
• Please check the ambient and operating temperatures under Environmental on page
9, and Process on page 9; also check Approvals (verify against device nameplate) on
page 10, for the specific configuration you are about to use or install.
• Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor Type 4X /
NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
Weight
Standard model 2.1 kg (4.6 lb.)
Environmental
• location indoor/outdoor
• altitude 5000 m (16,404 ft) max.
• ambient temperature −40 to +80 °C (−40 to +176 °F)
• relative humidity suitable for outdoor
(Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68
Specifications
enclosure)
• installation category I
• pollution degree 4
• pressure rating 0.5 bar g/7.25 psi g
Process
• temperature
(at flange or threads) −40 to +85 °C (−40 to +185 °F)
• pressure (vessel) 0.5 bar g/7.25 psi g

Approvals (verify against device nameplate)
• General CSAUS/C, FM, CE, RCM
• Hazardous Intrinsically Safe: (Europe) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga

(US/Canada) FM/CSA: (barrier required)1
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Class III T4
(International) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brazil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070X

Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
IP67/IP68
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Non-incendive (US) FM2:

Class I, Div. 2, Groups A,B, C, D T5
• Marine Lloyd’s Register of Shipping

Specifications
ABS Type Approval
Note: Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor Type
4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
1. See FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing on page 99 or CSA Intrinsically Safe

connection drawing on page 100.
2. See FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing on page 101.

Installation
WARNINGS:
• SITRANS Probe LU is to be used only in the manner outlined in this
manual, otherwise protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
• Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in
accordance with local governing regulations.
Notes:
• Refer to the device nameplate for information on approvals.
• This product is susceptible to electrostatic shock. Follow proper grounding
procedures.
• Ideally, mount SITRANS Probe LU so that the face of the transducer is at least 300
mm (1 ft) above the highest anticipated level.
Mounting Location
Recommendations:
• Ambient temperature within –40 to 80 oC (–40 to 176 oF).

• Easy access for viewing the display and programming via the handheld programmer.
• An environment suitable to the housing rating and materials of construction.
• Keep the sound path perpendicular to the material surface.
.
ambient temperature
surrounding enclosure
–40 to 80 oC (–40 to 176 oF) flange adaptor (option)
Installation
customer-supplied
flange
process temperature
–40 to 85 oC (–40 to 185oF)

Precautions:
• Avoid proximity to high voltage or current wiring, high voltage or current contacts,
and to variable frequency motor speed controllers.
• Avoid interference to the sound path from obstructions or from the fill path
Fill
The sound path should be:

pipe
• perpendicular to the
monitored surface
• clear of rough walls, rungs
seams, rungs, or
other obstructions. seams
• clear of the fill path
10°
Mounting Instructions
Note:
• Ideally, mount SITRANS Probe LU so that the face of the transducer is at least 300
mm (1 ft) above the highest anticipated level.
• More than one Probe LU can be installed in a vessel. However, best practice would
be to place the two units as far apart as possible to avoid interference.
SITRANS Probe LU is available in three thread types: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, or PF2/G.
1. Before inserting SITRANS Probe LU into its mounting connection, ensure that the
threads are of the same type to avoid damaging them.
2. Simply screw SITRANS Probe LU into the process connection and hand tighten or
using a strap wrench to seat gasket if required (1/4 turn past hand tight is
recommended).
Installation

SITRANS Probe LU Dimensions
.
139.7 mm
(5.50")
130.1 mm hinged lid

(5.12")
198.9 mm
(7.83") electronics
mounting
21 mm thread
(0.83") transducer
51.1 mm (2.01")
54.0 mm (2.13")
Flange Adaptor (optional)

SITRANS Probe LU can be fitted with the optional 3" (80 mm) flange adaptor for mating to
3" ANSI, DIN 65PN10 and JIS 10K3B flanges.
SITRANS Probe LU
Installation
"A" "A"
Optional flange
adaptor
VIEW "A"-"A"

Installation

Wiring
Power1
WARNINGS:
DC terminals shall be supplied from an SELV1 source in
accordance with IEC-1010-1 Annex H.
All field wiring must have insulation suitable for rated voltages.
Connecting the SITRANS Probe LU

Notes:
• Use shielded, twisted pair cable (wire gauge AWG 22 to AWG 14/ 0.34 mm2 to
2.08 mm2).
• Separate cables and conduits may be required to conform to standard
instrumentation wiring practices, or electrical codes.
• The non-metallic enclosure does not provide a continuous ground path between
conduit connections: use grounding-type bushings and jumpers.
• For Intrinsically Safe setups, see page 93 for detailed information.
• For a Class 1, Div. 2 (FM) configuration, see the connection drawing on page 100.
cover screws
terminals for loop
current
cable
watertight
gland
threaded
connection
1. Strip the cable jacket for approximately 70 mm (2.75") from the end of the cable, and
thread the wires through the gland2.
Wiring
mmmmm
1.
Safety Extra Low Voltage
2.
If cable is routed through conduit, use only approved suitable-size hubs for
waterproof applications.

2. Connect the wires to the terminals as shown below: the polarity is identified on the
terminal block.
3. Tighten the gland to form a good seal.

4. Close the cover and tighten screws: please do not overtighten screws.
Recommended torque is 1.1 to 1.7 N-m (10 to 15 in-lb).
Note: If the lid gasket is noticeably dry, applying a silicone grease can improve the
sealing function.
Wirng
mmmmm

Operating the SITRANS Probe LU
SITRANS Probe LU has two modes of operation: RUN and PROGRAM.
Operation
RUN Mode
SITRANS Probe LU automatically starts in RUN mode when power is applied, and detects
the material level. The primary reading displays the material level (in meters) referenced
from Empty (process empty level). This is the default start-up display mode.
System status is displayed on the LCD, or on a remote communications terminal.
Display
Normal operation Fail-safe operation
2 3 3
1
1 4
4
6 5
m 5 6 m
1 – Primary Reading (displays level, distance, or volume (or flow1), in either units or
percent)
2 – Secondary Reading (displays Parameter number for Auxiliary Reading2)
3 – Echo status indicator: Reliable Echo or Unreliable Echo
4 – Units or Percent
5 – Active bar graph represents material level
6 – Auxiliary Reading (depending on the parameter selected, it displays milliAmp value,
distance or confidence, with units where applicable)
If the echo confidence drops below the echo confidence threshold3, the failsafe timer
starts running. When the timer expires, the letters LOE alternate with the reading every
two seconds, and the Reliable Echo indicator is replaced by the Unreliable Echo indicator.
When a valid reading is received, the level reading display returns to normal operation.
1.
See P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape on page 35, for details on displaying flow instead of
volume.
2.
Press to display the auxiliary reading field when in RUN mode.
3. See P804 Confidence Threshold on page 57 for more detail.

Handheld Programmer: function keys in RUN mode
Certain functions can be accessed directly from RUN mode by using specific keys.
Key Run Mode

Operation
mA output value displayed in auxiliary reading field

Internal enclosure temperature displayed in auxiliary reading field (P343).
Parameter for auxiliary readings1

Displays the value representing Echo Confidence (P805).
Toggle between Units and % on reading display
Initiate and complete PROGRAM mode access
Measurement key displays distance in auxiliary reading field.
1.
Press plus three-digit parameter number, sets parameter to show in the auxiliary display.
PROGRAM Mode
Programming
Note: See Accessing a parameter, on page 21, for detailed instructions.
• Set parameters to suit your specific application.

• Activate PROGRAM mode at any time, to change parameter values and set
operating conditions.
• For local programming, use the Siemens handheld programmer.
• For programming from a distance, use either a PC running SIMATIC PDM, or a HART
handheld communicator.
Display
2 3 1 – Primary Reading (displays parameter value)
1 2 – Secondary Reading (displays parameter

number)
3 – Programming indicator
4 4 – Auxiliary Reading (displays parameter names

for parameters P001 to P010, if a language is
selected. It displays the index value for indexed
parameters, such as P054.)

Handheld Programmer: function keys in PROGRAM mode
Key Programming Mode
to Values
Operation
Decimal point
Negative value
CLEAR value
TOGGLE between Units and % on parameter value
End PROGRAM session and enable RUN mode
Update echo quality parameters
Parameter scroll-up
Parameter scroll-down
DISPLAY opens parameter fields
ENTER the displayed value
Low temperature effects on RUN/PROGRAM modes

If the internal temperature falls to –30 oC (–22 oF) or below, it will affect both RUN and
PROGRAM modes.
RUN mode will operate normally, with the following exceptions:
• handheld programmer operation is disabled
• the LCD displays only limited information: the bar graph and the reliable/
unreliable echo indicator
PROGRAM mode:
• handheld programmer operation is disabled

Security
The Lock parameter, P000, secures SITRANS Probe LU against changes via the handheld
programmer. To enable programming, set P000 to the Unlocked Value stored in P069. To
Operation
disable programming, enter a different value.
Note:
• A remote master can still change configuration, if P799 is set to allow this.
Starting PROGRAM mode

The handheld programmer gives you direct access to SITRANS Probe LU.
Handheld programmer
Note: For detailed instructions on using the handheld programmer, see the next page.
For direct access to SITRANS Probe LU, point the handheld programmer at the display
from a maximum distance of 600 mm (2 ft), and press the keys.
handheld programmer
display
Numeric and
600 mm
Auxiliary keys (2 ft)
Function
Keys
Activating SITRANS Probe LU

Note: Keep infrared devices such as laptops, cell phones, and PDAs, away from
SITRANS Probe LU to prevent inadvertent operation.
Power up the instrument. SITRANS Probe LU starts in RUN mode, and detects the
material level, displayed in meters, referenced from Empty (process empty level).

Accessing a parameter
Note:
• The following instructions apply when using the Handheld Programmer.
Operation
• Do not use the Handheld Programmer at the same time as SIMATIC PDM, or erratic
operation may result.
• You do not need to key in initial zeros when entering a parameter number: for
example, for P005, key in 5.
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to

PROGRAM Icon
activate PROGRAM mode.
Parameter Number
Parameter Value
2. Either use the ARROW keys to scroll to
a different parameter, or
3. Press DISPLAY to open the Parameter
current value
Number field.
4. Key in the desired parameter number followed by
ENTER .
For example: press .
The LCD displays the new parameter number and
value.
Changing a Parameter Value

Notes:
• Security must be disabled to enable programming: set P000 to the Unlocked Value
stored in P069. (For more details, see P069 Unlocked value on page 42.)
• Invalid entries will be rejected or limited.
• CLEAR can be used to clear the field
1. Use the ARROW keys to scroll to the parameter number, or press

DISPLAY and key in the parameter number followed by ENTER .
2. Key in the new value.
3. Press ENTER to set the value.
Parameter Reset to Factory Default

1. Scroll to the parameter or enter its address.
2. Press CLEAR then ENTER . The value returns to the default setting.

Master Reset (P999)
Note: Following a Master Reset, complete programming is required.
Operation
Resets all parameters to their factory settings, with the following exceptions:
• P000 and P069 are not reset.
• The learned TVT curve is not lost.
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to activate PROGRAM mode.
2. Press DISPLAY to open parameter fields.
3. Key in 999.
Press CLEAR then ENTER , to Clear All
and initiate reset. The LCD displays C.ALL.
4. Reset complete. (Reset takes several seconds

to complete.)
Using Units or Percent (%)

Many parameters can be viewed either as a percentage, or in measurement units (P005).
View the parameter, then press MODE to toggle between units and percentage.
Setup Steps (outline)

Set the Quick Start parameters between P001 and P010 (the main settings that apply to all
applications and make the system operational). Then set P837 and 838 to ignore false
echoes, and return to RUN mode.
1. Select a language option1, or numeric, for the auxiliary reading (P010).

2. Select the measurement mode: level, space, or distance (P001).
3. Set the response time to level changes (P003).
4. Select units of measurement: m, cm, mm, ft, or in. (P005).
5. Set process empty level (Empty: P006).
6. Set the range to be measured (Span: P007).
7. To ignore false echoes before the material echo, set Auto False-Echo Suppression
Distance P838.
8. Enable Auto False-Echo Suppression P837.
9. Return to RUN mode.
1. The language options are English, German, French, or Spanish. The parameter title appears in
the language selected, for the first 10 parameters.

Setup Instructions
Notes:
Operation
• In PROGRAM mode, you can use the ARROW keys to scroll to a
parameter number.
• The default parameter values are indicated by an asterisk (*) in the tables.
Using the handheld programmer, set each parameter value to suit your application. (For
detailed instructions on accessing a parameter and changing the value, see page21.)
1. Select a language (P010: Language)

If a language is selected, parameter titles for parameters P010 to P001 are displayed in
the auxiliary reading field.
0 * Numeric/None
1 English
Values 2 German
3 French
4 Spanish
Parameter Auxiliary reading

P000 LOCK
P001 OPERATION
P002 MATERIAL
P003 MEAS RESP
P005 UNITS
P006 EMPTY
P007 SPAN
P010 LANGUAGE
2. Select the measurement mode required for the application (P001:

Operation)
Level returns material level referenced from Empty (process empty level).
1 * The reading is returned in volumetric units if parameters 050 to 055 are
set to enable this.
Values
2 Space returns material level referenced from Span (process full level).
3 Distance returns material level referenced from the transducer face.
To measure how full the vessel is, select Level: the reading can be returned as level or as
volume (or flow – seeP050 on page 35 for details):
• for a level reading, ensure P050 is set to 0: the reading returns the distance from
process empty level (Empty) to the current level
• for a volume reading, select a vessel shape at P050, and set volume parameters
051 to 055 as required

To measure how much space remains in the vessel, select Space:
• Space returns a reading for the distance between current level and process full
level (Span)
To measure the distance from the transducer face to the current level, select Distance.
Operation
Level Space Distance

(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 0%
face (4 mA)
(20 mA) (4 mA)
Span 100% Span 0% Distance
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
Notes:
• Setting P001 resets Span (P007), unless Span has previously been set to a different
value. Span is set to Empty distance minus 110% of Blanking1, unless Operation is set
to distance measurement (P001 = 3). In this case, Span is set to the same value as
Empty (P006).
• Changing P001 may reset Output Function (P201): this applies to HART only.
3. Set response time to maximum filling/emptying rate (P003:

Measurement Response)
Set P003 to a measurement response speed just faster than the maximum filling or
emptying rate (whichever is greater).
1 * slow 0.100 m/minute
Values
2 medium 1.000 m/minute
3 fast 10.000 m/minute
Slower settings provide higher accuracy; faster settings allow for more level fluctuation.
(For more detail on measurement response, see P003 Measurement Response, on
page 32.)
4. Select type of measurement units required (P005: Units)

1 * meters
2 centimeters
Values 3 millimeters
4 feet
5 inches
1. Blanking distance is 0.25 m (10"). See Blanking Distance on page 89 for more details.

5. Set process empty level (P006: Empty)
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or

(depends on mode)l 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Operation
Values
maximum range:
Default
6.000 m (20 ft), or 12.000 m (40 ft)
Enter the distance from the transducer face to Level Setup

process empty level (Empty) using units sets in transducer
P005. Empty can be set to any distance: not face
necessarily the bottom of the vessel.
Span 100%
Note: P006 and P007 are interlinked: see
notes attached to P007.
P007
P006
Level
6. Set the range to be measured
Empty 0%
(P007: Span)
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or

Values (depends on model 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Default 5.725 m (18.78 ft), or 11.725 m (38.47 ft)
Enter the distance between Empty (process empty level) and Span (process full level), in
the units set in P005. Span can be set at any distance above the empty level.1
Notes:
• Setting P006 resets Span, if it has not previously been set to a different value.
• The default setting for Span is based on Operation (P001) and Empty (P006). Span is
set to Empty minus 110% of blanking distance1, unless Operation is set to distance
(P001 = 3). In this case, Span is set to Empty distance.
• Always prevent the monitored surface from approaching within 0.3 m (1 ft) of the
transducer face. This provides a 0.05 m (2") safety margin, as the minimum detectable
distance is 0.25 m (10").

7. Minimize false reflections (P838: Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance)
If SITRANS Probe LU displays an incorrect full level, or if the reading fluctuates between
a false high level and a correct level, you can use the TVT (Time Varying Threshold)
shaper parameters P838 and P837 together to prevent false-echo1 detection. P837 and
Operation
P838 elevate the TVT in this region and de-sensitize the receiver from any ’base noise’
caused by internal transducer reflections, nozzle echoes, or other vessel false echoes.
Notes:
• This function works best when the vessel is empty or nearly empty: use it only if
there is a minimum distance of 2 meters from the transducer face to the material.
• Set P837 and P838 during start up, if possible.
• If the vessel contains an agitator, the agitator should be running.
Parameter Values
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or
P838 (depends on model 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Default 1.000 m (3.28 ft)
Use P838 in combination with P837. Determine the actual distance from the transducer
face to the material surface. Subtract 0.5 m from this distance and enter the result,
following the Setup Instructions for P837.
Display before Auto False Echo Suppression

(or when P837 = 0)
default TVT
true P839
echo Hover Level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
1. False echoes can be caused by obstructions within the beam path. For more detail, see TVT
adjustment parameters, page 60, and TVT curves, page 89.

8. Enable False-Echo Suppression (P837: Auto False-Echo Suppression1)
Use this feature to ignore false echoes before the material echo. Use P838 to set the Auto
TVT distance first.
Operation
Parameter Values Description
0 * Off
P837 1 Use "learned" TVT
2 "Learn"
Setup Auto False-Echo Suppression:

a. Perform this function when the vessel is empty or nearly empty.
b. Determine actual distance from transducer face to material level.
c. Press PROGRAM , then DISPLAY .
d. Select P838 and key in [distance to material level minus 0.5 m].
e. Press ENTER .
f. Select P837.
g. Press 2 and then press ENTER . P 837 will automatically revert to 1 (use
Learned TVT) after a few seconds.
Display after Auto False Echo Suppression
TVT curve
material
(learned)
level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
9. Press PROGRAM to return to RUN mode.
1. False echoes can be caused by obstructions within the beam path. For more detail, see TVT
adjustment parameters, page 60, and TVT curves, page 89.

Additional Settings
• Convert readings to volume or flow (P050 to P055)
• Store unlocked value (P069)
Operation
• Set Failsafe timer conditions (P070 TO P073)

• Control Analog Output (P201 to P215 and P911)
• Check installation records (P300 to P346)
• Calibrate transducer for unusual conditions (P650 to P654)
• Temperature Compensation (P660 to P664)
• Limit rate of change of reading (P700 and P701)
• Verify measurements (P709 to P713)
• Configure communications (P799)
• Control echo processing (P800 to P825)
• TVT curve adjustments - Auto False Echo Suppression (P830 to P839)
• Software diagnostic tests (P900 and P901)
• Adjust measurements (P911 to P924)
For a full list of available parameters, see Parameter Reference, starting on page 29.

Parameter Reference
Notes:
• Keep infrared devices such as laptops, cell phones, and PDAs, away from
SITRANS Probe LU to prevent inadvertent operation.
• Do not use the Handheld Programmer at the same time as SIMATIC PDM, or erratic
operation may result.
• Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to access PROGRAM mode, and press
PROGRAM to return to RUN mode.
• CLEAR can be used to clear the field
• Default values (Factory settings) are indicated by an asterisk (*) in the parameter
Parameters
tables, unless explicitly described.
SITRANS Probe LU is configured through its parameters, and the application determines
the parameter values which are entered into the instrument.
Please check your value entries carefully before operating SITRANS Probe LU, to ensure
optimum performance.
Helpful Hints
• Primary index is an address: for example, P054.
• Secondary index is a sub-address that allows for multiple values on an indexed
point, and allows indexed values from more than one parameter to be linked, for
example, the breakpoints in P054 and P055. (See pages 37 and 40 for more details.)
To access a parameter and change a value (primary index):

Note: Initial zeros in a parameter number do not have to be entered: for example, for
P001, key in 1.
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to activate PROGRAM Mode.

2. Either use the ARROW keys to scroll to each parameter number, or
press DISPLAY again to access the parameter number field, and key in the
parameter number followed by ENTER .
3. Key in the new value.
4. Press ENTER .

To access a secondary index and change a value:
Notes:
• In a parameter with a secondary index, the ARROW keys control
whichever index was most recently changed.
• When you first access a parameter, the ARROW keys control the primary
index (parameter number).
• After the secondary index is changed, the ARROW keys control the secondary
index.
• When the primary index is changed, the ARROW keys revert to the primary index.
1. Select the parameter number, for example P054: the secondary index is displayed in
the auxiliary reading.
Parameters
2. Press DISPLAY twice1 (the auxiliary reading field goes blank).

3. Key in the address of the desired index, or use the ARROW keys to scroll to
the desired secondary index number, then press ENTER .
4. Key in the new index value and press ENTER .
5. Press DISPLAY twice, and use the ARROW keys or enter the parameter number
to select a different parameter.
P000 Lock
Notes:
• This lock only applies to the handheld programmer: it does not lock access through
communications.
• A remote master can change configuration if P799 is set to allow this.
Secures SITRANS Probe LU from parameter changes via the handheld programmer.
Unlocked Value (P069) * Unlocked: programming permitted1

Value
other Locked: programming not permitted
1.
The factory setting for P069 is 1954: after a new Unlocked value is entered and
accepted, the new value becomes the default setting.
To enable the programming lock:

1. Select P000.
2. Key in any value other than the Unlocked Value (P069).
3. Press ENTER to set the value: PROGRAM mode is now active for viewing only.
To disable the programming lock:
1. Select P000.
2. Key in the Unlocked Value (P069).
3. Press ENTER to set the value: PROGRAM mode is now active for programming.
1. This focusses control on the secondary index.

Quick Start (P001 to P010)
P001 Operation
Note: Default values are indicated with an asterisk (*) in the parameter tables, unless
explicitly described.
Sets the type of measurement required for the application. (This affects the local LCD
only: the primary variable for HART is controlled by P201.)
To measure how full the vessel is, select Level. The reading can be returned as level or as
volume:
• for a level reading, ensure P050 is set to 0: the reading returns the distance from
Parameters
process empty level (Empty) to the current level
• for a volume reading, select a vessel shape at P050, and set volume parameters
051 to 055 as required
To measure how much space remains in the vessel, select Space:
• Space returns a reading for the distance between current level and process full
level (Span)
To measure the distance from the transducer face to the current level, select Distance.
0 Instrument out of service.
Level returns material level referenced from Empty (process empty level). The
1 * reading is returned in volumetric units if parameters 050 to 055 are set to enable
Values this.
2 Space returns material level referenced from Span (process full level).
3 Distance returns material level referenced from the transducer face.

(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 4 mA
face 0%
20 mA Span 4 mA
Span 100% 0% Distance
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty 100% Empty 100%
Empty 0%
4 mA 20 mA 20 mA

1
Notes:
• Setting P001 resets Span (P007), unless Span has previously been set to a different
value. Span is set to Empty distance minus 110% of Blanking1 unless P001 is set to 3
(distance measurement). In this case Span is set to the same value as Empty (P006).
• Changing P001 may reset Output Function (P201).
P002 Material to be monitored

Note: For use only by Siemens service personnel.
P003 Measurement Response

Sets the rate of response to level changes.
Parameters
Related Failsafe Max.

Damping Echo
Para- Timer Measurement
P003 Filter Verification
meters P070 Response
P709 P711
(minutes) P700/P701
1 * slow 100.00 0.100 m/minute 10.000 s 2
Values 2 medium 10.00 1.000 m/minute 10.000 s 2
3 fast 1.00 10.000 m/minute 1.000 s 2
Note: Changing P003 resets the following parameters: P070, P700, P701, P709, and
P711.
Use a setting just faster than the maximum filling or emptying rate (whichever is greater).
Slower settings provide higher accuracy: faster settings allow for more level fluctuation.
• Echo Verification (P711): discriminates between agitator blades in motion (spurious
noise) and the target surface (true echo).
• Failsafe timer (P070): establishes the period from the time a loss of echo (LOE) starts
until the Failsafe default (P071) is triggered. P070 takes precedence over P003.

P005 Units
Specifies measurement units used for dimensional values.
1 * meters
2 centimeters
Values 3 millimeters
4 feet
5 inches
P006 Empty (process empty level)

Sets the distance from the transducer face to the process empty level, in units selected at
P005.
Parameters
Range 0.0000 to 6.10 m (20.01 ft) Level Setup
(depends or transducer
on model 0.0000 to 12.20 m (40.02 ft) face
Values
Max. range:
Default 6.10 m (20.01 ft) or Span 100%
12.20 m (40.02 ft)
Enter the distance from the transducer face

to Empty (process empty level), using units P007
P006
set in P005. Empty can be set to any Level
distance: not necessarily the bottom of the
vessel Empty 0%
Notes:
• Default setting is maximum range.
• P006 and P007 are interlinked: see note
attached to P007.
P007 Span (process full level)

Sets the range to be measured (referenced from Empty) in units selected at P005.
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or

(depends on model) 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Values 5.725 m (18.78 ft) or
Default 11.725 m (38.47 ft)
See note on next page for more details.
Enter the distance between Empty (process empty level) and Span (process full level), in
units set in P005. Span can be set at any distance above Empty level.1

Notes:
• Setting P006 will reset Span, if it has not previously been set to a different value.
• The default setting for Span is based on Operation (P001) and Empty (P006). Span is
set to Empty minus 110% of Blanking1 distance, unless Operation is set to Distance
(P001 = 3). In this case, Span is set to Empty distance.
• Always prevent the monitored surface from approaching within 0.3 m (1 ft) of the
transducer face. This provides a 0.05 m (2") safety margin, as the minimum
detectable distance is 0.25 m (10").
P010 Language
Selects the language used for the auxiliary reading on the display.
0 * Numeric / None
Parameters
1 English
Values 2 German
3 French
4 Spanish
If a language is selected, parameter titles for the Quick Start parameters are displayed.
(See the table on page 23 for the titles displayed.)
Volume (or Flow) P050 to P055

Set SITRANS Probe LU to calculate readings based on reservoir volume instead of level:
see P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape on page 35 for details on displaying flowrate.
1. Operation must be set to Level (P001 = 1).

2. Select a vessel shape matching the monitored vessel (P050).
3. If required, add dimensions A or L (as shown in the chart on page 36), using P052
and P053,
or, if vessel shape 9 is selected, add level and volume breakpoints in P054 and P055.
4. Enter the value for the maximum vessel volume in P051.
5. Return to RUN mode: readings are now displayed in volumetric units. To select
PERCENT, press : the displayed volume reading will be a percentage of
Maximum Volume.
1. Blanking distance is 0.25 m (10").

P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape
Defines the vessel (or open channel) shape (see chart on next page) and allows
SITRANS Probe LU to calculate volume or flow instead of level. The default setting for
P050 is 0 (volume calculation not required).
Enter the value for the vessel shape matching the monitored vessel or reservoir (see
chart on page 36).
P051 Maximum Volume

For readings in volumetric units instead of percentage values, enter the vessel volume
corresponding to Span (P007). Any volumetric units can be chosen, because the volume
calculation is based on the maximum volume, and scaled according to the Vessel Shape
Parameters
(P050) value. If no value is entered, the default is 100, and the reading will be a
percentage value.
Range 0.0000 to 99999

Values
Default 100.0
P006 Empty
Related Parameters P007 Span
Enter the vessel volume corresponding to Span (P007).

1. Key in the value. (For example, if maximum volume = 3650 m3, key in 3650.)
2. Press ENTER .
If the value is too large for the LCD display, enter larger units.
Example:
If maximum volume = 267,500 gallons, key in 267.5 (thousands of gallons).).

P050 Value Vessel Shape Description Also required
0 * ---- no volume calculation required N/A
1 flat bottom P051
2 conical or pyramidal bottom P051, P052

A
Parameters
3 parabolic bottom P051, P052

A
4 spherical bottom P051, P052

A
5 angled bottom P051, P052

A
6 flat end cylinder P051
7 parabolic end cylinder P051, P052, P053

A L
P051
8 sphere
universal linear
9 P051, P054, P055
level/volume/flow breakpoints

P052 Vessel Dimension A
Dimension A as used for P050 Vessel Shapes 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7, in the chart on page 36.
Range 0.0000 to 99999 in units (P005)

Values Default 0.0
---- Display when P050 = 0
Related Parameters P050 Vessel Shape
Enter one of the following, using the units selected in P005:

• height of the vessel bottom if P050 = 2, 3, 4, or 5
• length of one end-section of the vessel if P050 = 7
P053 Vessel Dimension L
Parameters
Dimension L as used in P050 Vessel Shape 7, in the chart on page 36.

Values Default 0.0
---- Display when P050 = 0
Related Parameters P050 Vessel Shape
Enter the vessel length L (excluding both end sections) if P050 = 7. Use the units selected
in P005.
P054 Level or Head Breakpoints

P054 and 055 can be used to calculate either level and volume in a vessel, or head level
and flow rate in an open channel device. (For more information on Open Channel
Monitoring, please see Open Channel Monitoring (OCM) on page 91).
Level Breakpoints
When the vessel shape is too complex for any of the preconfigured shapes, you can
define the shape as a series of segments. In P054 you assign a level value to each
breakpoint. In P055 you assign a corresponding volume value to each breakpoint.
Primary Index P054

Secondary Index Breakpoint number
Values
Default 0.000
Related Parameters P055 Volume or Flow Breakpoints

Enter up to 32 level breakpoints, where the corresponding volume is known. The 100%
and 0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or the
reverse.
1. First set P050 to 9.
2. Select P054. breakpoint
value field
3. The default breakpoint value appears, with
breakpoint
the breakpoint number in the auxiliary number
reading.
4. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index1 (the auxiliary
reading field goes blank).
5. Key in 1 and press ENTER .
6. Key in the level value for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER . (Use units defined in
Parameters
P005.)
7. Press the UP ARROW key to display 02 in the auxiliary reading.
8. Key in the level value for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until level values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
10. Press DISPLAY twice and use the UP ARROW key to go to P055.
Example:
Breakpoints Level value Breakpoint Level breakpoint Volume breakpoint
number (P054) (P055)
4 8m
1 0 0
2 1 200
3 2m
3 2 1200
2 1m
1 4 8 3200
0m
Note: Illustrated values for P054 and P055 are for example purposes only.
1. For more details on secondary index operation, see page 30.

Head Breakpoints
When measuring flow in an open channel device, you can define the cross-section of the
channel as a series of segments. In P054 you assign a head value to each breakpoint. In
P055 you assign a corresponding flow value to each breakpoint.
Primary Index P054

Values
Default 0.000
Related Parameters P055 Flow Breakpoints
Enter up to 32 head breakpoints, where the corresponding flow is known. The 100% and
0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or the
Parameters
reverse.
1. First set P050 to 9.
2. Select P054. breakpoint
value field
3. The default breakpoint value appears, with
breakpoint
the breakpoint number in the auxiliary number
reading.
6. Key in the head value for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER . (Use units defined in
P005.)
8. Key in the head value for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until head values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
10. Press DISPLAY twice and use the UP ARROW key to go to P055.
Example: v-notch weir:

flow characterization
Breakpoints Break Head Flow 4
4 -point (P054) (P055)
3
2 4 0.4 m 113.5 3
flow
1
3 0.3 m 55.3
2
2 0.2 m 20.07 1
1 2 3 4
1 0m 0 head
Note: Illustrated values for P054 and P055 are for example purposes only.

P055 Volume or Flow Breakpoints
If you are measuring level and volume, follow the Volume Breakpoints instructions below.
If you are measuring head and flow, follow the Flow Breakpoints instructions on page 41.
Volume breakpoints
Each segment defined by the level breakpoints (P054) requires a corresponding volume,
so that SITRANS Probe LU can make the level-to-volume calculations.
Primary Index P055

Range 0.0000 to 99999 in units
Values
Default 0.0000
Parameters
Related Parameters P054 Level Breakpoints
Typical volume calculations:

Cone Cylinder
V = (1/3)πr2h V = πr2h
Enter a volume for each breakpoint defined in P054. (See illustrated example for P054 on
the previous page.)
1. P050 must be set to 9.
2. Select P055.
3. The empty breakpoint value field appears, with the breakpoint number in the
auxiliary reading field.
6. Key in the volume for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER . (Any volumetric units can
be used: see note to P051.)
8. Key in the volume for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until volume values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
10. Press DISPLAY twice and use the ARROW keys or enter the value for the next
desired parameter.

Flow breakpoints
Each segment defined by the head breakpoints (P054) requires a corresponding flow
value, so that SITRANS Probe LU can make the head-to-flow calculations.
Primary Index P055

Range 0.0000 to 99999 in units
Values
Default 0.0000
Related Parameters P054 Head Breakpoints
Use the Flow Tables associated with your open channel device (Parshall flume, v-notch
weir, or other measuring device) to calculate the flow rate for each head breakpoint.
Parameters
Enter a flow value for each breakpoint defined in P054. (See illustrated example for Head
Breakpoints on page 39.)
1. P050 must be set to 9.
2. Select P055.
3. The empty breakpoint value field appears, with the breakpoint number in the
auxiliary reading field.
6. Key in the flow value for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER .
8. Key in the flow value for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until flow values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
desired parameter.

Lock (P069)
P069 Unlocked value
Stores the value to enter in Lock (P000) to unlock programming. If P000 is locked, P069
will not display the Unlocked value.
Range 1 to 9999
Values Default 1954
---- Display when P000 is locked
Notes:
• Default setting for P000 is unlocked.
Parameters
• After a new value has been stored at P069, that value will be recalled after a master
reset (P999).
• Consult your Siemens representative, if you have forgotten the unlocked value.
Failsafe (P070 to P073)

P070 Failsafe Timer
Sets the time to elapse in minutes since the last valid reading, before Failsafe State
activates.
Range 0.0000 to720.00 min.

Values
Default 100.00 (based on P003)
Note: The last valid reading is maintained until the Failsafe timer expires. After the
timer expires, the reading is set based on P071.
P071 Failsafe Material Level

Allows you to select the material level to be reported when the Failsafe Timer expires.
(For more detail, see Failsafe on page 91.)
1 Use Maximum mA Limit (P213) as material level

2 Use Minimum mA Limit (P212) as material level
Values
3 * Level remains at last reading
4 User-selected value (defined in P073)
1. Enter the value corresponding to the level you want reported when the Failsafe
Timer expires.
2. Press ENTER .

P073 Failsafe level
Defines a user-defined level to report when the Failsafe timer expires.
Range 3.6000 mA to 22.600 mA

Values
Default 22.600 mA
Note: P071 must be set to User-selected value (4) to use this value.
mA Output (P201 to P215)

P201 mA Output Function
Parameters
Alters the mA output/measurement relationship, and allows the output to be set
independently from P001. If a HART master is connected, only the master can change the
value.
0 manual
1 * level
Values 2 space
3 distance
volume (only available if a tank shape has been selected at P050)
4 or flow (only available if 9 is selected at P050, and head level and flow
breakpoints are set at P054 and P055)
Notes:
• P201 is set independently from P001: set P001 first, as changing P001 will reset P201
to the same setting.
• P201 controls the primary value and the loop current for the HART common module
and should not be changed if using HART.
• Selection also affects the secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables for HART.
• P201 must be set to 0 (manual) before you can modify P911. Remember to restore the
previous setting after using P911.
Independent mA Setpoint Parameters (P210 and P211)

P210 and P211 allow you to explicitly define the normal operating range. Use these
features to reference the minimum and/or maximum mA output to any point in the
measurement range.
For HART, 4 mA and 20 mA represent the upper and lower range limits for the primary
variable.

P201 (mA Function) Settings Response for P210 and P211
Key in the material level in Units (P005) or percent1 of Span
Level, Space, or Distance
(P007) as referenced from Empty (P006).
Key in the volume in Maximum Volume (P051) units or as a
Volume percent1 of Maximum Volume.
1. Ensure the % symbol is displayed before entering a % value.
P210 4 mA Setpoint (low output)
Note: P210 is used to set the 4 mA loop current for the HART common module.
Sets the process level corresponding to the 4 mA value. 4 mA always defaults to 0, and
P201 determines whether this is a Level, Space, Distance, or Volume (or flow)1
Parameters
measurement. Level and Space are measured as a percentage of Span; Distance is

measured as a percentage of Empty.
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 4 mA
face 0%
20 mA Span 4 mA
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
4 mA 20 mA 20 mA
Range –99999 to 99999.

Values 0.000 m (set to 0% as defined by
Default
P201: mA Output Function)
Related Parameters P201: mA Output Function
Enter the reading that is to correspond to a 4 mA output. Use percent or units, depending
on the setting for P051.
1.
To display flowrate instead of volume, see P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape on
page 35.

P211 20 mA Setpoint (high output)
Sets the process level corresponding to the 20 mA value. 20 mA always defaults to 100%,
and P201 determines whether this is a Level, Space, or Distance measurement. Level and
Space are measured as a percentage of Span: Distance is measured as a percentage of
Empty.
Range –99999 to 99999.

5.725 m (18.78 ft) or
Values Default
11.725 m (38.47 ft); set to 100% as
(depends on model)
defined by P201: mA Output Function.
Related Parameters P201: mA Output Function
Enter the reading that is to correspond to a 20 mA output, Use percent or units, depending
Parameters
on the setting for P051.
Note: P211 is used to set the 20 mA loop current for the HART common module.
mA Output Limit Parameters (P212 and P213)

P212 and P213 allow you to explicitly set a failsafe current outside the normal operating
range.
P212 Minimum mA limit

Prevents the mA output from dropping below this minimum level for a measurement
value. This does not restrict the Failsafe or manual settings.
Range 3.800 to 20.500 (mA)

Values
Default 3.800 (mA)
P213 Maximum mA limit

Prevents the mA output from rising above this maximum level for a measurement value.
This does not restrict the Failsafe or manual settings.
Range 3.800 to 20.500 (mA)

Values
Default 20.500 (mA)

P214 4 mA Output Trim
Note: This parameter is for use only by Siemens service personnel.
Calibrates the 4 mA output.
P215 20 mA Output Trim

Note: This parameter is for use only by Siemens service personnel.
Calibrates the 20 mA output.
Installation Records (P300 to P346)

Parameters
P300 Temperature, transducer maximum

Shows the highest temperature encountered (in degrees C), as measured by the
temperature sensor in the transducer (if applicable).
Primary Index Transducer

Range –50 to 150 oC (view only)
Values (view only)
Default –50 (oC)
Press CLEAR then ENTER , to reset the log after a short circuit on the transducer
wiring.
P341 RUN Time

Displays the number of uninterrupted 24 hour periods that the device has been operating.
Range 0 to 99999 (days)

Values (view only)
Default: 0
Related P342: Power-on Resets
P341 is updated once a day.

• If power is cycled before 24 hours have passed, the run time will not be updated.
• If an instrument is powered down on a regular basis, P341 will not have an
accurate value.

P342 Power-On Resets
The number of times power has been applied since the date of manufacture.
Display 0.0 to 99999

Values (view only)
Default: 0
Related P341 RUN Time
This parameter is updated every time the instrument is reset or is powered up.
P343 Internal Temperature
Parameters
WARNING: Internal temperature must not exceed 80 oC (176 oF).
Displays (in degrees C) either the current temperature on the circuit board, or the
maximum or minimum temperature recorded by the internal sensor. The high and low
values are maintained over a power cycle.
Primary Index P343

Value (view only) Range –50 oC to 150 oC
1 * Current temperature
Secondary Index 2 Maximum temperature
3 Minimum temperature
1. Select P343.
2. The primary reading displays a temperature, and the secondary index number is
visible in the auxiliary reading field.
3. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index.
4. Key in the index number required, and press ENTER .
5. The temperature value associated with the new secondary index appears.
desired parameter.

P346 Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the instrument. The numbers stored in Index 2, followed by
the numbers stored in Index 1, give you the complete serial number.
Index 2 Index 1
Values (view only) Range: 00000 to 99999 Range: 00000 to 99999
Example: 1503010 15 03 010
1. Select P346.
2. The primary reading displays one part of the serial number, with the secondary index
number visible in the auxiliary reading field.
3. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index.
Parameters
4. Key in the other index number and press ENTER .

5. The other part of the serial number, associated with the new secondary index,
appears.
desired parameter.
Range Calibration (P650 to P654)

There are two possible types of calibration:
• Offset Adjusts the measurement by a fixed amount

• Sound Velocity Adjusts speed of sound, and changes the measurement
calculations
Do Offset calibration at any steady level, unless a Sound Velocity calibration is also done.
If both calibrations are done, then do Offset at a known high level, and Sound Velocity at
a known low level.

P650 Offset Calibration
Calibrates Empty (P006) if the reported level is consistently high or low by a fixed amount
(stored in P652).
Values Range –99999 to 99999

• P006 Empty
Related • P652 Offset Correction
• P664 Temperature
Before using this feature, verify the following parameters are correct:
• Empty (P006)
• Temperature (P664)
Parameters
Offset Calibration
Begin with a steady level.
1. Press the measurement key to display the calculated reading.

2. Repeat step 1 at least five times, to verify repeatability.
3. Measure the actual reading (use tape measure).
4. Key in the actual value, and press ENTER .
The deviation between the entered Empty (P006) value and the calibrated Empty value is
stored in Offset Correction (P652).
P651 Sound Velocity Calibration

Calibrates the speed of sound constant.

• P653 Velocity
Related
• P654 Velocity at 20 oC
Use P651 under the following conditions:

• The acoustic beam atmosphere is other than air.
• The acoustic beam atmosphere temperature is unknown.
• The reading accuracy is acceptable only at higher material levels.
For best results, calibrate with the level at a known value close to empty.

Using Sound Velocity Calibration
Ensure a steady level at some low value (P653 and P654 adjusted accordingly).
1. Allow sufficient time for the vapor concentration to stabilize.
2. Press the measurement key to display the calculated reading.
3. Repeat step 2 at least five times to verify repeatability.
4. Measure the actual reading (use tape measure).
5. Enter the actual value.
6. Repeat this procedure if the atmosphere type, concentration, or temperature
conditions are different from when the last sound velocity calibration was
performed.
Note: In gases other than air, the temperature variation may not correspond with the
speed of sound variation. Use P660 and P661 to select a temperature source, and use a
Parameters
fixed temperature.
P652 Offset Correction

Stores the fixed offset value determined when an Offset Calibration is performed.

Related • P650 Offset Calibration
Alternatively, if the amount of Offset Correction required is known, enter the amount to be
added to the Reading before display.
P653 Velocity
Notes:
• P653 can only be accessed by entering the parameter number.
• The user cannot change the value of P653 directly, but can affect it via P654 or by
P660/P661.
Displays the value adjusted based on the Sound Velocity at 20 oC (P654) versus
Temperature (P664) characteristics of air.
Values (view only) Range 50.01 to 2001 m/s (164.1 to 6563 ft/s)
• P651 Sound Velocity Calibration
Related • P654 Sound Velocity at 20 oC
• P660/P661 Temperature setting
The units used depend on the setting for P005:

• m/s if P005 = 1, 2, or 3
• ft/s if P005 = 4 or 5.

P654 Sound Velocity at 20 oC
This value is used to automatically calculate Sound Velocity (P653).
Values Range 50.01 to 2001 m/s (164.1 to 6563 ft/s)

• P005 Units
Related • P651 Sound Velocity Calibration
• P653 Velocity
After performing a sound Velocity Calibration, check this value to verify the acoustic
beam atmosphere in air (344.1 m/s or 1129 ft/s).
Temperature Compensation (P660 to P664)
Parameters
P660 Temperature source
Determines the source of the temperature reading used for calculating speed of sound.
1 * Transducer (P664)
Values
2 Fixed temperature (P661)
Note: Maximum Temperature (P300) always uses the transducer as source: it is not
affected by P660.
P661 Temperature fixed

Defines the fixed temperature (in oC) used for calculating speed of sound if P660 is set to
2 (fixed temperature).
Range –40 to 85 oC
Values
Default 20 (oC)
Use this function when you want to manually override the temperature sensor with a
fixed temperature value.
• Set P660 to 2.
• Enter the fixed temperature value you want to use in place of the sensor
temperature.

P664 Temperature
Displays the temperature (in oC) read from the transducer.
Values Range –40 to 85 (oC)
Rate (P700 and P701)

These parameters determine how material level changes are reported.
P700 Maximum Fill Rate

Allows you to further adjust the SITRANS Probe LU response to increases in the actual
Parameters
material level (or an advance to a higher Failsafe Material Level, P071). P700 is
automatically updated whenever Measurement Response (P003) is altered.
Range 0.0000 to 99999 m / min.

Values
Default 0.100
Altered by P003 Measurement Response
P005 Units
Related
P007 Span
Enter a value slightly greater than the maximum vessel-filling rate, in Units (P005) or
percent of Span (P007) per minute.
P003 Value Meters/Minute

1 0.100
2 1.0000
3 10.000
P701 Maximum Empty Rate

Adjusts the SITRANS Probe LU response to decreases in the actual material level (or an
advance to a lower Failsafe Material Level, P071). P701 is automatically updated
whenever Measurement Response (P003) is altered.
Range 0.0000 to 99999 m / min.

Values
Default 0.100 (m)
P005 Units
Related P007 Span

Enter a value slightly greater than the vessel’s maximum emptying rate, in Units (P005) or
percent of Span (P007) per minute.
P003 Value Meters/Minute

1 0.100
2 1.0000
3 10.000
Measurement Verification (P709 to P713)

P709 Damping Filter
Stabilizes the reported level within the Echo Lock Window (P713) in the event of level
Parameters
fluctuations (for example, a rippling or splashing liquid surface). The value is in seconds,
and depends on the number of seconds it takes the device to reach 63% of a step value
change in reading.
Range 0 to 100.00 seconds (0 = off)

Values
Default 10.000 seconds
P007 Span
Related P713 Echo Lock Window
The value is automatically altered when Measurement Response Speed (P003) changes.
The higher the value entered, the greater the range of stabilized fluctuation.
P711 Echo Lock

Use this feature to select the measurement verification process.
0 Off
1 Maximum Verification
Values
2 * Material Agitator
3 Total Lock
P700 Maximum Fill Rate
P701 Maximum Empty Rate
Related P712 Echo Lock Sampling
P713 Echo Lock Window
P820 Algorithm

If a material agitator or mixer is used in the monitored vessel, set Echo Lock for Maximum
Verification or Material Agitator, to avoid agitator blade detection.
Note: Ensure the agitator is always running while SITRANS Probe LU is monitoring the
vessel, to avoid stationary blade detection.
• When Maximum Verification or Material Agitator is selected, a new measurement

outside the Echo Lock Window (P713) must meet the sampling criterion (P712).
• When Total Lock is selected, Echo Lock Window (P713) is pre-set to 0.
SITRANS Probe LU continuously searches for the best echo according to the algorithm
chosen (P820). If the selected echo is within the window, the window is then centered
about the echo. If not, the window widens with each successive shot until the selected
echo is within the window. The window then returns to its normal width.
When Echo Lock is Off, SITRANS Probe LU responds immediately to a new measurement,
Parameters
as restricted by the Maximum Fill / Empty Rate (P700 / P701). However, measurement
reliability is affected.
P712 Echo Lock Sampling

The sampling criterion sets the number of consecutive echoes that must appear above or
below the echo currently locked onto, before the measurements are validated as the new
reading. (Echo Lock P711 must be set to 1 or 2.)
Range 1:1 to 50:50

Format: x:y
Values
x = the number of above echoes
y = the number of below echoes
Related P711 Echo Lock
P711 default value Description P712 pre-set value

1 maximum verification 5: 5
2 * material agitator 5: 2
Example:
• Set P711 to 2 (material agitator)
• The preset values for P712 in this case are 5:2
• Result: a new reading will not be validated unless 5 consecutive measurements
higher or 2 consecutive measurements lower than the current reading occur.
Note: Resetting P711 returns P712 to the respective pre-set values.

P713 Echo Lock Window
Adjusts the size of the Echo Lock Window. This value is automatically altered when
Measurement Response (P003), Maximum Fill Rate (P700), or Maximum Empty Rate
(P701), are altered.
Range 0.000 to 9999

Values
Default 0.000
P005 Units
Related Parameters P711 Echo Lock
The Echo Lock Window is a ’distance window1, centered on the echo used to derive the
reading. When a new measurement falls within the window, the window is re-centered
Parameters
and the new reading calculated. Otherwise, the new measurement is verified by Echo
Lock (P711) before the reading is updated. The distance value of this parameter is given
for a temperature of 20 oC (68 oF).
When the value is 0, the window is automatically calculated after each measurement.
The value is fixed at 0 if Echo Lock (P711) is set to 3.
• For slower Measurement Response values (P003), the window is narrow.
• For faster P003 values the window becomes progressively wider.
Note: The echo lock window is stored as standard samples, but displayed in units
based on P005. Any value entered for P713 will be rounded to the nearest sample.
P752 HART address

Note: Accessible via the handheld programmer only by keying in P752.
Sets the device address or poll ID on a HART network. Any address other than 0 will
cause the output current to be a fixed value, and the current will not indicate the reading.
Values Range 0 to 15
1. Units are those set in P005.

Communications (P799)
P799 Communications Control
Enables the read/write access to parameters via remote communications.
0 Read only
Values 1 * Read/write
2 Restricted access – read only except for P799 which is read/write
Notes:
• P799 controls the access if you are using a HART master.
• P000 controls the lock access if you are using the Siemens handheld programmer.
Parameters
Echo Processing (P800 to P825)

The following parameters are for authorized Siemens Service personnel or technicians
familiar with Siemens echo processing techniques. View the echo profile first, before
attempting to modify these parameters.
P800 Near Blanking 1

Defines the distance from the transducer face to be ignored by the transmitter/receiver.
0.000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or

Range
0.000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Values (depends on model)
(units selected in P005)
Default 0.250 m (0.820 ft)
P006 Empty
Related P007 Span
P838 Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance
To extend the blanking beyond the minimum default, enter a value in the units selected in
P005.
1. For more details, see Blanking Distance on page 89.

P801 Range Extension
Note: SITRANS Probe LU has an absolute maximum range of 7.2 m (23.6 ft). or 14.4 m
(47.24 ft), depending on the model.
Allows the material level to drop below Empty (process empty level), without generating
an LOE state.
Range 0 to 25 (% or units)
Values
Default 20.000 (% of Span)
P006 Empty
Related P007 Span
Parameters
Use this feature if the surface monitored can drop below Empty level (P006) in normal
operation. The value for P801 is added to Empty, and the sum can be greater than the
range of the transducer. Range Extension can be increased (in Units or percent of Span)
to a point where Empty plus Range Extension is greater than the distance from the
transducer face to the furthest surface to be monitored. (The distance below empty is not
blanked.)
• Enter the value as a percentage of P006.
• For vessels with conical or parabolic bottoms, increase the value for P801 to ensure
that an empty vessel reads Empty.
P804 Confidence Threshold

Determines which echoes are evaluated by software.
x:y
Format x = short (range 0 to 99)
Values y = long (range 0 to 99)
Default 10:5
Related Parameters P070 Failsafe Timer
P804 sets the minimum echo confidence that the echo must meet in order to prevent a
Loss of Echo condition and the expiration of the Failsafe timer (P070).
The short and long shot Confidence Thresholds are preset to 10 and 5 respectively. When
Echo Confidence (P805) exceeds the Confidence Threshold, the echo is evaluated by
Sonic Intelligence.
• Key in the value for the short shot, then press (decimal point).
• Key in the value for the long shot, then press ENTER .

P805 Echo Confidence
Measures echo reliability. It displays the echo confidence of the measurement echo from
the last shot. P804 defines the minimum criterion for echo confidence.
x:y
Format x = short (range 0 to 99)
Values (view only) y = long (range 0 to 99)
---- (Shot not used)
P804 Confidence Threshold
Related Parameters P830 TVT Type
Press the measurement key to get a new reading that will update confidence
values.
Parameters
Both short and long shot Echo Confidence values are displayed.
Display Description
x : -- short shot confidence value, (long shot not used)
-- : y long shot confidence value, (short shot not used)
x:y short and long shot confidence values (both used)
E transducer cable is open or short circuited
-- : -- no shots were processed for Sonic Intelligence evaluation
P806 Echo Strength

Displays the absolute strength (in dB above 1 μV rms) of the echo selected as the
measurement echo.
Values (view only) Display –20 to 112
Press the measurement key to get a new reading that will update echo strength.

P807 Noise
Displays the average and peak ambient noise of a noise profile (in dB above 1 μV rms)
as x.y. Noise level is a combination of transducer acoustic noise and receiving circuitry
noise.
x:y
Values (view only) Format x = average (range: –20 to 99)
y = peak (range: –20 to 99)
After a measurement, the values from the previous noise shot will be displayed. Press the
measurement key to get a new reading that will update the noise profile.
Algorithm (P820)
Parameters
P820 Algorithm
Selects the algorithm to be applied to the echo profile to extract the true echo.
3 Largest echo (L)

4 First echo (F)
Values
8 * best of Largest or First echo (bLF)
12 true First echo (tF)
For more clarification on the different options, please contact your local representative.
P825 Echo marker

The point on the primary echo on which the measured value is based. The value is
entered in percent of echo height, which allows the Echo Lock Window to be set so that it
intersects the Echo Profile at the sharpest rising portion of the Echo Profile.
Range 5 to 95%
Values
Default 50 (%)

TVT (Time Varying Threshold) Adjustment Parameters
(P830 to P839)
First SITRANS Probe LU learns the echo profile. Then the learned profile, or part of the
learned profile, is used to screen out false echoes.1
The following parameters are for authorized Siemens Service personnel or technicians
familiar with Siemens echo processing techniques. View the echo profile first, before
attempting to modify these parameters.
P830 TVT Type

Selects the TVT Curve used.
Parameters
1 * TVT Short Curved
2 TVT Short Flat
3 TVT Long Flat

Values
4 TVT Long Smooth Front
5 TVT Long Smooth
6 TVT Slopes
Altered By • P002 Material
Related • P805 Echo Confidence
Select the TVT type which gives the highest confidence (P805) under all level conditions.
Use this parameter with caution, and do not use TVT Slopes with the F (First) or bLF (best
of Largest or First echo) Algorithm (P820).
P831 TVT Shaper

Note: This parameter is for use by Siemens Service personnel.
Turns the TVT Shaper ON or OFF.
1. For more detail, see TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves on page 89.

P832 TVT Shaper Adjust
Note: This parameter is for use by Siemens Service personnel.
Allows manual adjustment of the TVT curve.
P837 Auto False-Echo Suppression

Use P837 and P838 together, to set SITRANS Probe LU to ignore false echoes1. Use P838
to set the Auto TVT distance first.
Notes:
• This function works best when the vessel is empty or nearly empty: use it only if
there is a minimum distance of 2 meters from the transducer face to the material.
Parameters
• Set P837 and P838 during start up, if possible.
• If the vessel contains an agitator, the agitator should be running.
If SITRANS Probe LU displays a full level, or if the reading fluctuates between a false high
level and a correct level, set P837 to elevate the TVT in this region and to de-sensitize the
receiver from any ‘base noise’ caused by internal transducer reflections, nozzle echoes,
or other vessel false echoes. Set P838 and then P837 (detailed instructions follow P838).
0 * Off
Use ’learned’ TVT. (See ’learned TVT curve’ in Display
Values 1
after Auto False Echo Suppression on page 62.)
2 Learn

(or when P837 = 0)
default TVT
true P839
echo Hover Level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
1. For more detail, see TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves on page 89.

Defines the range of Auto False-Echo Suppression (P837) to use for ignoring false
echoes. (Units are defined in P005.)
Maximum range:
Range
0.000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or
Values (depends on model)
0.000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Default 1.000 m (3.28 ft)
Determine the actual distance from the transducer face to the material surface. Subtract
0.5 m from this distance, and enter the result.
Set Up:
Parameters
1. Perform this function when the vessel is empty or nearly empty.

2. Determine actual distance from transducer face to material level.
3. Select P838 and key in [distance to material level minus 0.5 m].
4. Press ENTER .
5. Select P837.
6. Press 2 and then press ENTER . P837 will revert to 1 (use Learned TVT)
automatically after a few seconds.
TVT curve
material
(learned)
level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)

P839 TVT Hover Level
Defines (in percent) how high the TVT curve is placed above the profile, relative to the
largest echo. When SITRANS Probe LU is located in the center of the vessel, lower this
parameter to prevent multiple echo detections.
Range 0 to 100%
Values
Default 33 (%)
Diagnostic Tests (P900 to P924)

P900 Software Revision Number
Parameters
Displays the software revision level.
Values (view only) Range 0.00 to 99.99

1 Main code revision
2 Primary boot revision
Secondary index 3 Alternative boot revision
4 Hardware stack revision
Default Determined by the software revisions installed
1. Select P900.
2. The secondary index number is visible in the auxiliary reading field.
3. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index (the auxiliary
4. Key in the index number required, and press ENTER .
5. The software revision level associated with the new secondary index appears.
desired parameter.

P901 Memory Test
Press ENTER to activate the test.
IdLE Normal operation
PASS Memory test successful
Values (view only) F1 Fail RAM
F2 Fail EEPROM
F3 Fail FLASH
Measurement
P911 mA Output Value
Parameters
Access this parameter to display the current value of the mA output.
Range 3.6 to 22.6 (mA)

Values (HART)
Default 4 mA in HART fixed current mode
1. Set P201 to 0 (manual).

2. Enter a test value.
Note: P201 must be set to 0 to enable the test value to be entered at P911: be sure to
restore P201 to the previous setting after the test!
P912 Temperature
Displays the temperature in oC (as monitored by the connected transducer). This value is
not affected by Temperature Source (P660).
Values (view only) Range –40 to 85 (oC)

P920 Reading Measurement
P920 corresponds to the final reading after all programming is applied. It is a copy of one
of P921 to P924, depending on the setting for Operation (P001).
Operation P001 Source Parameter for P920

0 Off ––––
Related
1 Level P921 if P050 = 0, otherwise P924
parameters
2 Space P922
3 Distance P923
P920 Values –99999 to 99999 (dimensional units, if volume
Range:
(view only) has not been selected)
Parameters
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 4 mA
face 0%
20 mA Span 4 mA
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
4 mA 20 mA 20 mA
P921 Material Measurement

Displays the distance between Empty /process empty level (P006) and the monitored
surface, in Units (P005) or percent of Span (P007).
Values (view only) Range –99999 to 99999
P922 Space Measurement

Displays the distance between the monitored surface and Span / process full level (P007).

P923 Distance Measurement
Displays the distance between the monitored surface and the transducer face.
P924 Volume (or Flow) Measurement

The calculated vessel capacity in Maximum Volume (P051) or percent of Maximum
Volume (volume calculation must be enabled at P050).
Range : –99999 to 99999

Values (view only) Display when volume calculation is not
----
enabled at P050 (P050 = 0)
Parameters
P051 Maximum Volume

Related Parameters
P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape
P999 Master Reset

Note: Following a Master Reset, complete reprogramming is required.
Resets all parameters to their factory settings, with the following exceptions:
• P000 and P069 are not reset.
• The learned TVT curve is not lost.
Use this feature after upgrading software:
1. Select P999.
2. Press CLEAR then ENTER to Clear All and initiate reset.
3. Reset complete.
(Note: Reset takes several
seconds to complete.)

Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter
List
A: Parameter List
Parameter Name Parameter Number Page Number
20 mA Output Trim 215 46
20 mA Setpoint (high output) 211 45
4 mA Output Trim 214 46
4 mA Setpoint (low output) 210 44
Algorithm 820 59
Auto False Echo Suppression 837 61
Auto False Echo Suppression Distance 838 62
Communications Control 799 56
Confidence Threshold 804 57
Damping Filter 709 53
Distance Measurement 923 66
Echo Confidence 805 58
Echo Lock 711 53
Echo Lock Sampling 712 54
Echo Lock Window 713 55
Echo Marker Trigger 825 59
Echo Strength 806 58
Empty (process empty level) 006 33
Failsafe Level 073 43
Fail-Safe Material Level 071 42
Fail-Safe Timer 070 42
Internal Temperature 343 47
Language 010 34
Level (or Head) Breakpoints 054 37
Lock 000 30
mA Output Function 201 43
Maximum mA Limit 213 45
Minimum mA Limit 212 45

mA Output Value 911 64
A: Parameter List
Master Reset 999 66

Material 002 32
Material Measurement 921 65
Maximum Empty Rate 701 52
Maximum Fill Rate 700 52
Maximum Volume 051 35
Measurement Response 003 32
Memory Test 901 64
Near Blanking 800 56
Noise 807 59
Offset Calibration 650 49
Offset Correction 652 49
Operation 001 31
Power-On Resets 342 47
Range Extension 801 57
Reading Measurement 920 64
RUN Time 341 46
Serial Number 346 48
Software Revision Number 900 63
Sound Velocity at 20 oC 654 51
Sound Velocity Calibration 651 49
Space Measurement 922 65
Span (process full level) 007 33
Temperature 664 52
Temperature 912 64
Temperature fixed 661 51
Temperature source 660 51
Temperature, transducer maximum 300 46

TVT Hover Level 839 63
A: Parameter List
TVT Shaper 831 60
TVT Shaper Adjust 832 61
TVT Type 830 60
Units 005 33
Unlocked value 069 42
Velocity 653 50
Vessel Dimension ‘A’ 052 37
Vessel Dimension ‘L’ 053 37
Vessel Shape 050 35
Volume (or Flow) Breakpoints 055 40
Volume (or Flow) Measurement 924 66

A: Parameter List

Appendix B: Programming Chart
Number Parameter Name Value
000 P000 Lock
001 P001 Operation
002 P002 Material to be monitored
003 P003 Measurement Response
005 P005 Units
006 P006 Empty (process empty level)
B: Programming Chart
007 P007 Span (process full level)
010 P010 Language
050 P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape
051 P051 Maximum Volume
052 P052 Vessel Dimension A
053 P053 Vessel Dimension L
054 P054 Level or Head Breakpoints
055 P055 Volume or Flow Breakpoints
069 P069 Unlocked value
070 P070 Failsafe Timer
071 P071 Failsafe Material Level
073 P073 Failsafe level
201 P201 mA Output Function
210 P210 4 mA Setpoint (low output)
211 P211 20 mA Setpoint (high output)
212 P212 Minimum mA limit
213 P213 Maximum mA limit
214 P214 4 mA Output Trim
215 P215 20 mA Output Trim
300 P300 Temperature, transducer maximum
341 P341 RUN Time
342 P342 Power-On Resets
343 P343 Internal Temperature
650 P650 Offset Calibration
651 P651 Sound Velocity Calibration
652 P652 Offset Correction

653 P653 Velocity
654 P654 Sound Velocity at 20 oC
660 P660 Temperature source
661 P661 Temperature fixed
664 P664 Temperature
700 P700 Maximum Fill Rate
701 P701 Maximum Empty Rate
709 P709 Damping Filter
711 P711 Echo Lock

712 P712 Echo Lock Sampling
713 P713 Echo Lock Window
799 P799 Communications Control
800 P800 Near Blanking
801 P801 Range Extension
804 P804 Confidence Threshold
805 P805 Echo Confidence
806 P806 Echo Strength
807 P807 Noise
820 P820 Algorithm
825 P825 Echo marker
830 P830 TVT Type
831 P831 TVT Shaper
832 P832 TVT Shaper Adjust
837 P837 Auto False-Echo Suppression
838 P838 Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance
839 P839 TVT Hover Level
900 P900 Software Revision Number
901 P901 Memory Test
911 P911 mA Output Value
912 P912 Temperature
920 P920 Reading Measurement
921 P921 Material Measurement
922 P922 Space Measurement

923 P923 Distance Measurement
924 P924 Volume (or Flow) Measurement
999 P999 Master Reset


Appendix C: HART Communications
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer, HART, is an industrial protocol that rides on
top of a 4-20 mA signal. It is an open standard, and full details about HART can be
obtained from the HART Communication Foundation at www.hartcomm.org
SITRANS Probe LU can be configured over the HART network using either the HART
Communicator, or a software package. There are a number of different software
packages available, and the SITRANS Probe LU should work well with any of them. The
recommended software package is the SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) by
Siemens.
HART Electronic Device Description (EDD)

Note: SITRANS Probe LU (HART) cannot be configured using a generic EDD.
In order to configure a HART device, the configurator must have the HART Electronic
Device Description for the device in question. HART EDD’s are controlled by the HART
Communication Foundation.
C: HART Communications
Please contact your local Siemens representative concerning the availability of the HART
EDD for SITRANS Probe LU. Older versions of the library will have to be updated in order
to use all the features in the SITRANS Probe LU.

HART Communicator 275/375:
Chart 1
On Line PV
1. PV 1. PV is Level
2. Level 2. SV is Space
3. % Range 3. TV is Distance
4. AO 4. 4V is Volume
5. Device Setup
6. Refresh
Device Setup Quick Setup

1. Master Reset 1. Units
2. Quick Setup 2. Empty Wear Sensor Status
3. Display 3. Span 1. Run Time 1. Hardw/Firmw fail
4. Diagnostics 4. Language 2. number resets 2. Diagnostic warn
5. PV Exchange 5. Operation 3. Max Temp 3. Reading question
6. Device Data 6. Material 4. Int Temp 4. Simulation mode
7. Rate 7. Response
8. Review Status
Electronics Status
Display 1. Sensor status
1. RAM error
1. Level 2. Electronics status
2. ROM error
2. Space 3. Software status
3. FLASH error
3. Distance 4. Application status
4. Stack overflow
4. Volume
5. Error signal Self Test
1. Self Test Software Status
Diagnostics 1. Calib error
1. Wear 2. Temp out of range
2. Status Range Calibration
3. Self Test 1. Offset Application Status
4. Range Calibration 2. Velocity at 20 1. Loss of echo
5. trim analog output 3. Offset Calib 2. Failsafe

6. Simulate AO 4. Snd Vel Calib
PV Exchange Trim Analog Output

1. Read Analog Out 1. D/A trim
2. Select Analog Out 2. Scaled D/A trim
Simulate AO
1. 4 mA
2. 20 mA
3. Other
4. End
Device Data Units
1. Units 1. Units
2. Basic Setup
3. Detailed Setup
Basic Setup (See Chart 2 )
4. Output param
5. Device information
6. HART information Detailed setup (See Chart 3)
Rate
1. Max Fill Output param (See Chart 4)
2. Max Empty
Device information
1. Tag
Review 2. Descriptor
(all parameters)
3. Message
4. Final asmbly num
Manufacturer data
5. Last config
6. Manufacturer data 1. Serial No
2. Revision
HART information
1. Manufacturer
2. Model
3. HART Dev ID
4. Universal rev
5. Fld dev rev
6. Software rev
7. Hardware rev

Chart 2
Standard Setup
Basic Setup
1. URV
1. Master Reset 2. LRV
2. Standard Setup 3. Damping
3. Quick Setup
4. Sensor Temp Quick Setup
5. Volume 1. Units
6. Failsafe 2. Empty
3. Span
4. Language
5. Operation
6. Material
7. Response
Sensor Temp
1. Temp Source
2. Temp Fixed
3. Sensor Temp
4. Sensor Temp
Volume Shape
1. Shape no volume
2. Max Vol calculation
3. Dim A no volume calculation
4. Dim L flat level bottom
5. Bk LevVol Gr cone/pyramid bottom
parabol bottom
half sphere bottom
Failsafe flat sloped bottom
1. mA Function cylinder flat ends
2. FS Timer cylinder parabol end
sphere
3. FS default measure
4. FS Advance universal linear
5. FS level val
Bk LevVol Gr
Bk LevVol 1_32

Chart 3
Echo Lock Echo Lock
Detailed Setup Shaper V1_10
1. Echo Lock mat agitator
2. Sampling Up off 1. TVT breakpoint 1
1. Echo Lock max verific
3. Sampling Down 2. TVT breakpoint 2
2. Echo Select mat agitator
4. Window 3. TVT breakpoint 3
3. TVT Setup total lock
4. Echo Quality 4. TVT breakpoint 4
Echo Select algorithm 5. TVT breakpoint 5
1. Algorithm bLF 6. TVT breakpoint 6
2. Blanking L 7. TVT breakpoint 7
3. Rng Ext F 8. TVT breakpoint 8
4. Marker bLF
tF 9. TVT breakpoint 9
TVT breakpoint 10
Auto TVT
Shaper V1_20
off
TVT Setup off 1. TVT breakpoint 11
on 2. TVT breakpoint 12
1. Auto TVT learn
2. Range 3. TVT breakpoint 13
3. Hover P831-Mode 4. TVT breakpoint 14
4. P831-Mode off 5. TVT breakpoint 15
5. TVT Type off 6. TVT breakpoint 16
on 7. TVT breakpoint 17
6. Shaper Val
TVT type 8. TVT breakpoint 18
short curved 9. TVT breakpoint 19
Echo Quality short flat TVT breakpoint 20
long flat
1. Confidence short long smooth flat Shaper V21_30
2. Confidence long slopes
3. Strength Shaper Val 1. TVT breakpoint 21
4. Noise Average 2. TVT breakpoint 22
1. Shaper V1_10
5. Noise Peak 3. TVT breakpoint 23
2. Shaper V1_20
6. Threshold short 4. TVT breakpoint 24
3. Shaper V21_30
7. Threshold long 5. TVT breakpoint 25
4. Shaper V31_40
6. TVT breakpoint 26
TVT breakpoint 30
Shaper V31_40
TVT breakpoint 40

Chart 4
Output param Analog Output
1. Analog output 1. Read Analog Out FS default measurement

2. Apply values Apply values 2. mA Function
3. Local Display 1. 4 mA 3. FS default measure hold
4. HART output 2. 20 mA 4. Min mA hold
3. Exit 5. Max mA high
6. Low Setpoint low
7. High Setpoint select
Local Display
1. Write protect
2. Lock
3. Write Protect
4. unlock value
HART Output
1. Poll addr
2. Num req preams
3. Num resp preams
SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM):

This software package is designed to permit easy configuration, monitoring and
troubleshooting of HART devices. The HART DD for the SITRANS Probe LU was written
with SIMATIC PDM in mind and has been extensively tested with this software.
The Device Description for SIMATIC PDM may be downloaded from the product page of
our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=11157, under Downloads.
All parameters accessible via the HART Communicator are also accessible via PDM. In
addition, the Maintenance parameters listed below are accessible via PDM only.
Maintenance settings (accessible via PDM only)

Device Lifetime
Total Device Operating Time
Remaining Device Lifetime
Maintenance Required Limit
Maintenance Demanded Limit
Maintenance Alert Activation
Total Expected Device Life
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge

Sensor Lifetime
Total Sensor Operating Time
Remaining Sensor Lifetime
Total Expected Sensor Life
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge
Service Interval
Time Elapsed Since Last Service
Total Service Interval
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge
Calibration Interval
Time Elapsed Since Last Calibration

Total Calibration Interval
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge
HART Version
The SITRANS Probe LU (HART) conforms to HART rev. 5.
Burst mode
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) does not support burst mode.
Multidrop Configuration
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) does not support multidrop configuration.

Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Communication Troubleshooting
Generally:
1. Check the following:
• There is power at the unit
• The LCD shows the relevant data
• The device can be programmed using the handheld programmer
2. Verify that the wiring connections are correct.
Specifically:
If you try to set a SITRANS Probe LU parameter via remote communications, but the
parameter remains unchanged:
• Some parameters can only be changed when the device is not scanning. Try putting
the device in program mode using the operating mode function.
• Try setting the parameter from the keypad. (First make sure that the lock parameter
[P000] is set to the value stored in P069.)
• The communications control parameter P799 must be set to 1 to be able to write
parameters to SITRANS Probe LU.
D: Troubleshooting
mmmmm

General Fault Code
Note: Some faults cause the device to go to Failsafe mode (Fault 52). These are indicated
with an asterisk (*).
Code Meaning Corrective Action

S:0 * The device was unable to get a measurement Ensure installation details are
within the Failsafe Timer period. Possible correct. Ensure no antenna buildup.
causes: faulty installation, antenna buildup, Adjust process conditions to
foaming/other adverse process conditions, minimize foam or other adverse
invalid calibration range. conditions. Correct range
calibration. If fault persists, contact
your local Siemens representative.
S:2 * The device is operating in a low power Correct the power supply
condition that is outside its operating range. (resistance or voltage).
As a result, a valid measurement has not been
taken for the failsafe timer period, and the
device will be put into failsafe mode.
S:3 Device is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Required Limit.
S:4 Device is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Demanded Limit.
S:6 Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Required Limit.
S:7 Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Demanded Limit.
S:8 Service interval as defined in Maintenance Perform service.

Required Limit has expired.
D: Troubleshooting
S:9 Service interval as defined in Maintenance Perform service.

Demanded Limit has expired.
mmmmm
S:11 Internal temperature sensor failure. Repair required: contact your local
Siemens representative.

Code Meaning Corrective Action (cont’d)
S:12 Internal temperature of device has exceeded Relocate device and/or lower
specifications: it is operating outside its process temperature enough to
temperature range. cool device. Inspect for heat-
related damage and contact your
local Siemens representative if
repair is required.
S:17 Calibration interval as defined in Maintenance Perform calibration.

Required Limit has expired.
S:18 Calibration interval as defined in Maintenance Perform calibration.

Demanded Limit has expired.
S:28 * Internal device failure caused by a RAM Repair required: contact your local
memory error. Siemens representative.
S:29 * EEPROM damaged. Repair required: contact your local

S:31 * Flash error. Repair required: contact your local

S:33 * Factory calibration for the internal Repair required: contact your local
temperature sensor has been lost. Siemens representative.
S:34 * Factory calibration for the device has been Repair required: contact your local
lost. Siemens representative.
S:35 * Factory calibration for the device has been Repair required: contact your local
lost. Siemens representative.
S:36 * Unable to start microwave module. Reset power. If error persists,

contact your local Siemens
representative.
D: Troubleshooting
S:37 * Measurement hardware problem. Reset power. If error persists,

mmmmm
representative.
S:38 * Failure in the device electronics. Reset power. If fault persists,

representative: repair required.

S:39 * Transducer temperature sensor failure.. Reset power. If fault persists,
representative: repair required.
S:40 Transducer temperature too high. Relocate device and/or lower

process temperature enough to
cool device. Inspect for heat-
related damage and contact your
local Siemens representative if
repair is required.
S:41 Transducer temperature too low. Relocate device and/or raise

process temperature enough to
warm device. Inspect for damage
and contact your local Siemens
representative if repair is required.
S:42 Factory calibration for the transducer Repair required: contact your local
temperature sensor has been lost. Siemens representative.
S:43 * Factory calibration for the radar receiver has Repair required: contact your local
been lost. Siemens representative.
S:44 * Factory calibration for the echo slope has Repair required: contact your local
been lost. Siemens representative.
S:45 * No valid boot program detected: firmware Repair required: contact your local
corrupt. Siemens representative.
S:48 * User configuration is invalid. One or more of Reconfigure the unit. Ensure Span
parameters: Span, Volume breakpoints, and/or (P007) is not set to 0; check the
Auto False-Echo Suppression, are set to breakpoints (only required if P050 is
invalid values. set to 9); do a P999 reset.
D: Troubleshooting
S:49 * EEPROM corrupt. Repair required: contact your local

mmmmm


S:52 Failsafe is activated. Possible causes: 1) For 3) and 4) Correct configuration;

hardware failure; 2) memory failure; 3)Fault 48; ensure installation is correct; no
4) failsafe timer expired– possible causes: antenna buildup; adjust process
faulty installation, antenna buildup, foaming/ conditions to minimize foaming/
other adverse process conditions, invalid other adverse conditions; correct
calibration range. calibration range. If fault persists,
or for 1) and 2), contact your local
S:53 * Configuration lost: one or more parameter Restore user parameters using
settings have been lost. This may occur after SIMATIC PDM.
a firmware upgrade causes user parameters
to be reset.
Operation Troubleshooting
Operating symptoms and probable causes.1
Symptom Meaning Probable cause
• material or object in contact with transducer face
status symbol
• transducer face is too close to the fill point
flashes • transducer face is not perpendicular to the liquid
surface
Failsafe timer starts
• change in level too fast
running.
• measurement out of range
• foam on liquid surface
• high level of vibration in the mounting structure
• level inside the blanking zone
D: Troubleshooting
status symbol
does not flash,
and LOE
mmmmm
alternates The `Waiting' period

has expired.
with reading
Refer to P003 Measurement Response on page 32, or P070 Failsafe Timer on page 42, for
duration of `Waiting' periods.
1. For details on blanking, see Blanking Distance on page 89.

D: Troubleshooting
mmmmm

Appendix E: Maintenance
SITRANS Probe LU requires no maintenance or cleaning.
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability

All changes and repairs must be done by qualified personnel, and applicable safety
regulations must be followed. Please note the following:
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device.
• All new components must be provided by Siemens Process Instruments Inc.
• Restrict repair to faulty components only.
• Do not re-use faulty components.
E: Maintenance

E: Maintenance

Appendix F: Technical References
F: Technical References
Principles of operation
The transducer emits a series of ultrasonic pulses: each pulse is reflected as an echo
from the material and sensed by the transducer. The echo is processed by
SITRANS Probe LU, using Siemens ’ proven Sonic Intelligence techniques. Filtering is
applied to help discriminate between the true echo from the material, and false echoes
from acoustic and electrical noises and agitator blades in motion.
The time for the pulse to travel to the material and back is temperature compensated and
then converted into distance for display and mA output.
Blanking Distance
The crystal which produces the transmit pulse has to stop vibrating before it can receive
an echo. The blanking1 distance is the space in front of the transducer face where level
measurement is not possible, because within that distance, the echo would return before
the vibration had ceased.
The reference point for measuring blanking distance is the transducer face. The minimum
recommended blanking value is 0.25 m (10"), but this can be increased in order to extend
the blanking.
TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves

A TVT curve describes a threshold below which any echoes will be ignored. The default
TVT curve is used, until P837 and P838 are used to create a new ’learned TVT curve’.
Auto False-Echo Suppression

False echoes can be caused by an obstruction in the beam path (pipes, ladders, chains,
and such). Such false echoes may rise above the default TVT curve.
P838 allows you to set a distance, and P837 then instructs the Probe LU to ’learn’ where
the obstructions/false echoes are within that distance. The new TVT curve is set above
the false echoes, screening them out.
1. Also referred to as "Near Blanking".

(or when P837 = 0)
default TVT
true P839
echo Hover Level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
TVT curve
material
(learned)
level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)

Open Channel Monitoring (OCM)
OCM converts a level reading (head) into a flow value using a linear algorithm.
SITRANS Probe LU can convert a head level measurement into a flow rate, using a thirty-
two breakpoint head-versus-flow characteristic curve. This chart is usually available
from the manufacturer of the v-notch weir, Parshall flume, or other open channel device.
Parameter P050 must be set to 9 (universal linear function), and breakpoints must be set
for head levels and corresponding flowrates at parameters P054 and P055. Once these
parameters are set, the mA output is scaled to represent the flowrate, and the RUN mode
display will show the flowrate
Example: Flow Characterization.
11
10
9
flow (P055)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
head (P054)
The maximum and minimum points on the curve must be defined. Then program the
remaining breakpoints to closely match the flow curve of your open channel device.
Failsafe
The Failsafe function can be activated either if there is not a valid measurement, or by
one of the faults marked by an asterisk in the table General Fault Code on page 82. In
Failsafe mode, the device will output one of the four options determined by P071 (Failsafe
Material Level).
Failsafe Mode P071

1 = HI Use Maximum mA Limit (P213) as material level
2 = LO Use Minimum mA Limit (P212) as material level
3 = HOLd Level remains at last reading
4 = SEL User-selected value (defined in P073)

If an invalid measurement is generated by the application (for example, material level
outside threshold settings), the Failsafe timer (P070) will control the speed of the Failsafe
response. When the Failsafe timer expires, the device outputs the value selected in P071.
If a valid measurement is received before the timer expires, the timer will be reset.
If Failsafe mode is activated by a fault (see General Fault Code on page 82), the
instrument will go into Failsafe mode without delay.
Chemical compatibility
The plastic materials used in the construction of SITRANS Probe LU (ETFE, PBT, and
PVDF) are resistant to attack from most chemicals. For exposure to specific
environments, check with chemical compatibility charts before installing and operating
SITRANS Probe LU in your application.
Startup Behavior
Notes:
• SITRANS Probe LU (HART) is designed to start reliably with a power supply
capable of delivering at least 25 mA.
• When connected to a power supply with a current limit of < 25 mA, the Probe LU
may not start reliably.
Typical Startup Current
35
Loop Power Supply
30
without Current Limit
25
Current (mA)
20
Loop Power Supply with
15 25 mA Current Limit
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Time (seconds)
No
withcurrent
currentlimit
limited power supply Current-limited
without current power
limited power supply

Appendix G: Hazardous area
installations
• Wiring details
• Instructions specific to hazardous area installations
Wiring Details
Intrinsically Safe Model
G: Hazardous Installation
FM (reference drawing 23650516: see page 99)
CSA (reference drawing 23650517: see page 100)
Under the entity evaluation concept, SITRANS Probe LU has the following
characteristics:
(input voltage) Ui = 30 V DC (max.)

(input current) Ii = 120 mA DC (max.)
(input power) Pi = 0.8 W
Definition:
The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated
apparatus not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection
is that the voltage and current which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain
intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal to or greater than the output voltage
(Uo) and output current (Io) levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus,
considering faults and applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected
capacitance (Ci) and Inductance (Li) of the intrinsically safe apparatus, including
interconnecting wiring, must be equal to or less than the capacitance and inductance
which can be safely connected to associated apparatus.

FM/CSA
• Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor
NEMA 4X / type 4X / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
• The maximum voltage of the non-intrinsically safe apparatus must not exceed 250 V rms.
• Recommended intrinsically safe barriers are listed on page 95.
Hazardous Area Non-hazardous Area
load EEx ia
4 – 20
Certified Barrier
mA
2
PLC (active)
Zone 0, 1, or 2
HART handheld
Communicator
EU Equivalency
Any zener diode safety barrier, certified by an EU approved certification body to
[ EEx ia ] IIC, its output voltage (Uo) not exceeding 30 V and its output current (Io) limited
by load resistance (Ro); such that Io = Uo / Ro, does not exceed 120 mA.

Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
Power Supply Requirements
1000
900 (30.0v,845 ohms)
800
L
RL=44.6*VL - 493.4
Loop Resistance - R
700
600
500
400
(17.8v, 300 ohms)
300
RL=272.7*VL - 4554.1 ALLOWABLE OPERATING
200 AREA
100
(16.7v, 0 ohms)
0
10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00
Loop Voltage-VL
(Source voltage)
IS Safety Barrier Selection

Selecting a suitable barrier or power supply requires knowledge about Intrinsic Safety
and the application. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the intrinsically
safe installation complies with both the apparatus approval requirements and the
relevant national code of practice.
How to select a passive barrier for SITRANS Probe LU

1. Make sure that the barrier safety description is suitable for the SITRANS Probe LU
Intrinsically Safe (IS) input parameters.
2. Determine the maximum end-to-end resistance of the barrier (Re-e) from the data
sheet.
3. Determine other loop resistance (Rloop): for example, sense resistance, displays,
and/or PLC inputs.
4. Calculate Rworking = Re-e + Rloop.

5. Determine any non-linear voltage drops due to the barrier (Vbarrier) from the barrier
data sheet (for example, voltage drops due to diodes).
6. Calculate Vworking = Vsupply – Vbarrier.
7. Using Vworking and Rworking, confirm that operation is within the shaded area of
the graph Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance on page 95.
Notes:
• The following list is not complete: there are many safety barriers on the market,
which will work with the SITRANS Probe LU.
• The barriers listed below have all been tested and are functionally compatible with
the SITRANS Probe LU.
• The barriers listed below are all HART compatible.
PLC Input Modules

Manufacturer Part Number
Siemens SM331 PCS7 HART Input Module
Passive Shunt Diode Barriers

Note: A well regulated supply voltage is required.

MTL 7787P+ (Dual channel)
Stahl 9001/01-280-100-10 (Single channel)
Stahl 9002/01-280-110-10 (Dual channel)
Active barriers (repeating barriers)

Siemens 7NG4122-1AA10
MTL 706
MTL 7206
Stahl 9001/51-280-110-14

Wiring setups for hazardous area installations
Always check the device nameplate and process device tag to verify the approval rating.
1. Intrinsically Safe wiring
Device nameplate (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/RCM)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
SITRANS Probe LU Ii = 120 mA II 1 G
Pi = 0.8 W Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 0518
7MLxxxx-xxxxx-xxxx Encl.: NEMA/TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68
Serial No: GYZ / B1034567 Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C Ci = 3.6 nF SIRA 06ATEX2355X
Li = 0 mH IECEx SIR 13.0008X
Power Rating: 24V Nom., 30V Max., 4-20 mA HART
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough ATENÇÃO - RISCO POTENCIAL DE CARGA ELETROSTÁTICA - VEJA INSTRUÇÕES
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
The ATEX certificate can be downloaded from the product

page of our website at: www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Approvals /
Certificates.
The IECEx certificate listed on the nameplate can be viewed on the IECEx website. Go to:
http://iecex.iec.ch and click on Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity then enter the
certificate number IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Device nameplate (FM/CSA)

Class I, Div 1, Group A, B, C, D Vmax = 30 V HART
Class II, Div 1, Group E, F, G Imax = 120 mA
SITRANS Probe LU
Class III Pmax = 0.8 W
7ML1234-78910-ABC-D Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
Temp. Code: T4 Ci = 3.6 nF
Serial No: GYZ / S1034567 Encl.: NEMA/TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68 Li = 0.5 mH
Power Rating: 24V Nom., 30V Max., 4-20 mA CSA per drawing: 23650517 159134
FM per drawing: 23650516
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts WARNING: Possible static hazard, do not rub or clean on site.
FM Intrinsically Safe connection drawing number 23650516, and CSA Intrinsically Safe
connection drawing number 23650517 can be downloaded from the product page of our
website at: www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level
Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• For power demands see “Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance” on page 95.
• For wiring requirements: follow local regulations.
• Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor Type 4X /
NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
• Refer to “Instructions specific to hazardous area installations (Reference European
ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU, Annex II, 1/0/6)” on page 98.
2. Non-incendive wiring (FM US only)

SITRANS Probe LU Class I,Div.2,
7ML1234-78910-ABC-D Encl.: NEMA/TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68 Group A,B,C,D
Serial No: GYZ / S1034567 Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C Temp.Code:T5
Power Rating: 24V Nom., 30V Max., 4-20 mA
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough HART
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
FM Class 1, Div 2 connection drawing

number 23650583 can be downloaded from the product page of our website at:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level Measurement >
Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• For power demands, see “Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance” on page 95 of
Appendix A.

Instructions specific to hazardous area installations
(Reference European ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU, Annex II, 1/0/6)
The following instructions apply to the SITRANS Probe LU covered by certificate number SIRA
06ATEX2355X:
1. For use and assembly, refer to the main instructions.
2. The equipment is certified for use as Category 1G equipment.
3. The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors with apparatus groups IIA,
IIB, and IIC, and temperature classes T1, T2, T3, and T4.
4. The equipment is certified for use in an ambient temperature range of –40 °C to +80 °C.
5. The equipment has not been assessed as a safety related device (as referred to by
Directive 2014/34/EU Annex II, clause 1.5).

6. Installation and inspection of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained
personnel in accordance with the applicable code of practice (EN 60079-14 and EN 60079-
17 in Europe).
7. Repair of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance
with the applicable code of practice (e.g. EN 60079-19 within Europe).
8. Components to be incorporated into or used as replacements in the equipment shall be
fitted by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s
documentation.
9. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that manual override is possible in order to
shut down the equipment and protective systems incorporated within automatic
processes which deviate from the intended operating conditions, provided that this does
not compromise safety.
10. The ‘X’ suffix to the certificate number relates to the following special conditions for safe
use:
Parts of the enclosure may be non-conducting and may generate an ignition-
capable level of electrostatic charge under certain extreme conditions. The
user should ensure that the equipment is not installed in a location where it
may be subjected to external conditions (such as high-pressure steam) which
might cause a build-up of electrostatic charge on non-conducting surfaces.
11. If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is the
responsibility of the user to take suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely
affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not compromised.
Aggressive substances:e.g. acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals, or
solvents that may affect polymeric materials.
Suitable precautions: e.g. regular checks as part of routine inspections or
establishing from the material’s data sheet that it is
resistant to specific chemicals.
12. Equipment Marking:
The equipment marking contains at least the information on the product nameplate, shown on
page 97.

A5E32337695
HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
SAFE AREA APPARATUS

Load
4 – 20 mA
NOTES:
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
1. ANY CSA / FM INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER / POWER SUPPLY, WITH ITS OUTPUT (SEE NOTE 1)
VOLTAGE (Uo) NOT EXCEEDING 30 V AND ITS OUTPUT CURRENT (Io) LIMITED BY
LOAD RESISTANCE (Ro); SUCH THAT Io = Uo / Ro, DOES NOT EXCEED 120 mA
2. APPROVED DUST-TIGHT AND WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT SEALS ARE REQUIRED

at: www.siemens.com/probelu.
FOR CLASS II, DIV.1, Gr. E, F, G AND OUTDOOR NEMA 4X/TYPE 4X LOCATIONS
3. THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF THE NON-INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS

MUST NOT EXCEED 250 V rms.
4. UNDER THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT, THE SITRANS Probe LU HAS THE
FOLLOWING:
Ui = 30 VOLTS D.C. Ii = 120 mA Pi = 0.8 W
Ci = 3.6 nF Li = 0.5 mH
5. SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY.
6. INSTALL PER NEC / CEC
7. USE SUPPLY WIRES RATED FOR 10 ° ABOVE.
8. EXTERNAL BONDING HUBS ARE REQUIRED WHEN BOTH CONDUIT ENTRIES ARE USED.
THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT IS A METHOD USED TO DETERMINE

CHANGE THE Li VALUE TO 0.5 mH APRIL
ACCEPTABLE COMBINATIONS OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS AND 1 PER ECO 79B42578
RPC SN 09/2007
DEC
CONNECTED ASSOCIATED APPARATUS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN 0 FOR APPROVAL RPC SN 17/03
INVESTIGATED IN SUCH COMBINATION.
Product Group
ULTRASONICS
ENTITY CONCEPT DEFINITION: THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS THE INTERCONNECTIONS OF INTRINSICALLY NTS B
SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATIONS. 17 / DEC / 03
FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing
THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT WITH INTRINSICALLY SAFE R. CLYSDALE
S. MILLIGAN
SITRANS Probe LU,
APPARATUS CAN RECEIVE AND REMAIN INTRINSICALLY SAFE, CONSIDERING FAULTS, MUST BE EQUAL OR
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

S. NGUYEN
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
GREATER THAN THE VOLTAGE (Uo) AND CURRENT (Io) LEVELS WHICH CAN BE DELIVERED BY
THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS, CONSIDERING FAULTS AND APPLICABLE FACTORS. IN ADDITION, THE MAX. PETERBOROUGH CONNECTION DIAGRAM
FOR INTERNAL
UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND INDUCTANCE (Li) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS, INCL.
INTERCONNECTING WIRING, MUST BE EQUAL OR LESS THAN THE CAPACITANCE AND INDUCTANCE WHICH
USE ONLY 23650516 1
CAN BE SAFELY CONNECTED TO THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS.
2365051601 1:1 1 1
Note: Reference drawing 23650516 is available from the product page of our website
Page 99
Page 100
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
V OC £ V max
I SC £ I max SAFE AREA
APPARATUS
C a ³ C i + C cable
Load
4-20 mA L a ³ L i + L cable
INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER

(SEE NOTES 1 & 2)
Substitution of components
may impair intrinsic safety.
NOTES:
1. ANY CSA CERTIFIED INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER OR ASSOCIATED

APPARATUS WITH A LINEAR OUTPUT.
2. UNDER THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT, THE SITRANS Probe LU

HAS THE FOLLOWING INPUT PARAMETERS :
Vmax = 30 VOLTS I max = 120 mA Ci = 3.6 nF Li = 0.5 mH

FEB
1 CHANGE Li VALUE TO 0.5 mH PER ECN 2004-0046 RPC SN 26/2004
DEC
Pmax = 0.8 W OR (Vmax x I max) / 4 = 0.8 W 0 FOR APPROVAL RPC SN 17/03
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3. APPROVED DUST-TIGHT AND WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT SEALS ARE REQUIRED Product Group
ULTRASONICS
FOR CLASS II, DIV.1, GROUP G AND OUTDOOR TYPE 4X LOCATIONS NTS B
17 / DEC / 03
R. CLYSDALE
SITRANS Probe LU,
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing
3. THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF THE SAFE LOCATION APPARATUS S. MILLIGAN

MUST NOT EXCEED 250 V rms. CSA INTRINSICALLY SAFE
S. NGUYEN
PETERBOROUGH CONNECTION DRAWING
FOR INTERNAL
4. INSTALLATION TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE PART 1.
.
USE ONLY 23650517 1
2365051701 1:1 1 1
A5E32337695
FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION

(SAFE) CLASS I, DIV.2, GROUPS A, B, C, D
METAL CONDUIT
1/2 “ NPT
24 V
POWER
SUPPLY
SITRANS Probe LU
NOTES:
1
SEPT
0 FOR CONSTRUCTION RPC SN 29/2004
Product Group
ULTRASONICS
29 / SEPT / 2004
NTS A
R. CLYSDALE
S. MILLIGAN
SITRANS Probe LU
CLASS I, Div. 2
S. NGUYEN
CONNECTION DRAWING
PETERBOROUGH
FOR INTERNAL
USE ONLY 23650583 0
2365058300 1:1 1 1


Appendix H: Firmware Revision History
Firmware
DD Rev. Date Changes
Rev.
1.00 1.00 04 Jun 2004
2.01 2.01.01 23 Sept 2005 • Increased breakpoints to 32.

• MP&F parameters added to product.
• Fault system upgraded to use S# fault codes.
2.02 2.01.06 4 May 2008 • Maintenance release
2.03 2.01.06 9 Sept 2008 • Internal release
2.04 2.01.06 25 May 2013 • Maintenance release
H: Firmware revision

H: Firmware revision

Glossary
acoustic noise: any undesired audible sound.
accuracy: degree of conformity of a measure to a standard or a true value.
agitator: mechanical apparatus for mixing or aerating. A device for creating turbulence.
algorithm: a prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for the solution of a problem in a
finite number of steps.
ambient temperature: the temperature of the surrounding air that comes in contact with the
enclosure of the device.
attenuation: a term used to denote a decrease in signal magnitude in transmission from one
point to another. Attenuation may be expressed as a scalar ratio of the input magnitude to
the output magnitude or in decibels.
Auto False-Echo Suppression: a technique used to adjust the level of a TVT curve to avoid the
reading of false echoes. (See TVT.)
Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance: defines the endpoint of the TVT distance. (See TVT.)
This is used in conjunction with auto false echo suppression.
beam angle: the angle diametrically subtended by the one-half power limits (-3 dB) of the
sound beam.
beam spreading: the divergence of a beam as it travels through a medium.
blanking: the distance in front of the transducer face where level measurement is not possible.
capacitance: the property of a system of conductors and dielectrics that permits the storage of
electricity when potential differences exist between the conductors. Its value is
expressed as the ratio of a quantity of electricity to a potential difference, and the unit is a
Farad.
confidence: describes the quality of an echo. Higher values represent higher quality.
Glossary
Confidence threshold defines the minimum value.
damping: term applied to the performance of an instrument to denote the manner in which the
measurement settles to its steady indication after a change in the value of the level.
dB (decibel): a unit used to measure the amplitude of signals.

derating: to decrease a rating suitable for normal conditions according to guidelines specified
for different conditions.
dielectric: a nonconductor of direct electric current.
echo: a signal that has been reflected with sufficient magnitude and delay to be perceived in
some manner as a signal distinct from that directly transmitted. Echoes are frequently
measured in decibels relative to the directly transmitted signal.
echo confidence: the recognition of the validity of the echo. A measure of echo reliability.
Echo Lock Window: a window centered on an echo in order to locate and display the echo’s
position and true reading. Echoes outside the window are not immediately processed.
Echo Marker: a marker that points to the processed echo.
Echo Processing: the process by which the device determines echoes.
Echo Strength: describes the strength of the selected echo in dB above 1 μV rms.
Echo Profile: a graphical display of a processed echo.
electrical noise: unwanted electrical signals that produce undesirable effects in the circuits of
the control systems in which they occur.
false echo: any echo which is not the echo from the desired target. Generally, false echoes are
created by vessel obstructions.
frequency: the number of periods occurring per unit time. Frequency may be stated in cycles
per second.
hertz (Hz): unit of frequency, one cycle per second. 1 kilohertz (kHz) is equal to 103 Hz.
HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. An open communication protocol used to

address field instruments.
inductance: the property of an electric circuit by virtue of which a varying current induces an
electromotive force in that circuit or in a neighboring circuit. The unit is a Henry.
multiple echoes: secondary echoes that appear as double, triple, or quadruple echoes in the
Glossary
distance from the target echo.
Near Blanking: see Blanking
nozzle: a length of pipe mounted onto a vessel that supports the flange.
parameters: in programming, variables that are given constant values for specific purposes or
processes.

pulse: a wave that departs from an initial level for a limited duration of time, and returns to the
initial level.
range: distance between a transmitter and a target.
range extension: the distance below the zero percent or empty point in a vessel.
repeatability: the closeness of agreement among repeated measurements of the same

variable under the same conditions.
shot: one transmit pulse or measurement.
stillpipe: a pipe that is mounted inside a vessel parallel to the vessel wall, and is open to the
vessel at the bottom.
stilling-well: see stillpipe.
TVT (time varying threshold): a time-varying curve that determines the threshold level above
which echoes are determined to be valid.
ultrasonic: having a frequency above the human ear’s audibility limit: about 20,000 hertz.
Glossary

Notes
Glossary

Index
A H
Abbreviations and Identifications hand programmer
list 2 access to SITRANS Probe LU 20
accuracy 7 detailed instructions 21
agitator blade detection hazardous area installations
avoiding 54 wiring requirements 97
agitators 54 I
algorithm Identifications and Abbreviations
select for true echo 59 list 2
Approvals 10 installation
ARROW keys hazardous area requirements 97
primary/secondary index function 30 L
Auto False-Echo Suppression language
instructions 61 selection 23
B level measurement 31
blanking 89 lock value 42
extending 56 Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance 95
breakpoints loop voltage vs. loop resistance
level 37 power supply requirements 97
volume 40 M
C maintenance 87
changing parameter values 23 master reset 22, 66
D material mixers 54
damping 53 measurement mode 23
default values multidrop configuration 80
factory settings 29 N
dimensions 13 near blanking
distance measurement 31 extending 56
E see also blanking 89
echo confidence Noise parameter 59
display 18 O
set threshold 57 operation
echo confidence reading 58 measurement modes 31
echo strength P
update 58 parameter
echo verification 32 accessing 21
F changing value 21
factory settings 29 parameter reset
default values 29 factory default 21
Failsafe parameters 42 master reset 22
false echo suppression PDM 79
instructions 61 percent or units 22
Index
false-echo suppression power supply requirements

setting 61 loop voltage vs. loop resistance 95, 97
function keys (RUN) specifications 7
display echo confidence 18 primary index 29

accessing 29
changing a value 29
principles of operation 89
programming chart 71
Q
quick start programming
instructions 23
setup steps 22
R
range extension 57
repair 87
reset parameters
factory default 21
master reset 22
resistance
loop voltage vs. loop resistance 95
S
safety barrier selection 95
secondary index 29
accessing 30
changing value 30
security
lock value 42
unlock value 42
setup instructions
quick start programming 23
SIMATIC Process Device Manager 75
SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) 79
software revision number 63
space measurement 31
T
temperature specification
Ambient/Operating 11
U
units or percent 22
unlock value 42
V
vessel shape
conical bottoms 57
parabolic bottoms 57
selection 36
voltage
loop voltage vs. loop resistance 95
volume measurement 31
volume parameters 34
W
Index
wire gauge 15
Z
zener diode safety barriers 94

For more information
www.siemens.com/level
www.siemens.com/weighing
Siemens Canada Limited

1954 Technology Drive Printed in Canada
P.O. Box 4225 Subject to change without prior notice
Peterborough, ON A5E32337695 Rev. AC
Canada K9J 7B1 © Siemens AG 2017
www.siemens.com/processautomation
11.5 Effects Screw Feeder

EFFECT Engineering Projects
40 Morgan Street
Cannington WA 6107 EFFECT
PH (08) 9258 9441
Fax (08) 9258 9442
EFFECT Engineering Projects Pty Ltd
40 Morgan Street
CANNINGTON
WESTERN AUSTRALIA 6107
POWDER SCREW FEEDER – MANUAL

150E-138-NY-AM-80-XX
CONSEP PART NUMBER 756251-NM
SERIAL NUMBER 200308
Equipment Owner
CONSEP Pty Ltd
Purchase Order
105602
Purchase Date
17/03/2020
EFFECT ENGINEERING JOB No

200308
Page 1 of 13
CONTENT
Section 1 General Arrangement Drawing
Section 2 Spare Parts List
Section 3 Gearbox Manual
Section 4 Screwfeeder Test Report
Page 2 of 13
SECTION 1
GENERAL ARRANGMENT DRAWING
Page 3 of 13
Page 4 of 13
SECTION 2
SPARE PARTS LIST
Page 5 of 13
Page 6 of 13
SECTION 3
GEARBOX MANUAL
GEARBOX MAKE
SEW
GEARBOX MODEL
RF27 AM80
Page 7 of 13
Page 8 of 13
Page 9 of 13
Page 10 of 13
Page 11 of 13
SECTION 4
Screwfeeder Test Report
Page 12 of 13
40 Morgan Street
Cannington
Western Australia 6107
Ph : 61 8 9258 9441
Fax : 61 8 9258 9442
Email : effect@effect-eng.com
EFFECT Engineering Projects Pty Ltd

ABN 84 101 576 103
SCREW FEEDER TEST REPORT

Job Number : 200308 Date : 27/03/2020
Screw Feeder Owner : ConSep Pty Ltd
Screw Feeder I D : 200314
Gear Box Details
Brand : SEW Model : RF27-AM80
Serial No : 20.75977701.0001.20 Lubrication : CLP 220
Ratio : 1400/138 1 to 10:13
Motor Details
Brand : Model :
Serial No: Voltage :
Speed : kW :
Screw Feeder Test Details
Powder Used : Temperature :
Minimum Rate : Revs :
Maximum Rate : Herts :
Powder Head : . Duration of Test :
By : Bradley Doe Position : Technician
Function was tested – no motor supplied.

Comments :
Signature :
Page 13 of 13
11.6 Burkert Actuated Valves

Type 8805 Butterfly Valve (Spring Return Only)
Releasing the Travel-Stop

When supplied, some pneumatic butterfly valves
with Single Acting / Spring Return actuators may
be supplied with the travel stop engaged to
prevent spring pressure from damaging the seat
during installation.
Please follow the following steps:
1. Please complete installation prior to

continuing to the following steps.
2. Actuate the valve to the Open

position.
3. Loosen the RIGHT side travel-stop,

by turning the lower hex (nut) anti-
clockwise. Do not allow the top hex
(bolt) to rotate while doing this.
4. Rotate the top hex (bolt) anti-

clockwise by exactly 2 full rotations.
5. Tighten the travel stop by turning

the lower hex (nut) clockwise. Do
not allow the top hex (bolt) to rotate
while doing this.
Type 8792, 8793
Electropneumatic positioner and process controller
We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
Sous resérve de modification techniques.
© 2009 - 2015 Bürkert Werke GmbH
Operating Instructions 1508/05_EN-en_00806089 / Original DE

Type 8792, 8793
Contents
Table of contents
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.....................................................................................................5
1. Operating instructions..........................................................................................................................................................6
2. Authorized use.........................................................................................................................................................................7
3. Basic safety instructions.....................................................................................................................................................8
4. Use in the Ex area..................................................................................................................................................................9
5. General information............................................................................................................................................................10
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM....................................................................................................................................................................11
6. Description and features of the Type 8792/8793..............................................................................................13
7. Structure...................................................................................................................................................................................17
8. Positioner Type 8792.........................................................................................................................................................19
9. Process controller Type 8793........................................................................................................................................23
10. Interfaces of the positioner / process controller...............................................................................................28
11. Technical data........................................................................................................................................................................29
INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................................................................................35
12. Attachment and assembly..............................................................................................................................................37
13. Fluid connection...................................................................................................................................................................49
14. Electrical connection - Circular plug-in connector version (multi-pole version)...............................51
15. Electrical connection - Terminal version for cable gland...............................................................................56
OPERATION......................................................................................................................................................................................................61
16. Operating levels....................................................................................................................................................................62
17. Operating and display elements..................................................................................................................................63
18. Operating states...................................................................................................................................................................71
19. Activating and deactivating auxiliary functions....................................................................................................72
20. Manually opening and closing the valve.................................................................................................................74
START-UP...........................................................................................................................................................................................................75
21. Start-up sequence...............................................................................................................................................................76
22. Safety instructions..............................................................................................................................................................76
23. Basic setting of the device.............................................................................................................................................77 3
english
Type 8792, 8793
Contents
24. Activation of the process controller...........................................................................................................................82
25. Basic setting of the process controller....................................................................................................................83
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................................................................................ 103
26. Configuring the auxiliary functions......................................................................................................................... 105
OPERATING STRUCTURE / FACTORY SETTINGS................................................................................................................ 173
27. Operating structure and factory settings............................................................................................................. 174
PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 189
28. Description of the PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................................................ 190
29. Electrical connections.................................................................................................................................................... 192
30. Start-up PROFIBUS DP................................................................................................................................................. 197
DEVICENET.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
31. Description........................................................................................................................................................................... 207
32. Electrical connections.................................................................................................................................................... 211
33. Start-up DeviceNet........................................................................................................................................................... 217
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................................... 229
34. Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................................ 230
35. Error messages and malfunctions.......................................................................................................................... 230
PACKAGING, STORAGE, DISPOSAL............................................................................................................................................. 235
36. Packaging and transport............................................................................................................................................... 236
37. Storage................................................................................................................................................................................... 236
38. Disposal................................................................................................................................................................................. 236
ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION.................................................................................................................................. 237
39. Selection criteria for continuous valves............................................................................................................... 238
40. Properties of PID Controllers..................................................................................................................................... 240
41. Adjustment rules for PID Controllers..................................................................................................................... 245
TABLES FOR CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC SETTINGS................................................................................................................... 249
42. Table for your settings on the positioner............................................................................................................. 250
43. Table for your settings on the process controller Type 8793................................................................... 251
4
english
Type 8792, 8793
General information and safety instructions
Contents
1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.........................................................................................................................................................6
1.1. Symbols.......................................................................................................................................................................................6
1.2. Definition of the term “device”.........................................................................................................................................6
2. AUTHORIZED USE..............................................................................................................................................................................7
2.1. Restrictions................................................................................................................................................................................7
3. BASIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS..................................................................................................................................................8
4. USE IN THE EX AREA........................................................................................................................................................................9
4.1. Basic safety instructions for use in the Ex area....................................................................................................9
4.2. Safety instructions for the installation and maintenance of Ex devices ................................................9
5. GENERAL INFORMATION..............................................................................................................................................................10
5.1. Scope of supply....................................................................................................................................................................10
5.2. Contact address...................................................................................................................................................................10
5.3. Warranty....................................................................................................................................................................................10
5.4. Master code............................................................................................................................................................................10
5.5. Information on the internet.............................................................................................................................................10
english
Type 8792, 8793
Type 8792, 8793
General Information
Safety Instructions
1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The operating instructions describe the entire life cycle of the device. Keep these instructions in a location which is
easily accessible to every user and make these instructions available to every new owner of the device.
WARNING!
The operating instructions contain important safety information.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in hazardous situations.
▶▶ The operating instructions must be read and understood.
1.1. Symbols
DANGER!
Warns of an immediate danger.
▶▶ Failure to observe the warning may result in a fatal or serious injury.
WARNING!
Warns of a potentially dangerous situation.
▶▶ Failure to observe the warning may result in serious injuries or death.
CAUTION!
Warns of a possible danger.
▶▶ Failure to observe this warning may result in a medium or minor injury.
NOTE!
Warns of damage to property.
• Failure to observe the warning may result in damage to the device or the equipment.
indicates important additional information, tips and recommendations.
refers to information in these operating instructions or in other documentation.
→→designates a procedure that must be carried out.
1.2. Definition of the term “device”

In these instructions, the term “device” always refers to the Type 8792/8793
6
english
Type 8792, 8793
Type 8792, 8793
General Information
Safety Instructions
2. AUTHORIZED USE
Incorrect use of the Type 8792 and 8793 can be dangerous to people, nearby equipment and the
environment.
The device is designed for the open-loop control and closed-loop control of media.
▶▶ If using Types 8792 and 8793 in the potentially explosive area, observe the specifications on the additional plate for Ex
devices.
▶▶ Devices which do not have an additional plate for Ex devices must not be used in the potentially explosive area.
▶▶ The device must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
▶▶ Pulsating direct voltage (rectified alternating voltage without smoothing) must not be used as operating voltage.
▶▶ During use observe the permitted data, the operating conditions and conditions of use specified in the contract docu-
ments and operating instructions, as described in chapter “Description of System” - “11. Technical data” in this manual
and in the valve manual for the respective pneumatically actuated valve.
▶▶ The device may be used only in conjunction with third-party devices and components recommended and authorised by
Bürkert.
▶▶ In view of the wide range of possible application cases, check whether the device is suitable for the specific application
case and check this out if required.
▶▶ Correct transportation, correct storage and installation and careful use and maintenance are essential for reliable and
faultless operation.
▶▶ Use the Type 8792 and 8793 only as intended.
2.1. Restrictions
If exporting the system/device, observe any existing restrictions.
english
Type 8792, 8793
Type 8792, 8793
General Information
Safety Instructions
3. BASIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

These safety instructions do not make allowance for any
• contingencies and events which may arise during the installation, operation and maintenance of the devices.
• local safety regulations – the operator is responsible for observing these regulations, also with reference to the
installation personnel.
Danger – high pressure.

▶▶ Before loosening the pneumatic lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent the pneumatic lines.
Risk of electric shock.

▶▶ Before reaching into the device or the equipment, switch off the power supply and secure to prevent reactivation.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for electrical equipment.
Risk of burns/risk of fire if used continuously through hot device surface.

▶▶ Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and media and do not touch with bare hands.
General hazardous situations.

To prevent injury, ensure that:
▶▶ That the system cannot be activated unintentionally.
▶▶ Installation and repair work may be carried out by authorised technicians only and with the appropriate tools.
▶▶ After an interruption in the power supply or pneumatic supply, ensure that the process is restarted in a defined or con-
trolled manner.
▶▶ The device may be operated only when in perfect condition and in consideration of the operating instructions.
▶▶ Do not supply the supply pressure connection of the system with aggressive or flammable mediums.
▶▶ Do not supply the supply pressure connection with any liquids.
▶▶ Do not put any loads on the housing (e.g. by placing objects on it or standing on it).
▶▶ Do not make any external modifications to the device housings. Do not paint the housing parts or screws.
▶▶ The general rules of technology apply to application planning and operation of the device.
NOTE!
Electrostatic sensitive components / modules.
The device contains electronic components which react sensitively to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Contact
with electrostatically charged persons or objects is hazardous to these components. In the worst case scenario,
they will be destroyed immediately or will fail after start-up.
• Observe the requirements in accordance with EN 61340-5-1 to minimise or avoid the possibility of damage
caused by sudden electrostatic discharge.
• Also ensure that you do not touch electronic components when the operating voltage is present.
The Type 8792/8793 were developed with due consideration given to the accepted safety rules and are
state-of-the-art. Nevertheless, dangerous situations may occur.
Failure to observe this operating manual and its operating instructions as well as unauthorized tampering with
the device release us from any liability and also invalidate the warranty covering the devices and accessories.
english
Type 8792, 8793
Type 8792, 8793
General Information
Safety Instructions
4. USE IN THE EX AREA

4.1. Basic safety instructions for use in the Ex area
DANGER!
Risk of explosion.
To prevent the risk of explosion, observe not only the basic safety instructions in the respective operating
instructions for operation in the Ex area, but also the following:
▶▶ Installation, operation and maintenance may be performed by qualified technicians only.
▶▶ Observe the applicable safety regulations (also national safety regulations) as well as the general rules of technology for
construction and operation.
▶▶ Do not repair the device yourself, but replace it with an equivalent device. Repairs may be performed by the manufacturer
only.
▶▶ Do not expose the device to any mechanical and/or thermal loads which will exceed the limits described in the operating
instructions.
4.2. Safety instructions for the installation and

maintenance of Ex devices
DANGER!
Risk of explosion.
To prevent the risk of explosion, observe the following during installation and maintenance in the Ex area:
▶▶ Do not open the device housing.
▶▶ To avoid electrostatic charges, clean the housing surface with a damp cloth only.
▶▶ Secure cable connections, which use circular connectors, with suitable locking clips.
(For example: EXCLIP, FA. Phoenix Contact, Type SAC-M12-EXCLIP-M, Art. no. 1558988 or
Type SAC-M12-EXCLIP-F, Art. no. 1558991.
▶▶ Use only cable and line entry points which have been approved for the respective application area and which have been
screwed into place according to the associated installation instructions.
▶▶ Install pre-assembled cable glands according to the installation instructions supplied by the gland manufacturer.
Before start-up in the Ex area, check whether the cable gland, as described in the associated installation instructions, has
been installed.
▶▶ Close all unnecessary cable glands with lock screws approved for the explosions area.
Maintenance: If installation is performed carefully, maintenance will not be required.
english
Type 8792, 8793
General Information
Safety Instructions
5. GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1. Scope of supply
In general it consists of:
• Type 8792/8793 and
• associated operating instructions.

- Brief instructions (Quickstart) in printed form as well as
- Main instructions on CD.
We will provide you with attachment kits for linear actuators or rotary actuators as accessories.
For the circular plug-in connector version (multi-pole version) of Type 8792/8793, we will provide you with
suitable cable connectors as accessories.
If there are any discrepancies, please contact us immediately.
5.2. Contact address

Germany
Bürkert Fluid Control Systems
Sales Center
Chr.-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International
Contact addresses can be found on the final pages of the printed brief instructions (Quickstart).
And also on the internet at: www.burkert.com
5.3. Warranty
The warranty is only valid if the Type 8792/8793 are used as intended in accordance with the specified application
conditions.
5.4. Master code

Operation of the device can be locked via a freely selectable user code. In addition, there is a non-changeable master
code with which you can perform all operator actions on the device. This 4-digit master code can be found on the
last pages of the printed brief instructions which are enclosed with each device.
If required, cut out the code and keep it separate from these operating instructions.
5.5. Information on the internet

The operating instructions and data sheets for Type 8792 and 8793 can be found on the Internet at:
www.burkert.com
10
english
Types 8792, 8793
Description of System
Contents
6. DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES OF THE TYPE 8792/8793........................................................................................13
6.1. General description............................................................................................................................................................13
6.1.1. Features......................................................................................................................................................13
6.1.2. Combination with valve types and mounting versions.....................................................................14
6.1.3. Overview of the mounting options.......................................................................................................15
6.2. Designs.....................................................................................................................................................................................16
6.2.1. Type 8792, positioner.............................................................................................................................16
6.2.2. Type 8793, process controller..............................................................................................................16
7. STRUCTURE.........................................................................................................................................................................................17
7.1. Representation......................................................................................................................................................................17
7.2. Function diagram.................................................................................................................................................................18
7.2.1. Diagram illustrating single-acting actuator.........................................................................................18
8. POSITIONER TYPE 8792...............................................................................................................................................................19
8.1. Positioner (position controller) Type 8793 Remote with external position sensor..........................19
8.2. Schematic representation of the position control.............................................................................................20
8.3. Positioner software.............................................................................................................................................................21
9. PROCESS CONTROLLER TYPE 8793.....................................................................................................................................23
9.1. Schematic representation of process control......................................................................................................24
9.2. Type 8793 remote operation with external position sensor.........................................................................25
9.3. The process controller software..................................................................................................................................26
10. INTERFACES OF THE POSITIONER / PROCESS CONTROLLER............................................................................28
11. TECHNICAL DATA..............................................................................................................................................................................29
11.1. Conformity...............................................................................................................................................................................29
11.2. Standards.................................................................................................................................................................................29
11.3. Operating conditions.........................................................................................................................................................29
11.4. Rating plate and additional plate for Ex devices................................................................................................29
11.5. Mechanical data....................................................................................................................................................................30 11
english
Types 8792, 8793
11.6. Electrical data........................................................................................................................................................................31
11.7. Pneumatic data.....................................................................................................................................................................32
11.8. Safety end positions after failure of the electrical or pneumatic auxiliary power............................33
11.9. Factory settings....................................................................................................................................................................34
12
english
Types 8792, 8793
6. DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES OF THE

TYPE 8792/8793
6.1. General description

The positioner Type 8792 / process controller Type 8793 is a digital, electro-pneumatic positioner for pneumati-
cally actuated continuous valves. The device incorporates the main function groups
- Position sensor
- Electro-pneumatic control system
- Microprocessor electronics
The position sensor measures the current positions of the continuous valve.
The microprocessor electronics continuously compare the current position (actual value) with a set-point position
value specified via the standard signal input and supplies the result to the positioner/process controller.
If there is a control difference, the electro-pneumatic control system corrects the actual position accordingly.
6.1.1. Features
• Models
- Positioner (positioner) Type 8792
- Process controller with integrated positioner, Type 8793.
• Position sensors.
- intern high resolution conductive plastic potentiometer or
- extern non-contact, non-wearing position sensor (remote).
• Microprocessor-controlled electronics
for signal processing, control and valve control.
• Operating module.
Operation of the device is controlled by four keys. The 128 x 64 dot matrix graphics display enables you to
display the set-point or actual value and to configure and parameterize via menu functions.
• Control system.
The control system consists of 2 solenoid valves and 4 diaphragm reinforcers. In single-acting actuators the
working connection 2 must be sealed with a threaded plug.
• Feedback (optional).
The feedback is implemented either via 2 proximity switches (initiators), via binary outputs or via an output
(4 – 20 mA / 0 – 10 V).
When the valve reaches an upper or lower position, this position can be relayed e.g. to a PLC via binary outputs.
The operator can change the initiators or limit positions via control lugs.
• Pneumatic interfaces.
Internal thread G1/4“
• Electrical interfaces.
Circular plug-in connector or cable gland
• Housing.
Plastic-coated aluminium housing with hinged cover and captive screws.
13
english
Types 8792, 8793
• Mounting.
on linear actuator according to NAMUR recommendation (DIN IEC 534-6) or on rotary actuator according to
VDI/VDE 3845.
• Optional.
Remote version for DIN rail mounting or for mounting bracket
6.1.2. Combination with valve types and mounting versions

The positioner Type 8792 / process controller Type 8793 can be mounted on different continuous valves. For
example on valves with piston, membrane or rotary actuator. The actuators can be single-acting or double-acting.
• For single-acting actuators, only one chamber is aerated and deaerated during actuation. The generated
pressure works against a spring. The piston moves until there is an equilibrium of forces between compressive
force and spring force. To do this, one of the two air connections must be sealed with a threaded plug.
• For double-acting actuators the chambers on both sides of the piston are pressurised. In this case, one
chamber is aerated when the other one is deaerated and vice versa. In this design, no spring is installed in the
actuator.
Two basic device versions are offered for the positioner Type 8792 / process controller Type 8793; they differ in
the attachment option and in the position sensor.
Device version NAMUR:
An internal position sensor is used which is designed as a rotary potentiometer.
Type 8792/8793 is mounted directly on the actuator or attached to the side.
Device version Remote:.
An extern position sensor (linear or rotative) via a digital interface.
The Type 8792/8793 is attached to a wall either with a DIN rail or with a mounting bracket (remote design).
14
english
Types 8792, 8793
6.1.3. Overview of the mounting options
Mounting NAMUR on
rotary actuator
Mounting NAMUR
with mounting bracket
on a linear actuator
Remote mounting
with mounting bracket
Remote mounting
with DIN rail
Table 1: Overview of the mounting options 15
english
Types 8792, 8793
6.2. Designs
6.2.1. Type 8792, positioner

The position of the actuator is regulated according to the position set-point value. The position set-point value is
specified by an external standard signal (or via field bus).
6.2.2. Type 8793, process controller

Type 8793 also features a PID controller which, apart from actual position control, can also be used to implement
process control (e.g. level, pressure, flow rate, temperature) in the sense of a cascade control.
The process controller Type 8793 is operated with a 128 x 64 dot matrix graphics display and a keypad with 4
keys.
The process controller is linked to a control circuit. The position set-point value of the valve is calculated from the
process set-point value and the actual process value via the control parameters (PID controller). The process set-
point value can be set by an external signal.
6.2.3. Typ 8793, Remote-Design
Depending on the connection type of the path sensor, Type 8793 functions as a
• Process controller or
• Positioner
The following connection options are possible:
Function . Interface sensor Setting in the menu (ADD.FUNCTION)

Type 8793
Process controller digital (serial) Remote Sensor Type 8798 POS.SENSOR → DIGITAL
For menu description see Chapter
“26.2.19”
Positioner analog Any, high-resolution path POS.SENSOR → ANALOG
(4 ... 20 mA) * sensor For menu description see Chapter
“26.2.19”
Table 2: Connection options type 8793 with external position sensor
* If the path sensor is connected to the process controller Type 8793 via the analog interface, it can be
operated only as a positioner.
The options for connection of a path sensor are described in Chapter “12.4. Remote operation with
external position sensor”.
16
english
Types 8792, 8793
7. STRUCTURE
The positioner Type 8792 and process controller Type 8793 consist of the micro-processor controlled electronics,
the position sensor and the control system.
The device is designed using three-wire technology. Operation is controlled by four keys and a 128x64 dot matrix
graphics display.
The pneumatic control system for single-acting and double-acting actuators consists of 2 solenoid valves.
7.1. Representation
Mechanical position indicator
Operating module with display and keys
Working connection 2
(connection: A2)
Supply pressure connection 1.4 – 7 bar
(connection: P)
(connection: A1)
Air exhaust connection/air exhaust filter
Pressure-relief valve
Electronic module
Internal position sensor
Control system
Shaft for position sensor
Cable gland
Figure 1: Structure, Type 8792 / 8793

17
english
Types 8792, 8793
7.2. Function diagram
7.2.1. Diagram illustrating single-acting actuator

The black lines in “Figure 2” specify the function of the positioner circuit in Type 8792.
The grey part of the diagram indicates the additional function of the superimposed process control circuit in Type
8793.
Compressed-
air supply Continuous valve with .
Type 8792 / 8793 single-acting actuator
1
Position set-
point value
Positioner
2
Actual position
Control
Process
Nominal position system*
set-point Exhaust air
value
Process Position
controller sensor
Process
actual
value
Sensor * Control system

1: Aeration valve
2: Bleed valve
Figure 2: Structure, positioner Type 8792 / process controller 8793
The remote design has the position sensor situated outside the device directly on the continuous valve
and is connected to the latter by a cable.
18
english
Types 8792, 8793
8. POSITIONER TYPE 8792

The position sensor records the current position (POS) of the pneumatic actuator. The positioner compares this
actual position value with the set-point value (CMD) which is specified as a standard signal. If there is a control dif-
ference (Xd1), the actuator is aerated and deaerated via the control system. In this way the position of the actuator
is changed until control difference is 0. Z1 represents a disturbance variable.
Z1
B1
CMD Xd1 PK Valve opening
+ E1
-
Position set- Positioner Control system Continuous

point value Solenoid valves valve
POS
Position sensor
Position control circuit
Figure 3: Position control circuit in Type 8792
19
english
Types 8792, 8793
8.1. Schematic representation of the position control
INPUT
TEMP
CMD
POS
X.CONTROL
DBND
CMD
POS
X.LIMIT
X.TIME
CUTOFF
DIR.ACT
CHARACT
SPLTRNG
0 – 20 mA
4 – 20 mA
0 – 10 V
DIR.CMD
0–5V
INP
Figure 4: Schematic representation of position control
20
english
Types 8792, 8793
8.2. Positioner software
Configurable auxiliary functions Effect

Correction line to adjust the operating characteristic Selection of the transfer characteristic between
input signal and stroke (correction characteristic)
CHARACT
Sealing function Valve closes tight outside the control range. Specification
of the value (in %), from which the actuator is completely
CUTOFF
deaerated (when 0%) or aerated (when 100%).
Sense of effective direction of the controller set- Reversal of the sense of effective direction of the set-
point value point value
DIR.CMD
Sense of effective direction of the actuator Adjustment of the sense of effective direction between
aeration state of the actuator and the actual position
DIR.ACT
Signal range splitting Splitting of the standard signal range to two or more
positioners
SPLTRNG
Stroke limit Mechanical valve piston movement only within a defined
stroke range
X.LIMIT
Limiting the control speed Input of the opening and closing time for the entire stroke
X.TIME
Insensitivity range The positioner is initially actuated from a control dif-
ference to be defined
X.CONTROL
Code protection Code protection for settings
SECURITY
Safety position Definition of the safety position
SAFEPOS
Signal level error detection Check the input signals for sensor break.
SIG.ERROR Warning output on the display and start up of the safety
position (if selected)
Binary input Switch over AUTOMATIC / MANUAL or
BINARY. IN Start up of the safety position
Analogue feedback (option) Status signal set-point value or actual value
OUTPUT
2 binary outputs (option) Output of two selectable binary values
OUTPUT
User calibration Change to the factory calibration of the signal input
CAL.USER
Factory settings Reset to factory settings
SET.FACTORY
Serial interface Configuration of serial interface
SER.I/O
21
english
Types 8792, 8793

Setting display Adjustment of the display of the process level
EXTRAS
SERVICE For internal use only
POS.SENSOR Setting interface remote path sensor (available for Type

8793 Remote only. See chapter “6.2.3. Typ 8793,
Remote-Design”.
Simulation software For simulation of the device functions
SIMULATION
DIAGNOSE (Option) Monitoring of processes
Table 3: Positioner software. Configurable auxiliary functions
Hierarchical operating concept for easy operation on the following operating levels
Process level On the process level switch between AUTOMATIC mode
and MANUAL mode.
Setting level On the setting level specify certain basic functions during
start-up and, if required, configure additional functions
Table 4: The positioner software. Hierarchical operating concept.
22
english
Types 8792, 8793
9. PROCESS CONTROLLER TYPE 8793

In the case of process controller Type 8793 the position control mentioned in Chapter “8” becomes the subor-
dinate auxiliary control circuit; this results in a cascade control. The process controller in the main control circuit of
Type 8793 has a PID function. The process set-point value (SP) is specified as set-point value and compared with
the actual value (PV) of the process variable to be controlled. The position sensor records the current position (POS)
of the pneumatic actuator. The positioner compares this actual position value with the set-point value (CMD), which
is determined by the process controller. If there is a control difference (Xd1), the actuator is aerated and deaerated
via the control system. In this way the position of the actuator is changed until control difference is 0. Z2 represents
a disturbance variable.
Z1
B1
CMD Xd1 PK Valve opening
E1
+ -
Positioner Control system Continuous

Solenoid valves valve
POS
Position sensor
Position control circuit
Z2
Valve
Xd2 CMD Position Process variable
SP opening
control
+ - circuit
Process set- Process Process
point value controller
PV
Transmitter
Figure 5: Signal flow plan of process controller
23
english
24
9.1.
Figure 6:
POS
english
- POS
DIR.ACT X.LIMIT
CMD
+
X.CONTROL PV
CMD DBDx SP
TEMP
DIR.CMD CHARACT CUTOFF X.TIME
Schematic representation of process control

PV SCALE
PV FILTER
PV
-
Q
+
P.CONTROL
PARAMETER
SETUP SP 4 – 20 mA
SP SCALE 0 – 20 mA
SP 0 – 10 V
0–5V
Schematic representation of process control
Types 8792, 8793
Types 8792, 8793
9.2. The process controller software

Correction line to adjust the operating characteristic Selection of the transfer characteristic between
input signal and stroke (correction characteristic)
CHARACT
Sealing function Valve closes tight outside the control range. Specification
of the value (in %), from which the actuator is completely
CUTOFF
deaerated (when 0%) or aerated (when 100%).
Sense of effective direction of the controller set- Reversal of the sense of effective direction of the set-
point value point value
DIR.CMD
Sense of effective direction of the actuator Adjustment of the sense of effective direction between
aeration state of the actuator and the actual position
DIR.ACT
Signal range splitting Splitting of the standard signal range to two or more
positioners
SPLTRNG
Stroke limit Mechanical valve piston movement only within a defined
stroke range
X.LIMIT
Limiting the control speed Input of the opening and closing time for the entire stroke
X.TIME
Insensitivity range The positioner is initially actuated from a control dif-
ference to be defined
X.CONTROL
Code protection Code protection for settings
SECURITY
Safety position Definition of the safety position
SAFEPOS
Signal level error detection Check the input signals for sensor break.
SIG.ERROR Warning output on the display and start up of the safety
position (if selected)
Binary input Switch over AUTOMATIC / MANUAL or
BINARY. IN Start up of the safety position
Analogue feedback (option) Status signal set-point or actual value
OUTPUT
2 binary outputs (option) Output of two selectable binary values
OUTPUT
User calibration Change to the factory calibration of the signal input
CAL.USER
Factory settings Reset to factory settings
SET.FACTORY
Serial interface Configuration of serial interface
SER.I/O
Setting display Adjustment of the display of the process level
EXTRAS
25
english
Types 8792, 8793

Simulation software For simulation of the device functions

SIMULATION
DIAGNOSE (Option) Monitoring of processes
POS.SENSOR Setting interface remote path sensor (available for Type

8793 Remote only. See chapter “6.2.3. Typ 8793,
Remote-Design”.
Table 5: The process controller software. Configurable auxiliary functions of the positioner
Functions and setting options of the process controller

Process controller PID - Process controller is activated
P.CONTROL
Adjustable parameters Parameterization of the process controller
P.CONTROL - PARAMETER Proportional coefficient, reset time, hold-back time and
operating point
Scalable inputs Configuration of the process controller
P.CONTROL - SETUP - Selection of the sensor input
- Scaling of process actual value and process set-point
value
Selection of the set-point value defaults
Automatic sensor detection or manual sensor Sensor types Pt100 and 4 – 20 mA are automatically
setting detected or can be set manually via the operating menu
P.CONTROL - SETUP - PV INPUT
Selection of the set-point value specification Set-point value specification either via standard signal
input or via keys
P.CONTROL - SETUP - SP INPUT
Process characteristic linearization Function for automatic linearization of the process
characteristics
P.Q‘LIN
Process controller optimization Function for automatic optimization of the process con-
troller parameters
P.TUNE
Table 6: The process controller software. Functions and setting options of the process controller
Hierarchical operating concept for easy operation on the following operating levels
Process level On the process level switch between AUTOMATIC and
MANUAL mode.
Setting level On the setting level specify certain basic functions during
start-up and configure auxiliary functions if required.
Table 7: The process controller software. Hierarchical operating concept
26
english
Types 8792, 8793
10. INTERFACES OF THE POSITIONER /

PROCESS CONTROLLER
Inputs for position or

process set-point value 2 binary outputs
4 – 20 mA 24 V PNP
0 – 20 mA Positioner /
0 – 10 V Process controller
0–5V
Initiator 1 / Initiator 2
Outputs
Input for process 24 V PNP NO
Inputs
actual value*
4 – 20 mA
frequency Analogue feedback
Pt 100 4 – 20 mA
0 – 10 V
Binary input
Supply
24 V DC
Operation
Note:
Optional inputs and outputs are illustrated by dotted lines
Figure 7: Interfaces of the positioner / process controller
The Types 8792 and 8793 are 3-wire devices, i.e. the power (24 V DC) is supplied separately from the
set-point value signal.
* only for process controller Type 8793

27
english
Types 8792, 8793
11. TECHNICAL DATA
11.1. Conformity
In accordance with the Declaration of conformity, Type 8792 / 8793 is compliant with the EC Directives.
11.2. Standards
The applied standards which are used to demonstrate compliance with the EC Directives are listed in the
EC-Type Examination Certificate and/or the EC Declaration of Conformity.
11.3. Operating conditions
NOTE!
If used outside, the device may be exposed to direct sunlight and temperature fluctuations which may
cause malfunctions or leaks.
• If the device is used outdoors, do not expose it unprotected to the weather conditions.
• Ensure that the permitted ambient temperature does not exceed the maximum value or drop below the minimum value.
Environmental temperature 0 – +60 °C
Degree of protection IP 65 / IP 67* according to EN 60529

(only if cables, plugs and sockets have been connected correctly)
* If the device is used under IP 67 conditions, the ventilation filter (see

“Figure 1: Structure, Type 8792 / 8793” must be removed and the exhaust
air conducted into the dry area.
11.4. Rating plate and additional plate for Ex devices

Explanation of the device-specific specifications on the rating plate:
Example: Operating voltage / control

Type Degree of protection
8792 24V / DC
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Remote IP65/IP67
P = 1,4 ... 7 bar Nominal pressure
Tamb 0°C...+60°C Ambient temperature
Ser.-Nr.: 001000 Serial number
00177689 W12LL
Identification number
Figure 8: Example of rating plate
28
english
Types 8792, 8793
Additional plate for Ex devices:

Devices, which may be used in the explosion-protected area, are identified by the additional plate for Ex devices.
1. Do not open under
Warning:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 explosive atmosphere
II 3 D Ex tD A22 T135°C 2. In Hazardous Areas the surface
may only be cleaned with a wet towel
Figure 9: Additional plate for Ex devices
11.5. Mechanical data

Dimensions See data sheet
Material
Housing material Plastic-coated aluminium

Other external parts Stainless steel (V4A), PC, PE, POM, PTFE
Sealing material EPDM, NBR, FKM
Mass approx. 1.0 kg
29
english
Types 8792, 8793
11.6. Electrical data

Connections 2 cable glands (M20 x 1.5) with screw-type terminals 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 or
circular plug-in connector
Operating voltage 24 V DC ± 10% max. residual ripple 10%
Power consumption <5W
Input data for actual value signal
4 – 20 mA: Input resistance 180 Ω

Resolution 12 bit
Frequency: Measuring range 0 – 1000 Hz

Input resistance 17 kΩ
Resolution 1‰ of the measured value,
Input signal > 300 mVss
Signal form Sine, rectangle, triangle
Pt 100 Measuring range -20 – +220 °C,

Resolution < 0.1 °C,
Measurement current < 1 mA
Input data for set-point value signal

0/4 – 20 mA: Input resistance 180 Ω
Resolution 12 bit
0 – 5/10 V: Input resistance 19 kΩ
Resolution 12 bit
Protection class III in accordance with DIN EN 61140 (VDE 0140-1)
Analogue feedback
max. current 10 mA (for voltage output 0 – 5/10 V)
Burden (load) 0 – 560 Ω (for current output 0/4 – 20 mA)
Inductive proximity switches 100 mA current limit
Binary outputs galvanically isolated

Current limiting 100 mA, output is clocked if overload occurs
Binary input galvanically isolated

0 – 5 V = log “0”, 10 – 30 V = log “1”
inverted input in reverse order (input current < 6 mA)
Communication interface Direct connection to PC via USB adapter with integrated interface driver
Communications software Communicator (“Accessories”)
11.7. Pneumatic data

Control medium Neutral gases, air
Quality classes in accordance with DIN ISO 8573-1
30 Dust content Class 7, max. particle size 40 µm, max. particle density 10 mg/m³
english
Types 8792, 8793
Water content Class 3, max. pressure dew point - 20 °C or min. 10 degrees below the
lowest operating temperature
Oil content Class X, max. 25 mg/m³
Temperature range of compressed air 0 – +60 °C

Pressure range 1.4 – 7 bar
Air flow rate 95 lN / min (at 1.4 bar*) for aeration and deaeration
150 lN / min (at 6 bar*) for aeration and deaeration
(QNn = 100 lN / min (according to definition for pressure drop from 7 to
6 bar absolute)).
Connections Internal thread G1/4“
* Pressure specifications: Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
31
english
Types 8792, 8793
11.8. Safety end positions after failure of the electrical

or pneumatic auxiliary power
The safety end position depends on the pneumatic connection of the actuator to the working connections A1 or
A2.
Safety end positions after failure of the

Actuator system Designation pneumatic .
electrical auxiliary power
auxiliary power
down
single-acting
→→Connection according to “Figure 10”
Control function down
up
A up
down →→Connection according to “Figure 11”
up
single-acting →→Connection according to “Figure 10”
up control function up
B down
down →→Connection according to “Figure 11”
upper
chamber connection see “Figure 12”
double-acting
lower not defined
up Control function up = lower chamber of the actuator to A2
chamber
I
down down = upper chamber of the actuator to A2
Table 8: Safety end position

Pneumatic connection: Description for “Table 8”
Single-acting actuators. Double-acting actuators.
Control function A and B Control function I
Connection: Connection: Connection:

working connection A1 to actuator working connection A2 to actuator Working connection A1 and A2
to actuator
A2 sealing A1 sealing
Safety end position:
up = lower chamber to A2
down = upper chamber to A2
32 Figure 10: Connection A1 Figure 11: Connection A2 Figure 12: Connection with CFI
english
Types 8792, 8793
11.9. Factory settings

The factory settings can be found in Chapter “27. Operating structure and factory settings”, page 174.
The factory presets are highlighted in blue to the right of the menu in the operating structure.
Examples:
Representation Description
Menu options activated or selected at the factory
Menu options not activated or selected at the factory
2.0 %
Values set at the factory
10.0 sec /....
Table 9: Illustration of the factory settings
12. ACCESSORIES
Designation Order no.
USB Interface for serial communication 227 093
Information at
Communicator
www.burkert.com
Table 10: Accessories
Other accessories can be found on the data sheet for Type 8792/8793.
12.1. Communications software

The PC operating program “Communicator” is designed for communication with the devices from the Bürkert posi-
tioner family. Devices constructed since August 2014 support the full range of functions. If you have any questions
regarding compatibility, please contact the Bürkert Sales Center.
33
english
Types 8792, 8793
34
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Contents
12. ATTACHMENT AND ASSEMBLY.................................................................................................................................................37
12.1. Safety instructions:.............................................................................................................................................................37
12.2. Attachment to a continuous valve with linear actuators according to NAMUR.................................38
12.2.1. Attachment kit for linear actuators (serial no. 787 215)..........................................................38
12.2.2. Installation...........................................................................................................................................39
12.2.3. Attaching mounting bracket...........................................................................................................41
12.2.4. Aligning lever mechanism...............................................................................................................42
12.3. Attachment to a continuous valve with rotary actuator..................................................................................43
12.3.1. Mounting kit (VDI/VDE 3845) on rotary actuator (part no. 787338)...................................43
12.3.2. Installation...........................................................................................................................................43
12.4. Remote operation with external position sensor...............................................................................................46
12.4.1. Mounting accessories......................................................................................................................46
12.4.2. Connection and start-up of the Remote Sensor Type 8798..................................................47
12.4.3. Connection and start-up via a 4 – 20 mA path sensor

(for Type 8793 remote model only)..............................................................................................48
13. FLUID CONNECTION.......................................................................................................................................................................49
13.1. Safety instructions..............................................................................................................................................................49
14. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - .

CIRCULAR PLUG-IN CONNECTOR VERSION (MULTI-POLE VERSION)..............................................................51
14.1. Type 8792 - designation of the circular plug-in connectors.........................................................................52
14.2. Connection of the positioner Type 8792.................................................................................................................52
14.2.1. X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector..........................................................................................52
14.2.2. X4 - M8, 4-pole socket (for binary outputs option only)

Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC)........................................................................53
14.3. Type 8793 - designation of the circular plug-in connectors and contacts...........................................54
14.4. Connecting the process controller Type 8793.....................................................................................................55
14.4.1. X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector,

plug assignments of the process actual value input ...............................................................55
35
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
15. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - TERMINAL VERSION FOR CABLE GLAND.........................................................56
15.1. Connection board of the Type 8792/8793 with screw-type terminals....................................................57
15.2. Terminal assignment for cable gland - positioner Type 8792.....................................................................57
15.2.1. Input signals from the control centre (e.g. PLC)........................................................................57
15.2.2. Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC)

(required for analogue output and/or binary output option only)...........................................58
15.2.3. Operating voltage.............................................................................................................................58
15.2.4. Terminal assignment for external position sensor (for remote model only).........................58
15.3. Terminal assignment for cable gland - process controller Type 8793....................................................59
15.3.1. Terminal assignments of the process actual value input.........................................................59
36
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12. ATTACHMENT AND ASSEMBLY
The dimensions of the Type 8792/8793 and the different device versions can be found on the data sheet.
12.1. Safety instructions:
WARNING!
Risk of injury from improper installation.
▶▶ Installation may be carried out by authorised technicians only and with the appropriate tools.
Risk of injury from unintentional activation of the system and an uncontrolled restart.
▶▶ Secure system from unintentional activation.
▶▶ Following assembly, ensure a controlled restart.
37
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.2. Attachment to a continuous valve with linear

actuators according to NAMUR
The valve position is transferred to the position sensor installed in the positioner via a lever (according to
NAMUR).
12.2.1. Attachment kit for linear actuators (serial no. 787 215)
(Can be purchased as an accessory from Bürkert).
Part no. Quantity Name

1 1 NAMUR mounting bracket IEC 534
2 1 Hoop
3 2 Clamping piece
4 1 Driver pin
5 1 Conical roller
6a 1 NAMUR lever for stroke range 3 – 35 mm
6b 1 NAMUR lever for stroke range 35 – 130 mm
7 2 U-bolt
8 4 Hexagon bolt DIN 933 M8 x 20
10 6 Circlip DIN 127 A8
11 6 Washer DIN 125 B8.4
12 2 Washer DIN 125 B6.4
13 1 Spring VD-115E 0.70 x 11.3 x 32.7 x 3.5
14 1 Spring washer DIN 137 A6
15 1 Locking washer DIN 6799 - 3.2
16 3 Circlip DIN 127 A6
18 1 Hexagon nut DIN 934 M6
19 1 Square nut DIN 557 M6
21 4 Hexagon nut DIN 934 M8
22 1 Guide washer 6.2 x 9.9 x 15 x 3.5
Table 10: Attachment kit for linear actuators
38
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.2.2. Installation
WARNING!
Procedure:
→→Using the clamping pieces ③, hexagon bolts ⑰ and circlips ⑯ attach the hoop ② to the actuator spindle.
Legend:
No. Name
16
2 Hoop
3 Clamping piece
16 Circlip
17 Hexagon bolt
3
17
Figure 13: Attaching the hoop
→→Select short or long lever according to the stroke of the actuator. (see “Table 10: Attachment kit for linear
actuators”).
→→Assemble lever (if not pre-assembled) (see “Figure 14”).
39
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Legend:
17
No. Name
4 Driver pin
16 5 Conical roller
6 Lever
12
12
6 13
14 For a description of
19
18
15 the numbering,
14
12
16 refer to
17 “Table 10: Attachment
22
18 kit for linear actuators”
13 19
15 4 5 22
Figure 14: Assembling the lever
The gap between the driver pin and the shaft should be the same as the actuator stroke. As a result, the
lever has a swing range of 60°. (see “Figure 15”).
Rotation range of the position sensor: .

The maximum rotation range of the position sensor is 180°.
Swing range of the lever: .

To ensure that the position sensor operates at a good resolution, the swing range of the lever must be at
least 30°.
The swing movement of the lever must be within the position sensor rotation range of 180°.
The scale printed on the lever is not relevant.
180°
Maximum swing
range of the lever
(min. 30° / max. 180°)
Ideal swing range
of the lever
The swingmovement of
the lever must be within
60°
the position sensor rotation range of 180°.
Figure 15: Swing range of the lever
40 →→Attach lever to the shaft of the Type 8792/8793 and screw tight.
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.2.3. Attaching mounting bracket
→→Attach mounting bracket ① to the back of the Type 8792/8793 with hexagon bolts ⑨, circlip ⑩ and
washers ⑪ (see “Figure 16”).
The selection of the M8 thread used on the Type 8792/8793 depends on the size of the actuator.
→→To determine the correct position, hold the Type 8792/8793 with mounting bracket on the actuator.
The conical roller ⑤ on the lever ⑥ of the position sensor must be able to move freely in the hoop (refer
“Figure 16”) along the entire stroke range of the actuator.
At 50% stroke the lever position should be approximately horizontal (see chapter “12.2.4. Aligning lever
mechanism”.
M8 thread
Legend:
No. Name
⑨ 1 Mounting bracket
5 Conical roller
6 Lever
9 Hexagon bolt
10 Circlip
11 Washer
⑤⑥
① ⑩ ⑪
Figure 16: Attaching mounting bracket
Attaching the Type 8792/8793 with mounting bracket for actuators with cast frame:
→→Attach mounting bracket to the cast frame with one or more hexagon bolts ⑧, washers ⑪ and circlips ⑩
(see “Figure 17”).
10
11
Legend:
No. Name
1 Mounting bracket
8 Hexagon bolt
8 10 11 1 10 Circlip
11 Washer
Figure 17: Attach Type 8792/8793 with mounting bracket; for actuators with cast frame 41
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Attaching the Type 8792/8793 with mounting bracket for actuators with columnar yoke:
→→Attach mounting bracket to the columnar yoke with the U-bolt ⑦, washers ⑪, circlips ⑩ and hexagon nuts 21
Legend:
21
No. Name
10 7 U-bolt
10 Circlip
11
11 Washer
7 21 Hexagon nut
Figure 18: Attach Type 8792/8793 with mounting bracket; for actuators with columnar yoke
12.2.4. Aligning lever mechanism
The lever mechanism cannot be correctly aligned until the device has been connected electrically and
pneumatically.
→→Move the actuator in manual mode to half stroke (according to the scale on the actuator).
→→Adjust the height of the Type 8792/8793 until the lever is horizontal.
→→Fix the Type 8792/8793 in this position on the actuator.
42
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.3. Attachment to a continuous valve with rotary

actuator
The shaft of the position sensor integrated in the positioner is connected directly to the shaft of the rotary
actuator.
12.3.1. Mounting kit (VDI/VDE 3845) on rotary actuator

(part no. 787338)
(Can be purchased as an accessory from Bürkert).
Part no. Quantity Name

1 1 Adapter
2 2 Setscrew DIN 913 M4 x 10
3 4 Cheese-head screw DIN 933 M6 x 12
4 4 Circlip B6
5 2 Hexagon nut DIN985, M4
Table 11: Mounting kit on rotary actuator
Other accessories:
The order number for the assembly bridge with fastening screws (according to VDI/VDE 3845) can be found on
the data sheet for Type 8792/8793.
12.3.2. Installation
WARNING!
Procedure:
→→Specify the attachment position of the Type 8792/8793:
- parallel to the actuator or
- rotated by 90° to the actuator.
→→Determine home position and direction of rotation of the actuator.

→→Connect adapter to the shaft of the Type 8792/8793 and secure with 2 setscrews.
43
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Anti-twist safeguard:
Note the flat side of the shaft! .

One of the setscrews must be situated on the flat side of the shaft as an anti-twist safeguard
Rotation range of the position sensor:
The maximum rotation range of the position sensor is 180°.

The shaft of the Type 8792/8793 may be moved within this range only.
180°
Maximum
swing range
(min. 30 ° / max. 180 °).

of the flattened shaft
for the swing range The swing movement of the
Ideal position
flattened shaft must be within the

90°
position sensor rotation range of

180°.
Flattened shaft
Figure 19: Rotation range / anti-twist safeguard

→→Assemble the multi-part assembly bridge* suitable for the actuator.
→→Attach the assembly bridge to the Type 8792/8793 using 4 cheese-head screws ③ and circlips ④
④
* The assembly bridge consists of
4 parts which can be adjusted
to the actuator by varying the
arrangement.
③
44 Figure 20: Attach assembly bridge (schematic representation)
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
→→Place Type 8792/8793 with assembly bridge on the rotary actuator and attach (see “Figure 21”)
Figure 21: Rotary actuator attachment
If the X.TUNE ERROR 5 message is indicated on the graphics display after the X.TUNE function starts,
the shaft of the Type 8792/8793 is not correctly aligned with the shaft of the actuator
(see “Table 124: Error and warning message on X.TUNE”, page 232.
• Check alignment (as described previously in this chapter).
• Then repeat the X.TUNE function.
45
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.4. Remote operation with external position sensor

In the case of this model, the positioner has no position sensor in the form of a rotary position sensor, but an
external path sensor.
Depending on the model of Type 8792/8793, there are the following connection options:
Device type Interface sensor Setting in the menu .

(ADD.FUNCTION)
Type 8792 Remote digital (serial) Remote Sensor Type 8798 –
digital (serial) Remote Sensor Type 8798 POS.SENSOR → DIGITAL
For menu description see
“26.2.19”
Type 8793 Remote
analog (4 ... 20 mA) * Any, high-resolution path POS.SENSOR → ANALOG
sensor For menu description see
“26.2.19”
Table 12: Connection options of path sensor
* If the path sensor is connected to the process controller Type 8793 via the analog interface, it can be
12.4.1. Mounting accessories

There are two options of attaching the Type 8792/8793 in remote operation (see “Figure 22”).
Installation on a DIN rail with accessory kit, Installation on a wall with accessory kit,
part no. 675702 part no. 675715
Figure 22: Attachment types in remote operation
46
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.4.2. Connection and start-up of the Remote Sensor Type 8798
WARNING!
Risk of injury from improper start-up.
▶▶ Start-up may be carried out by authorised technicians only and with the appropriate tools.
→→Connect the 3 or 4 wires of the sensor cable to the designated screw-type terminals of type 8792/8793.
Connection of screw-type terminals: See chapter “15.2.4. Terminal assignment for external position sensor
(for remote model only)”, page 58.
Connection of M8 circular connector (only for PROFIBUS and DeviceNet): See chapter PROFIBUS “29.5”,
page 196 / DeviceNet “32.5”, page 215.
→→Attach Remote Sensor on the actuator.
The correct procedure is described in the brief instructions for the Remote Sensor.
→→Connect compressed air to Type 8792/8793.

→→Connect Type 8792/8793 pneumatically to the actuator.
→→Switch on operating voltage to the Type 8792/8793.
→→Run the X.TUNE function.
47
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
12.4.3. Connection and start-up via a 4 – 20 mA path sensor (for

Type 8793 remote model only)
When a 4 – 20 mA path sensor is connected, the process controller Type 8793 can be used as a positioner
only, as the process actual value input is used as input for the path sensor.
In principle, any path sensor with a 4 – 20 mA output can be connected which has an adequate resolution of the
path signal.
Good control properties are obtained if the resolution of the path sensor allows at least 1000 measuring steps
over the path to be measured.
Example: Path sensor with 150 mm measurement range
Of which used measurement range (= stroke) 100 mm
Required minimum resolution of the sensor:

100 mm
= 0.1 mm
1000 Steps
WARNING!
Risk of injury from improper start-up.
▶▶ Start-up may be carried out by authorised technicians only and with the appropriate tools.
Connect 4 – 20 mA path sensor to the terminals 1 - 4 of the process controller Type 8793 remote model.
(see chapter “Table 21: Terminal assignments of the process actual value input”, page 60 /
Internal supply of the path sensor by Type 8793:
→ Connection according to input type “4 ... 20 mA - internally supplied”
Separate supply of the path sensor:
→ Connection according to input type “4 ... 20 mA - externally supplied”.
→→Attach remote sensor on the actuator.
The correct procedure is described in the instructions for the path sensor.
→→Connect compressed air to the Type 8793.

→→Connect Type 8793 pneumatically to the actuator
→→Switch on Type 8793 operating voltage.
→→To obtain the best possible control precision, adjust the path sensor so that path to be measured corresponds
to the signal range 4 – 20 mA (only if the path sensor includes this function).
→→In the ADD.FUNCTION menu activate the POS.SENSOR function. Then select POS.SENSOR in the main
menu and set ANALOG.
(see chapter “26.2.19. POS.SENSOR – Setting interface remote path sensor”, page 142.
→→Run the X.TUNE function.

48
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
13. PNEUMATIC CONNECTION
13.1. Safety instructions
DANGER!
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment.
▶▶ Before loosening the pneumatic lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent the pneumatic lines.
WARNING!
▶▶ Installation may be carried out by authorized technicians only and with the appropriate tools.
▶▶ Following installation, ensure a controlled restart.
(connection: A2)
Supply pressure connection 1.4 – 7 bar
(connection: P)
Working connection 1 <
(connection: A1)
Deaeration connection
Figure 23: Fluid installation / Location of the connections
49
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Procedure:
→→Apply supply pressure (1.4 – 7 bar) to the supply pressure connection P.
For single-acting actuators (control function A and B):

→→Connect one working connection (A1 or A2, depending on required safety position) to the chamber of the
single-acting actuator.
Safety positions see chapter “11.8. Safety end positions after failure of the electrical or pneumatic auxiliary
power”.
→→Seal a working connection which is not required with a plug.
For double-acting actuators (control function I):

→→Connect working connections A1 and A2 to the respective chambers of the double-acting actuator
see chapter “11.8. Safety end positions after failure of the electrical or pneumatic auxiliary power”.
Important information for perfect control behaviour.
This ensures that the control behaviour is not extremely negatively affected in the upper stroke range on
account of too little pressure difference.
• keep the applied supply pressure at least 0.5 – 1 bar above the pressure which is required to move the
pneumatic actuator to its end position.
If fluctuations are greater, the control parameters measured with the X.TUNE function are not optimum.
• during operation keep the fluctuations of the supply pressure as low as possible (max. ±10%).
50
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
14. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION -

CIRCULAR PLUG-IN CONNECTOR VERSION
(MULTI-POLE VERSION)
DANGER!
Risk of injury due to electrical shock.
▶▶ Before reaching into the device or the equipment, switch off the operating voltage and secure to prevent reactivation.
Risk of explosion if used in Ex area.

To avoid the risk of explosion, connect the Ex device to the power supply as described below:
(For example: EXCLIP, FA. Phoenix Contact,
Type SAC-M12-EXCLIP-M, Art. no. 1558988 or
▶▶ Use only cable and line entry points which have been approved for the respective application area. Screw cable and line
entry points into place according to the associated installation instructions.
▶▶ Install pre-assembled cable glands according to the installation instructions supplied by the cable gland manufacturer.
Before start-up in the Ex area, check whether the cable gland was installed as described in these installation instructions.
WARNING!
Using the 4 – 20 mA set-point value input
If several devices of Type 8792/8793 are connected in series and the power supply to a device in this
series connection fails, the input of the failed device becomes highly resistive.
As a result, the 4 – 20 mA standard signal fails.
In this case please contact Bürkert Service directly.
If PROFIBUS DP or DeviceNet:
The designation of the circular plug-in connectors and sockets and the contacts can be found in the
respective chapters.
51
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
14.1. Type 8792 - designation of the circular plug-in

connectors
Operating voltage Binary outputs
and diverse signals optional
2 1
8
3 7 3
1
4 6
5 2 4
X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector Functional earth FE X4 - M8, 4-pole socket
Figure 24: Type 8792; designation of the circular plug-in connectors and contacts
14.2. Connection of the positioner Type 8792

→→Connect pins according to the model (options) of the positioner.
14.2.1. X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector
Pin Wire colour* Configuration On the device side External circuit / Signal level
Input signals of the control centre (e.g. PLC)

1 white Set-point value 1 + (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 5 / 10 V)
+ (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 5/10 V completely galvanically isolated
2 brown Set-point value GND 2 GND set-point value
0–5V (log. 0)
5 grey Binary input 5 +
10 – 30 V (log. 1)
6 pink Binary input GND GND (identical with the GND

6
operating voltage)
Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC) - (only used for analog output option)
8 red Analogue feedback + 8 + (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 5 / 10 V)
completely galvanically isolated
7 blue Analogue feedback GND 7 GND Analogue feedback

Operating voltage
3 green GND 3
24 V DC ± 10%
4 yellow +24 V 4 max. residual ripple 10%
* The indicated wire colours refer to the connection cable, part no. 919061, available as an accessory.
52 Table 13: Pin assignment; X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
14.2.2. X4 - M8, 4-pole socket (for binary outputs option only)

Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC)
Pin Configuration On the device side External circuit / Signal level
1 Binary output 1 1 0 – 24 V
2 Binary output 2 2 0 – 24 V
3 Binary output GND GND (identical with the GND operating

3
voltage)
Table 14: Pin assignment; X4 - M8, 4-pole socket - output signals to the control centre
When the operating voltage is applied, the positioner is operating.

→→Now make the required basic settings and actuate the automatic adjustment of the positioner. The procedure is
described in chapter “21. Start-up sequence”.
53
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
14.3. Type 8793 - designation of the circular plug-in

connectors and contacts
Operating voltage Process actual value Binary outputs

and diverse signals
2 1
8
3 7 3 1 1 3
4 6
5 4 2 2 4
X1 - M12, 8-pole X5 - M8, 4-pole X4 - M8, 4-pole socket
circular connector circular connector (Description see
(Description see (Description see “Table 14”)
“Table 13”) “Table 15”
Functional earth FE
Figure 25: Type 8793; designation of the circular plug-in connectors and contacts
Location of the switch:
Symbols for Location of the switch

switch position
Switch on right
Switch on left
Figure 26: Location of the switch; symbols for switch position
54
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
14.4. Connecting the process controller Type 8793

→→First connect the process controller as described in chapter “14.2. Connection of the positioner Type 8792”.
14.4.1. X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector,

plug assignments of the process actual value input
Wire DIP On the

Input type* Pin Configuration External circuit
colour** switches device side
4 – 20 mA- 1 brown +24 V transmitter supply 1
internally 2 white Output from transmitter
supplied 2 Transmitter
3 blue GND (identical with GND Switch
3 GND
operating voltage) on left
4
4 black Bridge to GND (Pin 3)
4 – 20 mA- 1 brown not used
externally 2 white Process actual + 2 4 - 20 mA
supplied
3 blue not used Switch
on right
4 black Process actual – 4 GND 4 - 20 mA
Frequency- 1 brown +24 V sensor supply 1 +24 V
internally 2 white Clock input + 2 Clock +
supplied
3 blue Clock input – (GND) 3 Clock – / GND
Switch (identical with GND
on left operating voltage)
4 black not used
Frequency- 1 brown not used
externally 2 white Clock input + 2 Clock +
supplied
3 blue Clock input – Switch 3 Clock –
on right
4 black not used
Pt 100 1 brown not used 2
(see infor- 2 white Process actual 1 (power supply) Pt 100
mation
3 blue Process actual 3 (GND) Switch
below) 3
on right
4 black Process actual 2 (compensation) 4
* Can be adjusted via software (see chapter “21. Start-up sequence”).
** The indicated colors refer to the connection cable available as an accessory (918718).
Table 15: Pin assignment; X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector - process actual value input
Connect the Pt 100 sensor via 3 cables for cable compensation reasons. It is essential to bridge terminal
3 and terminal 4 on the sensor.
When the operating voltage is applied, the process controller is operating.

→→Now make the required basic settings and actuate the automatic adjustment of the process controller. The
procedure is described in chapter “21. Start-up sequence”.
55
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
15. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - TERMINAL

VERSION FOR CABLE GLAND
DANGER!

WARNING!
Using the 4 – 20 mA set-point value input
If several devices of Type 8792/8793 are connected in series and the power supply to a device in this
series connection fails, the input of the failed device becomes highly resistive.
As a result, the 4 – 20 mA standard signal fails.
In this case please contact Bürkert Service directly.
56
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
15.1. Connection board of the Type 8792/8793 with

screw-type terminals
1 Optional:
2
S+
3
S–
4
A
+24 V
B
GND
83 +
85 +
31 +
32 –
11 +
12 –
81 +
Figure 27: Designation of the screw-type terminals

Procedure:
→→Unscrew the 4 screws on the housing cover and remove the cover.
The screw-type terminals are now accessible.
→→Connect Type 8792/8793.

The procedure is described in the following chapters.
for Type 8792: chapter “15.2. Terminal assignment for cable gland - positioner Type 8792”
for Type 8793: chapter “15.3. Terminal assignment for cable gland - process controller Type 8793”
15.2. Terminal assignment for cable gland - positioner

Type 8792
15.2.1. Input signals from the control centre (e.g. PLC)
Terminal Configuration On the device side External circuit / Signal level
11 + Set-point value + 11 + + (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 5 / 10 V)

12 – Set-point value GND 12 – GND set-point value
81 + Binary input + 0–5V (log. 0)

81 + +
10 – 30 V (log. 1)
specific to operating voltage GND
(terminal GND)
Table 16: Terminal assignment; input signals of the control centre

57
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
15.2.2. Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC)

(required for analogue output and/or binary output option
only)
→→Connect terminals according to the model (options) of the positioner.
83 + Binary output 1 83 + 24 V / 0 V, NC / NO specific to

operating voltage GND (terminal GND)
85 + Binary output 2 85 + 24 V / 0 V, NC / NO specific to
operating voltage GND (terminal GND)
31 + Analogue feedback + 31 + + (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 5 / 10 V)
32 – Analogue feedback GND 32 – GND Analogue feedback
Table 17: Terminal assignment; output signals to the control centre
15.2.3. Operating voltage
+24 V Operating voltage + +24 V

24 V DC ± 10%
GND Operating voltage GND max. residual ripple 10%
GND
Table 18: Terminal configuration; operating voltage
15.2.4. Terminal assignment for external position sensor

(for remote model only)
Connection of the digital, contact-free position sensor Type 8798:
Wire colour
On the device External circuit / Signal
Terminal Cable type Cable type Configuration side level
1 2
S+ brown brown Supply sensor + S+ +

Remote
S- white black Supply sensor – S– – Sensor
A green red Serial interface, A-line A A-line Type 8798
B yellow orange Serial interface, B-line digital

B B-line
Table 19: Terminal assignment; digital, contact-free position sensor Type 8798
58
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Connection of a potentiometric position sensor:
Terminal Configuration On the device side External circuit
Potentiometer 1 1
Potentiometer
Center tap 2 2 Center tap
Potentiometer 3 3
Table 20: Terminal assignment; potentiometric position sensor
When the operating voltage is applied, the positioner is operating.

→→Now make the required basic settings and actuate the automatic adjustment of the positioner. The procedure is
described in chapter “21. Start-up sequence” .
15.3. Terminal assignment for cable gland - process

controller Type 8793
→→First connect the process controller as described in chapter “15.2. Terminal assignment for cable gland -
positioner Type 8792”
15.3.1. Terminal assignments of the process actual value input
Input type* Terminal Configuration On the device side External circuit

4 – 20 mA 1 +24 V transmitter input 1
- internally
actual value
2 Output from transmitter 2 Transmitter

supplied
3 Bridge to GND (Terminal GND GND
from operating voltage) 3
GND
4 not used
GND GND from operating voltage
4 – 20 mA 1 not used
actual value
- externally
supplied 2 Process actual + 2 + (4 – 20 mA)
3 Process actual – 3 GND 4 – 20 mA
4 not used
Frequency 1 +24 V sensor supply 1 +24 V
actual value
- internally
supplied 2 Clock input + 2 Clock +
3 not used
4 Clock input – 4
GND GND from operating voltage GND Clock – (GND)
59
english
Type 8792, 8793
Installation
Input type* Terminal Configuration On the device side External circuit

Frequency 1 not used
actual value
- externally
2 Clock input + 2 Clock +
supplied
3 not used
4 Clock input – 4 Clock –
Pt 100 1 not used 2
actual value
(see infor- Pt 100

2 Process actual 1 (Power supply)
mation
below) 3 Process actual 3 (GND) 3
4 Process actual 2 (Compensation) 4
* Can be adjusted via software (see chapter“21. Start-up sequence”).
Table 21: Terminal assignments of the process actual value input
Connect the Pt 100 sensor via 3 cables for cable compensation reasons.
It is essential to bridge terminal 3 and terminal 4 on the sensor.
When the operating voltage is applied, the process controller is operating.

→→Now make the required basic settings and actuate the automatic adjustment of the process controller. The
procedure is described in chapter “21. Start-up sequence”.
60
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
Contents
16. OPERATING LEVELS........................................................................................................................................................................62
16.1. Switching between the operating levels.................................................................................................................62
17. OPERATING AND DISPLAY ELEMENTS................................................................................................................................63
17.1. Description of the operating and display elements..........................................................................................63
17.1.1. Description of the symbols which are displayed on the process level.................................64
17.2. Function of the keys...........................................................................................................................................................65
17.2.1. Entering and changing numerical values.....................................................................................66
17.3. Adjusting the display.........................................................................................................................................................67
17.3.1. Possible displays of the process level.........................................................................................67
17.4. Date and time.........................................................................................................................................................................69
17.4.1. Setting date and time:.....................................................................................................................70
18. OPERATING STATES.......................................................................................................................................................................71
18.1. Changing the operating state........................................................................................................................................71
19. ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS.....................................................................................72
19.1.1. Activating auxiliary functions...........................................................................................................72
19.1.2. Deactivating auxiliary functions......................................................................................................73
20. MANUALLY OPENING AND CLOSING THE VALVE..........................................................................................................74
61
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
16. OPERATING LEVELS

There is the process level and the setting level for the operation and setting of type 8792/8793.
Process level:.
The running process is displayed and operated on the process level.
Operating state: AUTOMATIC – Displaying the process data
MANUAL – Manually opening and closing the valve
Setting level:.
The basic settings for the process are made on the setting level.
– Inputting the operating parameters
– Activating auxiliary functions
If the device is in the AUTOMATIC operating state when changing to the setting level, the process continues
running during the setting.
16.1. Switching between the operating levels

Change to the setting level MENU Press for 3 seconds
Return to the process level EXIT Press briefly
The set MANUAL or AUTOMATIC operating state is retained even when the operating level is changed.
Change to the setting level Return to the process level
Left selection key Progress bar Left selection key

closes
Press
Press for 3 seconds
Figure 28: Changing operating level
62
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
17. OPERATING AND DISPLAY ELEMENTS

The following chapter describes the operating and display elements of Type 8792/8793.
17.1. Description of the operating and display elements

The device is operated by four keys and a 128x64 dot matrix graphics display.
The display is adjusted to the set functions and operating levels.
In principle, a distinction can be made between the display view for the process level and the setting level.
When the operating voltage has been applied, the process level is displayed.
Display elements of the process level:
Save symbol
Symbol for position control
Symbol for process control
Symbol for the AUTOMATIC operating state
Other symbols are displayed according to the activated
functions. See "Table 22"
Abbreviated designation for the displayed

process value
Unit of the displayed process value
Process value *
Designation for the function of the keys
Operating elements:
Right selection key
Arrow key , down arrow
Arrow key , up arrow
Left selection key
* The process values which can be displayed in the AUTOMATIC operating state depend on type.
A detailed description can be found in Chapter "17.3.1. Possible displays of the process level"
Figure 29: Display and operating elements of the process level
63
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
Display elements of
the setting level:
Menu designation
Submenu
Operating elements:
Designation for the
Right selection key
function of the keys
Arrow key , down arrow
Arrow key , up arrow
Left selection key
Figure 30: Display and operating elements of the setting level
17.1.1. Description of the symbols which are displayed on the

process level
The symbols which are displayed depend on
• type,
• operation as position or process controller,
• AUTOMATIC or MANUAL operating state and
• the activated functions.
Operation Symbol Description

Types 8792/8793 AUTOMATIC operating state
Operation as Diagnosis active (optional; only available if the device has the additional
positioner software for the diagnosis)
X.CONTROL / Positioner active (symbol is indicated for Type 8793 only)
Save EEPROM (is indicated during the save process)
CUTOFF active
SAFEPOS active
Interface I/O Burst
Interface I/O RS232 HART
SECURITY active
Other symbols for P.CONTROL / Process controller active
Type 8793
Bus active
Operation as
process controller SIMULATION active
64 Table 22: Symbols of the process level.
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
17.2. Function of the keys

The functions of the 4 operating keys differ depending on the operating state (AUTOMATIC or MANUAL) and
operating level (process level or setting level).
The key function which is active is displayed in the gray text field which is above the key.
The description of the operating levels and operating states can be found in
Chapter "16. Operating levels" and "18. Operating states".
Key function on the process level:

Key Key function Description of the function Operating state
Arrow key OPN (OPEN) Manual opening of the actuator. MANUAL
Change the displayed value
AUTOMATIC
(e.g. POS-CMD-TEMP-...).
Arrow key CLS (CLOSE) Manual closing of the actuator. MANUAL
Change the displayed value
AUTOMATIC
(e.g. POS-CMD-TEMP-...).
Left MENU Change to the setting level.
selection key Note: Press key for approx. 3 s. AUTOMATIC or
MANUAL
Right AUTO Return to AUTOMATIC operating state. MANUAL

selection key
MANUAL Change to MANUAL operating state. AUTOMATIC
Key function on the setting level:

Key Key function Description of the function
Arrow key Scroll up in the menus.
+ Increase numerical values.
Arrow key Scroll down in the menus.
– Decrease numerical values.
<– Change by one digit to the left; when entering numerical values.
Left EXIT (BACK) Return to the process level.
selection key Gradually return from a submenu option.
ESC Leave a menu.
STOP Stop a sequence.
Right ENTER Select, activate or deactivate a menu option.
selection key SELEC
OK
INPUT
EXIT (BACK) Gradually return from a submenu option.

RUN Start a sequence.
STOP Stop a sequence.
Table 23: Function of the keys

65
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
17.2.1. Entering and changing numerical values

Changing numerical values with fixed decimal places:
Key
Key Description of the function Example
function
Arrow key Change to the next decimal place (from right to left).
After reaching the last decimal place, the display
switches back to the first decimal place.
Increase value. Enter date and time.
Arrow key
When the largest possible value has been reached,
0 is displayed again.
Left ESC Return without change.
selection key or
EXIT
Right OK Accept the set value.

selection key
Table 24: Change numerical values with fixed decimal places.
Enter numerical values with variable decimal places:
Key
Key Description of the function Example
function
Arrow key Increase value.
Enter PWM signal
Arrow key Reduce value.
Left ESC Return without change.
selection key or
EXIT

selection key
Table 25: Enter numerical values with variable decimal places.
66
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
17.3. Adjusting the display

The display can be individually adjusted for the operation and monitoring of the process.
• To do this, menu options can be activated for displaying the process level. POS and CMD are activated in the
as-delivered state.
• The menu options which can be displayed depend on the type.
How you can adjust the display for Type 8792 individually to the process to be controlled is described in
Chapter "26.2.18. EXTRAS – Setting the display", page 139 ".
17.3.1. Possible displays of the process level
Possible displays in AUTOMATIC operating state
Actual position of the valve actuator

POS
0.0 (0 ... 100 %)
MENU CMD/POS CMD MANU
• Set-point position of the valve actuator or

CMD
0.0 • Set-point position of the valve actuator after rescaling by possibly
activated split range function or correction characteristic
MENU POS TEMP MANU
(0 ... 100 %)
Internal temperature in the housing of the device

TEMP
 C 0.0 ( °C)
MENU CMD CMD/POS
Process actual value

PV
m3/min 0.0
Only for type 8793
MENU TEMP SP MANU
Process set-point value

SP
m3/min 0.0 Right selection key :
The key function depends on the set-point value default
(menu: P.CONTROL→ P.SETUP → SP-INPUT → internal/external).
MENU PV PV (t) INPUT
INPUT Set-point value default = internal
MANU Set-point value default = external
Only for type 8793

Graphical display of SP and PV with time axis
Only for type 8793

MENU SP / PV (t) HOLD
67
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
Possible displays in AUTOMATIC operating state
Graphical display of POS and CMD with time axis
MENU CMD / POS (t) HOLD
CLOCK Time, weekday and date
12:0000
Thu. 01 . 09 . 11
MENU INPUT X.TUNE INPUT
Input signal for set-point position

INPUT
mA 4.0 (0 ... 5/10 V or 0/4 ... 20 mA)
Only for operation as positioner
MENU CMD/POS CLOCK
Automatic adjustment of the positioner

X.TUNE
MENU CLOCK CMD/POS RUN
Automatic optimization of the process controller parameters

P.TUNE
Only for type 8793
MENU X.TUNE P.LIN RUN
Automatic linearization of the process characteristics

P.LIN
Only for type 8793
MENU P.TUNE CMD/POS RUN
Simultaneous display of the set-point position and the actual position

CMD 0.0 of the valve actuator
POS 0.0 (0 ... 100 %)
MENU P.LIN SP/PV MANU
Simultaneous display of the set-point position and the actual position

SP m3/min 0.0 of the valve actuator
PV m3/min 0.0 (0 ... 100 %)
Only for type 8793
MENU CMD/POS POS MANU
Table 26: Displays of the process level in AUTOMATIC operating state
68
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
17.4. Date and time

Date and time are set on the process level in the CLOCK menu.
To ensure that the input menu for CLOCK can be selected on the process level, the following functions must be
activated in 2 stages:
1. The EXTRAS auxiliary function in the ADD.FUNCTION menu
2. The CLOCK function in the EXTRAS auxiliary function, DISP.ITEMS submenu.
Activating EXTRAS and CLOCK:
Key Action Description

MENU Press for approx. 3 s Switching from process level setting level.
/ Select ADD.FUNCTION
ENTER Press The possible auxiliary functions are displayed.
/ Select EXTRAS
ENTER Press Activate the EXTRAS auxiliary function by marking with a cross
and transfer into the main menu (MAIN).
EXIT Press Return to the main menu (MAIN).
/ Select EXTRAS
ENTER Press The submenus of EXTRAS are displayed.
/ Select DISP. ITEMS
ENTER Press The possible menu options are displayed.
/ Select CLOCK
SELEC Press The activated CLOCK function is now marked by a cross .
EXIT Press Return to the EXTRAS menu.
EXIT Press Switching from setting level process level.
Table 27: EXTRAS; Activating the CLOCK function
Date and time must be reset whenever the device is restarted.

After a restart the device therefore switches immediately and automatically to the corresponding input
menu.
69
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
17.4.1. Setting date and time:

→→On the process level select the display for CLOCK using the arrow keys.
→→Press INPUT to open the input screen for the setting.
→→Set date and time as described in the following table.
Key
Key Description of the function Input screen
function
Arrow key Switch to the next time unit (from right to left).
When the last time unit for the date has been
reached, the display switches to the time units for
the time.
If the last unit is at top left (hours), the display
switches back to the first unit at bottom right (year). CLOCK
Arrow key Increase value.
When the largest possible value has been reached, 12:0000
Left ESC
0 is displayed again.
Return without change.
Thu. 01 . 09 . 11
MENU + <– INPUT
selection key

selection key
Switching the display.
Table 28: Setting date and time
70
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
18. OPERATING STATES

Type 8792/8793 has 2 operating states: AUTOMATIC and MANUAL.
When the operating voltage is switched on, the device is in the AUTOMATIC operating state.
AUTOMATIC In the AUTOMATIC operating state normal

POS
0.0 controlled operation is implemented.
(The symbol for AUTOMATIC is shown on the display.
(A bar runs along the upper edge of the display).
MENU CMD POS MANU
MANUAL In the MANUAL operating state the valve can be manually

POS
0.0 opened or closed via the arrow keys
OPN and CLS ).
(The symbol for AUTOMATIC

(key function
is hidden.
(No bar running along the upper edge of the display).
MENU OPN CLS AUTO
The MANUAL operating state (key function MANU ) is for the following process value displays only:
POS, CMD, PV, CMD/POS, SP/PV.
For SP only for external process set-point value.
18.1. Changing the operating state

MANUAL or AUTOMATIC operating state is switched on the process level.
When switching to the setting level, the operating state is retained.
Change to MANUAL operating state MANU press Only available for process value display:
POS, CMD, PV, SP
Return to AUTOMATIC operating AUTO press
state
71
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
19. ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING AUXILIARY

FUNCTIONS
Auxiliary functions can be activated for demanding control tasks.
The auxiliary function is activated via the ADD.FUNCTION basic function and transferred to the main
menu (MAIN).
The auxiliary functions can then be selected and set in the extended main menu (MAIN).
19.1.1. Activating auxiliary functions

Procedure:

/ Select required auxiliary
function
ENTER Press The selected auxiliary function is now marked by a cross .
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the main menu (MAIN).
The marked function is now activated and incorporated into the
main menu.
The parameters can then be set as follows.

/ Select the auxiliary function In the main menu (MAIN) select the auxiliary function.
ENTER Press Opening the submenu to input the parameters.
The setting of the submenu is described in the respective chapter of
the auxiliary function.
Return from the submenu and switch to the process level

EXIT * Press Return to a higher level or to the main menu (MAIN).
ESC *
* The designation of the key depends on the selected auxiliary function.
Table 29: Activating auxiliary functions
72
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
19.1.1.1. Principle: Activating auxiliary functions with simultaneous

incorporation into the main menu
Functions in the main menu
Setting level (Standard)
MAIN INPUT
INPUT
X.TUNE
ADD.FUNCTION X.TUNE
Activating the auxiliary function
EXIT 7 ENTER
ADD.FUNCTION ENTER CHARACT
EXTRAS
EXIT DIAGNOSE
Extended main menu

MAIN
X.TUNE
INPUT
ADD.FUNCTION
CARACT X.TUNE
X.CONTROL
EXIT 15 ENTER
ADD.FUNCTION
CHARACT
EXTRAS
Figure 31: Principle: Activating auxiliary functions with simultaneous incorporation into the main menu (MAIN)
19.1.2. Deactivating auxiliary functions

Procedure:

/ Select the auxiliary function
ENTER Press Remove function mark (no cross ).
The marked function is now deactivated and removed from the
main menu.
Table 30: Deactivating auxiliary functions
Deactivation removes the auxiliary function from the main menu (MAIN). This will cause the previous set-
tings, created under this function, to be rendered invalid.
73
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operation
20. MANUALLY OPENING AND CLOSING THE

VALVE
In the MANUAL operating state, the valve can be opened and closed manually using the arrow keys.
The MANUAL operating state (key function MANU ) is for the following process value displays:
• POS, actual position of the valve actuator.
• CMD, set-point position of the valve actuator.

When switching to MANUAL operating state, POS is displayed.
• PV, process actual value.

• SP, process set-point value.
When switching to MANUAL operating state, PV is displayed. The switch is possible only for external
set-point value default (menu: P.CONTROL→ P.SETUP → SP-INPUT → external).
• CMD/POS, set-point position of the valve actuator.

When switching to MANUAL operating state, POS is displayed.
• SP/PV, process set-point value.

When switching to MANUAL operating state, PV is displayed. The switch is possible only for external
set-point value default (menu: P.CONTROL→ P.SETUP → SP-INPUT → external).
Manually opening and closing valve:

/ Select POS, CMD, PV or SP
MANU Press Change to MANUAL operating state
press Aerate the actuator
Control function A (SFA): Valve opens
Control function B (SFB): Valve closes
Control function I (SFI): Connection 2.1 aerated
press Bleed the actuator
Control function A (SFA): Valve closes
Control function B (SFB): Valve opens
Control function I (SFI): Connection 2.2 aerated
Table 31: Manually opening and closing the valve
SFA: Actuator spring force closing
SFB: Actuator spring force opening
SFI: Actuator double-acting
74
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
Contents
21. START-UP SEQUENCE...................................................................................................................................................................76
22. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS...............................................................................................................................................................76
23. BASIC SETTING OF THE DEVICE............................................................................................................................................77
23.1. INPUT - Setting the input signal.............................................................................................................................78
23.2. X.TUNE – Automatic adjustment of the position controller...................................................................79
23.2.1. X.TUNE.CONFIG – Manual configuration of X.TUNE ............................................81
24. ACTIVATION OF THE PROCESS CONTROLLER...............................................................................................................82
25. BASIC SETTING OF THE PROCESS CONTROLLER......................................................................................................83
25.1. P.CONTROL – Setting up and parameterization of the process controller..................................83
25.2. SETUP – Setting up the process controller......................................................................................................85
25.2.1. PV-INPUT – Specifying signal type for the process actual value...................................85
25.2.2. PV-SCALE – Scaling of the process actual value.............................................................86
25.2.3. SP-INPUT – Type of the set-point value default (intern or extern).................................90
25.2.4. SP-SCALE – Scaling of the process set-point value

(for external set-point value default only)....................................................................................90
25.2.5. P.CO-INIT – Smooth switchover MANUAL-AUTOMATIC................................................92
25.3. PID.PARAMETER – Parameterizing the process controller..............................................................93
25.3.1. Procedure for inputting the parameters.......................................................................................93
25.3.2. DBND – Insensitivity range (dead band)...............................................................................94
25.3.3. KP – Amplification factor of the process controller...............................................................94
25.3.4. TN – Reset time of the process controller..............................................................................95
25.3.5. TV – Hold-back time of the process controller......................................................................95
25.3.6. X0 – Operating point of the process controller.....................................................................95
25.3.7. FILTER – Filtering of the process actual value input..........................................................96
25.4. P.Q‘LIN – Linearization of the process characteristic..............................................................................................97
25.5. P.TUNE – Self-optimization of the process controller................................................................................98
25.5.1. The mode of operation of P.TUNE ..........................................................................................98
25.5.2. Preparatory measure for execution of P.TUNE ....................................................................98
25.5.3. Starting the function P.TUNE ................................................................................................ 100 75
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
21. START-UP SEQUENCE

Before start-up, carry out fluid and electrical installation of Type 8792/8793 and of the valve. For
description see Chapter "13", "14" and "15".
When the operating voltage is applied, Type 8792/8793 is operating and is in the AUTOMATIC operating state.
The display shows the process level with the values for POS and CMD.
The following basic settings must be made for starting up the device:
Device Sequence Type of basic setting Setting via Description. Requirement

type in chapter
Basic setting of the device:
1 Set input signal INPUT "23.1"
8792 and (standard signal). essential
8793
2 Adjust device to the local X.TUNE "23.2"
conditions.
3 Activate process controller. ADD.FUNCTION "24"
Basic setting of the process

P.CONTROL "25"
controller:
essential
4 – Setting the hardware → SETUP "25.2"
only 8793
(Process 5 – Parameter setting of the → PID.PARAMETER "25.3"
controller) software.
Automatic linearization of the
6 P.Q‘LIN "25.4" to be
process characteristics.
implemented
Automatic parameter setting optionally
7 P.TUNE "25.5"
for the process controller.
Table 32: Start-up sequence
The basic settings are made on the setting level.

To switch from the process to the setting level, press the MENU key for approx. 3 seconds.
Then the main menu (MAIN) of the setting level is indicated on the display.
22. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING!
Risk of injury from improper operation.
Improper operation may result in injuries as well as damage to the device and the area around it
▶▶ Before start-up, ensure that the operating personnel are familiar with and completely understand the contents of the
operating instructions.
▶▶ Observe the safety instructions and intended use.
▶▶ Only adequately trained personnel may start up the equipment/the device.
76
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
23. BASIC SETTING OF THE DEVICE

The following settings must be made for the basic setting of Type 8792/8793:
1. INPUT Selection of the input signal (see Chapter "23.1").
2. X.TUNE Automatic self-parameterization of the positioner (see Chapter "23.2")
Operating structure for the basic setting:
Process level (values are displayed)

MENU Press for approx. 3 s
Select the input signal
Setting level. 4-20 mA SELEC
INPUT ENTER
Main menu (MAIN)
0-20 mA
0-10 V
0-5 V EXIT
Automatic self-parameterization
X.TUNE RUN X.TUNE
Hold down STARTED
as long as
countdown TUNE #0
(5 ...) is INIT
running
X.TUNE
READY EXIT
Manual.TUNE, Manual parameterization

(not required for standard applications)
RUN X.TUNE.CONFIG ENTER SELEC
press Select
briefly M.TUNE.POS parameters
EXIT
M.TUNE.PWM
M.TUNE.AIR EXIT
Activating auxiliary functions *

ADD.FUNCTION
Configuration ENTER CARACT ENTER
P.CONTROL
DIAGNOSE EXIT
EXIT
* required only for start-up of the process controller (see Chapter "24. Activation of the process controller")
Figure 32: MAIN – main menu, operating structure in as-delivered state 77
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
23.1. INPUT - Setting the input signal

This setting is used to select the input signal for the set-point value.
Procedure:

/ Select INPUT
ENTER Press The possible input signals for INPUT are displayed.
/ Select input signal
(4-20 mA, 0-20 mA,....)
SELEC Press The selected input signal is now marked by a filled circle .
Table 33: Setting the input signal
Operating structure:

Setting level Select the input signal
4-20 mA SELEC
INPUT ENTER
0-20 mA
0-10 V
0-5 V EXIT
X.TUNE
ADD.FUNCTION
EXIT
Figure 33: Operating structure INPUT
78
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
23.2. X.TUNE – Automatic adjustment of the positioner
WARNING!
Danger due to the valve position changing when the X.TUNE function is run.
When the X.TUNE function is run under operating pressure, there is an acute risk of injury.
▶▶ Never run X.TUNE while the process is running.
▶▶ Secure system against unintentional activation.
NOTE!
An incorrect supply pressure or incorrectly connected operating medium pressure may cause the .
controller to be wrongly adjusted.
▶▶ Run X.TUNE in each case at the supply pressure available in subsequent operation (= pneumatic auxiliary power).
• Run the X.TUNE function preferably without operating medium pressure to exclude interference due to flow
forces.
The following functions are actuated automatically:

• Adjustment of the sensor signal to the (physical) stroke of the actuator used.
• Determination of parameters of the PWM signals to control the solenoid valves integrated in type 8792/8793.
• Adjustment of the controller parameters for the positioner. Optimization occurs according to the criteria of the
shortest possible transient time without overshoots.
Procedure:

/ Select X.TUNE
RUN Hold down While the automatic adjustment is running, messages on the
as long as countdown (5 ...) is progress of the X.TUNE
running (e.g. "TUNE #1....") are indicated on the display.
When the automatic adjustment ends, the message "X.TUNE READY"
is indicated.
Press any key Return to the main menu (MAIN).
Table 34: Automatic adjustment of X.TUNE
To stop X.TUNE, press the left or right selection key STOP .
79
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up

Setting level
INPUT
Automatic
self-parameterization
X.TUNE RUN X.TUNE

Hold down STARTED
as long as
countdown TUNE #0
(5 ...) is INIT
running
X.TUNE
READY EXIT
ADD.FUNCTION
EXIT
Figure 34: Operating structure X.TUNE
Automatically determining dead band DBND by running X.TUNE:

When X.TUNE is running, the dead band can be automatically determined depending on the friction
behavior of the actuating drive.
Before running X.TUNE, the X.CONTROL auxiliary function must be activated by incorporating it into the
main menu (MAIN).
If X.CONTROL is not activated, a fixed dead band of 1 % is used.
The changed data is saved in the memory (EEPROM) only when there is a switch to the process level,
by leaving the main menu (MAIN) using the left selection key EXIT . During the save process, the save
symbol is indicated on the display.
Possible error messages when running X.TUNE:
Display Causes of error Remedial action

TUNE Manual termination of self-parameterization
err/break by pressing the EXIT key
X.TUNE locked The X.TUNE function is blocked Input access code
X.TUNE No compressed air connected Connect compressed air
ERROR 1
X.TUNE Compressed air failed during Autotune Check compressed air supply
ERROR 2 (X.TUNE).
X.TUNE Actuator or control system deaeration side Not possible, device defective
ERROR 3 leaking
80
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
X.TUNE Control system aeration side leaking Not possible, device defective
ERROR 4
X.TUNE The rotation range of the position sensor is Correct attachment of the position sensor
ERROR 5 exceeded by 180° shaft on the actuator (see chapter "12.2"
and "12.3").
X.TUNE The end positions for POS-MIN and Check compressed air supply
ERROR 6 POS-MAX are too close together
X.TUNE Incorrect assignment POS-MIN and To determine POS-MIN and POS-MAX,
ERROR 7 POS-MAX move the actuator in the direction indi-
cated on the display.
X.TUNE Potentiometer is not coupled optimally to Set middle position as described
WARNING 1* the actuator. in chapter "12.2.4. Aligning lever
mechanism".
An optimum connection can provide a more
accurate position measurement
* Warning information gives tips on optimized operation. The device is operational even if this warning information is not
observed. Warning information is automatically hidden after several seconds.
Table 35: X.TUNE; possible error messages
After making the settings described in Chapters "23.1" and "23.2", the positioner (positioner) is ready for use.
Activation and configuration of auxiliary functions is described in the following Chapter "26. Configuring the aux-
iliary functions".
23.2.1. X.TUNE.CONFIG – Manual configuration of X.TUNE
This function is needed for special requirements only.
For standard applications the X.TUNE function (automatic adjustment of the positioner), as described
above, is run using the factory default settings.
The description of the X.TUNE.CONFIG function can be found in Chapter "26.3. Manual configuration of X.TUNE".
81
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
24. ACTIVATION OF THE PROCESS

CONTROLLER
The process controller is activated by selecting the P.CONTROL auxiliary function in the ADD.FUNCTION menu.
The activation transfers P.CONTROL into the main menu (MAIN) where it is available for further settings.
Procedure:

/ Select P.CONTROL
ENTER Press P.CONTROL is now marked by a cross .
P.CONTROL is now activated and incorporated into the main menu.
Table 36: Activating auxiliary functions
Following activation of P.CONTROL, the P.Q‘LIN and P.TUNE menus are also available in the main menu
(MAIN). They offer support for the setting of the process control.
P.Q‘LIN Linearization of the process characteristic

Description see Chapter "25.4"
P.TUNE Self-optimization of the process controller (process tune)

Description see Chapter "25.5"
ADD.FUNCTION – Add auxiliary functions

Apart from activating the process controller, ADD.FUNCTION can be used to activate auxiliary functions and
incorporate them into the main menu.
The description can be found in Chapter "26. Configuring the auxiliary functions".
82
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25. BASIC SETTING OF THE PROCESS

CONTROLLER
25.1. P.CONTROL – Setting up and parameterization of
the process controller
To start up the process controller, you must make the following settings in the P.CONTROL menu:
1. SETUP Set up the process controller (configuration)
2. PID.PARAMETER Parameterize process controller
P.CONTROL ENTER PID.PARAMETER ENTER DBND 0.1 %
KP 0.00
TN 0.5
TV 0.0
X0 0.0 %
EXIT FILTER 0
EXIT SETUP ENTER PV-INPUT
PV SCALE
SP-INPUT
SP-SCALE*
EXIT P.CO-INIT
* The SP SCALE function is indicated only if the external set-point value default (external) menu option is activated under
SP INPUT.
Figure 35: Operating structure P.CONTROL
Key:.
① Insensitivity range (dead band) of the PID process controller
② Amplification factor of the process controller
③ Reset time
④ Hold-back time
⑤ Operating point
⑥ Filtering of the process actual value input
⑦ Indication of the signal type for process actual value (4 - 20 mA, frequency input, Pt 100 input)
⑧ Specification of the physical unit and scaling of the process actual value
⑨ Type of set-point value default (intern or extern)
⑩ Scaling of the process set-point value (only for external set-point value default)
⑪ Enables a smooth switchover between AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode
83
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
Procedure:

/ Select P.CONTROL Selection in the main menu (MAIN).
ENTER Press The submenu options for basic settings can now be selected.
1. Set up process controller (configuration)

/ Select SETUP
ENTER Press The menu for setting up the process controller is displayed. Set up
is described in Chapter "25.2. SETUP – Setting up the process
controller".
EXIT Press Return to P.CONTROL.
2. Parameterize process controller

/ Select PID.PARAMETER
ENTER Press The menu for parameterizing the process controller is displayed.
Parameterization is described in Chapter "25.3. PID.PARAMETER
– Parameterizing the process controller".
Table 37: P.CONTROL; basic settings of the process controller
84
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.2. SETUP – Setting up the process controller

These functions specify the type of control.
The procedure is described in the following Chapters "25.2.1" to "25.2.5".
25.2.1. PV-INPUT – Specifying signal type for the process actual

value
One of the following signal types can be selected for the process actual value:
• Standard signal 4 ... 20 mA flow rate, pressure, level
• Frequency signal 0 ... 1000 Hz flow rate
• Circuit with Pt 100 -20 °C ... +220 °C temperature
Factory setting: 4 ... 20 mA
When the operating voltage has been switched on, the device looks for connected sensor types
(automatic sensor detection).
When a sensor type (PT 100 or 4 ... 20 mA) is detected, the signal type is automatically implemented in the
PV-INPUT operating menu.
If no sensor signal is detected, the last setting is retained.
The signal type frequency signal cannot be detected automatically, but must be set manually in the
PV-INPUT menu.
SELEC
PV-INPUT ENTER 4-20 mA Standard signal 4–20 mA
(flow rate, pressure, level)
Frequenz Frequency signal 0 ... 1000 Hz

(flow rate)
EXIT PT 100 Circuit with Pt 100

(temperature) -20 °C ... +220 °C
Figure 36: Operating structure PV-INPUT

Specifying signal type in the menu SETUP → PV-INPUT:

/ Select PV-INPUT
ENTER Press The signal types are displayed.
/ Select signal type
SELEC Press The selected signal type is now marked by a filled circle .
EXIT Press Return to SETUP.
Table 38: PV-INPUT; Specifying signal type
85
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.2.2. PV-SCALE – Scaling of the process actual value

The following settings are specified in the submenu of PV-SCALE:
PVmin 1. The physical unit of the process actual value.

2. Position of the decimal point of the process actual value.
3. Lower scaling value of the process actual value.
In PVmin the unit of the process actual value and the position of the decimal point are
specified for all scaling values (SPmin, SPmax, PVmin, PVmax).
PVmax Upper scaling value of the process actual value.
K factor K-factor for the flow sensor

The menu option is available only for the frequency signal type (PV-INPUT → Frequency).
PV SCALE ENTER PVmin INPUT

Select physical unit
Specify position of the decimal

point for all scaling values
Specify lower scaling value

OK *
PVmax INPUT
Specify upper scaling value
OK *
Only for frequency signal type (PV-INPUT → Frequency)

K factor INPUT VALUE INPUT Enter
EXIT
K-factor OK *
Press for
approx. 5 s
EXIT TEACH-IN ENTER TEACH-IN START
EXIT
Valve is being
closed START
Container
is being filled
–> filling ... STOP
Volume is
displayed OK
* If the submenu is left by pressing the left selection key ESC , the value remains unchanged.
86 Figure 37: Operating structure PV-SCALE
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.2.2.1. Effects and dependencies of the settings of PV-INPUT on

PV-SCALE
The settings in the PV-SCALE menu have different effects, depending on the signal type selected in
PV-INPUT.
Even the selection options for the units of the process actual value (in PVmin) depend on the signal
type selected in PV-INPUT.
See following "Table 39"
Settings in the Description of the effect Dependency on the signal type selected in
submenu of PV-INPUT
PV-SCALE 4 - 20 mA PT 100 Frequency
PVmin Flow rate, temperature,

Selectable unit of the process
pressure, length, volume.
actual value for the physical Temperature Flow-rate
(as well as ratio as % and
variables.
no unit)
0 ... 9999
Adjustment range: -200 ... 800 0 ... 9999
(Temperature -200 ... 800)
PVmin Specification of the reference range

for the dead band of the process
PVmax controller Yes Yes Yes
(P.CONTROL → PID.PARAMETER
→ DBND).
Specification of the reference range
for the analog feedback (option).
Yes Yes Yes
See Chapter "26.2.14. OUTPUT –
Configuring the outputs (option)".
Yes
Sensor calibration: No No
see "Figure 38"
K factor Yes
Sensor calibration: No No see
"Figure 39"
Adjustment range: – – 0 ... 9999
Table 39: Effects of the settings in PV-SCALE depending on the signal type selected in PV-INPUT
Example of a sensor calibration for signal type 4 - 20 mA:
Scaling value Process actual value Scaling:

[l/min]
10 PVmax Process actual value from the transmitter:
4 ... 20 mA corresponds to 0 ... 10 l/min
SPmax
Process set-point Process set-point value from PLC:
value 4 ... 20 mA corresponds to 0 ... 8 l/min
Input
PVmin 0
SPmin 4 signal [mA]
20
Figure 38: Example of a sensor calibration for signal type 4 - 20 mA
87
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
For internal set-point value default (SP-INPUT → intern), the process set-point value is input directly on
the process level.
Example of a sensor calibration for frequency signal type:
Pulses Flow-rate Scaling:
100 Process actual value:

K-factor 100 pulses correspond to 10 liters
(pulses/liter)
Process set-point value:
K-factor 1.25 correspond to 8 liters
0 Liters
10
Figure 39: Example of a sensor calibration for frequency signal type
Scaling of the process actual value in the menu SETUP → PV-SCALE:

/ Select PV-SCALE Selection in the main menu (MAIN).
ENTER Press The submenu options for scaling of the process actual value are
displayed.
1. Setting PVmin
/ Select PVmin
INPUT Press The input screen is opened. First specify the physical unit which has
a dark background.
Press (x times) Select physical unit.
<– Select decimal point The decimal point has a dark background.
Press (x times) Specify position of the decimal point.

<– Select scaling value The last digit of the scaling value has a dark background.
/ Increase value Set scaling value (lower process actual value).
<– Select decimal place
OK Press Return to PV-SCALE.
2. Setting PVmax
/ Select PVmax
INPUT Press The input screen is opened. The last digit of the scaling value has a
dark background.
/ Increase value Set scaling value (upper process actual value).
<– Select decimal place
OK Press Return to PV-SCALE.
88
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
3. Setting K-factor (only available for frequency signal type)

/ Select K-factor
ENTER Press The submenu for the setting of the K-factor is displayed.
either
/ Select VALUE Manual input of the K-factor.
INPUT Press The input screen is opened. The decimal point has a dark
background.
Select decimal point Specify position of the decimal point.
<– Select value The last digit of the value has a dark background.
/ <– Select decimal place Set K-factor.
Increase value
OK Press Return to K-factor.
or
/ Select TEACH-IN Calculating the K-factor by measuring a specific flow rate.
ENTER Press for approx. 5 s The valve is being closed.
START Press The container is being filled.
STOP Press The measured volume is displayed and the input screen is opened.
The decimal point has a dark background.
Select decimal point Specify position of the decimal point.
<– Select value The last digit of the value has a dark background.
/ <– Select decimal place Set the measured volume.
Increase value
OK Press Return to TEACH-IN.
EXIT Press Return to K-factor.
EXIT Press Return to PV-SCALE.

Table 40: PV-SCALE; scaling process actual value
If the submenu is left by pressing the left selection key ESC , the value remains unchanged.
89
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.2.3. SP-INPUT – Type of the set-point value default (intern or

extern)
The SP-INPUT menu specifies how the default of the process set-point value is to be implemented.
• Intern: Input of the set-point value on the process level
• Extern: Default of the set-point value via the standard signal input
SELEC
SP-INPUT ENTER intern Set-point value default, intern
Input the process set-point value on the process
level
EXIT extern Set-point value default, extern

Default of the process set-point value via the
standard signal input
Figure 40: Operating structure PV-INPUT
Specify type of set-point value default in the menu SETUP → SP-INPUT:

/ Select SP-INPUT
ENTER Press The types of set-point value default are displayed.
/ Select the type of set-point
value default
SELEC Press The selection is marked by a filled circle .
Table 41: SP-INPUT; specifying type of the set-point value default
For internal set-point value default (SP-INPUT → intern), the process set-point value is input directly on
the process level.
25.2.4. SP-SCALE – Scaling of the process set-point value

(for external set-point value default only)
The SP-SCALE menu assigns the values for the lower and upper process set-point value to the particular current
or voltage value of the standard signal.
The menu is available for external set-point value default only (SP-INPUT → extern).
For internal set-point value default (SP-INPUT → internal), there is no scaling of the process set-point
value via SPmin and SPmax.
The set-point value is input directly on the process level. The physical unit and the position of the decimal
point are specified during the scaling of the process actual value (PV-SCALE → PVmin).
For description see Chapter "25.2.2. PV-SCALE – Scaling of the process actual value", page 86
90
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
SP-SCALE ENTER SPmin INPUT Input lower process set-point

value *
OK
SPmax INPUT Input upper process set-point

EXIT
value *
OK
Figure 41: Operating structure SP-SCALE
Scaling process set-point value SETUP → SP-SCALE:

/ Select SP-SCALE
ENTER Press The submenu options for scaling of the process set-point value are
displayed.
/ Select SPmin
INPUT Press The input screen is opened.
/ Increase value Set scaling value (lower process set-point value).
<– Select decimal place The value is assigned to the smallest current or voltage value of the
standard signal.
OK Press Return to SP-SCALE.
/ Select SPmax
/ Increase value Set scaling value (upper process set-point value).
<– Select decimal place The value is assigned to the largest current or voltage value of the
standard signal.
OK Press Return to SP-SCALE.
Table 42: SP-SCALE; scaling process set-point value
91
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.2.5. P.CO-INIT – Smooth switchover MANUAL-AUTOMATIC

The smooth switchover between the MANUAL and AUTOMATIC states can be activated or deactivated in the
P.CO-INIT menu.
Factory default setting: bumpless Smooth switchover activated.
SELEC
P.CO-INIT ENTER bumpless Smooth switchover activated
standard Smooth switchover deactivated
EXIT zeroinit Initialization of process values (CMD) with zero.
Figure 42: Operating structure P.CO-INIT
Procedure:

/ Select P.CO-INIT
ENTER Press The selection (bumpless) and (standard) is displayed.
/ Select required function bumpless = smooth switchover activated
standard = smooth switchover deactivated
Table 43: P.CO-INIT; smooth switchover MANUAL-AUTOMATIC
92
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.3. PID.PARAMETER – Parameterizing the process

controller
The following control parameters of the process controller are manually set in this menu.
DBND 1.0 % Insensitivity range (dead band) of the process controller

KP 1.00 Amplification factor of the (P-contribution of the PID controller)
TN 999.0 Reset time (I-contribution of the PID controller)
TV 0.0 Hold-back time (D-contribution of the PID controller)
X0 0.0 % Operating point
FILTER 0 Filtering of the process actual value input
The automatic parameterization of the PID controller integrated in the process controller
(menu options KP, TN. TV) can be implemented with the aid of the P.TUNE function
(see Chapter "25.5. P.TUNE – Self-optimization of the process controller").
Basic information for setting the process controller can be found in Chapters "40. Properties of PID Con-
trollers" and "41. Adjustment rules for PID Controllers".
25.3.1. Procedure for inputting the parameters

The settings in the PID.PARAMETER menu are always made in the same way.
Procedure:

/ Select PID.PARAMETER
ENTER Press The menu for parameterizing the process controller is displayed.
/ Select menu option
/ Increase value Set value when
Reduce value * DBND X.X % / X0 0% / FILTER 5 :
or
Set value when
<– Select decimal place * KP X.XX / TN X.0 sec / TV 1.0 sec :
Increase value
OK Press Return to PID.PARAMETER.

* The description of the submenus of PID.PARAMETER can be found in the following chapters.
Table 44: PID.PARAMETER; parameterizing process controller
93
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.3.2. DBND – Insensitivity range (dead band)

This function causes the process controller to respond from a specific control difference only. This protects both
the solenoid valves in Type 8792/8793 and the pneumatic actuator.
Factory setting: 1.0 % with reference to the range of the scaled process actual value
(setting in the menu PV-SCALE → PVmin → PVmax).
PID.PARAMETER ENTER DBND 1.0 % INPUT OK

Input value
ESC
EXIT FILTER 0
Figure 43: Operating structure DBND; insensitivity range

Insensitivity range for process control
Xd2‘
Process
set-point value Control
(SP) difference to the controller
Xd2 Xd2 Xd2‘
Process Dead band

actual value
(PV)
Figure 44: Diagram DBND; insensitivity range for process control
25.3.3. KP – Amplification factor of the process controller

The amplification factor specifies the P-contribution of the PID controller
(can be set with the aid of the P.TUNE function).
Factory setting: 1.00
PID.PARAMETER ENTER DBND 1.0 %

OK
KP 1.00 Input value
INPUT
ESC
EXIT FILTER 0 Adjustment range: 0 ... 99.99

(% / set unit)
Figure 45: Operating structure KP; amplification factor
The KP amplification of the process controller refers to the scaled, physical unit.
94
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.3.4. TN – Reset time of the process controller

The reset time specifies the I-contribution of the PID controller
Factory setting: 999.9 s

OK
TN 999.9 INPUT Input value
ESC
EXIT FILTER 0 Adjustment range: 0.5 ... 999.9 s
Figure 46: Operating structure TN; reset time
25.3.5. TV – Hold-back time of the process controller

The hold-back time specifies the D-contribution of the PID controller
Factory setting: 0.0 s


OK
TV 0.0 INPUT Input value
ESC
EXIT FILTER 0 Adjustment range: 0 ... 999.9 s
Figure 47: Operating structure TV; hold-back time
25.3.6. X0 – Operating point of the process controller

The operating point corresponds to the size of the proportional portion when control difference = 0.
Factory setting: 0.0 %


OK
X0 0.0 % INPUT Input value
ESC
EXIT FILTER 0 Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 %
Figure 48: Operating structure X0; operating point 95
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.3.7. FILTER – Filtering of the process actual value input

The filter is valid for all process actual value types and has a low pass behavior (PT1).
Factory setting: 0
OK
EXIT FILTER 0 INPUT
Input value
ESC
Adjustment range: 0 ... 9
Figure 49: Operating structure FILTER; filtering of the process actual value input
Setting the filter effect in 10 stages
Setting Corresponds to cut-off frequency (Hz) Effect

0 10 Lowest filter effect
1 5
2 2
3 1
4 0.5
5 0.2
6 0.1
7 0.07
8 0.05
9 0.03 Largest filter effect
Table 45: Setting the filter effect
On page 252 you will find a table for entering your set parameters.
96
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.4. P.Q‘LIN – Linearization of the process characteristic

This function automatically linearizes the process characteristic.
In doing so, the nodes for the correction characteristic are automatically determined. To do this, the program moves
through the valve stroke in 20 steps and measures the associated process variable.
The correction characteristic and the associated value pairs are saved in the menu option CHARACT → FREE.
This is where they can be viewed and freely programmed. For a description see Chapter "26.2.1".
If the CARACT menu option has still not been activated and incorporated into the main menu (MAIN), this will happen
automatically when P.Q‘LIN is being run.
Run P.Q‘LIN:

/ Select P.Q‘LIN The function is in the main menu (MAIN) after activation of
P.CONTROL.
RUN old down as long as
H P.Q‘LIN is started.
countdown (5 ...) is running
The following displays are indi-
cated on the display:
Q‘LIN #0 Display of the node which is currently running (progress is indi-
CMD=0% cated by a progress bar along the upper edge of the display).
Q.LIN #1
CMD=10%
... continuing to
Q.LIN #10
CMD=100%
Q.LIN Automatic linearization was successfully completed.
ready
Table 46: P.Q‘LIN; Automatic linearization of the process characteristic
Possible error messages when running P.Q‘LIN:
Display Cause of fault Remedial action

Q.LIN Manual termination of linearization by
err/break pressing the EXIT key.
P.Q‘LIN No supply pressure connected. Connect supply pressure.
ERROR 1
No change to process variable. Check process and, if required, switch on
pump or open the shut-off valve.
Check process sensor.
P.Q‘LIN Failure of the supply pressure while Check supply pressure.
ERROR 2 P.Q’LIN running.
Automatic adjustment of the X.TUNE Run X.TUNE.
positioner not run.
Table 47: P.Q‘LIN; possible error messages 97
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.5. P.TUNE – Self-optimization of the process

controller
This function can be used to automatically parameterize the PID controller integrated in the process controller.
In doing so, the parameters for the P, I and D-contribution of the PID controller are automatically determined and
transferred to the corresponding menus of (KP, TN, TV). This is where they can be viewed and changed.
Explanation of the PID controller:

The control system of Type 8793 has an integrated PID process controller. Any process variable, such as flow rate,
temperature, pressure, etc., can be controlled by connecting an appropriate sensor.
To obtain good control behavior, the structure and parameterization of the PID controller must be adjusted to the
properties of the process (controlled section).
This task requires control experience as well as measuring instruments and is time-consuming. The P.TUNE function
can be used to automatically parameterize the PID controller integrated in the process controller.
Basic information for setting the process controller can be found in Chapters "40. Properties of PID Con-
trollers" and "41. Adjustment rules for PID Controllers".
25.5.1. The mode of operation of P.TUNE

The P.TUNE function automatically identifies the process. To do this, the process is activated with a defined
disturbance variable. Typical process characteristics are derived from the response signal and the structure and
parameters of the process controller are determined on the basis of the process characteristics.
When using P.TUNE self-optimization, optimum results are obtained under the following conditions:
• Stable or stationary conditions concerning the process actual value PV when starting P.TUNE.
• Execution of P.TUNE in the operating point or within the operating range of the process control.
25.5.2. Preparatory measure for execution of P.TUNE
The measures described below are not compulsory conditions for execution of the function P.TUNE.
However, they will increase the quality of the result.
The P.TUNE function can be run in the MANUAL or AUTOMATIC operating state.
When P.TUNE is complete, the control system is in the operating state which was set previously.
98
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
25.5.2.1. Preparatory measures for execution of P.TUNE in the MANUAL

operating state
Moving process actual value PV to the operating point:

Setting on the process level:
/ Select PV The process actual value PV is indicated on the display.
MANU Press Change to MANUAL operating state.
The input screen for manually opening and closing the valve is
displayed.
Open valve OPN or By opening or closing the control valve, move the process actual
value to the required operating point.
Close valve CLS
As soon as the process actual value PV is constant, the P.TUNE function can be started.
Table 48: P.TUNE; preparatory measure for running X.TUNE in the MANUAL operating state
25.5.2.2. Preparatory measure for execution of P.TUNE in the

AUTOMATIC operating state
By inputting a process set-point value SP, move the process actual value PV to the operating point.
Observe the internal or external set-point value default for the input.
(P,CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT → intern/extern):
For intern set-point value default: Input the process set-point value SP via the device keyboard
(see description below "Table 49" ).
For extern set-point value default: Input the process set-point value SP via the analog set-point value
input.
Inputting a process set-point value:

Setting on the process level:
/ Select SP The process set-point value is indicated on the display.
INPUT Press The input screen for inputting the process set-point value is
displayed.
/ Input value The selected set-point value SP should be near the future operating
<– point.
Select decimal place
Increase value
OK Press Acknowledge input and return to the display of SP.
Table 49: P.TUNE; preparatory measure for running X.TUNE in the AUTOMATIC operating state
The process variable PV is changed according to the set-point value default based on the factory default PID
parameters.
→→Before running the P.TUNE function, wait until the process actual value PV has reached a stable state.
99
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
To observe PV, it is recommended to select via the arrow keys / the graphical display SP/PV(t).
To be able to select the display SP/PV(t), it must be activated in the EXTRAS menu
(see Chapter "26.2.18. EXTRAS – Setting the display").
→→If PV oscillates continuously, the preset amplification factor of the process controller KP in the
menu P.CONTROL → PID.PARAMETER should be reduced.
→→As soon as the process actual value PV is constant, the P.TUNE function can be started.
25.5.3. Starting the function P.TUNE
WARNING!
Risk of injury from uncontrolled process.
While the P.TUNE function is running, the control valve automatically changes the current degree of opening
and intervenes in the running process.
▶▶ Using suitable measures, prevent the permitted process limits from being exceeded.
For example by:
- an automatic emergency shutdown
- stopping the P.TUNE function by pressing the STOP key (press left or right key).
Procedure:

MENU Press for approx. 3 s Switching from process level setting level
/ Select P.TUNE
RUN Hold down During the automatic adjustment the following messages are indi-
as long as countdown (5 ...) is cated on the display.
running "starting process tune" - Start self-optimization.
"identifying control process" - Process identification. Typical
process variables are determined from the response signal to a
defined stimulus.
"calculating PID parameters" - Structure and parameters of the
process controller are determined.
"TUNE ready" - Self-optimization was successfully completed.
Press any key Return to the main menu (MAIN).
Table 50: Automatic adjustment of X.TUNE
To stop P.TUNE, press the left or right selection key STOP .
100
english
Type 8792, 8793
Start-Up
Possible error messages when running P.TUNE:

TUNE Manual termination of self-optimization by
P.TUNE No supply pressure connected. Connect supply pressure.
ERROR 1
Table 51: P.TUNE; possible error messages
After making all the settings described in Chapter "Start-Up", the process controller is ready for use.
Activation and configuration of auxiliary functions is described in the following Chapter "26. Configuring the aux-
iliary functions".
101
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Contents
26. CONFIGURING THE AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS................................................................................................................ 105
26.1. Activating and deactivating auxiliary functions................................................................................................. 105
26.1.1. Including auxiliary functions in the main menu........................................................................ 105
26.1.2. Removing auxiliary functions from the main menu.................................................................. 106
26.1.3. Principle of including auxiliary functions in the main menu.................................................. 106
26.2. Overview and description of the auxiliary functions...................................................................................... 107
26.2.1. CHARACT – Select the transfer characteristic between input signal

(position set-point value) and stroke......................................................................................... 108
26.2.2. CUTOFF – Sealing function.................................................................................................. 112
26.2.3. DIR.CMD – Sense of effective direction of the positioner set-point value .............. 114
26.2.4. DIR.ACT – Sense of effective direction of the actuator drive....................................... 115
26.2.5. SPLTRNG – Signal split range............................................................................................ 116
26.2.6. X.LIMIT – Limits the mechanical stroke range.................................................................. 117
26.2.7. X.TIME – Limiting the control speed................................................................................... 118
26.2.8. X.CONTROL – Parameterization of the positioner........................................................ 119
26.2.9. P.CONTROL – Setting up and parameterization of the process controller............. 120
26.2.10. SECURITY – Code protection for the settings............................................................... 121
26.2.11. SAFEPOS – Input the safety position................................................................................ 123
26.2.12. SIG.ERROR – Configuration of signal level fault detection......................................... 124
26.2.13. BINARY.IN – Activation of the binary input...................................................................... 125
26.2.14. OUTPUT – Configuring the outputs (option).................................................................... 127
26.2.15. CAL.USER – Calibration of actual value and set-point value...................................... 133
26.2.16. SET.FACTORY – Resetting to the factory settings...................................................... 138
26.2.17. SER. I\O – Settings of the serial interface........................................................................ 139
26.2.18. EXTRAS – Setting the display.............................................................................................. 140
26.2.19. POS.SENSOR – Setting interface remote path sensor................................................ 142
26.2.20. SERVICE ................................................................................................................................... 142
26.2.21. SIMULATION – Menu for simulation of set-point value, process and

process valve.................................................................................................................................. 143
26.2.22. DIAGNOSE – Menu for monitoring valves (option)......................................................... 148

102
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.3. Manual configuration of X.TUNE ....................................................................................................................... 168
26.3.1. Description of the menu for the manual configuration of X.TUNE...................................... 169
103
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26. CONFIGURING THE AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

The device has auxiliary functions for demanding control tasks.
This chapter describes how the auxiliary functions are activated, set and configured.
26.1. Activating and deactivating auxiliary functions

The required auxiliary functions must be activated by the user initially by incorporation into the main menu (MAIN).
The parameters for the auxiliary functions can then be set.
To deactivate a function, remove it from the main menu. This will cause the previous settings, created under this
function, to be rendered invalid again.
26.1.1. Including auxiliary functions in the main menu

Procedure:

/ Select required auxiliary
function
ENTER Press The selected auxiliary function is now marked by a cross .
The marked function is now activated and incorporated into the
main menu.
The parameters can then be set as follows.
/ Select the auxiliary function In the main menu (MAIN) select the auxiliary function.
ENTER Press Opening the submenu to input the parameters.
Further information about the setting can be found in the following
chapter “26.2. Overview and description of the auxiliary functions”,
page 106
EXIT * Press Return to a higher level or to the main level (MAIN).
ESC *
* The designation of the key depends on the selected auxiliary function.
Table 52: Incorporating auxiliary functions
104
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.1.2. Removing auxiliary functions from the main menu
If a function is removed from the main menu, the settings implemented previously under this function
become invalid again.
Procedure:

/ Select the auxiliary function
ENTER Press Remove function mark (no cross ).
The marked function is now deactivated and removed from the main
menu.
Table 53: Removing auxiliary functions
26.1.3. Principle of including auxiliary functions in the main menu

Functions in the main menu
Setting level (Standard)
MAIN INPUT
INPUT
X.TUNE
ADD.FUNCTION X.TUNE
Selection of the auxiliary function
EXIT 7 ENTER
ADD.FUNCTION ENTER CHARACT
X.CONTROL
EXIT DIAGNOSE
Extended functions in the main menu

MAIN
X.TUNE
INPUT
ADD.FUNCTION
CARACT X.TUNE
X.CONTROL
EXIT 15 ENTER
ADD.FUNCTION
CHARACT
X.CONTROL
Figure 50: Incorporating auxiliary functions into the main menu

105
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2. Overview and description of the auxiliary functions
ADD.FUNCTION ENTER CHARACT Selection of the transfer characteristic between input signal
and stroke (correction characteristic)
CUTOFF Sealing function for positioner
DIR.CMD Sense of effective direction between input signal and set-

point position
DIR.ACT Assignment of the aeration state of the actuator chamber to

the actual position
SPLTRNG * Signal split range; input signal as a % for which the valve runs
through the entire stroke range.
X.LIMIT Limit the mechanical stroke range
X.TIME Limit the control speed
X.CONTROL Parameterization of the positioner
P.CONTROL Parameterization of the process controller
SECURITY Code protection for settings
SAFEPOS Input the safety position
SIG.ERROR Configuration of signal level fault detection
BINARY.IN Activation of the binary input
OUTPUT Configuration of outputs (option)
CAL.USER Calibration
SET.FACTORY Reset to factory settings
SER. I / O Configuration of serial interface
EXTRAS Adjusting the display
POS.SENSOR Setting interface remote path sensor

(available for Type 8793 Remote only)
SIMULATION Simulation of set-point value, process valve, process
EXIT DIAGNOSE Diagnosis menu (option)
* The SPLTRNG auxiliary function can only be selected if P.CONTROL (process control) is not activated.
Figure 51: Overview - auxiliary functions
106
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.1. CHARACT – Select the transfer characteristic between

input signal (position set-point value) and stroke
Characteristic (customer-specific characteristic)
Use this auxiliary function to select a transfer characteristic with reference to set-point value (nominal position, CMD)
and valve stroke (POS) for correction of the flow-rate or operating characteristic.
Factory setting: linear
Each auxiliary function, which is to be set, must be incorporated initially into the main menu (MAIN).
See Chapter “26.1. Activating and deactivating auxiliary functions”, page 104.
CHARACT ENTER linear SELEC Linear characteristic

GP 1:25 Equal percentage characteristic 1:25
GP 25:1 Inversely equal percentage characteristic 25:1
EXIT
FREE * User-defined characteristic, freely program-
mable via nodes
* EInput the nodes see chapter “26.2.1.1. Inputting the freely programmable characteristic”
Figure 52: Operating structure CHARACT
The flow characteristic kV = f(s) indicates the flow-rate of a valve, expressed by the kV value depending on the stroke
s of the actuator spindle. It is specified by the design of the valve seat and the seat seal. In general two types of flow
characteristics are implemented, the linear and the equal percentage.
In the case of linear characteristics identical kV value changes kV are assigned to identical stroke changes ds.
(dkV = nlin ⋅ ds).
In the case of an equal percentage characteristic an equal percentage change of the kV value corresponds to a
stroke change ds.
(dkV/kV = nequalper ⋅ ds).
The operating characteristic Q = f(s) specifies the correlation between the volumetric flow Q in the installed valve
and the stroke s. This characteristic has the properties of the pipelines, pumps and consumers. It therefore exhibits
a form which differs from the flow characteristic.
107
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Standardised valve stroke [%] (POS)
Position set-point value [%]

CMD
Figure 53: Characteristics
In the case of control tasks for closed-loop control systems it is usually particular demands which are placed on the
course of the operating characteristic, e.g. linearity. For this reason it is occasionally necessary to correct the course
of the operating characteristic in a suitable way. For this purpose the Type 8792/8793 features a transfer element
which implements different characteristics. These are used to correct the operating characteristic.
Equal percentage characteristics 1:25, 1:33, 1:50, 25:1, 33:1 and 50:1 and a linear characteristic can be set.
Furthermore, a characteristic can be freely programmed via nodes or automatically calibrated.
26.2.1.1. Inputting the freely programmable characteristic

The characteristic is defined via 21 nodes which are distributed uniformly via the position set-point values ranging
from 0 – 100 %. Their distance is 5 %. A freely selectable stroke (adjustment range 0 – 100 %) is assigned to each
node. The difference between the stroke values of two adjacent nodes must not be larger than 20 %.
FREE SELEC GRAPH INPUT GRAPH
y 0 ->: 0,0%
y 5 ->: 5,0%
Enter
EXIT y 100 ->: 100% INPUT
value
OK *
* If the submenu is left by pressing the ESC key, the value remains unchanged.
Figure 54: Operating structure CHARACT FREE
108
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Procedure:

/ Select CHARACT (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
ENTER Menu options of CHARACT are displayed.
/ Select FREE
SELEC Press The graphical display of the characteristic is displayed.
INPUT Press Submenu with the individual nodes (as %) is opened.
/ Select node
INPUT Press The SET-VALUE input screen for inputting values is opened.
Previously set value (as %)
SET VALUE
y 0 –>: 2 This value is changed with
the arrow keys
[%] 2
ESC OK Acknowledge value
Return without change
/ Input value: Input value for the selected node.

Increase value
Reduce value
OK Press Acknowledge input and return to the FREE submenu.
EXIT Press Return to the CHARACT menu.
The changed data is saved in the memory (EEPROM).
Table 54: FREE; Inputting the freely programmable characteristic
109
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Example of a programmed characteristic
Valve stroke [%]

(POS)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Standard signal [%]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (CMD)
4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 5 V
Figure 55: Example of a programmed characteristic
In the section “Tables for customer-specific settings” in chapter “42.1. Settings of the freely program-
mable characteristic” there is a table in which you can enter your settings for the freely programmable
characteristic.
110
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.2. CUTOFF – Sealing function

This function causes the valve to be sealed outside the control area.
This is where you input the limits for the position set-point value (CMD) as a percentage, from which the actuator
is fully deaerated or aerated.
Controlled operation opens or resumes at a hysteresis of 1 %.
If the process valve is in the sealing area, the message „CUTOFF ACTIVE“ is indicated on the display.
Only for type 8793: Here you can select the set-point value to which the sealing function is to apply:
Type PCO Process set-point value (SP)
Type XCO Position set-point value (CMD)
If Type PCO was selected, the limits for the process set-point value (SP) are input as a percentage with ref-
erence to the scaling range.
Factory setting: Min = 0 %; Max = 100 %; CUT type = Type PCO
Sealing threshold
CUTOFF ENTER Min 0% INPUT Enter Deaeration (0 = not active)
value Adjustment range:
0 ... 25 %
Sealing threshold
Max 100 % INPUT Enter Aeration (100 = not active)
value Adjustment range:
75 ... 100 %
OK *
Available for Type 8793 only

CUT type INPUT Type PCO SELEC Select process
EXIT set-point value
Type XCO SELEC Select position

set-point value
EXIT
Figure 56: Operating structure CUTOFF
111
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Valve stroke [%]

Adjustable from 75 ... 100 %
(POS)
Set-point value [%]

(CMD)
einstellbar von 0 ... 25 %
Figure 57: Graph - CUTOFF;
112
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.3. DIR.CMD – Sense of effective direction of the positioner

set-point value
Use this auxiliary function to set the sense of effective direction between the input signal (INPUT) and the nominal
position (CMD) of the actuator.
Each auxiliary function, which is to be set, must be incorporated initially into the main menu (MAIN).
See Chapter “26.1. Activating and deactivating auxiliary functions”.
Factory setting: Rise
DIR.CMD ENTER Rise SELEC Direct effective direction

(e.g. 4 mA or 0 V → 0 %,
20 mA or 5/10 V → 100 %)
Fall Inverse effective direction

EXIT
(e.g. 4 mA or 0 V → 100 %,
20 mA or 5/10 V → 0 %)
Figure 58: Operating structure DIR.CMD
Nominal position
(CMD)
Input signal
(INPUT)
Figure 59: Graph - DIR.CMD
113
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.4. DIR.ACT – Sense of effective direction of the actuator drive

Use this auxiliary function to set the sense of effective direction between the aeration state of the actuator and the
actual position (POS).
Factory setting: Rise
DIR.ACT ENTER Rise SELEC Direct effective direction

(deaerated → 0 %; aerated 100 %)
Fall Inverse effective direction

EXIT
(deaerated → 100 %; aerated 0%)
Figure 60: Operating structure DIR.ACT
If the Fall function is selected, the description of the arrow keys (on the display) changes in the MANUAL
operating state
OPN → CLS and CLS → OPN
Actual position
(POS)
Aeration state
deaerated aerated
Figure 61: Graph - DIR.ACT
114
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.5. SPLTRNG – Signal split range

Min. and max. values of the input signal as % for which the valve runs through the entire stroke range.
Factory setting: Min = 0 %; Max = 100 %
Type 8793: The SPLTRNG auxiliary function can only be selected when operating as a positioner.
P.CONTROL = not activated.
Use this auxiliary function to limit the position set-point value range of the Type 8792/8793 by specifying a minimum
and a maximum value.
As a result, it is possible to divide a utilised standard signal range (4 – 20 mA; 0 – 20 mA; 0 – 10 V or 0 – 5 V) into
several devices (without or with overlapping).
This allows several valves to be used alternately or in the case of overlapping set-point value ranges simultane-
ously as actuating element.
SPLTRNG ENTER Min 0% INPUT Input the minimum value of the

Enter
input signal as %.
value
Adjustment range: 0 – 75 %
EXIT Max 100 % INPUT Input the maximum value of the

Enter
input signal as %.
value
Adjustment range: 25 – 100 %
OK *
Figure 62: Operating structure SPLTRNG
Splitting a standard signal range into two set-point value ranges
Valve stroke [%] (POS)
100
Set-point value [mA]

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
(INP)
Set-point value range Set-point value range

Positioner 1 Positioner 2
Figure 63: Graph - SPLTRNG

115
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.6. X.LIMIT – Limits the mechanical stroke range

This auxiliary function limits the (physical) stroke to specified % values (minimum and maximum). In doing so, the
stroke range of the limited stroke is set equal to 100 %.
If the limited stroke range is left during operation, negative POS values or POS values greater than 100 % are indicated.
Factory setting: Min = 0 %, Max = 100 %
X.LIMIT ENTER Min 0% INPUT Input the initial value of the stroke
Enter
range as %.
value
Adjustment range:
0 – 50 % of the total stroke
EXIT Max 100 % INPUT Input the final value of the stroke
Enter
range as %.
value
Adjustment range:
50 – 100 % of the total stroke
OK *
The minimum gap between Min and Max is 50 %
Figure 64: Operating structure X.LIMIT
Limited stroke (%) Physical stroke (%)

(POS) (POS)
Adjustment range in MANUAL mode
Unlimited stroke
Control range in
operating state
AUTOMATIC
Limited stroke
Set-point value [mA]

(INPUT)
Figure 65: Graph - X.LIMIT
116
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.7. X.TIME – Limiting the control speed

Use this auxiliary function to specify the opening and closing times for the entire stroke and limit the control speeds.
When the X.TUNE function is running, the minimum opening and closing time for the entire stroke is auto-
matically entered for Open and Close. Therefore, movement can be at maximum speed.
Factory setting: values determined at the factory by the X.TUNE

If the control speed is limited, values can be input for Open and Close which are between the minimum values
determined by the X.TUNE and 60 s.
X.TIME ENTER Open 1 INPUT Opening time for entire stroke

Enter
(in seconds)
value
Adjustment range: 1 – 60 seconds
EXIT Close 1 INPUT Closing time for entire stroke

Enter
(in seconds)
value
Adjustment range: 1 – 60 seconds
OK *
Figure 66: Operating structure X.TIME
Effect of limiting the opening speed when there is a jump in the set-point value
Valve stroke [%]

(POS, CMD)
Set-point
value
Actual value
t
Open
Figure 67: Graph - X.TIME
117
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.8. X.CONTROL – Parameterization of the positioner

This function can be used to re-adjust the parameters of the positioner.
The re-adjustment should only be made if it is required for the application.
The parameters for X.CONTROL are automatically set with the exception of DBND (dead band) when specifying
the basic settings by running X.TUNE.
If the setting for DBND (dead band depending on the friction behavior of the actuating drive) is also to be
automatically determined when X.TUNE is running, X.CONTROL must be activated by incorporating it into
the main menu (MAIN).
When X.TUNE is running, all previously re-adjusted values are overwritten (except the X.TUNE function
was manually parameterized).
DBND Insensitivity range (dead band)

KXopn Amplification factor of the proportional portion (for aerating the valve)
KXcls Amplification factor of the proportional portion (for bleeding the valve)
KDopn Amplification factor of the differential portion (for aerating the valve)
KDcls Amplification factor of the differential portion (for bleeding the valve)
YBfric Friction correction (for aerating the valve)
YEfric Friction correction (for bleeding the valve)
X.CONTROL ENTER DBND 1% INPUT Enter OK *

value
KXopn 1
KXcls 1
KDopn 0
KDcls 0
YBfric 0
EXIT YEfric 0
Figure 68: Operating structure X.CONTROL
DBND Insensitivity range (dead zone) of the positioner

Input the dead zone as %, relating to the scaled stroke range;
i.e. X.LIMIT Max - X.LIMIT Min (see Auxiliary function “26.2.6. X.LIMIT – Limits the
mechanical stroke range” ).
This function causes the controller to respond only from a specific control difference; as a result the solenoid
valves in the Type 8792/8793 and the pneumatic actuator are protected.
118
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Xd1‘
Position set- Control to the

point value difference controller
Xd1 Xd1 Xd1‘
Dead zone
Position
actual value
Figure 69: Graph - X.CONTROL
26.2.9. P.CONTROL – Setting up and parameterization of the

process controller
Parameterization of the process controller is described in Chapter “25.1. P.CONTROL – Setting up and param-
eterization of the process controller”
119
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.10. SECURITY – Code protection for the settings

Use the SECURITY function to prevent the Type 8792/8793 or individual functions from being accessed
unintentionally.
Factory setting: Access Code: 0000
If the code protection is activated, the code (set access code or master code) must be input whenever operator
action is disabled.
SECURITY ENTER SET VALUE Specifying access code
Access Code: 1 CODE INPUT SET VALUE *

x x x0 CODE: 0
ESC OK
000 0
ESC OK
Activating code protection for operator actions

MAIN SELEC Change to the setting
level
MANU/AUTO SELEC Change operating

state (AUTOMATIC,
MANUAL)
ADDFUNCT SELEC Input auxiliary

functions
X.TUNE SELEC Actuate automatic

adjustment of the
positioner (Autotune)
For Type 8793 only (operation as process

controller):
P.Q‘LIN SELEC Actuate linearization
of the process
characteristic
EXIT * P.TUNE SELEC Actuate self-optimi-

zation of the process
controller (Autotune)
Figure 70: Operating structure SECURITY
120
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Setting the code protection:

/ Select SECURITY (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
ENTER Press The input screen for the access code (Access Code) is displayed.
/ Select decimal place Enter code.
For the first setting: Access Code 0000 (factory settings)
Increase number For activated code protection: Access Code from the user *
OK Press The submenu of SECURITY is opened.
/ Select CODE
INPUT Press The input screen for specifying the access code (Access Code) is
displayed.
/ Select decimal place Enter required access code.
Increase number
OK Press Acknowledgment and return to the SECURITY menu.
/ select Selector operator actions to which the code protection is to apply.
SELEC Press Activate code protection by checking the box .
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the main menu
(MAIN).
Table 55: SECURITY; setting code protection
* If you have forgotten the set code:

All operator actions can be implemented with the non-changeable master code. This 4-digit master code
can be found in the printed brief instructions for Type 8792/8793.
121
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.11. SAFEPOS – Input the safety position

This function specifies the actuator safety position which is started at defined signals.
The set safety position is only started

• if there is a corresponding signal on the binary input
(Configuration see chapter “26.2.13. BINARY.IN – Activation of the binary input”) or
• if a signal fault occurs

(Configuration see chapter “26.2.12. SIG.ERROR – Configuration of signal level fault detection”).
In the case of the bus version (PROFIBUS / DeviceNet) the safety position is also started with
• corresponding parameter telegram
• BUS ERROR (adjustable)
If the mechanical stroke range is limited with the X.LIMIT function, only safety positions within these limits
can be started.
This function is executed in AUTOMATIC mode only.
Factory setting: 0 %
SAFEPOS ENTER Safepos 0% INPUT Input the safety position.

Enter
Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 %**
value
OK *
** If the safety position is 0 % or 100 %, the actuator is completely deaerated or aerated as soon as the safety position is
active in the SIG-ERROR or BINARY-IN auxiliary functions
Figure 71: Operating structure SAFEPOS
122
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.12. SIG.ERROR – Configuration of signal level fault detection

The SIG-ERROR function is used to detect a fault on the input signal.
If signal fault detection is activated, the respective fault is indicated on the display.
(See Chapter “35.1. Error messages on the display”.
A fault detection on the input signal is only possible for signal types 4 -20 mA and Pt 100.
The particular menu branch is hidden for other signal types.
• 4 - 20 mA: Fault if input signal (≤ 3.5 mA (± 0.5 % of final value, hysteresis 0.5 % of final value )
• Pt 100 (can be set for process controller Type 8793 only):

Fault if input signal 225 °C (± 0.5 % of final value, hysteresis 0.5 % of final value)
The signal type is set in the following menus:
1. INPUT (for Types 8792 and 8793):

See Chapter “23.1. INPUT - Setting the input signal”.
2. P.CONTROL (for Type 8793 and when process controller activated):

See Chapter “25.2.1. PV-INPUT – Specifying signal type for the process actual value”.
NOTE: The fault detection is only possible if the external set-point value default was selected in SP-
INPUT. See Chapter “25.2.3. SP-INPUT – Type of the set-point value default (intern or extern)”.
Signal fault detection for SELEC Signal fault detection

input signal:
Error off Deactivate
SIG.ERROR ENTER SP/CMD Input ENTER
Error on Activate
SP = Process set-point
value
CMD = Set-point position Deactivate/activate approach of
safety position* SELEC
EXIT SAFEPOS ENTER
SafePos off
**
EXIT SafePos on
For Type 8793 only (process control):

Signal fault detection
for input signal:
SELEC Signal fault detection
ENTER
Error off Deactivate
EXIT PV Input
PV = Process actual Error on Activate
value
Deactivate/activate approach of
safety position* SELEC
EXIT SAFEPOS ENTER
SafePos off
**
EXIT SafePos on
* Approaching the safety position can be set only when signal fault detection (Error on) has been activated.
When signal fault detection (Error off) has been deactivated, the message "not available" is indicated.
** For behavior of the actuator during a signal fault detection see the following description.
Figure 72: Operating structure SIG-ERROR 123
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.12.1. Behavior of the actuator when safety position deactivated or

activated
Selection SafePos off – The actuator remains in the position which corresponds to the set-point value last
transferred (default setting).
Selection SafePos on – Approaching the safety position activated:

In the event of a signal fault detection, the behavior of the actuator depends on the activation of the SAFEPOS
auxiliary function. See Chapter “26.2.11. SAFEPOS – Input the safety position”.
• SAFEPOS activated: In the event of a signal fault detection the actuator moves to the position which
is specified in the SAFEPOS auxiliary function.
• SAFEPOS not activated: The actuator moves to the safety end position which it would assume if the
electrical and pneumatic auxiliary power failed.
See Chapter “11.8. Safety end positions after failure of the electrical or pneu-
matic auxiliary power”.
The activation for approaching the safety position (selection SafePos on) is possible only when signal fault
detection has been activated (ERROR on).
26.2.13. BINARY.IN – Activation of the binary input

The binary input is configured in this menu. The following functions can be assigned to it:
SafePos Approaching SafePos
Manu/Auto Switching over the operating state (MANUAL / AUTOMATIC)
X.TUNE Starting the function X.TUNE
Only for type 8793 and when process controller activated:

X.CO/P.CO Switching between position and process controller
SELEC
BINARY.IN ENTER SafePos Approaching SafePos
Manu/Auto Switch over operating state
X.Tune Start X.TUNE
X.CO / P.CO Switching between position and process controller
Selection.
Type of binary input SELEC
EXIT BIN.IN type ENTER normally open (0 ... 5 V = 0,

10 ... 30 V = 1)
normally closed 0 ... 5 V = 1,

EXIT
10 ... 30 V = 0)
124 Figure 73: Operating structure BINARY.IN
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
SafePos – Approaching a safety position:

The behavior of the actuator depends on the activation of the SAFEPOS auxiliary function.
See Chapter “26.2.11. SAFEPOS – Input the safety position”.
SAFEPOS activated: The actuator moves to the safety position which is specified in the SAFEPOS auxiliary
function.
SAFEPOS deactivated: The actuator moves to the safety end position which it would assume if the electrical
and pneumatic auxiliary power failed.
See Chapter “11.8. Safety end positions after failure of the electrical or pneumatic
auxiliary power”.
Binary input = 1 → Actuator moves to the set safety position.
Manu/Auto – Switching between the MANUAL and AUTOMATIC operating states:

Binary input = 0 → Operating state AUTOMATIC AUTO
Binary input = 1 → Operating state MANUAL MANU
If the Manu/Auto function was selected in the BINARY.IN menu, it is no longer possible to change the
operating state on the process level using the keys MANU and AUTO .
X.TUNE – Starting the function X.TUNE:

Binary input = 1 → Starting X.TUNE
X.CO/P.CO – Switching between position and process controller:

This menu option stands only for Type 8793 and is available when process controller (P.CONTROL) has been
activated.
Binary input = 0 → Positioner (X.CO)
Binäreingang = 1 → Process controller (P.CO)
125
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.14. OUTPUT – Configuring the outputs (option)
The OUTPUT menu option is only indicated in the selection menu of ADD.FUNCTION if the Type
8792/8793 has outputs (option).
The Type 8792/8793 which has the outputs option is available in the following versions:
• one analogue output
• one analogue and two binary outputs
• two binary outputs
According to the version of the Type 8792/8793 only the possible adjustable outputs (ANALOGUE,
ANALOGUE + BIN 1 + BIN 2 or BIN 1 + BIN 2) are indicated in the OUTPUT menu option.
OUTPUT ENTER OUT ANALOG ENTER Configuration of the analogue output
OUT BIN1 ENTER Configuration of the binary output 1
EXIT OUT BIN2 ENTER Configuration of the binary output 2
Figure 74: Operating structure OUTPUT;
26.2.14.1. OUT ANALOG - Configuring the analogue output

Type 8792: The feedback of the current position (POS) or of the set-point value (CMD) can be transmitted to the
control center via the analog output.
Type 8793: The feedback of the current position (POS) or of the set-point value (CMD), of the process actual value
(PV) or of the process set-point value (SP) can be transmitted to the control center via the analog output.
SELEC
OUT ANALOG ENTER
POS Output of actual position
CMD Output of set-point position

PV Output of the process actual value
SP Output of the process set-point value
SELEC
EXIT OUT type ENTER 4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA Selection of the
0 - 10 V standard signal
EXIT 0-5V
126
Figure 75: Operating structure OUTPUT-ANALOG;
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.14.2. OUT BIN1 / OUT BIN2 - Configuring the binary outputs

The following description is valid for both binary outputs OUT BIN 1 and OUT BIN 2, as the operation in the menu
is identical.
The binary outputs 1 and 2 can be used for one of the following outputs:
POS.Dev Exceeding the permitted control deviation
POS.Lim-1/2 Current position with respect to a specified limit position (> or <)
Safepos Actuator in safety position
ERR.SP/CMD Sensor break (SP = process set-point value / CMD = set-point value position)
ERR.PV Sensor break (process actual value). Available for Type 8793 only.
Remote Operating state (AUTOMATIC / MANUAL)
Tune.Status Status X.TUNE (process optimization)
DIAG.State-1/2 Diagnosis output (option)
Overview of possible outputs and associated switching signals:
Menu option Switching signal Description

0 Control deviation is within the set limit.
POS.Dev
1 Control deviation is outside the set limit.
0 Actual position is above the limit position.
POS.Lim-1/2
1 Actual position is below the limit position.
0 Actuator is not in the safety position.
Safepos
1 Actuator is in the safety position.
ERR.SP/CMD 0 No sensor break available.
ERR.PV 1 Sensor break available.
0 Appliance is the AUTOMATIC operating state.
Remote
1 Appliance is the MANUAL operating state.
0 The X.TUNE function is currently not running.
1 The X.TUNE function is currently running.
Tune.Status
0/1 alternating The X.TUNE function was stopped during execution by a fault.
(10 s)
0 No diagnosis message available for the selected status signals.
DIAG.State-1/2
1 Diagnosis message available for the selected status signals.
Table 56: OUT BIN 1/2; Possible outputs and associated switching signals
Switching statuses
Switching signal
normally open normally closed
0 0V 24 V
1 24 V 0V
Table 57: OUT BIN 1/2; switching statuses 127
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Alarm output for exceeding the permitted control

deviation
OUT BIN1
ENTER POS.Dev SELEC Input value Tolerance for the
OUT BIN2
permitted control
Deviation: deviation
OK * Adjustment range:
1 ... 50 %**
Output: current position with respect to a specified limit
position
POS.Lim-1/2 SELEC Input the limit
Input value
position
Limit:
Adjustment range:
OK * 0 ... 100 %
SELEC
Safepos Output: Actuator in safety position
ERR.SP/CMD Output: Sensor break

for process set-point value/set-point position ***
Only available if activated in the SIG.ERR menu
(SIG.ERR → SP/CMD Input → Error on)
Only for type 8793:

ERR.PV Output: Sensor break for process actual value
Only available if activated in the SIG.ERR menu
(SIG.ERR → PV Input → Error on)
Remote Output: Operating state MANUAL / AUTOMATIC
Tune.Status Output: X.TUNE status
Output: Diagnosis message (option)

DIAG.State-1/2 SELEC FAILURE Error
OUT SPEC. Outside the

specification
FUNC.CHECK Function check
EXIT MAINTENANCE Maintenance required
Setting switching status (NC / NO)

EXIT OUT.type ENTER normally open Selection of the
switching state
EXIT normally closed
** The permitted control deviation Lim DEV.X XX must not be less than the dead band.
*** The function refers to the respective set-point value. Positioner = CMD; process controller = SP
128 Figure 76: Operating structure OUTPUT-BIN1/BIN2
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.14.3. Setting of the submenu options of OUT BIN 1 / OUT BIN 2

/ Select OUTPUT (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
ENTER The outputs are displayed.
/ Select OUT BIN1/2
ENTER Press Submenu options of OUT BIN 1/2 are displayed.
Table 58: OUT BIN1 / OUT BIN2; opening the submenu
• POS.Dev - Alarm output for excessively large control deviation of the positioner
• POS.Lim-1/2 - Output of the current position with respect to a specified limit position
POS.Dev - Alarm output for excessively large control deviation of the positioner:
/ Select POS.Dev
SELEC Press The input screen for the limit value (Deviation:) is opened.
/ Increase value Input limit value for permitted control deviation.
Reduce value Adjustment range: 1 ... 50 % (must not be less than the dead band).
OK Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the OUT BIN 1/2 menu.
Then set the required switching status in the OUT.type submenu.
POS.Lim-1/2 - Output of the current position with respect to a specified limit position:
/ Select POS.Lim-1/2
SELEC Press The input screen for the limit position (Limit:) is opened.
/ Increase value Input limit position.
Reduce value Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 %.
OK Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the OUT BIN 1/2 menu.
Table 59: OUT BIN1 / OUT BIN2; setting value for POS.Dev or POS.Lim-1/2
129
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
• Safepos - Outputting the message: Actuator in safety position
• ERR.SP/CMD - Outputting the message: Sensor break for process set-point value/set-point position.
Only available if the function in the SIG.ERR menu has been activated (SIG.ERR → SP/CMD input → Error on).
See Chapter “26.2.12. SIG.ERROR – Configuration of signal level fault detection”.
• ERR.PV - Outputting the message: Sensor break for process actual value (only for Type 8793).
Only available if the function in the SIG.ERR menu has been activated (SIG.ERR → PV Input → Error on).
See Chapter “26.2.12. SIG.ERROR – Configuration of signal level fault detection”.
• Remote - Output AUTOMATIC / MANUAL operating state
• Tune.Status - Output TUNE (process optimization)

/ Select submenu option (Safepos, ERR.SP/CMD, ERR.PV, Remote or Tune.Status).
SELEC Press Acknowledge submenu option as output function for the binary
output. The selection is marked by a filled circle .
Table 60: OUT BIN1 / OUT BIN2; specifying Safepos, ERR.SP/CMD, ERR.PV, Remote or Tune.Status as output.
• DIAG.State-1/2 - Diagnosis output (option).

Outputting the message: Diagnosis message from selected status signal.
For description see Chapter “26.2.22. DIAGNOSE – Menu for monitoring valves (option)”.

/ Select DIAG.State-1/2
SELEC Press The status signals, which can be activated for outputting the
message, are displayed.
/ Select status signal Select the status signal which is to be assigned to the diagnosis
output.
SELEC Press Activate the selection by checking the box or deactivate it by
unchecking the box .
If required, activate further status signals for the diagnosis output by
pressing the / and SELEC keys.
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the OUT BIN 1/2 menu.
Table 61: OUT.type; inputting switching status for binary output and return to the process level.
130
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
• OUT.type - Setting the switching status .

In addition to selecting the output, the switching status required for the binary output must be input.
See “Table 63”.

/ Select OUT.type
SELEC Press The switching statuses normally open and normally closed are
displayed.
/ Select switching status
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the OUT BIN 1/2 menu.
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the OUTPUT menu.
Table 62: OUT.type; inputting switching status for binary output and return to the process level.
Switching statuses
Switching signal
normally open normally closed
0 0V 24 V
1 24 V 0V
Table 63: OUT BIN 1/2; switching statuses
131
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.15. CAL.USER – Calibration of actual value and set-point value

The following values can be manually calibrated with this function:
• Position actual value calibr. POS (0 - 100 %)
• Position set-point value calibr. INP (4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 5 V, 0 - 10 V)

For the calibration process the signal type is displayed which was specified for the input signal.
Type 8793:
The following values can be calibrated only for Type 8793 and activated process controller (P.CONTROL).
• Process set-point value calibr. SP (4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 5 V, 0 - 10 V)

For the calibration process the signal type is displayed which was specified for the input signal.
The calibration of the process set-point value is only possible if the external set-point value default was
selected when setting up the process controller.
See Chapter “25.2.3. SP-INPUT – Type of the set-point value default (intern or extern)”.
Setting: P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT → external
• Process actual value calibr. PV (4 - 20 mA or *C)

For the calibration process the signal type is displayed which was specified for the process actual value when
setting up the process controller.
See Chapter “25.2.1. PV-INPUT – Specifying signal type for the process actual value”
The frequency signal type (flow rate) cannot be calibrated.
If the frequency was set when setting up the process controller (P.CONTROL → SETUP → PV-INPUT
→ Frequency), the calibr. PV menu option is hidden.
132
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
CAL.USER ENTER calibr. POS ENTER POS. pMIN INPUT

Input value
(POS.lower:)
OK *
EXIT POS. pMAX INPUT

Input value
(POS.upper:)
OK *
Only for positioner Type 8792.
(or for Type 8793 if P.CONTROL not activated).
calibr. INP ENTER INP 4mA 0** INPUT
Create and confirm
minimum value
OK *
EXIT INP 20mA 0** INPUT Create and confirm

maximum value
OK *
Only for process controller Type 8793 (if P.CONTROL activated):

calibr. SP ENTER SP 4mA 0** INPUT Create and confirm
minimum value
OK *
EXIT SP 20mA 0** INPUT Create and confirm

The calibr. menu option SP is available maximum value
for external set-point value default only
OK *
calibr. PV*** ENTER PV 4mA 0 INPUT Create and confirm

minimum value
OK *
EXIT PV 20mA 0 INPUT Create and confirm

maximum value
OK *
EXIT copy FACT–>USER RUN Reset the settings of CAL.USER to factory

Press for settings
approx.
3s
** The signal type is displayed which was specified for the input signal.
*** If the Pt 100 signal type was specified for the process actual value, the input screen is displayed for the temperature value.
Figure 77: Operating structure CAL.USER

133
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.15.1. Calibration of the position actual value and the position set-
point value

/ Select CAL.USER (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
ENTER The submenu options are displayed.
calibr. POS - Calibration of the position actual value (0 - 100 %):

/ Select calibr.POS
ENTER Press The menu options for the minimum and the maximum position actual
values are displayed.
/ Select POS. pMin
INPUT Press The input screen for the lower value (POS.lower) is opened.
/ OPN Open more Approach minimum position of the valve.
CLS Close more
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.POS menu.
/ Select POS. pMax
INPUT Press The input screen for the upper value (POS.upper) is opened.
/ OPN Open more Approach maximum position of the valve.
CLS Close more
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.POS menu.
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the CAL.USER menu.
calibr. INP calibration of the position set-point value (4 ... 20 mA; 0 ... 20 mA; 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 10 V):
/ Select calibr.INP
ENTER Press The menu options for the minimum and maximum value of the input
signal are displayed.
/ Select INP 0mA (4mA/0V) The minimum value for the input signal is displayed.
- - Apply the minimum value to the input.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.INP menu.
/ Select INP 20mA (5V/10V) The maximum value for the input signal is displayed.
- - Apply the maximum value to the input.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.INP menu.
Table 64: CAL.USER; calibration of position actual value and position set-point value
134
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.15.2. Calibration of the process set-point value and process actual

value

menu).
calibr. SP - calibration of the process set-point value:

/ Select calibr.SP
ENTER Press The menu options for the minimum and the maximum process set-
point values are displayed.
/ Select SP 0mA (4mA/0V) The minimum value for the input signal is displayed.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.SP menu.
/ Select SP 20mA (5V/10V) The maximum value for the input signal is displayed.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.SP menu.
calibr. PV - calibration of the process actual value for input signal 4 - 20 mA:
/ Select calibr.PV
ENTER Press The menu options for the minimum and the maximum process actual
values are displayed.
/ Select PV 4mA The minimum value for the input signal is displayed.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.PV menu.
/ Select PV 20mA The maximum value for the input signal is displayed.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the calibr.PV menu.
calibr. PV - calibration of the process actual value for input signal Pt 100:
/ Select calibr.PV
ENTER Press The input screen for calibration of the temperature is opened.
/ Select decimal place Input the current temperature.
Increase number
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the CAL.USER menu.
Table 65: CAL.USER; calibration of position actual value and position set-point value 135
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.15.3. Resetting the settings under CAL.USER to the factory settings

menu).
/ Select copy FACT->USER
RUN Hold down The settings of CAL.USER are reset to the factory settings.
as long as countdown (5 ...) is
running
Table 66: copy FACT->USER; resetting the settings under CAL.USER to the factory settings
The factory calibration is re-activated by deactivating CAL.USER, by removing the auxiliary function from
the main menu (MAIN).
136
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.16. SET.FACTORY – Resetting to the factory settings

This function allows all settings implemented by the user to be reset to the delivery status.
All EEPROM parameters with the exception of the calibration values are reset to default values. Then a hardware
reset is implemented.
Hold down as long as countdown

(5 ...) is running
factory
SET.FACTORY RUN
reset
Figure 78: Operating structure SET.FACTORY
Resetting to the factory settings:

/ Select SET.FACTORY (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
RUN Press for approx. 3 s "factory reset" is shown.
(until progress bar is closed) Reset is implemented.
Table 67: SET.FACTORY; Resetting to the factory settings
To adjust the Type 8792/8793 to the operating parameters, re-implement self-parameterization of the
positioner (X.TUNE).
137
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.17. SER. I\O – Settings of the serial interface

This function can be used to set the type of the serial interface and the baud rate.
SELEC
SER. I/O ENTER I/O.MODE ENTER HART
Burst
EXIT Auto Automatic

switchover to
HART/Burst
SELEC
BAUDRATE ENTER 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
EXIT 38400
SELEC
EXIT SERIAL.CONFIG ENTER NONE par.,1Stop

EVEN par.,1Stop
ODD par.,1Stop
NONE par.,2Stop
EVEN par.,2Stop
EXIT ODD par.,2Stop
Figure 79: Operating structure SER. I\O
138
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.18. EXTRAS – Setting the display

This function can be used to individually set the display.
• In DISP.ITEMS the display of the process level can be individually set.
To do this, further menu options can be activated for the display of the process level. POS and CMD are acti-
vated in the as-delivered state.
• In START-UP.ITEM one of the activated menu options is specified as a start display after a restart.
• The type of display is selected via DISP.MODE.

normal = black font on light background.
inverse = white font on dark background.
SELEC
EXTRAS ENTER DISP.ITEMS ENTER POS Activate menu options
to be indicated on the
CMD display
CLOCK
EXIT X.TUNE
SELEC
START-UP.ITEM ENTER POS Select start display
CMD
EXIT X.TUNE
SELEC
DISP.MODE ENTER normal Black font on light
background
EXIT invers White font on dark

background
SELEC
EXIT DISP.LIGHT ENTER on • Background lighting
on
off • Background lighting

off
EXIT user active Background lighting

switches off after 10 sec
Figure 80: Operating structure EXTRAS
139
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
DISP.ITEMS - Activating menu displays for displaying the process level:

/ Select EXTRAS
ENTER Press Activate the EXTRAS auxiliary function by checking the box and
transfer into the main menu.
/ Select EXTRAS
/ Select DISP. ITEMS
ENTER Press The possible menu options are displayed.
POS, CMD, CMDIPOS, CMD/POS(t), CLOCK, INPUT, TEMP,
X.TUNE.
Additionally for process controller Type 8793:
PV, SP, SPlPV, SP/PV(t), P.TUNE, P.LIN.
/ Select required menu options
Table 68: DISP.ITEMS; activating menu options to be displayed on the process level
The activated menu options are now displayed on the process level display.
Use the arrow keys to switch between the displays.
Each menu option which can be selected can also be deactivated so that it is not indicated on the
process level display.
However, there must be at least one menu option available which can be indicated on the display.
If nothing was selected, the POS menu option is automatically activated.
START-UP.ITEM - Specifying menu option for the start display:
EXTRAS → START-UP.ITEM / Select menu option and specify with SELEC .

The menu option for the start display is marked by the filled circle .
The detailed procedure can be found in the extensive menu description for DISP.ITEMS (see “Table 68”). The
START-UP.ITEM and DISP.ITEMS menus are set in the same way.
140
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
DISP.MODE - Select type of display .

(black font on light background or white font on dark background):

/ Select EXTRAS
ENTER Press Activate the EXTRAS auxiliary function by checking the box and
transfer into the main menu.
/ Select EXTRAS
/ Select DISP.MODE
ENTER Press The possible menu options for the type of display are shown.
normal = black font on light background
inverse = white font on dark background
/ Select the type of display
Table 69: DISP.MODE; Select type of display
DISP.LIGHT - Define background lighting for display:
EXTRAS → DISP.LIGHT / Select background lighting and define with SELEC .

The menu option for the background lighting is marked by the filled circle .
• on = Background lighting on.
off = Background lighting off.
user active = Background lighting switches off after 10 seconds with no user interaction. If a key is pressed
again, the background lighting goes on again.
The detailed procedure can be found in the extensive menu description for DISP.MODE (see “Table 69”). The
DISP.LIGHT and DISP.MODE menus are set in the same way.
141
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.19. POS.SENSOR – Setting interface remote path sensor

The interface for the connection of an external path sensor can be selected in this menu.
The POS.SENSOR menu option is available for Type 8793 Remote only.
The following connection options are possible:
Interface sensor Setting in the menu (ADD.FUNCTION)

digital (serial) Remote sensor Type 8798. POS.SENSOR → DIGITAL
analog (4 - 20 mA) * Any, high-resolution path sensor. POS.SENSOR → ANALOG
Table 70: Connection options type 8793 with external position sensor
* If the path sensor is connected to the process controller type 8793 via the analog interface, it can be
The P.CONTROL auxiliary function is automatically removed.
ENTER
ENTER
POS.SENSOR DIGITAL ① The position signal of the path sensor is
transmitted digitally
EXIT ANALOG ② The position signal of the path sensor is

transmitted in analog mode
Figure 81: Operating structure POS.SENSOR
① Digital interface (menu option POS.SENSOR → DIGITAL):

Type 8792/8793 is connected to the path sensor Type 8798 via a digital interface
(see Chapter “Terminal assignment for external position sensor (for remote model only)”, page 58).
② Analog interface (menu option POS.SENSOR → ANALOG):

Type 8793 is connected via a 4 ... 20 mA interface to any path sensor with 4 ... 20 mA output signal. To do
this, the path sensor is connected to the process actual value input (see Chapter “Terminal assignments of the
process actual value input”, page 59).
If the path sensor requires an additional power supply of 24 V DC, it can be supplied via the positioner.
26.2.20. SERVICE
This function is of no importance to the operator of Type 8792/8793. It is for internal use only.
142
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.21. SIMULATION – Menu for simulation of set-point value,

process and process valve
This function can be used to simulate set-point value, process and process valve independently of each other.
Caution! Restarting the device deactivates the simulation.

The settings of SIGNAL.form, x.SIM and p.SIM are reset to the factory setting.
Simulation of set-point value SELEC

SIMULATION ENTER SIGNAL.sim ENTER SIGNAL.form ENTER Externally Simulation
of set-
point value
inactive
Select waveform
Sine Sine
Square Square
EXIT Triangle Triangle
Offset INPUT Input

value *
OK
Amplitude INPUT Input

value *
OK
EXIT Period INPUT Input

value *
OK
EXIT Simulation of process and process valve SELEC

CONTROL.sim ENTER x.SIM Process valve is simulated
p.SIM Process is simulated
Input amplification factor

SIM.Gain INPUT Input
value *
OK
Input time constant

SIM.Delay INPUT Input
EXIT
value *
OK
Figure 82: Operating structure SIMULATION 143
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.21.1. SIGNAL.sim – Simulation of the set-point value

The settings to simulate the set-point value are made in the SIGNAL.sim menu.
Activation of the simulation: In the SIGNAL.form submenu by selecting one of the following waveforms
Sine Sine wave
Square Square wave
Triangle Triangle wave
Mixed Single cycle of an alternating signal sequence.

Then the selection is set to External (set-point value simulation
inactive).
The following parameters can be set for the selected waveform.
Menu option Parameter setting Schematic representation with sine wave
70 %
Offset (Zero offset as %)
50 %
Offset as %
t
70 %
Amplitude (Amplitude as %) Amplitude as %
50 %
t
Period in s
70 %
Perisode (Cycle duration in s)
50 %
t
Table 71: SIGNAL.sim; parameter settings for set-point value simulation
Deactivation of the simulation: In the SIGNAL.form submenu
Selection Externally = set-point value simulation inactive

(corresponds to the factory setting in the as-delivered state)
Activating and parameterizing the set-point value simulation:

/ Select SIMULATION (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
ENTER Press The submenu for setting the simulation is displayed.
144
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions

/ Select SIGNAL.sim
ENTER Press The submenu for activating and parameterizing the set-point value
simulation is displayed.
/ Select SIGNAL.form
ENTER Press The menu options for activating and for selecting the waveform are
displayed.
/ Select required menu option
Selection Externally = simulation inactive.
Selection Sine / Square / Triangle / Mixed = specify the

waveform as well as activation of the simulation.
EXIT Press Return to the SIGNAL.sim menu.
Setting the parameters for simulation of the set-point value:

/ Select Offset (Zero offset as %).
INPUT Press The input screen for specifying the offset is opened.
/ Increase value Input value.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the SIGNAL.sim menu.
/ Select Amplitude (Amplitude as %).
INPUT Press The input screen for specifying the amplitude is opened.
/ Select Period (Cycle duration in seconds).
INPUT Press The input screen for specifying the cycle duration is opened.
EXIT Press Return to the SIMULATION menu.
For simulation of process and process valve:

/ Select CONTROL.sim For description see Chapter “26.2.21.2. CONTROL.sim – Simu-
lation of the process and process valve”.
Leaving the SIMULATION menu:

Table 72: SIGNAL.sim; activating and parameterizing the set-point value simulation.
145
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.21.2. CONTROL.sim – Simulation of the process and process valve

The settings to simulate the process and the process valve are made in the CONTROL.sim menu.
Settings
Type of simulation: x.SIM Simulation of the process valve.
p.SIM Simulation of the process.
Parameterization of
SIM.Gain Specify amplification factor.
the process:
SIM.Delay Specify time constant in seconds.
Example of a simulated process:
Effect of parameterization on the behavior of the PT1 element
SIM.Delay (Time constant [T] in s) Output of the simulated

process
SIM.Gain 5 y
(Amplification factor [Kp])
63 %
Input of the simulated

process
1 u
Figure 83: Example of a simulated process. Behavior of the PT1 element
Activating and parameterizing simulation of the process and/or process valve:

/ Select SIMULATION (To do this, the auxiliary function must be incorporated into the main
menu).
ENTER Press The submenu for setting the simulation is displayed.
/ Select CONTROL.sim
ENTER Press The submenu for activating and parameterizing the process and
process valve simulation is displayed.
146
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions

/ Select required simulation
Selection x.SIM = simulation process.
Selection p.SIM = simulation process valve.

Setting the parameters for simulation of the process and/or the process valve:
/ Select SIM.Gain (Amplification factor).
INPUT Press The input screen for specifying the amplification factor is opened.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the CONTROL.sim menu.
/ Select SIM.Delay (Time constant in seconds).
INPUT Press The input screen for specifying the time constant is opened.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the CONTROL.sim menu.
EXIT Press Return to the SIMULATION menu.
Table 73: CONTROL.sim; aktivieren und parametrieren der Simulation des Prozesses und/oder Prozessventils.
147
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.22. DIAGNOSE – Menu for monitoring valves (option)

The optional function DIAGNOSE can be used to monitor the state of the valve. If there are deviations from the
set-point state, messages are output according to NE 107.
Example of the output of a diagnosis message:
Status signal
POS
0.0 Symbol for:
Diagnosis active
MENU CMD POS MANU
Figure 84: Example of a diagnosis message
26.2.22.1. Activation of the DIAGNOSE menu

To ensure that the DIAGNOSE menu can be set, it must first be activated in the main menu of the setting level (MAIN)
via ADD.FUNCTION. See Chapter “26.1. Activating and deactivating auxiliary functions”.
The active diagnosis is indicated on the display of the process level with a check mark symbol . See
“Figure 84”.
26.2.22.2. The DIAGNOSE main menu

The DIAGNOSE main menu consists of the following submenus.
D.MSG (Diagnosis messages) list of all diagnosis messages.
CONFIG.MSG Assignment of status signals for different diagnosis messages

DIAGNOSE
>> D.MSG << according to NE 107 (NE = NAMUR recommendation).
CONFIG.MSG Activation of diagnosis functions by incorporation into the
ADD.DIAGNOSE ADD.DIAGNOSE
RESET.HISTORY DIAGNOSE main menu.
EXIT 29-1 ENTER RESET.HISTORY Deletion of the history entries of all diagnosis functions.
The menu is only displayed if the CLOCK function has been
selected on the process level.
Table 74: DIAGNOSE; main menu
The description can be found in Chapter “26.2.22.5. Description of the DIAGNOSE main menu”.
148
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.22.3. DIAGNOSE – Operating structure
Display all generated Select a diagnosis

diagnosis messages message
DIAGNOSE ENTER D. MSG ENTER SERVICE.TIME ENTER CLEAR

Diagnosis Delete
message message
POS.MONITOR is
EXIT
displayed
EXIT
Assignment of status signals

Display the diagnosis according to NE 107**
functions* SELEC
CONFIG. MSG ENTER SERVICE.TIME ENTER FAILURE Prio 1
FUNC.CHECK Prio 2
EXIT POS.MONITOR OUT SPEC. Prio 3
EXIT MAINTENANCE Prio 4
Display the activatable

DIAGNOSE functions
SELEC
ADD.DIAGNOSE ENTER HISTOGRAM Histogram
SERVICE.TIME Operating-hours counter
TRAVEL.ACCU Path accumulator
CYCLE.COUNTER Direction reversal counter
TEMP.CHECK Temperature monitor
STROKE.CHECK End position monitor

PV.MONITOR Process actual value monitoring
POS.MONITOR Position monitoring

EXIT
EXIT
RESET.HISTORY RUN Delete history entries of all diagnosis functions
EXIT Return without change
* Only the diagnosis functions are displayed which have been activated in the ADD.DIAGNOSE menu.
** If several diagnosis messages are available simultaneously, the status signal with the highest priority is shown on the
display.
Figure 85: Operating structure DIAGNOSE 149
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.22.4. Activation of diagnosis functions

In the ADD.DIAGNOSE menu several diagnosis functions are activated and incorporated into the DIAGNOSE
main menu.
Activatable diagnosis functions:
HISTOGRAM Graphical display of the dwell time density and movement range.
SERVICE.TIME Operating-hours counter
TRAVEL.ACCU Path accumulator
CYCLE.COUNTER Direction reversal counter
TEMP.CHECK Temperature monitor
STROKE.CHECK Monitoring of the mechanical end positions in the armature
PV.MONITOR Process actual value monitoring (only for Type 8793, process control)
POS.MONITOR Position monitoring
Table 75: ADD.DIAGNOSE; overview of diagnosis functions
The exact description can be found in Chapter “26.2.22.6. Description of the diagnosis functions”
ADD.DIAGNOSE - Activating diagnosis functions:

/ Select DIAGNOSE (To do this, the DIAGNOSE auxiliary function must already have
been activated by incorporation into the main menu (MAIN)).
ENTER Press The submenus are displayed.
/ Select ADD.DIAGNOSE
ENTER Press The other diagnosis functions are displayed.
/ Select required diagnosis
function
ENTER Press The required diagnosis function is now marked by a cross .
either
/ Select further diagnosis
functions Keep repeating until all required diagnosis functions have been
marked with a cross .
ENTER Press
or
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the DIAGNOSE main
menu.
The marked diagnosis functions have been activated and the setting
menus are now in the DIAGNOSE main menu.
150 Table 76: Activation of diagnosis functions
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.22.5. Description of the DIAGNOSE main menu
1. D.MSG – Diagnosis messages

All generated diagnosis messages are listed in the D.MSG menu where they can be viewed and deleted. The status
signal, which is assigned to the diagnosis message, is indicated by a symbol.
Display example of a list with diagnosis messages

Diagnosis Symbol for the assigned status
message
>> D.MSG << signal
SERVICE.TIME
TRAVEL.ACCU
PV.MONITOR
==================
EXIT 29-1-1 ENTER
Display example of the description text of a diagnosis message
TRAVEL.ACCU
travel accu
exceeded
EXIT ––– CLEAR
Viewing and deleting a diagnosis message:

/ Select D.MSG
ENTER Press All generated diagnosis messages are displayed.
/ Select required message
ENTER Press Opening the diagnosis message. The description text is displayed
(in English).
EXIT Press Closing the diagnosis message and return to D.MSG.
or
CLEAR Hold down Deleting the diagnosis message and return to D.MSG.
running
EXIT Press Return to the DIAGNOSE main menu.
Table 77: D.MSG; viewing and deleting a diagnosis message
2. CONFIG.MSG – Assignment of status signals according to NE 107 (NAMUR recommendation)

The status signals of the diagnosis messages can be changed in the CONFIG.MSG menu.
The menu indicates only diagnosis functions which can output a message and which have already been
activated in the ADD.DIAGNOSE menu.
The status signals have different priorities. 151
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
If several diagnosis messages are available with different status signals, the status signal with the highest priority
is shown on the display.
Overview of the status signals according to NE 107 (NE = NAMUR recommendation):
Priority 1 2 3 4
Status signal
Description Failure Function check Out of specification Maintenance required

Table 78: CONFIG.MSG; overview of status signals
The following status signals have been preset at the factory for the messages of the diagnosis functions:
Diagnosis function Status signal according to NE 107 Signal. Priority

Miniature
SERVICE.TIME Maintenance required 4
TRAVEL.ACCU Maintenance required 4
CYCLE.COUNTER Maintenance required 4
TEMP.CHECK Out of specification 3
STROKE.CHECK Out of specification 3
PV.MONITOR Out of specification 3
POS.MONITOR Out of specification 3
Table 79: CONFIG.MSG; factory setting (Default)
Assignment of status signals:

/ Select CONFIG.MSG
ENTER Press All activated diagnosis functions, which can output a message, are
displayed.
/ Select required diagnosis
function
ENTER Press The list of possible status signals is displayed.
/ Select required status signal
SELEC Press The selected status signal is now marked by a filled circle .
EXIT Press Acknowledgment and simultaneous return to the CONFIG.MSG

menu.
The status signal is now assigned to the diagnosis function.
Table 80: CONFIG.MSG; assignment of status signals
152
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
3. ADD.DIAGNOSE – Activation and deactivation of diagnosis functions

Diagnosis functions can be activated in this menu and incorporated into the DIAGNOSE main menu or already
activated diagnosis functions can be deactivated again.
Activation of diagnosis functions:

For description see Chapter “26.2.22.4. Activation of diagnosis functions”
Deactivation of diagnosis functions:

The procedure is the same as for activation. Except that with deactivation the cross after the diagnosis function is
removed again by pressing the ENTER key .
4. RESET.HISTORY – Deletion of the history entries of all diagnosis functions

Explanation of the history entries:
There is a history entry for each diagnosis message. This entry is assigned to the diagnosis function, which has
actuated this message, and is saved there in the HISTORY submenu.
In the menu of some diagnosis functions there is a HISTORY submenu in which the history entries are
saved.
RESET.HISTORY is used to delete the entries of all HISTORY submenus.
Individual entries can be deleted in the HISTORY submenu of the particular diagnosis function.
See also chapter “26.2.22.7. History entries in the HISTORY submenu”.
Deleting all history entries:

/ Select RESET.HISTORY
RUN Hold down All history entries are deleted.
running
Table 81: RESET.HISTORY; deleting all history entries
CAUTION!
History entries are only created when the CLOCK function for the display has been activated on the
process level.
For activation and setting of CLOCK see Chapter “17.4.1. Setting date and time:”
153
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.22.6. Description of the diagnosis functions
HISTOGRAM – Output of histograms

The HISTOGRAM menu is divided into 2 parts:
1. Outputting the histograms for
POS class (dwell time density) and
DIR class (movement range)
2. L
ist of the characteristic values for
CMD Set-point position valve actuator
POS Actual position valve actuator
DEV Deviation from POS to CMD
TEMP Temperature
SP Process set-point value
PV Process actual value
Display description of the histograms:
Duration of histogram recording

POS-Class
Largest dwell time density which occurred (tallest bar)
00 : 13 : 48 44 233 cM Path covered by the actuator
10 histogram bars, each of which represents 10 % of the total stroke:

Bar on left = class 1 (0 - 10 %)
STOP POS–Class CLEAR
Bar on right = class 10 (91 - 100 %)
DIR-Class Duration of histogram recording
Most frequently occurring range between 2 changes in direction

00 : 13 : 48 50 72 Number of changes in direction
Histogram bar for the range between two direction reversal points
Bar on left = class 1 (0 - 10 %)
STOP DIR–Class CLEAR
Bar on right = class 10 (91 - 100 %)
HISTOGRAM ENTER POS-Class START STOP Start / stop both histograms

CLEAR Delete both histograms
DIR-Class START STOP Start / stop both histograms

CLEAR Delete both histograms
SYSTEM-DATA EXIT
154 Figure 86: HISTOGRAM; operating structure
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
POS-Class - Description of the histogram of the dwell time density

The histogram indicates how long the actuator has stopped in a specific position.
For this purpose the stroke range is divided into 10 classes.
The current position of one of the 10 classes is assigned to each scan time.
<10 11 - 20 21 - 30 31 - 40 41 - 50 51 - 60 61 - 70 71 - 80 81 - 90 91 - 100
% % % % % % % % % %
Klasse 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 87: CMD class; position classes
Explanation of the histogram in the example

Sinusoidal progression of the actuator position:
Position
100 %
0% Time [t]
Figure 88: Sinusoidal progression of the actuator position
Histogram of the sinusoidal progression of the actuator position:
Largest dwell time density which occurred (tallest bar)
Path covered by the actuator
10 : 34 : 00 30 10023 cM
The histogram indicates how long the actuator has stopped in
the particular position class.
The figure in the middle of the histogram indicates what
percentage of time the actuator has spent in the position class
with the largest dwell time density.
STOP POS–Class CLEAR

Conclusions to be drawn from the histogram about the behavior of the actuator:
The actuator spent
approx. 30 % of its time in position class 1 (0-10 % of the total stroke) and
approx. 30 % of its time in position class 10 (90 - 100 % of the total stroke).
For the remaining time the actuator was in a position between 11 % and 89 % of the total stroke.
Figure 89: POS class; histogram of the dwell time density for sinusoidal progression of the actuator position
The distribution of the histogram allows conclusions to be drawn about the design of the control valve.
For example, if the actuator is in the lower stroke range only, the valve has probably been designed too
large.
155
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
DIR-Class - Description of the histogram of the movement range

The histogram indicates the movement ranges of the actuator between two direction reversal points.
For this purpose the movement range between two changes in direction is divided into 10 classes.
The current position of one of the 10 classes is assigned to each scan time.
0 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 31 - 40 41 - 50 51 - 60 61 - 70 71 - 80 81 - 90 91 -
% % % % % % % % % 100 %
Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 90: DIR class; change in direction classes
Explanation of the histogram in the example

Sinusoidal progression of the actuator position:
Position
100 %
0% Time [t]
Figure 91: Sinusoidal progression of the actuator position
Histogram of the sinusoidal progression of the actuator position:
Percentage of the change in direction class which occurred most

frequently
Number of changes in direction
00 : 13 : 48 100 72
It can be seen in the histogram which change in direction
class has the largest proportion of the total number of
changes in direction.
The figure in the middle of the histogram indicates what
percentage of all changes in direction is not applicable to the
most frequent change in direction class.
STOP DIR–Class CLEAR
Conclusion to be drawn from the histogram about the behavior of the actuator:
The actuator moved for all changes in direction in the change in direction class 10 (91 - 100 %)
Figure 92: DIR class; histogram of the dwell time density for sinusoidal progression of the actuator position
The histograms will only give correct information about the behavior of the actuator when the X.TUNE
function required for the basic setting has been run.
156
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Starting, stopping and deleting the histograms

/ Select HISTOGRAM (To do this, the HISTOGRAM function must be incorporated into
the DIAGNOSE main menu. See Chapter “26.2.22.4. Activation of
diagnosis functions”).
ENTER Press The empty matrix of the POS-Class submenu (dwell time density) is
displayed.
Starting histograms:
START * Hold down Both histograms (POS class and DIR class) are started.
running
/ Changing the display view Selection options:
POS class (Histogram for the dwell time density),
DIR class (Histogram for the movement range),
SYSTEM DATA (list of the characteristic values).
Stopping histograms:
STOP * Hold down The recording of both histograms (POS class and DIR class) is
as long as countdown (5 ...) is stopped.
running
/ Changing the display view Selection options:
POS class (Histogram for the dwell time density),
DIR class (Histogram for the movement range),
SYSTEM DATA (list of the characteristic values).
Deleting histograms:
CLEAR * Hold down Both histograms (POS class and DIR class) are deleted.
running
Return to the DIAGNOSE main menu:
/ Select SYSTEM DATA
EXIT Press or Return to the DIAGNOSE main menu.
* The key functions START , STOP and CLEAR are available only in the display views of the histograms POS
class and DIR class.
Table 82: HISTOGRAM; starting, stopping and deleting histograms
157
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
SERVICE.TIME – Operating-hours counter

The operating-hours counter records the time during which the device was switched on.
If the duty cycle reaches the specified time limit, a message is generated.
• To do this, a history entry is made in the HISTORY submenu. For description see “26.2.22.7. History entries in
the HISTORY submenu”.
• The status signal, which is assigned to the message, is indicated at short intervals on the display.
See also D.MSG and CONFIG.MSG in Chapter “26.2.22.5”, page 151.
Display SERVICE.TIME Description of the functions

The interval for messages preset at the factory for 90 days can be
SERVICE.TIME changed in the LIMIT submenu.
LIMIT 90d. 00h
NEXT.M 89d. 23h After NEXT.M the remaining time is displayed until the next message
HISTORY appears.
The history entries of the last 3 messages can be viewed and deleted in
EXIT 29-5-1 INPUT the HISTORY submenu.
Table 83: SERVICE.TIME; operating-hours counter
SERVICE.TIME ENTER LIMIT INPUT OK

Input interval
ESC
NEXT M. Display the remaining time until the next message
EXIT HISTORY ENTER CLEAR Delete history entry

History entry
is displayed EXIT
Figure 93: Operating structure SERVICE.TIME
Specifying interval for the output of messages

/ Select SERVICE.TIME (To do this, the SERVICE.TIME function must be incorporated into
ENTER Press The menu is displayed.
/ Select LIMIT
INPUT Press The preset value is displayed.
/ Increase value Set interval for outputting the message.
< Change the
(time unit: d/h/m)
OK Press Return to the SERVICE.TIME menu.
158 Table 84: SERVICE.TIME; specifying interval.
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
TRAVEL.ACCU – Path accumulator

The path accumulator records and adds up the path which the actuator piston covers. A movement of the
actuator piston is detected when the position changes by at least 1 %.
The interval for outputting messages is specified by inputting a limit for the total number of piston movements.
Display TRAVEL.ACCU Description of the functions

The STROKE submenu specifies the total stroke of the actuator piston. The
TRAVEL.ACCU total stroke is automatically determined during the basic setting of the device
STROKE 20.0 mm (running X.TUNE).
LIMIT 1000000 cm In the case of an analog position sensor, the total stroke must be input by
NEXT.M 999954 cm pressing the INPUT key.
HISTORY
EXIT 29-6-1 INPUT The interval for outputting the message can be changed in the LIMIT
submenu. A piston movement which covers 10 km has been preset at the
factory.
After NEXT.M the remaining piston movement distance is displayed until the
next message appears.
The history entries of the last 3 messages can be viewed and deleted in the
HISTORY submenu.
Table 85: TRAVEL.ACCU; path accumulator
TRAVEL.ACCU ENTER STROKE INPUT OK

Input total
stroke*
ESC
LIMIT INPUT OK
Input
Limit
ESC
NEXT M. Display the remaining distance until the next message

History entry
is displayed EXIT
* Input required for analog position sensor only
Figure 94: Operating structure TRAVEL.ACCU
159
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions

/ Select TRAVEL.ACCU (To do this, the TRAVEL.ACCU function must be incorporated into
* Required for analog position sensor only (setting the STROKE submenu)
/ * Select STROKE
INPUT * Press The preset value is displayed.
/ * Increase value Set total stroke of the actuator piston.
< hanging the decimal
C
place
/ Select LIMIT
/ Increase value Setting interval for outputting the message (limit for total number of
piston movements).
C
place
OK Press Return to the TRAVEL.ACCU menu.
Table 86: TRAVEL.ACCU; specifying interval.
CYCLE.COUNTER – Direction reversal counter
The direction reversal counter counts the number of changes in direction of the actuator piston. A change in direction
is detected when the position of the actuator piston changes by at least 1 %.
The interval for outputting messages is specified by inputting a limit for the total number of changes in direction.
Display CYCLE.COUNTER Description of the functions

The interval for outputting the message can be changed in the LIMIT
CYCLE.COUNTER submenu. 1 million changes in direction have been preset at the factory.
LIMIT 1000000
NEXT.M 999960 After NEXT.M the remaining changes in direction are displayed until the
HISTORY next message appears.
EXIT 29-7-1 INPUT the HISTORY submenu.
Table 87: SERVICE.TIME; operating-hours counter
160
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
CYCLE.COUNTER ENTER LIMIT INPUT OK

Input change
in direction
ESC
NEXT M. Display the remaining changes in direction until the next

message

History entry
is displayed EXIT
Figure 95: Operating structure CYCLE.COUNTER

/ Select CYCLE.COUNTER (To do this, the CYCLE.COUNTER function must be incorporated
into the DIAGNOSE main menu. See Chapter “26.2.22.4. Acti-
vation of diagnosis functions”.)
/ Select LIMIT
/ Increase value Setting interval for outputting the message (limited number of
changes in direction).
< Changing the decimal
place
OK Press Return to the CYCLE.COUNTER menu.
Table 88: CYCLE.COUNTER; specifying interval.
TEMP.CHECK – Temperature monitor
The temperature monitor checks whether the current temperature is within the specified temper-
ature range. The temperature range is specified by inputting a minimum and maximum temperature.
If the temperature deviates from the specified range, a message is output.
In addition to the monitor there is a temperature slave pointer. This indicates the lowest and highest of the measured
temperature values. The slave pointer can be reset by pressing the CLEAR key.
161
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
Display TEMP.CHECK Description of the functions

CURRENT indicates the current temperature.
TEMP.CHECK
CURRENT 21.7 *C MAX indicates the highest temperature of the slave pointer
MAX 21.7 *C MIN indicates the lowest temperature of the slave pointer
MIN 21.7 *C
LIMIT The permitted temperature range can be changed in the LIMIT submenu.
EXIT 29-8-1 A message is output if the temperature goes outside the permitted range.
The temperature range has been preset at the factory from 0 ... 60 °C.
LIMIT the HISTORY submenu.
HISTORY
EXIT 29-8-1 ENTER
Table 89: TEMP.CHECK; temperature range
TEMP.CHECK ENTER CURRENT Display of the current temperature
Highest temperature of the slave pointer

MAX CLEAR Delete value
Lowest temperature of the slave pointer

MIN CLEAR Delete value
LIMIT INPUT TEMP.MAX INPUT OK

Input
TEMP.MIN Limit
EXIT ESC
EXIT ENTER CLEAR Delete history entry

HISTORY History entry is
displayed EXIT
Figure 96: Operating structure TEMP.CHECK
Specifying temperature limit for the output of messages

/ Select TEMP.CHECK (To do this, the TEMP.CHECK function must be incorporated into
/ Select LIMIT
ENTER Press The upper and lower temperature limit is displayed.
The upper limit TEMP.MAX has already been selected.
INPUT Press Open input screen for upper temperature limit.
162
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions

/ Increase value Input upper temperature limit TEMP.MAX.
C
place
OK Press Acknowledge value.
/ Select TEMP.MIN
INPUT Press Open factory setting for lower temperature limit.
/ Increase value Input lower temperature limit TEMP.MIN.
C
place
EXIT Press Return to the TEMP.CHECK menu.
Table 90: TEMP.CHECK; specifying temperature limit.
STROKE.CHECK – End position monitor
The STROKE.CHECK function is used to monitor the physical end positions of the armature. In this way wear marks
can be detected on the valve seat.
To do this, a tolerance band is specified for the lower end position (position 0 %) and for the upper end position
(position 100 %). If an end position exceeds or falls below the tolerance band, a message is output.
In addition to the monitor there is an end position slave pointer. This indicates the minimum and maximum position
of the determined end positions. The slave pointer can be reset by pressing the CLEAR key.
Display STROKE.CHECK Description of the functions

MAX indicates the maximum position of the slave pointer
STROKE.CHECK
MAX 67.6 % MIN indicates the minimum position of the slave pointer
MIN 30. 9 % The tolerance band for the physical end positions can be set in the LIMIT
LIMIT submenu. A message is output if the temperature goes outside the per-
HISTORY mitted range.
EXIT 29-9-1
Example:
Input upper end position TOL MAX = 1 %
If the position is less than -1 %, a message is output
Input lower end position TOL ZERO = 1 %
If the position is greater than 101 %, a message is output
the HISTORY submenu.
Table 91: STROKE.CHECK; end position monitor
163
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
CAUTION!
If a stroke limit was set in the X.LIMIT menu, the mechanical end position monitor has only limited
relevance.
The end positions indicated on the process level under POS are not the physically caused end positions
in this case. Therefore they cannot be compared with the end positions indicated in the STROKE.CHECK
menu under MIN and MAX.
Maximum position of the slave pointer
STROKE.CHECK ENTER MAX CLEAR Delete value
Minimum position of the slave pointer

MIN CLEAR Delete value
LIMIT INPUT ZERO.TOL INPUT OK

Input
MAX.TOL Limit
ESC

History entry
is displayed EXIT
Figure 97: Operating structure STROKE.CHECK
Specifying position limit for the output of messages

/ Select STROKE.CHECK (To do this, the STROKE.CHECK function must be incorporated
into the DIAGNOSE main menu. See Chapter “26.2.22.4. Acti-
vation of diagnosis functions”).
/ Select LIMIT
ENTER Press The submenus for inputting the lower and upper end position
tolerance are displayed.
The submenu for inputting the lower end position tolerance ZERO.
TOL has already been selected.
INPUT Press Open input screen for lower end position tolerance.
/ Increase value Input lower end position tolerance ZERO.TOL.
Changing the decimal
place
/ Select MAX.TOL
INPUT Press Open input screen for upper end position tolerance.
/ Increase value Input upper end position tolerance MAX.TOL.
Changing the decimal
place
164
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions

EXIT Press Return to the STROKE.CHECK menu.
Table 92: STROKE.CHECK; end position monitor.
POS.MONITOR –Position monitoring
The POS.MONITOR function monitors the current position of the actuator.

The tolerance band for the set-point value is specified in the DEADBAND submenu.
A period for alignment of the actual value with the set-point value is specified in the COMP.TIME submenu
(compensation time).
The compensation time COMP.TIME starts recording as soon as the set-point value is constant. When the com-
pensation time has elapsed, monitoring starts.
If the control deviation (DEV) of the actual value is greater than the tolerance band of the set-point value during
monitoring, a message is output.
Display POS.MONITOR Description of the functions

The tolerance band of the set-point value preset at the factory to 2 % can
POS:MONITOR be changed in the DEADBAND submenu.
DEADBAND 2.0 %
COMP.TIME 10.0 sec The compensation time is set in COMP.TIME (compensation time).
HISTORY The history entries of the last 3 messages can be viewed and deleted in
the HISTORY submenu.
EXIT 29-11-1 INPUT
Table 93: POS.MONITOR; position monitor
Schematic representation
1.4
1.2 Key:
1 CMD DEADBAND = adjustable tolerance

DEADBAND band as %.
DEV
0.8
COMP.TIME = adjustable time
0.6 POS in seconds expected until the
control deviation is compared with
0.4 the tolerance band.
0.2 DEV = control deviation
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COMP.TIME
Figure 98: POS.MONITOR; schematic representation of position monitor 165
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
POS.MONITOR ENTER DEADBAND INPUT OK

Input
tolerance band
ESC
COMP.TIME INPUT Input OK

compensation
time ESC

History entry
is displayed EXIT
Figure 99: Operating structure POS.MONITOR
Inputting tolerance band and compensation time

/ Select POS.MONITOR (To do this, the POS.MONITOR function must be incorporated into
ENTER Press The menu is displayed. DEADBAND has already been selected.
/ Increase value Input tolerance band.
place
/ Select COMP.TIME
/ Increase value Input compensation time.
place
OK Press Return to the POS.MONITOR menu.
Table 94: POS.MONITOR; specifying tolerance band and compensation time.
PV.MONITOR – Process monitor (for Type 8793 only)

The PV.MONITOR function monitors the process actual value.
The operating menu is identical to the position monitor POS.MONITOR described above.
In contrast, it is not the position of the actuator which is monitored here but the process.
166
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.2.22.7. History entries in the HISTORY submenu

Each diagnosis function, which can output a message, has the HISTORY submenu.
When the diagnosis message is actuated, a history entry is created with date and value. The history entries of the
respective diagnosis function can be viewed and deleted in the HISTORY submenu.
A maximum of three history entries are stored from each diagnosis message. If three history entries are already
available when a message is actuated, the oldest history entry is deleted.
Example: History of the diagnosis function TRAVEL.ACCU
Description:
TRAVEL.ACCU On the left of the display is the date and on the right the associated
DATE VALUE value.
01.02.12 5 cm
Deleting the history:
01.02.12 35 cm
Hold down the CLEAR key until the countdown (5...) is running.
01.02.12 10 cm
EXIT ––– CLEAR
The RESET.HISTORY diagnosis menu can be used to jointly delete the histories of all diagnosis func-
tions. See Chapter “26.2.22.5”.
Deleting the histories of a diagnosis function in the example TRAVEL.ACCU

/ Select TRAVEL.ACCU
/ Select HISTORY
INPUT Press History entries with date and value are displayed.
CLEAR Hold down The histories of the TRAVEL.ACCU diagnosis function are deleted.
running
EXIT Press Return to the TRAVEL.ACCU menu.
Table 95: SERVICE.TIME; inputting interval for message.
CAUTION!
History entries are only created when the CLOCK function for the display has been activated on the
process level.
To receive correct history entries, date and time must be correct.

Date and time must be reset after a restart. Therefore, the device switches immediately and automatically
to the corresponding input menu after a restart.
For activation and setting of CLOCK see Chapter “17.4.1. Setting date and time:”
167
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.3. Manual configuration of X.TUNE

This function is needed for special requirements only..
For standard applications the X.TUNE function has been preset at the factory.
See chapter “23.2. X.TUNE – Automatic adjustment of the positioner”.
For special requirements the X.TUNE function, as described below, can be manually configured.
Opening the menu for the manual configuration of X.TUNE

/ Select X.TUNE
RUN Briefly press Opening the Manual.TUNE menu. The menu options for the manual
configuration of X.TUNE are displayed.
X.TUNE; opening the menu for the manual configuration of X.TUNE
Selecting functions for X.TUNE

SELEC
X.TUNE RUN X.TUNE.CONFIG ENTER X.TUNE.DBDx Dead band
press
briefly X.TUNE.PARAx Control parameter
positioner
X.TUNE.LEAKAGE Leakage test
X.TUNE.Ypwm Parameter PWM

signals
EXIT X.TUNE.Yfric Friction behavior
Determining end positions

SELEC
X.TUNE.POS ENTER ACT.limit
Input values
EXIT ACT.nolimit POS.pMIN INPUT
EXIT POS.pMAX INPUT
Optimizing PWM signals
X.TUNE.PWM ENTER yB.min ENTER

Acknowledge
EXIT yE.min ENTER value
OK
Determining opening and closing times

EXIT X.TUNE.AIR RUN
Values are
Hold down
displayed
as long as countdown (5 ...) is running
OK
168 Figure 100: Operating structure for the manual configuration of X.TUNE
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.3.1. Description of the menu for the manual configuration of

X.TUNE
X.TUNE.CONFIG Configuration of the X.TUNE Specify which functions are to be executed when
function X.TUNE is running (automatic self-optimization).
M.TUNE.POS Position of the end positions - Specify whether the pneumatic actuator has
mechanical end positions.
- Manual specification of the end positions
If there are no mechanical end positions available,
these are not approached by the X.TUNE and must
be manually specified.
M.TUNE.PWM Optimization of the PWM signals Manual optimization of the PWM signals for control
of the aeration valves and bleed valves.
For optimization the valves must be aerated and
bled. A progress bar on the display indicates the
speed at which the valve is aerated or bled.
The setting is optimum when the progress bar
moves as slowly as possible.
M.TUNE.AIR Determination of the opening Continuous determination of the opening and

and closing times of the actuator closing times of the actuator.
26.3.1.1. X.TUNE.CONFIG – Configuration of the X.TUNE function

In this menu you can specify which functions are to be executed when the X.TUNE function is running
automatically.
Specifying the functions in X.TUNE.CONFIG

/ Select X.TUNE.CONFIG
ENTER Press The functions for automatic self-parameterization by X.TUNE are
displayed.
/ Select required function
SELEC Press Activate the function by checking the box .
Select all required functions in succession using the arrow

keys / and
activate by checking the box .
EXIT Press Return to the Manual.TUNE menu.
Table 96: X.TUNE.CONFIG; specifying the functions for automatic self-parameterization by X.TUNE
169
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.3.1.2. X.TUNE.POS – Setting of the end positions

In this menu you can specify whether the pneumatic actuator has mechanical end positions or not.
If there are no mechanical end positions available, these are not approached by the X.TUNE and must be man-
ually specified.
Position of the end positions

/ Select M.TUNE.POS
ENTER Press The selection for
ACT.limit = mechanical end positions available
ACT.nolimit = mechanical end positions not available
is displayed.
If mechanical end positions are available
/ Select ACT.limit
If mechanical end positions are not available

/ Select ACT.nolimit
SELEC Press The CAL.POS submenu for inputting the end positions is opened.
/ Select POS.pMIN
INPUT Press The input screen for the value of the lower end position is opened.
/ OPN Open more Approach lower end position of the valve.
CLS Close more
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the CAL.POS menu.
/ Select POS.pMAX
INPUT Press The input screen for the value of the upper end position is opened.
/ OPN Open more Approach upper end position of the valve.
CLS Close more
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the CAL.POS menu.
EXIT Press Return to the M.TUNE.POS. menu.
Table 97: M.TUNE.POS; position of the end positions
170
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.3.1.3. M.TUNE.PWM – Optimization of the PWM signals

In this menu the PWM signals for control of the aeration valves and bleed valves are manually optimized.
For optimization the actuator is aerated and bled. A progress bar on the display indicates the position of the
actuator and the speed of aeration and deaeration.
The setting is optimum when the progress bar moves as slowly as possible.
WARNING!
Danger due to uncontrolled valve movement when the M.TUNE.PWM function is running.
When the M.TUNE.PWM function is running under operating pressure, there is an acute risk of injury.
▶▶ Never run M.TUNE.PWM while a process is running.
▶▶ Secure system against unintentional activation.
Optimization of the PWM signals

/ Select M.TUNE.PWM
ENTER Press The submenu is displayed.
yB.min = aeration valve
yE.min = bleed valve
/ Select yB.min Submenu for setting the PWM signal for the aeration valve.
ENTER Press The input screen for setting the PWM signal is opened.
The progress bar indicates the speed of aeration.
/ Increase speed Minimize speed so that the progress bar moves as slowly as pos-
sible from left to right.
Reduce speed
Caution! Do not minimize speed to such an extent that the progress
bar remains in one position.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the M.TUNE.PWM menu.
/ Select yE.min Submenu for setting the PWM signal for the bleed valve.
ENTER Press The input screen for setting the PWM signal is opened.
The progress bar indicates the speed of deaeration.
/ Increase speed Minimize speed so that the progress bar moves as slowly as pos-
sible from right to left.
Reduce speed
Caution! Do not minimize speed to such an extent that the progress
bar remains in one position.
OK Press Transfer and simultaneous return to the M.TUNE.PWM menu.
Table 98: M.TUNE.PWM; optimization of the PWM signals
171
english
Type 8792, 8793
Auxiliary functions
26.3.1.4. M.TUNE.AIR – Determination of the opening and closing times

By running this function, the opening and closing times of the valve are determined continuously.
A change to the supply pressure will affect the aeration time which can be optimized in this way.
For the setting the effects, which a change to the supply pressure has on the aeration time, can be continuously
monitored via the M.TUNE.AIR function.
Continuous determination of the opening and closing times

/ Select M.TUNE.AIR
RUN Hold down The aeration and deaeration times are displayed.
as long as countdown (5 ...) is time.open = aeration
running time.close = deaeration
- - Change the supply pressure to adjust the aeration time.
The changed aeration time is displayed continuously.
Table 99: M.TUNE.AIR; continuous determination of the opening and closing times
172
english
Type 8792, 8793
Operating structure / Factory settings
Contents
27. OPERATING STRUCTURE AND FACTORY SETTINGS............................................................................................... 174
173
english
Type 8792, 8793
27. OPERATING STRUCTURE AND FACTORY

SETTINGS
The factory presets are highlighted in blue to the right of the menu in the operating structure.
Examples:
/ Menu options activated or selected at the factory
/ Menu options not activated or selected at the factory

2 %, 10 sec, ... Values set at the factory
INPUT 4- 20 mA
0- 20 mA
0- 10 V
0- 5 V
BUS.COMM 3) Address X Address: 63 63
BAUDRATE 4) 125 kBd
250 kBd
500 kBd
BUS FAIL SafePos off
SafePos on
BUS PDI 5) Position
CMD
Process value 1)
Setpoint 1)
Temperature
Operation mode
Errors
X.TUNE BUS PDO 5) P.CONTRL active 1)
Figure 101: Operating structure - 1
1) only process controller Type 8793

3) only field bus
4) only DeviceNet
174 5) only PROFIBUS DP
english
Type 8792, 8793
BUS PDO 5) CMD 2) / Setpoint 1)
Operation mode
Error reset
P.CONTRL active 1)
Automatic X.TUNE
X.TUNE X.TUNE STARTED TUNE #0 INIT ... X.TUNE ready
Manual X.TUNE
X.TUNE.CONFIG X.TUNE.DBDx
X.TUNE.PARAx
X.TUNE.LEAKAGE
X.TUNE.Ypwm
X.TUNE.Yfric
M.TUNE.POS ACT.limit
ACT.nolimit POS.pMIN
POS.pMAX
M.TUNE.PWM yB.min TUNE.yB
yE.min TUNE.yE
M.TUNE.AIR time.open
time.close
P.Q‘LIN 1) Q.LIN#0 Q.LIN#1 Q.LIN

CMD=0% CMD=10% ... ready
P.TUNE 1) starting identifying calculating TUNE

process tune control process PID parameters ready
ADD.FUNCTION

2) only for positioner mode
5) only PROFIBUS DP 175
english
Type 8792, 8793
ADD.FUNCTION CHARACT
CUTOFF
DIR.CMD
DIR.ACT
SPLTRNG 2)
X.LIMIT
X.TIME
X.CONTROL
P.CONTROL 1)
SECURITY
SAFEPOS
SIG.ERROR 6)
BINARY.IN
OUTPUT 7)
CAL.USER
SET.FACTORY
SER.I/O
EXTRAS
POS.SENSOR 8)
SERVICE
SIMULATION
DIAGNOSE
Activatable auxiliary functions

CHARACT

6) only for signal type 4-20 mA and Pt 100
7) Optional. The number of outputs varies depending on the version.
176 8) for Type 8793 Remote only
english
Type 8792, 8793

CHARACT linear
GP 1:25
GP 1:3 3
GP 1:5 0
GP 25:1
GP 3 3:1
GP 5 0:1
FREE Graph GRAPH
y 0 –> 0%
y 5 –> 5%
•.
•.
•
y 100 –> 100 %
CUTOFF Min 0% 0%
Max 100 % 100 %
CUT-type 1) Type PCO
Type XCO
DIR.CMD Rise
Fall
DIR.ACT Rise
Fall
SPLTRNG 2) Min 0% 0%
Max 100 % 100 %
X.LIMIT

2) only for positioner mode 177
english
Type 8792, 8793

X.LIMIT Min 0% 0%
Max 100 % 100 %
X.TIME T . open 1.0 sec 1.0 sec

T . close 1.0 sec 1.0 sec
X.CONTROL DBND 1.0 % 1.0 %
KXopn 1 1
KXcls 1 1
KDopn 0 0
KDcls 0 0
YBfric 0 0
YEfric 0 0
P.CONTROL 1) PID.PARAMETER DBND 1.0 % 1.0 %

KP 1.00 1.00
TN 999.9 999.9 sec
TV 0.0 0.0 sec
X0 0% 0%
FILTER 0 0
SETUP PV-INPUT 4- 20 mA
Frequenz
PT 100
SECURITY PV-SCALE
178 1) only process controller Type 8793
english
Type 8792, 8793

PV-SCALE PVmin 0.0 0.0 l/s
PVmax 100.0 100.0 l/s
K-Factor 9) VALUE 1.0
TEACH-IN
TEACH-IN Valve
closing
Teach-in
at work
–> filling VOLUME
SP-INPUT intern
extern
SP-SCALE 10) SPmin 0.0 0.0 l/s
SPmax 100.0 100.0 l/s
P.CO-INIT bumpless
standard
zeroinit
SECURITY Access Code CODE 0000

MAIN
MANU / AUTO
ADDFUNCT
X.TUNE
P.Q‘LIN 1)
P.TUNE 1)
SAFEPOS

9) only for signal type frequency (P.CONTROL → SETUP → PV-INPUT → Frequency)
10) Only process controller Type 8793 and for external set-point value default (P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT →
external) 179
english
Type 8792, 8793

SAFEPOS Safepos 0%
SIG.ERROR 6) SP/CMD Input Error off
Error on
SAFEPOS SafePos off
SafePos on
PV Input 1) Error off
Error on
SAFEPOS SafePos off
SafePos on
BINARY.IN SafePos
Manu / Auto
X.TUNE
X.CO / P.CO 1)
BIN.IN type normally open
normally closed
OUTPUT 7) OUT ANALOG POS
CMD
PV 1)
SP 1)
OUT.type 4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA
0 - 10 V
0-5V
CAL.USER OUT BIN 1

6) only for signal type 4-20 mA and Pt 100
180 7) Optional. The number of outputs varies depending on the version
english
Type 8792, 8793
OUT BIN 1 POS.Dev Deviation 1.0 % 1,0 %
POS.Lim-1 Limit 0.0 % 0%
Safepos
ERR.SP/CMD 11)
ERR.PV 12)
Remote
Tune.Status
DIAG.State-1 FAILURE
OUT SPEC
FUNC.CHECK
MAINTENANCE
OUT.type normally open
normally closed
OUT BIN 2 POS.Dev Deviation 1.0 % 1,0 %
POS.Lim-2 Limit 100.0 % 100 %
Safepos
ERR.SP/CMD 11)
ERR.PV 12)
Remote
Tune.Status
DIAG.State-2 FAILURE
OUT SPEC
FUNC.CHECK
MAINTENANCE
OUT.type normally open
normally closed
CAL.USER
11) only if fault detection is activated for the input signal

(SIG.ERROR → SP/CMD Input or PV-Input → Error on)
12) Only process controller Type 8793 and if fault detection is activated for the input signal
(SIG.ERROR → SP/CMD Input or PV-Input → Error on) 181
english
Type 8792, 8793

CAL.USER calibr. POS POS.pMIN x* * Value is set for X.TUNE
(automatic or manual).
POS.pMAX x*
calibr. INP 2) INP 4mA 0 13) x** ** Value is set by the manufacturer
during device-specific calibration.
INP 20mA 0 13) x**
calibr. SP 10) SP 4mA 0 13) x**
SP 20mA 0 13) x**
calibr. PV 1) PV 4mA 0 14) x**
PV 20mA 0 14) x**
SET VALUE 15) x**

PT100:
copy FACT->USER CAL reset
SET.FACTORY factory reset
SER.I/O I /O.MODE HART
Burst
Auto
BAUDRATE 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
EXTRAS SERIAL.CONFIG

10) Only process controller Type 8793 and for external set-point value default
(P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT → extern)
13) The signal type is displayed which is selected in the INPUT menu
14) Only for signal type 4-20 mA (P.CONTROL → SETUP → PV-INPUT → 4-20 mA)
182 15) Only for circuit with Pt 100 (P.CONTROL → SETUP → PV-INPUT → PT 100)
english
Type 8792, 8793
SERIAL.CONFIG NONE par.,1 Stop
EVEN par.,1 Stop
ODD par.,1 Stop
NONE par., 2 Stop
EVEN par., 2 Stop
ODD par., 2 Stop
EXTRAS DISP.ITEMS POS
CMD
CMD /POS
CMD /POS (t )
PV 1)
SP 1)
SP /PV 1)
SP /PV (t ) 1)
CLOCK
INPUT 16)
TEMP
X.TUNE
P.TUNE 1)
P.LIN 1)
SERVICE START-UP.ITEMS
Figure 110: Operating structure- 10

16) nicht bei Feldbus 183
english
Type 8792, 8793
START-UP.ITEMS POS
CMD
CMD /POS
CMD /POS (t )
PV 1)
SP 1)
SP /PV 1)
SP /PV (t ) 1)
CLOCK
INPUT 16)
TEMP
X.TUNE
P.TUNE 1)
P.LIN 1)
DISP.MODE normal
invers
POS.SENSOR DIGITAL 8)
ANALOG 8)
TAN.CORRECTION 18) tan.corr off
SERVICE tan.corr on
ALPHA +/- 0° 18) 0°
SIMULATION

8) for Type 8793 Remote onl
16) not for field bus
184 18) only NAMUR-version
english
Type 8792, 8793
SIMULATION SIGNAL.sim SIGNAL.form Extern
Sinus
Square
Triangle
Mixed
Offset 50.0 %
Amplitude 80.0 %
Periode 5.0 sec
CONTROL.sim x.SIM
p.SIM
SIM.Gain 1.0
SIM.Delay 2.0 sec
DIAGNOSE D.MSG 17) SERVICE.TIME
TRAVEL.ACCU
CYCLE.COUNTER
TEMP.CHECK
STROKE.CHECK
PV.MONITOR 1)
POS.MONITOR
CONFIG.MSG 17) SERVICE.TIME FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
ADD.DIAGNOSE TRAVEL.ACCU

17) The submenu lists only the activated diagnosis functions 185
english
Type 8792, 8793
TRAVEL.ACCU FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
CYCLE.COUNTER FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
TEMP.CHECK FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
STROKE.CHECK FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
PV.MONITOR 1) FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
POS.MONITOR FAILURE
FUNC.CHECK
OUT.SPEC
MAINTENANCE
ADD.DIAGNOSE
english
Type 8792, 8793
ADD.DIAGNOSE HISTOGRAM
SERVICE.TIME
TRAVEL.ACCU
CYCLE.COUNTER
TEMP.CHECK
STROKE.CHECK
PV.MONITOR 1)
POS.MONITOR
RESET.HISTORY Reset done
Aktivierbare Diagnosefunktionen
HISTOGRAM POS-Class
DIR-Class
SYSTEM-DATA
SERVICE.TIME LIMIT 90d. 00h

NEXT M.
HISTORY
TRAVEL.ACCU HUB 20.0 mm
LIMIT 1000000 cm
NEXT.M
HISTORY
CYCLE.COUNTER LIMIT 1000000
NEXT.M
HISTORY
TEMP.CHECK
187
english
Type 8792, 8793
TEMP.CHECK CURRENT
MAX
MIN
LIMIT TEMP.MAX 60.0 °C

TEMP.MIN 0.0 °C
HISTORY TEMP.MAX
TEMP.MIN
STROKE.CHECK MAX
MIN
LIMIT ZERO.TOL 0,5 %
MAX.TOL 0,5 %
HISTORY ZERO
MAX
POS.MONITOR DEADBAND 2.0 %
COMP.TIME 10.0 sec
HISTORY
PV.MONITOR 1) DEADBAND 2.0 %
COMP.TIME 10.0 sec
HISTORY
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
Contents
28. DESCRIPTION OF THE PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................................................... 190
28.1. Technical data..................................................................................................................................................................... 190
28.2. Interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................................. 190
28.3. Changing the operating state..................................................................................................................................... 191
28.4. Safety settings if the bus fails................................................................................................................................... 191
28.5. Bus status display............................................................................................................................................................ 191
28.6. Differences between the field bus devices and devices without a field bus................................... 191
29. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................................................................. 192
29.1. Connection diagram Type 8792................................................................................................................................ 193
29.3. X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector ..................................................................................................................... 194
29.4. X2/X3 - M12, 5-pole socket/circular connector - bus connection........................................................ 194
29.5. X4 - M8, 4-pole socket, optional - Remote Sensor (for remote model only)................................... 195
29.6. X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector - process actual value (Type 8793 only)................................... 196
30. START-UP PROFIBUS DP.......................................................................................................................................................... 197
30.1. Safety instructions........................................................................................................................................................... 197
30.2. Start-up sequence............................................................................................................................................................ 197
30.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793.............................................................................................. 198
30.4. Configuration via the control (PROFIBUS DP Master) ................................................................................ 200
30.4.1. Supplementary literature on the configuration of the PROFIBUS DP ............................. 200
30.4.2. Configuration of the process values ....................................................................................... 200
30.5. Configuration with Siemens Step7......................................................................................................................... 203
30.5.1. Example 1 of a positioner (Type 8792): Transfer of set-point and actual value.............. 203
30.5.2. Example 2 of a process controller (Type 8793): Transfer of several process values.... 204
190
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
28. DESCRIPTION OF THE PROFIBUS DP
28.1. Technical data

The protocol sequence complies with the standard DIN 19245 Part 3.
GSD file BUER0C1E.gsd

Bitmap files BUER0C1E.bmp
PNO-ID 0C1E Hex
Baud rate Max. 12 mbaud
(is automatically set by the Type 8792/8793)
Sync and Freeze mode Are not supported
Diagnosis telegram No device-specific diagnosis
Parameter telegram No user parameters
The process data is configured in the Type 8792/8793 and in the PROFIBUS master.
Maximum 10 process values (total INPUT and OUTPUT) can be transferred.
28.2. Interfaces
Bus Bus
Input for process Type 8792/8793

actual value* 2 binary outputs
Outputs
PROFIBUS DP
Inputs
4 – 20 mA 24 V PNP
frequency
Pt 100
Binary input
24 V PNP NO
Supply
24 V DC
Operation
Note:
Figure 116: Interfaces PROFIBUS DP

191
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
28.3. Changing the operating state

There are two ways of switching between the MANUAL and AUTOMATIC operating states for the PROFIBUS DP:
• Input via the keyboard on the device:
On the process level using the key function MANU and AUTO .
• The operating state is transferred to the device via the bus (under PDO MODE).
In this case switching is no longer possible using the keyboard on the device.
28.4. Safety settings if the bus fails

The position is approached which corresponds to the set-point value last transferred (default setting).
Other setting options (see chapter “30.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793”.
28.5. Bus status display

The bus status is indicated on the display on the device.
Display Device status Explanation Troubleshooting
BUS offline • Check bus connection

Device is not connected to the including plug assignment.
is displayed approx. every bus
offline • Check operating voltage
3 seconds
and bus connection of the
other nodes.
Table 99: Bus status display; PROFIBUS DP
28.6. Differences between the field bus devices and

devices without a field bus
The following chapters of these operating instructions are not valid for Type 8792/8793 with .
PROFIBUS DP.
• Section “Installation” Chapter “14. Electrical connection -
Circular plug-in connector version (multi-pole version)”
Chapter„ “15. Electrical connection - Terminal version for cable gland”
• Section “Start-up” Chapter “23.1. INPUT - Setting the input signal”
• Section “Auxiliary functions” Chapter “26.2.5. SPLTRNG – Signal split range”
Chapter “26.2.15. CAL.USER – Calibration of actual value and set-point value”

- Menu option calibr.INP, calibration of the position set-point value
- Menu option calibr.SP, calibration of the process set-point value
192
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
29. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
DANGER!

WARNING!
For operation of the device the following must always be connected:

→→X1 - circular connector M12, 8-pole (for operating voltage see Table 100“Table 100: Pin assignment; X1 -
M12, 8-pole circular connector; PROFIBUS DP”) and
→→X2 - socket M12, 5-pole, inversely coded (see Table 101“Table 101: Pin assignment; X2/X3 - M12, 5-pole
circular connector/socket - bus connection, PROFIBUS DP”).
NOTE!
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is only ensured if the appliance is connected correctly to an
earthing point.
On the outside of the housing is a TE terminal for connection of the technical earth (TE).
• Connect the TE terminal to the earthing point via a shortest possible cable (maximum length 30 cm).
193
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
29.1. Connection diagram Type 8792

X1 - M12, 8-pole X4 - M8, 4-pole socket,
circular connector optional (for remote model
only)
2 1
8
3 7 1 3
4 6
2 4
5
X3 - M12, 5-pole
X2 - M12, 5-pole socket * circular connector *
3 4 4 3
5
5
Functional
earth FE
2 1 * (inversely coded, 1 2
PROFIBUS DP)
Figure 117: Connection PROFIBUS DP, positioner Typ 8792

X1 - M12, 8-pole X5 - M8, 4-pole
circular connector circular connector
2 1
8
3 7 3 1
4 6
4 2
5
X4 - M8, 4-pole socket, X2 - M12, 5-pole X3 - M12, 5-pole

optional (for remote socket * circular connector *
model only) 3 4
4 3
Functional
earth FE
1 3 5
2 1 * (inversely coded,
2 4 1 2
5 PROFIBUS DP)
194 Figure 118: Connection PROFIBUS DP, process controller Typ 8793
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
29.3. X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector
On the device
Pin Configuration External circuit / Signal level
side
1 not used
2 not used
Operating voltage
3 GND 3
24 V DC ± 10%
4 +24 V 4 max. residual ripple 10%
0–5V (log. 0)
5 Binary input + 5 +
10 – 30 V (log. 1)
6 Binary input – 6 GND (identical with Pin 3)
Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC) - (only used for binary output option)
7 Binary output 1 (referring to Pin 3) 7 0 – 24 V
Table 100: Pin assignment; X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector; PROFIBUS DP
29.4. X2/X3 - M12, 5-pole socket/circular connector -

bus connection
1 VP+5 Supply the terminating resistors
2 RxD/TxD-N Received/transmitted data -N, A-line
3 DGND Data transmission potential (earth to 5 V)
4 RxD/TxD-P Received/transmitted data -P, B-line
5 Shielding Shielding / protective earth
Table 101: Pin assignment; X2/X3 - M12, 5-pole circular connector/socket - bus connection, PROFIBUS DP
195
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
29.5. X4 - M8, 4-pole socket, optional - Remote Sensor

On the device
Pin Configuration External circuit
side
1 Supply sensor + S+ +
2 Supply sensor – Remote Sensor

S– –
Type 8798
3 Serial interface, A cable A A cable
digital
4 Serial interface, B cable B B cable
Table 102: Plug assignments; X4 - M8, 4-pole socket - digital, contact-free position sensor Type 8798
Connection of an analog, potentiometric position sensor:
On the device
side
1 Potentiometer 1 1
Potentiometer
2 Center tap 2 2
3 Potentiometer 3 3
4 not used
Table 103: Plug assignments; X4 - M8, 4-pole socket - analog, potentiometric position sensor
196
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
29.6. X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector -

process actual value (Type 8793 only)
Wire DIP On the

colour ** switches*** device side
4 – 20 mA 1 brown +24 V transmitter supply
1
- internally
2 white Output from transmitter Transmitter
supplied 2
3 blue GND (identical with the GND Switch on
3 GND
operating voltage) left
4
4 black Bridge after GND (Pin 3)
4 – 20 mA 1 brown not used
- externally
2 white Process actual + 2 4 – 20 mA
supplied
3 blue not used Switch on
right
4 black Process actual – 4 GND 4 – 20 mA
Frequency 1 brown +24 V sensor supply 1 +24 V
- internally
2 white Clock input + 2 Clock +
supplied
Switch on (identical with
left the GND oper-
ating voltage)
4 black not used
Frequency 1 brown not used
- externally
supplied
3 blue Clock input – Switch on 3 Clock –
right
4 black not used
(see infor- Pt 100
2 white Process actual 1 (power supply)
mation
3 blue Process actual 3 (GND) Switch on
below) 3
right
* Can be adjusted via software (see chapter “25.2.1. PV-INPUT – Specifying signal type for the process actual value”,
page 85).
** The indicated colors refer to the connection cable available as an accessory (918 718).
*** The switch is inside the device on the PCBe (see “Figure 26: Location of the switch; symbols for switch position”, page
54).
Table 104: Plug assignments; X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector - process actual value input; PROFIBUS DP
Connect the Pt 100 sensor via 3 cables for cable compensation reasons.
It is essential to bridge Pin 3 and Pin 4 on the sensor.
197
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
30. START-UP PROFIBUS DP

WARNING!
▶▶ Before start-up, ensure that the operating personnel are familiar with and completely understand the contents of the oper-
ating instructions.
Before start-up, carry out fluid installation (see Chapter “13”) and electrical installation (Chapter “29”) of
Type 8792/8793 and of the valve.
30.2. Start-up sequence

For start-up of Type 8792/8793 PROFIBUS DP the following basic settings are required:
Device type Sequence Type of basic setting Setting via Description.

in chapter
8792 and 8793 1 Adjust device to the local conditions X.TUNE “23.2”
For 8793 only
(Process 2 Activate process controller. ADD.FUNCTION “24”
control)
Settings on Type 8792/8793:
3 Input device address.
BUS.COMM “30.3”
4 Activate or deactivate safety position.
8792 and 8793

Configuration via the control
(PROFIBUS DP Master): PROFIBUS DP
Master by means
5 Configuration of the process values “30.4”
of GSD file and
1. PDI: Process data input
special software
2. PDO: Process data output.
Table 105: Start-up sequence for PROFIBUS DP
198
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
30.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793

Set the following menu options in the BUS.COMM menu for start-up of the PROFIBUS DP:
Address 0 Enter a device address (value between 0 and 126)
BUS FAIL Activate or deactivate approach of the safety position
Selection SafePos on – If there is a fault in the bus communication, the behavior of the actuator depends on
the activation of the SAFEPOS auxiliary function. See Chapter “26.2.11. SAFEPOS
– Input the safety position”.
SAFEPOS activated: The actuator moves to the safety position which is specified in the SAFEPOS aux-
iliary function.
SAFEPOS deactivated: The actuator moves to the safety end position which it would assume if the elec-
trical and pneumatic auxiliary power failed. See Chapter “11.8. Safety end positions
after failure of the electrical or pneumatic auxiliary power”.
Procedure:

/ Select BUS.COMM Selection in the main menu (MAIN).
Setting device address

/ Select Address
/ Increase value Enter a device address (value between 0 and 126).
Reduce value
OK Press Return to BUS.COMM.
Deactivating / activating safety position

/ Select BUS FAIL
ENTER Press The menu options for deactivating and activating the safety position
are displayed.
/ Select menu option SafePos off = deactivated
SafePos on = activated
SELEC Press The selection is now marked by a filled circle .
EXIT Press Return to BUS.COMM.
Table 106: BUS.COMM; settings 199
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
BUS.COMM ENTER Address 0 INPUT Input device address.

Enter
value
OK *
SELEC
BUS FAIL ENTER SafePos off Activating /
deactivating
SafePos on approach of the
EXIT
safety position
Setting of BUS PDI and BUS PDO is made via GSD file
SELEC
BUS PDI ENTER Position Process values
which are trans-
P.CONTROL
CMD active
ferred from Type
8792/8793 to
Only for type
control.
8793:
Process value1)
Setpoint
Temperature
Operation mode
Errors
Only for type

8793:
P.CONTROL active
EXIT
SELEC
EXIT BUS PDO ENTER CMD 2) / Setpoint 1) Process values
which are trans-
Operation mode ferred from control
Error reset to Type 8792/8793.
Only for type

8793:
P.CONTROL active
EXIT
1) only when process controller activated
Figure 119: Operating structure - BUS.COMM; PROFIBUS DP
200
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
30.4. Configuration via the control (PROFIBUS DP

Master)
The configuration requires the following components:
• Software suitable for the configuration. For example Step7 from Siemens A brief description of this can be
found in the following chapter “30.5. Configuration with Siemens Step7”.
• GSD file (download from the Bürkert homepage:)
30.4.1. Supplementary literature on the configuration of the

PROFIBUS DP
More detailed information can be found in the supplementary instructions on the Bürkert homepage:
• „Configuration on the PROFIBUS by means of GSD file“
www.burkert.com → Type 8792 or Type 8793 → Config. PROFIBUS by GSD-file
30.4.2. Configuration of the process values

→→The PDI (Process Data Input) input first.
PDI: Process Data Input (from the Type 8792/8793 to the controller)
Name Description Identifier

PDI:POS Actual position (position) GSD file: PDI:POS
Actual value of positioner as ‰. Value range 0 – 1000.
Values < 0 or > 1000 are possible if e.g. Autotune has not run
through correctly. Identifier (HEX): 41, 40, 00
PDI:CMD Nominal position (command) GSD file: PDI:CMD

Set-point value of positioner as ‰. Value range 0 – 1000. Identifier (HEX): 41, 40, 01
PDI:PV Process actual value (process value) GSD file: PDI:PV

Actual value of process controller in physical unit
(as set in the menu P.CONTROL → SETUP → PV-INPUT or
PDI:SP
PV-SCALE),
max. value range -999 – 9999, depending on internal scaling Identifier (HEX): 41, 40, 02
Process set-point value (setpoint) GSD file: PDI:SP

Set-point value of process controller in physical unit
(as set in the menu P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT or
SP-SCALE),
max. value range -999 – 9999, depending on internal scaling Identifier (HEX): 41, 40, 03
PDI:TEMP Device temperature (temperature) GSD file: PDI:TEMP

Temperature of 0.1 °C is measured on the CPU board by the
sensor,
Value range -550 (-55 °C) – +1250 (+125 °C) Identifier (HEX): 41, 40, 04
201
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP

PDI:MODE Operating state (operation mode) GSD file: PDI:MODE
Operating state:
0: AUTO
1: MANU
2: XTUNE
9: P.QLIN
10: P.TUNE
12: BUSSAFEPOS Identifier (HEX): 41, 00, 05
PDI:ERR Error GSD file: PDI:ERR

Indicates the number of the process value (output) which
was not written. The value is retained until it is deleted with
PDO:ERR.
HEX
14 PDO:CMD / SP
16 PDO:MODE Identifier (HEX): 41, 00, 06
PDI: 0: Positioner GSD file: PDI:PCONact

PCONact
1: Process controller Identifier (HEX): 41, 00, 0A
Table 107: Process Data Input, PROFIBUS DP
PDI:PV and PDI:SP can be selected for Type 8793 (process controller) only and are beneficial only when
process controller activated.
PDI:PCONact can be selected for Type 8793 (process controller) only.
→→Then the PDO (Process Data Output) input.

PDO: Process Data Output (from the controller to the Type 8792/8793)

PDO:CMD/ for positioner Type 8792: Set-point position (input) GSD file: PDO:CMD/SP
SP
Set-point value of positioner as ‰. Value range 0 – 1000 Identifier (HEX): 81, 40, 14
If the value is too small or too large, the last valid value is used
and is indicated in ERR with HEX 14.
for process controller Type 8793: Process set-point value (setpoint)

Set-point value of process controller in physical unit
(as set in the menu P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT or
SP-SCALE),
max. value range -999 – 9999, depending on internal scaling.
202
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP

PDO:MODE Operating state (operation mode) GSD file: PDO:MODE
Value range 0, 1 or 12: Identifier (HEX): 81, 00, 16
0: AUTO / 1: MANU / 12: BUSSAFEPOS
PDO:ERR Reset error display GSD file: PDO:ERR

If the value > 0, ERR is reset Identifier (HEX): 81, 00, 17
PDO: 0: Positioner GSD file: PDO:CONact

CONact
1: Process controller Identifier (HEX): 81, 00, 19
Table 108: Process Data Output, PROFIBUS DP
203
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
30.5. Configuration with Siemens Step7
30.5.1. Example 1 of a positioner (Type 8792): Transfer of set-point

and actual value
Figure 120: ScreenShot PROFIBUS
→→Pull the slave Type 8792 / 8793 onto the bus line with drag-and-drop.
Figure 121: ScreenShot positioner

→→Pull the modules PDI:POS and PDO:CMD/SP into the slave Type 8792 / 8793 with drag-and-drop.
204
english
Type 8792, 8793
PROFIBUS DP
30.5.2. Example 2 of a process controller (Type 8793):

Transfer of several process values
Figure 122: ScreenShot PROFIBUS
→→Pull the slave Type 8792 / 8793 onto the bus line with drag-and-drop.
Figure 123: ScreenShot process controller
→→Pull the modules into the slave Type 8792 / 8793 with drag-and-drop.
205
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
Contents
31. DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................................................................................. 207
31.1. Explanation of term DeviceNet.................................................................................................................................. 207
31.2. Technical data..................................................................................................................................................................... 207
31.3. interfaces............................................................................................................................................................................... 208
31.4. Safety settings if the bus fails................................................................................................................................... 208
31.5. Bus status display............................................................................................................................................................ 209
31.6. Differences between the field bus devices and devices without a field bus................................... 210
32. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................................................................. 211
32.3. X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector ..................................................................................................................... 213
32.4. X3 - M12, 5-pole circular connector - bus connection................................................................................. 213
32.5. X4 - M8, 4-pole socket, optional - Remote Sensor (for remote model only)................................... 214
32.6. X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector - process actual value (Type 8793 only)................................... 215
32.7. Terminating circuit for DeviceNet systems......................................................................................................... 216
32.8. Network topology of a DeviceNet system........................................................................................................... 216
33. START-UP DEVICENET................................................................................................................................................................ 217
33.1. Safety instructions........................................................................................................................................................... 217
33.2. Start-up sequence............................................................................................................................................................ 217
33.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793.............................................................................................. 218
33.4. Configuration of the process data........................................................................................................................... 220
33.4.1. Static input assemblies................................................................................................................ 220
33.4.2. Static output assemblies.............................................................................................................. 222
206
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.5. Configuration example 1............................................................................................................................................... 223
33.5.1. Installation of the EDS file............................................................................................................ 223
33.5.2. Address assignment...................................................................................................................... 223
33.5.3. Offline parameterization of the Device...................................................................................... 224
33.5.4. Online parameterization of the Device...................................................................................... 225
33.6. Configuration example 2............................................................................................................................................... 226
33.6.1. Setting up the process image (Mapping)................................................................................ 227
207
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
31. DESCRIPTION
31.1. Explanation of term DeviceNet

DeviceNet
• The DeviceNet is a field bus system which is based on the CAN protocol (Controller Area Network). It enables
actuators and sensors (slaves) to be networked with higher-level controllers (master).
• The Type 8792/8793 in the DeviceNet is a slave device according to the Predefined Master/Slave Connection
Set stipulated in the DeviceNet specification. Polled I/O, Bit Strobed I/O and Change of State (COS) are sup-
ported as an I/O connection variant.
• With DeviceNet it is necessary to differentiate between cyclical or event-driven high-priority process messages
(I/O Messages) and acyclical low-priority management messages (Explicit Messages).
• The protocol process conforms to the DeviceNet specification Release 2.0.
31.2. Technical data

EDS file BUER8792.EDS
Icons BUER8792.ICO
Baud rate 125 kbit/s, 250 kbit/s, 500 kbit/s
(can be adjusted by pressing operator keys on the device or via network);
Factory setting 125 kBit/s
Address 0 – 63;
(can be adjusted by pressing operator keys on the device or via network);
Factory setting 63
Process data 7 static input assemblies
(Input: from the Type 8792/8793 to the DeviceNet-Master/Scanner)
4 static output assemblies
Total line length according to DeviceNet specification

(Total line length = total of all trunk and drop lines)
Maximum total line length

Baud rate
Thick cable Thin cable
125 kbaud 500 m
250 kbaud 250 m 100 m for all baud rates
500 kbaud 100 m
Table 109: DeviceNet; total line length
208
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
Drop line length (Drop Lines)
Length of the drop lines

Baud rate Maximum total length Drop lines
Maximum length
in the network
125 kbaud 156 m
250 kbaud 6 m for all baud rates 78 m
500 kbaud 39 m
Table 110: DeviceNet; drop line length
31.3. Interfaces
Bus Bus
Input for process Type 8792/8793

actual value* 2 binary outputs
Outputs
DeviceNet
Inputs
4 – 20 mA 24 V PNP
frequency
Pt 100
Binary input
24 V PNP NO
Supply
24 V DC
Operation
Note:
Figure 124: DeviceNet interfaces
31.4. Safety settings if the bus fails

The position is approached which corresponds to the set-point value last transferred (default setting).
Other setting options (see chapter “33.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793”).
209
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
31.5. Bus status display

The bus status is indicated on the display on the device.

(is displayed approx.
every 3 seconds)
Device is not connected to the • Check whether the baud

bus. rate has been correctly set
network-wide.
The network access procedure
BUS offline Offline (Duplicate MAC-ID-Test, • Bus connection including
duration approx. 2 s) has still plug assignment correct.
not ended.
• Check operating supply and
The device is the only active bus connection of the other
network node. nodes.
Online, Device is connected correctly to

the bus, the network access pro-
no connection to • New connection established
BUS no connection cedure has ended without errors,
the master by master.
however there is no established
connection to the master.
• New connection established

by master.
BUS timeout • Ensure that I/O data is

I/O connection An I/O connection is in the transferred cyclically or, if
timeout TIME OUT state. COS confirmed, that cor-
responding Acknowledge
messages are sent by the
master.
Other device with the same
address in the network. • Change address of the
device and restart device
BUS critical err Critical bus error BUS offline due to communi-
cation problems. • Error analysis in the network
with a bus monitor.
Table 111: Bus status display; DeviceNet
210
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
31.6. Differences between the field bus devices and

devices without a field bus
The following chapters of these operating instructions are not valid for Type 8792/8793 with DeviceNet.
• Section “Installation” Chapter “14. Electrical connection -
Circular plug-in connector version (multi-pole version)”
Chapter “15. Electrical connection - Terminal version for cable gland”
• Section “Start-up” Chapter “23.1. INPUT - Setting the input signal”
• Section “Auxiliary functions” Chapter “26.2.5. SPLTRNG – Signal split range”
Chapter “26.2.15. CAL.USER – Calibration of actual value and set-point value”

- Menu option calibr.INP, calibration of the position set-point value
- Menu option calibr.SP, calibration of the process set-point value
211
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
32. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
DANGER!

WARNING!
For operation of the device the following must always be connected:

→→X1 - circular connector M12, 8-pole (for operating voltage see “Table 112: Pin assignment; X1 - M12, 8-pole
circular connector DeviceNet” and
→→X3 - circular connector M12, 5-pole, (see “Table 113: Pin assignment; X3 - M12, 5-pole circular connector -
bus connection; DeviceNet”)
NOTE!
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is only ensured if the appliance is connected correctly to an
earthing point.
On the outside of the housing is a TE terminal for connection of the technical earth (TE).
• Connect the TE terminal to the earthing point via a shortest possible cable (maximum length 30 cm).
212
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet

X1 - M12, 8-pole X4 - M8, 4-pole socket,
circular connector optional (for remote
model only)
2 1
8
1 3
3 7
4 6 2 4
5 X3 - M12, 5-pole
circular connector
4 3
5
Function
earth FE
1 2
Figure 125: Connection Device-Net, positioner Type 8792

X1 - M12, 8-pole X5 - M8, 4-pole circular
circular connector connector
2 1
8
3 1
3 7
4 6
4 2
5
X4 - M8, 4-pole socket, X3 - M12, 5-pole

optional (for remote model circular connector
only) 4 3
Function
1 earth FE 5
3
2 4 1 2
Figure 126: Connection DeviceNet, process controller Type 8793
The device is supplied by the operating voltage, galvanically isolated from the DeviceNet, not by the V+ and
V- voltage of the DeviceNet.
213
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
32.3. X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector
On the device
side
1 not used
2 not used
Operating voltage
3 GND 3
24 V DC ± 10%
4 +24 V 4 max. residual ripple 10%
0–5V (log. 0)
5 Binary input + 5 +
10 – 30 V (log. 1)
6 Binary input – 6 GND (identical with Pin 3)
Output signals to the control centre (e.g. PLC) - (only used for binary output option)
Table 112: Pin assignment; X1 - M12, 8-pole circular connector DeviceNet
32.4. X3 - M12, 5-pole circular connector - bus

connection
Pin Signal Colour Configuration
1 Shielding not used

4 3
2 V+ not used
3 V– not used 5
4 CAN H white
1 2
5 CAN L blue
Table 113: Pin assignment; X3 - M12, 5-pole circular connector - bus connection; DeviceNet
214
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
32.5. X4 - M8, 4-pole socket, optional - Remote Sensor

On the device
side
1 Supply sensor + S+ +
2 Supply sensor – Remote Sensor

S– –
Type 8798
3 Serial interface, A cable A A cable
digital
4 Serial interface, B cable B B cable
Table 114: Plug assignments; X4 - M8, 4-pole socket - digital, contact-free position sensor Type 8798
Connection of an analog, potentiometric position sensor:
On the device
side
1 Potentiometer 1 1
Potentiometer
2 Center tap 2 2
3 Potentiometer 3 3
4 not used
Table 115: Plug assignments; X4 - M8, 4-pole socket - analog, potentiometric position sensor
215
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
32.6. X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector - process actual

value (Type 8793 only)
Wire DIP On the

colour ** switches*** device side
4 – 20 mA 1 brown +24 V transmitter supply
1
- internally
2 white Output from transmitter Transmitter
supplied 2
3 blue GND (identical with the GND Switch on
3 GND
operating voltage) left
4
4 black Bridge after GND (Pin 3)
4 – 20 mA 1 brown not used
- externally
2 white Process actual + 2 4 – 20 mA
supplied
3 blue not used Switch on
right
4 black Process actual – 4 GND 4 – 20 mA
Frequency 1 brown +24 V sensor supply 1 +24 V
- internally
supplied
Switch on (identical with
left the GND oper-
ating voltage)
4 black not used
Frequency 1 brown not used
- externally
supplied
3 blue Clock input – Switch on 3 Clock –
right
4 black not used
(see infor- Pt 100
2 white Process actual 1 (power supply)
mation
3 blue Process actual 3 (GND) Switch on
below) 3
right
* Can be adjusted via software (see chapter “23.1. INPUT - Setting the input signal”).
** The indicated colors refer to the connection cable available as an accessory (918 718).
*** The switch is inside the device on the PCB (see “Figure 26: Location of the switch; symbols for switch position”).
Table 116: Plug assignments; X5 - M8, 4-pole circular connector - process actual value input; DeviceNet
Connect the Pt 100 sensor via 3 cables for cable compensation reasons. It is essential to bridge Pin 3
and Pin 4 on the sensor.
216
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
32.7. Terminating circuit for DeviceNet systems

When installing a DeviceNet system, ensure that the terminating circuit of the data lines is correct. The circuit prevents
the occurrence of interference caused by signals reflected onto the data lines. The trunk line must be terminated at
both ends with resistors of 120 Ω each and 1/4 W power loss (see “Figure 127: Network topology, DeviceNet”).
32.8. Network topology of a DeviceNet system

Line with one trunk line and several drop lines.
Trunk and drop lines are made of identical material (see “Figure 127: Network topology, DeviceNet”).
Trunk line
DeviceNet cable
V+*
V –*
CAN_H
CAN_L
Terminating Drop lines Terminating

resistor DeviceNet cable, resistor
120 Ω max. 6 m long 120 Ω
¼W ¼W
T01 Tn
Subscriber 1 (node 1) Subscriber n (node n)
* not assigned, as separate power supply
Figure 127: Network topology, DeviceNet
217
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33. START-UP DEVICENET

WARNING!
▶▶ Before start-up, ensure that the operating personnel are familiar with and completely understand the contents of the oper-
ating instructions.
Before start-up, carry out fluid installation (see Chapter “13”) and electrical installation (Chapter “32”) of
Type 8792/8793 and of the valve.
33.2. Start-up sequence

The following basic settings are required for start-up of the DeviceNet version of Type 8792/8793:
Device type Sequence Type of basic setting Setting via Description.

in chapter
8792 and 8793 1 Adjust device to the local conditions X.TUNE “23.2”
For 8793 only
(Process 2 Activate process controller. ADD.FUNCTION “24”
control)
Settings on Type 8792/8793:
3 Input device address.
4 Select baud rate. BUS.COMM “33.3”
5 Activate or deactivate safety position.
8792 und 8793

Configuration:
The process data is transferred via an DeviceNet Master
I/O connection. by means of ESD
“33.4”
5 Initialize the I/O connection to transfer the file and special
– Static Input Assemblies software
– Static Output Assemblies.
Table 117: Start-up sequence for DeviceNet
33.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793

218 Set the following menu options in the BUS.COMM menu for start-up of the DeviceNet version:
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
Address 0 Enter a device address (value between 0 and 63)
BAUD RATE Selection of the baud rate
• The baud rate can be changed either by pressing the operator keys on the device or via the bus.
• A change has no effect until a reset (send a reset message to the identity object) or power up is implemented.
This means if the changed baud rate attribute is accessed before a reset or power up, the read (changed)
value does not agree with the still current baud rate (to be changed) of the network.
Select 125 kbit/s, 250 kbit/s or 500 kbit/s
BUS FAIL Activate or deactivate approach of the safety position
Selection SafePos on – If there is a fault in the bus communication, the behavior of the actuator depends on
the activation of the SAFEPOS auxiliary function.
See Chapter “26.2.11. SAFEPOS – Input the safety position”.
SAFEPOS activated: The actuator moves to the safety position which is specified in the SAFEPOS aux-
iliary function.
SAFEPOS deactivated: The actuator moves to the safety end position which it would assume if the elec-
trical and pneumatic auxiliary power failed. See Chapter “11.8. Safety end positions
after failure of the electrical or pneumatic auxiliary power”.
Procedure:

/ Select BUS.COMM Selection in the main menu (MAIN).
Setting device address

/ Select Address
/ Increase value Enter a device address (value between 0 and 63).
Reduce value
OK Press Return to BUS.COMM.
Select baud rate

/ Select BAUD RATE
ENTER Press The input screen is opened.
/ Select baud rate 125 kBd / 250 kBd / 500 KBd
219
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet

Deactivating / activating safety position

/ Select BUS FAIL
ENTER Press The menu options for deactivating and activating the safety position
are displayed.
/ Select menu option SafePos off = deactivated
SafePos on = activated
Table 118: BUS.COMM; settings DeviceNet
BUS.COMM ENTER Address 0 INPUT Input device address.

Enter
value
OK *
SELEC
BAUDRATE ENTER 125 kBd Selection of the
baud rate
250 kBd
EXIT
500 kBd
SELEC
EXIT BUS FAIL ENTER SafePos off Activating /
deactivating
SafePos on approach of the
EXIT
safety position
Figure 128: Operating structure - BUS.COMM; DeviceNet
33.4. Configuration of the process data

The following components are required for the configuration:
220 • Software suitable for the configuration. For example RSNetWorx for DeviceNet (Rev. 4.12.00).
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
• ESD file (is on the supplied CD)
Implementation of the configuration process is described in the following chapters “33.5. Configuration example 1”
and “33.6. Configuration example 2”.
Transmitting process data.

To transmit process data via an I/O connection, 5 static input and 2 static output assemblies can be selected.
These assemblies contain selected attributes combined into one object so that process data can be transmitted
collectively via an I/O connection.
Selecting the process data

The process data is selected by setting the device parameters during initialization of an I/O connection according
to the DeviceNet specification. The following device parameters can be set:
• Active Input Assembly and Active Output Assembly or
• Produced Connection Path and Consumed Connection Path

- if supported by the DeviceNet Master/Scanner -.
33.4.1. Static input assemblies
Name Address of data attribute of the assemblies Format of the data attribute
for read access. Class, Instance, Attribute
POS+ERR 4, 1, 3 Byte 0: POS low
(factory setting) Byte 1: POS high
Byte 2: ERR
POS+CMD+ERR 4, 2, 3 Byte 0: POS low
Byte 1: POS high
Byte 2: CMD low
Byte 3: CMD high
Byte 4: ERR
PV+ERR 4, 3, 3 Byte 0: PV low
Byte 1: PV high
Byte 2: ERR
PV+SP+ERR 4, 4, 3 Byte 0: PV low
Byte 1: PV high
Byte 2: SP low
Byte 3: SP high
Byte 4: ERR
PV+SP+CMD+ERR 4, 5, 3 Byte 0: PV low
Byte 1: PV high
Byte 2: SP low
Byte 3: SP high
Byte 4: CMD low
Byte 5: CMD high
Byte 6: ERR
Table 119: Static input assemblies, DeviceNet
The addresses indicated in “Table 119” can be used as a path data for the attribute Produced Connection Path of
an I/O connection.
The attributes described in more detail in the following “Table 120”can be transferred as input process data via this
I/O connection.
221
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
Nevertheless, by using this address data, the attributes combined in the assemblies can also be accessed acycli-
cally via Explicit Messages.
Name Description of the input data attributes Attribute Address Class,

Instance, Attribute;
Data type, Length
POS Actual position 111, 1, 59;
Actual value of positioner as ‰. Value range 0 – 1000. However,
values <0 or >1000 also possible if e.g. Autotune has not run
through correctly. INT, 2 byte
CMD Nominal position 111, 1, 58;

Set-point value of positioner as ‰. Value range 0 – 1000.
UINT, 2 byte
PV * Process actual value (process value) 120, 1, 3;

Actual value of process controller in physical unit (as set in the
menu P.CONTROL → SETUP → PV-INPUT or PV-SCALE), max.
value range -999 – 9999, depending on internal scaling. INT, 2 byte
SP * Process set-point value 120, 1, 2;

Set-point value of process controller in physical unit (as set in the
menu P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT or SP-SCALE), max.
INT, 2 byte
value range -999 – 9999, depending on internal scaling.
ERR Error 100, 1, 1;

Indicates the number of the process value (output) which was not
written. The value is retained until it is deleted with “1” by acyclically
USINT, 1 byte
writing the “Error” attribute (access via Explicit Message – Set
Attribute Single).
HEX
0X14 INP
0X15 SP
* relevant only for Type 8793 and when process controller activated.
Table 120: Input data attributes; DeviceNet
222
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.4.2. Static output assemblies
Name Address of data attribute of the assemblies Format of the

for read access. Class, Instance, Attribute
data attribute
INP (factory setting) 4, 21, 3 Byte 0: INP low
Byte 1: INP high
SP 4, 22, 3 Byte 0: SP low
Byte 1: SP high
Table 121: Static output assemblies; DeviceNet
The addresses indicated in “Table 121” can be used as path data for the attribute Consumed Connection Path of
an I/O connection.
The attributes described in more detail in the following “Table 122” can be transferred as output process data via
this I/O connection.
Nevertheless, by using this address data, the attributes combined in the assemblies can also be accessed acycli-
cally via Explicit Messages.
Name Description of the output data attributes Attribute Address Class,

Instance, Attribute; Data
type, Length
INP Nominal position 111, 1, 58;
Set-point value of positioner as ‰. Value range 0 – 1000.
In “pure” positioner mode (P.CONTROL inactive) the transfer of UINT, 2 byte
the nominal position INPUT is required; as a process controller
(PCONTROL active) the transfer of INPUT is not possible.
If the value is too small or too large, the last valid value is used and
is indicated in ERR with HEX 14.
SP * Process set-point value 120, 1, 2;
Set-point value of process controller in physical unit (as set in the
menu P.CONTROL → SETUP → SP-INPUT or SP-SCALE), max.
INT, 2 byte
value range -999 – 9999, depending on internal scaling.
If the value is too small or too large, the last valid value is used and
is indicated in ERR with HEX 15.
* relevant only for Type 8793 and when process controller activated.
Table 122: Output data attributes; DeviceNet
223
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.5. Configuration example 1
The example describes the principle procedure when configuring the device using the software RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet (Rev. 4.12.00).
33.5.1. Installation of the EDS file

The EDS file supplied on the CD is installed with the aid of the EDS Installation Wizard Tool associated with
RSNetWorx.
During the installation procedure the icon also supplied on CD can be assigned (if this does not occur automatically).
33.5.2. Address assignment

There are two options of assigning an address to the devices.
• The address can be set by pressing the operator keys on the device to the required value within the range 0 – 63
(see chapter “33.3. BUS.COMM – Settings on Type 8792/8793”).
• with the aid of the Tools Node Commissioning belonging to RSNetWorx the address of connected devices can
be changed via the bus. Therefore devices with the default address 63 can also be inserted sequentially into an
existing network without difficulty.
The following image indicates how the new address 2 is assigned to a device with address 63.
Figure 129: Screenshot - DeviceNet - Address assignment
224
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.5.3. Offline parameterization of the Device

When a device has been inserted into the DeviceNet configuration of RSNetWorx, the device can be parameterized
offline.
“Figure 130” indicates how, for example, an input assembly which deviates from the factory setting (input process
data can be transferred via I/O connection) can be selected.
However, ensure that the length of the process data during a subsequent configuration of the DeviceNet master/
scanner is adjusted accordingly (see chapter entitled “33.6. Configuration example 2”).
All parameter changes implemented offline must become operative for the real device at a later date by a
download process.
Figure 130: Screenshot - DeviceNet - Offline Parameterization, Select input assembly
225
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.5.4. Online parameterization of the Device

Devices can also be parameterized online. In doing so, you can also select whether only individual parameters
(single) or all parameters (all) of a group are read from the device (upload) or are loaded into the device (download).
It is also possible to transfer individual parameters or all parameters of a group cyclically in monitor mode. This may
be helpful particularly for start-up purposes.
“Figure 131” shows the group of the process values or diagnosis information.
• If Monitor is actuated, these values are updated cyclically.
• Explicit Messages are used for this cyclical access (no I/O connections).
Figure 131: Screenshot - DeviceNet - Online Parameterization, process values/diagnosis information
226
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.6. Configuration example 2

This example describes the principle procedure for setting up the process image of a DeviceNet master/scanner
using the software RSNetWorx for DeviceNet (Rev. 4.12.00).
Setting up the scan list and setting the I/O parameters

→→First of all set up the scan list of the DeviceNet master/scanner.
To do this, include the devices listed in the left part of the associated window in the scan list in the right part of
the window.
→→Then the I/O parameters can be changed for each device included in the scan list.
This is required if assemblies which differ from the default settings were selected during configuration of the
device in question.
“Figure 132” shows the setting of the I/O parameters when

- Input assembly .
POS+CMD+ERR (5 bytes long) is selected and when
- Output assembly
INP (2 bytes long; default assembly - no change required) is selected
Figure 132: Screenshot - DeviceNet - Setting of I/O parameters
227
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
33.6.1. Setting up the process image (Mapping)

The AUTOMAP function is used to assign the input data of the devices specified in the scan list to the process
image of the DeviceNet master/scanner.
In our example this is how the assignment indicated in “Figure 133” results.
For example the input process values of the device with address 3 are assigned to the internal addresses of the
scanner as follows:
Actual position I:1.1
Nominal position I:1.2
Error I:1.3
If the actual position of the device with address 3 is to be read from a control program, this is done by accessing I:1.1.
Figure 133: Screenshot - DeviceNet - Setting up process image
228
english
Type 8792, 8793
DeviceNet
229
english
Type 8792, 8793
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Contents
34. MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................................................................ 230
35. ERROR MESSAGES AND MALFUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................... 230
35.1. Error messages on the display................................................................................................................................. 230
35.1.1. General error messages............................................................................................................... 230
35.1.2. Error and warning messages while the X.TUNE function is running............................ 231
35.1.3. Error messages while the P.Q’LIN function is running...................................................... 232
35.1.4. Error messages while the P.TUNE function is running . .................................................. 232
35.1.5. Error Messages on Field Bus Devices...................................................................................... 233
35.2. Other faults.......................................................................................................................................................................... 234
230
english
Type 8792, 8793
34. MAINTENANCE
The Type 8792/8793 is maintenance-free when operated according to the instructions in this manual.
35. ERROR MESSAGES AND MALFUNCTIONS
35.1. Error messages on the display
35.1.1. General error messages

Minimum input value has been reached Do not reduce value further
min
Maximum input value has been reached Do not increase value further
max
CMD error Signal error Check signal

Set-point value positioner (positioner)
SP error Signal error Check signal
Set-point value process controller
PV error Signal error Check signal
Actual value process controller
PT100 error Signal error Check signal
Actual value Pt-100
invalid Code Incorrect access code Input correct access code
EEPROM fault EEPROM defective Not possible, device defective
Table 123: General error message
231
english
Type 8792, 8793
35.1.2. Error and warning messages while the X.TUNE function is

running

TUNE Manual termination of self-parameterization
err/break by pressing the EXIT key
X.TUNE locked The X.TUNE function is blocked Input access code
X.TUNE No compressed air connected Connect compressed air
ERROR 1
X.TUNE Compressed air failed during Autotune Check compressed air supply
ERROR 2 (X.TUNE).
X.TUNE Actuator or control system deaeration side Not possible, device defective
ERROR 3 leaking
X.TUNE Control system aeration side leaking Not possible, device defective
ERROR 4
X.TUNE The rotation range of the position sensor is Correct attachment of the position sensor
ERROR 5 exceeded by 180° shaft on the actuator (see chapter “12.2”
and “12.3”).
X.TUNE The end positions for POS-MIN and Check compressed air supply
ERROR 6 POS-MAX are too close together
X.TUNE Incorrect assignment POS-MIN and To determine POS-MIN and POS-MAX,
ERROR 7 POS-MAX move the actuator in the direction indi-
cated on the display.
X.TUNE Potentiometer is not coupled optimally to Set middle position as described
WARNING 1** the actuator. in chapter “12.2.4. Aligning lever
mechanism”.
An optimum connection can provide a more
accurate position measurement
** Warning information gives tips on optimized operation. The device is operational even if this warning information is not
observed. Warning information is automatically hidden after several seconds.
Table 124: Error and warning message on X.TUNE
232
english
Type 8792, 8793
35.1.3. Error messages while the P.Q’LIN function is running

Q.LIN Manual termination of linearization by
P.Q‘LIN No supply pressure connected. Connect supply pressure.
ERROR 1
P.Q‘LIN Failure of the supply pressure while Check supply pressure.
ERROR 2 P.Q’LIN running.
Automatic adjustment of the X.TUNE Run X.TUNE.
positioner not run.
Table 125: Error message on P.Q.‘LIN; process controller Type 8793
35.1.4. Error messages while the P.TUNE function is running

TUNE Manual termination of self-optimization by
P.TUNE No supply pressure connected. Connect supply pressure.
ERROR 1
Table 126: Error message on P.TUNE; process controller Type 8793
233
english
Type 8792, 8793
35.1.5. Error Messages on Field Bus Devices
MFI fault Field bus board defective. Not possible, device defective.
Table 127: Error Messages on Field Bus Devices
On DeviceNet:

(is displayed
approx. every
3 seconds)
Device is not connected to the bus. • Check whether the baud rate has
been correctly set network-wide.
The network access procedure
BUS offline Offline (Duplicate MAC-ID-Test, duration • Bus connection including plug
approx. 2 s) has still not ended. assignment correct.
The device is the only active network • Check operating supply and bus
node. connection of the other nodes.
Online, Device is connected correctly to the

bus, the network access procedure
BUS no no connection • New connection established by
has ended without errors, however
connection to the master master.
there is no established connection
to the master.
• New connection established by

master.
BUS timeout I/O connection An I/O connection is in the TIME • Ensure that I/O data is transferred
timeout OUT state. cyclically or, if COS confirmed, that
corresponding Acknowledge mes-
sages are sent by the master.
Other device with the same • Change address of the device and
Critical bus address in the network. restart device
BUS critical err
error BUS offline due to communication • Error analysis in the network with a
problems. bus monitor.
Table 128: Error message DeviceNet
On PROFIBUS:

• Check bus connection including
BUS offline Device is not connected to the plug assignment.
Offline. bus.
is displayed approx.
every 3 seconds • Check operating voltage and bus
connection of the other nodes.
234 Table 129: Error message PROFIBUS
english
Type 8792, 8793
35.2. Other faults
Problem Possible causes Remedial action

POS = 0 (when CMD > 0%) or Sealing function (CUTOFF) has been unin- Deactivate sealing
POS = 100%, (when CMD < 100%) tentionally activated function.
PV = 0 (when SP > 0) or
PV = PV (when SP > SP )
Applies only to devices with binary Binary output: Check binary output
output: connection.
• Current > 100 mA
Binary output does not switch.
• Short-circuit
Applies only to devices with P.CONTROL menu option is in the main Remove P.CONTROL
process controller: menu. The device is therefore operating as menu option from the
a process controller and expects a process main menu. See chapter
Device is not operating as a con-
actual value at the corresponding input. “19.1.2. Deactivating
troller, despite correctly implemented
auxiliary functions”.
settings.
Table 130: Other faults
235
english
Type 8792, 8793
Packaging, Storage, Disposal
Contents
36. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT............................................................................................................................................. 236
37. STORAGE............................................................................................................................................................................................ 236
38. DISPOSAL.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 236
236
english
Type 8792, 8793
Packaging, Storage, Disposal
36. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT
NOTE!
Transport damages.
Inadequately protected equipment may be damaged during transport.
• During transportation protect the device against wet and dirt in shock-resistant packaging.
• Avoid exceeding or dropping below the allowable storage temperature.
37. STORAGE
NOTE!
Incorrect storage may damage the device.
• Store the device in a dry and dust-free location.
• Storage temperature. -20 – +65 °C.
38. DISPOSAL
→→Dispose of the device and packaging in an environmentally friendly manner.
NOTE!
Damage to the environment caused by device components contaminated with media.
• Observe applicable disposal regulations and environmental regulations.
Observe national waste disposal regulations.
237
english
Type 8792, 8793
Additional technical information
Contents
39. SELECTION CRITERIA FOR CONTINUOUS VALVES.................................................................................................. 238
40. PROPERTIES OF PID CONTROLLERS................................................................................................................................ 240
40.1. P-portion................................................................................................................................................................................ 240
40.2. I-portion.................................................................................................................................................................................. 241
40.3. D-portion................................................................................................................................................................................ 242
40.4. Superposition of P, I and D Portions...................................................................................................................... 243
40.5. Implemented PID controller........................................................................................................................................ 244
40.5.1. D Portion with delay...................................................................................................................... 244
40.5.2. Function of the real PID controller............................................................................................. 244
41. ADJUSTMENT RULES FOR PID CONTROLLERS........................................................................................................... 245
41.1. Adjustment rules according to Ziegler and Nichols (oscillation method)......................................... 245
41.2. Adjustment rules according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick .

(actuating variable jump method)............................................................................................................................ 247
238
english
Type 8792, 8793
39. SELECTION CRITERIA FOR CONTINUOUS

VALVES
The following criteria are crucial for optimum control behavior and to ensure that the required maximum flow is reached:
• the correct selection of the flow coefficient which is defined primarily by the orifice of the valve;
• close coordination between the nominal width of the valve and the pressure conditions in consideration of the
remaining flow resistance in the equipment.
Design guidelines can be given on the basis of the flow coefficient (kV value). The kV value refers to standardised
conditions with respect to pressure, temperature and media properties.
The kV value describes the flow rate of water through a component in m³/h at a pressure difference of ∆p = 1 bar
and T = 20 °C.
The “kVS value” is also used for continuous valves. This indicates the kV value when the continuous valve is fully open.
Depending on the specified data, it is necessary to differentiate between the two following cases when selecting
the valve:
a) The pressure values p1 and p2, known before and after the valve, represent the required maximum flow-rate
Qmax which is to be reached:
The required kVS value is calculated as follows:
∆p0 ρ
kv s = Qmax ⋅ ⋅ (1)
∆p ρ0
Meaning of the symbols:

kVS flow coefficient of the continuous valve when fully open [m³/h]
Qmax maximum volume flow rate [m³/h]
∆p0 = 1 bar; pressure loss on the valve according to the definition of the kV value
ρ0 = 1000 kg/m³; density of water (according to the definition of the kV value)
∆p pressure loss on the valve [bar]
ρ density of the medium [kg/m³]
b) The pressure values, known at the input and output of the entire equipment (p1 and p2), represent the required
maximum flow-rate Qmax which is to be reached:
1st step: Calculate the flow coefficient of the entire equipment kVges according to equation (1).
2nd step: Determine the flow-rate through the equipment without the continuous valve
(e.g. by "short-circuiting" the line at the installation location of the continuous valve).
3rd step: Calculate the flow coefficient of the equipment without the continuous valve (kVa)
according to equation (1).
4th step: Calculate the required kVS value of the continuous valve according to equation (2):
1
kv s = (2)
1 1
−
kVges² kV a²
239
english
Type 8792, 8793
The kVS value of the continuous valve should have at least the value which is calculated according to
equation (1) or (2) which is appropriate to the application, however it should never be far above the calcu-
lated value.
The rule of thumb "slightly higher is never harmful" often used for switching valves may greatly impair the
control behavior of continuous valves!
The upper limit for the kVS value of the continuous valve can be specified in practice via the so-called valve authority Ψ:
( ∆p ) V 0 kV a²
ψ= = (3)
( ∆p ) 0 kV a² + kV S²
(∆p)V0 Pressure drop over the fully opened valve

(∆p)0 Pressure drop over the entire equipment
If the valve authority Ψ < 0.3 the continuous valve has been oversized.
When the continuous valve is fully open, the flow resistance in this case is significantly less than the flow
resistance of the remaining fluid components in the equipment. This means that the valve position pre-
dominates in the operating characteristic in the lower opening range only. For this reason the operating
characteristic is highly deformed.
By selecting a progressive (equal percentage) transfer characteristic between position set-point value and
valve stroke, this can be partially compensated and the operating characteristic linearised within certain
limits. However, the valve authority Ψ should be > 0.1 even if a correction characteristic is used.
The control behavior (control quality, transient time) depends greatly on the working point if a correction
characteristic is used.
240
english
Type 8792, 8793
40. PROPERTIES OF PID CONTROLLERS

A PID controller has a proportional, an integral and a differential portion (P, I and D portion).
40.1. P-portion
Function:
Y = Kp ⋅ X d
Kp is the proportional coefficient (proportional gain). It is the ratio of the adjusting range ∆Y to the proportional
range ∆Xd.
Characteristic and step response of the P portion of a PID controller
Xd
Y t
Ymax Y
Kp⋅Xd
Adjustment
Y0
range ∆Y
Ymin Xd t
Proportional range ∆Xd
Characteristic Step response
Figure 134: Characteristic and step response of the P portion of a PID controller
Properties
In theory a pure P-controller functions instantaneously, i.e. it is quick and therefore dynamically favorable. It has a
constant control difference, i.e. it does not fully correct the effects of malfunctions and is therefore statically relatively
unfavorable.
241
english
Type 8792, 8793
40.2. I-portion
Function:
1
Ti∫
Y= Xddt (5)
Ti is the integral action time or actuating time. It is the time which passes until the actuating variable has run
through the whole adjustment range.
Characteristic and step response of the I portion of a PID controller
X
Xd
dY
dt
Ymax
Adjustment
range ∆Y
Xd
Ymin
Characteristic Step response
Figure 135: Characteristic and step response of the I portion of a PID controller
Properties
A pure I-controller completely eliminates the effects of any malfunctions which occur. It therefore has a favorable
static behavior. On account of its final actuating speed control it operates slower than the P-controller and has a
tendency to oscillate. It is therefore dynamically relatively unfavorable.
242
english
Type 8792, 8793
40.3. D-portion
Function:
dXd
Y = K d⋅ (6)
dt
Kd is the derivative action coefficient. The larger Kd is, the greater the D-effect is.
Characteristic and step response of the D-portion of a PID controller
X X
Xd
Y Y
Step response Ramp response
Figure 136: Characteristic and step response of the D portion of a PID controller
Properties
A controller with a D portion responds to changes in the control variable and may therefore reduce any control dif-
ferences more quickly.
243
english
Type 8792, 8793
40.4. Superposition of P, I and D Portions

Function:
1 dXd
Y = K p⋅X d+
Ti ∫ Xddt +K d
dt
(7)
Where Kp · Ti = Tn and Kd/Kp = Tv the function of the PID controller is calculated according to the following
equation:
1 dXd
Y = K p⋅( X d +
Tn ∫ Xddt + T v
dt
) (8)
Kp Proportional coefficient / proportional gain

Tn Reset time
(Time which is required to obtain an equally large change in the actuating variable by the I portion, as
occurs due to the P portion)
Tv Derivative time
(Time by which a certain actuating variable is reached earlier on account of the D portion than with a
pure P-controller)
Step response and ramp response of the PID controller
X X
Xd
t t
Y Y
D-portion
I-portion
I-portion
Kp⋅Xd D-portion
P-portion P-portion
t t
Reset time Tn Hold-back time Tv
Step response of the PID controller Ramp response of the PID controller
Figure 137: Characteristic of step response and ramp response of PID controller
244
english
Type 8792, 8793
40.5. Implemented PID controller
40.5.1. D Portion with delay

In the process controller Type 8793 the D portion is implemented with a delay T.
Function:
dY dXd
T⋅ + Y = K d⋅ (9)
dt dt
Superposition of P, I and DT Portions
X
Xd
Y
Xd
T
t
T
Figure 138: Characteristic of superposition of P, I and DT Portions
40.5.2. Function of the real PID controller
dY 1 dXd
T⋅
dt
+Y =Kp( Xd+
Tn ∫ Xddt + T v
dt
(10)
Superposition of P, I and DT Portions
X
Xd
Y
Kp Xd
T
Kp⋅Xd
t
Tn
Figure 139: Characteristic of step response of the real PID controller; adjustment rules for PID controllers
245
english
Type 8792, 8793
41. ADJUSTMENT RULES FOR PID CONTROLLERS

The control system Type 8793 features a self-optimization function for the structure and parameters of the integrated
process controller. The determined PID parameters can be seen via the operating menu and re-optimized at will for
an empirical path.
The regulatory literature includes a series of adjustment rules which can be used in experimental ways to determine
a favorable setting for the controller parameters. To avoid incorrect settings, always observe the conditions under
which the particular adjustment rules have been drawn up. Apart from the properties of the control process and the
controller itself, the aspect whether a change in the disturbance variable or command variable is to be corrected
plays a role.
41.1. Adjustment rules according to Ziegler and Nichols

(oscillation method)
With this method the controller parameters are adjusted on the basis of the behavior of the control circuit at the
stability limit. The controller parameters are first adjusted so that the control circuit starts to oscillate. The occurring
critical characteristic values suggest a favorable adjustment of the controller parameters. A prerequisite for the
application of this method of course is that the control circuit is oscillated.
Procedure
→→Set controller as P-controller (i.e. Tn = 999, Tv = 0), first select a low value for Kp
→→Set required set-point value
→→Increase Kp until the control variable initiates an undamped continuous oscillation.
The proportionality coefficient (proportional gain) set at the stability limit is designated as Kkrit. The resulting oscil-
lation duration is designated as Tkrit.
Progress of the control variable at the stability limit
Actual value
X
Tkrit t
Time
Figure 140: Progress of the control variable PID
246
english
Type 8792, 8793
The controller parameters can then be calculated from Kkrit and Tkrit according to the following table.
Adjustment of the parameters according to Ziegler and Nichols
Controller type Adjustment of the parameters

P controller Kp = 0.5 Kkrit - -
PI controller Kp = 0.45 Kkrit Tn = 0.85 Tkrit -
PID controller Kp = 0.6 Kkrit Tn = 0.5 Tkrit Tv = 0.12 Tkrit
Table 131: Adjustment of the parameters according to Ziegler and Nichols
The adjustment rules of Ziegler and Nichols have been determined for P-controlled systems with a time delay of
the first order and dead time. However, they apply only to controllers with a disturbance reaction and not to those
with a reference reaction.
247
english
Type 8792, 8793
41.2. Adjustment rules according to Chien, Hrones and

Reswick (actuating variable jump method)
With this method the controller parameters are adjusted on the basis of the transient behavior of the controlled
system. An actuating variable jump of 100% is output. The times Tu and Tg are derived from the progress of the
actual value of the control variable.
Progress of the control variable following an actuating variable jump ∆Y
Actuating
variable Y
∆Y
Actual value
Ks⋅∆Y
Control variable
∆X
t
Tu Tg
Figure 141: Progress of the control variable, actuating variable jump
Procedure
→→Switch controller to MANUAL (MANU) operating state
→→Output the actuating variable jump and record control variable with a recorder
→→If progresses are critical (e.g. danger of overheating), switch off promptly.
Note that in thermally slow systems the actual value of the control variable may continue to rise after the
controller has been switched off.
In the following “Table 132” the adjustment values have been specified for the controller parameters, depending
on Tu, Tg and Ks for reference and disturbance reaction, as well as for an aperiodic control process and a control
process with a 20% overshoot. They apply to controlled systems with P-behavior, with dead time and with a delay
of the first order.
248
english
Type 8792, 8793
Adjustment of the parameters according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick
Adjustment of the parameters
Controller type for aperiodic control process for control process

(0% overshoot) with 20% overshoot
Reference Malfunction Reference Malfunction
Tg Tg Tg Tg
P controller Kp = 0,3 · Kp = 0,3 · Kp = 0,7 · Kp = 0,7·
Tu · Ks Tu · Ks Tu · Ks Tu · Ks
Tg Tg Tg Tg
PI controller Kp = 0,35 · Kp = 0,6 · Kp = 0,6 · Kp = 0,7·
Tn = 1,2 · Tg Tn = 4 · Tu Tn = Tg Tn = 2,3 · Tu
Tg Tg Tg Tg
PID controller Kp = 0,6 · Kp = 0,95 · Kp = 0,95 · Kp = 1,2 ·
Tn = Tg Tn = 2,4 · Tu Tn = 1,35 · Tg Tn = 2 · Tu
T v = 0,5 · Tu T v = 0,42 · Tu T v = 0,47 · Tu T v = 0,42 · Tu
Table 132: Adjustment of the parameters according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick
The proportionality factor Ks of the controlled system is calculated as follows:
∆X
Ks= (11)
∆Y
249
english
Type 8792, 8793
Tables for customer-specific settings
Contents
42. TABLE FOR YOUR SETTINGS ON THE POSITIONER................................................................................................ 250
42.1. Settings of the freely programmable characteristic...................................................................................... 250
43. TABLE FOR YOUR SETTINGS ON THE PROCESS CONTROLLER TYPE 8793............................................. 251
43.1. Set parameters of the process controller........................................................................................................... 251
250
english
Type 8792, 8793
Tables for customer-specific
settings
42. TABLE FOR YOUR SETTINGS ON THE

POSITIONER
42.1. Settings of the freely programmable characteristic
Node (position Valve stroke [%]

set-point
value as %) Date: Date: Date: Date:
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
251
english
Type 8792, 8793
settings
43. TABLE FOR YOUR SETTINGS ON THE

PROCESS CONTROLLER TYPE 8793
43.1. Set parameters of the process controller
Date: Date: Date: Date:

KP
TN
TV
X0
DBND
DP
PVmin
PVmax
SPmin
SPmax
UNIT
K factor
FILTER
INP
252
english
Type 8792, 8793
settings
253
english
www.burkert.com
11.7 Burkert Gland Water Valve

2052
Pneumatic rotary drive
• Modular program for mounting of quarter turn

valves such as ball valves and butterfly valves
• NAMUR and ISO 5211 interfaces
• Position feedback (including Ex-Versions)
• SideControl Positioner ready
Type 2052 can be combined with…
Type 6518/6519 Type 8792/93 Type 2654 Type TEUXXX Type 2671
Solenoid valve Positioner SideControl Stainless steel Position feedback Metal butterfly valve
ball valve
The 2052 pneumatic rotary drives are low

Technical data
maintenance single or double-acting pneu-
Materials
matic linear piston actuators where linear
Actuator aluminium (Cataphoresis/Rilsan coating)
movement of the piston due to the pilot air Piston aluminium
causes a 90º rotation of the connected valve. Seal NBR
Actuator-valve coupling is made via a universal
Control medium filtered compressed air
ISO 5211 mechanical interface and the status
with or without oil
of ball or butterfly valve can be monitored at
a control system through a range of rugged Control pressure 3-8 bar single-acting
3-8 bar double-acting
feedback switches. The drives can also be
max. 8 bar
used as modulating control actuators by the
addition of Bürkert’s range of SideControl Tumg -32 up to + 90º C
positioners. The drive is both internally and ex- Rotation 90º
ternally Cataphoresis and Rilsan coated, which Adjustable angle 5º for each end position (0° to 5° / 85° to 90°)
makes it highly resistant to corrosion and main- Interface
tenance free. Pilot air ports NAMUR Flange interface VDE/VDI 3845
G 1/4
Feedback signal NAMUR VDE/VDI 3845
Fittings ISO 5211
Control function A
A
Certification ATEX EXII2GDc IP67 T6
Single-acting actuator return SIL2
by spring, operating e.g. with
P
pilot valve
Control function I A
Double-acting actuator,
operating e.g. with pilot valve P
Control function B
Single-acting actuator return
by spring
Function principles see p. 3
www.burkert.com p. 1/4
2052
Ordering chart (other versions on request)

Double-acting actuator (Control function I)
Torque (Nm) dependent on control pressure Air volume (l)

Actuator size
Control pressure (bar)
Item no.
opening
closing
Weight
3 4 5 5,5 6 7 8
[kg]
W 7.90 11.30 14.10 15.50 17.00 19.80 22.90 0.075 0.11 0.92 254 851
J / 00 11.60 16.10 20.50 22.70 25.00 29.50 33.90 0.15 0.18 1.40 254 852
5 / 05 23.50 32.30 41.00 45.30 49.70 58.40 67.10 0.28 0.37 2.57 254 853
K / 10 32.90 45.60 58.30 65.00 71.00 83.70 96.40 0.35 0.45 3.08 254 854
L / 15 55.20 75.60 96.00 106.20 116.50 136.90 157.40 0.65 0.82 4.20 254 855
Q / 20 77.70 107.00 136.30 151.00 165.50 194.80 224.00 0.80 1.15 5.61 254 856
Y / 25 140.10 190.10 240.00 264.90 290.00 339.90 393.90 1.50 2.02 9.30 254 857
M / 30 226.50 307.40 388.30 428.70 469.20 550.10 631.00 2.05 3.00 11.60 254 858
Single-acting actuator (Control function A, 6 spring packages per side)
Torque (Nm) dependent on control pressure Air volume (l)

Actuator size
Control pressure (bar) Spring force
Item no.
opening
closing
Weight
5 6 8
[kg]
0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 90° 0°
W 7.40 4.10 10.30 7.00 16.20 12.90 10.00 6.70 0.075 0.11 1.00 254 859
J / 00 9.40 4.00 13.90 8.50 22.80 17.40 16.50 11.10 0.15 0.18 1.63 254 860
5 / 05 20.10 9.60 28.80 18.30 46.20 35.70 31.40 20.90 0.28 0.37 2.94 254 861
K / 10 27.50 12.70 40.20 25.40 65.60 50.80 45.60 30.80 0.35 0.45 3.48 254 862
L / 15 47.00 24.50 67.50 45.00 108.40 85.90 71.50 49.00 0.65 0.82 5.04 254 863
Q / 20 70.50 31.60 99.70 60.80 158.20 119.30 104.70 65.80 0.80 1.15 6.63 254 864
Y / 25 120.60 58.20 170.60 108.20 274.50 212.10 181.80 119.40 1.50 2.02 11.30 254 865
M / 30 192.60 98.00 273.50 178.90 435.30 340.70 290.30 195.70 2.05 3.00 15.30 254 866
Ordering chart – Accessories
Specifications
Item no.
universal adapter for shaft 787 338

universal assembly bridge 770 294
p. 2/4
2052
Functional principle
Control function A
Air supplied to Port “4” forces the pistons The loss of air pressure (air or electric failure)
toward the actuator end caps, compressing at Port “4” allows the springs to force the
the springs. A counter-clockwise rotation is pistons inward. A clockwise rotation is
achieved. Exhaust air exits from Port 2. achieved. Exhaust air exits from Port 4.
"4" "2" "4" "2"
Control function I
Air supplied to port 4 forces the pistons Air supplied to Port 2 forces the pistons inward.
towards the actuator end caps. A counter- A clockwise rotation is achieved. Exhaust air
clockwise rotation is achieved. Exhaust air exits exits from Port 4.
from Port 2.
"4" "2" "4" "2"
Note: Top view
p. 3/4
2052
Dimensions [mm]
F
Connection 4 Connection 2
closed open
B
X
C
Pneumatic
connection
Y
D
E
Actuator - ISO5211 VDI/VDE 3845

30
X
Y
45
M5
M5
°
Z
32
80
A
G1/4
W1
Q1
W
Q
24
Size A B C D E F G Q Q1 W W1 Ø Z1 SW ISO5211
W 140.20 89.30 37.20 48.20 76.10 20 8 36 42 M5 M5 14.30 11 F03-04
J / 00 152.30 101.30 43.20 52.20 84.10 20 10 42 50 M5 M6 19.00 14 F04-05
5 / 05 200.80 118.30 49.20 61.70 101.60 20 10 50 70 M6 M8 23.00 17 F05-07
K / 10 224.40 122.30 52.20 62.70 103.60 20 10 50 70 M6 M8 23.00 17 F05-07
L / 15 264.20 137.80 59.70 70.50 119.40 20 10 50 70 M6 M8 23.00 17 F05-07
Q / 20 309.50 146.30 63.70 75.10 127.50 20 16 50 70 M6 M8 29.00 22 F05-07
Y / 25 356.20 174.30 77.20 89.20 153.50 20 16 70 102 M8 M10 36.50 27 F07-10
M / 30 427.50 190.80 86.30 97.20 169.00 20 16 70 102 M8 M10 36.50 27 F07-10
To find your nearest Bürkert facility click on the orange box g www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alteration.

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 1407/2_EU-en_00895240
p. 4/4
EV
2/2-ways hut
-offbutter
flyvalves,i
nmetalfor
medias t
reams.
Therearediff
erenthous i
ngt ypesandmat eri
al
s
fordiver
seapplicat
ions.Theyar eusedinthe /Duc
til
eIr
on
metalindust
ry,powergener ati
on,pulpand
paper,mini
ng,shipbuil
di
ng, envir
onmental
engineeri
ngandmec hanicalengineri
ng.
Theval
vei sconstr
uctedwithacastiron
orduct
il
eironbodyands t
ainl
esssteel
316disc.Thes t
em isstai
nl
esssteel410
andcomeswi thEPDM, NBRorot her
ther
moplasti
cli
ner.
T
o12”
DN300 Pl
eas
eref
ert
otechni
caldat
a
p.1/
8
EV
/Duc
til
eir
on
p.2/
8
2671,EV
p.3/
8
p.4/
8
EV
&
p.5/
8
p.6/
8
p.7/
8
cont
inued
92150858
92150607
92133833
T
ype8792el
ect
ropneumat
icpos
iti
oner 92133832
92133834
EV
p.8/
8
2655 2-Way
2/2-way Quarter-Turn ball valve in

stainless steel with pneumatic
actuator
• Semi lugged stainless steel body

• Compact design; 3 piece
• ISO pad standard on all components
• Pilot valve connection NAMUR
• Complete accessory range available
Type 2655 can be combined with...
Type 6519 Namur Feedback Type 8644 V-Port Valve Type 8792 Type 8045
Pilot valve Switch box AirLINE control Ball valves with Digital positioner Insertion Magflow
system V-Balls Meter
Complete ball valve system Type 2655 con- Technical data

sists of a pneumatic quarter turn actuator and
Orifice DN 15 - 100
a 2/2-way ball valve. This datasheet details
the threaded or weld connection versions; see Body Material Stainless steel
separate datasheet for flanged valves. The ball Actuator material Rilsan & Epoxy coated Aluminium
valve body is 3-piece. The connection between
Valve seal material PTFE
the actuator and the ball valve takes place via a
standard interface (ISO flange connection). Pilot air ports material Stainless steel
Media Gaseous and liquid media, which do not attack the body
The compact, pneumatically actuated ball valve and sealing materials
can be employed for a wide range of applica-
Media temperature -10 to +180°C
tions, even under heavy-duty, slightly aggres-
sive conditions. Ambient temperature -10 to +60°C
Control medium Pneumatic air (neutral gases)
High quality V-Port ball valves available, with Can be actuated with water & other neutral fluids
30° and 60° V-Port valves available standard
Port connection BSP threaded port ½” .. 4”
(other angles on request).
Other sizes & port types on request, weld, etc
See separate datasheet for flanged version
Pilot pressure
Double-acting actuator 3 .. 8 bar
Spring-return actuator 5 .. 8 bar
Cycle time to open//close

Double-acting actuator 0.15 seconds (depending on load and pilot pressure)
Applications Spring-return actuator 0.2 seconds (depending on load and pilot pressure)
Connection between actuator Flange acc. to ISO 5211 or DIN 3337

Chemical process engineering
and ball valve
Food and feed processing
Rotation 90° ±3°
Machine industry
Installation As required, preferably with actuator in upright position
Water treatment
Cleaning machines
Drinking water distribution etc.
www.burkert.com.au p. 1/7
www.burkert.co.nz
2655, 2-Way
Valve dimensions [mm]

E
A
D
Valve Actuator Actuator

D A B (SR) B (DA) C (SR) C (DA) E (SR) E (DA) L
Size Size (SR) Size (DA)
½" RI000 RI00W 15 37 148.3 126.3 111.3 89.3 152.3 140.2 63.5
¾" RI000 RI00W 20 40 151.3 129.3 111.3 89.3 152.3 140.2 75.5
1" RI005 RI00W 25 48 176.3 137.3 128.3 89.3 200.8 140.2 86
1¼" RI005 RI000 32 53.5 181.8 164.8 128.3 111.3 200.8 152.3 96
1½" RI010 RI005 38 63.5 195.8 191.8 132.3 128.3 224.4 200.8 111
2" RI015 RI005 50 72 219.8 200.3 147.8 128.3 264.2 200.8 129
2½" RI020 RI010 65 92 248.3 224.3 156.3 132.3 309.5 224.4 152.5
3" RI025 RI015 80 102 286.3 249.8 184.3 147.8 366.2 264.2 168.5
4" RI030 RI020 100 132 343 288.3 211 156.3 479 309.5 212.5
p. 2/7
14
13
9
2655, 2-Way 12
B
8
11 7
10
Valve dimensions [mm], continued (body detail)
A
W
Item Part Name Materials
D
H C
1 End Cap CF8M
d2
d1 2 Body CF8M
3 Ball SS 316
4 Seat PTFE
5 Gasket PTFE
6 Bolts SS 304
6 5 4 3 2 1
G 7 Thrust Washer RPTFE
L
F 8 O-Ring VITON
9 Stem Packing PTFE
10 Stem SS 316
V 11 Gland SS 304
19 12 Disk Washer SS 301
13 Stem Nut SS 304
14 Nut Stop SS 304
Q
15 Space Washer SS 304

S
16 Handle Nut SS 304

T 17 Handle SS 304
L1
SOCKET WELD BUTT WELD 18 Handle Cover PLASTIC
ISO direct mount for actuator assembling directl
19 Stop Pin SS 304
20 Nut SS 304
15 20 16 17 18
14
13
9
12
B
8
11 7
10
E
A
d2
d1
6 5 4 3 2 1
p. 3/7
ISO direct mount for actuator assembling directly.
2655, 2-Way
Valve dimensions [mm], continued (body detail)
Size A B C D d1 d2 E F G H L S T P Q L1 V W
¼" 37 11 130 11 6 6 58 36 42 9 60.5 14.2 11.1 10 17 60.5 19 44

⅜" 37 11 130 12.5 6 6 58 36 42 9 60.5 17.5 11.1 12 19 60.5 19 44
½" 37 11 130 15 6 6 58 36 42 9 63.5 21.8 12.7 15 21.5 63.5 19 44
¾" 40 11 130 20 6 6 64 36 45 9 75.5 27.1 14.3 20 27.5 75.5 19 44
1" 48 14 155 25 6 7 77 42 50 11 86 33.8 15.9 25 34.5 86 24 52
1¼" 53.5 14 155 32 6 7 83 42 50 11 96 42.5 17.5 32 42.8 104 24 52
1½" 63.5 18 205 38 7 9 92 50 70 14 111 48.7 19.1 38 49 117 28 53
2" 72 18 205 50 7 9 100 50 70 14 129 61.1 22.2 50 61 138 28 53
2½" 92 22 290 65 9 11.3 140 70 102 17 152.5 73.9 22.2 65 77 170 - -
3" 102 22 290 80 9 11.3 150 70 102 17 168.5 89.9 25.4 80 91 192 - -
4" 132 26 335 100 11.3 13.5 195 102 125 22 212.5 115.2 32 100 118 226 - -
Valve dimensions [mm], continued (actuator detail)
A B
Shaft Detail
Star D ISO-5211
Model Dimensions
ID No DA ID No SR Size A B C ISO-5211 Star D H
AU42098 AU44062 (RI00W) 140.2 76.1 89.3 F03 or F05 11 17.6
AU16470 AU16450 (RI000) 152.3 84.1 111.3 F03 or F05 14 17.8
AU44056 AU44063 (RI005) 200.8 101.6 128.3 F05 - F07 17 20.6
AU16460 AU10830 (RI010) 224.4 103.6 132.3 F05 - F07 17 20.8
AU44057 AU44064 (RI015) 264.2 119.4 147.8 F05 - F07 17 20.8
AU44058 AU16480 (RI020) 309.5 127.5 156.3 F05 - F07 17 20.7
AU44059 AU44065 (RI025) 366.2 153.5 184.3 F07 - F10 27 31.1
AU44060 AU44066 (RI030) 479 177 211 F07 - F10 30 30
AU44061 AU44067 (RI040) 598 226 272 F12 36 38
AU44215 AU44068 (RI050) 694 257.5 313 F14 36 38
p. 4/7
2655, 2-Way
Technical data
Orifice & port sizes, with media pressure range
Orifice Sizes ¼” to 2" Ports Pressure Range Sizes 2½" to 4"
83 83
Pressure (bar)
Pressure (bar)
Double Acting Spring Return
70 70
15 mm ½’’ BSP 70 bar 70 bar
55.2 55.2
20 mm ¾’’ BSP 70 bar 70 bar
25 mm 41.4 1’’ BSP 70 bar 70 bar41.4
32 mm 27.5 1 ¼’’ BSP 70 bar 70 bar27.5
40 mm 13.7 1 ½’’ BSP 70 bar 70 bar13.7
50 mm 0 2’’ BSP 70 bar 70 bar0
65 mm -30 -18 38 2 ½’’ BSP
93.5 149 20550 bar 260 50 bar -30 -18 38 93.5 149 205
Tempterature (Celcius) Tempterature (Celcius)
80 mm 3’’ BSP 50 bar 50 bar
100 mm PTFE 4’’ BSP
RPTFE 50 bar
TFM (TFM1600) 50 bar PTFE RPTFE TFM (TFM
(PTFE+15% Glass) (PTFE+15% Glass)
Valve V-Notch ball option

Option for modulating ball valves; 30° & 60° standard - other angles on request
60
30
90
15
Straight Port 15 V-Port 30 V-Port 60 V-Port 90 V-Port
p. 5/7
2655, 2-Way
Ordering chart for valves (other versions on request)

Pneumatically actuated 2/2-way ball valve with BSP ports
Switchbox
accessory
Port size
Pressure
Optional
function
material
material
Item no.
Orifice
Valve
Body
[mm]
Seal
size
Double Acting 15 ½'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU16230 Size 1
2/2 Way
20 ¾'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU16240 Size 1
25 1'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU16250 Size 2
32 1¼'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU16260 Size 2
40 1½'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU16270 Size 2
Spring Return, 15 ½'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU10520 Size 2
2/2 Way
20 ¾'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU11670 Size 2
32 1¼'' 70 bar SS-316 PTFE AU16220 Size 2
i Further versions on request

Port Connection
Approvals
Temperature
p. 6/7
2655, 2-Way
Ordering chart for accessories for Type 2655 (to be ordered separately)
Type 2655 pneumatically actuated ball valves require pneumatic piloting. Standardised piloting
kits for Type 2655 shown below. Variations available (eg all voltage variations available).
Item description ID No
24V DC 240V AC
Type 6519 pilot solenoid valve with namur type service port and G¼" air ports.
131425 131428
Acting type
For Double
Normally closed 3/2, 5/2 Way circuit function. PA body with stainless steel inserts.
Type 2508 DIN Plug, with LED. 008360 008362
Silencer, sintered broze table type (male) for G¼". 781889
Tubing, flexible nylon (Rilsan), per meter AU03280
Type 6014 pilot solenoid valve with G¼" service port and G¼" air ports. Normally
424103 424107
Return type
closed 3/2 Way circuit function. PA/Brass/Aluminium body with FKM seal.
For Spring
Type 2508 DIN Plug, with LED. 008360 008362

Silencer, sintered broze table type (male) for G¼". 781889
Tubing, flexible nylon (Rilsan), per meter AU03280
Type 2655 pneumatically actuated ball valve accessories. Top mounted switchbox, for visual
position indication, Type 8791 positioner and 8783 process controller.
Item description ID No
Top mounted switch box, Size 1. For visual position indication. AU50858
Aluminium die cast, polycarb.
*NB All units on ordering chart indicate which size switch box suits
Type 8793 electropneumatic positioner with integral PID controller. IP65/67. Multiple feature,
For Spring Return & Double Acting actuator type. Operating voltage 24V DC. input, output
options; see
Type 8791 Basic electropneumatic positioner. IP65/67 & panel mount version. datasheets
For Spring Return & Double Acting actuator type. Operating voltage 24V DC.
Protective hood for quarter turn valves, stainless steel. Designed for protection from AU33834
weather and sun to deliver long service life.
In case of special application conditions, We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice.
please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 201009-2655-AU-EN_2-Way
p. 7/7
11.8 Emerson Knifegate Valves

Clarkson Slurry Knife Gate Valves
KGD
The Clarkson KGD wafer style slurry knife gate valve offers the latest in
elastomer technology with the Mark III sleeve design
Features
• 100% isolation, bubble-tight shut-off results

in absolutely zero downstream leakage.
• Double-seated design provides bi-directional
flow and shut-off.
• Unobstructed flow eliminates turbulence,
minimizes pressure drop across valve.
• No seat cavity where solids can collect and
prevent full gate closure.
• Dynamic self-adjusting secondary seal.
• No gate or stem packing is required,
eliminating packing leakage and
maintenance.
• Long lasting lubrication.
• No metal parts in contact with the flowing
slurry.
• Adaptable frame (yoke) design featuring a
top-removal stem nut, can be field modified
to an air cylinder or bevel gear in the field
without welding.
• Open-Closed lockout brackets standard
through NPS 16 (DN 400), ready for optional
factory supplied or customer supplied lockout
pins.
General applications Technical data

Note:
• Mining Size range: NPS 2 to 24 (DN 50 to 600) Zero leakage is defined as no visible leakage of water
• Power Temperatures: Standard sleeve rated to past the seat at any test pressure up to the fully rated
• Pulp and paper 180°F (80°C), up to 300°F pressure of the valve.
• Phosphates (150°C) with optional
• Steel/Metals elastomer selection Patent 8,016,265 & 5,890,700
• Chemical Standard
• Cement pressure ratings: NPS 2 to 16 (DN 50 to 400)
rated to 150 psi (10 bar)
CWP NPS 18 to 24 (DN
450 to 600) rated to 90 psi
(6.2 bar) CWP
Optional
pressure ratings: Up to 200 psi (14 bar) CWP
Sleeve: Gum rubber (standard)
www.valves.emerson.com 7 m Emerson.
© 2017 o All rights reserved. VCTDS-00112-EN 16/04
KGD
The KGD Mark III sleeve
The Mark III incorporates advanced features gained from thousands of installed Clarkson KGD
slurry valves, giving you a better overall performer with additional features:
• A more robust support disc is incorporated into the one-piece design which resists over-
compression of the sleeve.
• Internal profile of sleeve provides a pressure assist to the sealing function.
• Sleeve profile reduces drag and provides longer service life.
• Easier installation in a variety of pipe styles.The Mark III sleeve can be installed in any existing
KGD valve, allowing hassle free upgrade to the latest technology.
How the KGD Mark III sleeves work
The KGD Mark III sleeves are well suited for slurry service. The face and seal profile allow easier
installation and can be used in most pipe style and mating flange configurations without gaskets.
Matching sleeves are placed in the valve housing to seal against the gate when the valve is closed
and seal against each other when the valve is open. When open, the improved sleeve I.D. profile
and the sleeve compression combine to provide a tight seal, containing the internal line pressure
and precluding direct pressure against the secondary seal.
As the gate moves from open to closed, a gap is created between the facing sleeves, allowing any
media that could potentially clog or jam the valve to be purged out from between the sleeves, and
potentially expelled outside the valve housing to atmosphere.
With the gate fully closed, the sleeves are in full contact with the gate face. Again, the sleeve
profile provides an assist to the sealing function.The unique KGD sleeve assembly provides
positive sealing action when the valve gate is closed or open; protecting the metal parts from the
flowing slurry.
Open position:
• Gate positioned above seals
• Tight fit between sleeves and the internal
sleeve profile contain the line pressure
• Metal parts not in contact with slurry
• Unobstructed port area eliminates
turbulence, minimizes pressure drop across
valve
• No seat cavity where solids can collect and
prevent full gate closure
Closed position: Note: It is normal to discharge media during the

• Gate travels through sleeves to provide blind opening and closing cycle. This helps prevent solids
flange shut off and expel solids allowing build-up between the sleeves. Discharge can be
complete closure controlled by optional splash drain plate.
• 100% isolation-bubble tight shut-off results in
absolutely zero downstream leakage
• Double-seated design provides bi-directional
flow and shut-off
• Sleeve profile and tight fit between sleeves
and gate contains internal pressure
• Controlled stroke prevents gate from
penetrating too far, minimizing stress
on sleeve
2
KGD
Secondary seal
The one-piece, self-adjusting, molded elastomer secondary seal eliminates any leakage between
the knife gate and top of the valve body in any orientation. The seal also prevents any outside
contaminants from getting inside the valve. It is dynamically self-adjusting, eliminating the need
for continual adjustment required with conventional style packing. The secondary seal is also
used to lubricate the gate as it cycles through the seal, providing smoother gate movement and
longer seal life, as well as reducing the force required to actuate the gate. Silicon-based lubricant
is held inside a series of rib cavities built into the seal, each time the gate passes through the
seal, a small amount of the long-lasting lubricant is released. The seal is replaceable and can be
changed while the valve is in the line.
Flush port
Secondary seal Drain plate
Silicone
based Contact
lubricant ribs
Splash containment
The KGD valve incorporates a built-in clean-out area at the base of the valve body. The clean-out
area may be enclosed by an optional, removable drain plate that is provided with ports to drain
away any accumulated solids that may prevent full gate closure. Flush water can both enter and
exit the clean-out area through the ports or enter through a flush port at the top of the valve body.
With the drain plate in place, any solids, slurry, or flush water ejected from the valve can be handled
in a controlled manner.
3
KGD
Features
Heavy-duty frame (yoke) designed to accept top removal stem nut, bevel gear or cylinder
actuator without welding
Standard open and closed lockout/tagout positions (NPS 16 (DN 400) and smaller)
The stainless steel gate is completely withdrawn from the process flow in the open
position and can be inspected or replaced without taking the valve out of service
316 stainless steel gate is standard
Dynamic self-adjusting secondary seal retains long lasting internal lubrication
Mark III field replaceable elastomer sleeves with improved installation capabilities
Unobstructed flow area, no metal to metal contact, no guides or wedges
Double sleeved design provides a “blind flange” shut-off when the gate is closed. Tight fit
between sleeves contains internal pressure
No need for flange gaskets
Universal body housing drilled and tapped to match ASME B16.5/150 flanges as standard.
PN10 or PN16 drilling is optional
Clean-out area
Controlled stroke prevents gate from penetrating too far into the sleeves in the
closed position. This minimizes stress on sleeve, reduces chances of tearing
Lockwashers used on all bolting
4
KGD
Standard sleeve materials Standard configuration
Natural rubber: • Ductile iron body housings

This category includes all natural gum • 316 stainless steel gate
elastomers, both filled and unfilled and synthetic • Universal body housing drilled and tapped
polyisoprene. Has high tensile strength, to match ASME B16.5 Class 150 companion
superior resistance to tear and abrasion and flanges
good resistance to heat build-up. Maximum • High tear strength natural rubber sleeves
continuous operating temperature 180°F (82°C). with integral support discs
• EPDM secondary seal
EPDM-HTP:
Advantages - excellent resistance to heat, Options
ozone and sunlight, very good flexibility at
low temperature, good resistance to alkalis, • Various gate materials:
acids, and oxygenated solvents and superior - 316L S/S - 2205
resistance to water and steam. - 317L S/S - 2507
Limitations - poor resistance to oil, gasoline, - 317L MN - C276
and hydrocarbon based solvents. - Alloy 20 - Others
Maximum continuous operating temperature - 17-4 PH
300°F (149°C).
• 316 S/S body housing in many sizes
Optional sleeve materials • Sleeves
• Drain plate
The following elastomer compounds are • Actuators (see page 5)
available upon request and review of application • Stem covers
and installation by Emerson. Contact your • Control accessories
Emerson sales representative for additional • Metric flange drilling
information.
Note:
nBr (nitrile) and hnBr (nitrile-htp): Some optional gate materials can be used to bring the
Advantages - very good resistance to petroleum pressure rating of the KGD up to 200 psi (13.8 bar) in
based greases/oils, silicone greases/oils and select applications.
nonoxidizing chemicals. Good resistance
hydrocarbon based fuels. OEM replacement sleeves and parts
Limitations - Inferior resistance to ozone and
oxygenated solvents. Maximum continuous To maintain the expected performance of your
operating temperature 275°F (135°C) for NBR KGD, always use genuine Clarkson OEM sleeves
and 325°F (163°C) for HNBR. and other replacement parts from Emerson.
Genuine KGD sleeves from Emerson are easily
Fluoroelastomer: recognized by the identifying marks found on the
Advantages - outstanding resistance to high sleeve O.D. These marks include the size, part
heat, excellent resistance to oil, gasoline number, applicable patent number, elastomer
and hydrocarbon solvents. Very good batch compound and date of manufacture;
impermeability to gases, vapor and oxygen. all of which allow complete traceability of the
Limitations - poor resistance to tear and cut part. Clarkson KGD replacement sleeves from
growth, very little resistance to oxygenated Emerson are the only ones authorized for use
solvents. Maximum continuous operating in the KGD and offer the best fit and continued
temperature 400°F (204°C) (Contact your performance that non-OEM parts simply cannot
Emerson sales representative for temperatures give. The use of copycat parts may invalidate any
higher than 400°F/204°C). remaining warranty.
5
KGD
MH BG AC HC
R
P M
K
F
G
D E
B* H. Port diameter
A N J. Inlet diameter
Dimensions (inches)
Valve size NPS A B1* B2* C D E F G H J K M N P R
2 6.90 2.25 2.13 4.00 19.17 22.18 21.29 22.04 1.85 2.00 7.50 5.25 15.13 12.00 12.00
3 8.00 2.44 2.25 4.88 22.35 24.09 24.70 25.20 2.81 3.00 8.75 6.39 15.75 12.00 12.00
4 9.60 2.44 2.25 4.69 24.45 25.16 26.27 27.27 3.81 4.00 10.50 6.91 16.63 12.00 12.00
6 11.00 2.68 2.50 5.75 29.45 33.02 31.63 32.51 5.80 6.00 12.63 9.13 17.68 16.00 12.00
8 13.50 3.19 3.00 7.03 34.94 36.39 37.00 37.88 7.73 8.00 14.75 10.31 18.75 20.00 12.00
10 16.40 3.25 3.00 8.23 41.07 44.30 43.91 44.79 9.74 10.00 17.50 13.38 23.87 20.00 24.00
12 19.00 3.50 3.25 9.75 - 47.52 50.13 50.76 11.73 12.00 20.38 13.45 29.06 - 24.00
14 21.00 3.50 3.25 10.77 - 52.79 53.90 54.03 12.96 13.25 22.55 14.75 30.15 - 24.00
16 23.75 4.00 3.75 11.88 - 56.53 59.07 59.20 15.00 15.25 24.47 14.75 31.11 - 24.00
18 25.50 4.06 3.76 12.13 - 66.17 68.05 68.42 17.00 17.25 26.32 17.00 30.26 - 24.00
20 28.00 5.13 4.76 14.50 - 71.79 73.97 74.10 19.03 19.25 28.06 18.88 31.13 - 24.00
24 33.00 5.19 4.76 16.50 - 85.13 87.25 88.00 23.21 23.45 35.00 18.88 34.60 - 24.00
NOTES:
Universal body housing drilled and tapped to match ASME B16.5/150 flanges as standard. PN10 or PN16 drilling
is optional.
B1 = minimum dimension required for installation.
B2 = installed face-to-face.
Weights (lbs)
Valve size
NPS MH BG AC HC
2 43 43 62 52
3 55 55 84 68
4 75 75 93 86
6 89 89 144 96
8 142 142 190 145
10 196 196 325 225
12 373 373 493 316
14 438 438 655 377
16 525 525 736 535
18 569 569 840 634
20 730 730 1163 751
24 1050 1050 1613 1150
6
KGD
Actuation
Note: Not all actuators shown are available on all valve sizes. note:
Open-Closed lockout brackets designed to resist the
normal MH or BG operating thrust are supplied as
standard through NPS 16 (DN 400), ready to accept an
optional factory supplied or customer supplied lockout
pin. In order to assure complete lockout compliance,
any AC, HC or EM actuated valve must be placed in a
ZERO ENERGY STATE by isolating all potential energy
sources including electricity, operator supply air or
MH Manual handwheel BG Manual bevel gear AC Air cylinder hydraulic fluids. Valves supplied with spring to extend
(fail close) or retract (fail open) cylinders contain a
mechanical spring which is compressed. In this case,
the mechanical energy of the compressed spring
cannot be placed in a zero energy state.
Take extreme care when inserting and removing the
lockout pin. If the valve is actuated or the opposing
pneumatic force is removed during the insertion
process, the cylinder rod, gate and accompanying
hardware will move and injury could occur. Please
contact your Emerson sales representative for
EM Electro-mechanical RA - Ratchet HC Hydraulic cylinder
complete details.
Dimensions (mm)
Valve size DN A B1* B2* C D E F G H J K M N P R
50 175.3 57.2 54.1 101.6 486.9 563.4 540.8 559.8 47.0 50.8 190.5 133.4 384.3 305 305
80 203.2 62.0 57.2 124.0 567.7 611.9 627.4 640.1 71.4 76.2 222.3 162.3 400.1 305 305
100 243.8 62.0 57.2 119.1 621.0 639.1 667.3 692.7 96.8 101.6 266.7 175.5 422.4 305 305
150 279.4 68.1 63.5 146.1 748.0 838.7 803.4 825.8 147.3 152.4 320.8 231.9 449.1 406 305
200 342.9 81.0 76.2 178.6 887.5 924.3 939.8 962.2 196.3 203.2 374.7 261.9 476.3 508 305
250 416.6 82.6 76.2 209.0 1043.2 1125.2 1115.3 1137.7 247.4 254.0 444.5 339.9 606.3 508 610
300 482.6 88.9 82.6 247.7 - 1207.0 1273.3 1289.3 297.9 304.8 517.7 341.6 738.1 - 610
350 533.4 88.9 82.6 273.6 - 1340.9 1369.1 1372.4 329.2 336.6 572.8 374.7 765.8 - 610
400 603.3 101.6 95.3 301.8 - 1435.9 1500.4 1503.7 381.0 387.4 621.5 374.7 790.2 - 610
450 647.7 103.1 95.5 308.1 - 1680.7 1728.5 1737.9 431.8 438.2 668.5 431.8 768.6 - 610
500 711.2 130.3 120.9 368.3 - 1823.5 1878.8 1882.1 483.4 489.0 712.7 479.6 790.7 - 610
600 838.2 131.8 120.9 419.1 - 2162.3 2216.2 2235.2 589.5 595.6 889.0 479.6 878.8 - 610
NOTES:
Metric valves sizes are reference only. Body housing is drilled and tapped to match ASME B16.5/150 flanges as
standard. PN10 or PN16 drilling is optional.
B1 = minimum dimension required for installation.
B2 = installed face-to-face.
Weights (kg)
Valve size DN MH BG AC HC
50 19.2 19.2 27.7 23.2
80 24.5 24.5 37.5 30.3
100 33.5 33.5 41.5 38.4
150 39.7 39.7 64.3 42.8
200 63.4 63.4 84.8 64.7
250 87.5 87.5 145.0 100.4
300 166.5 166.5 220.0 141.0
350 195.5 195.5 292.3 168.3
400 234.3 234.3 328.5 238.8
450 253.9 253.9 374.9 283.0
500 325.8 325.8 519.1 335.2
600 468.6 468.6 719.9 513.3
7
KGD
Special coatings to enhance service tBseC: tungsten-based surface pBseC-80: polymer-based surface
life enhancement coating enhancement coating
For applications where maximum wear PBSEC-80 takes all the great qualities of the
Emerson is a leader in coating technology resistance on ferrous and nonferrous metals is PBSEC coating and amplifies them. Those
with broad experience using special coatings needed over a broad temperature range, qualities include; release (nonstick) properties,
in various industries and applications on a Emerson offers TBSEC - Tungsten-based protection against wear, chemical attack,
worldwide basis. Each of the coatings below surface enhancement coating. TBSEC is a corrosion, galling and abrasion resistance.
offer advantages in service life and operation, specific combination of ceramics, metals and PBSEC-80 also provides permanent lubricity
improving performance and adding value. proprietary polymers that produces a moisture and a superior resistance to static buildup of
proof and nonporous structural integrity matrix. material. PBSEC-80 is a proprietary blend of
sseC: synergistic surface enhancement Adding TBSEC improves the base metal surface engineered polymers that exhibit a very low
coating properties and is ideal for applications where coefficient of friction.
Well suited for use in applications where galling or sticky media and scaling/plating is a This is placed on top of an inert ceramic base
corrosive media or abrasion is a problem, problem. Applied by a thermal spray process, coating that becomes infused with the PBSEC
SSEC is ideal for applications with sticky, this coating will work on most all metal coating. Used on steel, stainless, brass, copper,
viscous media, scaling/plating or where galling surfaces and has excellent release (non-stick) titanium, bronze and aluminum.
is a problem. The low coefficient of friction properties, protects against wear and chemical
eliminates “stick-slip” problems, reduces drag attack as well as it features excellent abrasion note:
and increases sleeve life. Often improves micro and galling resistance, and provides permanent Emerson does not recommend coatings be used as an
finish of a gate or body. SSEC is a synergistic lubricity and a superior resistance to static attempt to reduce metallurgy of the base material
coating that combines the advantages of buildup of material. TBSEC has excellent required for the application. Coatings from Emerson
anodizing, plating or thermal spraying with the abrasion resistance as well as various chemical are used on all our knife gate and slurry valve
controlled infusion of polymers, dry lubricants and acid resistances. Used on steel, stainless, products.
and other materials to provide an entirely new copper, brass, bronze, titanium, and aluminum.
composite with improved properties to the
base metal. This coating will work on most pBseC: polymer-based surface enhancement
metal surfaces and creates a harder-than- coating
steel surface, excellent release (non-stick) PBSEC is a polymer-based impregnated
properties, protects against wear, corrosion surface enhancement coating ideal for
and chemical attack and provides permanent applications where maximum corrosion
lubricity and a superior resistance to static resistance on ferrous and nonferrous metals is
buildup of material. SSEC has a hardness/wear needed over a broad temperature range. Like
and abrasion rating of up to Rc 68 Equilibrium SSEC, PBSEC exhibits a very low coefficient
Wear Rate (EWR) using Taber abrasion testing of friction, providing improved lubricity and
methods (CS-10 wheel): 2.0 - 4.0 mg per 1000 reducing friction as the gate slides through
cycles. SSEC is also very corrosion resistant the sleeves thus increasing the sleeve life.
and will survive 500 hours in ASTM B-117 salt It is ideal for applications where galling or
spray. (Coating thickness will affect corrosion sticky media and scaling/plating is a problem.
resistance.) It will work on most all metal surfaces and
Suitable for use on steel, stainless, copper, has excellent release (non-stick) properties.
brass, bronze, titanium, and aluminum. PBSEC features excellent abrasion and
galling resistance and a superior resistance
sseC+: synergistic surface enhancement to static buildup of material. It has excellent
coating plus chemical and abrasion resistance as well as
Select SSEC+ for additional corrosion high oxidative stability. Can be applied to steel,
resistance, about 3 times better than the stainless, copper, brass, bronze, titanium, and
base SSEC coating (based on ASTM B117 Salt aluminum.
Spray Testing). Abrasion resistance, lubricity,
corrosion resistance are similar to the base
SSEC. SSEC+ is not recommended for strong
acids.
8
KGD
Coating selections
Coefficient of friction Temperatures a) Thickness (Mils) pH range Abrasion Anti-stick (lubricity) Chemical resistance
SSEC As low as 0.09 -250ºF to 550ºF b) 0.2 to 3 5 to 8.5 Good Excellent Fair
(-157ºC to 288°C) (5 to 76)
SSEC+ Static as low as 0.10 -250ºF to 500ºF 0.5 to 2.0 5 to 8.5 Good Excellent Good
Dynamic as low as 0.09 (-157ºC to 260°C) (12.7 to 51)
TBSEC As low as 0.06 -200ºF to 550ºF 2 to 10 4 to 10 Excellent Fair Fair
(-129°C to 288°C) (51 to 254)
PBSEC Static as low as 0.4 Cryogenic to 275ºF c) 3 to 5 Below 0 to 14 Fair Not recommended Excellent
Dynamic as low as 0.3 (135°C) (76 to 127)
PBSEC-80 0.19 Cryogenic to 300ºF 10 to 20 0 to 14 Excellent Fair Excellent
(149°C) (254 to 508)
NOTES:
a. Stated temperatures are above normal operating
temperature of the valve and are not to be
considered as the rated temperature of the valve.
b. SSEC will survive temperatures of 1400ºF (760°C),
but all lubricant will dissipate above 800ºF (427°C).
c. Short term exposure up to 350ºF (177°C).
9
KGD
Specifications Specify Clarkson KGD slurry knife gate valve Clarkson valves are also found in many other
from emerson Valves & Controls industries installed in aggressive, abrasive
Clarkson KGD wafer style slurry knife gate Clarkson slurry valves are in more applications application that require the positive action and
valve: around the world than any other manufacturer 100% shut-off found in the Clarkson slurry
Wafer style, slurry knife gate valve shall be a in a broad range of applications. With a long valve.
packingless, elastomer lined, bi-directional and successful history, Clarkson slurry valves • Alumina
valve suitable for a wide range of industrial are well suited for the most challenging • Pulp and paper
applications. The full port design shall have no applications. Mining, power, steel, pulp and • Phosphates
internal obstructions and will provide a “blind paper, Clarkson slurry valves cross many • Steel/Metals
flange” shut-off when the gate is closed. industries and have proven their worth time • Chemical
The valve’s sealing surface is to be between two and time again. The Clarkson slurry valve • Cement
elastomer sleeves that are compressed into the literally grew up in the mining industry. The
valve housings. Each sleeve will be a one-piece original KGA slurry valve was developed in
molded design with an integral stiffener ring 1978 and was immediately successful, gaining
that locates the sleeve in the valve housing worldwide recognition as a problem-solving,
and helps the sleeves resist the high shearing innovative isolation valve in extremely difficult
forces present when the gate is driven between applications. Building upon that success, the
them. KGD, KLB, KGL, KGF, and C-Valve followed,
The sleeves shall include a heavy substrate face bringing the most comprehensive line of slurry
ring designed to support sleeves in the installed valve products to the mining industry.
position and prevent over compression. While mining methods around the world vary
Valve shall have a one-piece molded elastomer depending on the material being extracted,
secondary seal to eliminate any leakage many similar processes exist, all of which are
between the knife gate and top of the valve well suited for the Clarkson slurry valve.
body in any orientation and prevent any • Tailings collection
outside contaminants from getting inside the • SAG mill thickener underflow
valve housing. The secondary seal shall be • Process water
dynamically self-adjusting eliminating the need • Cyclone isolation
for continual adjustment and is to be used to • Ball mill isolation and diversion
retain a Silicon-based lubricant to lubricate • Tailings discharge
the gate as it cycles through the seal, providing • Isolation feed valve
smoother gate movement and longer seal • Secondary cyclone manifold
life, as well as reducing the force required to
actuate the gate. Coal fired power plants are another process
The stainless steel gate shall be completely where you find thousands of Clarkson valves
withdrawn from the process flow when in installed. The undisputed leader in wet flue-gas
the open position, and can be inspected and desulfurization, the Clarkson valve is also well
replaced, if necessary, without taking the valve suited for many other power plant applications.
out of service.
When the valve is in the closed position, the • Scrubber isolation
downstream sleeve can be replaced while the • Slurry diversion
upstream portion of the valve is still holding • Bottom ash slurry
pressure. • Fly ash
The valve body housing to be full flanged, • Bottom ash
universal type, standard drilled and tapped to • Pyrite separation
suit ASME B16.5/150 with optional PN10 or • Pump discharge isolation
PN16 or others, as required. Valve is equipped • Bottom ash isolation
with a heavy steel fabricated handwheel frame • Sluice line
(yoke) which can be converted to bevel gear or • Lime slurry isolation
cylinder operator in the field without welding, • Reaction slurry
complete with a stainless steel rising stem. • Pump isolation
All ferrous exterior surfaces shall be painted to • Lime storage diversion
factory standard. • Absorber tower isolation
10
KGD
Global leader in slurry valve technology
Field proven, heavy duty, trouble-free slurry valves for abrasive, corrosive and coarse slurries.
The Clarkson slurry valves from Emerson feature elastomer sleeves offering the ultimate in
protection against heavy slurries. They provide both high performance and long life in
the toughest of environments.
kGa slurry valve

The original KGA slurry knife gate valve is the ultimate in protection against heavy slurries.
It has the largest installed base of any elastomer sleeved slurry valve in the world.
• Standard operating pressures up to 100 psi (7 bar); higher pressures available
• Sizes NPS 3 to 60 (DN 80 to 1500)
KGF HIGH PRESSURE slurry valve

For high pressure slurry application, the only choice is the KGF slurry knife gate valve. It offers
the same features and performance of the KGA or KGD but in a 300, 450, 740 psi (20, 31, 51 bar)
design.
• KGF: 300 and 450 psi (20 and 31 bar) CWP
Sizes NPS 3 to 36 (DN 80 to 900)
• KGF-HP: up to 750 psi (51 bar) CWP
Sizes NPS 3 to 36 (DN 80 to 900)
KLB and KGL Linear Line Blinds

The KLB is based on the KGD and the KGL is derived from the KGA. Both provide man-safe
isolation in a blanking application.
• Man-safe line blind
• No down stream leakage even with sleeve failure
• KLB: Sizes NPS 2 to 24 (DN 50 to 600)
• KGL: Sizes NPS 3 to 60 (DN 80 to 1500)
11
© 2017 Emerson. All rights reserved.
CLARKSON SLURRY KNIFE GATE VALVES
KGD
Installation and maintenance instructions for KGD wafer style slurry knife gate valve.
Before installation these instructions must be fully read and understood
1 GENERAL INFORMATION 2 INITIAL INSPECTION
1. The KGD is a packingless, slurry knife gate 1. Examine entire valve and report any damage
valve. All the sealing is accomplished by the or discrepancies immediately.
elastomeric sleeves in the valve housing. 2. Sleeves: visually examine the sleeves
The sleeves also form the wear section interior, looking for chunking, irregularities
for the valve. The gate is removable for or other damage.
inspection or replacement while the valve 3. Operators: standard manual handwheels
is in service. The secondary seal prevents may be shipped loose for field installation,
atmospheric leakage from around the gate. be sure to fully tighten.
2. The KGD is a BI-DIRECTIONAL (two-way 4. Valves are normally shipped with gate in
shut-off) product and can be installed open position, the recommended position
without concern over direction of flow. Since for installation. Valves supplied with spring
they will shut-off equally in either direction, to extend (fail close) cylinder actuators are
you will find no arrows or other indicators shipped with the gate in the closed position.
of a direction of flow or seat side. Gate should be actuated to the open position
3. The KGD is suitable for on-off service only. prior to installation, exercise extreme
It is not to be used in a throttling application. caution when applying air to open this
INDEX 4. The style, size, pressure rating and material valve and then ensure that it gate locked in
selection are the responsibility of the piping the open position for installation. Refer to
1. General information�� 1 system designer. lockouts Section 5 for aditional cautions on
2. Initial inspection�� 1 5. All valves should be operated within the spring cylinders.
3. Installation�� 2 design pressure and temperature ranges. 5. Accessories: if provided, including
4. Operation�� 4 Under no circumstances should the valves solenoids, limit switches, positioners,
5. Lockouts�� 5 be operated at conditions outside these etc., are tested for functionality prior to
6. General maintenance�� 5 parameters. Do not exceed 100% of the shipment. Examine carefully for damage
7. Recommended spare parts�� 6 maximum pressure rating of the valve at any which may occur during shipment.
8. Storage�� 7 time during its operation. Pressure spikes
9. Sleeve installation�� 8 beyond the valve’s pressure rating are solely
10. Field replacement of the secondary seal�� 9 the responsibility of the user.
11. Disassembly and assembly instructions�� 10 6. This manual is applicable to three
12. Actuator adjustment�� 11 generations of KGD sleeves.
13. Body flushing and discharge A) K GD with secondary seal, equipped with
management ��11 Mark III sleeves (Mark III, Figure 6).
14. Installation instructions for splash B) KGD with secondary seal, equipped with
guard drain plate�� 12 Mark II sleeves (Mark II, Figure 6).
15. Lifting�� 12 C) KGD with secondary seal, equipped with
Mark I sleeves (Mark I, Figure 6).
Appendix
Manual handwheel actuator�� 13
Manual bevel gear actuator�� 14
Hydraulic cylinder actuator�� 15
Air cylinder actuator �� 16
valves.emerson.com © 2017 Emerson. All Rights Reserved. VCIOM-06600-EN 16/05

KGD
3 INSTALLATION 5. The mating line flanges must be properly

aligned prior to attempting installation.
Please take note of the specific installation Never try to make up for misaligned pipe
tags provided with each valve. flanges by the line bolting.
1. The KGD is installed with the gate in the 6. Listed in Table 1 are the fasteners required
fully open position with the sleeves inserted for installation.
into the body housings. 7. Pipe supports and/or expansion joints
2. Standard mating flanges NPS 2 - 24 should be used to minimize pipe loads on
(DN 50 - 600) match ASME B16.5/150, (see valves.
Table 1). Other flange drillings including 8. The face of the Mark III sleeves function as
PN10, PN16, AS2129 Tables D and E are the gasket for installation into the pipeline,
available. no additional gaskets are required (refer to
3. Table 2 states the maximum flange bolt Table 2 notes if not using a Mark III sleeve).
tightening torques for standard flange 9. Valve is suitable for use in either vertical or
patterns. While the KGD is provided horizontal lines. The valve can be installed
with flange bolt patterns that match in any position in vertical or horizontal
ASME B16.5/150 flange bolt patterns, they pipelines. However, valves installed in
are not designed to handle the same torque an orientation with the actuator below
requirements as an all-metal Class 150 horizontal may require flushing to prevent
gate valve. The KGD are specialty valves the buildup of solids in the housing and
with a specified maximum flange torque. may require additional actuator support.
Exceeding recommended torque values will
reduce overall valve performance and may CAUTION
permanently damage the sleeves and or Valves are normally shipped with gate in
other components. open position, the recommended position for
4. The KGD is configured for installation in installation. Valves supplied with spring to extend
conventional bolted flange connections. (fail close) cylinder actuators are shipped with
Slip on or weld flanges can be used. The the gate in the closed position. Gate should be
pipeline companion flanges should be actuated to the open position prior to installation,
raised or flat face type to insure full sleeve exercise extreme caution when applying air to
support and a continuous, unvarying I.D. If open this valve and ensure that gate is locked
slip-on flanges are used, the pipe should in the open position for installation. Refer to
be cut square and welded in position with lockouts Section 5 for additional cautions on
the pipe end matched evenly with the flange spring cylinders.
face. Studded flanges are not compatible
with these valves. Use of other flange
connections should be reviewed and verified
by the factory for compatibility prior to
installation.
TABLE 1 - BOLTING DIMENSIONS

ASME B16.5/150 flange details Through bolt hole for bolts or studs DT* bolt hole for studs
Valve size Flange diameter Bolt circle diameter Bolt size/ Number of thru Installed face-to-face Number of DT holes DT bolt hole depth
NPS DN inch mm inch mm thread holes per valve inch mm per side of valve inch mm
2 50 6 152.4 4¾ 120.7 ⅝ - 11 0 2⅛ 54.0 4 0.56 14.2
3 80 7½ 190.5 6 152.4 ⅝ - 11 0 2¼ 57.2 4 0.56 14.2
4 100 9 228.6 7½ 190.5 ⅝ - 11 4 2¼ 57.2 4 0.56 14.2
6 150 11 279.4 9½ 241.3 ¾ - 10 4 2½ 63.5 4 0.56 14.2
8 200 13½ 342.9 11¾ 298.5 ¾ - 10 4 3 76.2 4 0.56 14.2
10 250 16 406.4 14¼ 362.0 ⅞-9 4 3 76.2 8 0.62 15.7
12 300 19 482.6 17 431.8 ⅞-9 4 3¼ 82.6 8 0.69 17.5
14 350 21 533.4 18¾ 476.3 1-8 4 3¼ 82.6 8 0.69 17.5
16 400 23½ 596.9 21¼ 539.8 1-8 4 3¾ 95.3 12 0.69 17.5
18 450 25 635.0 22¾ 577.9 1⅛ - 7 4 3¾ 95.3 12 0.91 23.1
20 500 27½ 698.5 25 635.0 1⅛ - 7 4 4¾ 120.7 16 1.26 32.0
24 600 32 812.8 29½ 749.3 1¼ - 7 4 4¾ 120.7 16 1.19 30.2
* DT = Drill and tapped
2
KGD
TABLE 2 - MAXIMUM TIGHTENING TORQUE FIGURE 1

Valve size Standard flanging FRP flanges (see note)
NPS DN ft·lb N·m ft·lb N·m
2 50 37 50 25 34
3 80 37 50 25 34
4 100 37 50 25 34 Depth of the
DT hole
6 150 69 94 40 54
8 200 69 94 40 54
10 250 113 153 65 88
12 300 113 153 65 88
14 350 169 229 100 135
16 400 169 229 100 135
18 450 238 323 140 190
20 500 238 323 140 190
24 600 238 323 200 271
Body
NOTE
Mark II sleeves require the use of a soft elastomer gasket in FRP flange installations.
Gaskets are not required or recommended on Mark I or Mark III sleeves.
Sleeve
Installation notes NOTES
A) All slurry knife gate valves are designed and • Flange dimensions per ASME B16.5/150.
manufactured to be installed in applications • The KGD Body is provided with a combination of
where no more than 1 g of force In excess through bolt holes and drilled and tapped (DT)
of gravity is applied to the valve in any mating flange bolt holes.
direction. This 1 g force can be an effect • Length of studs for use in DT holes can be
of traffic, wind, or earthquake, etc. Valves determined by adding the depth of the DT hole
should not be used in applications that (includes allowance for height of compressed sleeve
exceed 1 g. face) shown in chart to the thickness of the mating
B) If valve stem or topworks protrude into flange along with any used washers.
walkways or work areas, valve should • While studs are recommended in DT holes, if bolts
be flagged per company safety policy. are used, be sure the length does not exceed the DT
C) All piping systems should contain bolt hole depth.
independent support mechanisms and • Length of bolts or studs for use in through holes can
should not utilize the valve as a sole be determined by adding the installed face-to-face
means of support. (includes allowance for height of compressed sleeve
D) Do not install valve over walkways, electrical face) shown in chart to the thickness of the mating
or other critical equipment without the use flange along with any used washers. (For studs, add
of a splash guard device (refer to Section 14) both flanges and two sets of nuts and washers).
or similar considerations. • Flange drilled and tapped holes in body over 1 inch
(25 mm) diameter are normally provided with course
CAUTION thread.
Valves are normally shipped with gate in
open position, the recommended position for
installation. Valves supplied with spring to extend
(fail close) cylinder actuators are shipped with
the gate in the closed position. Gate should be
actuated to the open position prior to installation,
exercise extreme caution when applying air to
open this valve and then ensure that gate is
locked in the open position for installation. Refer
to Section 8 storage for additional information.
3
KGD
FIGURE 2 - OPEN POSITION FIGURE 3 - CLOSED POSITION
Open position: Closed position:

A) Gate positioned above seals. A) Gate travels through sleeves to provide
B) Tight fit between sleeves and the internal blind flange shut-off, allowing opportunity
sleeve profile contain the line pressure. for media to expel to atmosphere.
C) No metal parts in contact with slurry. B) 100% Isolation-bubble tight shut-off results
D) Unobstructed port area eliminates in absolutely zero downstream leakage.
turbulence, minimizes pressure drop C) Double-seated design provides
across valve. bi-directional flow and shut-off.
E) No seat cavity where solids can collect D) Controlled stroke prevents gate from
and prevent full gate closure. penetrating too far, minimizing stress
on sleeve.
4 OPERATION
1. The KGD is suitable for on-off service only. prevent full gate closure. Flush water can CAUTION
It is not to be used in a throttling application. be used to improve the drainage efficiency. It is normal for the KGD to discharge media
2. To close the valve and provide isolation, With the drain plate in place, any solids, during opening and closing cycles. Some
the actuator (handwheel, bevel gear, slurry, or flush water ejected from the valve additional discharge may continue for a time after
air/hydraulic cylinder or electric motor can be handled in a controlled manner. DO completion of the open cycle. This helps prevent
actuator) moves the metal gate in a linear NOT plug or otherwise restrict both ports any solids from building up between the sleeves
motion between the elastomeric sleeves of the drain plate as this will prevent proper that would prevent a tight seal when the valve is
to shut off the flow. To open, reverse the operation of the KGD valve. See Section 14 fully open or closed. Discharge can be controlled
operation and the gate moves up and out for drain plate installation instructions. with the use of a splash guard device (drain plate,
from between the sleeves, opening the 6. All valves should be operated within the refer to Section 14). Do not install valve over
valve port. design pressure and temperature ranges. walkways, electrical or other critical equipment
3. Matching elastomer sleeves seal against Under no circumstances should the valves without the use of a splash guard device or
each under a high compression load be operated at conditions outside these similar considerations.
when the valve is open, creating the valve parameters.
pressure vessel. When the valve is closed, NOTE: Actuated Clarkson valves have a maximum
the sleeves seal against the gate face, recommended stroke speed of 1 inch (25 mm) per
isolating upstream from downstream. second. Exceeding this speed can shorten sleeve
See Figures 2 and 3. life and may void warranty. Optional speed controls
4. As the gate strokes, a gap is created provided by factory will require adjustment in
between the facing sleeves, allowing any the field to obtain proper stroke speed against
media that could potentially clog or jam the actual operating conditions. Refer to Section 14
valve to be purged out from between the for additional information on discharge.
sleeves, and potentially expelled outside the
valve housing to atmosphere.
5. The KGD valve incorporates a built-in
clean-out area at the base of the housing
assembly. The clean-out area may be
enclosed by an optional, removable drain
plate. This drain plate will allow controlled
drainage of any accumulated solids that may
4
KGD
7. The operator of any valve should have an CAUTION FIGURE 4

understanding of the effects of opening/ If lockout pins are used on automated valves, the
closing the valve with regards to its role open and closed lockout brackets are designed
in the overall piping system. Operators of to resist the normal valve operating thrust. In
valves under pressure should take caution order to assure complete lockout compliance, any
to ensure that the valve is in good operating double acting air cylinder, hydraulic cylinder or
condition prior to operating it under electric motor actuated valve must be placed in
pressure. a ZERO ENERGY STATE by isolating all potential
8. Certain processes contain hazardous and/or energy sources including electricity, operator air
otherwise unstable media. Care should be supply or hydraulic fluids.
taken in these circumstances to ensure the
operator is aware of the specific health and In the case of a single acting spring to close
safety risks associated with that medium. or spring to open cylinder with the spring
9. When operating the valve stand clear of any compressed, the mechanical energy cannot
moving parts such as the stem and/or gate be placed in the ZERO ENERGY STATE. When
assembly, use of gloves is suggested when compressed, the spring will cause unwanted
operating manual valves to minimize the gate movement if inlet air pressure is not
risk of injury. maintained on the non-spring side of the
10. All manual handwheel operated valves actuator. Specific care must be taken to insert
are designed for hand input. Do not apply or remove lockout pins. To insert or remove
excessive input torque via pipe wrenches, lockout pins
‘cheater bars’, or other devices. If a manual - Spring extended (uncompressed): isolate
handwheel actuated valve is difficult to air supply from cylinder actuator.
operate due to torque requirements, it is - Spring retracted (compressed): maintain
recommended that the valve be supplied air pressure on the non-spring side of the
with or converted to a bevel gear, air/ actuator.
hydraulic cylinder or electric motor
actuator. Take great care when inserting and removing the
11. Electric motor actuated valves should be lockout pin. If the gate moves during the insertion
left in their factory set condition, unless or removal process, injury may occur
the system operating parameters dictate
a change. If changes are necessary, they 6 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
should be performed in small increments
using the lightest/lowest setting possible We recommend that all Clarkson products be
to achieve the desired performance and inspected at least every 60 days. The following
then the valve/actuator function inspected. points should be examined and corrected as
Excess torque and/or thrust in the motor required:
settings may damage or lockup the valve. 1. Exterior overview: piping system
12. Clarkson KGD valves are position seated components are subject to certain levels of
and should never be torque seated. Do not erosion and corrosion. Periodic inspections
use the motor torque settings to seat the should be made as valves/components
valve. may wear over time. Regular inspection
13. Care should be taken to ensure that of the housing assembly and gate should
electrical motors are wired correctly. be performed, check for general signs
Incorrect phasing of 3-phase wiring may of corrosion, component wear and/
cause valve/motor damage. or damage caused by process media.
Severe applications may require additional
5 LOCKOUTS inspection types and/or frequency.
2. Valve stems, extension stems, and stem
Open and closed gate lockout positions are nut: look for excessive corrosion, galling
standard on the KGD NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400), or lack of lubrication. If valve stem requires
optional on the larger sizes. Optional lockout lubrication, utilize the grease fitting
pins may be supplied by Emerson or customer provided and pump standard bearing
may use their own suitable pin. (Contact factory grease through the yoke hub to lubricate
for pin specifications). the stem and stem nut assembly. Additional
lubrication may be applied directly onto
stem or stem threads. (Use material which
meets ASTM 4950 GBLB).
5
KGD
3. If possible stroke the valve through the full 1. When ordering replacement parts for a NOTE: Emerson recommends customers always use
open and closed position to make sure it is Clarkson product or cylinder operator, genuine Clarkson OEM sleeves, secondary seals and
functioning properly. please include valve or cylinder size and other replacement parts to maintain the expected,
NOTE: It is normal for the KGD valve to discharge complete description including serial superior, performance of their KGD. Genuine Clarkson
media during opening and closing cycles. Some number with your request. sleeves and secondary seals from Emerson are easily
additional discharge may continue for a time after 2. Additional replacement parts such as recognized by the laser etched identifying marks found
completion of the open cycle. handwheels, stem nut assemblies, on the outside surface. These marks include the size,
4. Sleeve lubrication: retainers, frames (yoke), stems and gates part number, applicable patent number, elastomer
A) Sleeves: the KGD valve has no body or are available from factory. Again, please batch compound and date of manufacture; all of
sleeve lubrication fittings. Lubrication provide complete description with serial which allow complete traceability of the part. Clarkson
is provided to the gate by the secondary number when ordering. replacement sleeves, secondary seals and other parts
seal. When it is replaced or inspected, 3. Spare sleeve storage: molded elastomer from Emerson are the only ones authorized for use
it should be lubricated as stated in sleeves have a practical recommended and offer the best fit and continued performance that
Section 10. shelf-life. Genuine Clarkson sleeves are non-OEM parts simply cannot give. The use of copycat
B) The gate may also be lubricated by laser etched on the outside surface with parts may invalidate any remaining warranty. If valve
applying lubricant directly onto the date of manufacture to use in calculating requires further repair, please contact our office for
exposed gate surface. estimated shelf-life. an estimate of feasibility and cost of repair.
C) A s a minimum, the Clarkson KGD valves • Natural rubber - 2 years
should be lubricated every 100 strokes • EPDM - 4 years
for NPS 2 - 10 (DN 50 - 250) sizes and • NBR/HNBR - 4 years
every 50 strokes for NPS 12 - 24 (DN 300 Contact factory for additional elastomers.
- 600) sizes. An individual application may
require more or less frequent lubrication The shelf life listed is guideline data and is not
depending on the process and chemistry. a substitute for examination of cured material
If a valve cycles very infrequently, less at the time of intended use.
than once per month, lubrication prior To maintain shelf-life, spare sleeves should be
to each stroke is recommended. (See stored in accordance with the following.
adjacent table for approved lubrication). 1. Store at ambient temperature up to 80°F
D) Sleeve wear can be minimized if the (27°C), with 60 - 90% relative humidity away
valve gate is scraped or wiped clean from direct sunlight and at a minimum
occasionally. distance of 15 feet (5 m) away from electric
E) For dry material handling service, the motors is mandatory.
secondary seal will not be provided and 2. Care must be taken to avoid storage in a
liquid or grease type lubricants should stressed condition such as piled too high or
not be used. on a plain pallet overhanging a sharp edge.
3. First in - first out inventory control should
NOTE: Failure to use the recommended type of be practiced.
lubricant will considerably reduce the life of both the 4. The above elastomer shelf life guidelines
sleeves and secondary seal. Under no circumstances are for components that are not already
should a hydrocarbon-based lubricant be used. The installed in a valve.
use of improper lubrication will void any remaining
warranty.
7 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
Valves:
2-Replacement sleeves
1-Replacement secondary seal
2-Body gaskets
Cylinder operator (if applicable):

1-repair kit
APPROVED SILICON BASED LUBRICANTS
Dow III - Dow corning Complex 821 - NFO

Dow 44 - Dow corning Dow 7 - Dow corning
Rhodorsil 111 - Rhone-poulenc Compound G661 - G E
Sil glyde - AGS Company
For compatibility of other lubricants, consult Emerson.
6
KGD
8 STORAGE 3. If outdoor storage is required, the 7. Storage Inspection: visual inspection shall
equipment should be totally covered with be performed on a semiannual basis and
The following are the factory’s a heavy, light colored, plastic covering. results recorded. Inspection as a minimum
recommendations for storage procedures to It is essential that the plastic be opaque shall include reviewing the following:
retain maximum product integrity during long to eliminate sunlight, and light colored - Packaging
term storage of 1 to 5 years. to minimize heat buildup. The covering - Flange covers
1. Valves are normally shipped with gate in should be spread in a manner that allows - Dryness
open position, the recommended position underside ventilation. To insure proper - Cleanliness
for storage. During storage, the gate should ventilation the equipment should be 8. Maintenance shall consist of correcting
always be in the open position. Storage elevated 2 - 4 inches (50 - 100 mm) above deficiencies noted during inspection. All
should be in an area out of direct sunlight, the ground. maintenance shall be recorded. Contact
away from heat, ozone and extreme weather 4. Manual actuated valves may be stored in factory prior to performing any maintenance
conditions. Freezing is not considered the vertical or horizontal position. For air if valve is still covered under warranty.
detrimental as long as the valve is kept or hydraulic actuated valves, the preferred
dry. High voltage rectifiers and other ozone orientation for optimum protection is with
generating equipment and sources should the valve fully opened and the cylinder in
not be near the storage area. the vertical position. This position gives
the best support to the cylinder rod and
CAUTION helps reduces the chance of a ‘flat spot’
Valves supplied with spring to extend (fail close) developing on the cylinder seals. An
cylinder actuators are shipped with the gate in acceptable alternate position for valves
the closed position. DO NOT store a KGD with a with cylinder diameters of less than 6
spring to extend (fail close) in the open position. inches (150 mm) is with the cylinder in the
This would put the spring in a compressed, horizontal position. Motor actuated valves
fully energized position. For storage, it is should be oriented in the direction as
recommended the valve sleeves be removed from preferred by the actuator manufacturer.
the valve housing and stored separately from the 5. Valves with cylinder or motor actuators
valve. Reinsert sleeves prior to installation. should be stored in accordance with
actuator manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. The preferred storage location is a clean, Access ports or panels should be secured
dry protected warehouse. If valves are to to prevent unauthorized entry and prevent
be stored outside, precautions should be contamination.
taken to keep valves clean and dry. Standard 6. Where auxiliary equipment is included,
packaging materials provided in valve such as limit switches, solenoid valves, etc.,
shipment cannot be considered sufficient care must be taken to avoid moisture and
for outdoor storage. condensation conditions on the equipment.
FIGURE 5
Sleeve (2)
Secondary seal
Gasket (2)
7
KGD
9 SLEEVE INSTALLATION 2a. Applicable to Mark III sleeves FIGURE 6

1. Apply lubricant to the seal surface and a thin
Mark III
Clarkson has produced three generations of film on the outside diameter of each sleeve.
sleeve designs for KGD valve products; the 2. Press sleeves into the valve housing, one
Mark I, Mark II and Mark III; the Mark III is the from each side.
most current design. All new valve assemblies 3. The Mark III sleeve can be installed in
with standard natural rubber and EPDM any orientation, sleeves can be rotated to
elastomers are provided with the Mark III. Older prolong service life.
KGD valve bodies can be retrofitted with the 2b. Applicable to Mark II sleeves
new Mark III sleeve design. Information on the 1. Apply lubricant to the seal surface and a thin
Mark I and Mark II is provided for reference. film on the outside diameter of each sleeve. Mark II
Scallops on
2. Press sleeves into the valve housing, one outside edge
Inspection of components from each side.
1. Verify that for each valve there are two (2) 3. While there are no alignment tabs or
sleeves. notches, the sleeves must be mounted so
2. Visually inspect each sleeve for damage to the scallops are aligned with the bolt holes,
surfaces resulting from shipping or post- see Mark II illustration. Sleeves can be
shipping handling. The sealing surfaces rotated to prolong service life. Mark I
(nose) must be free of depressions, slits 2c. Applicable to Mark I sleeves
or gouges. 1. Apply lubricant to the seal surface and a thin
film on the outside diameter of each sleeve. White plug
Disassembly 2. Ensure that all the plastic sleeve plugs are
1. Before working on the KGD valve, verify that installed into the sleeve. Orientation
the valve is in the open position. If it is not, NOTE: If the plastic sleeve plugs are discarded or notches in
housing
move it to the open position. missing, the valve will not operate at its optimum
performance. Ensure that all the plastic sleeve
CAUTION plugs are installed into the sleeve.
Assure line is not pressurized before removing 3. Align the sleeve so that the I.D. groove is at
valve. Valve assembly and parts may be heavy, the bottom and the white plug is at the top. Orientation lug
use proper lifting and support techniques. 4. Verify that the two sleeve orientation lugs on sleeve
I.D. groove
See Section 15, Lifting. match-up to the two sleeve orientation
notches located in the housing. Then FIGURE 7
2. Remove the valve from the piping. gently push the sleeve into the housing.
3. Visually inspect and verify that the sleeve (Note, newer valve housings do not have
bore is clear of all debris, scale and the alignment notches, in this case, orient
elastomer residue. the sleeve as noted in Paragraph 3 and
4. Remove the two elastomer sleeves by press in place. The fit will be more snug
simply pulling each sleeve out of the but performance is not compromised).
housing assembly. (Sometimes a putty knife,
large screwdriver or pry bar is necessary to 3. Do not cycle valve with only one sleeve
pry the sleeve from the valve body). in place.
5. Check the bore diameter of valve housing
for unusual or excessive wear. If found,
valve housing may require replacement.
Installation
1. Sleeves may be installed with valve in either
vertical or horizontal orientation, whichever
is easier for valve handling.
8
KGD
10 FIELD REPLACEMENT OF THE Reassembly FIGURE 8

SECONDARY SEAL 1. If valve has been removed from pipe, lift
valve to vertical position, refer to Lifting,
CAUTION Section 15.
This procedure may be performed with the valve 2. Using DOW III or approved alternate,
in an active pipeline. If it is suspected that either completely fill all internal cavities of the
one or both of the elastomer sleeves have failed, new secondary seal.
or if any continual weeping or discharge from valve 3. Paying attention to the top and bottom
housing is apparent, isolate the pipeline valve of the secondary seal, insert the new Lubricant Contact ribs
and or remove the valve from the line or before lubricated secondary seal into the valve
secondary seal removal. Use of personal protective housing assembly. (The bottom of the seal
equipment, tag out or other plant standard safety has radiused edges).
procedures must be followed. Procedure MUST 4. Place the secondary seal retainer plate
NOT be done with valve in closed position. If valve into position.
is removed for this service, assure line is not 5. Replace and hand tighten all the retainer
pressurized before removing valve. Valve assembly plate fasteners and lockwashers.
and parts may be heavy, use proper lifting and 6. Apply a small amount of recommended
support techniques, refer to Lifting, Section 15. lubricant to the two tapered faces of the
‘sharp end’ of the gate.
Disassembly 7. Press the gate firmly through the secondary
1. Open the valve, so the gate is in the fully seal into the valve housing assembly until
raised position. the mark drawn on the gate reaches the
2. For ease of reassembly, using a permanent top of the retainer plate or gate reaches
marker, draw a line on the gate face along previously recorded dimension.
the top of the secondary retainer plate. If 8. Fully tighten all the retainer plate fasteners.
marking gate is not an option, make note of 9. Reinstall the actuator / frame assembly with
the dimension from top of valve housing to the housing / frame fasteners loosely.
top of gate in full open position. 10. Reconnect the gate to the actuator. (In order
3. Remove the cotter pin from the clevis pin to facilitate installation and future removal,
and remove the clevis pin from the gate. It a coating or anti-seize compound should be
may be necessary to actuate the valve down applied to the outside of the clevis pin over
slightly in order to relieve pressure on the the yoke contact area).
clevis pin to facilitate removal. 11. ‘Stretch’ the frame / actuator assembly
4. Actuator assembly removal: with respect to the housing by pulling (not
Smaller valves (valves with one bolt used on lifting) the frame / actuator assembly to
frame leg): remove the frame to housing bolts its maximum movement away from the
of one side except for the lowest bolt on the housing assembly (holding housing in place
opposite side of the frame. This bolt will act as if valve is removed from pipeline). Tighten
a pivot point for the frame / actuator assembly. the frame / housing bolts and verify the
While supporting the actuator assembly, pivot tightness of the actuator to frame bolts.
the frame / actuator assembly away from 12. Cycle valve to full open position and check
the valve. Continue to provide support while the gate position.
actuator is in this position. 13. Rattle the gate. It should be mostly
Larger valves (valves with more than one disengaged from the sleeves. The outboard
bolt used on frame leg): remove the frame edges of the gate should be free and the
to housing bolts. Lift the frame and actuator center still partially engaged in between
assembly off the housing assembly to allow the sleeves.
secondary seal and gate removal. 14. Cycle gate full closed and full open.
5. Loosen the secondary seal retainer plate 15. Inspect gate for pieces of rubber. If
bolts. significant amount of rubber is present, a
6. Remove the gate by lifting it out of the sharp edge(s) on the gate may be causing
secondary seal. seal damage or the gate is extending too
7. Remove all fasteners and lockwashers that far on the up stroke. The ends of the gate
retain the secondary seal retainer plate in should be free and the center still engaged.
position. If the sleeve / gate is misaligned, loosen the
8. Remove the secondary seal retainer plate frame actuator bolts and / or adjust the yoke
by lifting it up. until the proper position, open and closed,
9. Remove the secondary seal by inserting a is obtained.
flat blade screwdriver midway along the 16. If out of pipeline, reinstall the valve;
outside of the seal, between the seal and the refer to Lifting, Section 15.
valve housing. Pry the seal up and remove.
10. Inspect the gate for sharp edges or
excessive damage. Refer to ‘Gate inspection’
of Paragraph 11.
9
KGD
11 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 4. Examine sleeves for signs of wear, cracking,

INSTRUCTIONS chunking, deep cuts, severe abrasion or
chemical attack (softening or gumming).
Disassembly Replace if in doubt; sleeves must be
1. Before working on the KGD valve, verify that replaced as a set.
the valve is in the open position. If it is not, 5. Examine secondary seal for signs of wear
move it to the open position. or cracking, severe abrasion or chemical
2. Remove the valve from the piping. attack (softening or gumming). Replace if
3. For ease of reassembly, using a permanent in doubt.
marker, draw a line on the gate face along 6. Gate Inspection; inspect the gate for sharp
the top of the secondary retainer plate. If edges or excessive damage. Some scoring
marking gate is not an option, make note of will occur in normal use. Check the gate
the dimension from top of valve housing to for flatness as follows: place a straight
top of gate in full open position. edge across one face of the gate. If there
4. Visually inspect and verify that the sleeve is a gap between the straight edge and
bore is clear of all debris, scale and the surface of the gate greater than 0.030”
elastomer residue. (0.76 mm) for valves up to and including
5. Remove the two elastomer sleeves by NPS 8 (DN 200), or 0.090” (2.29 mm) for all
simply pulling each sleeve out of the other sizes, the gate should be straightened
housing assembly. (Sometimes a putty knife, before reinstallation. The gate can be
large screwdriver or pry bar is necessary to straightened by supporting the outside
pry the retainer flange away from the sleeve edges of the gate and with the ‘dished face’
and the sleeve from the valve flange). of the gate pointing up, apply sufficient force
6. Remove the cotter pin from the clevis pin to the center of the gate using a hydraulic
and remove the clevis pin from the gate. It press. If straightening is performed, use
may be necessary to actuate the valve down considerable care to minimize marks on
slightly in order to relieve pressure on the gate surface. Scores or other distress
clevis pin to facilitate removal. marks may be cleaned up with a belt
7. Remove the actuator/frame subassembly at sander. Machining the gate surface is not
one time by removing the frame bolts that recommended. Light scale buildup may
fasten the frames to the housing and pulling be removed with a putty knife or gasket
it away from the housing assembly. scraper. Inspect the gate for wear and
8. Loosen the secondary seal retainer plate roughness. Use a disc grinder or belt sander
bolts. to remove rough surfaces. Take particular
9. Remove the gate by lifting it out of the care on the leading and beveled edge to
secondary seal. remove burrs and other sharp edges.
10. Remove all fasteners and lockwashers that 7. Examine frame for signs of corrosion,
retain the secondary seal retainer plate in damage or other potential problems.
position. 8. Check all bolting hardware for thread
11. Remove the secondary seal retainer plate integrity, signs of corrosion, straightness,
by lifting it up. etc. Replace as required.
12. Remove the secondary seal by inserting a 9. For valves with purge control assemblies,
flat blade screwdriver midway along the examine major components; look for signs
outside of the seal, between the seal and the of corrosion and material build-up. Clean
valve housing. Pry the seal up and remove. any visible build-up, replace if necessary.
13. Remove housing bolts, and pull halves Examine gasket and replace if necessary.
apart. 10. Examine actuator assembly.
14. Remove old housing gaskets (two). A) Manual valves: check stem for corrosion,
straightness, etc. Look for signs of wear
Visual inspection of parts prior to reassembly on brass stem nut.
1. Check and ensure all housing interior B) A ir or hydraulic: check for seal leaks
surfaces and drain ports are free and clear around cylinder rod seal, heads and
of hardened slurry or other obstructions. caps. Examine cylinder rod for signs of
Clean as required. corrosion, straightness, etc. Service per
2. Inspect the valve housing to ensure that all manufacturer’s instructions.
mating surfaces are clean and free from C) E lectric motor: service per
slurry build-up or severe corrosion Replace manufacturer’s instructions.
if there are signs of excessive or unusual
wear. CAUTION
3. Examine exterior housing surfaces for Assure line is not pressurized before removing
buildup of hardened slurry or other valve. Valve assembly and parts may be heavy,
contamination, clean as required. use proper lifting and support techniques, see
Section 15.
10
KGD
NOTE: Emerson recommends customers always use 12. Rattle the gate. It should be mostly FIGURE 9
genuine Clarkson OEM sleeves, secondary seals and disengaged from the sleeves. The outboard
other replacement parts to maintain the expected, edges of the gate should be free and the
superior, performance of their KGD. Genuine Clarkson center still partially engaged in between
sleeves and secondary seals from Emerson are easily the sleeves.
recognized by the laser etched identifying marks found 13. Cycle gate full closed and full open.
on the outside surface. These marks include the size, 14. Inspect gate for pieces of rubber. If
part number, applicable patent number, elastomer significant amount of rubber is present, a
batch compound and date of manufacture; all of sharp edge(s) on the gate may be causing
which allow complete traceability of the part. Clarkson seal damage or the gate is extending too
replacement sleeves, secondary seals and other parts far on the up stroke. The ends of the gate
from Emerson are the only ones authorized for use should be free and the center still engaged.
and offer the best fit and continued performance that If the sleeve / gate is misaligned, loosen the
non-OEM parts simply cannot give. The use of copycat frame actuator bolts and / or adjust the yoke
parts may invalidate any remaining warranty. If valve until the proper position, open and closed, TABLE 3 - DIMENSIONS
requires further repair, please contact our office for is obtained. Valve size ‘A’
an estimate of feasibility and cost of repair. 15. Reinstall the valve, refer to Section 15, NPS DN inch mm
Lifting. 2 50 1.49 37.9
3 80 1.49 37.9
Reassembly 12 ACTUATOR ADJUSTMENT 4 100 1.58 40.1
1. Lay the first housing half face down on 6 150 1.82 46.2
a suitable flat surface. 1. Prior to installing the valve, adjustment 8 200 1.82 46.2
2. Carefully lay two new housing gaskets on of the gate may be required. This is only 10 250 1.85 47.0
face of housings. Gaskets may be held necessary on sizes NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 12 300 1.67 42.4
in place with a small amount of silicone when pneumatic or hydraulic actuators 14 350 1.96 49.8
lubricant placed between gasket and are used. Larger valves do not require this 16 400 1.96 49.8
housing. adjustment.
3. Take second housing and place into position 2. Actuate the valve so that it is in the fully
on the first housing, and properly align bolt open position.
holes making gaskets remain in place. 3. Adjust the yoke by screwing into or out
4. Insert most of the housing bolts, leaving of the actuator rod to achieve the correct
out the top bolts that are used to hold dimension as measured from Figure 9.
the actuator assembly to the housing 4. Tighten jam nut to maintain correct position.
and loosely tighten. Tap the edges of the 5. Reinstall valve and tighten flange bolts
housings to align the internal sleeve bores to the correct torque value as shown in
to within 1/16” (1.5 mm), at the same time Table 2.
maintaining bolt hole alignment in the 6. For NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600), the yoke
square flanges. is screwed into the rod end fully without
5. Lift the valve assembly to vertical position. a jam nut.
Refer to Lifting, Section 15.
6. Install Secondary Seal per Section 10, 13 BODY FLUSHING AND DISCHARGE
Reassembly, Paragraph 2-8. MANAGEMENT
7. Reinstall the actuator / frame assembly with
the housing / frame fasteners loosely. It is normal for the KGD to discharge media
8. Reconnect the gate to the actuator. (In order during opening and closing cycles. This helps
to facilitate installation and future removal, prevent any solids from building up between the
a coating or anti-seize compound should be sleeves that would prevent a tight seal when
applied to the outside of the clevis pin over the valve is fully open or closed.
the yoke contact area).
9. ‘Stretch’ the frame / actuator assembly
with respect to the housing by pulling (not
lifting) the frame / actuator assembly to
its maximum movement away from the
housing assembly (holding housing in place
if valve is removed from pipeline). Tighten
the frame / housing bolts and verify the
tightness of the actuator to frame bolts.
10. Install new sleeves per instruction in
Section 9, Sleeve installation.
11. Cycle valve to full open position and check
the gate position.
11
KGD
Discharge can be managed (not contained) 3. Clean mating surface of body housing so All valves can be lifted using the frame (yoke)
with the use of a splash guard drain plate. The that there is no dirt, grit, grease, or other assembly as the lift point. DO NOT USE
splash guard drain plate can be connected to debris present. LOCKOUT BRACKETS TO LIFT VALVE. Insert
a customer supplied piping system to provide 4. Remove the adhesive backing from the properly rated straps under the frame top plate,
a means of carrying the discharge away, to a gasket material and apply to the splash one for each leg, and lift, taking care as center
permanent drain or other collection point. Any guard drain plate on the machined flat of gravity shifts. Do not drag the base of the
additional piping system must not be capped mating surface (adhesive back strip). If a cut valve during lifting.
or otherwise prevented to flow freely as this sheet gasket is used, it should be attached
may cause eventual clogging of valve. The use to the splash guard drain plate with an RTV
of body flush ports will assist in purging body type adhesive compound to hold it during
housing of build-up. A splash guard drain plate installation. Attach gasket material to the
is recommended if valve body is flushed. flat surface along the edge of the housing
slot.
General recommendations for discharge 5. Position the splash guard drain plate and
control: loosely fit the fasteners.
• Take care to avoid splash of discharge 6. Verify the position of the gasket material
onto personnel at all times. and the bottom of the housing and tighten
• Wear appropriate personal protective the installed fasteners.
equipment as required. 7. Connect drain piping (if used) to NPT port
• When operating a manual valve, beware as required. If desired, one NPT port may be
of and avoid the splash of the discharge. used to flush and one to drain. If both NPT
• Do not install valve over walkways, electrical ports are to be used as drains, make sure
or other critical equipment without the they do not clog and are cleaned of build-up
use of a splash guard device or similar regularly
considerations.
• Do not cap or close-off both ends of the 15 LIFTING
splash guard drain plate. This can result
in valve failure. CAUTION
• One end of splash guard drain plate can be Valve assembly and parts may be heavy, use
used as a flush inlet. proper lifting and support techniques. DO NOT
• Additional drain piping may be attached to attempt to lift valve together with any adjoining
the splash guard device to direct discharge pipe or other equipment. DO NOT attempt to lift
to collection or drain point. Use of non- valve if full of media. Lifting techniques may vary
collapsible, rigid, pipe is recommended. depending on valve size/weight. Some Clarkson
Using a hose or other collapsible type of pipe KGD air and or hydraulic actuated valves may be
extensions is not recommended. equipped with eyebolts located on the cylinder
• Keep pipe extensions clear of build-up by head. DO NOT attempt to lift valve assembly with
regular flushing or cleaning. this eye.
14 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR For shipment, large KGD valves are normally
SPLASH GUARD DRAIN PLATE palletized in the flat or horizontal position with
the bore oriented vertically, flange faces down
1. Verify that the proper number of mounting on pallet. The palletized valves are loaded on
bolts, washers and nuts, along with the to trucks with a forklift. It is recommended
plate and gasket material are present. unloading should also be done with a forklift.
2. Clean the flat machined surface of the A crane can be used; however the weight must
splash guard plate so that there is no dirt, be supported by the pallet and not the valve.
grit, grease, or other debris present.
TABLE 4 - STANDARD VALVE ASSEMBLY WEIGHTS FIGURE 10

Valve size MH BG AC HC
NPS DN lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg
2 50 43 19.2 - - 62 27.7 52 23.2
3 80 55 24.5 - - 84 37.5 68 30.3
4 100 75 33.5 - - 93 41.5 86 38.4
6 150 89 39.7 - - 144 64.3 96 42.8
8 200 142 63.4 - - 190 84.4 145 64.7
10 250 196 87.5 - - 325 145.0 225 100.4
12 300 - - 373 166.5 493 220.0 316 141.0
14 350 - - 438 195.5 655 292.3 377 168.3
16 400 - - 525 234.3 736 328.5 535 238.8
18 450 - - 569 253.9 840 374.9 634 283.0
20 500 - - 730 325.8 1163 519.1 751 335.2
24 600 - - 1050 468.6 1613 719.9 1150 513.3
12
KGD
FIGURE 11 - KGD-MH EXPLODED VIEW
KGD-MH PARTS LIST

Item Description Qty req Item Description Qty req
A Housing 1 O Flush plug 4
B Mark III sleeve 2 P Handwheel 1
C Gate 1 Q Stem assembly 1
D Actuator frame 2 R Yoke sleeve 1
E Clevis pin 1 S Handwheel base 1
F Cotter pin 1 T Thrust washer 1
G Secondary seal 1 U Woodruff key 1
H Secondary seal retainer plate 1 V Cap nut 1
I Frame mounting hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 W Set screw 1
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 X Base mounting hex screw 4
J Housing hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 Y Base mounting lockwasher 4
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 Z Base mounting hex nut 4
K Frame mounting lockwasher NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 AA Body gasket 2
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 BB Travel limiter 1
L Frame mounting nut NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 CC Lockwasher 1
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 DD Travel limit screw 1
M Retainer mounting hex screw - EE Yoke 1
N Retainer mounting lockwasher -
13
KGD
FIGURE 12 - KGD-BG EXPLODED VIEW
KGD-BG PARTS LIST

A Housing 1 P Bevel gear 1
B Mark III sleeve 2 Q Stem assembly 1
C Gate 1 R Stem nut 1
D Actuator frame 2 S Base mounting hex screw 4
E Clevis pin 1 T Base mounting lockwasher 4
F Cotter pin 1 U Base mounting flat washer 4
G Secondary seal 1 V Stem cover 1
H Secondary seal retainer plate 1 W End cap 1
I Frame mounting hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 X Body gasket 2
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 Y Travel limiter 1
J Housing hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 Z Lockwasher 1
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 AA Travel limit screw 1
K Frame mounting lockwasher NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 BB Handwheel 1
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 CC Yoke 1
L Frame mounting nut NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 DD Stem nut mounting screw 6
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 KGD4 alternate mounting
M Retainer mounting hex screw - EE Adapter plate 1
N Retainer mounting lockwasher - FF Adapter plate mounting screw 4
O Flush plug 4
14
KGD
FIGURE 13 - KGD-HC EXPLODED VIEW
KGD-HC PARTS LIST

A Housing 1 K Frame mounting lockwasher NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2
B Mark III sleeve 2 NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4
C Gate 1 L Frame mounting nut NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2
D Actuator frame 2 NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4
E Clevis pin 1 M Retainer mounting hex screw -
F Cotter pin 1 N Retainer mounting lockwasher -
G Secondary seal 1 O Flush plug 4
H Secondary seal retainer plate 1 P Hydraulic cylinder 1
I Frame mounting hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 Q Yoke 1
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 R Jam nut 1
J Housing hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 S Cylinder mounting lockwasher 4
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 T Cylinder mounting nut 4
15
KGD
FIGURE 14 - KGD-AC EXPLODED VIEW
KGD-AC PARTS LIST

A Housing 1 K Frame mounting lockwasher NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2
B Mark III sleeve 2 NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4
C Gate 1 L Frame mounting nut NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2
D Actuator frame 2 NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4
E Clevis pin 1 M Retainer mounting hex screw -
F Cotter pin 1 N Retainer mounting lockwasher -
G Secondary seal 1 O Flush plug 4
H Secondary seal retainer plate 1 P Air cylinder 1
I Frame mounting hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 Q Yoke 1
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 R Jam nut 1
J Housing hex screw NPS 2 - 16 (DN 50 - 400) 2 S Cylinder mounting flatwasher 4
NPS 18 - 24 (DN 450 - 600) 4 T Cylinder mounting lockwasher 4
U Cylinder mounting nut 4
16
11.9 SMC Filter Regulator

Doc. No. AW∗-OMT0013
PRODUCT NAME
FILTER REGULATOR
MODEL/ Series
～(F,N)02(B,C,E,G,H,M)(-1,2,6,C,J,N,R,Z)-B
AW20K-(F,N)01～
～(F,N)03(B,C,D,E,G,H,M)(-1,2,6,8,J,N,R,W,Z)-B
AW30K-(F,N)02～
～(F,N)04(B,C,D,E,G,H,M)(-1,2,6,8,J,N,R,W,Z)-B
AW40K-(F,N)02～
AW40K-(F,N)06(B,C,D,E,G,H,M)(-1,2,6,8,J,N,R,W,Z)-B
～(F,N)10(B,C,D,E,G,M)(-1,2,6,8,J,N,R,W,Z)-B
AW60K-(F,N)06～
Contents
PAGE
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1～6
2. APPLICATION 7
3. SPECIFICATIONS 7
4. HOW TO ORDER 8
5. ASSEMBLY OF OPTIONAL PARTS 9
6. TROUBLESHOOTING 10
7. CONSTRUCTION / PARTS LIST 11～12
8. BOWL ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS 13～20
9. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 21～24
10. DISASSEMBLY DRAWING 25～29
11. DIMENSIONS 30
FILTER REGULATOR
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage.
These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or “Danger.”
They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International Standards (ISO/IEC),
Japan Industrial Standards (JIS)*1) and other safety regulations*2).
*1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power -- General rules relating to systems
ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power -- General rules relating to systems
IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery -- Electrical equipment of machines (Part 1: General requirements)
ISO 10218: Manipulating industrial robots -- Safety
JIS B 8370: General rules for pneumatic equipment.
JIS B 8361: General rules for hydraulic equipment.
JIS B 9960-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment for machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
JIS B 8433: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety. etc.
*2) Labor Safety and Sanitation Law, etc.
Caution Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.
Warning Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Danger In extreme conditions, there is a possibility of serious injury or loss of life.
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment or
decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific
equipment must be decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on
necessary analysis and test results.
The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who
has determined its compatibility with the product.
This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its latest catalog
information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the
equipment.
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment.
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly.
The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be
performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced.
3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed.
The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent
falling or runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed.
When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented
and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions
of all relevant products carefully.
Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction.
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to
be used in any of the following conditions.
1) Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to
direct sunlight.
2) Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping,
vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and
beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other
applications unsuitable for the standard specifications described in the product catalog.
3) An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety
analysis.
4) Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a
mechanical protective function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
1
FILTER REGULATOR
Safety Instructions
Caution
The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing industries.
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange specifications
or a contract if necessary.
If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
Limited warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements

The product used is subject to the following “Limited warranty and Disclaimer” and “Compliance
Requirements”.
Read and accept them before using the product.
Limited warranty and Disclaimer

The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered.
Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please
consult your nearest sales branch.
For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a
replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage
incurred due to the failure of the product.
Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted
in the specified catalog for the particular products.
Compliance Requirements
When the product is exported, strictly follow the laws required by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and
Industry (Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law).
Caution
SMC products are not intended for use as instruments for legal metrology.
Products that SMC manufactures or sells are not measurement instruments that are qualified by pattern
approval tests relating to the measurement laws of each country.
Therefore, SMC products cannot be used for business or certification ordained by the measurement laws of
each country.
2
Precautions for design
！ WARNING
① External parts including the handle (Material: polyacetal) and bowl (Material: polyacarbonate)
are made of resin. Organic solvents including synthetic fluid, chemicals including acetone,
alcohol, ethylene chloride, sulphuric acid, nitrate, hydrochrolic acid, cutting oil, kerosene,
gasoline, lock material of screw are harmful. Do not use the filter regulator where containing
those.
Effects organic solvents and chemicals, and where these elements are likely to adhere to the
equipment.
Chemical data for substances causing degradation (Reference)
Material
Type Chemical name Application examples
Polycarbonate Nyron
Hydrochloric acid
Acid washing liquid for
Acid Sulphuric acid, Phosphoric acid △ ×
metals
Chromic acid
Sodium hydroxide (Caustic soda)
Degreasing of metals
Potash
Industrial salts
Alkaline Calcium hydroxide (Slack lime) × ○
Water-soluble cutting
Ammonia water
oil
Carbonate of soda
Sodium sulphide
Inorganic
Sulphate of potash － × △
salts
Sulphate of soda
Carbon tetrachloride Cleaning liquid for
Chlorine Chloroform metals
× △
solvents Ethylene chloride Printing ink
Methylene chloride Dilution
Benzene
Aromatic Coatings
Toluene × △
series Dry cleaning
Paint thinner
Acetone Photographic film
Ketone Methyl ethyl ketone Dry cleaning × ×
Cyclohexane Textile industries
Ethyl alcohol
Antifreeze
Alcohol IPA △ ×
Adhesives
Methyl alcohol
Gasoline
Oil － × ○
Kerosene
Phthalic acid dim ethyl
Synthetic oil
Ester Phthalic acid diethyl × ○
Anti-rust additives
Acetic acid
Methyl ether
Ether Brake oil additives × ○
Ethyl ether
Cutting oil
Amino Methyl amino Brake oil additives × ×
Rubber accelerator
Thread -lock fluid
Other Seawater － × △
Leak tester
○：Essentially safe　　△：Some effects may occur　　×：Effects will occur
When the above factors are present, or there is some doubt, use a metal case for safety.
② Avoid the application where charge and discharge of pressure to bowl is switched frequently. This
may damage the bowl. A metal bowl is recommended in these cases.
③ Consult SMC if no leakage is allowed due to the environment, or operating fluid is not air.
3
④ Protect from ultra violet ray and radiation heat by shield.
⑤ A safety device needs to be installed if output pressure is exceeding the set pressure,
otherwise this can cause the breakage of outlet device and equipment or malfunction.
！ CAUTION
① The use outside specifications is prohibited.
② Air consumption from release port is 0.1L/min(ANR) or less.
③ AD27-A with auto drain may leak during exhaust of pressure. (This leakage is allowed in their
constructions and not failure.) Be sure to connect piping for drain.
Selection
！ WARNING
① Synthetic oil and mineral grease used on internal surfaces and packing may leak to the
outlet. Please contact SMC if this is a problem.
② Long absence of operation or operation with outlet circuit sealed or balance circuit may cause
pressure fluctuation in outlet set pressure. Please consult SMC if this is a problem.
③ Set pressure of outlet pressure shall be 85% or less of inlet pressure. Pressure over 85%
makes operation susceptible to flow and inlet pressure which lead to cause unstable
operation.
④ Maximum set pressure range in the spec. has margin. Pressure set may be higher than the
maximum value.
⑤ If filter regulator is used with circuit which requires high exhaust sensitivity or set precision,
please consult SMC.
⑥ N.O. type auto drain should be used under the following requirements to avoid operating
failure.
Output of compressor: 0.75kW or more.
Discharged flow rate: 100L/min (ANR) or more.
If multiple auto drains are used, confirm used compressor has capacity over the result of
multiplying the above capacity and the number of used auto drains.
{ For example, in case of two auto drain, the compressor need the capacity over 1.5kW
[200L/min (ANR)]. }
Operating pressure: 0.1MPa or more at min..
⑦ N.C. type auto drain should be used under the following requirements to avoid operating
failure.
Operating pressure: 0.1MPa or more at min. for AD27-A, 0.15MPa or more at min. for
AD37-A and AD47-A.
Installation
！ CAUTION
① Connect the filter regulator ensuring the direction of " １ " (IN) and " ２ " (OUT) for air direction
or an arrow. Wrong connection may cause malfunction.
② Install vertically so that outlet of drain would turned downward. Use with the outlet of drain
turned horizontal or upward causes malfunction.
③ Install with enough space around filter regulator to perform regular maintenance and
operation. The required space is shown on 「11. Dimensions」 (P36).
④ Do not drop nor apply impact during transportation or installation. This can cause damage to
the product.
⑤ Do not install in areas of high humid or high temperature. Or pressure gauge may
malfunction.
Adjustment
！ WARNING
① Adjust the pressure adjusting handle ensuring correct inlet pressure and outlet pressure.
Excessive rotation may cause damage to internal parts.
② Operate the pressure adjusting handle manually. Tools may break the handle.
4
！ CAUTION
① Check inlet pressure before setting up.
② Be sure to unlock the handle before adjusting the pressure and lock it after setting the
pressure. Failure to follow this procedure can damage the handle and the outlet pressure may
fluctuate.
・Pull the pressure regulator handle to unlock. (You can visually verity this with the "orange
mark" that appears in the gap.)
・Push the pressure regulator handle to lock. When the handle is not easily locked, turn it left
and right a little and then push it. (When the handle is locked, the "orange mark", i.e., the
will disappear.)
③ For the filter regulator with the pressure gauge, do not apply pressure exceeding the
maximum scale of the pressure gauge in order to protect the gauge.
④ Adjust pressure incrementally. Pressure may become lower than set pressure if adjusted by
decreasing the value. Rotate the handle clockwise to raise the set pressure.
Counterclockwise to reduce the pressure. Moreover, please lock the handle after setting
⑤ Outlet pressure may rise if eliminate the inlet pressure after pressure setting and supply
pressure again. The pressure becomes close to the set pressure after air is consumed in
outlet.
⑥ Outlet pressure may change if filter regulator is used for long periods. Please confirm set
pressure regularly.
Piping
！ WARNING
① Blow out or clean piping before piping to eliminate swarf, cutting oil, solid foreign material.
Contamination of piping may cause damage or malfunction.
② When installing piping, avoid chips and sealing materials from piping screws entering the
inside of equipment. Or malfunction may occur. When use sealing tapes, leave 1.5～2
threads of the end of thread exposed.
③ Hold the female screw side and screw in piping with recommended tightening torque.
Insufficient tightening torque lead to cause loose piping or sealing failure. Excessive torque
may lead to cause screw breakage. Tightening without holding female screw side applies
excessive force to the piping bracket which lead to cause breakage.
Recommended torque　　unit：N･m
Screw 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Torque 3～5 8～12 15～20 20～25 28～30 36～38
④ Do not apply any torsional moment, or bending moment except the weight of the filter
regulator itself. External piping needs to be supported separately. Hard piping like steel tube
is susceptible to excessive moment load or vibration. Insert the flexible tube to cancel the
influence.
⑤ Drain guide is not equipped with valve function. Be sure to connect piping for drain. No piping
for drain allows the drain and compressed air to exhaust freely. Also, the piping should be
performed with drain guide held by spanner to prevent breakage of bowl.
⑥ The piping for drain from auto drain should be connected under the following requirements to
avoid operating failure.
AD27-A： I.D. φ2.5 (φ3/32") at min., Length 5m (200") at max.
AD37, 47(N)-A： I.D. φ4 (φ3/16") at min., Length 5m (200") at max.
AD38, 48(N)-A：: I.D. φ6.5 (φ1/4") at min., Length 5m (200") at max.
5
Air Source
！ WARNING
① Use clean air. Compressed air containing chemicals, organic solvent, synthetic oil or
corrosive gas may lead to cause breakage of parts or malfunction.
② Air containing too much moisture may cause malfunction. Install the air drier or the
aftercooler before the filter regulator.
Maintenance
！ WARNING
① Maintenance and checks should be done by following the procedure in the operation
manual. Incorrect handling of the product may cause breakage or malfunction of the
equipment or device.
② Perform periodical check to find cracks, flaws or other deterioration on resin bowl. If any of
them is seen, as malfunction is caused, replace with new bowl or metal bowl.
③ Check for dirt in resin bowl periodically. If any dirt is seen, replace with new bowl. And if
removing off the dirt by washing instead of using a replacement, never use washing material
other than neutral detergent. Otherwise, the bowl is damaged.
④ Replace the element before 2 years passed since purchase or pressure drop from initial
outlet pressure reaches 0.1MPa. Or the element is broken.
⑤ Open and close drain cock manually. Open and close too much may damage the drain cock.
⑥ Drain the bowl by opening drain cock before the drain level in the bowl reaches baffle.
！ CAUTION
① If the first operation is performed and defective setting and the exhaust leakage is found, it is
likely there is foreign object in an internal valve seat part. Failure to remove these parts may
cause damage to internal parts.
② Rotate the handle counterclockwise (O direction) to exhaust the condensate of the
(O←direction)
C2SF(-C)-A.
Press the push button to exhaust the condensate of the C3SF(-W)-A and C4SF(-W)-A.
③ Check the element periodically and replace it with a new one if necessary. If it is found that
outlet pressure drops or the flow is restricted, check the condition of the element.
④ The manual exhaust for emergency case can be performed by counterclockwise rotation of
the handle in AD27-A. (O←direction)
For AD37-A, AD38-A, AD47-A and AD48-A, rotate the drain cock counterclockwise in that
case.(O←direction)
6
2. APPLICATION
This instrument aims at eliminating excess saturated water in the air line and solid foreign
material, also controlling pressure of air lines.
3. SPECIFICATIONS
Model AW20K-A AW30K-A AW40K-A AW40K-06-A AW60K-B
Port size 1/8，1/4 1/4，3/8 1/4，3/8，1/2 3/4 1，3/4
Note1)
Gauge port size 1/8
Fluid Air
Ambient and fluid
-5 ～ 60℃ (Should be no freezing)
temperature
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range
Note2)
0.05 ～ 0.85 MPa
Filtration 5 µm
3
Drain capacity （cm ） 8 25 45
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Semi-standard
Bowl guard Standard （Polycarbonate）
（Steel plate）
Construction Relieving type
Mass （kg） 0.20 0.36 0.66 0.72 2.05
Note 1）Square embedded pressure gauge, without pressure gauge mounting threads ．
Note 2） Set the inlet pressure 0.05MPa or higher than the set pressure.
7
4. HOW TO ORDER
AW 30 K - 03 BE - 1N - B
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
Symbol Description Body size
20 30 40 60
＋
2 With backflow function K With backflow function ● ● ● ●
＋
Nil Rc ● ● ● ●
3 Thread type N NPT ● ● ● ●
F G ● ● ● ●
＋
01 1/8 ● －－－
02 1/4 ● ● ● －
03 3/8 － ● ● －
4 Port size
04 1/2 －－ ● －
06 3/4 －－ ● ●
10 1 －－－ ●
＋
Nil Without mounting option ● ● ● ●
a Mounting B With bracket ● ● ● ●
H With set nut （for panel mounting） ● ● ● －
＋
Float type auto
Nil Without auto drain ● ● ● ●
Option
5 b
drain
C With float type auto drain (N.C.) ● ● ● ●
D With float type auto drain (N.O.) － ● ● ●
＋
Nil Without pressure gauge ● ● ● ●
c
Pressure E Square embedded pressure gauge (with limit indicator) ● ● ● ●
gauge G Round type pressure gauge (with limit indicator) ● ● ● ●
M Round type pressure gauge (with colour zone) ● ● ● ●
＋
d Set pressure
Nil 0.05 to 0.85 MPa setting ● ● ● ●
1 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting ● ● ● ●
＋
Nil Polycarbonate bowl ● ● ● ●
2 Metal bowl ● ● ● ●
e Bowl
6 Nyron bowl ● ● ● ●
8 Metal bowl with sight glass － ● ● ●
C With bowl guard （Steel） ● －－－
6C With bowl guard （Steel）・Nyron bowl ● －－－
＋
Semi-standard
Nil With drain cock ● ● ● ●

Drain guide 1/8 ● －－－
f Drain port J
6 Drain guide 1/4 － ● ● ●
W Drain cock With barb fitting (For φ6xφ4 nylon tube) － ● ● ●
＋
g
Exhaust Nil Relieving type ● ● ● ●
mechanism N Non-relieving type ● ● ● ●
＋
h Flow direction
Nil Flow direction： Left to right ● ● ● ●
R Flow direction： Right to left ● ● ● ●
＋
Name plate, caution plate for bowl and pressure
Nil ● ● ● ●
gauge ：MPa, °C
i Pressure unit
Name plate and caution plate for bowl： psi, °F
Z ● ● ● ●
Pressure gauge： MPa / psi
※ Please refer to the catalog when you select the model.
8
5. ASSEMBLY OF OPTIONAL PARTS
）Bracket
1）
1) Installation of bracket
Set nut Mount the bracket in the direction as shown in the figure.
Assemble so that the bracket and non-rotating parts can align
Hook groove properly.
（Knurled tool
faces） 2） Secure with the set nut
Bracket
Ensure knurling tool side of the bracket of the knurling tool side of
the set nut are facing each other.
（Knurled tool 3） Tightening
faces） Knurled surface on bracket and set nut is used to lock the
Non-rotating assembly.
Filter It is recommended that the set nut is tightened securely by hand
regulator usually.
∗ When retightening
Please use hook spanner on hook groove of the set nut, and
tighten.
Please follow the table below for hand tightening and retightening.
Amount of
Filter regulator Tool size Tightening torque
retightening
AW20K-B 34/38 2.0±0.2 N・m
AW30K-B 52/55 2 to 5 notch 3.5±0.2 N・m
AW40K-B 52/55 4.0±0.4 N・m
）Round type pressure gauge

2）
1) Installation of pressure gauge

Use sealing material on pressure gauge thread and gauge port of
the filter regulator.
Please refer to "Piping" on page 4 when using sealing tape.
Please refer to the following for the size of the spanner when the
pressure gauge is installed.
Filter
regulator Filter regulator Tool size
AW20K-B
Gauge port
AW30K-B
12
AW40K-B
AW60K-B
Note 1） Positioning of pressure gauge

Plug Please adjust the pressure gauge orientation by tightening the
thread.
Don't unscrew gauge, air leakage may occur.
Note 2） The plug is not used if the pressure gauge is in front of the
filter regulator.
Pressure gauge Please detach the plug when you install the pressure gauge on
the back of the filter regulator.
Please install the plug on the front side.
When shipping, the sealing tape is attached to the pressure
gauge.
Note 3） Tightening torque

Please use the value in the torque table described in "Piping" on
page 4 when tightening pressure gauge.
The pressure gauge connection port, AW20-B to AW60-B series
is 1/8 (3 to 5 N･m).
9
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to 「7. CONSTRUCTION / PARTS LIST」 (P11), 「10. DISASSEMBLY DRAWING」 (P25 to P29).
TROUBLE
POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
DEMARCATION PHENOMENON
Pressure is not 1. Opposite flow direction or opposite 1. Install piping or filter regulator correctly as
regulated. installation of filter regulator. shown in manual.
2. Adjust spring is damaged. 2. Replace the adjust spring.
3. Valve spring is damaged. 3. Replace the valve spring.
4. Foreign materials caught in valve seat. 4. Remove the valve guide to clean valve
and valve seat.
5. Valve rubber seat is damaged. 5. Replace the valve assembly.
6. Foreign materials caught in check 6. Replace the check valve assembly.
valve seat.
Pressure
and valve seat.
Set pressure does 2. Valve rubber seat is damaged. 2. Replace the valve assembly.
not return to zero 3. Foreign materials caught in check 3. Replace the check valve assembly.
when pressure valve seat.
handle is 4. Valve spring is damaged. 4. Replace the valve spring.
loosened.
5. Valve adheres to the valve guide. 5. Wash the sliding surface of valve "O" ring
and grease up.
Large air 1. Clog of the element. 1. Replace the element.
Flow rate resistance
reduces flow rate.
Air leaks from the 1. Diaphragm is damaged. 1. Replace the diaphragm assembly.
bonnet exhaust 2. Foreign material is caught in the 2. Clean the relieving valve seat, or replace
port. relieving valve seat. the diaphragm assembly.
and valve seat.
4. Valve rubber seat is damaged. 4. Replace the valve spring.
5. Foreign materials caught in check 5. Replace the check valve assembly.
valve seat.
6. Back pressure exceeding the set 6. Revise the air circuit so that back
pressure is applied to the outlet. pressure does not exceed the set
pressure.
Air leaks Air leaks between 1. Loosened bonnet. 1. Fasten the bonnet.
the bonnet and 2. Diaphragm is damaged. 2. Replace the diaphragm assembly.
the body.
Air leaks between 1. Breakage of bowl packing. 1. Replace the bowl packing.
the bowl and the Grease up before assembling.
body.
Air leaks from the 1. Breakage of bowl. 1. Replace the bowl assembly.
bowl.
Air leaks from the 1. The foreign matter caught in the valve 1. Open the drain cock for a few seconds for
drain cock. of the drain cock. blowing.
2. Breakage of the seating part of the 2. Replace the bowl assembly.
drain cock.
The back flow 1. Foreign materials caught in check 1. Replace the check valve assembly.
Back flow function does not valve seat.
function operate. 2. Check valve adheres to the check 2. Replace the check valve assembly.
valve assembly.
No drainage when 1. Blockage of outlet of the drain cock 1. Replace the bowl assembly.
the drain cock is due to solid foreign matter etc.
opened.
Operational Too much drain 1. Drain level reaches the baffle plate. 1. Open the drain cock for draining and
comes from the replace the element.
piping of outlet
side.
Note) The grease used recommends JX Nippon oil & Energy corporation diamond multipurpose No.2.
10
7. CONSTRUCTION / PARTS LIST
1) Construction
ＡＷ２０Ｋ-
ＡＷ２０Ｋ-B ＡＷ６０Ｋ-
ＡＷ６０Ｋ-B
ＡＷ３０Ｋ-
ＡＷ３０Ｋ-B／AW４０Ｋ
AW４０Ｋ-
４０Ｋ-B
11
2) PARTS LIST
　Parts
Component　
No. Description Applicable model Material Note
① Body AW20K～60K-B Aluminium die cast Urban white 1

② Bonnet AW20K～60K-B Polyacetal Urban white 1
　Parts
Option / Replacement　
Thread Option Part No.
No. Description Material
Type Symbol Specification AW20K-B AW30K-B AW40K(-06)-B AW60K-B
③ Valve assembly －－－ Brass・HNBR AW20P-340AS AW30P-340AS AW40P-340AS AW60P-090AS
④ Element －－－ Polyolefin AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AW60P-060S
－－－ Weatherproof NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS
⑤ Diaphragm assembly
－Ｎ Non-relieving type Weatherproof NBR AR20P-150AS-N AR30P-150AS-N AR40P-150AS-N AR50P-150AS-N
⑥ Bowl packing －－－ NBR C2SFP-260S C32FP-260S C42FP-260S

Bowl assembly
Refer to "8．SPECIFICATIONS OF BOWL ASSEMBLY"
⑦ Auto drain (N.C.)
（P13 to P20).
Auto drain (N.O.)
⑧ Note1）Bracket assembly －－－ Steel plate / Polyacetal AW23P-270AS AR33P-270AS AR43P-270AS Note2）
AW62P-270AS
⑨ Set nut －－－ Polyacetal AR23P-260S AR33P-260S AR43P-260S －
－－ GC3-10AS
Rc
1 0.2MPa setting － GC3-4AS
－－ GC3-10AS
Note3）
Square embedded 1 0.2MPa setting － GC3-4AS
⑩ NPT Z Note4) － GC3-P10AS-X30
pressure gauge
0.2MPa setting
1Z － GC3-P4AS-X30
Note4)
－－ GC3-10AS
G
1 0.2MPa setting － GC3-4AS
⑪ Pressure gauge cover －－－ GC3P-010AS
－－ G36-10-01 G46-10-01
Rc
1 0.2MPa setting － G36-4-01 G46-4-01
－－ G36-10-N01 G46-10-N01
1 0.2MPa setting － G36-4-N01 G46-4-N01
Round type pressure
NPT Z Note4) － G36-P10-N01-X30 G46-P10-N01-X30
gauge
0.2MPa setting
1Z － G36-P4-N01-X30 G46-P4-N01-X30
Note4)
⑫ －－ G36-10-01 G46-10-01
G
1 0.2MPa setting － G36-4-01 G46-4-01
－－ G36-10-01-L G46-10-01-L
Rc
1 0.2MPa setting － G36-4-01-L G46-4-01-L
Round type pressure
－－ G36-10-N01-L G46-10-N01-L
gauge NPT
(with colour zone) 1 0.2MPa setting － G36-4-N01-L G46-4-N01-L
－－ G36-10-01-L G46-10-01-L
G
1 0.2MPa setting － G36-4-01-L G46-4-01-L
Rc － ARP20P-310AS-01
Pressure gauge Aluminium die
⑬ G － ARP20P-310AS-N01
adaptor assembly cast
NPT － ARP20P-310AS-F01
Rc －－ ARP20P-320AS-01
⑭ Plug assembly G － ARP20P-320AS-N01
NPT －－ ARP20P-320AS-F01
Rc － AR20P-370AS-01
⑮ Plug G － PBT resin AR20P-370AS-N01
NPT － AR20P-370AS-01
⑯ Check valve assembly －－ AR23KP-020AS
⑰ Check valve plug assembly －－ AR20KP-090AS
Note1) Bracket and Set nut assembly.
Note2) Bracket with mounting screws.(2pcs)
Note3) With O ring （1 piece） and Mounting screws（2 pcs）.
Note4) Name plate and caution plate for bowl： psi, °F. Pressure gauge： MPa / psi.
Note4) The number in the table is corresponding to the number in structural drawing (avobe-mentioned figure) and "8. SPECIFICATIONS OF
BOWL ASSEMBLY" (P13 to P20), "10. DISASSEMBLY DRAWING" (P25 to P29).
12
8. SPECIFICATIONS OF BOWL ASSEMBLY
１）Bowl
１） assembly / Auto drain for AW20K-B
Option －－
Semi-standard －６Ｃ６Ｃ
Semi-standard 「－」（Standard） Semi-standard 「C」
Port thread ⑦Part no. Port thread ⑦Part no.
Rc Rc
C2SF-A C2SF-C-A
G G
B
B
External NPT C2SF(-Z)-A NPT C2SF-C(Z)-A
appearance
drawing and Semi-standard 「6」 Semi-standard 「6C」
part no.
Rc Rc
C2SF-6-A C2SF-6C-A
G G
NPT C2SF-6(Z)-A NPT C2SF-6C(Z)-A
Option －－
Semi-standard Ｊ６ＪＣＪ６ＣＪ
Semi-standard 「J」 Semi-standard 「CJ」
Rc C2SF-J-A Rc C2SF-CJ-A
G C2SFF-J-A G C2SFF-CJ-A
External NPT C2SFN-J(Z)-A NPT C2SFN-CJ(Z)-A
B
B
appearance
drawing and Semi-standard 「6J」 Semi-standard 「6CJ」
part no.
Rc C2SF-6J-A Rc C2SF-6CJ-A
G C2SFF-6J-A 1/8 G C2SFF-6CJ-A 1/8
NPT C2SFN-6J(Z)-A HEX：14 NPT C2SFN-6CJ(Z)-A HEX：14
Option －－
Semi-standard ２２Ｊ
Semi-standard 「2」 Semi-standard 「2J」
Rc Rc C2SF-2J-A
C2SF-2-A
G G C2SFF-2J-A
B
External NPT C2SF-2(Z)-A NPT C2SFN-2J(Z)-A
B
appearance
drawing and
part no.
1/8
HEX：14
Option Note2）
Ｃ
　
Note2）
Ｃ
　
Semi-standard －６Ｃ６Ｃ
Semi-standard 「－」 Semi-standard 「C」
Rc Rc
AD27-A AD27-C-A
G G
External NPT AD27(-Z)-A NPT AD27-C(Z)-A
appearance
B
B
drawing and Semi-standard 「6」 Semi-standard 「6C」

part no.
Rc Rc
AD27-6-A AD27-6C-A
G G
NPT AD27-6(Z)-A NPT AD27-6C(Z)-A
M5×0.8 M5×0.8
13
Option Note2）
Ｃ
　
Semi-standard ２
Semi-standard 「2」
Port thread ⑦Part no.
Rc
AD27-2-A
G
External NPT AD27-2(Z)-A
appearance
B
drawing and
part no.
M5×0.8
Note 1) B in the table shows the distance from inlet piping centreline to drain port. Refer to "11. DIMENTIONS" （P30）.
Note 2） Min. operating pressure is 0.1MPa.
Note 3) The part with no. ⑦ includes ⑥ Bowl packing. Refer to "10. DISASSEMBLY DRAWING" (P25).
Note 4) "Z" of the part with no. ⑦ is semi-standard for indicated unit of pressure and temperature, which is psi and °F.
Note 5) The symbol for option and semi-standard are described as "4. HOW TO ORDER" (P8).
14
2) Bowl assembly / Auto drain for AW30K-B
Option －－
Semi-standard －６Ｊ６Ｊ
Semi-standard 「－」（Standard） Semi-standard 「J」
Rc Rc C3SF-J-A
C3SF-A
G G C3SFF-J-A
NPT C3SF(-Z)-A NPT C3SFN-J(Z)-A
B
External
B
appearance Semi-standard 「6」 Semi-standard 「6J」
drawing and Port thread ⑦Part no. Port thread ⑦Part no.
part no.
Rc Rc C3SF-6J-A
C3SF-6-A
G G C3SFF-6J-A
NPT C3SF-6(Z)-A NPT C3SFN-6J(Z)-A
1/4
HEX：17
Option －
Semi-standard Ｗ６Ｗ
Semi-standard 「W」
Rc
C3SF-W-A
G
NPT C3SF-W(Z)-A
External
B
appearance Semi-standard 「6W」

drawing and Port thread ⑦Part no.
part no.
Rc
C3SF-6W-A
G
NPT C3SF-6W(Z)-A
Barb fitting
Applicable tube T0604
Option －－
Semi-standard ２２Ｊ
Rc Rc C3SF-2J-A
C3SF-2-A
G G C3SFF-2J-A
B
External
B
appearance
drawing and
part no.
1/4
HEX：17
15
Option －－
Semi-standard ８８Ｊ
Rc Rc C3LF-8J-A
C3LF-8-A
G G C3LFF-8J-A
NPT C3LF-8(Z)-A NPT C3LFN-8J(Z)-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and
part no.
1/4
HEX：17
Option Note 2）
　Ｃ Note 2）
　Ｃ
Semi-standard －６２
Semi-standard 「－」 Semi-standard 「2」
Rc Rc
AD37-A AD37-2-A
G G
NPT AD37N(-Z)-A NPT AD37N-2(Z)-A
6
B
External
B
appearance
drawing and Rc
AD37-6-A
part no. G
NPT AD37N-6(Z)-A
Applicable tube D.O. Applicable tube D.O.

10 （NPT：3/8"） 10 （NPT：3/8"）
Option Note 2）
　Ｃ
Semi-standard ８
Rc
AD37-8-A
G
NPT AD37N-8(Z)-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and
part no.
Applicable tube D.O.

10 （NPT：3/8"）
16
Option Note 2）
　Ｄ Note 2）
　Ｄ
Rc Rc
AD38-A AD38-2-A
G G
External
B
appearance
drawing and Rc
AD38-6-A
part no. G
NPT AD38N-6(Z)-A

10 （NPT：3/8"） 10 （NPT：3/8"）
Option Note 2）
　Ｄ
Semi-standard ８ Metal bowl with sight glass　　Slide elevation
Rc
AD38-8-A
G
NPT AD38N-8(Z)-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and
part no.
31.5

10 （NPT：3/8"）
Note 1) B in the table shows the distance from inlet piping centreline to drain port. Refer to "11. DIMENTIONS"（P30）.
Note 2） Min. operating pressure is 0.15MPa for N.C. type and 0.1MPa for N.O. type.
Note 3) The part with no. ⑦ includes ⑥ Bowl packing. Refer to "10. DISASSEMBLY DRAWING" (P26).
17
3) Bowl assembly / Auto drain for AW40K-B and AW60K-B
Option －－
Semi-standard －Ｊ
Semi-standard 「－」（Standard） Semi-standard 「J」
Rc Rc C4SF-J-A
C4SF-A
G G C4SFF-J-A
NPT C4SF(-Z)-A NPT C4SFN-J(Z)-A
B
External
B
appearance
drawing and
part no.
1/4
HEX. : 17
Option －
Semi-standard Ｗ
Semi-standard 「W」
Rc
C4SF-W-A
G
NPT C4SF-W(Z)-A
External
B
appearance
drawing and
part no.
Barb fitting
Applicable tube T0604
Option －－
Semi-standard 2 2J
Semi-standard 「2」 Semi-standard 「2」
Rc Rc C4SF-2J-A
C4SF-2-A
G G C4SFF-2J-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and
part no.
1/4
Hex：17
18
Option －－
Semi-standard ８８Ｊ
Rc Rc C4LF-8J-A
C4LF-8-A
G G C4LFF-8J-A
NPT C4LF-8(Z)-A NPT C4LFN-8J(Z)-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and
part no.
1/4
HEX：17
Option Note 2）
　Ｃ Note 2）
　Ｃ
Rc Rc
AD47-A AD47-2-A
G G
6
B
External
B
appearance
drawing and Rc
AD47-6-A
part no. G
NPT AD47N-6(Z)-A

10 （NPT：3/8"） 10 （NPT：3/8"）
Option Note 2）
　Ｃ
Semi-standard ８
Rc
AD47-8-A
G
NPT AD47N-8(Z)-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and
part no.

10 （NPT：3/8"）
19
Option Note 2）
　Ｄ Note 2）
　Ｄ
Rc Rc
AD48-A AD48-2-A
G G
External
B
appearance
drawing and Rc
AD48-6-A
part no. G
NPT AD48N-6(Z)-A

10 （NPT：3/8"） 10 （NPT：3/8"）
Option Note 2）
　Ｄ
Semi-standard ８ Metal bowl with level gauge　　Slide elevation
Rc
AD48-8-A
G
NPT AD48N-8(Z)-A
B
External
appearance
drawing and part
no.
31.5

10 （NPT：3/8"）
Note 1) B in the table shows the distance from inlet piping centreline to drain port. Refer to "11. DIMENTIONS"（P30）.
Note 2） Min. operating pressure is 0.15MPa for N.C. type and 0.1MPa for N.O. type.
Note 3) The part with no. ⑦ includes ⑥ Bowl packing. Refer to "10. DISASSEMBLY DRAWING" (P27 to 28).
20
．REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
9．
！　　WARNING
！　　
　Before replacement, ensure that the regulator is not pressurized.
　Rotate the pressure adjusting handle to zero.
Replace refering to 「10．DISASSEMBLY DRAWING」（P25 to P29）.
　After replacement, ensure that specified function is satisfied and external leakage is not found before starting operation.
１）Bowl
１） assembly/element
Applicable model Process Procedure Tools Check item
１） Remove the bowl assembly
Disassembly
Hold the bowl assembly by hand and rotate SMC's special
couterclockwise to remove the bowl assembly. If spanner P/N:
－
the bowl assembly is tightened too much to be 1129129
removed, use hook spanner until it can be loosened (Recommended)
by hand.
２） Remove the baffle element
Rotate the baffle by hand and counterclockwise －－
to remove the baffle and element.
Assembly ３） Mount the element.
－－
AW20K-B Mount the element to the valve guide.
４） Mount the baffle.
Insert the baffle so that concave on the valve guide
－
could meet T convex on the baffle. And rotate it －
clockwise manually until feeling snap fit (approx.
110°) to fix to the element.
５） Mount the bolw assembly.
Hold the bowl assembly by hand and rotate
Refential tightening
clockwise. Do not use tool for mounting because －
torque： 2.2　N・ｍ
the bowl may be damaged. See check item for
referential tightening torque.
Disassembly １） Remove the bowl assembly
Push the bowl assembly lock button. Lifting the
－－
bowl assembly, rotate the assembly 30° (right or
left) to pull out the assembly.
２） Remove the baffle element
Rotate the baffle by hand and counterclockwise －－
to remove the baffle and element.
Assembly ３） Mount the element.
－－
Mount the element to the valve guide.
AW30K-B
４） Mount the baffle.
AW40K-B
Insert the baffle so that concave on the valve guide Direction of baffle.
AW60K-B －
could meet T convex on the baffle. And rotate it (For element convex
clockwise manually until feeling snap fit (approx. side.)
110°) to fix to the element.
５） Mount the bolw assembly.
Match the mating mark of the body and the bowl
assembly to insert the assembly to the body. Rotate
－ Lock button is up.
the assembly 30 ° (right or left) until the lock button
is tossed up to mount the bowl assembly. Ensure
the lock button is up.
２)　
　Diaphragm assembly
Applicable model Process Procedure Tool Check item
Disassembly １） Remove the bonnet
Cross
Rotate the set screw counterclockwise with cross
pointed －
pointed driver to remove the bonnet from the body.
driver
２） Remove parts in order of the pressure adjusting
screw assembly, pressure adjusting spring, and the
diaphragm assembly.
Please be noted that the diaphragm assembly －－
adheres to the bonnet if disassemble parts with the
AW20K-B
handle facing downwards.
AW30K-B
Assembly ３） Mount parts to the body in order of the diaphragm Direction of pressure
AW40K-B
assembly, pressure adjusting spring, and pressure adjusting screw
AW60K-B －
adjusting screw. assembly and diaphragm
assembly
４） Mount the bonnet to the body
Mount the bonnet to the body, and settle it roughly Tightening torque
with four(4) set screws with a cross pointed driver. Cross AW20K-B 2.15±0.3N・m
Then, Tighten screws diagonally with the tightening pointed AW30K-B 2.35±0.3N・m
torque in the check item to settle. driver AW40K-B 3.5±0.3N・m
AW60K-B 4.5±1.0N・m
21
３)　
　Valve assembly
Disassembly １） Remove valve guide after removing bowl Spanner
assembly and element. Nominal：
Hold the valve guide with a spanner to rotate it AW20K-B 11
－
couterclockwise and remove the valve guide. AW30K-B 17
AW40K-B 21
２） Remove the valve spring. －－

３） Remove the valve assembly. －－
AW20K-B Assembly ４） Mount the valve assembly. Positioning the stem
AW30K-B Mate the stem convex and the valve center hole. － and the
AW40K-B valve(centering)
５） Mount the valve spring.
－－
Insert the valve spring to the valve hole
６） Mount the valve guide. Spanner
Hold the valve guide with a spanner to rotate it Nominal： Tightening torque：
clockwise and mount the valve guide. See check AW20K-B 11 AW20K-B 0.8±0.1N・m
item for the tightening torque. AW30K-B 17 AW30K-B 2.35±0.3N・m
AW40K-B 21 AW40K-B 3.5±0.3N・m
１） Remove the bowl assembly, housing, and element.

Disassembly Hexagon
mounting screws to the left with a hexagon wrench wrench key
２） Remove the valve guide.
Spanner
Hold the valve guide with a spanner to rotate it －
Nominal：30
couterclockwise and remove the valve guide.
３） Remove the valve spring. －－
４） Remove the valve assembly. －－
Assembly ５） Mount the valve assembly. Positioning the stem
Mate the stem convex and the valve center hole. － and the
valve(centering)
６） Mount the valve spring.
AW60K-B －－
Insert the valve spring to the valve hole.
７） Mount the valve guide.
Hold the valve guide with a spanner to rotate it Spanner Tightening torque：
clockwise and mount the valve guide. See check Nominal：30 6.5±0.3N・ｍ
item for the tightening torque.
８） Mount the housing.
Mount an "O"ring on the body, assemble the
Hexagon
housing, and tighten the 4 mounting screws Tightening torque：
wrench key
temporary. Tighten the screws additionally and 4.5±1.0N・ｍ
Nominal：5
evenly with the tightening torque shown on the
right using the hexagon wrench key.
22
４)　
　Bracket assembly, panel mount
Applicable model Process Procedure Tools Check items
Assembly １） Mount the parts to the bracket (panel)
Mate the bracket(panel) concave and the bonnet －－
convex to mount the bracket.
２） Settle the bracket (panel) with set nut.
AW20K-B
Rotate the set nut clockwise with a hook spanner Hook spanner
AW30K-B
AW40K-B to settle the parts to the bracket (panel). Nominal Tightening torque
See check item for tightening torque. AW20K-B 34/38 AW20K-B 2.0±0.2N・m
Set nut knurling surface shall face the bracket. AW30K-B 52/55 AW30K-B 3.5±0.3N・m
When mounting with bracket, set nut tightened AW40K-B 52/55 AW40K-B 4.0±0.4N・m
manually is adequate fir general used.
Assembly １） Mount the product to the bracket.
Spanner Tightening torque
AW60K-B Two mounting screws are tightened by hexagon
Nominal：10 ：2.6N・ｍ
spanner for holding.
５)　
　Square embedded pressure gauge
Applicable model Process Procedure Tools Check items
１） Remove the pressure gauge cover
Disassembly
Rotate the pressure gauge cover 15°
－－
counterclockwise to pull out the pressure gauge
cover
２） Remove the pressure gauge
Rotate two set screws counterclockwise with cross Cross pointed
－
pointed driver to remove the pressure gauge and driver
two set screws.
Assembly ３） Ensure "O" ring is mounted to the pressure gauge
AW20K-B
Mount "O" ring to the pressure gauge if the ring fall － Presence of "O" ring
AW30K-B
AW40K-B
off.
AW60K-B ４） Mount the pressure gauge
Rotate two set screws clockwise with cross pointed Cross pointed Tightening torque：
driver to set screws temporary. Then settle them driver 0.3±0.05N・ｍ
with tightening torque in check item.
５） Mount the pressure gauge cover
Insert the pressure gauge mating two detent of the
pressure gauge and holes for them so that the
arrow of the pressure gauge cover comes upper －－
right. Rotate the pressure gauge cover 15°
opposite to the arrow to mount the pressure
gauge.
６)　
　Round type pressure gauge
Disassembly １） Remove the pressure gauge Spanner
Hold the pressure gauge with a spanner on the Nominal：
spanner flat. Then, rotate the gauge AW20K-B
counterclockwise to remove the gauge. AW30K-B －
12
AW40K-B
AW60K-B
AW20K-B Assembly ２） Rap the pressure gauge thread with the seal tape
AW30K-B leaving 1.5 to 2 threads from the end. Wrap seal tape leaving
AW40K-B －
1.5 to 2 threads
AW60K-B
３） Mount the pressure gauge Spanner

Hold the pressure gauge on the spanner flat with a Nominal： Tightening torque：
spanner, and rotate it clockwise to mount the AW20K-B AW20K-B
7～9N・m
circular pressure gauge. AW30K-B AW30K-B
12
See Check item for tightening torque of pressure AW40K-B AW40K-B
12～14N・m
gauge. AW60K-B AW60K-B
23
７)　
　Pressure gauge adapter、
、Plug assembly
Disassembly １） Remove the plug Spanner
Insert the hexagon spanner to hexagon hole of Nominal：
hexagon plug. Rotate the plug counterclockwise to AW20K-B －
remove the plug. AW30K-B
4
AW40K-B
AW60K-B
２） Remove the pressure gauge adapter

Rotate two set screws counterclockwise with cross Cross pointed
－
pointed driver to remove the pressure gauge and driver
AW20K-B two set screws.
AW30K-B Assembly ３） Confirm pressure gauge adapter has ゛O" ring. If
－－
AW40K-B not, mount "O" ring.
AW60K-B ４） Mount pressure gauge adapter.
Cross pointed
Rotate two screws clockwise by Phillips driver to Tightening torque：
driver
fix pressure gauge adapter. 0.3～0.05 N・m
（Torque driver）
See Check item for tightening torque of two screws.
５） Mount plug assembly. Spanner
Insert hexagon spanner into hexagon hole on the Nominal： Tightening torque：
plug and rotate clockwise to fix the plug. AW20K-B AW20K-B
See Check item for tightening torque of two screws. AW30K-B AW30K-B
4 0.6±0.05N・m
AW40K-B AW40K-B
AW60K-B AW60K-B
8)　
　Check valve assembly
１） Remove the check valve cover.
Disassembly
Rotate 2 set screws counterclockwise with cross Cross pointed
－
pointed driver to remove the check valve cover driver
and 2 set screws.
２） Remove check vavle body assembly from main
body.
The chevk valve body assembly can be pulled
manually for removal. －－
AW20K-B
At this time, confirm 2 "O" rings are mounted
AW30K-B
AW40K-B
in place on the main body.
Assembly ３） Confirm body has ゛O" ring (2pcs). If not, mount
AW60K-B －－
"O" ring.
４） Insert convex of the check body assembly into
2 "O" ring mounting holes on the main body － Orientation of check
respectively. valve body assembly
５） Mount the check valve cover.
Rotate 2 screws clockwise by cross pointed driver Cross pointed Tightening torque：
to fix check valve cover. （Torque driver） 0.3±0.05N・ｍ
See check item for tightening torque of 2 screws.
24
10．DISASSEMBLY
10． DRAWING
1) AW20K-B
Stem assembly
（Convex） ③Valve assembly
Valve spring
Valve guide
Mounting screws
Handle (4 pcs) （spanner flats）
（concave：2 places）
④Element
②Bonnet
（T type convex）
Adjust screw Baffle
assembly
（Convex）
⑥Bowl packing
Adjust spring
⑦Bowl assembly
⑯Check valve assembly
Mounting screws(2 pcs)
Check valve cover
⑤Diaphragm
assembly
Drain-cock
①Body
"O" ring Mounting
screws(2 pcs)
Pressure gauge adaptor
"O" ring
⑬Pressure gauge
Check valve adaptor assembly
body assembly
⑭Plug assembly
⑮Plug
Square embedded pressure gauge body
"O" ring
⑰Check valve plug Mounting screws(2 pcs)
assembly
(Arrow)
⑬Pressure gauge （Screw) ⑪Pressure gauge cover
adaptor assembly
⑩Square embedded
"O" ring
pressure gauge
(Detent insertio
hole ：2 places) （Detent：2 places）
（Width across flats）
⑫Pressure gauge
Note) Ｔhe ⑯Check valve assembly can be replaced with the ⑭Plug assembly and
the ⑰Check valve plug assembly to change the direction of fluid flow.
25
2) AW30K-B/ AW40K-B
Stem assembly
（Convex)
③Valve assembly
Valve spring
Valve guide
Mounting （spanner flats）
Handle screws (4 pcs) （concave：２ place）
④Element
②Bonnet （T type convex）
Baffle
（Convex) Adjust screw

assembly
⑥Bowl packing
⑯Check valve assembly

Mounting screws (2 pcs) Adjust spring ⑦Bowl assembly
Check valve cover
Lock button
⑤Diaphragm
assembly
"O" ring ①Body （Setting mark） "O" ring Mounting screws(2 pcs)
Check valve
body assembly Pressure gauge adaptor
⑬Pressure gauge
adaptor assembly
（Setting mark） ⑭ plug assembly
⑮ plug
⑰Check valve plug
assembly "O" ring Square embedded pressure gauge body
⑬Pressure gauge Mounting screws (2 pcs)

adaptor assembly （Screw）
(Arrow)
"O" ring
⑪Pressure gauge cover
⑩Square embedded
Mounting screws(2 pcs) pressure gauge
(Detent insertion
（Width across flats）
hole：2 places) （Detent：2 places）
⑫Pressure gauge
Note) It is possible to mount ⑩Square embedded pressure gauge or ⑬Pressure gauge adaptor
assembly or ⑭Plug assembly instead of ⑯Blanking plate assembly.
26
3) AW60K-B
Stem assembly
（Convex)
③Valve assembly
Mounting screws Valve spring

(4 pcs)
Handle Valve guide

（spanner flats）
（concave：２ place）
（Convex)
②Bonnet ④Element
Washer
（T type convex）
Adjust screw Baffle

assembly
"O" ring
Housing
Mounting screws
(4 pcs)
Adjust spring
⑯Check valve
assembly
Mounting
screws (2 pcs) ⑤Diaphragm （Setting mark）
uge adaptor Check valve assembly
cover
⑥Bowl packing
①Body
"O" ring ⑦Bowl
assembly
"O" ring Mounting screws(2 pcs)

"O" ring Pressure gauge Lock button
Check valve adaptor
body assembly ⑬Pressure gauge
adaptor assembly
⑭ plug assembly
⑮ plug
⑰Check valve plug assembly （Setting mark）
"O" ring Pressure gauge body
⑬Pressure gauge （Screw） (Arrow)
adaptor assembly
⑪Pressure gauge cover
"O" ring
Pressure gauge adaptor ⑩Square embedded pressure gauge
Mounting screws(2 pcs) (Detent insertion
（Width across flats） hole：2 places) （Detent：2 places）
⑫Pressure gauge
Note) It is possible to mount ⑩Square embedded pressure gauge or ⑬Pressure gauge adaptor
assembly or ⑭Plug assembly instead of ⑯Blanking plate assembly.
27
4) AW20K-B/AW30K-B/AW40K-B Bracket assembly・Panel mounting Disassembly drawing.
⑨Set nut
（Knurlet faces)
⑧Bracket assembly Bracket
（Knurlet faces)
（Concave）
（Convex） Product
28
5) AW60K-B Bracket assembly Disassembly drawing.
Bracket
⑧Bracket assembly
29
11.DIMENSIONS
Panel fitting
Thickness of plate
Model Thickness of plate (mm)
AW20K-B
MAX.3.5
AW30K-B
AW40K-B
MAX.5
AW40K-06-B
(Gauge port size) (Port size)
Maintenance
space
Drain
Round type
Square embedded Round type
Option pressure　gauge
pressure gauge pressure　gauge
(with colour zone)
appearance drawing
External
Piping center Piping center

Demensions
Optional
pressure gauge
Port size Standard specifications Square Round type Round type pressure
Model port size
embedded pressure gauge (with colour zone)
pressure gauge
P1 P2 A （Note１
Ｂ C（Note 2 D F G J K H J H J H J
AW20K-B 1/8・1/4 1/8 40 87.6 72.4 26 M28X1 40 26 5 □28 27 φ37.5 62.5 φ37.5 63.5
AW30K-B 1/4・3/8 1/8 53 115 85.6 29.4 M38X1.5 55 29.4 3.5 □28 30 φ37.5 66.9 φ37.5 67.9
AW40K-B 1/4・3/8・1/2 1/8 70 147 91.7 37.3 M42X1.5 80 37.3 1.5 □28 38.4 φ42.5 75.7 φ42.5 75.7
AW40K-06-B 3/4 1/8 75 149 93.2 37.3 M42X1.5 80 37.3 1.2 □28 38.4 φ42.5 75.7 φ42.5 75.7
AW60K-B 1 1/8 95 234 175.5 47.5 － 30 47.5 3.2 □28 44.3 φ42.5 80.8 φ42.5 80.8
Optional
Model Bracket mount dimensions Panel mount dimensions
ＭＮ Q Ｒ S T U ＶＷＹＺ
AW20K-B 30 34 43.9 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 24.7 28.5 14 6
AW30K-B 41 40 45.8 6.5 8 53 2.3 31.1 38.5 19 7
AW40K-B 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AW40K-06-B 50 54 55.5 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AW60K-B 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 －－－－
Dimension:B of auto-drain and optional bowl assembly

Optional - C D
Standard
2 6 8 C 6C J 2J 6J 8J CJ 6CJ W 6W － 2 6 8 C 6C － 2 6 8
AW20K-B 87.4 87.6 － 87.6 87.6 91.4 93.9 91.4 － 91.4 91.4 －－ 104.9 104.6 104.9 － 104.9 104.9 －－－－
AW30K-B 117.6 115 137.6 －－ 121.9 122.1 121.9 142.1 －－ 123.6 123.6 156.8 156.8 156.8 156.8 －－ 156.8 156.8 156.8 156.8
AW40K-B 149.6 147 169.6 －－ 153.9 154.1 153.9 174.1 －－ 155.6 155.6 187 189 186.9 188.8 －－ 186.9 189 186.9 189
AW40K-06-B 151.6 149 171.6 －－ 155.9 156.1 155.9 176.1 －－ 157.6 157.6 189 191 188.9 190.8 －－ 188.9 191 188.9 191
AW60K-B 236.6 234 256.6 －－ 242.6 241.1 242.6 261.1 －－ 240.9 240.9 274 276 273.9 275.8 －－ 273.9 276 273.9 276
Note 1) The specifications of auto-drain and optional bowl assembly are described in 「8. SPECIFICATIONS OF BOWL
ASSEMBLY」 (P12～P19).
Note 2) B dimension is a size in the state to unlock the handle.
30
S
Revision history
4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021 JAPAN

Tel: + 81 3 5207 8249 Fax: +81 3 5298 5362
URL http://www.smcworld.com
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
© 2008 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved

CONSEP PTY LTD
59 Newton Road, Wetherill Park
NSW AUSTRALIA, 2164
TEL: (02) 9756 5299
INTERNET SITE: http://www.consep.com.au

E-MAIL ADDRESS: sales@consep.com.au
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ELECTROWINNING RECTIFIERS
MODEL NUMBER: RHE800
SAN ALBINO PROJECT

Serial No: C22600
OPERATING, INSTALLATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
ELECTROWINNING RECTIFIERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 3
2.0 ELECTROWINNING SPECIFIC SAFETY .................................................................................... 4
3.0 PID & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ................................................................................................. 5
4.0 SUB VENDOR MANUALS.............................................................................................................. 6
Page 2 of 7
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Consep Pty Ltd proprietary designed Electrowinning Cells are used to recover metal
values, usually gold and silver, from solutions originating from intensive cyanidation of
gravity concentrate or carbon elution circuits. These rich, gold bearing solutions are often
referred to as Pregnant Solution or Pregnant Eluate. On completion of the electrowinning
process, the solution is depleted of precious metals and is therefore referred to as barren
solution.
Refer to the design criteria and process description for your particular plant for further
process operation details.
The reagents encountered in the electrowinning process are the same as those used in the
elution or intensive cyanidation process, namely caustic and cyanide. The suppliers MSDS
notices should be read and understood before commencing operations.
Several gases are evolved during the electrowinning process and these would normally be
extracted by the ventilation fan. However, an accumulation of explosive gases (oxygen and
hydrogen) may occur inside the cell lid. These gases can be ignited by short circuiting of
extraneous metal strands when the cell current is applied. This can result in a loud ‘pop’
and cause some splashing of the hot electrolyte solution. It is important to observe the ‘no
naked lights’ instruction and always wear safety clothing, especially a face shield or goggles,
when working near a ‘live cell’.
When handling the cathodes or anodes, adhering liquids can still be corrosive and contain
cyanide, thus the wearing of safety clothing still applies.
Ammonia is often smelt in the vicinity of the cell. This is a product of decomposition of
cyanide and although should not be a problem, should be monitored.
Page 3 of 7
2.0 ELECTROWINNING SPECIFIC SAFETY
Only personnel trained in the safety procedures of the Electrowinning

Cell, including cyanide handling, emergency procedures and cyanide
exposure symptoms should be allowed to work on or around the
Module. Limit access to authorised personnel.
The operation of the Electrowinning Cell involves the use of

concentrated sodium cyanide (NaCN) and caustic soda (NaOH)
solutions, and as such extreme care is required with operation of the
system.
Adequate ventilation of the Electrowinning Cell area is required, as at

the concentrations of NaCN & NaOH used, there will be an equilibrium
concentration of HCN form if no ventilation present.
Vessels covered and fitted with an extraction system or open vessels

with forced fume hood type extraction systems are recommended.
Alarms MUST be interlocked to operation of extraction system,
warning of extraction system failure.
It is recommended that a fixed HCN vapour monitor is installed at a

location at the nearest operator exposed access point, with relays to
an audible alarm for HCN levels above 5 ppm. At an absolute
minimum, operators must wear personal HCN monitors.
It is ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL that no naked flames are used in the

vicinity of the Electrowinning Cell. Without adequate ventilation there
is a risk of hydrogen gas and oxygen gas accumulation.
Report any leaking valves or other fittings as soon as noticed, all

leaks should be fixed as soon as practical. Leaking leach solution is
a significant hazard.
Safety glasses must be worn at all times in vicinity of the

Electrowinning Cell
Page 4 of 7
3.0 PID & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
Please refer to Section 7 of the Main Acacia CS500 Manual

All P&I and Electrical Drawings are provided there
Page 5 of 7
4.0 SUB VENDOR MANUALS
Page 6 of 7
11.11 Electrowinning Cell Manual

CONSEP PTY LTD
59 Newton Road, Wetherill Park
NSW AUSTRALIA, 2164
TEL: (02) 9756 5299 FAX: (02) 9756 5102
INTERNET SITE: http://www.consep.com.au

E-MAIL ADDRESS: sales@consep.com.au
OPERATING, INSTALLATION AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
ELECTROWINNING CELLS
MODEL NUMBER: EWC 600 x 600 x 9
Nicoz Resources S.A. – San Albino Project

Serial No: C22600_CSE609
OPERATING, INSTALLATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
ELECTROWINNING CELLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 3
2.0 ELECTROWINNING SPECIFIC SAFETY .................................................................................... 4
3.0 PROCESS DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................. 5
4.0 CELL OPERATION .......................................................................................................................... 8
5.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING.................................................................................................................. 12
6.0 INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................... 13
Page 2 of 14
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Consep Pty Ltd proprietary designed Electrowinning Cells are used to recover metal
values, usually gold and silver, from solutions originating from intensive cyanidation of
gravity concentrate or carbon elution circuits. These rich, gold bearing solutions are often
referred to as Pregnant Solution or Pregnant Eluate . On completion of the electrowinning
process, the solution is depleted of precious metals and is therefore referred to as barren
solution.
Refer to the design criteria and process description for your particular plant for further
process operation details.
The reagents encountered in the electrowinning process are the same as those used in the
elution or intensive cyanidation process, namely caustic and cyanide. The suppliers MSDS
notices should be read and understood before commencing operations.
Several gases are evolved during the electrowinning process and these would normally be
extracted by the ventilation fan. However, an accumulation of explosive gases (oxygen and
hydrogen) may occur inside the cell lid. These gases can be ignited by short circuiting of
extraneous metal strands when the cell current is applied. This can result in a loud ‘pop’
and cause some splashing of the hot electrolyte solution. It is important to observe the ‘no
naked lights’ instruction and always wear safety clothing, especially a face shield or goggles,
when working near a ‘live cell’.
When handling the cathodes or anodes, adhering liquids can still be corrosive and contain
cyanide, thus the wearing of safety clothing still applies.
Ammonia is often smelt in the vicinity of the cell. This is a product of decomposition of
cyanide and although should not be a problem, should be monitored.
Page 3 of 14
2.0 ELECTROWINNING SPECIFIC SAFETY
Only personnel trained in the safety procedures of the Electrowinning

Cell, including cyanide handling, emergency procedures and cyanide
exposure symptoms should be allowed to work on or around the
Module. Limit access to authorised personnel.
The operation of the Electrowinning Cell involves the use of

concentrated sodium cyanide (NaCN) and caustic soda (NaOH)
solutions, and as such extreme care is required with operation of the
system.
Adequate ventilation of the Electrowinning Cell area is required, as at

the concentrations of NaCN & NaOH used, there will be an equilibrium
concentration of HCN form if no ventilation present.
Vessels covered and fitted with an extraction system or open vessels

with forced fume hood type extraction systems are recommended.
Alarms MUST be interlocked to operation of extraction system,
warning of extraction system failure.
It is recommended that a fixed HCN vapour monitor is installed at a

location at the nearest operator exposed access point, with relays to
an audible alarm for HCN levels above 5 ppm. At an absolute
minimum, operators must wear personal HCN monitors.
It is ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL that no naked flames are used in the

vicinity of the Electrowinning Cell. Without adequate ventilation there
is a risk of hydrogen gas and oxygen gas accumulation.
Report any leaking valves or other fittings as soon as noticed, all

leaks should be fixed as soon as practical. Leaking leach solution is
a significant hazard.
Safety glasses must be worn at all times in vicinity of the

Electrowinning Cell
Page 4 of 14
3.0 PROCESS DESCRIPTION
3.1 Process Description
Pregnant Solution (electrolyte) is passed through the Electrowinning Cell. While passing
through the cell, a portion of the solution’s precious metals are deposited under applied
currents onto the cathode mesh wrapped around the cathode frames. The solution then
exits the cell and either gravitates, or is pumped, back to the Pregnant Solution Tank or
carbon elution column.
The electrolyte is circulated through the circuit until t h e c o n ce n t ra t io n o f p re c io u s

m e t a ls in so lu t io n f a l ls b e lo w an acceptable level
The gold depleted solution is referred to as Barren Solution.
The Electrowinning Cell is designed to operate at a temperature of

up to 80 degrees Celsius.
The elevated temperature improves the efficiency of gold deposition.
Table 1: Typical Electrolyte Solutions
Property Typical Value
NaOH (%) 0.5-2
NaCN (%) 0.2-1.0
pH 12.5
Temp (oC) 30-80
Au (ppm) 100 - 10,000
Conductivity (mScm-1) ~ 20
Elution times (hrs) Nominally 12 to 24 hours
Page 5 of 14
3.2 Electrowinning
The electrowinning cell consists of a series of anode (positive) and cathode (negative)
electrodes. Under a driving current, provided by the cell rectifier, reactions occur in the
cell at the surface of these electrodes. These reactions are heterogeneous, involving
electron exchanges between the cathodes, solution species and anodes.
The precious metals in solution are deposited at the cathode during electrowinning
according to the following reduction equation where gold (Au) is interchangeable with silver
(Ag):
Au(CN)2- +e- = Au + 2CN-
Additional reactions that will also occur at the cathode surface include:
2H2O + 2e- = H2 + 2OH-

O2 + 2H2O + 4e- = 4OH-
At the anode the major reaction is the oxidation of water to oxygen;

2H2O = O2 + 4H+ + 4e-
The oxidation of water to oxygen and the evolution of hydrogen often consume the
majority of the current used in electrowinning, with less than 25% used for the recovery
of precious metals.
The recovery rate achieved of gold and other precious metals per pass in practice will
depend on many factors, including electrolyte temperature, ion concentrations cathode
material surface area and flow rates.
3.3 Cell Power Supply
In order to electrowin gold from the circulating electrolyte, electrons must be supplied to the
gold cations in the eluate, as per the above process description, through connection of the
cell busbars with a suitable DC current supply.
This is typically achieved through an AC supply powered rectifier, supplying variable

voltage outputs across its terminals of 0-8V DC for typical gold electrowinning applications.
The current capacity of the rectifier, or the power, will be dependent upon the number of
cathodes, the total area of the cathode mesh and the type of metals to be electrowon.
Typical current densities used for gold electrowinning range from 5-15 A/m2 of cathode
mesh surface area for electroplating gold and 15-25 A/m2 in sludging operations.
Page 6 of 14
3.4 Gold Recovery
The electrowon gold will be recovered from the cathodes. Some will be collected from the
bottom of the electrowinning cell.
With stainless steel mesh cathodes used in sludging operations, where electrowinning is
conducted under higher current density conditions for promotion of dendritic gold growth,
the sludge is removed from the stainless mesh cathodes by high pressure water washing.
The recovered gold sludge is then filtered, dried, mixed with flux and smelted in the barring
furnace.
When mild steel wool cathodes are used, these are removed from the frames, then calcined
in an oven. Exposure to hot air in the oven oxidises the mild steel.
The gold rich calcine can then be mixed with flux and smelted in a barring furnace.
Page 7 of 14
4.0 CELL OPERATION
4.1 Installing Cathodes & Anodes
The anode and cathode frames are placed in the cell in an alternating configuration. An
anode frame is initially placed in the first mounting slot in front of the inlet nozzle. The
anode frame can be identified by its “punched hole” arrangement. Then a cathode frame,
consisting of a flat bar frame wound with stainless steel mesh or mild steel wool is placed
behind this, after which the remaining frames are installed alternately until the cell is fully
packed.
The cathode frames are bolted to the cathode busbar located at the front of the
electrowinning cell. The cathode busbar is positioned higher than the anode busbar. The
anode frames bolt to the rear busbar (located directly behind and lower than the cathode
busbar). The busbar holes will also give guidance to whether an anode or cathode should
be placed in a certain position, however please refer to the electrowinning cell general
arrangement drawing at the rear of this manual for the assembly sequence and location.
Once all anode and cathode frames are positioned in place, secure the anode frames to
the anode busbar. The anode frames are secured using STAINLESS STEEL nuts.
The cathode frames are secured to the cathode busbar with BRASS nuts.
As the cathode frames are removed after each electrowinning process is completed, brass
nuts are used to reduce wear on the stud bolt, making the brass nut the “wear item”
which is easily replaced when necessary.
The fasteners (nuts) should all be secured to ensure that full contact is achieved between
the anode and cathode frames and their respective busbar to ensure local heating at the
busbar- anode/cathode junction does not occur.
The contacting surfaces must be smooth and free from contamination, to ensure
full contact at all times.
It is recommended to clean the busbar and the anode and cathode frames contacting
surfaces with WD40 and a “Scotch-Brite” scouring pad (or equivalent) every time the
electrowinning cell is loaded to ensure good electrical contact. A corrosion preventing
lubricant such as Vaseline (or equivalent) should also be applied around the point of contact
after the anode and cathode frames have been secured. The busbars should also be
inspected after the rectifier is energized and prior to the cell being left unsupervised, to check
that no abnormal activity or build-up of heat is present.
Page 8 of 14
Whenever handling, adjusting, installing or extracting anode and cathode frames, you
MUST ensure that all power is safely isolated from the electrowinning cell. Refer to your
local site procedure for details of isolation and tag out procedures and operations.
CAUTION: POWER SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM THE CELLS WHEN THIS

OPERATION IS BEING CARRIED OUT.
Once all anode and cathode frames are secured, the cell lid can then be closed. During
commissioning the lid can be kept open to make flow observations. Lowering and raising
of the electrowinning cell lid should be affected using a lifting rope and sheeve assembly,
and is a two man operation. Care must be taken to ensure that no body parts are between
the cell lid and the cell body during closing operations.
4.2 Electrowinning
(a) Start Up
• Ensure that electrolyte is flowing and the extraction fan is running .

The extraction fan should be connected to the lid vent via a flexible ducting
clamped over the vent nozzle.
• Wait until the EW Cell tank is at least half full of solution before switching on
the rectifier to apply voltage. A voltage of 2.0-3.0 is typically sufficient.
• Monitor the current and if current approaches the maximum output current of
the rectifier, lower the voltage.
(b) Operation
The actual operating conditions will depend upon the electrolyte characteristics.
The voltage and current values are a guide only. The electrolyte conditions may
have to be adjusted to achieve the desired cell efficiency.
The correct level of solution is approximately 0-10mm below the top of the cathode
frames. This should just submerge the cathodes in the electrolyte flow.
The current will tend to drop during operation. The voltage should be reduced if gas
evolution at the cathode surface is evident, as this may be detrimental to the
process.
Cathode residence time is usually limited by the physical capacity of the steel mesh
to continue loading gold whilst maintaining sufficient permeability to allow adequate
flow. In sludging processes with stainless steel mesh on the cathodes, this is less
of an issue. The procedure selected will depend upon the individual plant’s
philosophy. This is often tied into a smelting and bullion shipment schedule.
Page 9 of 14
A sloping base has been incorporated into the cells in order to facilitate recovery of
sludge. A valve is to be installed on this outlet nozzle for ease of sludge removal.
It is important to check the anode and cathode bars for excessive temperature build-
up after 1-2 hours operation. This should be done using an infra-red thermometer
or similar. The bars should not exceed 20 degrees Celsius above ambient.
4.3 Sludge Removal
CAUTION: POWER SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM THE CELLS WHEN

THIS OPERATION IS BEING CARRIED OUT.
(a) Stop the electrolyte flow through the EW cell.
(b) Isolate the Rectifier.
(c) Open the EW Cell Decant Valve to drain the majority of solution.
(d) Open the EW cell lid, remove the BRASS nuts that fasten the cathode
frames to the cathode busbar.
(e) When solution level is at the EW Cell Decant Valve open the Sludge Drain
Valve to drain the remaining solution into the Cathode Washing Module or
a suitable collection vessel.
(f) Rinse the cathodes with fresh water
(g) Lift out the cathode frames either individually by hand or as a set using the
Lifting Frame, then rinse out the bottom of the EW cell.
(h) Pressure wash both sides of each cathode in the Cathode Washing
Module .
(i) Decant wash water from the Cathode Washing Module as required before
draining the sludge into the filter, dewatering the sludge and placing the sludge
filter cake into a drying oven.
(j) Once all the cathodes have been cleaned, the cathode bus bar should be
cleaned before fitting the clean cathodes.. Anodes should be routinely
checked for signs of corrosion.
Page 10 of 14
4.4 Cathode Winding (Where Applicable)
Sludging Stainless Mesh Method
For stainless wire mesh, a 2 wire 0.152mm diameter knitted mesh can be used.
Wrapping density should be 12-16 layers per cathode, approximately 3-4 kg of mesh
per square metre of frame.
Cathode Frame Stainless Mesh Sock Installation
(a) The cathode frame socks supplied fitted to the cathode frames are knitted to
a size to fit the frames of the electrowinning cell cathodes.
(b) The knitted sock folds around the base of the frame.
(c) The two (2) tensioning bars are then inserted. One bar on each side of the
sock.
(d) Tension both bars so that the sock is stretched and sits flat against the frame.
Adjust the bar to the closest adjustment hole on the frame while maintaining
tension and insert the fastening screws. Each adjusting hole is 12.5mm apart
which gives a sufficient range for installation and then further adjustment later,
if needed.
(e) Continue this process for each cathode frame.
Page 11 of 14
5.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING
The electrowinning cell operation is generally trouble free when operated
correctly. Minor problems that can occur are:
5.1 Overheating of Conductor Bars
This is usually caused by lack of continuous contact between the stainless steel
(anodes and cathodes) and their busbar. To remedy, clean the busbars and ensure
clean tight electrical connections from the busbars to anodes and cathodes.
Other hot spots can be caused by shorting between anode and cathode bus bars
and the EW cell body is the insulation block is compromised or electrolyte solution
has been repeatedly spilt on the bus bars leaving a paste of salts which form a
conductive pathway. Good housekeeping is essential. Check clearances between
the cathodes and anodes and ensure no physical contact.
Whenever cathode frames are left out of the cell, the limiting current must be
reduced proportionally to avoid overheating.
5.2 Low Cell Current
The current is determined by the electrolyte conductivity. When a reasonable

operating current cannot be obtained at 2-5 volts then it is probably due to a low
ionic solution strength.
Addition of NaOH to the electrolyte will increase solution conductivity. A low current
means low cell efficiency.
5.3 Corrosion of Anodes
The stainless steel anodes will corrode if sulphate or chloride ion concentration of
the solution is high, so it is important that water used in the process is low in mineral
content. Corrosion will be inhibited by high pH, so it is important that the solution pH
is not less than 12.0
There can also be a localised pH drop at the anode surface associated with oxygen
formation. This condition is more prevalent at low solution flow rate where the H+
ions are not swept away. Once pitting has started it tends to be accelerated due to
creation of high current densities around the crevices.
Excess bubbling is a sign of too higher voltage and can lead to anode corrosion.
Scale on the anodes will inhibit current capacity and when detected, the anodes
should be removed and cleaned with a wire brush before the rusting becomes too
severe.
Page 12 of 14
6.0 INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE
6.1 Installation
1. Place the cell on level ground and secure to floor. The RL of the top lip should be
even all the way around the periphery. Lifting lugs have been provided on the cell
and should be used with an appropriate spreader bar to ensure that no lateral
pressure is placed on the cell body.
2. Connect the inlet and outlet pipes and plumb to appropriate vessels/pumps. For the
eluate inlet and outlet, Consep recommends the use of wafer type butterfly valves
(SS/EPDM).
3. Connect power supply to rectifiers. Positive (+ve) termination to the anode busbar
and Negative (–ve) termination to the cathode. The electrowinning cell busbars are
designed for connection at both ends. Please note that DC cabling route length
should be identical.
4. Connect an extraction fan and flexible ducting to the lid extraction vent to ensure
proper removal of generated fumes away from the cell, room and operators. The
recommended flow rate per EW Cell is 150-200/sec @ approximately 500Pa. Actual
flow rates will be dependent on the size of the fan and ducting installed.
5. Ensure that all cathodes and anodes are located in their appropriate positions and
all holding bolts are firmly tightened.
6. Wet commission the unit first without the power supply on to ensure no piping leaks
or splashing occurs at the selected flow rate.
7. Apply power and follow the operating procedure. Do not apply power to non-alkaline
solutions eg. water.
A suitable rectifier has been specified by an electrical engineer to suit your new EW
cell. The interconnecting cables should be appropriately sized for the anticipated
electrical draw and terminations should be made using a 12mm stainless steel bolt
using palm lugs.
Consult a site electrician or electrical engineer before proceeding. These are

guidance notes only and should be verified by a certified electrical fitter.
Page 13 of 14
6.2 Maintenance
The Consep Electrowinning Cell is a low maintenance unit with minimal parts.
Busbar bushes should be replaced if hot spots occur on the busbars themselves.
Fasteners may cross thread and should be replaced immediately if this occurs as
poor contact due to incorrect fastening will be the result causing hot joints and the
potential for ignition of gases evolved through electrowinning, or in extreme cases
may set fire to electrical cables. Anode and cathode frames should be replaced
once corrosion becomes excessive.
The units are made from 304L stainless steel. Any weld repairs should be done
in accordance with local standards, and the use of pickling paste on all welds is
recommended. However, as the internal section of the tank is rubber lined, welding
in or close to this area of the rubber is to be avoided to prevent damage to the
rubber.
Ensure that the cells are kept clean at all times, particularly along busbars
and electrical connections to cathodes and anodes
Page 14 of 14
7.0 SUB-VENDOR DATA
Type 2
651, 2654, 2654 Hygienic,
2660, TKU 001
Stainless-steel and brass ball valves in 2-way and 3-way design
Kugelhähne aus Edelstahl und Messing in 2- und 3-Wege-Ausführung
Robinets à boisseau sphérique en acier inoxydable et en laiton, modèles à 2 ou 3 voies
Bedienungsanleitung
Manuel d‘utilisation
We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
Sous réserve de modification techniques.
© Bürkert Werke GmbH & Co. KG, 2008 - 2017
Operating Instructions 1702/06_EU-ML_00805911 / Original DE

Types 2651, 2654, 2654 Hygienic,
2660, TKU 001
Contents: 1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

The operating instructions describe the entire life cycle of the device.
1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................3 Keep these instructions in a location which is easily accessible to
1.1 Symbols........................................................................................ 3 every user and make these instructions available to every new owner
of the device.
2 INTENDED USE..............................................................................................4
2.1 Restrictions.................................................................................. 4 The operating instructions contain important safety information.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in hazardous
3 BASIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS...........................................................5
situations.
4 GENERAL INFORMATION.........................................................................6 ▶▶ The operating instructions must be read and understood.
4.1 Contact addresses.................................................................... 6
4.2 Warranty....................................................................................... 6 1.1 Symbols
4.3 Information on the Internet....................................................... 6
DANGER!
5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................6
Warns of an immediate danger.
6 TECHNICAL DATA.........................................................................................7 ▶▶ Failure to observe the warning may result in a fatal or serious
injury.
7 INSTALLATION................................................................................................8
WARNING!
8 OPERATION AND FUNCTIONS..............................................................9
8.1 Operation..................................................................................... 9 Warns of a potentially dangerous situation.
8.2 Functions...................................................................................... 9 ▶▶ Failure to observe the warning may result in serious injuries or
death.
9 SPARE PARTS............................................................................................. 10
CAUTION!
10 MAINTENANCE............................................................................................ 10
Warns of a possible danger.
11 TRANSPORT, STORAGE, DISPOSAL............................................... 10 ▶▶ Failure to observe this warning may result in a medium or minor
injury.
english 3
2660, TKU 001
Intended Use
NOTE! 2 INTENDED USE

Warns of damage to property. The ball valves types 2651, 2654, 2654 Hygienic, 2660 and TKU 001
▶▶ Failure to observe the warning may result in damage to the (in general below as "Ball valves") are intended for the installation to
device or the equipment. pneumatic or electric rotary actuators. They can be used indoors as well
as outdoors, in compliance with the permissible operating conditions.
Indicates important additional information, tips and

Non-intended use of the ball valves can be dangerous to
recommendations.
people, nearby equipment and the environment.
▶▶ The ball valves are used for shutting off media flows in a wide
range of industrial applications.
Refers to information in these operating instructions or in ▶▶ The ball valves may be used only in conjunction with third-party
other documentation. devices and components recommended and authorized by Bürkert.
▶▶ During use observe the authorised data and operating conditions
specified in the contract documents and operating instructions
▶▶ designates instructions for risk prevention.
as well as the range of applications described in “5 System
→→designates a procedure which you must carry out. Description”.
▶▶ Correct transportation, correct storage and installation and careful
use and maintenance are essential for reliable and faultless
operation.
▶▶ Operate the ball valves only with media which do not corrode
the valve body or seal material.
▶▶ Use the ball valves only as intended.
2.1 Restrictions
If exporting the System/Device, observe any existing restrictions.
4 english
2660, TKU 001
Basic Safety Instructions
3 BASIC SAFETY DANGER!

INSTRUCTIONS
Danger – high pressure.
These safety instructions do not make allowance for any: There is a serious risk of injury when reaching into the equipment.
• Contingencies and events which may arise during the installation, ▶▶ Turn off the pressure and release the pressure in the pipes
operation and maintenance of the devices. before loosening pipes and valves!
• Local safety regulations; the operator is responsible for observing
these regulations, also with reference to the installation personnel.
CAUTION!
WARNING! The general rules of technology apply to application planning

and operation of the device.
Unintentional activation or non-permitted impairment may Failure to observe these rules may result in injuries and/or damage
cause general hazardous situations through to physical injury. to the device and possibly the area around it as well.
To prevent injury, ensure that: ▶▶ Observe the general rules of technology!
▶▶ The system cannot be activated unintentionally.
▶▶ Installation and repair work may be carried out by authorized
technicians only and with the appropriate tools. NOTE!
▶▶ After an interruption in the power supply or fluid supply, ensure The ball valves were developed with due consideration given to
that the process is restarted in a defined or controlled manner. the accepted safety rules and are state-of-the-art. Nevertheless,
▶▶ The device may be operated only when in perfect condition and dangerous situations may occur.
in consideration of the operating instructions. ▶▶ Operate the ball valves only when they are in perfect condition
▶▶ Do not physically stress the valve body (e.g. by placing objects and in accordance with the operating instructions.
on it or standing on it).
▶▶ Do not make any external modifications to the valve body.
▶▶ The general rules of technology apply to application planning
and operation of the device.
english 5
2660, TKU 001
General Information
4 GENERAL INFORMATION 5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The ball valves are used for shutting off media flows in a wide range
4.1 Contact addresses of industrial applications.
Germany They are particularly suitable for application conditions which make
high demands in the areas of thermal loads and are also suitable for
Bürkert Fluid Control Systems
applications which use aggressive media.
Sales Center
Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17 The ball valves are available in different sizes. They are equipped with
D-74653 Ingelfingen a mechanical interface as per ISO 5211 which is used to install a
Tel.: +49 (0)7940 - 10 91 111 pneumatic or electric rotary actuator.
Fax: +49 (0)7940 - 10 91 448
E-mail: info@burkert.com On request the ball valves can be supplied complete with a
pneumatic actuator (Types 2652, 2655, 8805) or an electric
International actuator (Type 8804).
Contact addresses can be found on the final pages of the printed
operating instructions.
And also on the Internet at: www.burkert.com
4.2 Warranty
The warranty is only valid if the device is used as intended in accordance
with the specified application conditions.
4.3 Information on the Internet

The operating instructions and data sheets for Type 2651, 2654,
2654 Hygienic, 2660 and TKU 001 can be found on the Internet at:
www.burkert.com
6 english
2660, TKU 001
Technical Data
6 TECHNICAL DATA Pressure-temperature graphs
Allowable temperatures 50
Stainless-steel valve –10...+200 °C
body (see pressure-temperature graph) 40
1/4“, 3/8“, 1/2“, 3/4“, 1“, 1 1/4“
Brass valve body –20...+150 °C
Pressure [bar]
(see pressure-temperature graph)
30
1 1/2“, 2“, 2 1/2“
The temperature limit values of the actuators are usually
lower. Therefore, the lowest temperature limit values of 20
included system components (ball valve and actuator) must
be observed.
10
Allowable Media Aggressive, neutral, gaseous and liquid media
0
Allowable Depending on the design between 0 and
25 50 75 100 125 150
pressure range 16/25/40/63/100 bar (see data sheets and pres-
Temperature [°C]
sure-temperature graph)
Material Fig. 1: Pressure-temperature graph brass valve body (Type 2660)
Type Valve body Ball Sealing
2651 Stainless steel 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4401 PTFE
2654 Stainless steel 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4401 PTFE
2654 PTFE
Stainless steel 1.4435 Stainless steel 1.4435
Hygienic (FDA)
Brass, hard
2660 Brass, nickel-plated PTFE
chrome-plated
TKU Stainless steel 1.4408
Stainless steel 1.4401 PTFE
001 Steel 1.0619
english 7
2660, TKU 001
Installation
7 INSTALLATION
Pressure [bar]
DANGER!
110
100
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment.
90
80 There is a serious risk of injury when reaching into the equipment.
70 ▶▶ Turn off the pressure and release the pressure in the pipes before
63
loosening pipes and valves.
50
40
WARNING!
30
16 Risk of injury due to improper installation.
10 2,5 bar
Improper installation may result in injuries as well as damage to
-10 0 50 100 150 200
the device and the area around it.
Temperature [°C] ▶▶ This work may be carried out by authorised technicians only and
with the appropriate tools.
Fig. 2: Pressure-temperature graph stainless-steel valve body Risk of injury due to unintentional activation.
(Types 2651, 2654, 2654 Hygienic, TKU 001) Hazardous situations may arise due to unintentional activation of
the system.
▶▶ Take appropriate measures to prevent the equipment from being
unintentionally activated.
Check that the pipes which are to be connected to the ball

valve are on one level. This will prevent mechanical tension
on the screw joint.
→→Screw the ball valve to the pipe.

→→Check that the ball valve is firmly attached to the pipe to ensure
appropriate tightness.
8 english
2660, TKU 001
Operation and functions
8 OPERATION AND FUNCTIONS 8.2 Functions

WARNING! The ball valves are available in 2-way or 3-way design.
The 3-way designs are available with the following switching
Danger due to improper operation. positions:
Improper operation may result in injuries as well as damage to the
Ball bore T L
device and the area around it.
▶▶ The operating personnel must know and have understood the Position
contents of the operating instructions. 0°
▶▶ Only adequately trained personnel may operate the equipment/
the device.
90°
8.1 Operation Switching position T1 T2 T3 L4

Via the mechanical interface as per ISO 5211, the ball valves can be
connected to a pneumatic rotary actuator (e.g. Types 2050, 2051
or 2052) or an electric rotary actuator (e.g. Types 3003, 3004 or
3005).
The operating instructions of the actuators you can find on the Bürkert
homepage: www.burkert.com
english 9
2660, TKU 001
Spare parts
9 SPARE PARTS 10 MAINTENANCE

CAUTION! The ball valves are maintenance-free when operated according to the
instructions indicated in this manual.
Risk of injury and / or damage by the use of incorrect parts.
Incorrect accessories and unsuitable spare parts may cause
injuries and damage the device and the surrounding area. 11 TRANSPORT, STORAGE,
▶▶ Use original accessories and original spare parts from Bürkert only. DISPOSAL
Wearing part-sets for type 2654 and 2654 Hygienic NOTE!
Components: • 4 V-shaped packings Transport damages.
• O-ring
• thrust washer Inadequately protected equipment may be damaged during transport.
• 2 seats ▶▶ During transportation protect the device against wet and dirt in
• 2 body gaskets shock-resistant packaging.

▶▶ Avoid exceeding or dropping below the allowable storage
Wearing Type 2654 Type 2654 Hygienic (PTFE-FDA) temperature.
part-set Order No. Order No. ▶▶ Protect the pneumatic connections from damage by placing
DN10 773127 773013 caps on them.
DN12 770180 - Incorrect storage may damage the device.
DN15 789821 773014 ▶▶ Store the device in a dry and dust-free location!
DN20 789822 773015 ▶▶ Storage temperature –40...+55 °C.
DN25 789823 773016
Damage to the environment caused by device components
DN32 789824 773017 contaminated with media.
DN40 789825 773018 ▶▶ Dispose of the device and packaging in an environmentally
DN50 789826 773019 friendly manner.
DN65 789827 773020 ▶▶ Observe applicable regulations on disposal and the environment.
DN80 789828 773021 ▶▶ Observe national waste disposal regulations.
DN100 789829 773022
10 english
www.burkert.com
11.12 HMI
CR1000 and CR3000 HMIs
Red Lion Automation Series
Operator Interface Panels
CR1000 and CR3000 HMIs provide industry-

leading protocol conversion and connectivity
choices along with enhanced visual display
features to deliver operator interface devices that
easily scale and adapt as requirements change.
The CR1000 and CR3000 automation HMIs from Red Lion combine an ever-
expanding list of over 300 industrial drivers with the intuitive and powerful
Crimson 3.1 development platform to create an operator experience designed
to easily adapt as needs change and operations grow. Basic requirements for
machine interface and protocol conversion are easily handled by the CR1000
products, while the CR3000 HMIs address more advanced needs with real-
time data logging and a built-in web server.
INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS PRODUCT HIGHLIGHTS

>> Factory Automation >> NEMA 4X, IP66 Front Panel Rating
>> OEM Machine Builders >> Industrial Environmental Specifications
>> Automotive • Wide operating temperature
• High shock and vibration tolerance
>> Food & Beverage
• CE, UL/cUL, UL/cUL Hazardous
>> Water/Wastewater
>> Supports over 300 Industrial Drivers
>> SD Card for database upload/download
>> Built-In Web Server for Remote Access*
>> Real-Time Data Logging*
FEATURES & BENEFITS

>> Full-color HMI touchscreen >> Powerful Integration Capabilities
• A variety of 4.3” to 15” models with widescreen • Crimson 3.1 software enables point-and-click
(model dependent) ensures the right fit for virtually any configuration
application • Updated 3D symbols and primitives create a
• 16M colors modern operator experience
>> Industry-leading protocol conversion • Ethernet, USB and serial ports make
communication simple
• Communicate with over 300 protocols
• Robust web server* provides remote access and
• Easily convert between serial, USB and Ethernet
control to reduce costly site visits
devices
• Send email and/or SMS notifications on alarm
• Convert up to 6 protocols simultaneously with
conditions*
CR1000 and up to 15 with CR3000
• Built-in data logging enhances troubleshooting and
• Manage multi-vendor environments with ease
helps meet regulatory requirements
• Automate population of data values using SQL
Queries feature*
* Model dependent
C UL
R US
LISTED
CR1000 and CR3000 Specifications
COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES NETWORK MEDIA

USB Ports 10BaseT: ≥ Cat3 cable
USB Device: 100BaseTX: ≥ Cat5 cable
CR1000 and CR3000 (All Models) - (1) USB Device
ENVIRONMENTAL
Type B adheres to USB specification 1.1
Operating Temperature: -10°C to 50°C
USB Host:
Storage Temperature: -20°C to 70°C
CR3000 (4.3”) – (1) USB Host port
Operating Humidity: 0 to 85% (non condensing)
CR3000 (7”, 10.4”, 15”) – (2) USB Host ports
Operating Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
Type A adheres to USB specification 2.0 and supports full-speed
Shock: 30 g per IEC 68-2-27
data transfers with hardware overcurrent protected (0.5 A max per
Vibration: 2 g @ 5-500 Hz per IEC 68-2-6
port)
Serial Ports for programming or communications: Format/Baud rates CERTIFICATION & COMPLIANCE
independently configurable CE Approved
CR1000 (All) - One (1) RS232 and One (1) RS232/RS422/RS485 Immunity: IEC/EN 61000-6-2 for Industrial Locations
selectable Emissions: IEC/EN 6100-6-4 for Industrial Locations; CISPR 11 Class A
CR3000 (4.3”) - Two (2) RS232 and One (1) RS422/RS485 Safety: IEC/EN 61010-1
CR3000 (7”, 10.4”, 15”) - Two (2) RS232 and Two (2) RS422/RS485 RoHS Compliant
Ethernet Ports: 1500 Vrms network isolation UL Listed
CR1000 (All) - One (1) 10/100 BASE-T(X) port (RJ45) Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D for CR3000 only
CR3000 (4.3”) - One (1) 10/100 BASE-T(X) port (RJ45) Type 4X Indoor / IP66 Enclosure rating (front face only)
CR3000 (7”, 10.4”, 15”) - Two (2) 10/100 BASE-T(X) ports (RJ45)
MECHANICAL
POWER INPUT Construction: Polycarbonate enclosure with NEMA 4X/IP66 rating for
CR1000 (All models) 24 VDC +/- 20% indoor use when correctly fitted with the gasket provided. Installation
CR3000 (All models) 10 to 30 VDC Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
Must use a Class 2 circuit according to National Electrical Code (NEC), Weight:
NFPA-70 or Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), Part I, C22.1 or a Limited CR1000 4.3” model – 15.0 oz (425 g)
Power Supply (LPS) according to IEC 60950-1 or Limited-energy circuit CR1000 7” model – 1.91 lb (868 g)
according to IEC 61010-1. Power connection via removable three CR1000 10.4” model – 3.08 lb (1.395 Kg)
position terminal block. CR3000 4.3” model – 1.00 lb (454 g)
Battery: Lithium coin cell CR3000 7” model – 2.01 lb (913 g)
Typical lifetime of 5 years CR3000 10.4” model – 3.16 lb (1.435 Kg)
CR3000 15” model – 4.12 lb (2.155 Kg)
POWER CONNECTION
High compression cage-clamp terminal block Specifications are subject to change. Visit www.redlion.net for more information.
Wire Strip Length: 0.3” (7.5 mm)
Wire Gauge Capacity: 12 to 24 AWG (3.31 to 0.20 mm2) copper wire
Torque: 4.4-5.3 inch-lbs (0.5-0.6 N-m)
CR1000 and CR3000 HMIs Ordering Guide

MODEL NUMBER* DESCRIPTION SIZE PIXELS SERIAL/ USB DATA LOGGING EXPANSION SD
(IN.) ETHERNET HOST & WEB SERVER PORT CARD
PORTS SLOT
CR1000-04000-00210 4.3" HMI 4.3 480 x 272 2/1 0 No No Yes

CR1000-07000-00210 7" HMI 7 800 x 480 2/1 0 No No Yes
CR1000-10000-00210 10.4” HMI 10.4 800 x 600 2/1 0 No No Yes
CR3000-04000-00310 4.3” HMI with Data Logging and Web Server 4.3 480 x 272 3/1 1 Yes Yes Yes
CR3000-07000-00420 7” HMI with Data Logging and Web Server 7 800 x 480 4/2 2 Yes Yes Yes
CR3000-10000-00420 10” HMI with Data Logging and Web Server 10.4 800 x 600 4/2 2 Yes Yes Yes
CR3000-15000-00420 15” HMI with Data Logging and Web Server 15 1024 x 768 4/2 2 Yes Yes Yes
* Dashes in listed model numbers added to improve readability, and are not included in orderable part numbers.
CR1000 Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4.3” models
5.14 (130.65) 5.65 (143.51) 1.50
(38.1)
4.12 4 inch 4.62 3.62

(104.69) (117.48) (92.08)
THIS VIEW SHOWN WITH MOUNTING PLATE AND BRACKETS
7” Models
2.00
7.63 (193.98) 8.00 (203.2) (50.8)
5.43 7 inch 5.80 4.80

(138.02) (147.32) (121.92)
THIS VIEW SHOWN WITH MOUNTING PLATE AND BRACKETS
10” Models
10.78 (273.73) 11.14 (282.96) 2.00
(50.8)
8.50 10.4 inch 8.87 7.87

(215.99) (225.29) (199.9)
THIS VIEW SHOWN
WITH MOUNTING PLATE
AND BRACKETS
CR3000 Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4.3” models 1.50 (38.1)

5.14 (130.65) 5.65 (143.51)
1.26 (32)
4.12 4.3 inch 4.62 3.62

(104.69) (117.48) (92.08)
THIS VIEW SHOWN WITH Module sold

MOUNTING PLATE AND BRACKETS separately
7” Models
2.00 (50.8)
7.63 (193.98) 8.00 (203.2)
1.26 (32)
5.43 7.0 inch 5.80 4.80

(138.02) (147.32) (121.92)
Module sold
THIS VIEW SHOWN WITH
separately
MOUNTING PLATE AND BRACKETS
10” Models 2.00 (50.8)

10.78 (273.73) 11.14 (282.96) 1.26 (32)
7.87
8.50 10.4 inch 8.87 (199.9)
(215.99) (225.29)
Module sold
THIS VIEW SHOWN separately
WITH MOUNTING PLATE
AND BRACKETS
15” Models 2.64 (67.2)

14.36 (364.6) 14.31 (363.5) 1.26 (32)
11.42 11.38 10.38

15.0 inch (289.1) THIS VIEW SHOWN
(290.1) (263.7) Module sold
WITH MOUNTING PLATE
AND BRACKETS
separately
Americas As global experts in communication, monitoring and control for

sales@redlion.net industrial automation and networking, Red Lion has been delivering
innovative solutions for over forty years. Our award-winning technology
Asia-Pacific
enables companies worldwide to gain real-time data visibility that drives
asia@redlion.net
productivity. Product brands include Red Lion, N-Tron and Sixnet. With
Europe headquarters in York, Pennsylvania, the company has offices across the
Middle East Americas, Asia-Pacific and Europe. For more information, please visit
w w w. re d l i o n . n e t Africa www.redlion.net. Red Lion is a Spectris company.
europe@redlion.net ADLD0478 080119 © 2019 Red Lion Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. Red Lion, the Red Lion logo, N-Tron and Sixnet are
registered trademarks of Red Lion Controls, Inc. All other company and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
+1 (717) 767-6511
11.13 TECO Motor

TECO Instruction Manual
Squirrel Cage Induction Motors
Whilst Motors are installed awaiting commissioning they must be adequately

protected against the elements, all external components in particular the shaft
extension and external labyrinth seals at the drive end must be fully covered
to avoid water ingress entering the motor body whilst stationery.
Please ensure that both the non drive end and drive end antifriction bearings
are fully purged with sufficient grease at first start up/commissioning
with the recommended grade and quantity of grease.
Teco Installation and Maintenance Manual
TEFC Squirrel Cage Induction Motors
TECO Electric & Machinery Co. Ltd.

Table of Contents
Table of Contents ................................................................................................ 2
Chapter 1: MOTOR DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 4
Chapter 2: TECHNICAL DATA............................................................................ 5
Chapter 3: INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING .......................................... 6

3.1. INSPECTION UPON RECEIPT. ...............................................................6
3.2. STORAGE ............................................................................................6
3.3. TRANSPORTATION ..............................................................................9
3.4. INSTALLATION. ................................................................................. 10
3.5. MOUNTING. ...................................................................................... 10
3.6. COUPLING & ALIGNMENT. ................................................................. 10
3.7. INSTALLATION FOR BELT DRIVE ........................................................ 13
3.8. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ............................................................... 13
3.9. AUXILIARY DEVICES .......................................................................... 15
Chapter 4: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS......................................................... 17

4.1. EXAMINATION BEFORE START. .......................................................... 17
4.2. STARTING OPERATION. ..................................................................... 19
4.3. CAUTIONARY POINTS TO NOTE: ........................................................ 21
Chapter 5: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 23

5.1. IMPORTANCE OF DAILY INSPECTION.................................................. 23
5.2. POINTS TO NOTE WHEN STARTING.................................................... 23
5.3. TEMPERATURE RISE. ......................................................................... 23
5.4. VIBRATION. ...................................................................................... 24
5.5. NOISE. ............................................................................................. 25
5.6. ODOUR. ............................................................................................ 26
5.7. MEASUREMENT OF THREE PHASE CURRENT. ...................................... 26
5.8. MOTOR APPEARANCE. ....................................................................... 27
Chapter 6: PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 28

6.1. REGULAR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE. ........................................... 28
6.2. CLEANING OF COILS, DRYING & VARNISHING TREATMENT. ................ 31
Teco Electric and Machinery Company 2
Manual Number: IOM ~ TEFC Rev.01
6.3. VARNISH. ......................................................................................... 33
6.4. KEY POINTS FOR MAINTENANCE & INITIAL OPERATION INSPECTION AFTER
LONG STORAGE. ............................................................................... 33
6.5. RECORDS OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. ................................... 35
6.6. POINTS TO NOTE ON DISASSEMBLY. .................................................. 36
Chapter 7: BEARINGS ..................................................................................... 37

7.1. MAINTENANCE OF ROLLING BEARING. ............................................... 37
7.2. NOISE OF BEARING. .......................................................................... 42
7.3. VIBRATION. ...................................................................................... 42
7.4. REGULAR INSPECTION. ..................................................................... 42
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting. ........................................................................... 44

8.1. FAULT FINDING & RECOGNITION ....................................................... 44

Chapter 1: MOTOR DESCRIPTION

This manual applies to Teco model series types as follows:
AEEB, AEVB, AEHB, AEMB, AEUB, AEHD, AEJE, AFJE, AEJU, AEJH and AFJH.
The motors are of Cast Iron Construction, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled, Squirrel
Cage Induction type designed for operation on a 415/1000/3,300/6,600V/ 3 Phase
50Hz supply system equipped with grease lubricated anti friction type bearings.
SAFETY WARNING
The following instruction address the more common situations
encountered in motor installation, operation and maintenance. For the
TECO warranty to remain valid, the motor must be installed and
operated in strict accordance with the outline drawing, motor nameplate
and these instructions and must not be altered or modified in any
unauthorized manner.
During the installation & operation of motors in heavy industrial
applications there is a danger of live electrical parts and rotating parts.
Therefore to prevent injury and/or damage the basic planning work for
transport, assembly, installation & operation needs to be carried out by
authorized and competent personnel. Points in this manual that are
boxed and headed “DANGER”, “CAUTION” or “NOTE"(see below) should
be observed as they indicate possible danger to personnel and/or the
potential of equipment damage.
This prompt is used when there is an immediate hazard that WILL

result in severe personal injury or death if correct procedures are not
followed.
This prompt is used to warn against potentially unsafe practices that

COULD result in personal injury and/or property damage if correct
procedures are not followed.
This prompt is used when an operation, condition, or information is of

sufficient importance to warrant highlighting

Chapter 2: TECHNICAL DATA

This manual covers a power outputs ranging through to 1500kW with varying
frame sizes and speeds etc.
For motor technical data refer to appropriate motor data sheet.

Chapter 3: INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3.1. INSPECTION UPON RECEIPT.

Check the following points upon receipt:
a. Is the nameplate rating identical to your order?
b. Do dimensions and colour comply with your specification?
c. Are the nameplate ratings for the heater, temperature detector etc.
identical with what you ordered?
d. Is there any damage due to transportation?
e. Is the original transportation shaft lock fitted to the drive end shaft?
f. Are all accessories in good order?
g. If there are any specific requirements, please check if they conform with
your specification.
3.2. STORAGE
When storing motor, the following procedures should be undertaken.
3.2.1. Place.
a. It should be dry, well-ventilated and not subject to direct sunlight, dust or
corrosive gas.
b. It should not be located close to a boiler or freezer.
c. It should be entirely free from vibration and have easy access.
d. Motor should be stored on pallets to prevent moisture ingress.
3.2.2. During storage, the insulation resistance should be kept above the specified
values as follows:-
a. Stator: Above 50MΩ measured with 1000VDC megger.
b. If the motor has absorbed moisture as evidenced by low insulation
resistance, it must be dried with external heat until it is thoroughly dry and
the value of insulation resistance exceeds the minimum requirements.
c. Measurement of insulation resistance should be performed once every
month.
d. Anti-condensation heaters should always be connected where fitted.
3.2.3 Insulation resistance test should be performed before making high voltage
test.
a. Use 500VDC megger to measure insulation resistance.
i. Stator: Over 50MΩ between windings.
ii. Stator: Over 50MΩ between windings and earth.
b. High Voltage Test
i. This test can be undertaken only after the values of insulation resistance in
item 3.2.3 (a) are assured.
ii. The value of testing voltage is (1000 + 2E) X 0.8 where E: rated voltage.
3.2.4. Care should be taken to keep parts such as the fitting surface, key, shaft
extension and axial centre hole free of any foreign matter. Grease should
also be generously applied to stop rust.
3.2.5. The shaft should also be rotated by hand a few revolutions once per month.
3.2.6. If practical, a test run should be performed once every three months.
3.2.7. Clean the motor thoroughly, and replenish grease before the machine is put
back to operation.
3.2.8. The ventilation system should be covered to avoid the entry of foreign
matter or insects. It should be thoroughly cleaned before use.
3.2.9. Make sure the hoisting hook is correctly connected to eye bolts or lugs of
motors before hoisting.
Parts such as fan cowl, terminal boxes, etc. which have their
own lifting facilities can only carry their own weight.
They should not be used for lifting the entire motor.

An accident could occur if the motor eyebolt/lifting hook is overloaded.

They are suitable for the motor weights only.
Do not lift motor and load combined with motor lifting hook.
3.2.10. Points to note when hoisting:

a. Do not twist steel wires.
b. Make sure eye bolts have been firmly screwed in.
c. Keep the sling vertical when moving/lifting motor.
Fig. 1
Please keep the sling vertical when lifting / moving the motor.
Fig. 2
Motor is fitted with lifting points (arrowed). These points are designed to lift
motor weight only.
Teco Electric and Do
Machinery Company
not use other hooks or handles to lift motor. 8
3.3. TRANSPORTATION
To keep the rotating parts of motor from moving, thus causing damage
during Transportation, they should be held securely as follows:
3.3.1. Motors fitted with a retaining plate/bracket to secure the shaft must have it
fitted during transportation. Please retain this device for future
transportation of the motor.
3.3.2. After receiving motor, remove all securing studs, nuts, etc. before putting
motor into operation. (Fig.3)
Fig 3
Shaft Locks are fitted as standard and these should be fitted during
installation and should only be removed once the pulleys and guards are
ready to be fitted. The motor must not be transported without the shaft lock
fitted, damage to bearings caused by shaft locks being removed or moisture
ingress whilst awaiting commissioning is not covered under motor warranty.

3.4. INSTALLATION.
3.4.1. Site conditions for motor installation:

Standard site conditions for installation of motors are as follows:
a. Ambient temperature: -200C~400C.
b. Humidity: Relative humidity below 90% RH for totally enclosed type.
c. Elevation: Below 1000 metres.
d. Should the installation be in an industrial zone, it should be free of explosive
gases and liquids.
e. Foundation should be strong so as not to induce vibration.
3.4.2. Ventilation and Space.

a. Installation should be well ventilated.
b. The area should be large enough to facilitate heat dissipation and
maintenance.
3.4.3. Foundation.
Use rigid and solid sole plate or common bed as the foundation.
3.5. MOUNTING.
3.5.1. An adequate motor support (which is the responsibility of others) is very

important. It must have sufficient rigidity to maintain alignment between
the motor and its driven load. Inadequate or improperly designed motor
supporting structures can lead to serious vibration and alignment problems.
3.6. COUPLING & ALIGNMENT.
Two pole motors and motors larger than Frame 315M must not be coupled to
the driven equipment by means other than direct connection.
Please refer to TECO if belt connection is to be used.

3.6.1. Installation.
Field application of a coupling to the motor shaft should follow the
procedures recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Under no
circumstances may the motor shaft be modified as to configuration or
diameter without the approval of Teco Australia. The motor shaft extension
must not be subjected to either extreme heat or cold during coupling
installation. If it is necessary to exert axial force on the shaft, either
continuously or intermittently, during coupling application, it must be
properly restrained axially to prevent bearing damage.
3.6.2. After the motor has been properly aligned with the driven equipment and
the hold down bolts have been installed and tightened, at least two dowel
pins should be installed diagonally opposite motor feet.
The exposed rotating parts should be covered to prevent accidents.
3.6.3 Alignment.
Motors must always be accurately aligned. Incorrect alignment can lead to

bearing failure, vibration and even shaft fracture. As soon as bearing
failure or vibration is detected, the alignment should be checked.
In aligning the motor (and rotor) axially with the driven equipment,
consideration should be given to the axial shaft expansion and increase in
shaft centre line height due to thermal effects.
Shaft height growth (change in shaft centre line elevation) for TEFC
machines can be calculated as follows,
Growth =(0.0005) x (motor foot to shaft centre line dimension [in mm]).

3.6.4 It is desirable, in normal operation that the motor operates, so that no axial
force is exerted on the coupling.
The motor shaft and the driven shaft should be aligned within the following
tolerances in both angular and parallel alignment (refer Table 1).
Units in mm
TIR Solid Flexible
Total Indicated Coupling coupling
Runout
Dimension C Medium, Low speed up to 2500 0.04 0.05
RPM
High speed over 2500 RPM 0.03 0.03

Dimension A Medium, Low speed up to 2500 0.03 0.04
RPM
High speed over 2500 RPM 0.03 0.03
Table 1
3.6.5 Angular misalignment is the amount by which the centre lines of the driver
and driven shaft are skewed. It can be measured using a dial indicator set
up as shown in fig 4. The couplings are rotated together through 360
degrees so that the indicator does not measure runout of the coupling hub
face. The shaft should be forced against either the in or out extreme of
their end float while being rotated.
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
3.6.6 Parallel misalignment is the amount by which the centre lines of the driver
and the driven shafts are out of parallel. It can be measured using the dial
indicator as shown in fig. 5. Again the couplings are rotated together
through 360 degrees so that the indicator does not measure runout of the
coupling hub outside diameter.

3.6.7 After the motor has been properly aligned with the driven equipment and
the hold down bolts have been installed and tightened, at least two dowel
pins should be installed diagonally opposite motor feet.
3.7. INSTALLATION FOR BELT DRIVE
Do not hammer the conveyance devices such as coupling, belt sheaves, chain
wheels, gears, pulleys etc. onto the motor shaft. Those shaft fitments should
be fitted and removed only by means of suitable devices. Heat shrinking may
be a better alternative to avoid damaging bearings and other components.
3.7.1. Small, medium and large motors within frame sizes up to and including 315
frame are designed for use with belt transmission or direct coupling.
3.7.2. The diameter ratio between conveyance sheaves should not be greater 5 to
1 for flat belts, and 8 to 1 for V-belts. It is also advisable to limit the belt
velocity to under 35m/sec to limit belt abrasion and vibration. The smaller
the outer diameter of the V-belt sheave, the greater the shaft bending
stress will be. If bending stress is in excess of the shaft fatigue stress, the
shaft may break. If concerned please inform TECO of the size of the
sheaves and belt details for checking.
Place the sheave and belt as close as possible to the motor body and
shaft shoulder to reduce the bending moment and improve shaft life.
3.8. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
3.8.1. The rated conditions of operation for the motors are as shown by the
nameplate. Within the limits given below, of voltage and frequency variation
from the nameplate values, the motor will continue to operate but with
performance characteristics that may differ from those at the rated
conditions:
 +/- 10% of rated voltage
 +/- 5% of rated frequency
 +/- 10% combined voltage and frequency variation so long as frequency
variation is no more than +/- 5% of rated value.
Operating the motor at voltage and frequencies outside of the above limits
can result in both unsatisfactory motor performance and damage to/or
failure of the motor.
3.8.2. Motor connections should be carried out in accordance with the details
applicable to the appropriate supply voltage as shown on the motor
nameplate and should be undertaken by suitably qualified personnel.
3.8.3. The main lead box furnished with the motor has been sized to provide
adequate space for the make up of the connections between the motor lead
cables and the incoming power cables.
The bolted joints between the motor lead and the power cables must be
made and insulated in a workman-like manner following the best trade
practices and in accordance with the minimum requirements of the current
Australian Standards.
3.8.4. The motors are provided with grounding pads and/or bolts for the
connection of earthing.
The motor must be grounded by a proper connection to the electrical

grounding system and in accordance with the minimum requirements of the
Australian Standards.
Motors fitted with insulated bearings and rotor grounding brushes which are
used on VVVF Drives must be effectively earthed to the supply system.

3.9. AUXILIARY DEVICES
3.9.1. Please refer to your specification and the motor nameplate to determine if
the motor is fitted with thermal winding protection devices.
The following are the most common:
One set (one per phase – total 3 off) of PTC winding thermistors.
Two sets (two per phase – total 6 off) of PTC winding thermistors.
One set (one per phase – total 3 off) of PT100 winding Resistance
Temperature Detectors (RTD’s).
Two sets (two per phase – total 6 off) of PT100 winding Resistance
Temperature Detectors (RTD’s).
3.9.2. Where specified motors may also be equipped with PT100 bearing
Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD’s).
3.9.3. Thermistors are positive temperature coefficient type (1000 ohm @ tripping
temperature) refer to specification table for tripping temperature.
They are a tripping device only and not a temperature detector.
Thermistor leads should be connected to an appropriate thermistor control
relay from a reputable supplier.
3.9.4. RTD’s where fitted are of the platinum type (PT100) with a reference
temperature of 0°C at 100.
RTD leads should be connected to an appropriate motor protection system
from a reputable supplier.
Recommended temperature settings for RTD’s are as per table 2 below.
DEVICE TYPE LOCATION ALARM TRIP

RTD PLATINIUM 100 @ 0OC WINDING 1400C 1500C
RTD PLATINIUM 100 @ 0OC DE & NDE BEARING 900C 950C
Table 2

Thermistors and/or RTD’s should not be meggered or tested at a

voltage above 2.5Volts.
Should the motor thermal protection circuit trip indicating over

temperature the cause/s should be thoroughly investigated before a
restart is attempted.
Failure to do so may lead to permanent damage or failure of the motor.
3.9.5. Where specified motors may be equipped with internal space heaters (check
for nameplate), to prevent the ingress of moisture into the motor insulation
system whilst motor is idle.
The incoming supply to the heaters should be in accordance with the details
contained on the heater nameplate.
The heater circuit should be inter-locked with the motor starter so as to de-
energise heaters when the motor is running.
Anti Condensation Heaters may be LIVE when the motor is switched

off. Isolate supply at all times before working on the motor.

Chapter 4: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4.1. EXAMINATION BEFORE START.
4.1.1. After motor is installed the following points should be noted:-

a. Check all wiring is correct and in accordance with connections appropriate to the
supply voltage as shown on motor nameplate.
b. Is the incoming cable size adequate?
c. Are all connections tight and properly insulated?
d. Check the rating of fuses, starter/contactor are correct & operating normally.
e. Check motor is correctly earthed especially if supplied via a VVVF drive.
f. Make sure starter/switches are set in correct position.
g. Check heater circuit if fitted is de-energised when motor is in operation.
h. Check bearings are filled with the correct quantity and grade of grease.
4.1.2. Measurement of insulation resistance.

a. Rated voltage below 1000V, measure with 500VDC megger.
b. In accordance with IEEE-43 clause 9.3 standards, refer to following formula:
R (M) = > (Rated Voltage + 1) x 10
1000
c. If a new winding has a low insulation resistance reading moisture ingress is
generally the problem. Drying the winding through the proper application of
heat will normally increase the insulation resistance to an acceptable level.
Following are several accepted methods for applying heat to a winding:
i. If the motor is equipped with anti condensation heaters these can be can be
energised to heat the winding.
ii. Direct current (as from a DC welder) can be passed through the winding. The
total current should not exceed approximately 50% of rated full load current.
Delta wound motors have six leads and the three phases should be connected
into one series circuit.
iii. Heated air can be either blown directly into the motor or into a temporary
enclosure surrounding the motor. The source of heated air should preferably

be electrical as opposed to fuelled (such as kerosene) where a malfunction of
the fuel burner could result in carbon deposits entering the motor.
Caution must be exercised, when heating the motor with any source
of heat other than self-contained space heaters, to raise the
winding temperature at a gradual rate to allow any entrapped
moisture to vaporise and escape without rupturing the insulation.
The entire heating cycle should extend over 15-20 hours.
Ensure adequate guarding is provided so live parts cannot be touched.
iv. Insulation resistance measurements can be made while the winding is being
heated. However, they must be corrected to 400C for evaluation since the
actual insulation resistance will decrease with increasing temperature. As an
approximation for a new winding, the insulation resistance will approximately
halve for each 100C increase in insulation temperature above the dew point
temperature.
d. Should the resistance fail to attain the specified value even after drying,
careful examination should be undertaken to eliminate all other possible
causes, if any.
4.1.3. Power Supply

a. Is the capacity of the power supply adequate?
b. Do voltage and frequency of supply match with those on the nameplate?
c. Voltage variation should be confined to within +/-10% of the rated value
and the phase to phase voltages should be balanced.

4.1.4. Bearing Lubrication
Grease Lubricated Type.
The bearings are initially lubricated with the correct grade of grease at
the factory. After installation, long storage and at initial start
up/commissioning the bearings must be fully purged with new grease.
Please refer to section 7.
a. Refer to the section “Maintenance of Bearing” for maintenance procedures

and grease type.
4.1.5. Other Points to note

a. Make sure the transmission system, including belts, screws, bolts, nuts and
set pins are in good condition.
b. Dismantle all locks which fasten the moveable parts of the motor during
transportation, and turn the shaft by hand (if practical) to check if it moves
freely.
c. Check if there is any evidence of foreign matter inside the motor before
starting.
d. Make sure the items above are examined. Test the motor with or without
load. Record and check according to “Maintenance” at 15 minute intervals
during the first three hours of operation. Then conduct regular examinations
after longer intervals. If problems are experienced test without load to
ascertain whether it is a load, structure, alignment or motor issue.
4.2. STARTING OPERATION.
4.2.1. Starting Load.

The initial test involves running the motor without load. Unless specified, a
motor is designed to start with light load, which is then gradually increased
to full load, as the motor accelerates to full speed.
4.2.2. Starting.
a. Motor can be restarted if the initial start fails. Three attempts are
permissible when the motor is at ambient (cold) temperature. Two starts in
succession are permitted when motor is at normal running temperature.
Smaller motors have a more frequent starting cycle.
b. Should an additional start be necessary beyond the conditions stated above,
the following restrictions should be noted:
i. Let the motor cool down for 60 minutes before a full load restart.
ii. Let the motor cool down for 30 minutes before a no load restart.
iii. Two inching starts can be regarded as one normal start.
c. If the motor rotor fails to start turning after two seconds, shut off power
supply immediately. This can result from:
i. Too low a voltage at the motor terminals.
ii. The load is too large for motor rating.
iii. The load has seized mechanically.
iv. Electrical connections incorrect.
v. Single phase power has been applied.
vi. Any combination of the above.
Note – Investigate thoroughly and take corrective action before attempting a
restart.
4.2.3. Direction of Rotation.

a. Motors are generally bi-directional. Some 2 pole and low noise motors are
uni directional only. If motor is uni-directional the fan cowl will be fitted with
a direction of rotation arrow.
b. If direction of rotation must be changed on a bi-directional motor, cut
power and wait until the motor stops, then interchange any two of the three
incoming phase leads.
4.2.4. Power Supply. Voltage/Current.

a. Check if the voltage and frequency of the power supply are identical to that
shown on the nameplate.

b. Voltage variation should be confined to within +/-10% of nameplate
voltage, and the three phase voltages should be balanced.
c. Check if the phase currents of the motor, without load, are within +/-5% of
the average values.
4.2.5. Frequency.
Frequency variation should be confined to within +/-5% of the nameplate
frequency. The aggregate variation of voltage and frequency should be
confined to within +/-10% of the absolute value of the rating.
4.2.6. Run Up Time.
The Run Up time is longer for motors connected to a load with a large inertia.
However, if the run up time exceeds what is deemed normal or there is
abnormal noise, the motor and load should be examined to establish the
cause before attempting a restart.
4.3. CAUTIONARY POINTS TO NOTE:
4.3.1. Bearings:
a. The motor is fitted with grease lubricated bearings. Following initial start up
the bearing temperatures should be closely monitored. A rapid rate of rise
in bearing temperature is more indicative of impending trouble, however,
when greasing an expected higher temperature is normal and should
equalize after a period of time.
b. When the rate of bearing temperature rise is less than 1°C per half hour,
the bearing temperature is considered to be stabilised.
c. If the total bearing temperature exceeds 100°C, the motor should be shut
down immediately and subsequent checks be undertaken.

4.3.2. Vibration:
a. The ideal values generally for motors are figures below 2.8mm/sec.
If vibration exceeds this level, an examination of the motor, load, structure
etc, should be made to determine the cause, the first check to undertake
would be to run the motor un-coupled and check if the vibration is still
evident, see section 5.4 Vibration.
4.3.3. Starting:
a. If the motor acceleration time exceeds the typical ramp time for this
application, shut off the power immediately.
Investigate thoroughly and take corrective action before attempting to
restart.
b. It should be recognised that each start of an induction motor subjects the
motor to current greater than full load current with resulting heating of the
stator and rotor windings. Each start can produce more heat than is
produced and dissipated by the motor under a full load condition.
c. The starting duty for which the motor is designed must not be exceeded if
long motor life is expected. Abnormally low terminal voltage and/or
excessive load torque during motor start up can cause lengthened
acceleration times during which the rotor ventilation is reduced. This can
cause rotor damage or lead to shortened rotor life.

Chapter 5: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

5.1. IMPORTANCE OF DAILY INSPECTION.
5.1.1. Normally electric motors do not fail suddenly. It happens over time, and
regular inspection will detect a problem before a serious situation develops.
If operators in the plant are alert, faults can be detected early and action
taken to eliminate trouble.
Daily inspection, can be performed without interrupting the end user’s
normal operation.
5.1.2. Do not overlook any minor irregularities. If necessary, stop the machine
immediately to check and repair. Essentially, inspections should be
performed by the operator daily. But a maintenance technician should also
check the machine once a week together with the operator.
5.2. POINTS TO NOTE WHEN STARTING.

a. Check power supply to see if voltage and frequency are normal.
b. Is starter set at starting position?
c. Are there sparks during start?
d. Is the motor accelerating normally?
5.3. TEMPERATURE RISE.

5.3.1. The temperature of a motor is often determined by measuring the
temperature of the frame. This is not indicative of actual internal
winding operating temperature, however, this method can often be
referred to and compared with previous readings. If the temperature is
found to be higher than usual please check the following possibilities.
DO NOT MAKE TEMPERATURE READINGS WITH THE SENSE OF TOUCH.

Often the temperature of a motor is determined by touch. Human hands can only
tolerate temperatures below 600C. Most motors safely operate at temperatures
greater than this, therefore, the sense of touch should not be used. Temperature
readings by hand are also inaccurate. Readings should be made using a
thermometer probe or non-contact infra red thermometer.

5.3.2. Main causes of high temperature:
a. Motor Conditions
i. Voltage and frequency variation of power source is in excess of
tolerance.
ii. Unbalanced three phase voltage, open circuit or poor contact.
iii. Insufficient or excessive lubrication.
iv. Abnormal frequency of starts.
v. Single-phasing due to open circuit or short circuit.
vi. Damaged starter or improper operation.
vii. Blocked ventilation ducts.
viii. Motors cooling vents blocked.
b. Due to load or mechanical conditions:
i. Overload.
ii. Defective transmission coupling.
iii. Poor installation causing overload.
iv. High ambient temperature or radiant heat emitted from driven load
or surroundings.
5.4. VIBRATION.
5.4.1. Main causes inducing vibration:

i. Unbalanced load.
i. Misalignment of couplings.
ii. Unbalanced belt-sheaves.
iii. Improper couplings with belts or chains.
iv. Unsuitable foundation or poor installation.
v. Unbalanced motor rotor.
vi. Serious abrasion to motor or load machine drive bearing.
vii. Defective bearing or subsequent bearing damage.
5.4.2. No matter what causes the vibration, if it is not eliminated, the following
faults may develop:
i. Bearing damage.
ii. Deformation of shaft.
iii. Loose parts or couplings.
5.5. NOISE.
5.5.1. Points to Note.

Not all noise is the result of a fault or abnormality. For instance, wind and
slight electromagnetic sounds are perfectly normal. They will remain at the
same level no matter how long the motor is in operation. Generally the
louder the noise, the larger the vibration amplitude will be.
5.5.2. Bearing Sound.

i. Bearing noise is a guide to the condition of the motor bearings
without dismantling the motor.
ii. Normal bearing sound in general is continuous, not intermittent. The
sound may tend to increase with the age of the bearings, but its
increase is gradual and hardly noticeable by the ear.
iii. Abnormal bearing sound is intermittent, rarely continuous.
iv. Some motors will emit noise when unloaded or after greasing due to
skating. This is normal and temporary.
5.5.3. Abnormal bearing sound generally develops from the following causes:
i. Foreign matter in grease.
ii. Scratches on the contact surface of the bearing.
iii. Rust on the contact surfaces of the bearing due to moisture ingress.
iv. Poor quality of grease or wrong type of grease.
v. Insufficient grease (the sound could be continuous).
5.5.4. Causes of abnormal electromagnetic sound:

i. Single phasing.
ii. Short circuit in windings.
iii. Unbalanced air gap resulted from serious bearing wear.

5.6. ODOUR.
5.6.1. Causes of motor odours:

i. Short circuit or over current causing overheating of varnish.
ii. Poor lubrication due to insufficient or contaminated grease.
5.7. MEASUREMENT OF THREE PHASE CURRENT.
5.7.1. Causes & effects

When load current is above the rating on the nameplate, it means the
motor may be overloaded. However, the cause of over current is not
confined to overloading, but may be caused by poor coupling installation,
transmission structure, excessive high or low voltage, etc.
a. Causes of unbalanced three phase current.
i. Unbalanced three phase voltage.
ii. Open circuit in power distribution lines.
iii. Poor switch contact.
iv.Open or short circuit in winding.
v. Open circuit at power transformer.
b. Effects:
i. Overheating of the windings causing fire or short circuit.
ii. Vibration of motor.
iii. Reduction of motor output torque.
c. Causes of wavering of ammeter indicator:

The characteristics of devices such as compressor or press are apt to cause
wavering of the indicator. Other causes are,
i. Poor contact of switches.
ii. Uneven mechanism.
iii. Unbalanced air gap due to serious bearing aberration.
iv.Broken conductors of squirrel cage rotor.

5.8. MOTOR APPEARANCE.
5.8.1. Reasons for Cleaning
a. Excessive dust or oil accumulation on the motor surface leading to the

clogging of ventilation channels between cooling ribs will reduce the motors
cooling efficiency.
b. Keeping the motor and equipment clean will improve appearance and
longevity.
Motors should never be cleaned or disturbed whilst the motor is in

operation.

Chapter 6: PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
6.1. REGULAR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE.
For safety, properly trained personnel must only carry out maintenance
and repairs.
Some testing, such as insulation resistance, usually requires the motor

to be fully stopped and isolated from any power supply/supplies.
High temperatures may arise under operating conditions on the motor

surfaces, so that touching should be prevented or avoided.
Keep away from moving and live parts.
Unless deemed necessary, do not remove guards whilst assessing the
motor.
6.1.1. Major points in regular inspection and maintenance:

a. Routine inspection and maintenance are usually performed by operators
with the sense of touch, sight, smell and simple meters. But it is difficult to
detect trouble such as insulation deterioration etc. unless the motor is
stopped and checked.
b. Replacement of worn-out parts will increase longevity and prevent
breakdown.
c. Regular inspection and maintenance is important in preventing breakdown
and lengthening service life.
c. Owing to the varied uses and environments motors are placed in, it is
difficult to set periods for regular inspection and maintenance. However, it
has to be performed at least once every 6 months. Generally, the inspection
time is determined by the following factors:

i. Ambient conditions.
ii. Start and stop frequency.
iii. Trouble with components affecting motor functions.
iv. Parts which wear (eg. bearings).
v. The important position of a motor in operation of a factory, mine etc.
should be fully recognised. Therefore, its condition should be monitored,
especially when it is operating in severe conditions.
6.1.2. Motor Windings.

a. For measurement of insulation resistance and tests to determine quality of
insulation resistance, please refer to measures stated in Section 4.1.2.
b. Inspection of coil end:
i. Grease and dust accumulated on coil may cause insulation
deterioration and a reduction in cooling efficiency.
ii. Moisture.
iii. Discolouring from original colour. Overheating mainly causes this.
c. Stator wedges, is there any change from their original position?
d. Is the tie wire at the coil ends in correct position with no movement?
6.1.3. Bearings.
a. Please refer to section 7 for bearing maintenance.
6.1.4. Cleaning the interior of the motor.

a. After a motor has been in operation for some time, accumulation of dust,
carbon powder and grease etc., on the inside is unavoidable, and may
cause damage. The inside should therefore, be regularly cleaned and
examined to assure reliable performance.
b. Points to note during cleaning:
i. If using compressed air or a blower (Typically for squirrel cage only).
 Compressed air should be free of moisture.
 Maintain air pressure at 4kg/cm2, since high pressure can cause
damage to coils.

ii. Vacuum – Recommended for wound rotor/slip ring type.
Vacuum cleaning can be used, both before and after other methods of
cleaning, to remove loose dirt and debris. It is a very effective way to
remove loose surface contamination from the winding. Vacuum cleaning
tools should be non-metallic to avoid any damage to the winding insulation.
iii. Wiping.
Surface contamination on the winding can be removed using a soft, lint-free
cloth. If the contamination is oily, the cloth can moistened (not dripping
wet) with a safety type petroleum solvent. In hazardous locations, a solvent
such as inhibited methyl chloroform may be used, but must be used
sparingly and immediately removed. While this solvent is non-flammable
under ordinary conditions, it is toxic and proper health and safety
precautions should be followed while using it.
Solvents of any type should never be used on windings provided with

abrasion protection. Abrasion protection is a grey, rubber-like coating
applied to the winding end-turns.
Adequate ventilation must always be provided in any area where solvents

are being used to avoid the danger of fire, explosion or health hazards. In
confined areas (such as pits), each operator should be provided with an air
line respirator, a hose mask, or self-contained breathing apparatus.
Operators should wear goggles, aprons and suitable gloves. Solvents and
their vapours should never be exposed to open flames or sparks and
should always be stored in approved safety containers.
6.1.5. Clean the exterior of the motor.

a. The inlet air openings should not be allowed to accumulate any dirt,
dust, slurry, lint, etc. that could restrict free air movement.
b. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors require special cleaning
consideration. The external fan must be cleaned thoroughly since any
dirt build up not removed can lead to balance issues and vibration.
Motors should never be cleaned or disturbed whilst the motor is in

operation.
Isolate motor from supply before cleaning.
6.1.6. Checking motor installation and coupling.

a. Installation:
i. Is foundation solid?
ii. Are all bolts and/or nuts tight and in good order?
b. Coupling:
i. Is coupling in good order?
ii. Are fasteners tight and in good order?
6.2. CLEANING OF COILS, DRYING & VARNISHING TREATMENT.

Age, constant heating and cooling and other factors may cause insulation
deterioration. Also, salt deposits or grease may lower insulation resistance.
Steam cleaning, drying and re-varnishing may be necessary if the motor has
been flooded or showing deterioration from age.
6.2.1. Cleaning:
a. If the coils are slightly contaminated, compressed air, cloth or a nylon brush
can be used to do the cleaning. However, when contamination is serious,
thorough washing has to be performed. The cleaning methods are as
follows:
b. Cleaning with water:
i. This method is applicable to motors having been immersed in water or
insulated with no cotton yarn and paper materials.
ii. After washing, dry immediately.
iii. Cleaning with steam.
 If the motor has been immersed in sea-water or a chemical solution, clean
with steam after washing thoroughly.
 Steam pressure must be kept between 2 – 4 kg/cm2. High pressure may
cause insulation damage.
c. Steam temperature should be maintained between 500C – 800C.
d. After cleaning, dry immediately.
6.2.3. Drying Method.

a. Application:
i. Drying after cleaning.
ii. Motor has absorbed moisture.
b. Hot air method (using heater and blower).
i. Parts to be dried are surrounded inside a steel plate leaving an inlet and an
outlet for hot air. Hot air will enter the inlet to dry parts (stator, rotor, etc.),
and will leave via the outlet carrying away moisture.
ii. The temperature within the area surrounded by the steel plate should be
maintained at 900C – 1000C.
c. Drying with infrared ray lamp:
i. Install the infrared ray lamp in a baking area surrounded with steel plate
with openings at the bottom.
ii. This method can cause partial overheating. So attention must be paid to the
parts heated and the temperature must be kept below 1000C.
d. Drying method with electric current:
i. The winding must have a minimum insulation resistance above 0.5MΩ
measured with 500VDC megger before using this method so as to avoid a
short circuit.
ii. Lock the rotor (short the secondary winding of the wound rotor motor),
apply rated voltage of approximately 5% - 10% to the winding.
iii. Temperature control settings:
Squirrel cage rotor induction motor: 700C – 800C for the stator.
e. Measurement of insulation resistance.
i. Measure the insulation resistance periodically during drying.
ii. At the initial stage of drying, insulation resistance may decline slightly.
When it returns to normal, the drying process is complete.
iii. When the current method is applied, be sure to turn off the power to
measure insulation resistance.

6.3. VARNISH.
Kind of Varnish
JIS-W-25 or W-28 are highly recommended.
a. Method of Varnish Treatment
i. Dipping method: Immerse windings completely into varnish until no
air bubbles appear.
ii. Pouring Method: Pour varnish completely over windings
Note: Let varnish drip to dry after dipping or pouring. Changing position of
the motor will obtain an even coverage.
b. Curing of Varnish
i. Set oven temperature at 110oC.
ii. Curing time should be 12 – 16 hours
iii. Ensure ventilation is adequate during curing. Combustible gases are
present.
To ensure adequate insulation the above procedure should be repeated.
6.4. KEY POINTS FOR MAINTENANCE & INITIAL OPERATION

INSPECTION AFTER LONG STORAGE.
6.4.1. If the motor has been out of service in excess of three months, careful
inspection should be made before putting the motor into operation again.
6.4.2. When the motor is not in operation, the following precautionary measures
should be undertaken:
The place for storage should be dry and well-ventilated. If the motor has to
be placed at work site for some time, it should be completely covered and
stored on pallets to prevent dust and moisture contamination.
Inspection and maintenance prior to storage.
Please refer to “Regular Inspection and Maintenance” (Section 6.1).

6.4.3. Items to be examined prior to initial operation.
a. Cleaning:
 Outside of motor.
 Motor interior.
b. Measurement of insulation resistance:

Measurement of insulation resistance and standards to determine quality if
Insulation resistance, please refer to measures stated in Section 4.1.2.
Measurement of insulation resistance.
6.4.4. Drying: If the motor has absorbed moisture, it must be dried.
6.4.5. Examination of bearings.

Turn the motor shaft by hand (if practical) to see if it rotates smoothly and
if there is any unusual noise.
6.4.6. Replenishment of grease. (Refer to bearing maintenance Section 7).
6.4.7. Switches and starters.

Clean off dust and any foreign matter etc.
Check if the operation is normal.
Are the moving parts functioning smoothly?
Check if all bolts and nuts are tight and in good order.
6.4.8. Examination and maintenance of standby motor.
Important: The purpose of a standby motor is to substitute as an

emergency motor if the motor in operation breaks down, this motor should
not be exposed to induced vibration whilst stationery.
It is important to always maintain the standby motor in top condition.
Maintenance should be performed strictly according to items and notes
stated previously.

6.5. RECORDS OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.
6.5.1. Objective:
a. Fully understand the site conditions of the motor in operation and discover
any abnormalities in advance.
b. Prevent the neglect and act of maintenance.
c. Map pertinent maintenance plans after fully understanding the operation of
motor.
d. Assess the life of parts to determine the quantity of spare parts to be kept.
e. To plan the number of spare motors and replace or repair the motors in
operation according to a schedule.
6.5.2. Records of operation.

a. A maintenance card in table form is acceptable.
b. Principle contents:
i. Serial number of machine
ii. Model
iii. Three phase voltage
iv. Three phase current
v. Temperature of a motor in operation
vi. Ambient temperature, humidity, weather, date and time
vii. Time of start and stop
viii. Special remarks
ix. Operator’s name

6.6. POINTS TO NOTE ON DISASSEMBLY.
a. Disassemble according to the pre-set steps.
b. Necessary tools should be ready before disassembly.
c. Mark the disassembled parts so as to facilitate re-assembly.
d. Place parts, bolts and nuts etc, in a box to avoid misplacing.
e. Avoid damage to heavy parts during transportation.
f. Dust accumulation on coil-end, ducts etc., should be cleaned during
disassembly.
g. Coat parts with light oil.
h. Note if there is any shaft deflection or bearing damage when re-assembling.
i. Disassemble and assemble bearing according to the bearing maintenance
manual.
For safety and to prevent equipment damage properly trained

personnel must only carry out maintenance and repairs.

Chapter 7: BEARINGS
7.1. MAINTENANCE OF ROLLING BEARING.
Whilst Motors are installed awaiting commissioning they must be adequately

protected against the elements, all external components in particular the shaft
extension and external labyrinth seals at the drive end must be fully covered
to avoid water ingress entering the motor body whilst stationery.
Please ensure that both the non drive end and drive end antifriction bearings
are fully purged with sufficient grease at first start up/commissioning
with the recommended grade and quantity of grease.
7.1.1. General.
Bearings play a very important role in motor performance. It is essential to
keep bearings in good order for the motor to operate at optimum
performance. For this reason, please maintain bearings according to this
manual.
7.1.2. Motors within frame sizes D180 and below are complete with sealed for life
Bearings. (Unless the specification dictates these need to be re-greasible)
This type of bearing is a non maintainable item and has been pre packed
with grease and fitted with containment shields at point of manufacture.
These bearings do not require greasing for the life of the bearing.
7.1.3. Motors within frame sizes D200 and larger are equipped with through flush
greasing facilities.
Grease replenishment is required, if the motor has been out of service for 3
months or more and should also be carried out on initial start and at regular
intervals thereafter.
a. Replenishment of grease is recommended when the motor is running.
b. Clean the grease nipple and open the grease drain (if applicable) prior to
greasing. Restore after greasing.
c. A slight leakage of grease between the flinger and bearing cover is normal
and assists in totally sealing the bearing from ingress of dust and foreign
matter.
7.1.4. Grease Lubricated Type.
Keeping the bearing lubricant in top condition is extremely important in the
maintenance of bearings. It is a prerequisite of extended bearing life to
replenish grease using the correct grade, quantity and time interval, please
do not mix different types of grease.
The reasons for grease replenishment are:
a. Assure the rolling contact surface has no metal to metal contact.
b. Form a lubrication membrane on the rolling contact surface to reduce noise.
c. Purge the motor of old and contaminated grease, please ensure that the
grease in the discharge chute is pliable and will allow new grease to enter.
d. The presence of the correct grade and quantity of grease reduces corrosion,
protects and seals the bearing and lowers vibration.
7.1.5. Grease replenishment period:
The life of grease varies depending on model, speed, temperature,
operational conditions etc., it is, therefore, impossible to determine the
exact time interval for replenishment.
However, under normal conditions the greasing interval is shown in Table 3
can be used as a guide.

Bearing Speed(RPM)
Number 600 720 750 900 1000 1200 1500 1800 3000 3600
62XX 10 19000 18000 17500 16500 15500 14500 12500 11000 6000 4500
63XX 12 18000 17000 16500 15000 14500 13000 11000 9000 4500 3500
72XX 13 17500 16500 16000 14500 14000 12000 10000 8500 4000 3000
73XX 14 16500 15500 15000 13500 12500 11000 9000 7000 3500 2500
15 16500 15500 15000 13500 12500 11000 9000 7000 3000 2000
16 16000 15000 14500 13000 12000 10500 8500 6500 2500 1500
17 16000 14500 14000 12500 11500 10000 8000 6000 2500 1500
18 15500 14000 13500 12000 11000 9500 7500 5500 2500 1500
20 14500 13000 12500 11000 10000 8500 6000 4500
22 13500 12000 11500 10000 9000 7500 5500 4000
24 13000 11500 11000 9000 8000 6500 4500 3500
26 12000 10500 10000 8500 7500 6000 4000 3000
28 11500 10000 9500 8000 7000 5500 3500 2500
30 11000 9500 9000 7000 6500 4500 3000 2000
32 10500 8500 8500 6500 5500 4000 3000 2000
34 10000 8000 8000 6000 5500 4000 2500 1500
36 9500 7500 7500 5500 5000 3500
38 9000 7000 7000 5000 4500 3000
Bearing Speed(RPM)
Number 600 720 750 900 1000 1200 1500 1800
NU2XX 14 14000 12500 12000 10500 9500 8000 6000 4500
NU3XX 15 13500 12000 11500 11000 9000 7000 5500 4000
16 13000 11500 11000 9500 8500 6500 5000 3500
17 12500 11000 10500 9000 8000 6000 4500 3000
18 12000 10500 10000 8500 7500 5500 4000 2500
20 11000 9500 9000 7000 6000 4500 3000 2000
22 10000 8500 8000 6000 5500 4000 2500 1500
24 9000 7500 7000 5500 4500 3500 2000 1500
26 8500 7000 6500 5000 4000 3000 1500 1000
28 8000 6000 6000 4500 3500 2500 1000 500
30 7000 5500 5500 4000 3000 2000 1000 500
32 6500 5000 5000 3500 2500 1500 500 500
34 6000 4500 4500 3000 2500 1500 500
36 5500 4000 4000 2500 2000 1000 500
38 5000 4000 3500 2500 1500 1000 500
40 5000 3500 3000 2000 1500 1000
44 4000 3000 2500 1500 1000 500
48 3500 2500 2500 1000 1000 500
Table 3.
Remarks:
a. Please refer to lubrication nameplate fitted and follow the
recommended schedule stated.
b. The data as shown in Table 3 and/or lubrication nameplates are the
maximum recommended intervals under good conditions, please
consider site conditions, as a shortening of these periods may be
necessary.
7.1.6. Type of grease:

TECO motors can utilise different types of grease including Shell Gadus &
Mobil Polyrex EM Grease which has been selected based on the proposed
application.
Please check on the lubrication nameplate to confirm the type of grease
installed. Please use identical grease when servicing or alternatively
lubricants of different brands that have been established as being
equivalent in the areas of composition, physical properties and thickeners.
7.1.7. Amount of grease replenishment:

Amount of grease replenishment depends on the type, size and construction
and the bearings. For the maximum quantity used in one replenishment of
each bearing, as a guide, please refer to Table 4.
Please refer to lubrication nameplate fitted and follow the recommended
quantity stated.
7.1.8. Key points to note with grease filling:

Filling method for grease relief type bearing.
Use a good quality grease gun to pump grease through the grease nipple
into the bearings. The old contaminated grease is forced to drain out of the
discharge chute. While greasing it is recommended that the greasing
procedure is undertaken whilst the motor is running. The discharge outlet
may not be visible on some models, grease should be pumped in at the
recommended quantity and the sound of bearing should return to normal.
It is advisable to grease when the motor is operating as old grease is
expelled more easily.

Bearing No. Amount of Bearing No. Amount of

replenishment replenishment
62XX 6210 30g 63XX 6310 40g
72XX 6212 40 73XX 6312 60
NU2XX 6213 50 NU3XX 6313 80
222XX 6214 50 223XX 6314 80
6215 60 6315 100
6216 60 6316 100
6217 80 6317 120
6218 80 6318 120
6220 100 6320 160
6222 120 6322 220
6224 120 6324 270
6226 140 6326 300
6228 160 6328 400
6230 180 6330 450
6232 200 6332 500
6234 250 6334 600
6236 300 6336 700
6238 350 6338 800
6240 400 6340 900
6244 450 6344 900
6248 500 6348 900
Table 4.
*Fill new grease until it displaces the old grease completely.
Do not grease the motor whilst it is at standstill. If there is a draw-out

device for grease, draw out the used grease after greasing, please leave
excess grease on the rake as this will further protect the exit port from
moisture entry.
WARNING
Stay clear of rotating parts while relubricating motor when it is in
operation.
7.1.9. Temperature of bearing.

Temperature of the bearing will rise slightly, but this is temporary while
greasing and will return to normal a few minutes after greasing. Brief
temperature variations are of no concern, grease should be pumped in
sparingly to avoid excess temperatures being experienced.

7.1.10. Selection of grease gun.

There are two types of grease gun. High pressure lever type and hand press
type. As the hand press type has a lower force, grease replacement will
take more time. Greasing can be achieved quickly by using a lever type gun,
however, care should be taken to adjust the pressure and rate to avoid
excessive grease entry which may enter the motor’s interior.
7.2. NOISE OF BEARING.

a. Normal noise.
Noise is congenital to movement of the bearing. Generally bearing noise
that has a continuous rhythm with no sudden change is normal.
b. Abnormal noise.
It is difficult to detect the early stages of bearing failure with the human
ear. It takes a lot of experience and a sharp ear to detect abnormal noise.
Any sudden change in bearing noise should be investigated. Motors with
roller bearings at the drive end can emit more rotational noise than a ball
bearing and it is normal to hear skating/skidding of the rolling elements.
7.3. VIBRATION.
If the vibration of the bearing is unusually high, please test with vibroscope.
The preferred level for vibration should be below 2.8mm/sec. If the values
exceed this figure, an investigation should be undertaken to find and rectify
the problem.
7.4. REGULAR INSPECTION.
7.4.1. Regular monthly inspection.

Grease replenishment (refer to Section 7.1) and the motor lubrication plate.

7.4.2. Regular yearly inspection.
It is important to undertake regular inspection every year when the machine
is out of service for maintenance.
7.4.3. Inspection Notes.

a. Electrical etching.
When there are dark spots on bearing surface or outside the face of outer
ring and / or inside face of bearing housing, please check with a microscope
to see if they look like pock marks or fish scales which could be the result of
electrical etching due to poor installation etc.
b. Motors on VVVF Drives.
All TECO motors are suitable for running on VVVF drives, however, this does
depend on the application, kilowatt demand and speed range. TECO
recommend that when motors of 280/315 frame and above be fitted with at
least an insulated bearing at the non drive end and rotor grounding brush
fitted at the drive end, this is not categorical that this feature must be fitted,
purely a recommendation based on TECO’s experience, please consult with
the engineering specification whether the motor supplied requires this
feature.
c. Precision of installation.
The degradation of the bearing may be the result of misalignment due to
sinking foundations etc, after the motor has been in use for a long period.
Regularly check and record the alignment of couplings, and make
adjustments as necessary.
The bearing is a high precision component, it is important to avoid ingress

of dust, moisture and foreign matter. A hammer or similar object must not
be used during the cleaning and installation of the bearing.

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting.
8.1. FAULT FINDING & RECOGNITION
Kind of Symptom Cause Remedy

Fault
Fail to Motionless Power-off Consult power
start without And soundless company
load Switch-off Switch-on
No fuse Install fuse
Broken wires Check wires and
repair
Broken lead Check leads and
repair
Faulty winding Check winding and
repair
Fuse blowing – Short circuit Check circuit
(Circuit Breaker Incorrect wiring Check wiring
trips off, slow Poor contact in circuit Check and repair
start with switches
electromagneti Broken wiring Check and repair
c noise Poor contact of Check and repair
starting switch
Incorrect connection Check and repair
of starting switch
Overload Fuse blowing – Insufficient capacity Replace fuse or
after start Fail to restart of fuse or breaker breaker
due to circuit Overload Lighten load
breaker High load at low Check circuit
tripping voltage capacity and reduce
load

Kind of Fault Symptom Cause Remedy

Overload after start Overheating Overload or Lighten Load
of Motor Intermittent
Overload
Under-voltage Check circuit capacity
and power source
Over-voltage Check power source
Ventilation duct Remove the foreign
clogged matter in the duct
Ambient Lower ambient
temperature temperature
exceeds 450C
Friction between Repair
rotor and stator
Fuse blowing Install the specified
(Single phase fuse
rotating)
Poor contact of Check and repair
circuit switches
Poor contact of Check and repair
starting switch
Unbalanced three Check circuit or
phase voltage consult power
company
Speed falls Voltage drop Check circuit and
sharply power source
Sudden overload Check machine
Single phase Check circuit and
rotating repair
Switch overheat Insufficient Replace switch
capacity of switch
High load Lighten load

Overload after Bearing Overheat Misalignment Re-align
start between motor
and load
Not enough Fully purge
grease bearings with
grease
High bearing Replace damaged
noise bearing
Noise Electro-magnetic Occurrence from Check noise not
noise induced by first operation normal
electricity Sudden sharp Short circuit of
noise and windings. Repair.
smoking
Bearing noise Not enough Fully purge
grease bearings with
grease
Deterioration of Clean bearing
grease and re-grease
Excessive noise Replace the
damaged bearing
Mechanical noise Loose belt sheaf Adjust key and
caused by lock the screw
machinery Loose coupling Adjust the
position of
couplings and
tighten
Loose screw Tighten screw
Fan rubbing Adjust fan
position


Noise Mechanical noise Rubbing as a result Clean motor
caused by of ingress of interior and
machinery foreign matter ventilation ducts
Wind noise Noise induced by
air flowing through
ventilation ducts
Induced by Repair machine
conveyance
machine
Vibration Electro-magnetic Short circuit of Repair
vibration windings
Open circuit of Repair
rotor
Vibration Unbalanced rotor Repair
Unbalanced fan Repair
Mechanical Broken fan blade Replace fan
vibration Un-symmetrical Align central points
centres between
belt sheaf
Central points of Adjust the central
couplings do not lie points of couplings
on the same level on the same level
Improper mounting Lock the mounting
installation screw
Motor mounting Reinforce mounting
bed is not strong bed
Remarks:
i. Circuit switches: This includes knife switch, electromagnetic switch, fuse and
other connection switches etc.
ii. Starting switches: This includes Delta-Star starter, compensate starter,
reactance starter, resistor starter, starting controllers etc.


CS500 O M Manual Rev 0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CS500 O M Manual Rev 0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSEP ACACIA CS500 DISSOLUTION &

PREPARED FOR: NICOZ RESOURCES S.A.

CONSEP PTY LTD | ACN: 053 177 898 | sales@Consep.com.au | www.Consep.com.au

CONSEP ACACIA SPECIFIC SAFETY

The operation of the Consep Acacia Dissolution Module

Only personnel trained in the safety procedures for the

Adequate ventilation of the Dissolution Module area is

It is recommended that a fixed HCN vapour monitor is

All motors must be electrically isolated or ‘locked out’ prior

Safety eyewear should be worn at all times in the vicinity of

Chemically resistant gloves for the appropriate medium

A safety helmet should be worn at all times in the vicinity of

TEN COMMANDMENTS OF SAFETY

WHAT IS THE CONSEP ACACIA DISSOLUTION

WHAT IS THE ELECTROWINNING MODULE?

Service Peak qty / flow Total qty / flow

Potable Water 108 𝑚3 /ℎ𝑟 1000 L

Raw Water 6.5 𝑚3 /ℎ𝑟 8000 L

Dissolution Power 480V, 60Hz, 51 Amps

Electrowinning/Detox/Barrens Power 480V, 60Hz, 41 Amps

NaCN solution (30%) 82 Litres

NaOH solution (1000 g/l) 7 Litres

Instrument Air 600-700kPag

Plant Air 600-700kPag

REMINDERS & CAUTIONS

Correct batching of reagents is essential. For details of the

Adequate precautions should be taken at all times while

o All wiring connections must be properly isolated

HEATERS (IF INSTALLED)

If automatic level control is used, interlocks to low level

CONCENTRATE TRANSFER TO MODULE

STRATIFICATION OF THE CONCENTRATE

DESLIMING OF THE CONCENTRATE

MIXING OF LEACH REAGENTS

It is ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL that the correct batching

The correct batching procedure is as follows:

LEACHING OF THE CONCENTRATE

PREGNANT SOLUTION RECOVERY

𝑣 = 𝑣𝑜𝑖𝑑 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝜌𝑠 = 𝑆𝑜𝑙𝑖𝑑𝑠 𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 (𝑆𝐺)

PREGNANT SOLUTION TO ELECTROWINNING

FLOW / TIME SETPOINTS

Flow Setpoint Units Typical Value

Stratification flow m3/hr 10.8

Desliming flow m3/hr 8.6

Leach flow m3/hr 8.0

Time Setpoint Units Typical Value

LEACH REAGENT AMOUNTS

Potable Water 0 900 litres

Caustic Solution 1000 g/l NaOH 7 litres

Cyanide Solution 30% NaCN 82 litres

Leachaid 100% 3-10kg per batch

Reagent Concentration (w/v)

Caustic (NaOH) 0.75%

Cyanide (NaCN) 2.00% 1% – 3%

Leachaid 0.5g per gram of gold 3-10kg per batch

Solids Mass A 1.45kg

𝑀𝑐 = (𝑀𝑛𝑒𝑡 − 𝑉𝑑 )⁄(1 − 1⁄𝜌𝑠 )

The SG of water is assumed to be 1.00

INCREASING LEACHING RATES

The system is designed for a maximum temperature of 70° C.

Leach solution containing Sodium Cyanide (NaCN) and

Lines to be broken, the Fluid Bed Body, and the Diffusion

Appropriate PPE should be worn at all times. Long sleeve

During washing of sediment solids there exists the